JP7860397B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine.

Slot machines have been known as a type of amusement machine for some time (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-016110

The problem that this invention aims to solve is to improve the performance of a gaming machine.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following means (the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses). The present invention corresponds to the initial invention 6 among the initial inventions 1 to 10 described later.
The present invention (eleventh embodiment) is,
Depending on the values stored in the predetermined storage means (RWM53, in particular the ratio data for addresses "F288h" to "F28Dh"), information regarding predetermined game history (ratios for six items, including the ratio of instructed prizes) can be displayed.
It comprises a dividend setting register, a divisor setting register, and a division result register (Figure 171),
The system is configured such that the division result is stored in the division result register by setting the dividend in the dividend setting register or the divisor in the divisor setting register.
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value is "100 (decimal)", the obtained value is corrected to "99 (decimal)" and made available for storage in the predetermined storage means (steps S950 to S953 in Figure 183).
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value exceeds "100 (decimal)" and is not "255 (decimal)", the obtained value is corrected to "99 (decimal)" and made available for storage in the predetermined storage means (steps S950 to S953 in Figure 183).
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value is "255 (decimal)", the obtained value is not stored in the predetermined storage means (in step S949 in Figure 183).
The system can display information related to a predetermined game history corresponding to a value stored in the predetermined storage means (step S960 in Figure 184, step S963 in Figure 185, and Figure 188).
It is characterized by the following:

According to this invention, the performance of the gaming machine can be improved.

This is a block diagram illustrating the control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment. This figure shows the pattern arrangement on the reel in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the display window and each reel and the active lines, and (B) is a diagram showing the designations of the pattern positions. This figure shows the combination of symbols and the number of payouts, etc. (1) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the combination of symbols and the number of payouts, etc. (2) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the combination of symbols and the number of payouts, etc. (3) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the combination of symbols and the number of payouts, etc. (4) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the combination of symbols and the number of payouts, etc. (5) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the combination of symbols and the number of payouts, etc. (6) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the combination of symbols and the number of payouts, etc. (7) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the combination of symbols and the number of payouts, etc. (8) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the RT transition in the first embodiment. This figure shows the table of non-RT placements (1) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the table of non-RT placements (2) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the number of RT1 units (1) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the number of RT1 units (2) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the position table (1) during RB operation in the first embodiment. This figure shows the number of positions (2) during RB operation in the first embodiment. This figure shows the special feature condition device and the small feature and replay condition device (1) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the minor role and replay condition device (2) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the minor role and replay condition device (3) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the minor role and replay condition device (4) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the minor role and replay condition device (5) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the minor role and replay condition device (6) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the minor role and replay condition device (7) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the minor role and replay condition device (8) in the first embodiment. This figure shows the performance group numbers in the first embodiment. This diagram illustrates the expected values for irregular button presses and standard button presses when the performance group number is "8" in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing the normal section lever processing, and (b) is a diagram showing the initial normal mode lottery. In the first embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of normal modes, and (b) is a diagram showing the number of normal mode draws in the first game of the advantageous section. In the first embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of normal modes, and (b) is a diagram showing the transition probabilities for each normal mode. This is a flowchart showing the simulated gameplay animation for the "Red 7" combination in the first embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the continuous performance during the advantageous period according to the first embodiment. This figure shows the changes in the difference counter and the stop counter in the first embodiment. This figure shows the relationship between the difference counter, the stop counter, and the power cut-off in the first embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the flow from power-on to main processing in the first embodiment. Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the error handling in step S513. This is a flowchart showing the process for calculating the complete function in step S525 of Figure 36. This figure shows an image that previews the operation of the complete function in the first embodiment. This diagram shows the interval that foreshadows the operation of the complete function in the first embodiment. This figure shows an example of displaying the complete function operation as an image across the entire screen in the first embodiment. This figure shows an image of the complete function in operation in the first embodiment. This figure shows the case in the first embodiment where the stop counter reaches "19000" during the special game state. This diagram shows the relationship between the complete function and power cut-off in the first embodiment. This diagram shows the relationship between the complete function and power cut-off in the first embodiment. This diagram shows the relationship between the complete function and power cut-off in the first embodiment. This diagram shows the relationship between the complete function and power cut-off in the first embodiment. This diagram shows the relationship between the complete function and power cut-off in the first embodiment. This diagram shows the relationship between the complete function and power cut-off in the first embodiment. This figure shows an example in the first embodiment where a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement in a game where the complete function is activated after a payout. This figure shows an example in the first embodiment where a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement in a game where the complete function is activated after a payout. This is a flowchart showing the sub-side power restoration process in the first embodiment. This diagram illustrates the configuration of the main CPU, ROM, and RWM in the second embodiment. This figure shows the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of the data stored in the RWM usage area in the second embodiment. This figure shows the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of the data stored outside the RWM usage area in the second embodiment. This figure, following Figure 34, shows the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored outside the RWM usage area in the second embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board in the second embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED in the second embodiment. This figure shows the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and P in the second embodiment. This figure shows the signals output from output ports 2 to 7 in the second embodiment. This figure shows the relationship between digits and segments in the second embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the second embodiment, (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and the signal output from the output port 6 in the second embodiment, and (C) is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the program start process (M_PRG_START) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the interrupt handling (I_INTR) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the power outage process (I_POWER_DOWN) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the RWM checksumset processing (S_SUM_SET) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the flashing request flag generation process (S_LED_FLASH) in the second embodiment. This figure shows the flashing/not applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the ratio display timer update process (S_RATE_TIME) in the second embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in the second embodiment. This flowchart shows the blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the second embodiment. This flowchart shows the irreversible error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in a modified example of the second embodiment. This figure shows the signals output from output ports 2 to 5 in a modified example of the second embodiment. This figure shows the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signals output from output ports 3 and 6 in a modified example of the second embodiment. This figure shows a one-chip microprocessor in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, Figure 82 shows a more detailed view of the memory map within the built-in ROM. In the third embodiment, Figure 82 shows a more detailed view of the memory map within the built-in RWM. In the third embodiment, the diagram illustrates the interrupt initialization address, where (A) shows the data details of the interrupt initialization address, and (B) shows the relationship between the interrupt priority and the interrupt priority setting value. In the third embodiment, the diagram illustrates the vector address value and the data value stored in the vector address, where (A) shows the vector address value, (B) shows the relationship between the interrupt factor and the automatically assigned value, and (C) shows an example of the data value of the vector address. This figure shows the process from when the power is turned on until the system switches to user mode, according to the third embodiment. This figure shows an example program in the third embodiment, which starts from "0000H" in the program area of the built-in ROM's usage area. This figure shows an example in the third embodiment where the vector address is "00F4H". In the third embodiment, the flowchart shows examples of processes called by the RST instruction, where (A), (B), and (C) represent Example 1, Example 2, and Example 3, respectively. This figure shows the program code area setting address and its data value in the third embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the types of roles, the probability of winning, the number of payouts for each order in which the stop switch is pressed, etc., and (b) is a diagram showing the payout performance of biased roles. This figure shows the sequence of events (Example 1) when the stop switch is operated in the recommended order during the advantageous period and while not in AT mode, according to the fourth embodiment. This figure shows the sequence of events (Example 1) that occur when the stop switch is operated in a non-recommended order during a favorable period and while not in AT mode, according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, this figure shows the sequence of events (Example 2) when the stop switch is operated in the recommended order during a favorable period and when not in AT mode. In the fourth embodiment, this figure shows the sequence of events (Example 2) when the stop switch is operated in a non-recommended order during a favorable period and when not in AT mode. This figure illustrates the transition of the (image) layers when a recommended image is displayed in the fourth embodiment. This figure follows Figure 97. In the fourth embodiment, the image display, the status of the push button lamp, and the menu display when a bet operation and start switch operation are performed after the demo display are shown in a time chart (when a replay is not awarded), where (a) shows the recommended button press sequence and (b) shows the non-recommended button press sequence. In the fourth embodiment, the image display, the status of the push button lamp, and the menu display are shown in the time chart when the start switch is operated 60 seconds after a replay win, where (a) shows the recommended button press sequence and (b) shows the non-recommended button press sequence. In the fourth embodiment, the image display, the status of the push button lamp, and the menu display are shown in the case where a bet operation is performed within 3 seconds after a complete stop and a start operation is performed 60 seconds after a complete stop, with (a) showing the recommended button press sequence and (b) showing the non-recommended button press sequence. This is a flowchart showing the main processing in the fourth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the button press sequence instruction number setting process in step S181 of Figure 102. This is a flowchart showing the process of setting the performance group number in step S182 of Figure 102. This figure shows the relationship between the winning role (biased role), the instruction monitor, and the image display in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the temporary storage process 1 is shown as a flowchart. This is a flowchart following Figure 106. This flowchart shows another example from Figure 107. This is a flowchart showing the temporary storage process 2 in the fourth embodiment. This is a flowchart following Figure 109. This is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine in the fifth embodiment. This is a block diagram illustrating the control of a slot machine in the fifth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram (1) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram (2) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram (3) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram (4) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment. This is a diagram (5) illustrating the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram (6) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram (7) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram (8) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram (9) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart (1) showing the operation patterns when an error is detected and cleared in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart (2) showing the operation patterns when an error is detected and cleared in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart (3) showing the operation patterns when an error is detected and cleared in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart (4) showing the operation patterns when an error is detected and cleared in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart (5) showing the operation patterns when an error is detected and cleared in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart (6) showing the operation patterns when an error is detected and cleared in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart (7) showing the operation patterns when an error is detected and cleared in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart (8) showing the operation patterns when an error is detected and cleared in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart (1) showing the operation when the power is turned off during door opening notification in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart (2) showing the operation when the power is turned off during door opening notification in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart (3) showing the operation when the power is turned off during door opening notification in the fifth embodiment. This is a time chart showing an example of error notification in the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart showing example 2 of error notification in the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart showing example 3 of error notification in the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart showing an example (Example 4) in which a power outage occurs during the occurrence of the first error in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, this is a time cheat showing an example (R5) where a power outage occurs during the occurrence of the first error, and is a modified example of Figure 136. This is a time chart showing example 6 of error notification in the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart showing example 7 of error notification in the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart showing an example 8 of error notification in the sixth embodiment. This is a time chart showing example 9 of error notification in the sixth embodiment. This is an external perspective view showing a slot machine in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, the diagram shows a door key and a door key cylinder, where (a) is a front view showing the door cylinder and (b) is a side view showing the door key inserted into the door key insertion slot. This is a front view showing the positional relationship between the door key insertion slot and the door key in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, (a) is a front view illustrating the various dimensions of the door key cylinder, and (b) is a plan view and a side view showing the dimensions of the power plug. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the locking device in the seventh embodiment, and is a front view seen from the inside of the front door toward the outside (player side). In the seventh embodiment, this figure shows the state after the cam has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in Figure 146. In the seventh embodiment, this figure shows the state after the cam has been rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in Figure 146. This is a front view showing a structure in which the door key is locked in the position after the front door has been opened, according to the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, the diagram shows a setting key and a setting key cylinder, where (a) is a side view showing the setting key inserted, and (b) is a side view showing the setting key rotated 90 degrees clockwise. This figure shows the relationship between the rotation angle of the door key and the setting key and the rotational torque corresponding to the rotation angle in the seventh embodiment. This figure shows the performance stage in the eighth embodiment. This figure shows the types of effects in the eighth embodiment. This figure shows the event names, number of cuts, and number of branches for the eighth embodiment of the production 01, production 03, and production 14. This figure shows the event names, number of cuts, and number of branches for the eighth embodiment of the production 15, production 16, and production 17. This figure shows the event names, number of cuts, and number of branches for the eighth embodiment of the production 18, production 20, production 21, and production 22. This figure shows the event names, number of cuts, and number of branches for the eighth embodiment of the production 23, production 24, and production 25. This is a block diagram showing a gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) in the ninth embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the counting-related processing in the ninth embodiment. This figure shows the changes in the number of icons in the pull-back zone in the tenth embodiment. This flowchart shows the draw-back lottery process for the draw-back zone in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, this is a flowchart showing the determination of the continuation of the advantageous period in step S705 of Figure 161. This flowchart shows the draw-back lottery process in the normal section in the tenth embodiment. This flowchart shows the pullback lottery process in the transition preparation state in the tenth embodiment. In the tenth embodiment, the flowchart shows the advantageous interval clear counter management process. This flowchart shows the flow of the display process for the demonstration image in the tenth embodiment. This is a flowchart following Figure 166. This is a flowchart showing the control process of the SP flag in the tenth embodiment. This flowchart shows the flow of the sub-bonus transition process in the tenth embodiment. This is a block diagram illustrating the configuration overview of a one-chip microprocessor in the 11th embodiment. Figure 170 shows a block diagram illustrating the arithmetic unit (APU). This figure shows the structure of a multiplication/division register in the 11th embodiment. This figure shows the process from when the power is turned on until the user mode is activated, according to the 11th embodiment. This figure shows the display specifications for the role ratio monitor in the 11th embodiment. This figure shows a data table provided in the second region of the ROM in the 11th embodiment. This figure shows the area outside the RWM usage area (second area) in the eleventh embodiment. This figure shows the area outside the RWM usage area (second area) in the eleventh embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the program start process in the 11th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the test pattern display settings in step S902 of Figure 178. This is a flowchart showing the main processing in the 11th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the ratio setting process in step S910 of Figure 180. This is a flowchart showing the ratio calculation process in step S921 of Figure 181. This is a flowchart showing a modified example of Figure 182. This is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing in the 11th embodiment. This flowchart shows the ratio display preparation performed by interrupt processing in the 11th embodiment. This is a flowchart showing the generation of the blinking request flag in step S961 of Figure 185. Figure 185 is a flowchart showing the ratio display timer update in step S962. Figure 185 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process in step S963. This figure shows the blink bit check count table in the 11th embodiment.

In this specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows:
"Bet" refers to placing a token (game currency) to play the game. To bet tokens, players either insert actual tokens into the token slot 47 or operate the bet switch 40 to bet tokens that have been credited (stored).
On the other hand, "credit" (also called "storage"), unlike the "bet" mentioned above, refers to the storage of tokens inside the slot machine 10. In this specification, "credit" is used in a sense that does not include "bet".
Furthermore, "investment" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Furthermore, "specified number" refers to the number of bets that can be placed to start (execute) a game in that particular game. For example, in a game where the specified number is "2" or "3", it is possible to start the game with either a bet of "2" or "3", but it is not possible to play with a bet of "1".
For the sake of explanation, the term "specified number" may sometimes be referred to as "number of bets."
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" can sometimes refer to a number other than the "specified number." For example, in a game with a specified number of bets of "2" or "3," the number of bets at the moment one token is inserted (before the game starts) is "1" (the number bet at that point).

"Maintenance" refers to the player inserting tokens into the token slot 47 (described later).
"Manual betting" refers to a player placing a bet by inserting tokens into the token slot 47.
"Manual credit" refers to the process by which a player adds credits (credits) to their medals by inserting them into the medal slot 47.

"Bet medals" refer to the medals that have been placed on the market.
"Saved medals" refers to medals that have been credited (saved).
"Storage bet" refers to a player betting some or all of their credited tokens, within the range of bets available in the game, by operating the bet switch 40 (described later) to play the game.
"Automatic betting" refers to the automatic betting of the same number of tokens that were bet in the previous game by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when a replay is achieved.
Here, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a minor win stops (meaning it has stopped on an active payline; the same applies hereafter), it is referred to as "winning a minor win."
On the other hand, the "Regulations Concerning the Certification and Type Approval of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as "the Regulations")" interprets that when a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay stops and is displayed, it is the activation of a conditional device related to replaying and not a "winning" event.
However, in this application (this specification, etc.), replays are also treated as one of the winning combinations (re-play winning combination), and the stopping display of a symbol combination corresponding to a replay may be referred to as "winning a replay."
"Settlement" refers to the disbursement of bet tokens and/or stored tokens to the player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

"Payout" refers to distributing medals to the player based on winning combinations, or distributing medals based on the above settlement. When distributing medals to the player based on winning combinations, it includes both storing them as credits (adding stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in RWM53 (described later)) and actually distributing medals from the payout slot (not shown). Medal distribution is controlled to credit up to a maximum of "50" medals, and any medals exceeding the "50" credit limit are actually distributed to the player.
Note that "disbursement" is sometimes referred to as "granting." Therefore, "number of disbursements" may also be referred to as "number of grants."

In this embodiment, the "game medium" is a medal, but in the case of, for example, an enclosed (ECO) game machine, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the game medium. "Electronic information" refers to, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a dispensing machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to that money, and some or all of that electronic information can be credited to the game machine as a game medium for playing games.
Note that "gaming media" is sometimes referred to as "gaming value."

Furthermore, when the game medium is electronic information, "medal payout" means crediting (adding) the amount to the game medium credit device installed in the game machine. Therefore, "medal payout" does not only mean actually dispensing medals from the hopper 35 (described later), but also includes the process of crediting (adding) the electronic information corresponding to the winning combination to the game medium credit device.

When a game progresses as "N-1" game, "N" game, "N+1" game, ... (where "N" is an integer greater than or equal to 2), if the current game is "N" game, the "N" game is referred to as the "current game." The "N-1" game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1" game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, numbers with "(B)" appended to the end (especially the 8th bit) represent binary numbers. Similarly, numbers with "(H)", "H", or "h" appended to the end represent hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, the number "16" in decimal is written as "00010000(B)" in binary and as "10(H)", "10H", or "10h" in hexadecimal. In addition, numbers that represent decimal numbers will be written as "16(D)" as needed.
However, when it is clear whether the number is binary, decimal, or hexadecimal, the suffix "(B)", "(D)", "(H)", "H", or "h" may be omitted, respectively.

Furthermore, the probability that the desired symbol to be displayed on the active line can be stopped on the active line during the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (maximum number of movement frames) is called the "pull-in rate (PB)".
Furthermore, if the stop switch 42 is not operated at the appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operating timing that allows the target symbol to be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of movement frames), the inability to stop the target symbol on the active line (to pull it into the active line) is referred to as "PB≠1".
In contrast, the condition where the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) on an active line, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the timing of the stop switch 42 operation), is referred to as "PB = 1".

Furthermore, the "operational mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, and/or the timing of the operation (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed in order for the target symbol to stop on the active line).
Furthermore, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to an operation mode in which, in a game where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 results in an advantage or disadvantage in the game outcome (the combination of symbols that stops on the active line), the stop mode is such that a combination of symbols that has a payout or a large payout is stopped, the stop mode is such that a combination of symbols that transitions to (upgrades to) an advantageous RT is stopped, or the stop mode is such that a combination of symbols that does not transition to (falls to) an unfavorable RT is stopped. The "advantageous operation mode" is also called the correct operation mode or the correct button press order.

"Games where the operation of the stop switch 42 results in an advantageous/disadvantageous outcome" refers, for example, to games where multiple types of small wins (bells) with different payout amounts are won simultaneously (so-called "ordered bell" wins), where the type of small win (bell) obtained differs (the payout amount differs) depending on the operation of the stop switch 42. It also applies to games where multiple types of replays are won (when multiple replays are won simultaneously; so-called "ordered replay" wins), where the RT (Replay Time) transitions depending on the type of replay won.

The "instruction function" refers to a function that instructs the player on how to operate the stop switch 42. In principle, the instruction function is a function that instructs the player on how to operate the stop switch 42 in a way that is advantageous to them.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that makes it easier to win an award.
Furthermore, "display" refers to making the content of the "instructions" visible, while "notification" refers to informing the player of the content of the instructions. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function."

Furthermore, notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be defined as "activation of the instruction function," but notification of any operation mode, including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, may also be defined as "activation of the instruction function."
For example, let's assume that in a case where there are six possible button presses for the button sequence bell, the payout when the button sequence bell is won will be 1, 3, 4, 10 coins, or a miss (no win), depending on the button press order.
In this context, informing the button press sequence for achieving the 10-coin payout constitutes notification of a favorable operating pattern for the stop switch 42, and therefore falls under the category of "activation of the instruction function."
On the other hand, notifying the sequence of button presses required to win a single-coin, three-coin, or four-coin combination may or may not be considered "notification of a favorable operating method (activation of the instruction function)."

The sequence of button presses required to win a 4-coin payout is not the sequence required to win a 10-coin payout, so it is not the most advantageous way to play. However, since the payout is 4 for a bet of 3, the net number of coins for that game is +1, so it is an operation that increases the net number of coins and is not necessarily an unfavorable way to play.
Similarly, the sequence of button presses to win a 3-coin combination is not the most advantageous because it does not result in a 10-coin combination. However, since the payout is 3 for a bet of 3, and the net number of coins remains the same (does not decrease), it is not necessarily an unfavorable sequence of operation.

Furthermore, the button sequence used to win a single-coin payout is not the most advantageous, as it also prevents the winning of a ten-coin payout. Additionally, a payout of 1 for a bet of 3 results in a reduced net payout. However, since this sequence avoids missing out on winning combinations, it may not be entirely disadvantageous.

In this embodiment, when the push-button sequence bell is won, the instruction function is activated to notify the operation pattern (correct push-button sequence) that will result in the winning combination with the highest payout.
However, for example, when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are approaching, when a push-order bell is won, it is conceivable to control the system so that the number of coins remaining is kept roughly the same by notifying the player of the push-order sequence to win, for example, a 3-coin or 4-coin combination, as described above.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the operation of the instruction function is limited to a single predetermined number. For example, suppose the predetermined number for activating the instruction function is set to "3". In this case, during AT (Automatic Trigger) gameplay with a predetermined number of "2" or "3", if the game is started with a bet of "3" and a push-order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. Conversely, if the game is started with a bet of "2", the instruction function cannot be activated even if a push-order bell is won.

A "game section" comprises a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section." While 5.9-generation machines included a "waiting section" (a game section where the player has won the advantageous section lottery but has not yet entered the advantageous section), current 6-generation machine regulations do not include a "waiting section" or similar. However, other game sections besides the normal section and advantageous section may also be included.
The "normal section" refers to a game section in which the transmission of signals related to the instruction function, specifically the push-order instruction number and the winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described later, to a peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80) is prohibited, and which does not affect the performance related to the instruction function in any way (no processing related to the instruction function is performed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation method cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery for winning combinations, it is possible to make a decision (by lottery, etc.) on whether or not to transition to the advantageous section.

In normal operation, the instruction function must not be activated. Therefore, it is not possible to display button press order instruction information on a predetermined display device (LED, etc.) electrically connected to the main control board 60. Furthermore, since signals related to the instruction function are not transmitted to peripheral boards, it is not possible to display (notify) advantageous operating patterns on the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" refers to a game section that has the capability to perform instruction functions (where the instruction functions may be activated). Specifically, when the instruction functions are activated, the main control board 60 displays push-order instruction information so that the instruction content (operation method of the stop switch 42) can be identified, and only then can it transmit signals related to the instruction functions to the sub-control board 80. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction functions can be performed (where the instruction functions may be activated), that is, a game section in which the operation method of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (or may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output any effects that contradict the instructions given by the main control board 60 or the signals related to the received instruction functions.

Furthermore, even in games where the outcome of the game is advantageous or disadvantageous depending on how the stop switch 42 is operated, the instruction function does not need to be activated during the advantageous period.
On the other hand, during the advantageous period, in games where the operation of the stop switch 42 results in an advantage or disadvantage, the instruction function may always be activated to display the operation of the stop switch 42.
AT (Notified Game State) is a game state in which the operation of the stop switch 42 is notified, in games where the operation of the stop switch 42 results in an advantage or disadvantage to the game outcome. Therefore, AT is always in an advantageous section, and AT is never executed in a non-advantageous section.

Furthermore, in games where the operation of the stop switch 42 can result in an advantage or disadvantage depending on the operation method of the stop switch 42, the AT may always (100%) notify the operation method of the stop switch 42. However, in order to keep the payout rate within the range stipulated by the regulations for a predetermined period, it is also conceivable that the operation method of the stop switch 42 may not be notified, even in games where the operation method of the stop switch 42 can result in an advantage or disadvantage depending on the operation method of the stop switch 42.
For example, if the AT is approaching its termination condition while in AT mode, it may be possible to temporarily notify the operation of the stop switch 42 (disable the instruction function) in order to extend the life of the AT.

Furthermore, the relationship between the advantageous period and the AT (Automatic Trigger) can be set in various ways. For example, one option is to set "advantageous period = AT." In this case, winning the advantageous period and winning the AT are equivalent. The AT begins from the first game of the advantageous period. The AT ends when the advantageous period ends.

Secondly, it can be set so that "AT ≠ advantageous period".
In this case, simply transitioning to a favorable section does not satisfy the conditions for starting (executing) the AT. Instead, whether or not to execute the AT is determined by lottery or other means, based on the condition that the player is in a favorable section. If it is decided to execute the AT, the AT will be executed until the predetermined termination conditions for that AT are met. If the player is not in an AT state when they transition to a favorable section, for example, the main game state may be set to a normal section, a pre-announcement state, a CZ (Chance Zone (a period in which it is easier to win the AT)), etc.

When transitioning to a pre-announcement phase after winning an AT, it is possible to always transition to a genuine pre-announcement phase, and then transition to the AT after the predetermined number of games in the genuine pre-announcement phase have ended. Alternatively, it is possible to determine whether it is a genuine pre-announcement phase or a false pre-announcement phase by lottery or other means, and if it is determined to be a genuine pre-announcement phase, the transition to the AT may occur after the genuine pre-announcement phase has ended. Furthermore, if it is determined to be a false pre-announcement phase, after the false pre-announcement phase has ended, the advantageous period may be maintained, or the transition to the normal period may occur.
Furthermore, if the AT termination conditions are met, both the AT and the advantageous period may be terminated. Alternatively, if the AT terminates but the advantageous period termination conditions are not met, the advantageous period may be continued (non-AT and advantageous period). The same applies when the AT starts simultaneously with the advantageous period.

Furthermore, the number of games to be played during the advantageous period is determined when the advantageous period begins, and no lotteries or other actions related to the advantageous period are performed during that period.
Furthermore, when the advantageous period begins, the initial number of games for the advantageous period is determined, and during the advantageous period, a decision (such as a lottery) is made as to whether or not to add (add) the remaining number of games for the advantageous period.
Furthermore, a predetermined termination condition may be set for the advantageous period, and when the predetermined termination condition for the advantageous period is met, the advantageous period will end at that point, even if there are remaining rounds of play in the advantageous period (or remaining rounds of play in the AT).

Here, the "predetermined termination conditions" for the advantageous period include, for example, the difference counter value (described later) exceeding "2400 (D)," or the advantageous period clear counter (remaining number of games in the advantageous period) reaching "0." When either of these conditions is met, it is determined that the termination conditions for the advantageous period have been met, and the game transitions to the normal period (non-advantageous period) from the next game. In this case, even if the final game was an AT (Automatic Trigger), the AT also ends simultaneously with the end of the advantageous period.

During the advantageous period, the advantageous period indicator LED (also called the "period indicator") 77 (see, for example, Figure 58 below; segment P of digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78)) may be lit to inform the player that they are in the advantageous period. However, the system is not limited to this, and it is also possible to notify the player that they are in the advantageous period without providing the advantageous period indicator LED 77, etc.
The advantageous period indicator LED 77 may be kept lit at all times during the advantageous period, or it may be lit after the transition to the advantageous period when predetermined lighting conditions are met.
Here, "predetermined lighting conditions" refer, for example, to the time when the instruction function is activated while the game is in a favorable period and the payout rate of the period Sim exceeds "1". Once the favorable period indicator LED 77 is lit, it will remain lit throughout the favorable period.

Furthermore, the "Section Sim (Simulation) Payout Rate" is the payout rate assuming that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination will always be displayed (even when a combination with "PB≠1" is won, the symbol combination corresponding to that combination will be displayed), and that if there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (in the case of a push-order bell win, the high-payout bell) will be displayed. The calculation of the Section Sim Payout Rate does not include payouts (number of balls) from the activation of special features (such as the activation of 1BB). Also, in a game in which a replay is won, if the bet is "3", the number of payouts is counted as "0", and in a subsequent game based on the replay win (the next game after the game in which the replay was won), the bet is calculated as "0" and the payout as "x"("x" is the number of payouts in that game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for the game in which a replay was won and the bet for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, "a game state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds '1'" refers to RT or main game states that are set so that the section Sim payout rate exceeds '1'.
Here, an example of an RT where the payout rate for each section exceeds "1" is an RT in which the probability of winning a replay is set to be high.
Furthermore, if we consider that the main gameplay states include normal, CZ (Chance Zone), AT, and re-entry sections, then AT is the main gameplay state in which the section Sim payout rate exceeds "1".

When the advantageous period indicator LED 77 is lit, the advantageous period indicator LED 77 is turned off when the advantageous period ends, more specifically, during the final game of the advantageous period, for example, during the game end check process described later, or during the game start set process for the next game after the final game of the advantageous period. When the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met, the advantageous period indicator LED flag initialization process described later is executed, causing the advantageous period indicator LED 77 to turn off in subsequent interrupt processing.

"Processing related to the advantageous period" includes, for example, the following processes:
1) Drawing for transition to the advantageous period 2) Updating the advantageous period clear counter (decrementing, clearing)
3) Updating the difference counter (calculation, clearing)
4) Update of the advantageous period type flag 5) Control of the advantageous period display LED 77 (update of the advantageous period display LED flag)

Furthermore, "processing related to instruction functions" includes, for example, the following processes:
1) Display of button press order instructions (operation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game count management type AT (where the AT ends when the remaining number of plays reaches "0"), the AT play count counter is updated (deducted, added, cleared)
4) In the case of a net difference management type AT (a specification in which the AT ends when the remaining net difference becomes "0"), the AT net difference counter is updated (subtracted, added, cleared).

Furthermore, under the current regulations, the processing related to the advantageous period and the processing related to the instruction function can both be executed with one specified number in one game state (RT), except as follows. Therefore, in this embodiment, the processing related to the advantageous period and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed with a specified number of "3", and the processing related to the advantageous period and the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed with a specified number of "2".
However, during the advantageous period, the advantageous period clear counter and the difference counter must be updated, regardless of the specified number.

Furthermore, it may be stipulated that when the winning combination lottery result is not a win, in other words, when the condition device is not activated, the process related to the advantageous period (advantageous period transition lottery) will not be executed. However, the process related to the advantageous period may be executed even if the winning combination lottery result is not a win.
On the other hand, even if the role lottery result is not a win, if the probability of not winning is above a predetermined value (not an extremely low probability; for example, "1/17500" or higher), the processing related to the instruction function (AT lottery processing) may be executed.

Furthermore, if the advantageous period transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous period) is executed and the player wins the advantageous period transition lottery, the advantageous period will begin from the next game. Therefore, in a game in which the advantageous period transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous period) is executed and the player wins the advantageous period transition lottery, it is not possible to execute the notification of the correct button press order (processing related to the instruction function).
However, it is permissible to perform both the advantageous section transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous section) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in a single game. Furthermore, for example, if a specific role lottery result is achieved, the player may be determined to be in the advantageous section and in AT mode (without performing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also called the "Ratio Monitor" or "Ratio Display") 74 consists of, for example, four LEDs (also called "Digits"), and is composed of a two-digit identification segment (an LED that displays which of the following six items it is using a predetermined symbol, etc.) and a two-digit ratio segment (an LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 displays the ratios of the following six items 1) to 6) repeatedly at predetermined intervals.
1) Either the advantageous period ratio (cumulative) (7U.) or the indicated bonus ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Consecutive bonus ratio (6000 games played) (6y.)
3) Ratio of special features (6000 games played) (7 years.)
4) Consecutive bonus round ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Cumulative ratio of special features (7A.)
6) Ratio of special features and other conditions (cumulative) (5H.)

For example, when displaying the cumulative payout ratio, if the ratio is "50%", the symbol "7A." indicating the cumulative payout ratio will be displayed on the identification segment, and "50" will be displayed on the ratio segment.
Here, "cumulative" refers to the sum of the numbers that have been counted up to that point, and the count continues until the total number of games played reaches at least the standard number of games played (for example, "17,500" or "175,000"). When the cumulative is less than the standard number of games played, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a flashing display, and when it is equal to or greater than the standard number of games played, the ratio is displayed, for example, by a steady display. Even after the cumulative has reached or exceeded the standard number of games played, the cumulative continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM53.
Furthermore, "6000 games" refers to the total number of games played, with each set consisting of 400 games, and 15 such sets being combined.

The "advantageous period ratio" refers to the proportion (percentage) of time spent in the advantageous period relative to the total number of game periods (non-advantageous period + advantageous period). Specifically, for example, if the total number of games played in the total game period is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous period during that time is "700", then the advantageous period ratio would be "70%".
Furthermore, the "Ratio of Payouts Including Instructions" is the sum of the payouts when a payout mechanism is activated and the payouts from games in which the instruction function is activated, divided by the total payouts. In slot machines that do not have payout mechanisms, the "Ratio of Payouts Including Instructions" is the sum of the payouts from games in which the instruction function is activated divided by the total payouts.
The sum of the payouts when the special feature is activated and the payouts from games where the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-equipped special feature counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated" is determined based on operating the stop switch 42 according to the button press sequence displayed by the activation of the instruction function. For example, if 10 bells are won, "10" is added to the instruction-included prize counter.
In contrast, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different order than the displayed order, and for example a single bell is awarded, then "1" is added to the instruction-included prize counter.
Similarly, in a game where the instruction function is activated, if the player misses a winning combination (i.e., does not win a combination) because they operated the stop switch 42 in a different order than the one displayed, the instruction-included combination counter will not be updated. In other words, the count value will remain the same as the previous game.

Furthermore, when a common bell is won during AT (Attack Time), the instruction function is activated in the same way as when a push-order bell is won. This results in either displaying push-order instruction information (dummy) on the winnings display LED 78, or the instruction function is not activated. If the instruction function is activated when a common bell is won, the payout for that game is added to the instruction-included payout counter.

On the other hand, if a common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the payout for that game will not be added to the instruction-included payout counter. However, it will be added to the total payout counter. This also includes cases where the sub-control board 80 notifies the correct button press sequence via image or sound.

"Continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when a Type 1 Special Bonus (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB activation to the total number of payouts."
For example, if the total payout over 6000 games is 2000 coins, and of those, 500 coins are paid out when the "Type 1 Special Bonus (RB)" is activated, then the "consecutive bonus ratio (6000 games)" will be 25%.

Furthermore, the "bonus payout ratio" refers to the ratio of payouts when a bonus payout is activated to the total payouts. Here, "bonus payout" includes the above-mentioned Type 1 Special Bonus Payout (RB), as well as Type 2 Special Bonus Payout (CB), MB (also called 2BB; a Type 2 Bonus continuous activation device; CB operates continuously), and SB (Single Bonus).
Furthermore, the "proportion of special features" refers to the ratio of the total number of games played, calculated by adding the number of games played when the special feature continuous activation device is activated and the number of games played when the special feature is activated but the continuous activation device is not activated.
Here, "when the continuous bonus feature device is activated" refers, firstly, to the activation of the Type 1 continuous bonus feature device (1BB), and corresponds to the time when the Type 1 special bonus feature (RB) is not activated (including during internal operation) and when the Type 1 special bonus feature (RB) is activated during the activation of the Type 1 continuous bonus feature device (1BB).
Furthermore, "when the continuous bonus feature device is activated" secondly refers to the activation of the Type 2 Continuous Bonus Feature Device (MB (2BB)), and corresponds to the non-activation and activation of the Type 2 Special Bonus Feature (CB) in the Type 2 Continuous Bonus Feature Device (MB (2BB)).
Furthermore, "when the continuous bonus feature is not activated" refers to the situation when the continuous bonus feature is not activated, and corresponds to the activation of the first type special bonus feature (RB), the normal bonus feature (SB), or the second type special bonus feature (CB).
Furthermore, for the six items listed above, if a gaming machine does not possess the function corresponding to that item, the ratio segment will light up with "--".
For example, if the "Type 1 Special Bonus (RB)" is not installed, there is no continuous bonus ratio, so when ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment lights up as "--".
As described above, the management information display LED 74 displays six types of ratios, but a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when certain conditions are met.

Furthermore, the rules stipulate that the ratio of advantageous periods and the ratio of bonus features including instructions should be 70% or less. It also states that the bonus feature ratio should be 70% or less, and the ratio of consecutive bonus features should be 60% or less. Additionally, the bonus feature status ratio should be 50% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not it falls within the limits of the regulations.

Furthermore, gaming machines with a specification that sets the advantageous period ratio to 70% or less are called "7U" type, and gaming machines with a specification that sets the instruction-included bonus ratio to 70% or less are called "7P" type. Gaming machines equipped with an advantageous period will be either "7U" type or "7P" type. In the case of "7U" type, the advantageous period ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of "7P" type, the instruction-included bonus ratio (cumulative) is displayed.
In the "7U" type, the ratio of the advantageous period to the total game period must be 70% or less, but in the "7P" type, the number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the special features must be 70% or less of the total payouts, and for example, the entire period of the game period, or almost the entire period, may be the advantageous period.

For example, when transitioning to a non-advantageous period, the settings could be configured to guarantee a 100% chance of winning the advantageous period lottery, to guarantee a nearly 100% chance (for example, around 98%) of winning the advantageous period lottery, or to guarantee a high probability (for example, 70%) of winning the advantageous period lottery.
The "7U" type cannot perform processing related to instruction functions (for example, AT lottery) by referring to the setting value itself, but the "7P" type can perform processing related to instruction functions by referring to the setting value itself.

Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 can also be used as a performance display monitor in pachinko gaming machines.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) consists of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, similar to the case of a slot machine (slot machine). It sequentially displays the real-time (currently being measured) base value for every 60,000 out balls (the "base value" indicates how many safe balls there are for every 100 out balls), and the base values from one, two, and three cycles prior for every 60,000 balls. For example, the identification segment for the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification segment for the base value from one cycle prior as "b1.", the identification segment for the base value from two cycles prior as "b2.", and the identification segment for the base value from three cycles prior as "b3.".
Thus, the management information display LED 74 is applicable not only to slot machines but also to pachinko machines.

"RT" means that the types (number) of roles to be drawn and their winning probabilities are in a specific drawing state, and "RT transition" means that by transitioning from one RT to another, the winning probability of at least one of the replays to be drawn changes.
Therefore, the types of replays and their winning probabilities in one RT (Replay Time) are values specific to that RT, and the types of replays and their winning probabilities will not be exactly the same in one RT and in another RT. However, it is acceptable for the combined winning probabilities of replays to be the same in one RT and in another RT.
Furthermore, "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but rather that it is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, when "RT" is used in this specification, it includes non-RT.

<First Embodiment>
The first embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and other documents.
Figure 1 is a block diagram illustrating the control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment.
A typical control board provided in the slot machine 10 is a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes an RWM 53, ROM 54, main CPU 55, etc. (This does not mean that it only includes the components shown in Figure 1).

In Figure 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progression, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection point to which signals from operation switches and the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection point to which signals are transmitted to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In Figure 1, input peripherals are indicated by arrows pointing from the peripheral to the main control board 50, and output peripherals are indicated by arrows pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

RWM53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game, etc.
ROM54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (such as data tables) necessary for the game to progress.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC with arithmetic functions) provided on the main control board 50, which executes programs and performs calculations necessary for the progress of the game. Specifically, it performs tasks such as drawing winning combinations, controlling the drive of the reels 31, and paying out winning combinations.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 is equipped with an MPU including an RWM 53, ROM 54, main CPU 55, and registers. Note that the RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally, in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.
Furthermore, the sub-control board 80, which will be described later, also includes an MPU containing an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85. Note that the RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be provided externally, in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.

In Figure 1, the medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are sent inside the medal selector.
As shown in Figure 1, the medal selector is equipped with a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and a coin insertion sensor 44 (a pair of coin insertion sensors 44a and 44b) (but is not limited to these), which are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The medals inserted through the medal slot 47 are first detected by the passage sensor 46.

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 45 is for permitting/denying medal insertion. When medal insertion is denied, it forms a medal passage that returns medals inserted from the medal slot 47 to the payout slot. Conversely, when medal insertion is permitted, it forms a medal passage that guides medals inserted from the medal slot 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 consists of, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening (an opening leading to the medal return slot) formed in a part of the medal passage within the medal selector to guide medals towards the hopper 35, and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 prohibits the insertion of tokens during gameplay (from the start of reel 31 rotation until all reels 31 stop, and until the end of payouts corresponding to winning combinations). In other words, the blocker 45 only permits token insertion when gameplay is not in progress.

Within the medal selector, downstream of the blocker 45, is an insertion sensor (optical sensor) 44. In this embodiment, the insertion sensor 44 consists of a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b, spaced at a predetermined distance apart. The system is configured such that a medal is detected by one insertion sensor 44a, and then detected by the other insertion sensor 44b after a predetermined time has elapsed. Based on the timing of the on/off states of the pair of insertion sensors 44, it is determined whether the correct medal has been inserted.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the following operating switches for the player: a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, (left, center, right) stop switches 42, and a payout switch 43.
Here, "operation switch" (or simply "switch") refers to a device (including electrical circuits and/or electrical components) that switches an electrical signal on or off based on the operation of an operating body by a player (operator) (receiving external force), and does not limit the shape of the operating body operated by the player.

When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light-emitting element continues to enter the light-receiving element (when the light-receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the off state). Then, when the operation switch (operating body) is operated by a player or other user, light from the light-emitting element stops entering the light-receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has been turned on is transmitted to the main control board 50. Alternatively, the system may be configured such that, when the operation switch is in the off state, light from the light-emitting element does not enter the light-receiving element, and the system turns on when light from the light-emitting element enters the light-receiving element.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is lever-shaped (and therefore also referred to as the "start lever (switch) 41"), while the operating bodies of the bet switch 40, stop switch 42, and settlement switch 43 are push-button shaped (and therefore also referred to as the "bet button (switch) 40," "stop button (switch) 42," and "settlement button (switch) 43").

Furthermore, although not shown in Figure 1, LEDs (light-emitting means) are provided on and/or around or near the operating body of the control switch. When the control switch is in an authorized state, for example, the corresponding LED emits blue light, and when the control switch is in an unauthorized state, for example, the LED of the control switch emits red light, thereby indicating the authorized/unauthorized state of the control switch to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all reels 31 are rotating and the stop switches 42 are ready to be operated, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 illuminate blue to indicate to the player that they are operational. When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 is stopped. The remaining stop switches 42 become operational only after the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the stopped reel 31 has ended and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 has turned off. Therefore, during this time, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 illuminate red. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 has ended and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 has turned off, the LEDs of the already operated stop switches 42 remain red, while the LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not yet been operated illuminate blue.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting stored tokens for the current game. In this embodiment, it includes a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one token and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three tokens (maximum number, specified number).
In addition, a bet switch for two-bet configurations may also be provided.

The prescribed number of tokens may be predetermined depending on whether the special feature is activated or not. For example, the number of tokens may be set to 3 when the special feature is not activated, when SB is activated, or when 1BB is activated, and 2 when 2BB is activated. Two tokens can be inserted by operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, and three tokens can be inserted by operating it three times. Also, when the prescribed number is 3 tokens, three tokens can be inserted at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b, and when the prescribed number is 2 tokens, two tokens can be inserted at once by operating the 3-bet switch 40b. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when a number less than the prescribed number has already been bet, the bet will be processed so that the number of tokens bet becomes 3.
Furthermore, the prescribed number may be uniformly set to, for example, "3 coins" (regardless of the game state, etc.). In the example of the first embodiment below, the prescribed number is always set to "3 coins".

Furthermore, the start switch 41 is an operation switch that is operated by the player when starting all of the reels 31 (left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, there are three stop switches 42, one for each of the three reels 31 (left, middle, and right), and these are operation switches that the player operates when stopping the corresponding reel 31.
Furthermore, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when they want to receive (pay out) the tokens that have been bet and/or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 1, the display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In reality, an intermediate board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the intermediate board, and the intermediate board and the display board 75 are connected, but the intermediate board is not shown in Figure 1. Thus, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by harnesses or the like; they may also be connected via other separate boards (such as relay boards). For example, one or more other separate boards (such as relay boards) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with an LED 76 for displaying the number of credits and an LED 78 for displaying the number of credits won.
The credit count display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credits) inside the slot machine 10, and consists of two digits: a higher digit and a lower digit.

Furthermore, the winnings display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout amount (the number of wins the player receives) when a winning combination is achieved, and like the credits display LED 76, it consists of two digits: a higher digit and a lower digit.
Furthermore, the LED 78 displaying the number of medals won may be controlled to turn off when there are no medals to be dispensed. Alternatively, the higher digits may be turned off, and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

Additionally, the acquisition count display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition count, but when an error occurs, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 also functions as an LED that displays button-pressing order information (indicating a favorable button-pressing order) in games that notify the button-pressing order during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in this embodiment is an LED that displays the acquired number, error details, and button-pressing order information. However, it is not limited to this, and a dedicated LED or the like for displaying button-pressing order information may also be provided.
Furthermore, during AT mode, notification of advantageous button press sequences is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In Figure 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the motor (stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 of the graphic display device.
The pattern display device includes three reels (in this embodiment) for displaying patterns, a motor 32 for driving each of the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reels 31.

The motor 32 is a driving means for rotating the reels 31, and is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31 and controlled by the reel control means 65, which will be described later.
Here, the reel 31 consists of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31. The stop switch 42 operated to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, the stop switch 42 operated to stop the middle reel 31 is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.
The left reel 31 may be referred to as the first reel 31, the middle reel 31 as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 as the third reel 31.

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape printed with multiple types of patterns (patterns that constitute combinations of patterns corresponding to winning combinations) is attached to its outer surface.
Each reel 31 is also provided with one (or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the circumferential surface of the reel 31 and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position or has completed one rotation. Each index is detected by a reel sensor 33. The signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When an index detects (disconnects) the reel sensor 33, its input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Furthermore, the ROM 54 pre-stores the symbol on the reference position at the moment the reel sensor 33 detects the index on the reel 31. This allows the system to detect the symbol on the reference position at the moment the index is detected. Moreover, from the moment the reel sensor 33 detects the index on the reel 31, it becomes possible to determine how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 needs to be driven to stop the symbol on the active line, counting from the symbol on the reference position.

Furthermore, the medal dispensing device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal dispensing device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that drives the dispenser to release medals from the hopper 35, and a dispensing sensor 37 for detecting medals dispensed from the hopper motor 36.

The medals that are sorted and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal slot 47 are designed to be stored in the hopper 35.
In this embodiment, the dispensing sensor (optical sensor) 37 consists of a pair of dispensing sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance apart. When a medal is dispensed, a predetermined moving member moves due to the medal. The movement of the predetermined moving member turns the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b on and off. Based on whether the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b have been turned on and off within a predetermined time range, it is determined whether the medal has been dispensed correctly.

For example, if the hopper motor 36 is running but the pair of dispensing sensors 37 do not detect that the machine is on, it is determined that no medals have been dispensed, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, if at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an ON signal, it is detected that a coin jam has occurred.

When a player starts a game, they either insert pre-credited tokens by operating the bet switch 40 (storage bet), or manually insert tokens through the token slot 47 (manual bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the prescribed number of tokens for the game bet, the resulting signal is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, described later) performs a draw using the role draw means 61 and controls all motors 32 to rotate all reels 31. As the reels 31 rotate by the motors 32, the symbols on the reels 31 move vertically within the display window at a predetermined speed.

The player then presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, stopping the reel 31 associated with that motor 32 in accordance with the lottery result of the prize lottery means 61 (the result determined by the internal lottery means).

The game results are then displayed based on the symbol combinations at the stopping of all 31 reels. Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on an active payline (i.e., a win for that combination occurs), the corresponding medals are paid out.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in Figure 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is equipped with the following role selection means 61, etc. The following means in this embodiment are illustrative and are not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 conducts a lottery (determination, selection) of winning numbers. For this reason, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as the "winning number lottery (determination, selection) means." Here, the "lottery of winning numbers by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the Regulations of the Entertainment Business Act (Regulations concerning the certification and type approval of gaming machines, etc.; hereinafter simply referred to as the "Regulations"), and the lottery result by the role lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the Regulations. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as the "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the Regulations.
The role lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generation means for the lottery (such as a hardware random number generator), a random number extraction means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and a winning number determination means for determining the winning numbers based on the random numbers extracted by the random number extraction means.

The random number generation means generates random numbers within a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random numbers are generated by a counter that, for example, counts one count in 200 nanoseconds, and the counting continues within the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle. This counting continues as long as the slot machine 10 is powered on.

The random number extraction means extracts a random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the player operates (turns on) the start switch 41. The determination means compares the random number extracted by the random number extraction means with the lottery table described later to determine the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number belongs.

Once the winning number is determined by the role lottery means 61, the condition device number (winning and replay condition device number, and special feature condition device number) is determined based on that winning number, and the winning and replay condition devices and special feature condition devices that can be activated in that game are determined. For this reason, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as the condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, the winning role determination (lottery or selection) means, etc.
The "Special Feature Condition Device Number" is the condition device number corresponding to a special feature (special feature).
Furthermore, the "winning and replay condition device number" is the condition device number corresponding to a minor win or a replay.

The winning flag control means 62 controls the on/off state of the winning flags corresponding to each role based on the lottery results from the role lottery means 61. In this embodiment, each role has its own winning flag. When any role is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag for that role is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that there are two types of winning roles: one where there is only one winning role (single win) and multiple where there are multiple winning roles (duplicate wins).

The button-pressing instruction number selection means 63 selects (determines) the button-pressing instruction number (the number corresponding to the correct button-pressing order) based on the result of the winning number lottery by the role lottery means 61 (when a button-pressing bell or button-pressing replay is won).
The "press order" in the selected press order instruction numbers here refers to the press order that is advantageous to the player (the correct press order). For example, when a press order bell is won, it refers to the press order that results in a high-scoring bell (the correct press order). Also, when a replay is won simultaneously, it refers to the press order that upgrades to an advantageous RT (Replay Time) or prevents dropping to an unfavorable RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique button-pressing instruction number.
Then, when a push-order bell or push-order replay is won during AT, the main control board 50 displays push-order instruction information corresponding to the push-order instruction number, specifically information such as "=*"("*" = 1, 2, ...) on the aforementioned acquired number display LED 78. This function of displaying push-order instruction information when a condition device with a favorable push-order is activated is also called an instruction function.
Furthermore, if a push-order bell or push-order replay is won during AT, the main control board 50 sends a command corresponding to the push-order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined).
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it displays the correct button press sequence as an image on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 can only transmit the selected button press sequence instruction number to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous period (AT). Therefore, even if a button press sequence instruction number is selected by the button press sequence instruction number selection means 63 during the normal period, that instruction number will not be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Note that selecting a button press sequence instruction number is not required during the normal period.

The performance group number selection means 64 selects a performance group number corresponding to the winning number, which is to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Here, a performance group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the performance group number selection means 64 selects the performance group number corresponding to the winning number for that game, and the main control board 50 transmits the selected performance group number to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs a performance related to the winning role based on the received performance group number. Unlike the push order instruction number mentioned above, the performance group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number for the game to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number for the game. However, the sub-control board 80 receives the performance group number for each game, and can output performances based on the received performance group number. However, even when a push-order bell or push-order replay is won, the correct button press order cannot be determined from the performance group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct button press order based on the performance group number. In contrast, during AT (Automatic Trigger), when a push-order bell or push-order replay is won, the main control board 50 transmits a button press instruction number to the sub-control board 80. This allows the sub-control board 80 to notify the correct button press order based on the received button press instruction number.

When the reel control means 65 receives a command to start the rotation of the reels 31, and in this embodiment in particular when it detects the operation of the start switch 41, it controls the rotation of all (three) reels 31 to begin.
Furthermore, after the winning numbers are determined by the role lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off status of the winning flag in the current game, selects a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off status of the winning flag, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, determines the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 based on the timing at which the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and controls the motor 32 to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game where at least one winning flag is set to ON, the reel control means 65 controls the reel 31 to stop within the range of reel 31's stop control so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role (the role for which the winning flag is ON) can be stopped on an active line, while controlling the reel 31 to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to roles other than the winning role (the role for which the winning flag is OFF) cannot be stopped on an active line.

Here, "within the range of the reel 31 stop control" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the range of rotations (number of moving symbols) of the reel 31.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed of approximately 80 revolutions per minute.
Furthermore, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 that is in MB operation (for example, the middle reel 31). As a result, in this embodiment, except for a predetermined reel 31 that is in MB operation, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 symbols.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to within 75 ms. This ensures that for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

Then, at the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the stopping control range of the reel 31 is a symbol that should be stopped on a predetermined active line, the stop switch 42 is controlled to stop that symbol on the predetermined active line when the stop switch 42 is operated.
In other words, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, and the symbols corresponding to the winning numbers do not stop on a predetermined valid line, the reels 31 are rotated and moved within the range of the stop control of the reels 31 until they are stopped, thereby controlling them to stop on the predetermined valid lines as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if stopping the reels 31 immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated would cause a combination of symbols that does not correspond to the winning number to stop on an active line, then when the reels 31 stop, the reels 31 are controlled to rotate within the range of the reel 31's stop control to prevent combinations of symbols that do not correspond to the winning number from stopping on an active line (kick-stop control).
Furthermore, in games where multiple winning combinations are achieved (for example, when a specific combination of symbols is triggered), the priority order for which winning combinations are awarded is predetermined according to the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed and the timing of their operation. Based on this predetermined priority order, the system controls the retraction and stopping of the symbols related to the highest priority winning combination.

The prize determination means 66 determines, when the reel 31 stops, whether the combination of symbols on the reel 31 that stopped on the active line corresponds to any of the winning combinations.
Here, the prize determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination has stopped on an active line. Specifically, it determines in advance which combinations of symbols will stop on an active line before the reels 31 actually stop, or which combinations of symbols will stop on an active line after the reels 31 have stopped, based on the condition device activated during the game and the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the timing of operation of the stop switch 42.

The control command transmission means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects to be output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80.
Examples of control commands include information about when the bet switch 40 is operated, information about when the start switch 41 is operated, the push order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number with the correct push order is won), the performance group number, RT (game state) information, information about when the stop switch 42 is operated, and information about the winning combination.

The main control board 50 is equipped with a set value display LED 73.
The "setting value" relates to the player's advantage, and in this embodiment, although not shown in the diagram, there are six levels from setting 1 to setting 6. The higher the setting value, the greater the player's advantage.
Furthermore, if the setting key switch (corresponding to the setting key switch 152 in Figure 112 (Fifth Embodiment) described later) is turned on while the power is off, and the power is turned on in this state, the system will transition to a setting change state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed. At this time, an initialization process (RWM clear process) is executed to initialize a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, when the power is on, pressing the setting key switch will switch the device to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) where the setting value cannot be changed, but the setting value can be viewed.

In Figure 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during gameplay and while waiting for gameplay to begin.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) transmits information (control commands) necessary for outputting the performance to the sub-control board 80 in one direction via parallel communication.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected; they may also be connected using optical communication means. Moreover, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication; they may also be serial communication, and serial and parallel communication may be used in combination.

The sub-control board 80, like the main control board 50, is equipped with an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85, etc.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the following peripheral devices for performance, such as the performance lamps 21 shown in Figure 1, via the input port 81 or output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for performance are not limited to these.
RWM83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data and other information captured by the sub-CPU85 when controlling the performance.
Furthermore, ROM84 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data related to the game's presentation, such as those used when conducting lotteries for the presentation.

The performance lamps 21 consist of, for example, LEDs, and light up in predetermined patterns when predetermined conditions are met. The performance lamps 21 include backlights positioned on the inner circumference of each reel 31 to illuminate the symbols displayed on the reels 31 (three consecutive symbols visible vertically through the display window), fluorescent lights that illuminate the symbols on the reels 31 from above, and frame lamps positioned on the front of the slot machine 10's front door that flash when a winning combination is achieved.

Furthermore, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when certain conditions are met, in order to perform various effects during gameplay.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 consists of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various performance images (correct button press order, performances corresponding to the conditional device that operates during the game, etc.) and game information (number of plays and number of coins acquired when a special feature is activated or during the advantageous period (AT), etc.).

Figure 2 shows the arrangement of patterns on the reel 31 in the first embodiment. As shown in Figure 2, in the first embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to "4".
Therefore, if four predetermined symbols are arranged on a single reel 31 with a spacing of five symbols between them, the predetermined symbols can always be stopped and displayed on the active line regardless of when the stop switch 42 is operated. Specifically, for example, on the left reel 31, "Replay" symbols are arranged at positions 17, 12, 7, and 2. Therefore, four "Replay" symbols are arranged with a spacing of five symbols between them on the left reel 31. For this reason, on the left reel 31, regardless of when the left stop switch 42 is operated, "Replay" symbols can always be stopped on the active line. This type of symbol arrangement is sometimes referred to as the "PB=1" arrangement. On the other hand, when the symbol arrangement is not like this, it is sometimes referred to as the "PB≠1" arrangement.

Furthermore, on the left reel 31, "Replay,""Watermelon," and "Bell A" are each arranged in a "PB=1" configuration.
Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Replay,""BellA," and "Bell B" are each arranged in a "PB=1" configuration.
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay,""Watermelon," and "Bell A" are each arranged in a "PB=1" configuration.
Furthermore, for example, on the left reel 31, the "Blank B" and "Cherry" symbols are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration when combined. Therefore, regardless of when the left stop switch 42 is operated, either the "Blank B" or the "Cherry" can be stopped and displayed on the active line. In this way, there are locations where the "PB=1" symbol is arranged when combined with the other two symbols.
Furthermore, for example, on the left reel 31, the "white BAR,""red7,""blackBAR," and "blank A" are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration when combined. Therefore, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, it is possible to stop any of the "white BAR,""red7,""blackBAR," or "blank A" on an active line. In this way, there is a location where the combination of the four symbols results in a "PB=1" configuration.

Figure 3(A) shows the positional relationship between the display window 18 and each reel 31, and the active lines (display lines that show the combination of symbols).
It is possible.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the active line is one line in the middle horizontal direction. Each reel 31 is arranged so that three consecutive symbols are visible vertically from the display window 18. Thus, a total of nine symbols (frames) are visible from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10.
In the first embodiment, the positions of the symbols visible from the display window 18 when the reels are stopped are referred to as "upper row,""middlerow," and "lower row" from top to bottom, and for the left reel 31, they are referred to as "upper left row,""middle left row," and "lower left row," respectively.

Figures 4 to 11 show the types of roles (roles corresponding to the winning numbers drawn by the role drawing means 61, etc.), symbol combinations, payout amounts, etc., in the first embodiment.
As shown in Figure 4, the game states in the first embodiment include when the special feature is not activated (non-special game state) and when the RB is activated (special feature activated, special game state), and the prescribed number (number of bets) for these game states is set to "3".
As shown in Figure 4, the only special feature (feature) is the 1BB (Type 1 feature continuous operation device; Type 1 Big Bonus) with feature number "001".
When a 1BB is won, the win is carried over to the next game until a 1BB is won. The state in which the 1BB win is not carried over is called "non-internal," and the state in which the 1BB win is carried over is called "internal." Furthermore, a game in which a 1BB is won is called "non-internal." In other words, when we say "internal," it refers to the state in which a 1BB was won before the previous game. The timing of the transition to internal can be set as appropriate. For example, in a game in which a 1BB is won, the transition to 1BB internal may occur after all reels 31 have stopped, or the transition to 1BB internal may not occur in the game in which a 1BB is won, but may occur in the next game.
If you win a 1BB in a non-special game state (when the special features are not activated) and the 1BB is awarded, there will be no payout of medals in this game, but from the next game onwards, you will transition to a 1BB game (special game state), and during the 1BB game, the RB will operate continuously (special features activated) until the conditions for ending the 1BB game are met.
In this first embodiment, it is not assumed that 1BB will be awarded, and the game is played while 1BB remains inside.
Unlike 1BB, where the win carries over to the next game, replays and minor wins are only valid for the current game and do not carry over to the next game.

In addition to the 1BB mentioned above, another special feature is MB (Second Type Continuous Activation Device; Second Type Big Bonus).
If you win an MB (Mystery Bonus) and the corresponding symbol combination stops on an active line (an MB is won), there will be no payout of medals in this game, but the MB game will start from the next game. During the MB game, the CB (Second Type Special Bonus) game will be executed continuously.
In CB gameplay, regardless of the result of the draw by the role draw means 61, all minor roles are awarded simultaneously, and for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31), the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is within 75ms (maximum number of movement frames is 1). CB gameplay ends after one game. If the number of medals paid out during MB gameplay exceeds a predetermined number, MB gameplay ends, and the game state returns to the state before transitioning to MB gameplay from the next game.

As shown in Figures 4 to 7, the types of replays in the first embodiment include replays 01 to 22. Regardless of which replay-corresponding symbol combination is displayed when the replay stops, the game resumes.
Furthermore, the symbol combination for replay 04 with role number "008" is a "Red 7" combination. As will be explained in detail later, when a predetermined condition device is activated and the winning role includes replay 04, operating the stop switch 42 in a predetermined order will allow the "Red 7" combination to be displayed, and it will be possible to proceed to the sub-bonus (also called "sub-bonus game," which is the same as "AT." Details will be explained later).

As shown in Figures 7 to 11, the types of minor roles in the first embodiment include minor roles 01 to 87.
Small wins 01 to 08 are small wins that pay out 14 coins, and can be won by operating the stop switch 42 in the order in which the 14-coin win is possible when a predetermined condition device (the winning condition A device or winning condition B device described later) is activated, which determines the game result depending on the order in which the buttons are pressed. (The stop switch 42 is also called the "advantageous button press order" or "correct button press order").
Furthermore, minor roles 09 to 13 are minor roles that pay out 3 coins, and when a specific condition device (the winning condition device C, winning condition device D, or winning condition device described later) is activated, the 3-coin role can be won by operating the stop switch 42 in a sequence of buttons that allows for winning (as described above, also called the "advantageous button sequence" or "correct button sequence").
Additionally, minor roles 14 through 69 (single-coin roles) are roles that can be won when the stop switch 42 is operated in an unfavorable order of pressing buttons, while the condition device that determines the game result depending on the order of pressing the buttons is activated.

Figure 12 shows the RT transition in the first embodiment. First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to non-RT. "RWM initialization" here refers to the process performed, for example, when power is turned on with a setting change, and represents the initialization of the entire range of the RWM 53, including information that 1BB has been selected and the initialization of the RT state. When the RT state data is initialized, it becomes "0", and when the RT state data is "0", it corresponds to non-RT.
Non-RT mode is during a non-internal 1BB (Big Bonus) round and continues until a 1BB is won. As will be explained later, the probability of winning a 1BB in non-RT mode is "7564/65536 (approximately 11%)".

If a game in which a 1BB is won does not display a symbol combination corresponding to 1BB, the next game will be RT1 (1BB internally). In this embodiment, once RT1 (1BB internally) is active, there are no games in which a minor role or replay is not won. Therefore, 1BB cannot be won in RT1. Thus, 1BB can only be won in games in which 1BB is won in a non-RT state. Furthermore, in this embodiment, games in which 1BB is won include cases where 1BB is won alone and cases where 1BB and a minor role (winning E) are won simultaneously. In games in which 1BB and a minor role (winning E) are won simultaneously, the symbols related to the minor role (winning E) are displayed preferentially, so 1BB cannot be won in those games.
Therefore, the only way to win a 1BB is in a game where a 1BB is won independently in a non-RT (Replay Time) state (as described later, the probability of this is "4/65536"). Thus, such cases rarely occur.
On the other hand, in a game where a 1BB is won, if the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB stops and is displayed, the game enters a 1BB activation state (RB activation state) (special game state) and continues until the conditions for ending the 1BB activation are met (for example, until 100 coins are paid out). Once the conditions for ending the 1BB activation are met, the game returns to a non-RT state.

Figures 13 to 18 show the number of winning numbers (winning probability) for each winning number in the first embodiment. Figures 13 and 14 show the number of winning numbers for non-RT, Figures 15 and 16 show the number of winning numbers for RT1, and Figures 17 and 18 show the number of winning numbers when RB is operating.
Dividing the values in each placement table by "65536" gives the probability of winning. For example, in Figure 13, the placement number for the winning number "1" (Replay A) is "8943" for all settings, so its probability of winning is "8943/65536" (approximately "1/7.3").
Furthermore, the "setting value," as in the first embodiment, relates to the degree of advantage for the player and has six levels, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6."
Thus, the number of units to be placed is determined for each RT (game state) and each setting value.

Furthermore, in each number table, "advantageous section" indicates whether or not a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous section is held. "○" means that when the winning number is selected, the advantageous section lottery is held, and "?" means that when the winning number is selected, the advantageous section lottery is not held. "－" means that the number is not subject to the lottery (the number is "0") and therefore is not subject to the advantageous section lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, when the advantageous section transition lottery is held, it is set so that there is a "1/1" probability of winning an advantageous section.
For example, if the game is in the normal section and the winning number "1" (Replay A) in Figure 13 is selected, the player will definitely win a transition to the advantageous section in that game, and the advantageous section will begin from the next game.
Furthermore, the lottery for transitioning to a favorable period is not performed while the player is in a favorable period.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 13 and 15, in both non-RT and RT1 modes, if the winning number "2" (Replay B) is selected, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, and therefore the player does not transition to the advantageous section. Consequently, if the winning number "2" is selected in the normal section, the next game will also be in the normal section.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 16, in RT1, if the winning numbers are "60" to "71" (winning numbers E1 to 12), the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, and therefore the player does not transition to the advantageous section. Consequently, similar to winning number "2", if the winning numbers are "60" to "71" in the normal section, the next game will also be in the normal section.
Alternatively, instead of conducting a lottery to determine when a player will transition to the advantageous period, the system may pre-determine the winning numbers that will transition to the advantageous period, and when a player wins one of these numbers, the system may transition to the advantageous period from the next game onward. For example, when a player wins one of the winning numbers marked with a "○" in the advantageous period column of the number tables shown in Figures 13 to 16, the system may transition to the advantageous period from the next game onward without conducting a lottery to determine when a player will transition to the advantageous period.

As shown in Figures 13 and 14, the winning numbers for 1BB in non-RT (non-internal) include the winning number "0" which is a standalone win, and the winning numbers "60" to "71" which are duplicate wins with prize E.
In contrast, in RT1 (internal), there is no chance of winning 1BB. Therefore, in RT1, there is no chance of winning the winning number "0". Also, in RT1, winning numbers "60" to "71" are single wins for prize E.
In this embodiment, the state of not being in RT mode is, as shown in Figure 12, after RWM initialization, that is, after power-on with a setting change. And, assuming that 1BB is not awarded in a game in which 1BB is won, the state remains in RT1 (internal) after 1BB is won.
On the other hand, as will be explained in more detail later, the advantageous period ends when the difference from the start of the advantageous period (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets inserted from the number of bets paid out) exceeds "2400", and the next game after the game in which the difference exceeds "2400" becomes the normal period. However, even when transitioning to the normal period, the 1BB win is carried over, so it remains at RT1.
Therefore, in this embodiment, after RWM initialization (after setting change), it is a non-RT and normal section, but if 1BB is won, it becomes RT1, and if a winning number that transitions to the advantageous section is won, the game will transition to the advantageous section from the next game.
Then, after entering RT1 and the advantageous period, if the difference exceeds "2400", the next game will be RT1 and the normal period. If you win a winning number that transitions to the advantageous period while in RT1 and the normal period, the next game will be RT1 and the advantageous period.

Figures 19 to 26 show the condition device number, condition device, and winning combination, etc.
First, in the role lottery means 61, a winning number is drawn according to the winning probability corresponding to the number table described above, depending on the game state. For example, if the winning number "0" (1BB) is drawn in a non-RT state, the game becomes one in which the 1BB condition device with role condition device number "1" can be activated. Then, in a game in which the 1BB condition device can be activated, the winning role included in the 1BB condition device, that is, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB, can be stopped on the active line.
Furthermore, for example, if the winning number "1" (Replay A) is won in a non-RT (Replay Time) state, the game becomes one in which the Replay A condition device can be activated among the small win and replay condition devices. In a game in which the Replay A condition device is activated, one of the winning combinations included in the Replay A condition device, specifically Replay 01, 03-05, or any one of these symbol combinations can be stopped on an active line.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the Replay B condition device is activated during gameplay, operating the stop switch 42 in reverse order (press order 321 (right, middle, left)) allows the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 04 ("Red 7" alignment) to be stopped, while operating the stop switch 42 in any other order allows the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 to be stopped.
Furthermore, during gameplay when the Replay A, Replay C to Replay G condition device is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 01 can be stopped regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.
For example, the symbol combination for Replay 01 is "Blank B" - "Blank B" - "Replay" for role number "001" in Figure 4, but the "Blank B" on the left and middle reels 31 are arranged in "PB=1", and the "Replay" on the right reel 31 is also arranged in "PB=1". Therefore, when playing with the Replay A to Replay G condition device activated, Replay 01 can be displayed as a stop regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is operated.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations for Replay 01 to 05, which are winning combinations included in the Replay B condition device, are as follows:
Replay 01: "Blank B" - "Blank B" - "Replay"
Replay 02: "Bell A" - "Replay" - "Bell A"
Replay 03: "White BAR" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 03: "Red 7" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 03: "Black BAR" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 03: "Blank A" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 04: "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
Replay 05: "White BAR" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
Replay 05: "Black BAR" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
Replay 05: "Blank A" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
That is the case.
Furthermore, during gameplay when the Replay B condition device is activated, for example, if it is possible to stop "Red 7" when the right reel first stops, "Red 7" will be stopped in the middle right position. If it is not possible to stop "Red 7" in the middle right position, "Replay" will be stopped in the middle right position.
After stopping "Replay" in the middle right position, then stop "Blank B" in the middle center position, and then stop "Blank B" in the middle left position.

On the other hand, if "Red 7" is stopped at the first stop on the right, and if it is possible to stop "Red 7" in the middle position at the second stop on the middle, then "Red 7" will be stopped in the middle position. If it is not possible to stop "Red 7" in the middle position, then "Replay" will be stopped in the middle position on the right. Furthermore, if "Red 7" is stopped at the first stop on the right and "Replay" is stopped at the second stop on the middle, then "White BAR", "Red 7", "Black BAR", or "Blank A" (a symbol where the sum of the four symbols is "PB=1") will be stopped at the third stop on the left. This will cause Replay 03 to be displayed.
Next, if the "Red 7" is stopped at the first stop on the right, and the "Red 7" is stopped in the middle of the middle row at the second stop on the middle, and if it is possible to stop the "Red 7" in the middle of the left row at the third stop on the left, then the "Red 7" is stopped in the middle of the left row. This causes the symbol combination for Replay 04 to be displayed.
On the other hand, if it is not possible to stop the "Red 7" in the middle left position when the third left reel stops, then stop the "White BAR", "Black BAR", or "Blank A" in the middle left position. This will cause Replay 05 to be displayed.

Furthermore, when the first reel to stop is the left reel 31, "Bell A" is stopped in the middle left position (PB=1). Subsequently, when the middle reel 31 stops, "Replay" is stopped in the middle middle position (PB=1), and when the right reel 31 stops, "Bell A" is stopped in the middle right position (PB=1). As a result, Replay 02 is displayed.
The same applies when the first reel to stop is the middle reel 31. When the middle reel 31 stops, "Replay" is stopped in the middle of the middle position, then when the left reel 31 stops, "Bell A" is stopped in the middle of the left position, and when the right reel 31 stops, "Bell A" is stopped in the middle of the right position.

Furthermore, since RT1 carries over the win of 1BB, when any replay is won, the 1BB condition device and the winning replay condition device will be activated. However, in games where both 1BB and replay can be displayed as stop symbols, displaying the replay as stop symbols takes priority. Moreover, a replay has "PB=1". Therefore, in RT1, when the replay condition device is activated, 1BB will never be displayed as stop symbols.
Furthermore, in RT1, when any minor role is won, the 1BB condition device and the winning minor role condition device are activated. However, in games where both 1BB and minor roles can be displayed, displaying the minor role takes priority. Here, minor roles include those where "PB=1" and those where "PB=1". However, if priority is given to displaying the minor role, the game is configured so that 1BB is not displayed. In other words, even in games where minor roles cannot be displayed, 1BB will not be displayed.
Specifically, when playing the game by pressing the buttons in order, in order to stop and display the 1BB symbol combination, the left reel 31 must stop with "Blank B" in the middle left position. However, the only symbols on the left reel 31 that are "Blank B" are the small role 72 for role number "276", the small role 76 for role number "280", and the small role 78 for role number "282". However, when playing with the small role condition device activated, the stopping display of small role 72, small role 76, or small role 78 is never prioritized. For example, the winning condition device A1 includes small role 72 as a winning role, but when pressing the buttons in order, the stopping display of small role 52 or 54 takes priority.
Based on the above, in RT1, there is no game in which the combination of symbols for 1BB stops and displays, regardless of the activation of any of the conditional devices.

Next, I will explain the conditional device for the so-called "press-order bell" system.
The conditional device for the button-press sequence bell consists of the following types:
Prize A Condition Device: Prize A1 Condition Device to Prize A16 Condition Device Prize B Condition Device: Prize B1 Condition Device to Prize B16 Condition Device Prize C Condition Device: Prize C1 Condition Device to Prize C8 Condition Device Prize D Condition Device: Prize D1 Condition Device to Prize D12 Condition Device Prize E Condition Device: Prize E1 Condition Device to Prize E12 Condition Device Prize A Condition Device and Prize B Condition Device are condition devices in which an irregular press (first stop in the middle or first stop on the right) is considered the correct press order. When these condition devices are activated during gameplay, a small prize that pays out 14 coins is awarded when the press order is correct, and a small prize that pays out 1 coin is awarded or is missed when the press order is incorrect.
On the other hand, the Prize C Condition Device is a device that determines that pressing the buttons in order (left first stop) is the correct order. When the Prize C Condition Device is activated during gameplay, if the button press order is correct, a small prize that pays out 3 coins is awarded, and if the button press order is incorrect, a small prize that pays out 1 coin is awarded or the prize is missed.
Furthermore, in games where the D-condition device for winning is activated, for games with the D1-D4 condition devices activated, the correct button press is the left first stop 1; for games with the D5-D8 condition devices activated, the correct button press is the middle first stop; and for games with the D9-D12 condition devices activated, the correct button press is the right first stop. In games where these condition devices are activated, a small win that pays out 3 coins is awarded when the button press order is correct, and a small win that pays out 1 coin is awarded or the win is missed when the button press order is incorrect.
Furthermore, in games where the prize-winning condition E device is activated, the correct button press order is left first when the prize-winning condition E1 to E4 devices are activated, middle first when the prize-winning condition E5 to E8 devices are activated, and right first when the prize-winning condition E9 to E12 devices are activated. In games where these condition devices are activated, a small prize that pays out 3 coins is awarded when the button press order is correct, and a small prize that pays out 1 coin is awarded or is missed when the button press order is incorrect.

The following explains the reel stop control when certain condition devices related to the push-order bell are activated, by extracting some of them. In addition, in the following explanation, the stop control related to 1BB will be omitted even if 1BB is carried over in RT1.
(Example 1) Small role A1 condition device (correct button press order 213)
For example, in RT1, if the winning number is "8" and the small role A1 condition device is activated, as shown in Figure 19, any of the small roles 01, 14, 32, 52, 54, or 70-72 can be awarded. However, the small role that can actually be awarded is any of small roles 01, 14, 32, 52, or 54. Small roles 70-72 are control roles (control roles are roles that cause different stopping controls for reel 31, and are not roles that cause winning).
As described in the first embodiment, when multiple types of minor roles are won simultaneously, the reels 31 are stopped in order of priority based on the number of coins when the button press order is correct, and in order of priority based on the number of items when the button press order is incorrect.
As shown in Figure 19, when the award-winning condition A1 device is activated,
Pressing sequence 123 (incorrect): Small wins 52, 54 (1 coin) (winning rate "1/2")
Pressing sequence 132 (incorrect): Small wins 52, 54 (1 coin) (winning rate "1/2")
Pressing sequence 213 (correct): Small win 01 (14 coins) (PB=1)
Pressing sequence 231 (incorrect): Small win 14 (winning rate "1/2")
Pressing sequence 312 (incorrect): Small win 32 (winning rate "1/8")
Press order 321 (incorrect): Small win 32 (winning rate "1/8")
Each of them will be eligible to win an award.
The pressing sequence shown above is the same as in the first embodiment.
The button press sequence 123 means left, middle, right; 132 means left, right, middle; 213 means middle, left, right; 231 means middle, right, left; 312 means right, left, middle; and 321 means right, middle, left.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to each minor role included in the A1 prize condition device are as follows:
Small win 01: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Watermelon"
Small win 14: "White BAR" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small win 14: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small win 32: "Black BAR" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small win 32: "Blank A" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small win 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "White BAR"
Small win 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Black BAR"
Small win 54: "Replay" - "Blank B" - "White BAR"
Small win 54: "Replay" - "Blank B" - "Black BAR"
Small win 70: "Bell A" - "Replay" - "Watermelon"
Small win 71: "Cherry" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Small win 72: "Cherry" - "Replay" - "Blank B"
Small win 72: "Blank B" - "Replay" - "Blank B"
First, when the middle reel stops at the first stop, the button sequence is correct at this point, so in order to win the small prize 01, prioritize the number of coins and stop "Bell A" in the middle reel (PB=1).
Next, when the left reel stops second, the button sequence is correct at this point, so prioritizing the number of coins, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped in the middle left position (PB=1).
Then, when the third reel stops on the right, stop the "watermelon" symbol in the middle right position (PB=1).
This results in a win for the minor role 01.
Also, if the middle reel stops first and the right reel stops second, the button press order will be incorrect at this point, so prioritize the number of symbols and stop "Bell A" in the middle right position (PB=1).
Then, when the third reel stops from the left, if it is possible to stop either the "White BAR" or the "Red 7" in the middle left position, one of these symbols will be stopped (PB ≠ 1). If the "White BAR" or the "Red 7" is stopped in the middle left position, a small win of 14 will be awarded.
Here, the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 is positioned at position "16", and the "red 7" is positioned at position "11". Therefore, the probability (pull-in rate (PB)) of being able to pull either the "white BAR" or the "red 7" into the middle left position is "1/2". Thus, when the button press order is 231, 14 small wins are possible, and the probability of winning them is "1/2".

Next, when the right reel stops first, the button press order is incorrect at this point, so if we adopt the number priority, the symbols with the most appearances on the right reel 31 are "Bell A", "Replay", "White BAR", "Black BAR", and "Blank B" (2 of each). In cases where there are multiple symbols with the most appearances, the order can be arbitrarily determined, so we decide to prioritize "Replay" among these symbols and stop "Replay" in the middle right position (PB=1).
At this point, only the minor role 32 is eligible to be awarded.
Next, when the second reel stops on the left, if it is possible to stop either the "Black BAR" or "Blank A" in the middle left position, one of these symbols will be stopped in the middle left position. The probability of the "Black BAR" or "Blank A" being pulled into the middle left position is "1/2".
Furthermore, when the third reel stops, if the "White BAR" symbol can be stopped in the middle position, it is stopped in the middle position. The probability of the "White BAR" being pulled into the middle position is "1/4".
Therefore, when the button sequence is 312, it becomes possible to win the small prize 32, and the probability of winning is "1/8".
Furthermore, after the first stop on the right, when the second stop is in the middle, the "white BAR" will stop with a pull-in rate of "1/4" as described above. In addition, when the third stop is on the left, the "black BAR" or "blank A" will stop with a pull-in rate of "1/2" as described above.
Therefore, when the button sequence is 321, the small win 32 becomes possible, and the probability of winning is "1/8".

Next, when the left reel stops first, the button press order is incorrect at this point, so prioritizing the number of symbols, the most frequent symbol on the left reel 31 is "Replay" (4 symbols). Therefore, we decide to stop on "Replay" (PB=1).
At this point, it becomes possible to win with a small prize of 52 or 54.
Next, when the second reel stops, if it is possible to stop either "Watermelon" or "Blank B" in the middle reel, stop one of these symbols in the middle reel (totaling "PB = 1").
Furthermore, when the third reel stops on the right, if it is possible to stop either the "White BAR" or the "Black BAR" in the middle right position, one of these symbols will be stopped in the middle right position. The probability of the "White BAR" or "Black BAR" being pulled into the middle right position is "1/2".
Therefore, when the button sequence is 123, the small prize 52 or 54 can be awarded, and the probability of winning is "1/2".
Furthermore, after the first stop on the left, when the second stop is on the right, it is possible to stop either the "White BAR" or the "Black BAR" with a pull-in rate of "1/2" as described above. In addition, when the third stop is in the middle, it is possible to stop either the "Watermelon" or the "Blank B" in the middle position with "PB=1" as described above.
Therefore, when the button sequence is 132, it becomes possible to win either the small prize 52 or 54, and the probability of winning is "1/2".

(Example 2) Small role A13 condition device (correct button press order 321)
In games where the minor role A13 condition device is activated, as shown in Figure 21, it becomes possible to win one of the minor roles 04, 20, 36, 60, 62, 77, 78, or 80.
When the A13 condition device is activated,
Pressing sequence 123 (incorrect): Small win 60, 62 (1 coin) (winning rate "1/4")
Pressing sequence 132 (incorrect): Small win 60, 62 (1 coin) (winning rate "1/4")
Pressing sequence 213 (incorrect): Small win 36 (1 coin) (winning rate "1/8")
Pressing sequence 231 (incorrect): Small win 36 (1 coin) (winning rate "1/8")
Pressing sequence 312 (incorrect): Small win 20 (1 coin) (winning rate "1/2")
Press order 321 (correct): Small win 04 (14 coins) (PB=1)
Each of them will be eligible to win an award.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations for each minor role are as follows:
Small win 04: "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Replay"
Small win 04: "Watermelon" - "Blank B" - "Replay"
Small win 20: "Bell A" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small win 20: "Bell A" - "Red 7" - "Replay"
Small win 36: "White BAR" - "Replay" - "White BAR"
Small win 36: "Red 7" - "Replay" - "White BAR"
Small win 60: "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Red 7"
Small win 62: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Red 7"
Small win 77: "Cherry" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small win 78: "Blank B" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small win 80: "Black BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Watermelon"
Small win 80: "Blank A" - "Black BAR" - "Watermelon"

Here, we will explain using button press sequence 123 and button press sequence 132 (when the winning rate is "1/4") as examples.
When the left reel is the first to stop, the button press order is incorrect at this point, so the symbols are stopped in order of quantity. In this case, "Watermelon,""BellA," and "Replay" each have a number of "2" symbols, but here we define it as "Replay" (PB=1).
Furthermore, when the middle (second or third) reel stops, if it is possible to stop "Bell A" or "Watermelon" in the middle position, one of these symbols will be stopped. Note that the middle reel 31 only has "Bell A" and therefore "PB=1".
Furthermore, when the right reel (second or third) stops, if it is possible to stop the "Red 7" in the middle right position, that symbol is stopped (PB ≠ 1). Note that there is only one "Red 7" on the right reel 31, so the probability of it being pulled in is "1/4".
Therefore, when the condition device for minor role A13 is activated, the probability of winning minor role 60 or 62 with button press order 123 and button press order 132 is "1/4".

(Example 3) Small role B15 condition device (correct button press order 321)
In games where the minor role B15 condition device is activated, as shown in Figure 23, it becomes possible to win one of the minor roles 08, 21, 50, 64, 65, or 77-79.
Also, when the prize-winning B15 condition device is activated,
Pressing sequence 123 (incorrect): Small wins 64, 65 (1 coin) (winning rate "3/4")
Pressing sequence 132 (incorrect): Small wins 64, 65 (1 coin) (winning rate "3/4")
Pressing sequence 213 (incorrect): Small win 50 (1 coin) (winning rate "1/8")
Pressing sequence 231 (incorrect): Small win 50 (1 coin) (winning rate "1/8")
Pressing sequence 312 (incorrect): Small win 21 (1 coin) (winning rate "1/2")
Pressing sequence 321 (correct): Small win 08 (14 coins) (PB=1)
Each of them will be eligible to win an award.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations for each minor role are as follows:
Small win 08: "Watermelon" - "Replay" - "Replay"
Small win 21: "Bell A" - "Black BAR" - "Replay"
Small win 21: "Bell A" - "Cherry" - "Replay"
Small win 50: "Black BAR" - "Bell A" - "Cherry"
Small win 50: "Blank A" - "Bell A" - "Cherry"
Small win 64: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Blank B"
Small win 65: "Replay" - "Blank B" - "Blank B"
Small win 77: "Cherry" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small win 78: "Blank B" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small win 79: "White BAR" - "White BAR" - "Watermelon"
Small win 79: "Red 7" - "White BAR" - "Watermelon"

Here, we will explain using button press sequence 123 and button press sequence 132 (when the winning rate is "3/4") as examples.
When the left reel is the first to stop, the button press order is incorrect at this point, so the symbols are stopped in order of quantity. In this case, "Watermelon,""BellA," and "Replay" each have a number of "2" symbols, but here we define it as "Replay" (PB=1).
Furthermore, when the middle (second or third) reel stops, if it is possible to stop either "Watermelon" or "Blank B" in the middle position, one of these symbols will be stopped. Note that the middle reel 31 has a combined value of "PB = 1" when "Watermelon" and "Blank B" are combined.
Furthermore, when the right reel (second or third) stops, if "Blank B" can be stopped in the middle right position, that symbol is stopped (PB ≠ 1). Note that "Blank B" is located in three places on the right reel 31 at intervals of five symbols, so the pull-in rate is "3/4".
Therefore, when the small win B15 condition device is activated, the probability of winning small win 64 or 65 with button press order 123 and button press order 132 is "3/4".

As described above, when the prize-winning condition A device and the prize-winning condition B device are activated, an irregular pressing order will be considered the correct pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, "PB = 1" and a 14-coin payout will be awarded.
Additionally, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, there is a 1/2 chance of winning a single-coin prize.
Furthermore, when the left reel is the first to stop (sequential pressing), a single-coin payout is awarded with a probability of "1/1", "1/2", "1/4", or "3/4".
Furthermore, if the first stop is incorrect due to an irregular press, there is a 1/8 chance of winning a single-coin prize.

(Example 4) Prize-winning C1 condition device (left first correct answer)
In games where the minor role C1 condition device is activated, as shown in Figure 23, it becomes possible to win one of the minor roles 09, 28, 29, 44, or 45.
Also, when the prize-winning C1 condition device is activated,
Pressing order 1 -- (Correct answer): Small win 09 (3 coins) (PB = 1)
Press order - 1 - (Incorrect): Small wins 44, 45 (1 coin) (Winning rate "1/4")
Press order -- 1 (Incorrect): Small wins 28, 29 (1 coin) (Winning rate "1/4")
Each of them will be eligible to win an award.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations for each minor role are as follows:
Small win 09: "Replay" - "Replay" - "Watermelon"
Small win 28: "White BAR" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small win 28: "Red 7" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small win 29: "White BAR" - "Red 7" - "Replay"
Small win 29: "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Replay"
Small win 44: "White BAR" - "Bell A" - "White BAR"
Small win 44: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "White BAR"
Small win 45: "White BAR" - "Bell A" - "Black BAR"
Small win 45: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Black BAR"
First, when the left reel stops first (correct button press order), the "Replay" symbol stops in the middle left position (PB=1). Subsequently, when the middle reel stops, the "Replay" symbol stops in the middle middle position (PB=1), and when the right reel stops, the "Watermelon" symbol stops in the middle right position (PB=1).
This results in a win for the minor role 09.
Furthermore, if the first stop is in the middle position, the button press order is incorrect at this point, and the number of symbols takes priority, causing the "Bell A" symbol, which has the most symbols, to stop in the middle position (PB=1).
Furthermore, when the left reel stops, either a "white BAR" or a "red 7" will stop in the middle left position (the probability of this happening is 1/2 when the two symbols are combined). And then, when the right reel stops, either a "cherry" or a "blank A" will stop in the middle right position (the probability of this happening is 1/2 when the two symbols are combined).
Therefore, when the reel stops in the middle position, there is a 1/4 chance of winning, and the small win combination 44 or 45 will be displayed.
Next, if the first stop is on the right, the button press order is incorrect at this point, and the "Replay" symbol, which has the most symbols, is stopped in the middle right position (PB=1) due to the priority given to the number of symbols.
Furthermore, when the reels stop on the left, either the "White BAR" or the "Red 7" will stop in the middle left position (the probability of this happening is 1/2 when the two symbols are combined). And then, when the reels stop in the middle position, either the "Black BAR" or the "Cherry" will stop in the middle middle position (the probability of this happening is 1/2 when the two symbols are combined).
Therefore, when the right reel stops first, there is a 1/4 chance of winning, and the small win symbol 28 or 29 will be displayed.

(Example 5) Prize-winning D5 condition device (first correct answer)
In games where the minor role D5 condition device is activated, as shown in Figure 24, it becomes possible to win one of the minor roles 11, 52, or 66.
Also, when the D5 prize-winning condition device is activated,
Pressing sequence 1 -- (Incorrect): Small win 52 (1 coin) (Winning rate "1/4")
Pressing order - 1 - (Correct answer): Small win 11 (3 coins) (PB = 1)
Press order -- 1 (Incorrect): Small win 66 (1 coin) (Winning rate "1/4")
Each of them will be eligible to win an award.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations for each minor role are as follows:
Small win 11: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Replay"
Small win 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "White BAR"
Small win 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Black BAR"
Small win 66: "White BAR" - "White BAR" - "Bell A"
Small win 66: "White BAR" - "Red 7" - "Bell A"
Small win 66: "Red 7" - "White BAR" - "Bell A"
Small win 66: "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Bell A"
First, when the middle reel stops first (correct button press order), "Bell A" is stopped in the middle of the middle position (PB=1). Then, when the left reel stops, "Watermelon" is stopped in the middle of the middle position (PB=1), and when the right reel stops, "Replay" is stopped in the middle of the right position (PB=1).
This results in a win of 11 small prizes.
Furthermore, if the left reel is the first to stop, the button press order is incorrect at this point, and based on the number of symbols, one of the following will be stopped in the middle left position: "Replay", "White BAR", or "Red 7". Here, however, "Replay" is chosen to be stopped (PB=1).
Furthermore, when the reels stop in the middle position, the "Watermelon" symbol will stop in the middle of the middle row (with a 1/2 chance of being pulled in). And then, when the reels stop on the right position, either the "White BAR" or the "Black BAR" symbol will stop in the middle of the right row (with a 1/2 chance of being pulled in, based on the combined probability of the two symbols).
Therefore, when the left reel stops first, the small win 52 will be displayed with a probability of winning "1/4".
Next, if the first stop is on the right, the button press order is incorrect at this point, and prioritizing the number of symbols, the symbol with the most symbols, "Bell A," is stopped in the middle right position (PB=1).
Furthermore, when the reels stop on the left, either the "White BAR" or the "Red 7" will stop in the middle left position (the probability of this happening is 1/2 when the two symbols are combined). And then, when the reels stop in the middle position, either the "White BAR" or the "Red 7" will stop in the middle middle position (the probability of this happening is 1/2 when the two symbols are combined).
Therefore, when the right reel stops first, the small win symbol 66 will be displayed with a probability of winning "1/4".

(Example 6) Prize-winning E9 condition device (Right first correct answer)
In games where the minor role E9 condition device is activated, as shown in Figure 25, it becomes possible to win one of the minor roles 12, 42, 43, or 52.
Also, when the prize-winning E9 condition device is activated,
Pressing sequence 1 -- (Incorrect): Small win 52 (1 coin) (Winning rate "1/4")
Press order - 1 - (Incorrect): Small win 42, 43 (1 coin) (Winning rate "1/4")
Pressing order -- 1 (correct): Small win 12 (3 coins) (PB = 1)
Each of them will be eligible to win an award.
Furthermore, the symbol combinations for each minor role are as follows:
Small win 12: "Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Replay"
Small win 42: "Black BAR" - "Replay" - "Cherry"
Small win 42: "Blank A" - "Replay" - "Cherry"
Small win 43: "Black BAR" - "Replay" - "Blank A"
Small win 43: "Blank A" - "Replay" - "Blank A"
Small win 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "White BAR"
Small win 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Black BAR"
First, if the right reel is stopped first (correct button press order), the "Replay" symbol is stopped in the middle right position due to priority on the number of coins (PB=1). Then, if the left reel is stopped next, the "Watermelon" symbol is stopped in the middle left position (PB=1), and if the middle reel is stopped, the "Bell B" symbol is stopped in the middle right position (PB=1).
This results in a win of 12 small prizes.
Furthermore, if the left reel is the first to stop, the button press order is incorrect at this point, and based on the number of symbols, one of the following will be stopped in the middle left position: "Replay", "Black BAR", or "Blank A". Here, however, "Replay" is chosen to be stopped (PB = 1).
Furthermore, when the reels stop in the middle position, the "Watermelon" symbol will stop in the middle of the middle row (the probability of it being pulled in is "1/2"). And then, when the reels stop on the right position, either the "White BAR" or the "Black BAR" symbol will stop in the middle of the right row (the probability of it being pulled in is "1/2" for both symbols combined).
Therefore, when the left reel stops first, there is a 1/4 chance of winning the small prize 52.
Next, if the first stop is in the middle, the button press order is incorrect at this point, and the "Replay" symbol, which has the most symbols, is stopped in the middle position (PB=1) due to the priority given to the number of symbols.
Furthermore, when the left reel stops, either the "Black BAR" or "Blank A" will stop in the middle left position (the probability of this happening is 1/2 when the two symbols are combined). And then, when the right reel stops, either the "Cherry" or "Blank A" will stop in the middle middle position (the probability of this happening is 1/2 when the two symbols are combined).
Therefore, when the reel stops in the middle position, there is a 1/4 chance of winning either the 42 or 43 prize.

In non-RT or RT1 modes, there is a chance of winning numbers "72" to "75" (Figures 14 and 16), and when these winning numbers are won, the prize F condition device, prize G condition device, prize H condition device, and prize I condition device are activated, respectively.
Furthermore, during RB operation, there is a chance of winning with winning numbers "76" to "78" (Figure 18), and when these winning numbers are won, the prize J condition device, prize K condition device, and prize L condition device are activated, respectively.
We will omit the explanation of the reel stop control when these condition devices are activated.

Figure 27 is a diagram showing the performance group numbers in the first embodiment.
In the main processing, for each game, a performance group number corresponding to the winning number is selected (performance group number selection means 64 in Figure 1), and the selected performance group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Based on the received performance group number, the sub-control board 80 determines and outputs the performance for the current game.
In terms of the performance group number, a characteristic of the first embodiment is that winning combinations A1 to A16, B1 to B16, and C1 to C8 all share the same performance group number "8". Therefore, when the sub-control board 80 receives performance group number 8, it can determine that in this game, the player has won one of the push-order bell combinations A1 to A16, B1 to B16, or C1 to C8, but it cannot determine the correct push-order combination.

Here, in the performance group number "8", the winning combinations A1 to A16 and B1 to B16 all have an irregular button press sequence. Therefore, depending on the number of winning numbers and the number of coins paid out when the correct button press sequence is selected, the expected value when an irregular press is made may exceed the specified number (number of bets). However, in this embodiment, even if an irregular press is made knowing that the performance group number for this game is "8", the expected value of this game is set to be less than or equal to the specified number.
This configuration prevents the acquisition of more medals than the specified number, even if, for example, a player fraudulently obtains the performance group number transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 through dishonest means.

Figure 28 is a diagram illustrating the expected value when the performance group number is "8" in the first embodiment.
Here, we will use the button press sequence 213 as an example of an irregular press. Although the calculations are omitted, the expected value is the same for all of the button press sequences 213, 231, 312, and 321 when using an irregular press.
Furthermore, for a standard sequence, we will take the sequence 123 as an example. Although the calculations are omitted, the expected value for the sequence 123 and the expected value for the sequence 132 are the same.
First, if you win one of the prizes A1 to A16, you will receive a payout of 14 coins with the button sequence 213 when you win prizes A1 to A4. Therefore, when you win prizes A1 to A4 with the button sequence 213, the probability of winning a 14-coin prize is "1/1", so the expected value is "14 (coins)".
Furthermore, in the 213 button sequence, when the winning combination is A5 to A8, there is a 1/2 chance of winning a single-coin combination, so the expected value is 0.5 (coins).
Furthermore, in the 213 button sequence, when the winning combination is A9 to A16, there is a 1/8 chance of winning a single-coin combination, so the expected value is 0.125 (coins).
The same applies to the winners B1 through B16.
Furthermore, in the 213 button sequence, when the winning combination is C1 to C8, there is a 1/4 chance of winning a single-coin prize, so the expected value is 0.25 (coins).

Next, in the sequence 123, if the winning combination is A1 to A8, there is a 1/2 chance of winning a single-coin combination, so the expected value is 0.5 (coins).
Furthermore, in the sequence 123, if the winning combination is A9 to A12, then "PB = 1" and a single-coin win occurs, so the expected value is "1 (coin)".
Furthermore, in the sequence 123, if the winning combination is A13 to A14, there is a 1/4 chance of winning a single-coin combination, so the expected value is 0.25 (coins).
Furthermore, in the sequence 123, when the winning combination is A15 to A16, there is a 3/4 chance of winning a single-coin combination, so the expected value is 0.75 (coins).
The same applies to the winners B1 through B16.
Furthermore, in the sequence 123, if the winning combination is C1 to C8, then "PB = 1" and a 3-coin combination is awarded, so the expected value is "3 (coins)".

Based on the above, when the button press order is 213, the expected value when the winning combinations are A1 to A16 and B1 to B16 is "3.6875 (coins)".
Furthermore, in the case of a button press sequence of 213, the expected value when the winning combination is C1 to C8 is "0.25 (coins)".
On the other hand, when the button press order is 123, the expected value when the winning combinations are A1 to A16 and B1 to B16 is "0.625 (coins)".
Furthermore, in the case of a button press sequence of 123, the expected value when the winning combination is C1 to C8 is "3 (coins)".
Furthermore, the winning probabilities for prizes A1 to A16 (number "1112") are the same. Moreover, the winning probabilities for prizes B1 to B16 (number "1112") are the same. Furthermore, the winning probabilities for prizes C1 to C8 (number "1113") are the same.
Therefore, the total number of winning entries for prize winners A1-A16, B1-B16, and C1-C8 is:
1112 × 16 + 1112 × 16 + 1113 × 8
= 44488
That is the case.
Therefore, the probability of winning prizes A1 to A16 when the production group number is "8" is,
(1112 x 16) / 44488
≈0.399928
That is the case.
The probability of winning prizes B1 to B16 when the production group number is "8" is also "0.399928", similar to the above.
Furthermore, the probability of winning C1 to C8 when the production group number is "8" is:
(1113 x 8) / 44488
≈0.200144
That is the case.

Therefore, the expected value when operating with the button sequence 213 during performance group number "8" is:
0.399928 × 3.6875 + 0.399928 × 3.6875 + 0.200144 × 0.25
≈ 2.9995 (sheets)
This falls below the required number of "3".
Also, the expected value when the button sequence is 123 during performance group number "8" is:
0.399928 × 0.625 + 0.399928 × 0.625 + 0.200144 × 3
≈ 1.1003 (sheets)
This falls below the required number of "3".
Therefore, even if you know that the game is being played under performance group number "8" and use an unconventional button press, the expected value cannot exceed the specified number "3".

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the performance group number is "8", the expected value when using an irregular button press is higher than the expected value when using a standard button press.
However, in the first embodiment, if an irregular button press is performed during a non-AT (Automatic Trigger) game, the sub-bonus (equivalent to AT) lottery is not performed, the sub-bonus lottery performed during the game is invalidated, or a sub-bonus lottery with a lower winning probability than when pressing buttons in order is performed. In other words, the expected value of AT in a game where an irregular button press is performed during a non-AT is relatively lower than the expected value of AT in a game where buttons are pressed in order during a non-AT.
In order to "invalidate the sub-bonus lottery conducted during this game," for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, the sub-bonus lottery is performed as usual (because it is not yet determined at this point whether or not an irregular press occurred), and if it is determined that an irregular press occurred when all buttons are stopped, the sub-bonus lottery for this game is invalidated (cleared, discarded).
Therefore, the game is designed so that playing with the buttons pressed in order during non-AT modes and following the button-pressing instructions during AT modes results in a higher overall payout performance than playing with irregular button presses during non-AT modes and following the button-pressing instructions during AT modes.
Here, the lower the base payout rate during non-AT (Automatic Trigger) mode, the higher the ratio of bonus rounds including instructions. One way to lower the ratio of bonus rounds including instructions is to introduce a common bell. However, since the common bell is a bonus round that is awarded regardless of the order (position) of the button presses, the payout rate becomes higher when the button is pressed in an irregular order.
Therefore, by providing a left-biased bell (a bell that requires pressing in order to be correct) as in this embodiment, it is possible to lower the base payout during non-AT (Automatic Trigger) play when pressing in order, while also suppressing the ratio of bonus items with instructions. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the payout rate during irregular presses compared to when a common bell is provided to suppress the ratio of bonus items with instructions.

Furthermore, the first embodiment includes an SP flag. The SP flag is used to determine whether or not an irregular button press was performed during the previous game. For example, when the current game comes to a complete stop, the SP flag is turned off, and then, if it is determined that the current game was played using a normal button press sequence, the SP flag is turned on. Conversely, if it is determined that the current game was played using an irregular button press sequence, the SP flag remains off.
Then, the game moves on to the next round. If the SP flag is on, the normal sub-bonus lottery is performed. If the SP flag is off, the normal sub-bonus lottery is not performed (either the sub-bonus lottery is not performed, or the sub-bonus lottery itself is performed but the result is invalidated afterward, or a sub-bonus lottery with a lower probability of winning than when pressing buttons in order is performed). The SP flag is turned off when the next round of play is stopped. After that, if it is determined that the next round of play was performed using the normal button pressing method, the SP flag is turned on. Conversely, if it is determined that the next round of play was performed using the irregular button pressing method, the SP flag remains off.
This method prevents players from using a strategy where they only press the buttons in order when an exciting animation is displayed when operating the start switch 41 (indicating a reasonable chance of winning a sub-bonus), and press the buttons in an irregular order otherwise, for example, when no animation specific to that game is displayed when operating the start switch 41.

Next, the mode selection in the first embodiment will be described.
As described above, the first embodiment includes a sub-bonus, which is the same concept as the AT. When the sub-bonus starts, a specific combination of symbols ("Red 7s") indicating the start of the sub-bonus is displayed. When the game transitions to the sub-bonus, just like in the AT, the correct button sequence is announced when a button sequence bell (for example, winning combinations A to E mentioned above) is won. The sub-bonus continues until the number of payouts reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300 coins), and the game ends when the number of payouts reaches the predetermined number, and the game transitions to non-AT (normal gameplay).
The mode selection in the first embodiment is as follows:
These include: 1) Initial normal mode lottery during the normal section; 2) Normal mode lottery performed on the first game of the advantageous section when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section; and 3) Mode transition lottery performed at the start of a sub-bonus.
Each mode has different probabilities of transitioning to a sub-bonus (probability of winning, number of plays required to reach the ceiling, and probability of transitioning to a more advantageous mode) (see Figure 31(a) below).

Figure 29 is a diagram showing the initial normal mode lottery in the normal section in the first embodiment, where (a) is a flowchart of the normal section lever processing (meaning the processing when the start switch 41 is operated), and (b) is the number of lottery entries.
The following two types of passengers will stay in the regular service area:
Firstly, when the power is turned on and the RWM is initialized (settings changed), the game section is cleared and becomes a normal section. Therefore, the first game after RWM initialization will be in a normal section.
Secondly, when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met, the next game will transition to the normal period. In this embodiment, when the difference from the start of the advantageous period exceeds "2400 (coins)", the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met, the advantageous period ends, and the next game will be in the normal period.
Here, it is known that the advantageous period ends when the number of games played since the start of the advantageous period reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500 games or 3000 games). However, in the first embodiment, the advantageous period is configured not to end based on the number of games played.

In Figure 29(a), when the normal section begins, step S492 determines whether the performance group number corresponding to the winning number of the current game is performance group number "2". Performance group number "2" corresponds to winning Replay B (winning number "2"). If it is determined that the performance group number is not "2", the process proceeds to step S493, and if it is determined that the performance group number is "2", the process according to this flowchart ends. That is, when the performance group number is "2" (when Replay B is won), the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, so the game does not transition to the advantageous section (see Figure 13). For this reason, when it is determined that the performance group number is "2", the following initial normal mode lottery is not performed, the next game will also be in the normal section, and the normal section lever process is performed again.
Step S493 determines whether the current game is a non-RT (Replay Time) game. The main control board 50 stores the current RT information in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53 and makes the determination based on this information. If it is determined that the game is not a non-RT game (1BB not internal), the process proceeds to step S495; if it is determined that the game is not a non-RT game, the process proceeds to step S494.
Note that the transition to RT will occur at the end of this game. Therefore, even if you win 1BB in this game, step S493 will determine that it is not RT.

Here, after RWM initialization following power-on, the state is non-RT. This is because, after RWM initialization following power-on, even if a 1BB was won before power-on, the winning information for that 1BB is cleared, and the RT information is also cleared (resulting in the RT state becoming non-RT).
In the following explanation, the period during which 1BB is not internal will be referred to as "morning start," and the advantageous period transitioned to during the period during which 1BB is not internal will be referred to as "advantageous period transitioned to at morning start."
On the other hand, the period inside 1BB is sometimes referred to as "not the start of the day," and the advantageous period that was entered during 1BB is sometimes referred to as "an advantageous period that was entered at a time other than the start of the day."
Furthermore, when it is unclear whether or not the game entered a favorable period at the start of the day, it may be referred to as "uncertain at the start of the day."

If it is determined in step S493 that it is not a non-RT and the game proceeds to step S494, it is determined whether the performance group number for the current game is "10". Performance group number "10" corresponds to winning prize E (winning numbers "60" to "71"; see Figure 16). If it is determined that the performance group number is not "10", the game proceeds to step S495, and if it is determined that the performance group number is "10", the processing according to this flowchart ends. As shown in Figure 16, when prize E is won in RT1, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, so the game does not transition to the advantageous section in the next game. Therefore, in this case as well, the normal section lever processing is performed again in the next game. From the above, the normal section lever processing is performed again in the next game (the game does not transition to the advantageous section) when the performance group number becomes "2" (when replay B is won), regardless of whether it is a non-RT or RT1, or when the performance group number becomes "10" (when prize E is won) in a game other than the start of the day (RT1).

Step S495 is where the initial normal mode lottery is performed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S496, where the lottery result is saved (stored), and the process according to this flowchart ends.
The initial normal mode lottery in step S495 is performed according to the number shown in Figure 29(b). The denominator of the number shown in Figure 29(b) is "240", and when the number is "240", the probability of winning is "1/1".
First, in non-RT mode, if the performance group number is "0" (single 1BB win) or if the performance group number is "10" (double win of 1BB and winning E), you win normal mode 0.
Winning 1BB here means that the game was not in RT mode (not internally in 1BB mode) before the start of this game, so it is confirmed that it is the first game of the day.
Similarly, since the initial normal mode lottery is not performed when the performance group number is "10" and not in non-RT mode, the performance group number being "10" in this game means that it is not in RT mode. Therefore, when the performance group number is "10" in this game, it is confirmed that it is the start of the day.

In contrast, in non-RT or RT1 mode, if the performance group number is "1", "3" to "9", or "11" to "14", you will win normal mode 1. Note that the above performance group numbers have the potential to be won both when it is the start of the day and when it is not the start of the day, and if you win one of the above performance group numbers, you will transition to the advantageous section regardless of whether you are in the middle of 1BB or not, so playing with the above performance group numbers will be uncertain when it is the start of the day.
Based on the above, Normal Mode 0 and 1 are modes that are drawn when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section from the next game, and are used to determine whether or not it is the first game of the day. If Normal Mode 0 is selected, it is confirmed to be the first game of the day, and if Normal Mode 1 is selected, it is not confirmed to be the first game of the day.

Figure 30 shows the normal mode transition process, where (a) is a flowchart and (b) is the number of items to be drawn.
When transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, the first game in the advantageous section will be a draw for the normal mode. The normal mode from the second game onwards in the advantageous section has numbers from "2" to "9", as described below. Therefore, in the advantageous section, the first game will be normal mode 0 or 1, and the second game onwards will be one of the numbers from "2" to "9".
In diagram (a), when the normal mode transition process is started, step S502 determines whether the mode is normal mode 0 or 1. If the mode is normal mode 0 or 1, the process proceeds to step S503; otherwise, the process according to this flowchart ends. In other words, in this example, the normal mode transition process is executed for every game during the advantageous period, but since the result in step S502 is "No" for all games except the first game in the advantageous period, the normal mode lottery in step S503 is not executed.
Then, if it is determined in step S502 that the normal mode is 0 or 1 (it is the first game in the advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S503, where a lottery for the normal mode is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S504, where the normal mode determined by the lottery is saved (stored), and the process according to this flowchart ends.

Figure 29(b) shows the number of positions for the normal mode lottery in four different patterns.
First, "Non-RT and Normal Mode 0" refers to the case where the performance group number is "0" at the start of the day (a single BB win), and a BB is won in that game. Note that the normal mode lottery is not performed during the 1BB game (the normal mode transition process does not begin). Therefore, "Non-RT and Normal Mode 0" indicates the normal mode lottery in the first game (non-RT) after the 1BB game has finished. While this can actually happen, it is a rare case.
Furthermore, "RT1, and normal mode 0" refers to the case where the performance group number is "0" (1BB win alone) at the start of the day and 1BB is not awarded, or the performance group is "10" (1BB and award E are both won) at the start of the day (in this case, the small wins included in award E are awarded first, so 1BB will not be awarded), and the game transitions to the advantageous section.
Furthermore, "Non-RT and Normal Mode 1" refers to the case where the performance group number is anything other than "0" or "10" at the start of the day, and the game transitions to the advantageous period.
Furthermore, "RT1, and normal mode 1" corresponds to the case where the game enters the advantageous section at a time other than the start of the day. Note that the performance group number will never be "0" (single win of 1BB) at times other than the start of the day. Furthermore, the performance group number will never be "10" and the game will never enter the advantageous section at times other than the start of the day.
Therefore, a transition to the advantageous period at a time other than the start of the day corresponds to when the performance group number becomes "1", "3" to "9", or "11" to "14" at a time other than the start of the day.

In the above normal mode lottery,
Winning number "0": Heaven B Preparation Mode Winning number "1": Normal A Mode Winning number "2": Normal B Mode Winning number "3": Normal C Mode Winning number "4": Heaven A Mode You will win one of the above modes.
Furthermore, Normal Mode A, Normal Mode B, and Normal Mode C are modes that are not advantageous to the player (it is difficult to win sub-bonuses). On the other hand, Heaven Mode B Preparation Mode and Heaven Mode A are modes that are advantageous to the player (it is easy to win sub-bonuses).

In the cases of "No RT and Normal Mode 0", "RT1 and Normal Mode 0", and "No RT and Normal Mode 1", the number of positions that transition to Heaven B Preparation Mode is "0", and the number of positions that transition to Heaven A Mode is "1", so in most cases the player will not transition to a mode that is advantageous to them.
In contrast, in "RT1 and Normal Mode 1," there is a 100% probability of transitioning to Heaven B Preparation Mode.
In this case, there are no instances where the performance group number becomes "0" (a single win of 1BB) other than at the start of the day, and if the performance group number becomes "10" other than at the start of the day, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed, so the game does not transition to the advantageous section.
Therefore, if the normal mode lottery is conducted at any time other than the start of the day, there is a 100% chance of transitioning to Heaven B preparation mode (a mode advantageous to the player). However, if the normal mode lottery is conducted at the start of the day, there is almost no chance of transitioning to a mode advantageous to the player. Thus, the payout rate in the advantageous section entered at any time other than the start of the day is higher than the payout rate in the advantageous section entered at the start of the day.
In other words, the advantageous period entered at the start of the day (not during internal mode) can be made less favorable to the player (lower payout rate) than the advantageous period entered at other times (during internal mode), thus preventing the advantageous period at the start of the day from becoming excessively advantageous after a setting change (a so-called "morning bonus" countermeasure). Furthermore, advantageous periods entered at other times always start from the Heaven B preparation mode, which can increase the desire to continue playing even after the advantageous period is completed.
Conversely, if the game is designed to be advantageous for players when they enter a favorable period first thing in the morning (by increasing the payout rate), it can encourage early morning play.

Figure 31 is a diagram illustrating the types and characteristics of normal modes "2" to "9".
Figure (a) shows the characteristics of each normal mode (2-9), and Figure (b) shows the transition probability (number of draws) to the normal mode at the start of the sub-bonus.
As mentioned above, the normal mode is determined by a lottery during the first game of the advantageous period, and thereafter, a lottery for transitioning to the normal mode is performed at the start of each sub-bonus.
In Figure (a), the normal modes that are advantageous to the player are Heaven B Preparation Mode, Heaven A Mode, Heaven B Mode, and Heaven C Mode. Furthermore, Heaven B Pullback Mode is advantageous to the player in terms of the probability of winning a sub-bonus.
Each normal mode has a set number of games until a sub-bonus is won, as well as a set probability of winning a sub-bonus. During each normal mode, a sub-bonus is drawn for each game based on the winning number, according to the winning probability shown in Figure 31(a). Furthermore, each normal mode has a set number of games until the number of games is reached without winning a sub-bonus, in which case the sub-bonus winning flag is forcibly set (resulting in a sub-bonus win). After winning a sub-bonus, after a predetermined number of pre-bonus games starting from "0", the symbol combination corresponding to the sub-bonus ("Red 7" alignment) becomes available for stopping and display. When the symbol combination corresponding to the sub-bonus ("Red 7" alignment) stops, the sub-bonus will be executed from the next game.

On the other hand, regardless of which normal mode the player is in, if the winning number "2" (Replay B) is selected, a sub-bonus is awarded. When the winning number "2" is selected, as described above, by pressing the stop switch 42 in reverse order, it becomes possible to stop the symbol combination corresponding to Replay 04, namely, the "Red 7" combination. Therefore, in a game where the winning number "2" is selected, a notification is given instructing the player to press the stop switch 42 in reverse order, making it possible to stop the "Red 7" combination. If the "Red 7" combination is displayed as stopped in that game, the sub-bonus will start from the next game.

In this case, if the winning number is "2" and the stop switch 42 is pressed in reverse to display the "Red 7" combination, then this game is considered a genuine game.
In contrast, any gameplay that displays a "red 7" combination in any other way is considered a simulated gameplay (also called a "pseudo") rather than the actual gameplay.
Here, "simulated gameplay" refers to a feature in which, after the reels 31 start to rotate and before the rotation speed of the reels 31 becomes constant, the reels 31 are stopped (this stop is also called a "temporary stop" or "simulated stop"; hereinafter referred to as a "temporary stop") by operating the stop switch 42 for activating the rotation stop device, and a feature is used to display a random combination of symbols. "Simulated gameplay" is also called "reel feature".
On the other hand, in contrast to the "simulated game presentation" mentioned above, a game that displays the combination of symbols as a game result (the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination) is referred to as the "main game."
The symbol combinations that are temporarily stopped by the simulated gameplay animation do not represent the game result. The game result is displayed when the symbol combinations are stopped and displayed during the actual gameplay after the simulated gameplay animation has temporarily stopped the symbol combinations.

In particular, in this embodiment, when a sub-bonus is won and the conditions for executing a simulated game performance are met (for example, when the number of pre-bonus game plays has been used up), the simulated game performance will be executed up to four times until the "Red 7" symbols temporarily stop.
Furthermore, during simulated gameplay sequences, it may be possible to inform the player that it is a simulated gameplay sequence, or in other words, that it is not the actual game. By doing so, it is possible to prevent players from mistaking the simulated gameplay sequence for the actual game.
Furthermore, when all reels 31 are temporarily stopped during a simulated game performance, the motor 32 may be driven and controlled so that the symbols move up and down at predetermined time intervals (to vibrate slightly up and down) rather than remaining still (referred to as "vibration" or "vibration control"), thereby informing the player that it is a temporary stop in a simulated game performance and not a stop displaying the game result in the actual game (actual stop).
Then, after stopping all reels 31 through a simulated game animation, when the game transitions to the actual game, a random delay process is used to cause the rotation start timing of each reel 31 to be random.

Figure 32 is a flowchart showing a simulated gameplay sequence for when "Red 7" symbols line up. This flowchart does not include the actual gameplay when the winning number "2" is selected and the "Red 7" symbols are displayed by pressing the buttons in reverse order.
First, in step S581, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, it proceeds to step S582. In step S82, it determines whether or not the conditions for starting a simulated game have been met. Here, this refers to the state in which a sub-bonus is confirmed (main game state) after winning a sub-bonus and consuming the number of pre-bonus game rounds.
If it is determined that the conditions for starting the simulated game are met, the process proceeds to step S583; if it is determined that the conditions are not met, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S583, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the number of consecutive pseudo-game sequences "N". The initial value of "N" is "0".

Next, the process proceeds to step S584, where the main control board 50 determines whether "N" is "4". If it determines that "N" is not "4", the process proceeds to step S585; if it determines that "N" is "4", the process proceeds to step S591.
In step S585, the sub-control board 80 outputs a message informing the player to aim for the "red 7" by pressing the buttons in order. Then the process proceeds to step S586. In step S586, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated, and if it determines that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S587. In step S587, the reel control means 65 performs a temporary stop process to pull the "red 7" into the active line within a range of up to 4 frames.
Next, the process proceeds to step S588, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not all reels 31 have temporarily stopped. If it determines that all reels 31 have temporarily stopped, the process proceeds to step S589; if it determines that all reels 31 have not temporarily stopped, the process returns to step S586.

In step S589, the main control board 50 determines whether the "Red 7" combination has temporarily stopped on an active line. If it determines that the "Red 7" combination has temporarily stopped, the game proceeds to step S590 and moves to the sub-bonus. On the other hand, if it determines that the "Red 7" combination has not temporarily stopped, the "Red 7" combination simulated gameplay is repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S584 that "N" is "4", the process proceeds to step S591. In step S591, the reel control means 65 automatically temporarily stops all rotating reels 31, and also temporarily stops them when "red 7" is aligned. Here, the reels 31 may be temporarily stopped in the order of left, middle, and right reels 31, or all reels 31 may be temporarily stopped almost simultaneously. Then the process proceeds to step S590, and the sub-bonus is started.
Through the simulated gameplay described above, the player is prompted to get the "Red 7" combination. However, if the player fails to get the "Red 7" combination three times in a row, the fourth simulated gameplay sequence will automatically temporarily stop the "Red 7" combination without requiring the player to operate the stop switch 42. This allows for a quick transition to the sub-bonus.

Although not shown in the diagram, when the winning number "2" is won when not in sub-bonus mode, the sub-control board 80 outputs a message informing the player to aim for "Red 7" by pressing the buttons in reverse order. When the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in reverse order, the reel control means 65 executes a stop control process (main game) that pulls "Red 7" into the active line by a maximum of 4 frames. As described above, in a game where the winning number "2" is won, pressing the buttons in reverse order makes it possible to stop the "Red 7" combination, that is, the symbol combination corresponding to replay 04, on the active line. Also, if it is not possible to stop the "Red 7" combination by pressing the buttons in reverse order (the player fails to time the stop), the symbol combination corresponding to replay 01 is displayed as the stop. Furthermore, even in a game where the winning number "2" is won, if the stop switch 42 is not operated by pressing the buttons in reverse order, the symbol combination corresponding to replay 01 is displayed as the stop.
If the winning number "2" is not matched and the "Red 7" combination is not displayed, a simulated "Red 7" combination game animation (simulated game) will be performed in the next game. However, this is not the only case; if the winning number "2" is not matched and the "Red 7" combination is not displayed, the sub-bonus may be started from the next game without going through the simulated game.
Even if the main game state is a confirmed sub-bonus state, the sub-state may still be in a pre-bonus phase (a state where the confirmation screen is not displayed). In such cases, it is at the discretion of the player whether or not to determine that the conditions for starting a simulated game have been met. However, since the sub-state is in a pre-bonus phase, the notification of matching "Red 7s" will not be executed, but if the main game state is a confirmed sub-bonus state, a simulated game will be executed, and the player can aim to stop the "Red 7s" during that simulated game.

Return to the explanation in Figure 31.
As mentioned above, Heaven B Preparation Mode is a normal mode that is selected with 100% probability when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, except at the start of the day.
Then, when a sub-bonus is started while in Heaven B preparation mode, a lottery is held to determine the transition to normal mode. As shown in Figure 31(b), there is a 50% (120/240) chance that there will be no transition (remaining in Heaven B preparation mode even after the sub-bonus ends), and a 50% chance that the game will transition to Heaven B mode. In other words, as long as the game remains in Heaven B preparation mode, it will either remain in Heaven B preparation mode or transition to Heaven B mode, which is advantageous for the player.
Furthermore, Normal Mode A, Normal Mode B, and Normal Mode C are disadvantageous modes for the player. And as you move from Normal Mode A to Normal Mode B to Normal Mode C, the mode becomes closer to Heaven. For example, in Normal Mode A, the probability of no transition is highest, and if a transition occurs, the probability of transitioning to Normal Mode B is highest. Similarly, in Normal Mode B, the probability of no transition is highest, and if a transition occurs, the probability of transitioning to Normal Mode C is highest. Moreover, there is no possibility of dropping from Normal Mode B to Normal Mode A. Furthermore, in Normal Mode C, the probability of transitioning to Heaven Mode A is highest, and there is no possibility of dropping to Normal Mode A or Normal Mode B.
As shown in Figure 31(b), when transitioning from normal mode A to another normal mode, the player transitions to normal mode B, and when transitioning from normal mode B to another normal mode, the player transitions to normal mode C. Therefore, when staying in normal mode C, there is a high probability of having stayed in a normal mode for the longest time. Of normal modes A, B, and C, normal mode C is the most likely to transition to heaven mode C. In other words, although the difference counter value is not referenced when transitioning between normal modes, the longer the player remains in an unfavorable state in normal mode C, the more likely they are to transition to heaven mode C.

Heaven Mode A is a mode that does not transition to (loops) with a 60% (144/240) probability. If the loop is missed, the mode transitions to either Normal Mode A or Normal Mode B.
Heaven Mode B is a mode that does not transition to (loops) with a 90% (216/240) probability, and if it fails to loop, it transitions to Heaven Mode B Re-entry Mode.
In Heaven B return mode, the return rate to Heaven B mode is 20% (48/240), and if a return is not achieved, the game transitions to Normal A mode or Normal B mode.
Heaven C mode is a mode with no transitions, and it is maintained until the end of the advantageous period, that is, until the difference from the start of the advantageous period exceeds "2400", a so-called completion mode.
Furthermore, conditions for transitioning to Heaven Mode C are defined. If you win the chance to transition to Heaven Mode C, and the remaining difference at that time is "1000" or more, you will transition to Heaven Mode C. Conversely, if you win the chance to transition to Heaven Mode C, and the remaining difference at that time is less than "1000", you will transition to Heaven Mode A.

Therefore, for example,
1) When the 60% loop is repeated in Heaven Mode A and the difference in the advantageous section exceeds "2400",
2) When the Heaven B preparation mode is maintained, or when the Heaven B mode is entered, and the difference in the advantageous section exceeds "2400",
3) When transitioning to Heaven C mode, if the difference in the advantageous period exceeds "2400", the advantageous period ends.
Once the advantageous period ends, the next game will transition to the normal period.
When the game transitions to the normal section, the normal section lever process shown in Figure 29 is executed, and the game enters normal mode 1. Then, when RT1 is active and normal mode 1 is in play, the game is guaranteed to enter the Heaven B preparation mode, as shown in Figure 30.
When transitioning to Heaven B Preparation Mode, the game remains in Heaven B Preparation Mode until it transitions to Heaven B Mode. After transitioning to Heaven B Mode, there is a 90% chance that Heaven B Mode will loop. This increases the likelihood that the difference in the advantageous period will exceed "2400" and the advantageous period will end in the next advantageous period as well.
In this way, it becomes possible to repeat the advantageous period that ends with a difference of "2400" multiple times.

Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the animation processing when the advantageous period is repeated multiple times as described above. This processing is performed by the sub-control board 80.
First, in step S622, it is determined whether or not the advantageous period has started. If it is determined that the advantageous period has started, the process proceeds to step S623.
In step S623, it is determined whether the Heaven Mode (Heaven Mode A, Heaven Mode B Preparation Mode, Heaven Mode B, or Heaven Mode C) of the advantageous section is continuous. Here, if the previous advantageous section ended in one of the Heaven Modes A, Heaven Mode B Preparation Mode, Heaven Mode B, or Heaven Mode C, and the next advantageous section begins in Heaven Mode B Preparation Mode, then it is determined that the Heaven Mode of the advantageous section is continuous. If it is determined that the Heaven Mode of the advantageous section is continuous, the process proceeds to step S624; if it is determined that the Heaven Mode of the advantageous section is not continuous, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S624, the advantageous section continuation counter on the sub-control board 80 is set to "+1". Then, the process proceeds to step S625, where the sub-control board 80 executes the advantageous section continuation animation. Here, based on the value of the advantageous section continuation counter, for example, when the value of the advantageous section continuation counter is "1" (the number of consecutive advantageous sections is "2"), the frame lamp among the animation lamps 21 is lit in blue; when the value of the advantageous section continuation counter is "2", the frame lamp is lit in yellow; and when the value of the advantageous section continuation counter is "3", the frame lamp is lit in green. In other words, by observing the animation of the frame lamp (casing) of the gaming machine 10, it becomes possible to roughly determine how many consecutive times the advantageous section's heaven mode has occurred.
Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 displays the total number of coins acquired in Heaven Mode during the previous advantageous period as an image and stores that total number of coins acquired. Then, after transitioning to the next advantageous period, if it is in Heaven Mode, it displays the cumulative value from the total number of coins acquired in Heaven Mode during the previous advantageous period as an image. If a sub-bonus is started within a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 games) from the start of the current advantageous period, it is assumed that Heaven Mode is continuing and the display of the total number of coins acquired continues.
During the Heaven Mode loop, the total number of acquired coins may be displayed even when a sub-bonus is not active, or it may be set so that the total number of acquired coins is displayed only when a sub-bonus is active.

Furthermore, when displaying the total number of acquired coins across multiple advantageous periods as an image, a predetermined image (for example, an icon) will be displayed each time the number of acquired coins increases by, for example, "+2000" coins, until the Heaven Loop is exited (the predetermined image will be changed or increased each time the number of acquired coins increases by "+2000" thereafter).
Furthermore, at the end of the advantageous period, the main control board 50 clears the parameters related to the advantageous period, but the sub-control board 80 does not clear the parameters related to the advantageous period (such as the total number of coins acquired).
However, not limited to the above, if the advantageous period is crossed, the total number of acquired coins may be reset and not carried over.

After outputting the advantageous section continuous performance in step S625, the next step S626 determines whether the advantageous section has ended or not. If it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, the process returns to step S622; if it is determined that the advantageous section has not ended, the process proceeds to step S627.
In step S627, it is determined whether or not the Heaven Mode of the advantageous section has ended. Here, if the loop of Heaven Mode has ended, it is determined that the Heaven Mode of the advantageous section has ended. If it is determined that the Heaven Mode of the advantageous section has ended, the process proceeds to step S628; if it is determined that the Heaven Mode of the advantageous section has not ended, the process returns to step S625.
In step S628, the continuous performance of the advantageous section ends. For example, if the frame lamp performance is being performed as described above, that performance ends. Also, if the total number of coins acquired since the previous advantageous section's Heaven Mode is being displayed, that display ends.
Next, proceed to step S629 to clear the advantageous section continuous counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.
As described above, by executing continuous performance sequences during the advantageous period, it is possible to show those around the player that they have won a large number of medals. In particular, in the case of medalless gaming machines, which will be discussed later, the continuous performance sequences during the advantageous period are even more effective because the actual medals won are not visible.
Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 33, the continuous performance in the advantageous section ended when Heaven Mode ended, but this is not the only option. After Heaven Mode ends, the continuous performance in the advantageous section may continue for, for example, up to around 100 games.
Furthermore, when the advantageous period ends and the game returns to the normal period, in this embodiment, the advantageous period transition lottery is almost always won on the first game of the normal period, and the game returns to the advantageous period from the next game. In this case, the advantageous period continuous performance may be executed, including the normal period between the advantageous period and the next advantageous period.
If the advantageous period continuous performance is executed even during the normal period, it can notify the player that the heaven loop is continuing even in the normal period, thus preventing the player from mistakenly stopping playing.
On the other hand, it is not necessary to perform the advantageous section continuous performance during the normal section. In this case, it is possible to prevent players from mistakenly believing that an AT lottery is being held even during the normal section.

Next, the complete function in the first embodiment will be explained. The "complete function" corresponds to the game machine's stop function (ending gameplay for the rest of the day).
In the first embodiment, firstly, the difference in the advantageous interval is counted using a difference counter.
Here, "difference in the advantageous period" refers to the difference in the number of tokens when the start of the advantageous period is set to "0". In other words, the base is the start of the advantageous period ("0"), not the difference from the minimum value during the advantageous period (MY). Therefore, when the difference becomes a negative value during the advantageous period, the negative value is counted. Also, as with the other embodiments described above, the difference counter does not count the number of games played during the normal period.
For example, the difference counter is a 2-byte decrement counter. When the difference during the advantageous period exceeds "+2400 (coins)", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met.
One example of a difference counter is to set an initial value of "+2415" (coins) (in hexadecimal, "096Fh") at the start of the advantageous period, and if the difference in the current game is negative, add that difference to the difference counter, and if the difference in the current game is positive, subtract that difference from the difference counter.
To explain in more detail, first, at the start of the advantageous period, "+2415" is set. If the difference in the first game is "-3 (coins)" (bet "3", payout "0"), "3" is added to the difference counter and updated to "+2418". On the other hand, if the difference in the first game is "+11 (coins)" (bet "3", payout "14"), "11" is subtracted from the difference counter and updated to "+2404".
When the difference counter reaches "0", it is determined that the difference during the advantageous period has exceeded "+2400" coins, and the advantageous period ends.
In the examples shown in Figures 34 and 35, which will be described later, the difference counter will increase as the difference in the game increases.

Another example of a difference counter is a method in which the start of the advantageous period is set to "0", and when the difference counter exceeds "+2400" (coins) (specifically, when the difference counter value in hexadecimal becomes "0961h" or greater), it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met.
In the difference counter and stop counter shown below, the letter "h" is added to the number when it represents a hexadecimal value. If "h" is not added to the number, it represents a decimal value. Also, if the difference counter value does not have a minus sign, it indicates a positive value.
Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the first embodiment, the number of games played during the advantageous period is not included in the conditions for ending the advantageous period, so the number of games played during the advantageous period is not counted.
In both the first and second examples described above, the difference counter is cleared when the advantageous period ends.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, secondly, a stop counter is used to count MY from the time the power is turned on. Here, "MY" is the value when the minimum value is "0", similar to the difference counter in the other embodiments described above.
The stop counter is initialized to "0000h" when the power is turned on.
And, for example, from the moment the power is turned on,
Game 1: Bet count "3", Payout count "0", Stop counter "0000h"
Second game: Bet count "3", Payout count "14", Stop counter "000Bh"
Third game: Bet count "3", Payout count "0", Stop counter "0008h"
Game 4: Bet count "3", Payout count "0", Stop counter "0005h"
Game 5: Bet count "3", Payout count "0", Stop counter "0002h"
Game 6: Bet count "3", Payout count "0", Stop counter "0000h"
:
This is the result.
In the first game described above, the difference is "-3". Adding the difference "-3" to the initial value of the stop counter "0000h" results in "FFFDh". However, if a carryover occurs, it is corrected to "0000h" each time.
Similarly, for the sixth game, the difference is "-3," so adding the difference "-3" to the stop counter "0002h" results in "FFFFh," but due to correction, it becomes "0000h."
Then, when the value of the stop counter from the time the power is turned on reaches "19000" (4A38h), the complete function is activated, stopping the game machine 10 and ending the subsequent gameplay (operation for the day).
Note that, unlike the difference counter, the stop counter counts MY even in normal intervals.

Figure 34 shows the changes in the difference counter and the stop counter in the first embodiment.
First, the point where the power is turned on and the RWM is initialized corresponds to point "A" in the diagram. At point "A" in the diagram, both the difference counter and the stop counter are "0".
Then, immediately after power-on and RWM initialization, it is in the normal period, so the normal period begins, and it is assumed that it transitions to the advantageous period at point "B" in the diagram. Therefore, at point "B" (the start of the advantageous period), the difference counter is "0". The difference counter is not updated during the normal period.

Furthermore, when the difference decreases from point "B" in the diagram and reaches point "C", the difference counter value at point "C" is "B - C". Also, the stop counter value is "0".
Then, if sub-bonuses etc. are executed during the advantageous period and the difference increases to reach point "D", and the difference "D-B" exceeds "2400", then the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met at point "D", and the advantageous period ends. The next game will be in the normal period, and if the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous period are met in the normal period, the game will transition to the advantageous period.
Next, when the player reaches point "E" in the diagram, and the stop counter value "E-C" reaches "19000", the complete function is activated, and the gaming machine 10 stops playing.

Furthermore, in Figure 34, the dashed line indicates the case where the difference continues to increase from the time the power is turned on, and the stop counter reaches "19000" in the shortest possible time.
In the diagram, "F-A" is labeled "19000".
Here, the minimum play time (the shortest time from the start of reel 31's rotation in the current game to the start of the next game's rotation) is set to "4.1" seconds.
On the other hand, the Act on Regulation of Businesses Affecting Public Morals and Proper Operation of Such Businesses (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "Public Morals Act,""Public Morals Law," or "Public Morals Business Act") defines "pachinko parlors" as "Category 4 businesses." Furthermore, the Public Morals Act does not, in principle, permit any public morals business to operate between midnight and 6 a.m. (Article 13 of the Act). For this reason, the maximum number of hours a day a pachinko parlor can operate is 18 hours. In addition, the shortest operating hours stipulated by prefectural ordinances are 13 hours.
Furthermore, although the specific calculations will be omitted, based on the aforementioned placement table and condition device, if we assume that the shortest possible transition is from the normal section to the advantageous section, and then to the sub-bonus, and that the sub-bonus continues until the difference counter exceeds "2400", and that when the difference counter exceeds "2400", the advantageous section ends and the transition is returned to the normal section, then the net increase in coins per game is set to approximately "6" coins.
In other words, if each game takes 4.1 seconds to complete and the net increase in tokens per game is 6, then the net increase in tokens per hour will be approximately 5268. Therefore, it will take approximately 3.6 hours for MY to reach 19000.
Therefore, there is a possibility that the limit counter will reach "19000" within the operating hours of one day (minimum 13 hours, maximum 18 hours).
In this way, by setting the value of the stop counter that triggers the completion function and the net increase in tokens per game so that the completion function can be activated within the daily operating hours of a pachinko parlor, it is possible to prevent excessively stimulating the gambling instincts of players.

Figure 35 shows the relationship between the difference counter and the stop counter and the power on/off state. In the graph in Figure 35, "power off" and "power on" represent simple power on/off states, and it is assumed that no RWM clear (setting change) has occurred.
As shown in Figure 35, for example, if the power is cut off while the stop counter and difference counter values are at predetermined values, and then restored, the stop counter is cleared. Therefore, after the power is restored, it starts from "0000h" (dotted line in the figure).
In contrast, the difference counter is not cleared. Therefore, after power is restored, it restarts from the value before the power outage (solid line in the figure).
Furthermore, in Figure 35, the table below shows the status of the difference counter and the stop counter when the power is turned on/off without RWM clearing and when the power is turned on/off with RWM clearing.
As mentioned above, when the power is turned on/off without RWM clearing, the difference counter is retained, but the stop counter is cleared. In contrast, when the power is turned on/off with RWM clearing enabled (for example, when changing settings), both the difference counter and the stop counter are cleared.

Furthermore, the "Complete Function Activation Flag" is a flag that turns on when the stop counter reaches "19000" and the complete function is activated. For example, it consists of one byte of data, and when it is off it is "00h", and when it is on it it is "FFh".
Furthermore, the "Complete Function Temporary Flag" is a flag that turns on when the stop counter reaches "19000" but the complete function cannot be activated, for example, when in a special game state (while the special feature is operating). This flag consists of, for example, one byte of data, and is "00h" when off and "FFh" when on.
These complete function activation flags and complete function temporary flags are configured not to be cleared by turning the power on/off without RWM clearing.

Therefore, as will be explained in more detail later, for example, when the stop counter reaches "19000" during the special game state, the complete function activation flag remains off, but the temporary complete function flag is turned on. Then, if the power is cut off before the special game state ends and then restored, the temporary complete function flag is restored in the on state. Therefore, after the power is restored from the power cut-off and the special game state ends, the complete function activation flag can be turned on, and the complete function can be activated.
However, when the RWM clear is enabled, turning the power on/off (when changing settings) will clear both the complete function activation flag and the temporary complete function flag.

Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the flow from power-on to main processing, including processing related to the complete function.
First, when the power is turned on in step S511, the power-on process is executed in the next step S512. One of the processes in this power-on process is the initialization process of a predetermined storage area. Here, in the case of power-on without RWM clearing, one of the initialization processes is the initialization process (clearing process) of the stop counter. In contrast, the initialization processes for the difference counter, the complete function activation flag, and the complete function temporary flag are not executed.
On the other hand, when the power is turned on with RWM clear enabled, the stop counter, difference counter, complete function activation flag, and complete function temporary flag are all initialized.
Next, the process proceeds to step S513, where error handling takes place. During this error handling, the process related to the complete function is executed, as will be described later.

In the next step S515, the main control board 50 executes the input and settlement acceptance process. In the next step S516, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated, and if it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, it proceeds to step S517.
In step S517, the role lottery means 61 performs a lottery for the role (winning number). Then, in the next step S518, the reel control means 65 starts rotating the reel 31.
In step S519, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated. If it determines that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S520, where the reel control means 65 controls the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 to stop.
In the next step S521, the main control board 50 determines whether all reels 31 have stopped. If it determines that all reels 31 have not stopped, it returns to step S519. If it determines that all reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S522. In step S522, the prize determination means 66 determines the winning combination. Then it proceeds to step S523, where the payout means 67 pays out the medals corresponding to the winning combination.
Next, the process proceeds to step S524, where the main control board 50 performs an update process for the ratio monitor (management information display LED 74).
Next, the process proceeds to step S525, where the main control board 50 executes the complete function calculation process. This process involves updating the stop counter and other operations, as shown in Figure 38, which will be described later.
Next, the process proceeds to step S526, where the main control board 50 executes the game state update process. Then, the process returns to step S513.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the error handling in step S513 of Figure 36.
First, in step S531, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the machine is in a special game state (with a special feature in operation). In this embodiment, even if the conditions for activating the complete function (stopping condition) are met in the special game state, the complete function will not be activated. If it is determined that the machine is in a special game state, the process proceeds to step S537, where error processing other than the process related to the complete function activation is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S531 that the machine is not in a special game state, the process proceeds to step S532. In step S532, the complete function activation flag is read. Then, in the next step S533, it is determined whether or not the complete function activation flag is "FFh" (on). If it is determined to be "FFh", the process proceeds to step S534, and if it is determined not to be "FFh", the process proceeds to step S537.

In step S534, the main control board 50 notifies that the complete function has been activated. This process involves transmitting an activation signal for the complete function to the sub-control board 80, and then notifying the completion of the complete function via the image display device 23 or the like.
Next, the process proceeds to step S535, where the main control board 50 executes the automatic settlement process. Note that it is optional whether or not to perform automatic settlement of credited medals when the complete function is activated. If automatic settlement is to be performed when the complete function is activated, the automatic settlement process is executed in step S535. On the other hand, if automatic settlement is not to be performed when the complete function is activated, the process in step S535 is not executed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S536, where a complete signal is output externally. This terminates the error processing. Also, when the process proceeds to step S536, the process does not proceed to steps S515 onwards in Figure 36. As a result, the operation switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42) are not accepted, and the game cannot proceed.
In this example, the process related to the activation of the complete function was executed within the error handling in step S513. However, this is not limited to this; for example, the process related to the activation of the complete function may be provided independently as the process following the error handling, and the processes in steps S531 to S536 in Figure 37 may be executed.

Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the process for calculating the complete function in step S525 of Figure 36.
First, in step S541, the main control board 50 determines whether the temporary complete function flag is on (FFh). If it determines that the temporary complete function flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S542; if it determines that it is on, the process proceeds to step S548.
In step S542, the main control board 50 determines whether the complete function activation flag is on (FFh). If it determines that it is on, that is, that the complete function is already activated, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. This is because if the complete function is already activated, the update process of the stop counter and other operations are not performed.
If it is determined in step S542 that the complete function activation flag is not on and the process proceeds to step S543, the main control board 50 determines whether or not replay is in progress. In this embodiment, the stop counter is not updated while replay is in progress, so if it is determined that replay is in progress, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
If it is determined that the re-play function is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S544. In step S544, the stop counter is updated based on the number of bets and payouts for the current game.

In the next step, S545, it is determined whether the stop counter has become less than "0", that is, whether a carry-over has occurred. If it is determined that the stop counter is not less than "0", the process proceeds to step S546, and if it is determined that it is less than "0", the process proceeds to step S551.
In step S551, the stop counter value is corrected to "0". This makes the minimum value of MY "0". Then the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when proceeding from step S545 to step S546, the main control board 50 determines whether the stop counter value has reached "19000". As described above, if the stop counter value is "4A38h" or greater, it is determined that it has reached "19000". If it is determined that the stop counter has reached "19000", the process proceeds to step S547, and if it is determined that it has not reached "19000", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S547, the temporary flag for the complete function is turned on (FFh). Next, the game proceeds to step S548 to determine whether the current game is in a special game state (such as during a 1BB game or an RB game). Note that if the special game state ends during the current game (for example, if it was the final game of a 1BB game), the special game state has ended at the time of step S525, so it is determined that the game is not in a special game state.
When it is determined that the game is in a special game state, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. Therefore, in the special game state, when the stop counter reaches "19000", the temporary complete function flag is turned on in step S547, but since step S549 is not passed, the complete function activation flag is not turned on (FFh). For this reason, the complete function does not activate in the special game state.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S548 that the game is not in a special game state, the process proceeds to step S549. In step S549, the main control board 50 turns on the complete function activation flag (FFh). Next, the process proceeds to step S550, where the temporary complete function flag is turned off (00h). Then the process according to this flowchart ends. When the complete function activation flag is turned on in step S549, the complete function is activated at the start of the next game according to steps S513 in Figure 36 and Figure 37.
Furthermore, in the special game state, if the temporary complete function flag is turned on in step S547, the temporary complete function flag will remain on (the complete function activation flag will be off) until the special game state ends, at which point the complete function activation flag will be turned on (step S549) and the temporary complete function flag will be turned off (step S550).

Next, we will explain the image control by the sub-control board 80 related to the complete function.
Figure 39 shows images that foreshadow (pre-notify) the activation of the complete function, with (a) being the game screen, (b) being the demonstration screen, and (c) being the menu screen.
The sub-control board 80 independently counts the end-of-game counter after power-on. However, it is not limited to this, and the main control board 50 may also transmit the end-of-game counter value to the sub-control board 80 at the end of each game.
Furthermore, if the complete function were to suddenly activate when the stop counter reaches "19000," it would be a surprise attack on the player. Therefore, when the activation of the complete function is approaching, the player will be notified of its activation.

The sub-control board 80 will announce the activation of the complete function when the stop counter reaches "18900", in other words, when there are "100" remaining until the complete function is activated.
As shown in (a), (b), and (c) of the figure, whether it is the game screen, demonstration screen, or menu screen, it will display, for example, "100 coins remaining until the complete function is activated".
Furthermore, if the stop counter reaches, for example, "+11" during the next game, the notification image for the activation of the complete function will be updated to display "89 coins remaining until the complete function is activated." In this way, the notification for the activation of the complete function is made so that the quantitative changes until the activation condition for the complete function (the stop counter reaching "19000") is met can be visually recognized.
In the diagram, the area of the preview image for the activation of the complete function is shown with a dot pattern, and this dot pattern area represents the foremost layer. Therefore, for example, if there is an overlapping area between a predetermined display on the screen and the preview image for the activation of the complete function, the preview image for the activation of the complete function will be displayed in that overlapping area, and the predetermined image (background layer) will not be displayed.
In other drawings described later, the area indicated by the dot pattern refers to the frontmost layer.

In the example above, when the complete function is activated when the stop counter reaches "19000", the system notified the user that the complete function would be activated when the stop counter reached "18900".
If, after the announcement of the completion function activation, the stop counter value reaches "19000" without decreasing, the announcement of the completion function activation will continue from the time the stop counter reaches "18900" until it reaches "19000".
In contrast, if the stop counter reaches "18900" and then decreases, and the value of the stop counter becomes a predetermined value, the notification of the completion function activation will be terminated.
In this case, if the stop counter fluctuates up or down as the game progresses, with "18900" as the threshold, the state in which the complete function is announced and the state in which it is not announced will frequently switch, for example, the announcement image for the complete function may be displayed or not displayed.
Therefore, in this embodiment, once the activation of the complete function is announced, the announcement of the activation of the complete function is maintained until the stop counter falls below a predetermined value (18850 in this embodiment).

Figure 40 shows the transition between sections where the activation of the complete function is announced in advance and sections where it is not. In the figure, the solid line represents the section where the activation of the complete function is announced in advance, and the dashed line represents the section where it is not announced.
In Figure 40, when the value of the stop counter reaches "A" (MY1 = "18900"), the conditions for signaling the activation of the complete function are met, and the activation of the complete function is signaled from this point onward.
As the game progresses, at point "B" in the diagram, the value of the stop counter falls below "MY1 (18900)," but the notification of the complete function activation continues.
Then, at point "C" in the diagram, if the value of the stop counter falls below "MY2 (18850)", the notification of the completion function activation ends, and the system transitions to a section without notification.

Once the system enters a non-warning phase, it will not enter a phase that warns of the completion function activation until the stop counter reaches "18900" (MY1). In the example in Figure 40, the stop counter reaches "18900" (MY1) at point "D" in the figure, and the system enters a phase that warns of the completion function activation again.
Please note that once the stop counter reaches "19000", the complete function will activate, and the warning about the activation of the complete function will end.
Furthermore, the difference between the stop counter "MY1," which is the section in which the complete function is announced, and the stop counter "MY2," which is the section in which the complete function is not announced, is set to "50" in this example. Here, it is preferable that "MY1-MY2" is greater than the maximum difference in one game (11 coins in the first embodiment). This prevents the section in which the complete function is announced and the section in which it is not announced from (frequently) switching within a single game.

Figure 41 shows an example of displaying the Complete function activation as an image across the entire screen. In the figure, the dot pattern display area is the image display area for the Complete function activation. Therefore, when the Complete function is displayed as an image across the entire screen as in this example, the previous game screen and other elements become completely invisible.
Here, when the complete function is activated, there are two possibilities: automatic settlement is performed or automatic settlement is not performed. When the complete function is activated, the bet switch 40, start switch 41, and stop switch 42 are disabled, and the game cannot be played any further. However, for gaming machines 10 that allow the settlement switch 43 to be operated, all stored tokens can be discharged into the token tray by operating the settlement switch 43 after the complete function is activated. In this case, a message prompting settlement is displayed as shown in Figure (a).
On the other hand, if the complete function is activated, and automatic settlement is performed, all stored tokens will be automatically discharged into the token tray without the player having to operate the settlement switch 43. In this case, as shown in Figure (b), a message indicating that automatic settlement is in progress will be displayed.
Furthermore, in the case of a "medalless gaming machine" as described in the 18th embodiment later (Figure 52), operating the counting switch 47 transmits the gaming medium (electronic medals) stored in the gaming machine 10 to the dispensing unit 200. In the case of a medalless gaming machine, when the complete function is activated, it is necessary to operate the counting switch 47 to transmit the gaming medium to the dispensing unit 200. In this case, as shown in Figure (c), a display prompting counting is shown.

Figure 42 shows an example of displaying the Complete function activation as an image in a specific area. In the figure, the area displaying the dot pattern is the image display area for the Complete function activation.
Figure (a) shows an example where the complete function is activated during a sub-bonus game (AT). The image layer for the complete function activation is displayed overlaid on the game screen layer. Therefore, in areas where the game image and the complete function activation image overlap, the complete function activation image is displayed on top. Alternatively, the complete function activation image may be made transparent so that the game screen is visible below the complete function activation image.
Furthermore, if the game screen is left unattended for a predetermined amount of time, it will transition to a demonstration screen as shown in Figure (b). Even when transitioning to the demonstration screen, the image indicating the completion function has been activated will not be erased and will continue to be displayed. In addition, in areas where the image on the demonstration screen and the image indicating the completion function have overlapped, the image indicating the completion function has been displayed as the foreground layer.
Furthermore, it is possible to switch to the menu screen even after activating the complete function. Even when switching to the menu screen, the image from the complete function activation is not erased and continues to be displayed. In addition, in areas where the menu screen image and the complete function activation image overlap, the complete function activation image is displayed as the foreground layer.

Figure 43 shows an example of when the stop counter reaches "19000" during a special game state (for example, during a 1BB game or RB game), where (a) shows a time chart and (b) and (c) show examples of image display.
The first embodiment is a gameplay feature that allows the execution of a sub-bonus (AT) on the premise that 1BB is inside (1BB is not awarded). In contrast, the example in Figure 43 shows an example where, for example, 1BB or RB (special feature) is awarded during gameplay, and the stop counter reaches "19000" while in a special game state (during 1BB gameplay or RB gameplay).
In Figure (a), at the start of the special game state, the stop counter is less than "18900", the temporary complete function flag is off, and the complete function activation flag is off. First, when the stop counter reaches "18900", the sub-control board 80 displays an image that foreshadows the activation of the complete function. Figure (b) shows this image. On the game screen in the special game state, the image foreshadowing the activation of the complete function is superimposed on a portion of the screen.
Next, when the stop counter reaches "19000" in the special game mode, the temporary flag for the complete function is turned on. However, because it is in the special game mode, the flag for activating the complete function remains off.
Furthermore, based on the fact that the temporary flag for the complete function has been turned on, the sub-control board 80 displays an image indicating that the operation of the complete function is in standby mode (the complete function will be activated after the special game state ends). Figure (c) shows the image at this time. Therefore, based on the fact that the stop counter has reached "19000", the image displayed in Figure (b) changes to the image displayed in Figure (c).
This configuration allows the player to be informed that the stop counter has reached "19000" during the special game state (meaning they cannot play any further that day), thus preventing disputes between the pachinko parlor staff and the player when the game machine 10 stops after the special game state ends.

When the special game state ends, the complete function activation flag is turned on (the temporary complete function flag is turned off). As a result, the image switches from the image shown in Figure (c) to the images shown in Figures 41 and 42(a), for example.
In addition, when the stop counter reaches "19000" in the special game state, the stop counter count will end. However, even if the number of acquired medals decreases afterward (for example, assuming that the count continued without ending after the stop counter reached "19000", and the count value falls below "19000" at the end of the special game state), the temporary complete function flag remains on and the complete function activation flag remains on at the end of the special game state.
In the example shown in Figure 38, when the temporary flag for the complete function is on (Yes in step S541), step S544 is not taken, and therefore the stop counter is not updated. In this case, even if the number of medals acquired decreases during the subsequent special game state, the stop counter will not change.
However, this is not the only way; the stop counter may also be updated after the temporary complete function flag is turned on. In this case, even if the stop counter is less than "19000" at the end of the special game state, if the temporary complete function flag was turned on during the special game state, the complete function activation flag will be turned on at the end of the special game state, and the game machine 10 will be stopped.

Furthermore, in Figure 43, if the power is cut off after the stop counter reaches "19000" but before the special game state ends, and then the power is turned on and the special game state ends, the complete function will be activated at the end of the special game state. When the stop counter reaches "19000" during the special game state, the complete function activation flag is not turned on, but the temporary complete function flag is turned on. The stop counter is cleared by turning the power on/off, but the temporary complete function flag is not cleared by turning the power on/off. Therefore, after the power is turned on and before the special game state ends, the temporary complete function flag is on and the complete function activation flag is off. Then, when the special game state ends, the temporary complete function flag is turned off and the complete function activation flag is turned on, and the complete function is activated.
With this configuration, even if a power outage occurs after the stop counter reaches "19000" but the gaming machine 10 has not yet been stopped (for example, when the stop counter reaches "19000" during a special game state), and then the power is restored and the stop counter is cleared, the gaming machine 10 can still be stopped based on the temporary complete function flag and the complete function activation flag, thereby preventing excessive stimulation of the player's gambling instincts.

Figure 44 is a time chart showing an example where the complete function is in a state of advance notification (pre-announcement) (for example, the state shown in Figure 43(b)), and the complete function is activated after payout (a game in which the stop counter reaches "19000"; the same applies hereinafter), but a power outage occurs and the payout process is completed before the power outage process begins.
First, let's assume that while the machine is in a state where the complete function is about to activate, the stop switch 42 is operated, the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, and the payout process is performed. Then, let's assume that a power outage occurs just before the end of the payout process, and the payout process is completed before the power outage process begins.
Once the payout process is complete, the stop counter is updated, and when the stop counter reaches "19000", the system transitions from the "notice" state for the complete function to the "operated" state. A power outage occurs around the moment of this transition from the notice state to the operated state, but the system is in the operated state before the power outage process begins. Therefore, the complete function activation flag is turned on before the power outage process begins.
Once the power-off process is complete, the power will turn off.
Next, when the power is turned on, the power-on process is executed. After the power-on process is complete, the device returns to the complete function activated state. As mentioned above, when the power is turned on/off, the stop counter is cleared, but the complete function activation flag is not cleared. Therefore, the value of the complete function activation flag is read during the power-on process, and if the complete function activation flag is on, the device enters the complete function activated state.

Figure 45 is a time chart showing an example where the game is in a state of notification for the activation of the complete function, and the complete function is activated after a payout, but a power outage occurs in the middle of the payout process, and the power outage process begins.
Figure 45 illustrates Example 1 (a) and Example 2 (b), but first, let's explain Example 1 (a).
Assume that in the state where the complete function is indicated to be activated, the stop switch 42 is operated, the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, and the payout process is performed. Then, a power outage occurs in the middle of the payout process, and the power outage process begins before the entire payout process is completed (before all medals are dispensed). Therefore, when the power outage process is completed and the power is turned off, the stop counter has not reached "19000". For this reason, the power is turned off while the state where the complete function is indicated to be activated remains unchanged. In other words, the complete function activation flag is off when the power is turned off.
In the event of a power outage, the partially completed payout process and the notification state for the completion function activation are backed up.

Next, when the power is turned on, the power-on process is executed. Once the power-on process is complete, the payout process continues based on the backup data. Also, based on the backup data from when the power was lost, the system returns to the state where the complete function is expected to activate.
When the payout process is completed, the stop counter is updated, but the stop counter is cleared when the power is turned off. Therefore, even if the payout process continues after the power is turned on and the stop counter is updated, the stop counter will not reach "19000". Furthermore, the value of the stop counter has not reached the value required to enter the state of warning for the complete function to activate (for example, "18900" in the example of Figure 40). Therefore, after the payout process is completed, the state of warning for the complete function to activate does not occur, and the machine returns to the normal state.
Furthermore, Example 2 in Figure (b) is an example in which the notification state for the complete function operation is not backed up when the power is lost.
Therefore, after power-on, the device does not revert to the state indicating the complete function is activated. Consequently, once the power-on process is complete, it returns to the normal state.
Note that Figure 45 shows the state in which the complete function is about to be activated, and this also applies even if the complete function is not activated after payout (i.e., the stop counter does not reach "19000").
Furthermore, in Example 2 of Figure (b), the state indicating the activation of the complete function is backed up when the power is lost, but the system may be configured to clear the state indicating the activation of the complete function when the power is restored. This processing is also the same for Figures 46(b), 47(b), and 48(b) which will be described later.

Figure 46 is a time chart showing an example where the game is in a state of warning for the activation of the complete function, and in a game where the complete function is activated after a payout, a power outage occurs before the player releases their hand from the final stop switch, and the power outage process is executed when the payout process is partially completed.
Figure 46 illustrates Example 1 (a) and Example 2 (b), but first, let's explain Example 1 (a).
Assume that in the state where the complete function is about to be activated, the stop switch 42 is operated, the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, and the payout process is performed. Here, assume that the power cut occurs before the hand is released from the last stop switch 42. Furthermore, assume that the power cut process starts before all of the payout process is completed (before all medals are dispensed). Therefore, at the time the power cut process is completed and the power is turned off, the stop counter has not reached "19000". For this reason, the power is turned off while the state where the complete function is about to be activated remains.
In the event of a power outage, the partially completed payout process and the notification state for the completion function activation are backed up.

Next, when the power is turned on and the power-on process is executed, the payout process continues based on the backup data. Also, based on the backup data from when the power was lost, the system returns to the state where the complete function is about to activate.
When the payout process is completed, the stop counter is updated, but the stop counter is cleared when the power is turned off. Therefore, even if the payout process continues after the power is turned on and the stop counter is updated, the stop counter will not reach "19000". Furthermore, the value of the stop counter has not reached the value required to enter the state of warning for the complete function to activate. Therefore, after the payout process is completed, the state of warning for the complete function to activate does not occur, and the machine returns to the normal state.
Furthermore, Example 2 in Figure (b) is an example in which the notification state for the complete function operation is not backed up when the power is lost.
Therefore, after power-on, the device does not revert to the state indicating the complete function is activated. Consequently, once the power-on process is complete, it returns to the normal state.
Note that Figure 46 shows the state in which the complete function is about to activate, and this also applies even if the complete function does not activate after payout (i.e., the stop counter does not reach "19000").
Furthermore, comparing the example in Figure 45 with the example in Figure 46, the results are identical. In the example in Figure 45, the power outage occurs after the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, while in the example in Figure 46, the hand is released from the last stop switch 42 after the power outage occurs.
In all cases, the power-off process is terminated midway through the payout process. As a result, after power is turned back on, the payout process continues, and if the notification state for the complete function activation is backed up, the system returns to the notification state for the complete function activation. However, because the stop counter has been cleared, the system then returns to the normal state.
The following two methods can be used to update the stop counter when the power is turned on/off.
The first method involves updating the payout counter based on the number of payouts and bets in the game.
Another method involves updating the payout counter based on the number of coins dispensed after the power is turned on.
For example, in a game where 3 coins are bet and 10 coins are paid out, if the power cut-off process is completed when 5 of the 10 coins have been paid out, and then the power is turned back on and the remaining coins are paid out,
If the first method is adopted, the stop counter will be updated by a difference of 7 after the power is turned on.
This simplifies the process because, even if the power is turned on or off during the dispensing process, the same difference can be updated as if the power had not been turned on or off. However, there may be cases where the value of the stop counter updated after power-on does not match the number of coins dispensed after power-on.
Furthermore, if the second method is adopted, the stop counter will be updated for the five coins dispensed after the power is turned on.
This ensures that the updated stop counter value after power-on matches the number of coins dispensed after power-on, preventing confusion for players when a notification of the complete function activation is displayed after power-on.

Figure 47 is a time chart showing an example where the player releases their hand from the last stop switch immediately before the power-off process begins (T1) or after the power-off process begins (T2) in a game where the complete function is in a state of being indicative of activation, and the complete function is activated after a payout.
The result is the same whether you release your hand from the last stop switch immediately before the start of the power-off process (T1), or between the end of the power-off process and before the power is turned on (T2).
Figure 46 illustrates Example 1 (a) and Example 2 (b), but first, let's explain Example 1 (a).
In the state where the complete function is about to be activated, suppose the hand is released from the last stop switch 42 immediately before the start of the power-off process (T1) or after the power-off process (T2) after the stop switch 42 has been operated. When the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, the payout process is executed, but since the hand is released from the last stop switch 42 immediately before the start of the power-off process (T1) or after the power-off process (T2), the power-off process is completed before the payout process begins.
Therefore, at the point when the power-off process is complete and the power is turned off, the stop counter has not reached "19000". As a result, the power is turned off while the device remains in the state of being in the "complete function activation" warning state.
Furthermore, in the event of a power outage, the system will back up information regarding any winning combinations and the status of the completion function activation.

Next, when the power is turned on and the power-on process is executed, the payout process is performed based on the backup data. Also, based on the backup data from when the power was lost, the system returns to a state indicating that the complete function is about to be activated.
When the payout process is completed, the stop counter is updated, but the stop counter is cleared when the power is turned off. Therefore, even if the payout process is executed after the power is turned on and the stop counter is updated, the stop counter will not reach "19000". Furthermore, the value of the stop counter has not reached the value required to enter the state of warning for the complete function to activate. Therefore, after the payout process is completed, the state of warning for the complete function to activate does not occur, and the machine returns to the normal state.
Furthermore, Example 2 in Figure (b) is an example in which the notification state for the complete function operation is not backed up when the power is lost.
Therefore, after power-on, the device does not revert to the state indicating the complete function is activated. Consequently, once the power-on process is complete, it returns to the normal state.

Figure 48 is a time chart showing the state of warning for the complete function to activate, illustrating an example where the hand is released from the last stop switch after a power outage and after power is restored.
Even if the hand is released from the last stop switch 42 after a power outage and after power is restored, the result will be the same as in the example shown in Figure 47 above.
Specifically, (a) as in Example 1, if the state indicating the completion function is activated is backed up when the power is cut off, the system will return to the state indicating the completion function is activated based on the backup data after the power-on process and before the end of the payout process. Then, after the end of the payout process, it will transition to the normal state.
In contrast, (b) as in Example 2, if the notification state for the complete function operation is not backed up when the power is cut off, the system will return to the normal state after the power-on process.

Figure 49 is a time chart showing an example where a power outage occurs while the machine is in a state where the complete function is indicated to be activated during a sub-bonus. In this example, it is assumed that there are no payout processes before or after the power outage.
During the sub-bonus, the game is in a state where the complete function is about to activate, so the remaining number of coins until the complete function is activated is displayed as an image. For example, the image displayed is as shown in Figure 43(b). In addition, the number of coins acquired during the sub-bonus is also displayed as an image.
If the power is lost while the remaining number of coins until the complete function is activated and the number of coins acquired during the sub-bonus are being displayed as images, and then the power is turned back on, the power-on process is executed. Once the power-on process is complete, the stop counter is cleared, so the value of the stop counter does not reach the value required to enter the state where the complete function is about to be activated. As a result, the state where the complete function is about to be activated does not occur. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the remaining number of coins until the complete function is activated is not displayed as an image.
On the other hand, once the power-on process is complete, the number of coins acquired during the sub-bonus is displayed as an image based on the backup data.
Based on the above, before the power is turned off, the remaining number of coins until the complete function is activated and the number of coins acquired during the sub-bonus are displayed as images, but after the power is turned on, the number of coins acquired during the sub-bonus is displayed as an image.

Figure 50 shows an example where a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement after a payout process, when the system notifies the user of the impending activation of the complete function, and the complete function is activated after the payout process and the activation of the complete function is notified. (a) shows the time chart, and (b) to (d) show the image display content.
In Figure (a), when the payout process is completed while the notification of the completion function's activation is displayed, the stop counter reaches "19000" and the completion function activation flag is turned on. This notifies the user that the completion function has been activated. In Figure (b), "Complete function activated. Please call an attendant" is an example of a notification indicating the activation of the completion function.
Furthermore, in this example, similar to the example in Figure 41(b), it is assumed that automatic settlement occurs when the complete function is activated. Therefore, when the activation of the complete function is notified, automatic settlement begins. Figure (b) shows an example where the activation of the complete function is notified, and the fact that automatic settlement is in progress is also notified.

Next, if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement, the hopper empty error is notified. Figure (c) shows an example where the operation of the complete function is notified, and the occurrence of a hopper empty error is also notified.
Then, once the hopper empty error is resolved and automatic settlement is complete, only the activation of the complete function is announced, as shown in Figure (d).
In the case of (c) in the figure, if priority is given to the occurrence of a hopper empty error, the notification for the hopper empty error may be displayed larger than the notification for the activation of the complete function. Alternatively, if priority is given to the notification for the activation of the complete function, the notification for the activation of the complete function may be displayed larger than the notification for the hopper empty error.

Figure 51 shows an example where the system notifies the user of the completion function before it is activated, and the system notifies the user of the completion function after the automatic settlement process, in which case the system activates after the payout process. Furthermore, the figure shows an example where a hopper empty error occurs during the automatic settlement. (a) shows the time chart, and (b) to (d) show the image display content.
In Figure 51, the difference from Figure 50 is that the completion function is not notified during automatic settlement after the dispensing process, but is notified after the automatic settlement.
In Figure (a), while the system is notifying the system of the impending activation of the complete function, once the payout process is completed, the stop counter reaches "19000", and the complete function activation flag is turned on. Next, before the activation of the complete function is notified, the automatic settlement process is executed, and a message indicating that automatic settlement is in progress is displayed. Figure (b) shows the state at this time.

In the example shown in Figure 37, if it is determined in step S533 that the complete function activation flag is on, the process proceeds to step S534, where the activation of the complete function is announced. Next, the process proceeds to step S535, where the automatic settlement process is executed. Therefore, this flowchart example is the same as the example shown in Figure 50.
In contrast, when processing as shown in Figure 51, if it is determined in step S533 in Figure 37 that the complete function activation flag is on, the process proceeds to step S535 to execute the automatic settlement process. After the automatic settlement process, the process proceeds to step S534 to notify that the complete function has been activated.
Then, if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement, the display switches from "Automatic settlement in progress" to "Hopper empty error," as shown in Figure (c).
Once the hopper empty error is resolved and automatic settlement is complete, the completion function is indicated as shown in Figure (d).
By configuring it in this way, the system will not notify the player that the complete function has been activated if the automatic settlement is not yet complete. This prevents players from stopping playing and incurring losses before the automatic settlement is finished.

In the example shown in Figure 51, once the payout process is complete, the stop counter reaches "19000," at which point the complete function activation flag is turned on, and the complete function is activated. However, the activation of the complete function is not announced during the automatic settlement process that takes place after the payout process.
In this case, if a power outage occurs during an automatic settlement process due to a hopper empty error, and then the power is restored and the hopper empty error is resolved, the system will notify that automatic settlement is in progress before the automatic settlement process is completed (without notifying that the complete function has been activated), and will notify that the complete function has been activated once the automatic settlement process is complete.
As a result, even if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement when the complete function is activated, and the power is cut off while the hopper empty error is occurring, it is possible to stop the game machine 10 based on the complete function activation flag and the temporary complete function flag after the hopper empty error is cleared, thereby preventing excessive stimulation of the player's gambling instincts.

Next, the power restoration process in the sub-control board 80 in the first embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the screen displayed upon recovery from a power outage is made different depending on whether the game state before the power outage was favorable to the player or not.
Here, "a game state favorable to the player" may include not only the sub-bonus (AT) phase, but also the pre-bonus phase of the sub-bonus (AT) and so-called chance zones (CZ) where the probability of winning the AT is high. In the case of the pre-bonus phase, this includes both cases where the player is notified of winning the sub-bonus (AT) and cases where they are not.
However, "a game state that is advantageous to the player" does not include a simple advantageous period (when the player has not won an AT).
Furthermore, although it differs from the specifications of the first embodiment, in the case of a specification in which a special game is executed by awarding a winning special role (transitioning to a special game state), the "game state advantageous to the player" may not be limited to the special game state, but may also include the internal state in which the winning special role is carried over. Moreover, in the case of the internal state, both cases in which the winning of a special role is notified and cases in which it is not notified are included.

In this embodiment, if the game was not in a favorable state for the player before the power was cut off, the game standby screen (normal recovery screen) is displayed after the power is restored. Conversely, if the game was in a favorable state for the player before the power was cut off, a predetermined recovery screen is displayed. This allows, for example, a hall employee to determine, when turning on the power to the game machine 10, whether the game ended in a favorable state for the player at the end of the hall's business the previous day (when the power was cut off). They can then appropriately choose whether to change the settings and start business in the normal state, or to start business in a favorable state for the player without changing the settings.
Furthermore, if the complete function activation screen was displayed before the power was cut off, it almost always indicates that the game was in a favorable state for the player before the power was cut off. However, if the game was in a favorable state for the player and the complete function activation screen was displayed before the power was cut off, the complete function activation screen will be displayed with priority over the standard recovery screen after the power is restored. This allows the hall staff to be notified that the game cannot be played without changing the settings.

The main control board 50 transmits information to the sub-control board 80, such as the current game state, whether a sub-bonus (AT) has been won, and whether a special role has been won. Based on this information, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the current game state is advantageous to the player. For example, it sets up a flag that turns on when the state is advantageous to the player (including during the pre-bonus sequence and internal state mentioned above) and stores whether the game state is advantageous to the player or not.
Furthermore, if a predetermined error (such as a selector error or a door opening error) occurs while the predetermined recovery screen is being displayed, the system will switch to the error screen instead of the predetermined recovery screen in order to prioritize notification of the predetermined error. However, a message indicating that a predetermined error has occurred may be displayed on a part of the predetermined recovery screen. Alternatively, a message indicating that the predetermined recovery screen is currently being displayed may be displayed on a part of the error screen. In other words, if a message indicating that a predetermined error has occurred while the predetermined recovery screen is being displayed is to be displayed, both the predetermined recovery screen and the error screen may be displayed in a way that allows them to be distinguished.
Furthermore, if the power is lost while the reel 31 is rotating and then restored, the error screen will not be displayed while the reel 31 is rotating, and the error will be announced only after the reel 31 has completely stopped. However, the system is not limited to this, and the error may be announced while the reel 31 is rotating.

When the complete function activation screen is displayed, it will not be erased unless the power is turned on/off, which involves changing settings.
In contrast, the display of the predetermined recovery screen ends when the game starts (when the start switch 41 is operated). However, it does not end with betting alone.
Furthermore, after the power is turned on and the predetermined recovery screen is displayed, if a predetermined time has elapsed, the display of the predetermined recovery screen will end and the system will switch to the demonstration screen.
Here, let T1 be the time from when the game standby screen is displayed until the demonstration screen is displayed, and let T2 be the time from when the predetermined return screen is displayed until the demonstration screen is displayed.
T2 > T1
It is structured in such a way.

As a result, when the power is turned on in the hall, if the system returns to the predetermined recovery screen, the time it takes to transition to the demonstration screen is longer than the time it takes to transition to the game standby screen (the game screen displayed after all games have stopped during gameplay, and is not a dedicated screen. It is also a different screen from the demonstration screen). Therefore, hall staff can more easily notice that the predetermined recovery screen is being displayed.
Furthermore, if no operation is performed for a predetermined period of time after the end of the game (such as after all reels 31 have stopped or after the payout process has finished), the system will switch to displaying a demonstration screen. When the time from the end of the game to the display of the demonstration screen is defined as T0,
T0 ≈ T1
That is the case.
therefore,
T2 > T0
That is the case.

Furthermore, after transitioning from the game standby screen or the designated return screen to the demonstration screen, if a bet operation is performed, the display of the demonstration screen ends and the system returns to the game standby screen. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated from the game standby screen, the game start screen (the normal presentation screen displayed at the start of the game) is displayed.
Furthermore, if a bet operation is performed while the demonstration screen is displayed and the game transitions to the game waiting screen, the game will not transition back to the demonstration screen even after time has passed.

Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of the recovery screen after a power outage in the sub-control board 80.
First, in step S561, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not it is in setting change mode. When the power is turned on in setting change mode, the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that it is in setting change mode, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not it is in setting change mode based on the receipt of this command.
If it is determined that the system is not in settings change mode, the process proceeds to step S562. If it is determined that the system is in settings change mode, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In this way, when the system is in settings change mode, it transitions to settings change mode without displaying a predetermined recovery screen or the like (a screen specific to settings change mode is displayed).

When the process proceeds from step S561 to step S562, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the complete function operation screen was displayed before the power was cut off. Information on whether or not the operation of the complete function was being notified is also backed up when the power is cut off. If it is determined that the complete function operation screen was not displayed before the power was cut off, the process proceeds to step S563; if it is determined that it was displayed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S563, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the game state before the power outage was favorable to the player. As described above, the sub-control board 80 stores whether the game state was favorable to the player based on the information transmitted from the main control board 50. When the power is out, it backs up this information, and when the power is turned on, it reads this information and determines the game state before the power outage. If it determines that the game state before the power outage was favorable to the player, it proceeds to step S564; if it determines that it was not favorable to the player, it proceeds to step S572.

When the process proceeds to step S564, that is, if the complete function activation screen was not displayed before the power was cut off, and the state before the power was cut off was favorable to the player, the sub-control board 80 displays a predetermined recovery screen. Then the process proceeds to step S565.
In step S565, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a medal has been bet. If it determines that a medal has been bet, it proceeds to step S576; if it determines that no medal has been bet, it proceeds to step S566.
In step S566, the sub-control board 80 determines whether time T2 has elapsed since the start of displaying the predetermined recovery screen. If it determines that time T2 has elapsed, it proceeds to step S567; if it determines that time T2 has not elapsed, it returns to step S565.
When the process proceeds to step S567, the sub-control board 80 ends the display of the predetermined recovery screen and starts displaying the demonstration screen. Next, the process proceeds to step S568, where the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a medal has been bet. If it determines that a medal has been bet, the process proceeds to step S569. In other words, the demonstration screen continues until a medal is bet. When it is determined that a medal has been bet and the process proceeds to step S569, the sub-control board 80 displays the game standby screen.

After displaying the game standby screen in step S569, the process proceeds to step S570, where the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. In other words, in step S570, it is determined whether or not the game has started. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S571, where the game start screen is displayed. Then the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, after displaying a predetermined recovery screen in step S564, if it is determined in step S565 that a medal has been bet and the system proceeds to step S576, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. Note that at the stage of step S576, the predetermined recovery screen is displayed. If it is determined in step S576 that the start switch 41 has been operated, the system proceeds to step S571 to display the game start screen. Conversely, if it is determined in step S576 that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the system proceeds to step S577. In step S577, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not time T2 has elapsed since the start of displaying the predetermined recovery screen. If it is determined that time T2 has elapsed, the system proceeds to step S578; if it is determined that time T2 has not elapsed, the system returns to step S576.
When the process proceeds to step S578, the sub-control board 80 finishes displaying the predetermined recovery screen and starts displaying the demonstration screen. Next, the process proceeds to step S579, where the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S571 to display the game start screen.

On the other hand, if in step S563 it is determined that the game state before the power was cut off was not a game state favorable to the player, and the process proceeds to step S572, the sub-control board 80 displays the game standby screen. Next, the process proceeds to step S573, where the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a medal has been bet. If it is determined that a medal has been bet, the process proceeds to step S575. If it is determined that no medal has been bet, the process proceeds to step S574. In step S574, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not time T1 has elapsed since the start of displaying the game standby screen. As mentioned above, "time T1 < time T2". If it is determined that time T1 has not elapsed, the process returns to step S573 and maintains the game standby screen. Conversely, if it is determined that time T1 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S567 and displays the demonstration screen.
Furthermore, if it is determined in step S573 that a medal has been bet and the system proceeds to step S575, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the system proceeds to step S571 and displays the game start screen.
Furthermore, if, after displaying the predetermined recovery screen in step S564, it is determined in step S565 that a bet has been placed before it is determined in step S566 that time T2 has elapsed, the system may proceed to step S579 (instead of step S576). In other words, after a bet has been placed, the demonstration screen may not be displayed even after time T2 has elapsed, and the predetermined recovery screen may be maintained until the start switch 41 is operated.
Alternatively, after displaying the predetermined recovery screen in step S564, the display of the predetermined recovery screen may be maintained until a bet is placed and the start switch 41 is operated. In other words, after step S564, the process proceeds to step S570, and the display of the predetermined recovery screen may be maintained in step S570 until a bet is placed and the start switch 41 is operated.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows.
(1) In the above embodiment, when a sub-bonus is won, the sub-bonus is started after a predetermined number of pre-bonus games and simulated games (games where "red 7" symbols are aligned). However, the game is not limited to this, and a simulated game may be performed in the next game after the game in which the sub-bonus was won, and then the game may proceed to the sub-bonus.
(2) In the above embodiment, the game in which the winning number "2" (Replay B) is selected is designated as the game in which the sub-bonus is awarded, and the goal is to get the "Red 7" combination by pressing the buttons in reverse order.
However, even if the winning number is "1" (Replay A), since the winning combination includes Replay 04, it may be possible to display "Red 7" (Replay 04) by pressing the buttons in reverse order.
Furthermore, since the winning number "1" is won with a probability of approximately "1/7.3", if the winning number "1" is won after winning a sub-bonus, the game will display an animation prompting players to aim for a "red 7" combination by pressing the buttons in reverse order. If a "red 7" combination is displayed, the game may transition to a sub-bonus from the next game.
(3) In the above embodiment, the condition for ending the advantageous period was set to exceed "2400" in the difference during the advantageous period, but for example, the advantageous period may end when the number of games played in the advantageous period reaches a predetermined number. Examples of the "predetermined number of games" include "3000" games or "4000" games.
In this case, the advantageous period ends when either the difference in the advantageous period exceeds "2400" or the number of games played in the advantageous period reaches a predetermined number. Furthermore, the advantageous period may be configured to end when, in addition to the difference in the advantageous period exceeding "2400" or the number of games played in the advantageous period reaching a predetermined number, any other advantageous period termination condition (for example, after the AT ends or when a predetermined number of game tokens are acquired in a single AT) is met.

(4) When the complete function is activated, the machine is designed to automatically settle credits. However, if a bet is made at the moment the game ends and the complete function is activated afterward, there is a risk that the number of bets will remain on the machine. Therefore, when the complete function is activated, both the number of credits and the number of bets may be settled automatically.
(5) The preview (advance notification) image for the activation of the complete function may be displayed at all times during gameplay, but it may also be displayed at milestones in the remaining number of tokens. For example, when the stop counter reaches "18500", "18600", "18700", "18800", and "18900", a preview (advance notification) corresponding to each number of tokens may be displayed.
Furthermore, in order to ensure that players are fully aware of the game, specific methods of giving advance notice include, for example, flashing the performance lamp 21, playing a notification sound such as "beep" once or a predetermined number of times, and outputting a voice message such as "There are now XXX coins remaining until the complete function is activated" from the speaker 22.

(6) Notification of the activation of the complete function may be limited to image display, as with the above-mentioned announcement, but may also be provided by an announcement sound such as "beep," or by outputting voice messages such as "The complete function has been activated." or "The complete function has been activated. Gameplay is now closed for today." from speaker 22. Alternatively, the performance lamp 21 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the activation of the complete function.
Furthermore, notification of the completion function's operation can be performed not only on the sub-control board 80 but also on the main control board 50. Specifically, the system may notify that the completion function is operating by displaying, for example, "Ed" on the acquired amount display LED 78 or the credit count display LED 76 after automatic settlement.
(7) The notification of the activation of the complete function may continue after the notification starts until the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, or it may be performed for a certain period of time. If it is performed for a certain period of time, it is preferable to continue for, for example, 10 seconds or more to ensure that the player is notified.
(8) The preview image for the activation of the complete function should preferably be displayed promptly when all reels 31 have stopped, the payout process has finished, and the stop counter has reached a predetermined value (for example, "18900"). For example, if it is displayed after the payout process has finished, it should be displayed in a time shorter than the time it takes to count up one medal after the payout process has finished.
On the other hand, when all reels 31 have stopped, the number of payouts has been determined, and it has been confirmed that the stop counter will reach a predetermined value, the display may be shown even before the end of the payout process.

(9) When displaying a preview image for the activation of the complete function, the image will be displayed on the front layer. However, if, for example, the button press order navigation is displayed, the preview image for the activation of the complete function will be displayed in a way that does not interfere with the display of the button press order navigation. Also, when displaying a preview image for the activation of the complete function during a sub-bonus (AT), it will be displayed in a way that does not interfere with the display of game information such as the remaining number of plays and the number of coins acquired.
(10) When a replay is displayed as stopped in a game where the stop counter reaches "19000", firstly, the automatic betting process is not executed.
Alternatively, secondly, the automatic betting process itself is executed, but for example, the operation of the start switch 41 is disabled before the automatic betting process is completed, preventing replay play.
(11) When the temporary flag for the complete function is turned on during the special game state, the complete function is activated regardless of the value of the stop counter at the end of the special game state, and if the machine has an automatic settlement function, automatic settlement is performed.
For example, in a special game state where the result of the role lottery may be that no role is won, the stop counter value may decrease after the temporary flag for the complete function is turned on. However, once the temporary flag for the complete function is turned on in the special game state, the complete function will be activated even if, for example, the number of coins remaining at the end of the special game state is less than the number of coins that would trigger the notification of the complete function activation.

(12) As shown in Figure 50(b), when an error (hopper empty error in this example) occurs while the complete function is operating, an image indicating the operation of the complete function and an image indicating the error that occurred are displayed simultaneously. However, the system is not limited to this, and the error image may take priority, so that the image indicating the operation of the complete function is not visible while the error occurs.
(13) In the case of a gaming machine equipped with an image display device 23, when announcing the activation of the complete function or the activation of the complete function, the announcement is made with an image and the announcement is made to the player by sound using the speaker 22.
On the other hand, in the case of a gaming machine that does not have an image display device 23, the speaker 22 is used to provide voice notifications for the activation of the complete function and the activation of the complete function. Furthermore, these notifications may also be made by illuminating the effect lamps 21 (frame lamps, etc.) in a specific pattern.
Furthermore, in gaming machines that do not have an image display device 23, the notification of the activation of the complete function is as follows:
a) As a first example, the payout amount is displayed by the payout indicator (the acquired amount LED 78 in the example of Figure 1) during the operation notification, and the payout amount is not displayed during the operation notification.
b) A second example is to provide a dedicated lamp to indicate the activation of the complete function.
(14) When a winning combination is achieved at the start of the special game state, and the stop counter reaches "19000" or more at the start of the special game state, a notification will be given at the time the winning combination is achieved or from the start of the special game state until the end of the special game state that the complete function will be activated.
Furthermore, in situations where it is highly likely that the stop counter will reach 19,000 or more at the end of the special game state, if the special game state is started, a notification such as "The complete function will be activated at the end of the special game state" should be displayed when a special role is won or when the special game state is started.
Specifically, in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game that is expected to pay out 150 tokens in net tokens, when the special game is started under conditions where the completion function will activate when 100 tokens remain, a notification such as "The completion function will activate when the special game ends" will be displayed at the start of the special game.

(15) When the game is in a state that is advantageous to the player but is not in AT mode, and an image indicating that the recommended button press order is not being used due to an irregular press (for example, Figure 94(c)) is displayed, or when the power is cut off when the game is played with 2 coins bet when the specified number is 3, the image indicating that the game is played with 2 coins bet may be displayed in priority to the display of the predetermined recovery screen when the power is restored. This makes it possible to inform the player of the appropriate way to play even if a power cut occurs during a game in which an irregular press has been used.
Conversely, when the system is restored from a power outage, the display of a predetermined recovery screen may be prioritized. Prioritizing the display of the predetermined recovery screen can conceal the fact that the player made an irregular button press, which could be disadvantageous to the player, thus preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.
(16) In the final game of the sub-bonus (AT), if the power is cut off while at least one reel 31 is spinning, and the power is restored after the power has been cut off, both the predetermined restoration screen and the anti-entry screen may be displayed in a way that allows them to be distinguished.
(17) When the power is cut off while the game is in a state that is not advantageous to the player, and the power is restored, in the above example the game standby screen is returned, but the system is not limited to this, and a demonstration screen may be displayed after the power is restored.

(18) When the power is cut off while the game is in a state advantageous to the player, and the power is restored and a predetermined restoration screen is displayed, and the power is cut off again while the predetermined restoration screen is being displayed, the following control measures may be taken.
a) The predetermined recovery screen is displayed again for a period of time T2.
b) When the sum of the display time of the first predetermined return screen and the display time of the second predetermined return screen equals time T2, the display of the predetermined return screen is terminated.
c) When the system is restored after another power outage, the standard recovery screen is not displayed, and a demonstration screen is displayed instead.
(19) In the above example, the display of the predetermined recovery screen was terminated by the operation of the start switch 41 until time T2 had elapsed, but the display is not limited to this, and the predetermined recovery screen may be terminated by a bet operation and the game standby screen may be accessed.
(20) During a sub-bonus (AT), if the power is cut off while the push order navigation is displayed (while all 31 reels are spinning), and the power is restored, the push order navigation will be displayed along with the predetermined restoration screen.

(21) When the power is cut off while the complete function operation screen is displayed, and the power is restored, it is preferable to display the complete function operation screen in priority to the predetermined recovery screen. Therefore, in this case, the predetermined recovery screen does not need to be displayed. However, the complete function operation screen and the predetermined recovery screen may be displayed simultaneously.
(22) In the process shown in Figure 159, if a bet is placed, the game does not proceed to the celebration animation, but instead outputs the settlement prompt animation. However, the game is not limited to this; the celebration animation is executed first, and then it is possible to determine whether a bet has been placed. If a bet has been placed, the celebration animation is output while simultaneously outputting the settlement prompt animation.
(23) In the above embodiment, the sub-bonus was given as an example of matching "red 7s", but multiple types of sub-bonuses may be provided. For example, a first sub-bonus that starts with matching "red 7" - "red 7" - "red 7", and a second sub-bonus that starts with matching "red 7" - "red 7" - "black BAR", may be provided. Furthermore, if multiple types of sub-bonuses are provided, the number of coins obtained may differ for each sub-bonus. For example, the first sub-bonus may end with a payout of approximately "300" coins (AT "50" game), and the second sub-bonus may end with a payout of approximately "90" coins (AT "15" game).

<Second Embodiment>
In the second embodiment, the device includes a power switch 11, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153. These components are illustrated in Figure 112 (Fifth Embodiment), which will be described later.
Furthermore, the door switch 17, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51.

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated when turning the power on or off.
In the following description, turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning on the power,""turning on the power," or "resuming the power supply."
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the power supply."

The door switch 17 is a switch that detects the opening of the front door 12 (see Figure 111 (Fifth Embodiment) described later), and is attached to the cabinet 13 or the front door 12.
The front door 12 is normally closed, but it is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are checked, when an error occurs, when medals are replenished, etc.

Furthermore, the door switch 17 is set to be OFF when the front door 12 is closed, and to be ON when the front door 12 is open. This allows the opening of the front door 12 to be detected.
Alternatively, the system may be configured to detect when the front door 12 is open by setting the door switch 17 to turn on when the front door 12 is closed and to turn off when the front door 12 is open.

The setting key switch 152 is used to switch to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed (also referred to as "setting change mode" or "setting change in progress") or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed (also referred to as "setting confirmation mode" or "setting confirmation in progress").
The device is configured such that inserting a setting key into the setting key slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise turns the setting key switch 152 ON (also referred to as "first mode"), and rotating the setting key 90 degrees counterclockwise from this state turns the setting key switch 152 OFF (also referred to as "second mode").

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves as a setting change switch 153, a reset switch 153, and an RWM clear switch 153.
The setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing the setting value in the setting change state.
Furthermore, the reset switch 153 is operated to return the system to its state before the error occurred (to clear the error state) after the error has been removed.
Furthermore, the RWM clear switch 153 is a switch that is operated when initializing (clearing) a predetermined memory area in the RWM 53.

In the following description, the term "setting change (reset) switch 153" may be used in multiple ways, including as "setting change switch 153", "reset switch 153", and "RWM clear switch 153".
Furthermore, the state in which various switches such as the setting key switch 152 and the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 are ON is referred to as "being operated," and the state in which they are OFF is referred to as "not being operated."
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are integrated into one unit, but the embodiment is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 may be provided separately.

Figure 53 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the main CPU 55, ROM 54, and RWM 53 in the second embodiment.
The main control board 50 is equipped with a main CPU 55, an RWM 53, and a ROM 54.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 53, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and this chip contains a main CPU 55. In addition, the main CPU 55 has built-in memory, which includes a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. Moreover, the addresses of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 are contiguous.

The ROM 54's memory area consists of a used area and an area outside the used area, and both the used area and the area outside the used area each consist of a control area and a data area.
Here, "used area" refers to the memory area where information related to the progress of the game is stored.
Furthermore, the "control area" is a memory area where various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored, and is also called the "program area".
Furthermore, the "data area" is a memory area where information other than the program is stored, and it is the memory area where data used during program execution is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside the usage area" is a memory area where information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored. For example, it is a memory area where programs for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (described later), programs used during testing, and programs for preventing fraud are stored.
Furthermore, the "outside the usage area" also has a control area and a data area, similar to the usage area. The control area of the usage area may be referred to as the "first control area" or "first program area," and the control area outside the usage area may be referred to as the "second control area" or "second program area."
Furthermore, programs stored in the control area of the usage area (first control area, first program area) may be referred to as the "first program," and programs stored in the control area outside the usage area (second control area, second program area) may be referred to as the "second program."

While the program (first program) stored in the control area of the ROM 54's usage area is running, access to the data stored in the data area of the ROM 54's usage area is permitted, but access to data stored in data areas outside the ROM 54's usage area is prohibited.
Similarly, while a program (second program) stored in a control area outside the ROM 54's usage area is being executed, access to data stored in a data area outside the ROM 54's usage area is permitted, but access to data stored in the data area within the ROM 54's usage area is prohibited.

The memory area of RWM53, like ROM54, has a used area and an unused area, and the used area and the unused area each have a working area and a stack area.
As shown in Figure 53, addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are in the used area, addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are in the unused area, and addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" are outside the used area.

While the program (first program) stored in the control area of the ROM 54 usage area is running, data stored in the RWM 53 usage area can be accessed and rewritten (overwritten), but data stored outside the RWM 53 usage area can be accessed but rewritten is prohibited.
Similarly, while a program (second program) stored in the control area outside the ROM 54's usage area is being executed, data stored outside the RWM 53's usage area is permitted to be both accessed and modified. However, data in the RWM 53's usage area is permitted to be accessed but modified. This is to prevent the process from becoming overly complex.

Furthermore, in order to prevent the data in the RWM53's used area from being overwritten due to a program malfunction or other reasons while a program outside the used area (second program) is running, an unused area is provided between the RWM53's used area and the area outside the used area.
Furthermore, if an interrupt occurs while a program outside the used area (the second program) is running, the interrupt may overwrite the data in the RWM53's used area. Therefore, interrupt processing is prohibited while a program outside the used area (the second program) is running.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 53, the ROM 54 has, in addition to the used area and the area outside the used area, other areas such as a program management area.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 53, the RWM 53 has, in addition to the used area and the area outside the used area, other areas such as an unused area.

Furthermore, the entire internal memory's storage area includes areas other than ROM54 and RWM53, such as the internal register area and unused areas.
Furthermore, the internal register area includes, for example, registers A through L, and a transmit register.

Figure 54 shows the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of the data stored in the usage area of the RWM 53 in the second embodiment.
As shown in Figure 53, the addresses of the used area are set in the range of "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)".
Note that the data shown in Figure 54 is for use in the description of the second embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 usage area is not limited to this.

Address "F000(H)" is the storage area for the setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, one of the values from "0(H)" to "5(H)" is stored as the setting value data.
Then, the setting value display LED 73 displays "N" as the setting value, which is the setting value data with "1" added to it.

Address "F001(H)" is a one-byte memory area where the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is stored. When the setting value is "N", address "F000(H)" stores "N-1" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). Then, "N" (the setting value data (_NB_RANK) plus "1") is stored as the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)".

In this embodiment, there are setting values "1" to "6". Address "F000(H)" stores one of the values "0(D)" to "5(D)" as setting value data (_NB_RANK), and address "F001(H)" stores one of the values "1(D)" to "6(D)" as setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP). The value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is then displayed as the setting value on the setting value display LED 73.

Address "F010(H)" is the storage area for credit count data (_NB_CREDIT). Credit count data is data to be displayed on the credit count display LED 76. In this embodiment, one of the values from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as credit count data.
In this embodiment, the credit count data is the value obtained by converting the credit count to a decimal number. For example, if the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001 (B)" is stored at address "F010 (H)". As a result, the lower four bits D0 to D3 of address "F010 (H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the credit count (in this example, "9"), and the upper four bits D4 to D7 are data for displaying the higher digit of the credit count (in this example, "2"). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the credit count is "50 (D)", so the stored data value will be in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the RWM53, which stores the credit count data itself, does not have an address; instead, the credit count data is provided as the display data for the credit count display LED76.

Address "F011(H)" is the storage area for the winnings data (_NB_PAYOUT). The winnings data is the data to be displayed on the winnings display LED 78. In the winnings data, similar to the credit count data described above, the lower four bits D0 to D3 are the data to display the lower digits, and the upper four bits D4 to D7 are the data to display the higher digits.
In this embodiment, when a minor role is won, the payout amount corresponding to the won minor role is displayed on the acquired amount display LED 78, and the payout amount data corresponding to the won minor role is stored as acquired amount data. Specifically, when a minor role is won and medals are paid out, the acquired amount data is added along with the payout of medals, and the display on the acquired amount display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquired amount data, "01" is displayed on the acquired amount display LED 78.

Here, the payout data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F040(H)", which will be described later, stores "8(H)" when, for example, an 8-coin combination is won. The payout data is then decremented by "1" each time a medal is paid out (including being added to credits), such as "8" → "7" → ... → "0".
In contrast, the acquisition count data stored at address "F011(H)" is incremented by "1" each time a medal is dispensed, for example, when an 8-coin combination is won, going from "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8". Therefore, the display on the acquisition count LED 78 also counts up from "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78 while the settings are being changed. For this reason, during the settings change, setting change display data for displaying "88" is stored as acquisition count data. The purpose of displaying "88" on the acquisition count display LED 78 is to make it possible to identify from the front side of the gaming machine that the settings are being changed. In addition, by lighting up all segments with "88", it becomes possible to confirm that there are no segment defects (that there are no segments that cannot be lit).
Furthermore, since the maximum number of medals that can be dispensed is 15, when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it can be understood that this does not indicate the number of medals dispensed.

Furthermore, when the conditions for indicating a predetermined number (the number of medals to bet in this game) are met, the predetermined number is indicated (displayed, notified) on the acquired number display LED 78 before the game starts (before betting becomes possible, or before the start switch 41 is operated).
In this embodiment, to indicate the specified number "2", "0A" is displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78. Therefore, when indicating the specified number, the instruction specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as acquisition count data.

Furthermore, when a winning combination such as a push-order bell is achieved during AT (Attack Time), the push-order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78. Therefore, when the push-order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78, the push-order instruction number is stored as acquisition count data.
For example, in a game where the winning number is "3," when displaying the button press order instructions, the button press order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning count data. As a result, the button press order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the button press order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the winning count display LED 78.

Furthermore, when a predetermined error occurs, the error number is displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78. For this reason, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition count data.
For example, if the error number to be displayed is "HP", the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquisition count data.

Address "F030(H)" is the storage area for the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag used to determine whether or not replays and special effects are activated.
For example, when 1BB is activated, the D2 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1". Also, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and is displayed, the D0 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1".

The address "F040(H)" is the storage area for payout data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). This payout data is the value corresponding to the payout amount when a winning combination is achieved during gameplay and the payout amount is determined. When a winning combination is achieved, the payout data corresponding to that combination is stored, and the medal payout process is executed. Here, for each medal payout (adding "1" to the credit count, or actually paying out one medal from hopper 35), the payout data is deducted by "1". In other words, it serves as a counter for the number of times the payout process is executed. Therefore, when the medal payout process is complete, the payout data becomes "0".

The address "F041 (H)" is the storage area for the payout data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout data, the payout data buffer contains data that indicates the value corresponding to the payout when a winning combination is achieved during the game and the payout is determined. Unlike the payout data, the payout data buffer is not decremented with each medal payout; the initially stored value is maintained. This value is then maintained until the next medal payout update process. For example, if a winning combination yielding 8 medals is achieved during the game, "8 (H)" is stored in the payout data buffer. If no winning combination is achieved in the next game, "0" is overwritten in the payout data buffer.

Address "F042(H)" is the storage area for automatic bet data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet when a replay is won, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
Address "F043(H)" is the storage area for bet count data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet count data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, one of "0" to "3" is stored.

Address "F044(H)" is a 1-byte memory area where status indicator LED illumination data is stored.
As shown in Figure 57(A) later, in the second embodiment, the display board 75 is equipped with six LEDs as status indicator LEDs 79: a 1-bet indicator LED 79a, a 2-bet indicator LED 79b, a 3-bet indicator LED 79c, a game start indicator LED 79d, an insert indicator LED 79e, and a replay indicator LED 79f.
The status indicator LED lighting data indicates whether or not to light up three of the six LEDs mentioned above: the game start indicator LED 79d, the coin insertion indicator LED 79e, and the replay indicator LED 79f.

As shown in Figure 54, the D0 bit of the status indicator LED lighting data is assigned to the game start indicator LED 79d, the D1 bit is assigned to the insert indicator LED 79e, and the D2 bit is assigned to the replay indicator LED 79f. Each bit of this status indicator LED lighting data corresponds to each bit of the LED display counter 1 in Figure 61(A), which will be described later.
Then, the bit corresponding to the LED to be lit is set to "1", and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off is set to "0".
For example, when the game start indicator LED 79d is lit and the coin insertion indicator LED 79e and replay indicator LED 79f are turned off, "00000001(B)" is stored as the status indicator LED lighting data.

Address "F051(H)" is a 1-byte memory area where the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
LED display counter 1 is a counter that determines which of digits 1 to 5 to light up, and it is continuously updated with each interrupt.
Here, "digit" refers to the display unit, and in this embodiment, it consists of one 7-segment display. Of the digits in this embodiment, digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit count (storage) display LED 76, and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit count display LED 76. Furthermore, digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired amount display LED 78, digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired amount display LED 78, and digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73.
Furthermore, each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned as follows: bit D0 corresponds to digit 1 signal, bit D1 to digit 2 signal, ..., bit D4 to digit 5 signal. Then, in the interrupt processing, dynamic lighting of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit that is "1" in the LED display counter 1 is illuminated.

In the second embodiment, the LED display counter 1 initially takes the value "00010000 (B)". Then, as the interrupts progress from "1" → "2" → ... (with each interrupt), the LED display counter 1 updates by shifting bit "1" one digit to the right. Furthermore, in the interrupt following interrupt "5", the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000000 (B)" due to the one-digit right shift. However, during this interrupt, the LED display counter 1 is initialized, and it is set back to "00010000 (B)". As a result, with each interrupt, the LED display counter 1 repeats the values "5" → "4" → ... → "1" → "5" → "4" → .... That is, one cycle is completed after 5 interrupts.

Based on the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is:
"N" interrupt number: 00010000 (B)
Interrupt number "N+1": 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
Interrupt number "N+3": 00000010 (B)
Interrupt number "N+4": 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000(B) → 00010000(B) (Initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
Interrupt number "N+6": 00001000 (B)
:
This is the result.

In the second embodiment, the 5-interrupt cycle constitutes one period, causing digits 1 to 5 to light up dynamically. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. The output of the digit 5 signal enables digit 5 (set value display LED 73) to light up (digits 1 to 4 remain off). During the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", the digit 4 signal is output, and digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired count display LED D78) to light up (digits 1 to 3 and 5 remain off).

Address "F052(H)" is the storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag takes a value corresponding to whether the system is operating normally, changing settings, or checking settings.
In the second embodiment, under normal conditions, digits 1 to 4 are lit, and digit 5 is not lit, so the value is "00001111 (B)". Also, during setting changes and setting confirmation, digit 5 is lit, and digits 1 to 4 are not lit, so the value is "00010000 (B)".

Address "F061(H)" is the storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag indicates whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" when it is a normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when transitioning from a normal section to an advantageous section.
The timing of when the advantageous period type flag is updated will be explained later.

Address "F062(H)" is the storage area for the advantageous section indicator LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section indicator LED flag indicates whether the advantageous section indicator LED 77 is lit or not. When the advantageous section indicator LED 77 is off, the advantageous section indicator LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous section indicator LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section indicator LED flag is "1".
The advantageous period indicator LED 77 can be lit at any time after the transition to the advantageous period (for example, the advantageous period indicator LED 77 can be lit at the same time as the transition to the advantageous period).

On the other hand, even after entering the advantageous period, it is not necessary to light up the advantageous period indicator LED 77.
Specifically, firstly, the advantageous period indicator LED 77 will not light up when transitioning to the advantageous period, but may light up afterward (during the advantageous period).
Secondly, when transitioning to a favorable period, the favorable period indicator LED 77 may not be lit. If the conditions for ending the favorable period are met before the conditions for litting the favorable period indicator LED 77 are met, the favorable period may be ended without the favorable period indicator LED 77 ever being lit.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (to notify the correct button press order) during a game state that is in a favorable period and the period Sim payout rate exceeds "1", the favorable period indicator LED 77 is lit up.
Furthermore, once the advantageous period indicator LED 77 is lit, it will remain lit throughout the advantageous period.
Furthermore, during the game end check process at the end of the advantageous period, a process is executed to turn off the advantageous period indicator LED 77. Specifically, when the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met, the initialization process of the advantageous period indicator LED flag memory area (clearing the advantageous period indicator LED flag) is executed. As a result, the advantageous period indicator LED 77 will turn off in subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, when the advantageous section indicator LED 77 is lit during gameplay that activates the instruction function, the timing of the lighting is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the rotation of the reels 31 begins and until the rotation of the reels 31 reaches a constant speed).
However, this is not the only possible timing for illumination; for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the stop switch 42 can be operated,
3) When at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating,
4) When all reels 31 stop,
5) After all reels 31 have stopped (the game has ended) and before the settlement switch 43 becomes operable before the next game starts.

However, when the advantageous period indicator LED 77 is lit up in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning combination for that game must have been determined, so the period before the start switch 41 is operated (before the combination lottery) is excluded.
In games where the instruction function is activated, the advantageous section indicator LED 77 is lit after the start switch 41 has been operated and the draw for winning combinations has been performed. Therefore, the shortest timing for litting the advantageous section indicator LED 77 is between the start of the reel 31 rotation and the reel 31 reaching a constant rotation speed.

The address "F063 (H)" is the memory area for the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous section clear counter is a decrement counter used to count the number of games played during the advantageous section. During the normal section, the advantageous section clear counter is "0," and when transitioning to the advantageous section, it is set to an initial value of "1500 (D)." Furthermore, the advantageous section clear counter is set to deduct "1" for each game played, both during the advantageous section and the normal section. However, the minimum value is "0." Therefore, in the normal section, when the (pre-deduction) advantageous section clear counter is "0," even if "1" is deducted, the value after the deduction remains "0." Consequently, during the normal section, although "1" is deducted for each game, "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is the normal section (non-advantageous section).

Furthermore, when you enter the advantageous period, the advantageous period clear counter is set to an initial value of "1500 (D)," so in the next game, the advantageous period clear counter will be "1499 (D)."
The advantageous section clear counter stores a maximum initial value of "1500 (D)" and is therefore composed of 2 bytes. In other words, when the advantageous section clear counter stores a value other than "0", it is an advantageous section.

Address "F065(H)" is the memory area for the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in the number of tokens during the advantageous period, and is also called the "MY counter".
The difference counter doesn't simply store the cumulative difference in the number of tokens, but rather stores a "corresponding value" to that cumulative difference. For example, when the difference in tokens becomes a negative value, it corrects that value to "0 (H)". Therefore, "cumulative difference in tokens ≠ difference counter value".
The difference counter is an increment counter used to determine whether the cumulative value of the difference in the number of tokens during the advantageous period exceeds "2400 (D)". For this reason, the difference counter consists of a 2-byte memory area.

The difference counter only needs to count the cumulative value of the difference in the number of tokens during the advantageous period, and does not need to count during the non-advantageous period (normal period).
In this case, when updating the difference counter value based on whether the game is in a favorable period, it is necessary to determine whether the game is in a favorable period after each game. Therefore, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated even during non-favorable periods (normal periods). By doing so, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether the game is in a favorable period after each game, thus simplifying the process.

Furthermore, even if the net number of tokens played becomes negative, and the value corresponding to the cumulative net number of tokens becomes a carry-over value, the net number counter value will be updated. However, if the result of that calculation is a carry-over value for the net number counter, a correction will be applied to set the net number counter value to "0".

To give a specific example (assuming the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
First game: When the bet is "3" and the payout is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD(H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0(H)".
Game 2: Bet amount "3", Payout amount "9", Difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (No correction)
Third game: Bet amount "3", Payout amount "0", Difference counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (No correction)
Game 4: Bet amount "3", Payout amount "1", Difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (No correction)
Game 5: Bet count "3", Payout count "0", Difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", Difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
It will be updated like this.
Even if the difference counter for the previous game was "0 (H)" and the difference counter for the current game is also "0 (H)", this is considered an "update" of the difference counter because the difference counter value reflecting the difference in that game has been recalculated.

As described above, if the difference counter value after the calculation is a value that has resulted in a carry-over, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value is set to "0"). The method for determining whether or not a carry-over has occurred will be described later.
With this update of the difference counter value, for example, when the number of payouts is greater than the number of bets, that is, when the difference in tokens is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example during a normal game, the difference counter value increases by the amount of the payout when a small win occurs, but then, if the number of payouts falls below the number of bets, it will eventually return to "0".

The address "F067(H)" is the storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is used to determine whether or not AT is active; it is set to "0" when not in AT mode and to "1" when in AT mode. The AT flag is set to "1" when the AT lottery is won, which is performed in step S364 of Figure 67, described later. The AT flag is turned off at the end of the final game in AT mode, for example, in the game end check process (step S415 of Figure 71), described later. Furthermore, the data cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous period includes the AT flag.

The address "F068(H)" is the memory area for the AT game count counter (_CT_ART). The AT game count counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games played during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, when the AT game count counter reaches "0", it stops counting (decrementing) from that point onward.
The AT game count counter is updated (decremented) during AT in the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 67) after the start switch 41 is operated (step S281 in Figure 67).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game count counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is at most "255 (D)", the AT game count counter may be composed of a 1-byte counter.
When AT starts (or when transitioning to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT game count counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or it may be determined by a lottery or other means when AT is won. After the initial value is determined, the AT game count may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the AT game count may be increased when certain conditions are met during AT, and the AT game count may be increased when a lottery for increasing the number of games is won. In this case, the increase is added to the AT game count counter.
This AT gameplay counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous period.

In this embodiment, a game count-managed AT is used as an example, and therefore an AT game count counter is provided. Consequently, in the case of a net payout-managed AT, an AT net payout counter is provided instead of the AT game count counter. At the start of the AT, an initial value for the net payout to be obtained is set. When an additional payout is won, the additional payout amount is added. Each time a payout occurs, the net payout for that game is subtracted, and when the AT net payout counter reaches "0", the AT ends.
The 48-byte memory area from address "F1D0(H)" to "F1FF(H)" is the stack area for the used memory.

Figures 55 and 56 show the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of the data stored outside the RWM 53 usage area in the second embodiment.
Addresses outside the used area are set in the range of "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", as shown in Figure 53.
Note that the data shown in Figures 55 and 56 are for use in describing the second embodiment, and the data stored outside the RWM 53's usage area is not limited to these.

The 400-game counter at address "F210(H)" adds to the number of games played, with 400 games being the dividing line. This 400-game counter cycles from "0" to "399(D)," adding "1" with each game played. When the 400-game counter reaches "399(D)" and "1" is added, the value of the 400-game counter becomes "0."

Alternatively, the 400-game counter can be initially set to "399 (D)" and then deducted by "1" after each game. In this case, when the 400-game counter reaches "0", it is determined that 400 games have been played. Then, when "1" is deducted from the 400-game counter when it is "0", the initial value "399 (D)" is set back to the 400-game counter.

The ring buffer number at address "F212(H)" is used to specify which ring buffer to add the number of tokens dispensed when tokens are dispensed during the game.
Specifically, address "F212(H)" stores one of the ring buffer numbers from "0" to "14(D)".

Addresses "F213(H)" to "F230(H)" represent the storage area for total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. Total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 consist of 15 ring buffers. Each total payout ring buffer consists of 2 bytes. For example, total payout ring buffer 0 consists of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)," where address "F213(H)" is the lower digit and address "F214(H)" is the upper digit. In Figures 55 and 56, for storage areas with 2 or more bytes, the lowest address number is displayed.

One ring buffer stores the total number of payouts over 400 games. For example, the payouts for the first 400 games are stored at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", and the payouts for the next 401 games, from the 401st to the 800th game, are stored at addresses "F215(H)" and "F216(H)".
Here, whether or not it is the 400th game is determined by referring to the 400-game counter at address "F210(H)" mentioned above. Furthermore, it is determined which ring buffer value to add (update) the number of medals paid out in that game to by referring to the ring buffer number at address "F212(H)".

Then, when the total payouts for games 1 through 400 are stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", the total payouts for games 5601 through 6000 are stored in the total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)". Next, at the end of game 6000, the data stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the payouts for games 6001 through 6400 are stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)".

Note that the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 each consist of 2 bytes. If the maximum payout per game is "15" coins, the maximum number of coins that can be paid out over 400 games is 6000, which can be stored with a 2-byte memory capacity.
This also applies to the continuous prize payout ring buffers 0 to 14, which will be described later.

Additionally, addresses "F231(H)" to "F24E(H)" are the memory areas for the continuous prize payout ring buffers 0 to 14.
Furthermore, addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are the memory areas for the prize payout ring buffers 0 to 14.

The total number of games counter at addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter that stores the cumulative number of games played and consists of 3 bytes. Since it is necessary to count "175,000(D)" games as the cumulative number of games played, the total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes.
Furthermore, the total number of games played counter will continue counting even if the number of games played exceeds "175,000 (D)" and will stop counting when it reaches the 3-byte limit ("FFFFFF (H)").

The instruction-enabled bonus counters at addresses "F270(H)" to "F272(H)" are counters that count the number of payouts when the bonus is activated and the number of payouts in games in which the instruction function is activated, and consist of 3 bytes.
The total payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" counts the total number of medals paid out over 6000 games. Even if 15 medals were paid out per game over 6000 games, the total would be 90,000 medals, which can be counted with 3 bytes (the same applies to the continuous prize payout (6000 times) counter and the prize payout (6000 times) counter described later).

The consecutive bonus payout (6000 times) counters at addresses "F276(H)" to "F278(H)" are counters that count the number of payouts when the bonus features are activated consecutively over a period of 6000 games.
The payout counters for the special features (6000 times) at addresses "F279(H)" to "F27B(H)" are counters that count the number of coins paid out when the special features are activated during 6000 games.

Furthermore, if a payout occurs when the continuous bonus feature is not activated and no bonus feature is activated, only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (incremented), and the continuous bonus feature payout (6000 times) counter and the bonus feature payout (6000 times) counter are not updated.
Furthermore, if a payout occurs when a special feature is not activated and a special feature is activated, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the special feature payout (6000 times) counter will be updated, but the continuous special feature payout (6000 times) counter will not be updated.
Furthermore, when a payout occurs during continuous bonus feature activation, the total payout (6000 times) counter, bonus feature payout (6000 times) counter, and continuous bonus feature payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values for the total payout (6000 times) counter, the consecutive bonus payout (6000 times) counter, and the bonus payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
First, when medals are dispensed between the first game and the 6000th game, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the consecutive payout (6000 times) counter, and the payout (6000 times) counter are recorded (added) according to whether the continuous payout mechanism was activated or not, and whether the payout mechanism was activated or not.
At the end of the 6000th game, the consecutive bonus payout ratio (6000 times) and the bonus payout ratio (6000 times) are calculated. After this calculation, the payouts for each of the 400 games from 400 x 15 - 1 (5999 games) before the game in question to 400 x 15 - 400 (5600 games) before the game in question are subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value, the consecutive bonus payout (6000 times) counter value, and the bonus payout (6000 times) counter value, respectively.

For example, when it's the 6000th game, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) value is subtracted from the total payout (6000 games) counter value. Then, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) value is cleared. Furthermore, the payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game are added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 games) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th game is played, the value of the Continuous Payout Ring Buffer 0 (F231(H) to F232(H)) is subtracted from the Continuous Payout Ring Buffer 0 counter value. The value of the Continuous Payout Ring Buffer 0 is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts from the 6001st to the 6400th game when the continuous payout mechanism is activated is added to both the Continuous Payout Ring Buffer 0 and the Continuous Payout (6000) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th game is played, the value of the payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the payout (6000 times) counter value. The value of the payout ring buffer 0 is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts from the 6001st to the 6400th game when the payout mechanism is activated is added to both the payout ring buffer 0 and the payout (6000 times) counter.

To explain in more detail, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts over the following number of game spins.
Total payout ring buffer 0: Games 1 to 400 Total payout ring buffer 1: Games 401 to 800 Total payout ring buffer 2: Games 801 to 1200 Total payout ring buffer 3: Games 1201 to 1600 Total payout ring buffer 4: Games 1601 to 2000 Total payout ring buffer 5: Games 2001 to 2400 Total payout ring buffer 6: Games 2401 to 2800 Total payout ring buffer 7: Games 2801 to 3200 Total payout ring buffer 8: Games 3201 to 3600 Total Payout Ring Buffer 9: Games 3601 to 4000 Total Payout Ring Buffer 10: Games 4001 to 4400 Total Payout Ring Buffer 11: Games 4401 to 4800 Total Payout Ring Buffer 12: Games 4801 to 5200 Total Payout Ring Buffer 13: Games 5201 to 5600 Total Payout Ring Buffer 14: Games 5601 to 6000 Total Payout (6000 times) Counter: Games 1 to 6000

And, assuming that the 6000th game has been completed, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 will have the number of coins paid out between each game played stored in them.
Furthermore, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter matches the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14.
Here, if we let Σ1 be the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point, and Z1 be the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0,
Total payouts (6000 times) counter = Σ1 - Z1
Perform the operation.
Also,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (cleared)
Perform the operation.
In other words, the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 game counts from before 5999 (400 x 15 - 1) games to before 5600 (400 x 15 - 400) games, is subtracted from the value "Σ1" stored in the total payout (6000 games) counter.

Next, the process is executed to clear the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 game counts from before 5999 (400 x 15 - 1) games to before 5600 (400 x 15 - 400) games.
After performing these calculations, the 6001st game is started. If there are any payouts between the 6001st and 6400th games (assuming here that no special features were activated between the 6001st and 6400th games), the amount is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and also added to the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, assuming that the 6400th game has been completed, the total payout ring buffer will store the number of payouts during the following game counts.
Total payout ring buffer 0: Games 6001 to 6400 Total payout ring buffer 1: Games 401 to 800
Total payout ring buffer 14: Games 5601 to 6000 Total payout (6000 times) counter: Games 401 to 6000, and Games 6001 to 6400

Then, similarly to the above, if we let Σ2 be the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point, and Z2 be the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1,
Total payouts (6000 times) counter = Σ² - Z²
Let's assume that.
and,
Total payout ring buffer 1 = 0
Let's assume that.
After performing these calculations, the 6401st game is started. If there are any payouts between the 6401st and 6800th games (assuming here that no special features were activated between the 6401st and 6800th games), the payouts are added to the total payout ring buffer 1 and also to the total payout (6000 times) counter. The above process is repeated.

In addition, while the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been explained, the same processing is performed when a special feature is activated or when a special feature is activated in succession.
Specifically, when a special feature is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with special feature payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with a special feature payout (6000 times) counter. In addition, when a special feature is activated, as described above, one of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

Similarly, during continuous bonus feature operation, the total payout ring buffers 0-14 are replaced with continuous bonus feature payout ring buffers 0-14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous bonus feature payout (6000 times) counter. Furthermore, during continuous bonus feature operation, the total payout ring buffers 0-14, the bonus feature payout ring buffers 0-14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the bonus feature payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

The total payout (cumulative) counters at addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts, and count the total number of payouts over at least "175000(D)" gameplay sessions.
Similarly, the continuous bonus payout (cumulative) counters at addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts when continuous bonuses are activated, and, as described above, count the number of payouts when continuous bonuses are activated over at least "175000(D)" gameplay intervals.

Similarly, the bonus payout (cumulative) counters at addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" are counters that count the cumulative number of payouts when the bonus is activated, and, as described above, count the number of payouts when the bonus is activated over at least "175,000(D)" gameplay sessions.
Note that the three types of payout (6000 spins) counters mentioned above subtract the payout count from before 5999 spins to before 5600 spins every 400 spins, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters do not subtract values.

The three types of payout (cumulative) counters are each composed of 3 bytes. For example, assuming 15 payouts per game in 175,000 games, the calculation would be "175,000 x 15 = 2,625,000," which is smaller than the value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, it can be stored using 3 bytes of memory.

The bonus feature status counters at addresses "F285(H)" to "F287(H)" are counters that count the total number of games played when the bonus feature is activated and the number of games played when the continuous bonus feature activation device is activated, and consist of 3 bytes.
The instruction-included bonus ratio data at address "F288(H)" is a memory area that stores the instruction-included bonus ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of payouts when a bonus is activated and the total number of payouts in games where the instruction function is activated, to the total number of payouts.

The data for the continuous bonus round ratio (6000 times) at address "F289(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when a continuous bonus round is activated to the total number of payouts over 6000 game rounds.
The bonus payout ratio (6000 times) data at address "F28A(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when a bonus feature is activated to the total number of payouts over 6000 gameplay sessions.

The cumulative ratio of consecutive bonus features at address "F28B(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when consecutive bonus features are activated to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.
The cumulative payout ratio data at address "F28C(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of payouts when a payout feature is activated to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.

The memory area at address "F28D(H)" stores the status ratio data for special features, which is the ratio of the total number of games played when a special feature is activated to the total number of games played when the continuous special feature activation device is activated.
The calculation result buffer at address "F28E(H)" is a memory area that temporarily stores the calculation results during ratio calculation processing.

The count limit flag at address "F28F(H)" is a flag that is turned on when the memory capacity of the total number of games played counter (addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)") or the total payout (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)") reaches its limit (3 bytes full, i.e., "FFFFFF(H)").
Of the 1-byte (8-bit) data, the "D0" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of games played, and the "D1" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of coins paid out. Bits "D2" to "D7" are unused in the second embodiment.
For example, when the total number of games played counter reaches its maximum count value, the value of the maximum count flag becomes "00000001 (B)".

The payout limit buffer at address "F290(H)" is a memory area that stores a value to ensure that the value after adding the total payout (cumulative) counter to the total payout (cumulative) counter is 3 bytes full, in case the total payout for that game exceeds 3 bytes.
For example, if the total payout (cumulative) counter value before payout in a given game is "FFFFFE (H)" and the number of payouts in that game is "8 (H)", adding "8 (H)" to the counter value would cause an overflow. Therefore, to prevent an overflow in the total payout (cumulative) counter value, a value is calculated to fill all three bytes, and the result of that calculation is stored in the payout limit buffer.
In the example above, "FFFFFE(H)" + "1(H)" = "FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout limit buffer.

The blinking request flag at address "F291(H)" is a flag used to identify objects that meet the blinking display conditions when displaying identification segments and ratio segments.
For the ratio of bonus features including instructions, the cumulative ratio of consecutive bonus features, the cumulative bonus feature ratio, and the bonus feature status ratio, the system controls the identification segment to flash when the total number of games played (the value stored in the total number of games played counter) is less than "175,000".
For the consecutive bonus round ratio (6000 times) and the bonus round ratio (6000 times), if the total number of games played (the value stored in the total number of games played counter) is less than "6000", the corresponding identification segment will be controlled to flash.

The ratio of bonus features including instructions, the cumulative ratio of consecutive bonus features, the cumulative bonus feature ratio, and the bonus feature status ratio should ideally be based on a 175,000-game period (to minimize variation). However, if the ratio is calculated based on a game played for less than 175,000 games, the identification segment will flash to indicate this.
Similarly, while the continuous bonus ratio (6000 spins) and the bonus ratio (6000 spins) are originally ratios over 6000 spins, if the ratio is calculated based on fewer than 6000 spins, the identification segment will flash to indicate this.

Furthermore, for the bonus payout ratio including instructions, the bonus payout ratio (cumulative), and the bonus payout ratio (6000 times), the system controls the ratio segment to flash when the displayed value is "70" or higher.
Furthermore, for the cumulative and 6000-time consecutive bonus rate, the display is controlled to flash when the displayed value is "60" or higher.
Furthermore, regarding the ratio of special features and other statuses, if the displayed value is "50" or higher, the ratio segment will be controlled to flash.

The reason for the above settings is that, in this embodiment of the slot machine, the ratio of bonus features including instructions and the bonus feature ratio are designed to be less than 70%, the ratio of consecutive bonus features is designed to be less than 60%, and the ratio of bonus feature states is designed to be less than 50%. When the measured value falls outside the range of the design values, the ratio segment is flashed to indicate this.

Furthermore, in the flashing request flag, bit D0 corresponds to the flashing flag for the specified bonus item ratio, bit D1 corresponds to the flashing flag for the continuous bonus item ratio (6000 times), ..., bit D7 corresponds to the flag for 175000 flashes.
For example, if the calculated ratio of bonus features including the instruction is less than "70", the D0 bit of the flashing request flag will be "0", and if it is "70" or greater, the D0 bit of the flashing request flag will be "1".
Similarly, if the calculated consecutive bonus round ratio (6000 times) is less than "70", the D1 bit of the flashing request flag will be "0", and if it is "70" or greater, the D1 bit of the flashing request flag will be "1".

Furthermore, if the calculated ratio of special features/status is less than "50", the D5 bit of the flashing request flag will be "0", and if it is "50" or greater, the D5 bit of the flashing request flag will be "1".
Furthermore, when the total number of games played counter is less than "6000", the D6 bit of the flashing request flag is set to "1", and when it is "6000" or more, the D6 bit of the flashing request flag is set to "0".
Furthermore, when the total number of games played counter is less than "175,000", the D7 bit of the flashing request flag is set to "1", and when it is "175,000" or more, the D7 bit of the flashing request flag is set to "0".

The ratio display number at address "F292(H)" is a memory area that stores the number corresponding to the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process.
When the ratio displayed in the interrupt process is the ratio of the special feature with instructions, "1" is stored in the ratio display number at address "F292(H)". Similarly, "2" is stored when it is the continuous special feature ratio (6000 times), "3" is stored when it is the special feature ratio (6000 times), "4" is stored when it is the continuous special feature ratio (cumulative), "5" is stored when it is the special feature ratio (cumulative), and "6" is stored when it is the special feature status ratio.

The blinking toggle flag at address "F293(H)" is used to determine whether the identification segment or ratio segment is lit or off when blinking during the interrupt processing.
In this embodiment, when the display is blinking, it is set to repeatedly switch between on and off approximately every 0.3 seconds. During the approximately 0.3 seconds when the display is on, the blinking toggle flag is set to "0" (a value indicating that the display is on), and during the approximately 0.3 seconds when the display is off, the blinking toggle flag is set to "1" (a value indicating that the display is off).

The display switching time at address "F294(H)" is a counter that counts approximately 5 seconds, which is the time it takes to display one ratio, and updates the counter by "1" each time an interrupt is processed.
In this embodiment, the display of the ratio of special features including the indicator (approximately 5 seconds) → the ratio of consecutive special features (6000 times) (approximately 5 seconds) → ... → the cumulative ratio of special features (approximately 5 seconds) → the ratio of special feature status (approximately 5 seconds) → the ratio of special features including the indicator (approximately 5 seconds) → ... is repeatedly displayed.
Therefore, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether approximately 5 seconds have passed, that is, whether the time for switching the display ratio has been reached.

The blinking time at address "F296(H)" is, as mentioned above, a counter that counts approximately 0.3 seconds when the identification segment or ratio segment is blinking, and updates by "1" each time an interrupt is processed.

Address "F297(H)" is a 1-byte memory area where the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is stored.
The LED display counter 2 is a counter that determines which of digits 6 to 9 to light up, and it is continuously updated with each interrupt. Each bit of the LED display counter 2 is assigned as follows: bit D0 corresponds to digit 6 signal, bit D1 to digit 7 signal, bit D2 to digit 8 signal, and bit D3 to digit 4 signal. Then, in the interrupt processing, dynamic lighting of digits 6 to 9 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit that is "1" in the LED display counter 2 is lit up.

In the second embodiment, the LED display counter 2 initially takes the value "00001000 (B)". Then, as the interrupts progress from "1" to "2" to... (with each interrupt), the LED display counter 2 updates by shifting bit "1" one digit to the right. Furthermore, in the interrupt following interrupt "4", the LED display counter 2 becomes "00000000 (B)" due to the one-digit right shift. However, during this interrupt, the LED display counter 2 is initialized, returning it to "00001000 (B)". As a result, with each interrupt, the LED display counter 2 repeats the values "4" → "3" → "2" → "1" → "4" →... That is, one cycle is completed after four interrupts.

Based on the above, the value of LED display counter 2 is:
"N" interrupt number: 00001000 (B)
Interrupt number N+1: 00000100 (B)
Interrupt number "N+2": 00000010 (B)
Interrupt number "N+3": 00000001 (B)
Interrupt #N+4: 00000000(B) → 00001000(B) (Initialization; same value as interrupt #N)
Interrupt number "N+5": 00000100 (B)
:
This is the result.

In the second embodiment, the 4th interrupt constitutes one cycle, dynamically illuminating digits 6 to 9. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00001000 (B)", the digit 9 signal is output. The output of the digit 9 signal enables the illumination of digit 9 (lower digit of the ratio segment). During the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00000100 (B)", the digit 8 signal is output, enabling the illumination of digit 8 (higher digit of the ratio segment). Furthermore, when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", the digit 7 signal is output, enabling the illumination of digit 7 (lower digit of the identification segment). When the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)", the digit 6 signal is output, enabling the illumination of digit 6 (higher digit of the identification segment).

The RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" is a memory area where the RWM checksum data calculated during the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is stored during the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN).
Here, "RWM checksum data" is also called "complement data,""error detection data," or "error detection information," and is a value that, when added to the sum of the data from addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM53 usage area and the data from addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the usage area (excluding "F2A0(H)"), results in "0."
In other words, when the sum of the data from addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM53 usage area and the data from addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the usage area is added to the "RWM checksum data (complement data)" of "F2A0(H)", the result is "0". To put it another way, the sum of the data from addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the data from addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is "0".

The power-off flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" is a flag used to determine whether the power-off process was executed successfully, and is stored at the time of the power-off process.
When the power-off process is executed successfully, the power-off completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is stored as "55 (H)". When the power-off process is not executed successfully, a value other than "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).

The power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" is a flag used to determine whether the RWM53 checksum calculation result and the power-off processing flag are normal, and is stored during the program startup process.
If the calculation result of the RWM53 checksum is normal (the sum of the data in the used area and outside the used area (excluding "F2A0(H)") of RWM35, plus the RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)", is "0"), and the power-off processed flag is a normal value ("55(H)"), then "55(H)" is stored as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).
In contrast, if at least one of the RWM53 checksum calculation results and the power-off processing flag is not normal (abnormal), "00 (H)" is stored as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).

The temporary stack pointer buffer 2 (_SB_STACK2) at address "F2A3(H)" is a memory area (buffer) where the stack pointer of the used area is stored when a program outside the used area (second program) is executed.
Here, "stack area" refers to the RWM53's memory area where various registers and data such as the program's return address can be temporarily saved (stored).
Furthermore, the "stack pointer" is used to hold the address that indicates the location where data in the stack area is saved (stored).

Then, when executing a program outside the used memory area (the second program), the stack pointer of the used memory area is stored in the temporary stack pointer buffer 2. When the program outside the used memory area (the second program) terminates and the program returns to the used memory area (the first program), the stack pointer of the used memory area is restored from the temporary stack pointer buffer 2.

The 24-byte memory area from address "F3E8(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is a stack area outside of the used memory area.

Next, we will explain the initialization of the RWM53's used area and data outside of the used area.
Data in the RWM53's used area and data outside of the used area are maintained and not initialized by simply interrupting/restarting the power supply (turning the power on/off, turning the power switch 11 on/off).
Furthermore, even when recovering from a recoverable error state, the RWM53's used area and data outside the used area are retained without being initialized.

Furthermore, suppose an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on), and it is determined that a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred. In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62, which will be described later, is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2711, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes in the event of a power failure recovery abnormality is set. Also, since it is a power failure recovery abnormality, step S2712 in Figure 62 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) shown in Figure 65, which will be described later, initialization processing is performed for the entire range including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the RWM53 usage area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)"), and the entire range outside the usage area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)").
Even when recovering from an unrecoverable error state, the RWM53 initialization process is executed within the same scope as when an operation to transition to a configuration change state is performed and it is determined that there is a power outage recovery abnormality.

Furthermore, the operation to transition to the setting change state is performed, and it is determined that the power outage recovery was normal. In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 is "Yes", step S2712 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of RWM53 at the start of setting changes when the power outage recovery is normal is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 65, initialization processing is performed for the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM53's usage area, and for the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the usage area.

Therefore, when an operation is performed to transition to the configuration change state and the power recovery is determined to be normal, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM53, and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized.
In other words, the RWM53 address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) is initialized. Therefore, for example, if the power is turned off while the cumulative bonus ratio data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (bonus ratio monitor), and then an operation is performed to switch to the setting change state, and it is determined that the power recovery was normal, the management information display LED 74 will start displaying the bonus ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

Furthermore, if the setting key switch 152 is turned OFF and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned ON, and the power is turned ON, it is determined that the power recovery is normal. In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 will be "No", step S2710 will be "Yes", and the process will proceed to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power recovery is normal is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 65, initialization processing is performed for the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM53's usage area, and for the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the usage area.

In other words, the RWM53 address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) is initialized. Therefore, for example, if the power is turned off while the management information display LED 74 (payout ratio monitor) is showing the payout ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and the power is turned on again, and the power recovery is deemed normal, the management information display LED 74 will start displaying the first item of various ratio information, the payout ratio data including instructions (ratio display number "1").

Therefore, when the setting key switch 152 is turned OFF and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned ON, and the power is turned ON, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the RWM 53 initialization process is executed within the same scope as when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power recovery is normal.
Therefore, even without possessing a setting key, and without transitioning to the setting change state, the RWM53 can be initialized within the same scope as when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and the power-off recovery is determined to be normal.

Furthermore, at the end of the advantageous period, an initialization process is performed on a predetermined range of the RWM53 usage area where data related to the advantageous period is stored (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 54).
Furthermore, even after the advantageous period ends, the RWM53 address "F292(H)" is not initialized. For this reason, for example, if the advantageous period ends while the cumulative bonus ratio data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (bonus ratio monitor), and initialization processing is performed on a predetermined range of the RWM53 usage area where data related to the advantageous period is stored (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 54), the display item shown on the management information display LED 74 will be the bonus status ratio data (ratio display number "6") after the cumulative bonus ratio data.

Furthermore, suppose the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off position, and it is determined that the power recovery was normal. In other words, suppose the power is turned on and off as usual. In this case, the initialization process of RWM 53 is not executed, so the data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM 53 at the time of power loss is maintained.
Therefore, for example, if the power is turned off when the cumulative bonus ratio data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (bonus ratio monitor), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off position, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the system will return to the state it was in when the power was off. As a result, the cumulative bonus ratio data will be displayed on the management information display LED 74 first, and then the bonus status ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after the cumulative bonus ratio data, will be displayed.

Furthermore, suppose the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off position, and it is determined that there is a power outage recovery abnormality. In this case, step S2708 in Figure 62 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2801, where recovery failure error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed (resulting in a recovery failure state), and the RWM 53 initialization process is not executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, when the recovery failure error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 is executed, interrupt processing is prohibited (step S1490 in Figure 64), and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off (step S1495 in Figure 64).
Therefore, for example, if the power is turned off while the management information display LED 74 (payout ratio monitor) is displaying payout ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off position, and it is determined that there is a power outage recovery abnormality, interrupt processing is prohibited and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off, so the management information display LED 74 remains off.

Furthermore, for example, in the recovery-impossible error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, the management information display LED 74 may be configured to display "8" in digits 6 to 9, respectively. In this case, if the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the off position, and a power failure recovery abnormality is detected, "8888" will be displayed on the management information display LED 74.

Furthermore, even if the system proceeds to the unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, interrupt processing may not be prohibited, and the outputs of output ports 0-7 may be maintained without being turned off. In this case, for example, if the power is turned off while the cumulative bonus item ratio data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (bonus item ratio monitor), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, and a power outage recovery abnormality is detected, the management information display LED 74 will first display the cumulative bonus item ratio data, and then the bonus item status ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after the cumulative bonus item ratio data, will be displayed.

Figure 57(A) shows various LEDs on the display board 75 in the second embodiment, and Figure 57(B) shows the management information display LED 74 (percentage monitor) in the second embodiment.
As shown in Figure 57(A), in the second embodiment, the display board 75 is equipped with a credit count display LED 76, an acquired count display LED 78, and a status display LED 79.
The credit count display LED 76 consists of digit 1 (higher digit) and digit 2 (lower digit), while the acquired amount display LED 78 consists of digit 3 (higher digit) and digit 4 (lower digit). Furthermore, digits 1 to 4 use a 7-segment display without dot segments.
Furthermore, digits 1 to 4 may be configured using a 7-segment display equipped with dot segments, but without lighting up the dot segments.

Furthermore, the system is equipped with status indicator LEDs 79a, 2-bet indicator LEDs 79b, 3-bet indicator LEDs 79c, game start indicator LED 79d, coin insertion indicator LED 79e, and replay indicator LED 79f, which consist of six LEDs.
Furthermore, although not shown in Figure 57, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is constructed using segment P of digit 4, as shown in Figure 58.
Furthermore, although not shown in Figure 57, the set value display LED 73 is located on the main control board 50, as shown in Figure 1, and consists of digits 5. Digits 5 utilize a 7-segment display without dot segments.
Furthermore, digit 5 may be configured using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but without lighting up the dot segments.

As shown in Figure 57(B), the management information display LED 74 is composed of digit 6 (higher digit of the identification segment), digit 7 (lower digit of the identification segment), digit 8 (higher digit of the ratio segment), and digit 9 (lower digit of the ratio segment).
Furthermore, digits 6 through 9 utilize a 7-segment display equipped with dot segments (segment P).
Furthermore, segment P of digit 7 (the lower digit of the identification segment) functions as a digit separator indicator LED. The digit separator indicator LED is used to clearly distinguish between the information type (identification segment) and the ratio (ratio segment).

Figure 58 is a diagram illustrating the details of the digit and segment in the second embodiment.
In the second embodiment, the 7-segment display of digits 1 to 5 itself is composed of segments A to G and does not include a dot segment (segment P).
However, segment P of digit 1 constitutes the game start indicator LED 79d, segment P of digit 2 constitutes the insert indicator LED 79e, segment P of digit 3 constitutes the replay indicator LED 79f, and segment P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous section indicator LED 77.

Figure 59 shows output ports 2 to 7 in the second embodiment.
In the second embodiment, two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) for outputting digit signals are provided, and two more output ports (output ports 4 and 7) for outputting segment signals are provided.
In the second embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided.
Furthermore, segments with digits 1 to 5 are designated as Segment 1 (Segments 1A to 1P), and segments with digits 6 to 9 are designated as Segment 2 (Segments 2A to 2P).

In the second embodiment, output port 3 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals), and output port 6 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals).
Furthermore, in the second embodiment, output port 4 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals), and output port 7 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals).
When illuminating digits 1 through 5, the digit signal is output from output port 3, and the segment 1 signal is output from output port 4.
Furthermore, when digits 6 to 9 are lit, a digit signal is output from output port 6 and a segment 2 signal is output from output port 7.

Next, we will explain the external signals. "External signals" are signals that are output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (such as the hall computer 200 or data counters installed in the hall) via the external central terminal board 100.
As shown in Figure 59, in the second embodiment, external signals 1 to 6 are output from output port 5. Specifically, the D0 bit (external signal 1) of output port 5 is assigned the "setting change signal," and the D1 bit (external signal 2) is assigned the "setting confirmation signal." The D2 to D5 bits are also assigned the respective signals shown in Figure 59.

The "Setting Change Signal" is an external signal indicating that a setting change is in progress and that the setting change has been completed. The setting change signal is output continuously during the setting change and until the end of one game after the setting change (when all reels 31 stop and the medal payout process (step S294 in Figure 67)). This is to ensure that the external system is reliably notified that a setting change has been performed. When the D0 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the setting change signal is on (the setting change is in progress, or the end of one game after the setting change has not yet been reached). When the D0 bit is "0", it indicates that the setting change signal is off (the setting change is neither in progress nor the end of one game after the setting change has yet to be reached).

The "Configuration Check Signal" is an external signal indicating that configuration checks are in progress. The Configuration Check Signal is output during configuration checks. When the D1 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the Configuration Check Signal is on (configuration check is in progress). When the D1 bit is "0", it indicates that the Configuration Check Signal is off (configuration check is not in progress).

The "tamper detection signal 1" is an external signal indicating a potential tampering situation. For example, when the door switch 17 is ON (when the opening of the front door 12 is detected), the tamper detection signal 1 is output. When the D2 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the tamper detection signal 1 is ON (the door switch 17 is ON, and the front door 12 is open). When the D2 bit is "0", it indicates that the tamper detection signal 1 is OFF (the door switch 17 is OFF, and the front door 12 is closed).

"Invalidation Signal 2," like Invalidation Signal 1, is an external signal indicating a potential for invalidation. For example, it outputs Invalidation Signal 2 when a recoverable error state occurs. When the D3 bit of output port 5 is "1," it indicates that Invalidation Signal 2 is on (a recoverable error state is present). When the D3 bit is "0," it indicates that Invalidation Signal 2 is off (a recoverable error state is not present).

"Invalidation signal 3" is an external signal indicating a potential for invalidation, similar to invalidation signals 1 and 2. For example, invalidation signal 3 is output when an unrecoverable error state occurs. When the D4 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that invalidation signal 3 is on (an unrecoverable error state is present). When the D4 bit is "0", it indicates that invalidation signal 3 is off (not in an unrecoverable error state).

The "security signal" is an external signal indicating that one of the following is on: the setting change signal, the setting confirmation signal, or the intrusion detection signals 1-3. When any of these signals are outputting, the security signal is also output simultaneously. When the D5 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the security signal is on (either the setting change signal, the setting confirmation signal, or the intrusion detection signals 1-3 are being output). When the D5 bit is "0", it indicates that the security signal is off (none of the setting change signal, the setting confirmation signal, or the intrusion detection signals 1-3 are being output).

As mentioned above, the setting change signal is output continuously until the end of the first game after the setting change. Therefore, if the system transitions to the setting confirmation state before the end of the first game after the setting change, both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal will be output. Specifically, for example, suppose the setting change state is ended and the system is ready to bet medals (game currency, game value). At this time, if the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets is "0", both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal will be output.
Furthermore, when outputting any of the following signals: setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, or fraud detection signal 1-3, a security signal is also output. Therefore, if the system transitions to the setting confirmation state before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0, D1, and D5 bits of output port 5 turn on ("1"). Subsequently, if the setting confirmation state is terminated before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 and D5 bits of output port 5 remain on ("1"), while the D1 bit turns off ("0"). Then, when the first game after the setting change ends, the D0 and D5 bits of output port 5 also turn off ("0").

Next, we will explain the lighting control for digits 1 through 9.
Digits 1-5 (credit count display LED 76, acquired count display LED 78, and set value display LED 73) are controlled to light up by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in Figure 71, which will be described later. The LED display control process (I_LED_OUT) is processed by the program in the area used (first program).

In contrast, digits 6-9 (management information display LEDs 74) are controlled to light up by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) shown in Figure 73, which will be described later. Furthermore, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is processed by a program outside the usage area (second program).
In the second embodiment, the output ports used are separated into digits 1 to 5, whose illumination is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose illumination is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).

Figure 60 shows the relationship between digits and segments in the second embodiment.
In the second embodiment, there are digits 1 to 9, with the segment of digits 1 to 5 being designated as segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segment of digits 6 to 9 being designated as segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).
Segments 1A to 1G of Digit 1 constitute the upper digits of the credit count display LED 76, and segment 1P of Digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d.
Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 2 constitute the lower digits of the credit count display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 2 constitutes the insert display LED 79e.

Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 3 constitute the upper digits of the winning count display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 3 constitutes the replay display LED 79f.
Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 4 constitute the lower digits of the acquisition count display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77.
Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 5 constitute the set value display LED 73.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 6 constitute the upper-order digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 7 constitute the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and segment 2P of digit 7 constitutes the digit separator display LED.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 8 constitute the upper digits of the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 9 constitute the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

Figure 61(A) shows the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from output port 3 in the second embodiment. Figure 61(B) shows the relationship between the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and the signal output from output port 6 in the second embodiment. Furthermore, Figure 61(C) shows the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the second embodiment.
In this example, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (address "F051(H)" in Figure 54) is provided in the RWM 53 usage area, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in Figure 56) is provided outside the RWM 53 usage area.

LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is a counter that outputs digit 1 to digit 5 signals every one interrupt, and one cycle is a counter with 5 interrupts.
Furthermore, the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is a counter that outputs the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal every one interrupt, and one cycle is a counter with four interrupts.
Thus, in the second embodiment, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently.
Furthermore, because the cycles of the LED display counters differ between the two systems, the timing of the illumination of digits 1-5 will be different from the timing of the illumination of digits 6-9.

The LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) is data indicating the digit that is permitted to light up, and is stored in the RWM53's used area address "F052(H)" (see Figure 54).
As shown in Figure 61(C), the LED display request flag is an 8-bit data set in which bit D0 corresponds to digit 1 signal, bit D1 to digit 2 signal, ..., bit D4 to digit 5 signal. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bits of output port 3 shown in Figure 59.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 61(C), during normal operation, digits 1 to 4 can be lit (digit 5 is off), and during setting changes and setting confirmation, digit 5 can be lit (digits 1 to 4 are off). Note that "normal operation" refers to the game standby and gameplay phases.

Then, in the interrupt handler, the value of the used LED display counter 1 and the value of the LED display request flag are performed using an AND operation, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that will light up in this interrupt handler.
For example, if the value of the LED display counter 1 in the used area is "00001000 (B)" and the value of the LED display request flag is "00001111 (B) (normal mode)", then performing an AND operation on the two results in "00001000 (B)", and only the digit 4 signal becomes "1".
Furthermore, during setting changes and setting confirmation, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal turns on (when the LED display counter 1 in the used area is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from the output port 4 to enable the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5) to light up.

Next, we will explain recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be resolved without turning the power on or off. Examples of recoverable errors include:
Examples of errors include: "HP" error: hopper 35 medal jam (stagnation) error; "HE" error: hopper 35 is empty of medals error; "H0" error: malfunction of hopper 35 dispensing sensor 37; "CE" error: medal stagnation error in medal selector; "CP" error: improper medal passage error in medal selector; "CH" error: malfunction of passage sensor 46 located inside medal selector; "C0" error: malfunction of input sensor 44 located inside medal selector; "C1" error: abnormal medal insertion error; "FE" error: sub-tank is full; "dE" error: front door 12 is open, etc.
Note that recoverable errors are not limited to those listed above.

In step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68 (described later), the input port 51 is read, and input signals from various switches (start switch 41, etc.) and various sensors (on-off sensor 44, etc.) are read. Then, based on the read input signals, various data (level data, rising edge data, falling edge data) are generated and stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53. Subsequently, in step S463 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR), an input error check is performed. Referring to the above-mentioned data, if any recoverable error is detected, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53.

Furthermore, in the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 67), the error detection flag is checked before the operation of the start switch 41 is detected and after all reels 31 have stopped. If any bit of the error detection flag is "1", it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the game is stopped, and the system enters a recoverable error state.
Furthermore, if a recoverable error occurs between the time the start switch 41 is operated and all reels 31 stop, under the condition that a specified number of medals have been bet, the game may continue until all reels 31 stop. After all reels 31 have stopped, the game may be stopped and the recoverable error state may be entered before the medal payout process is executed.
Furthermore, when it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the error information of the recoverable error that occurred is displayed on the acquired count display LED 78. This display of error information (error display) is performed in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 68.

When a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error is removed by the administrator (hall staff), and when the reset switch 153 is operated, the recoverable error state is cleared and gameplay can be resumed.
In this way, when a recoverable error occurs, the recoverable error state can be cleared and the game can be restored to a state where it can continue playing by eliminating the cause of the recoverable error and operating the reset switch 153, without turning the power on or off, and without operating the setting key switch 152.

In contrast, an "unrecoverable error" is a serious error that cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and an operation is performed to switch to the settings change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on). Examples of unrecoverable errors include:
"E1" error: When the power recovery from a power outage is not normal (when there is a power recovery abnormality) (when "Yes" is selected in step S2712 of Figure 62 described later)
"E5" Error: When the stop symbols on reel 31 are not normal (a display error occurs).
"E6" error: When the set value is outside the normal range (when a set value error occurs) (when "No" is displayed in step S458 of Figure 68)
"E7" error: A random number error occurs (when "Yes" is selected in step S460 of Figure 68)
These are some examples.
Please note that the unrecoverable errors are not limited to those mentioned above.

Regardless of which irrecoverable error occurs, the LED 78 displaying the number of points won will show the error information. For example, if an "E1" error occurs, "E" will be displayed in digit 3 and "1" in digit 4. The same display will occur in the case of other irrecoverable errors.
Furthermore, the determination that the recovery from a power outage is not normal (power outage recovery abnormality) and that this results in an "E1" error occurs during step S2715 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) shown in Figure 62 (processing by the program in the used area (first program)).
Furthermore, the determination that the stopped symbols are not normal (a display error has occurred) when the reel 31 stops, and that this results in an "E5" error, is a process within the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 67) (a process performed by the program in the used area (first program)).

In contrast, the process that determines that the set value is not within the normal range (a set value error has occurred) and assigns an "E6" error is the process in step S458 of the interrupt handler (I_INTR) in Figure 68 (processing by a program outside the used area (second program)).
Similarly, the determination that the random number value is not normal (a random number error has occurred) and that this results in an "E7" error is made by the processing in step S460 of the interrupt handler (I_INTR) in Figure 68 (processing by a program outside the used area (second program)).
Then, if the program in the used area (first program) determines that an unrecoverable error has occurred, the unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) shown in Figure 64, which will be described later, is executed.
In response to this, if a program outside the usage area (second program) determines that an unrecoverable error has occurred, the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in Figure 72, described later, is executed.

When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is cut off (power off, power switch 11 is turned off), and then, with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the power supply is restarted (power on, power switch 11 is turned on). This results in "Yes" at step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62, and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in Figure 69 (described later) is not executed, so "Yes" is obtained at step S2712 in Figure 62, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) shown in Figure 65, which will be described later, the initialization process is performed for the entire range including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the RWM53 usage area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)"), and the entire range outside the usage area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)". After that, the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 of Figure 65, where the setting value is reset, and the unrecoverable error state is cleared, and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 67).
In this way, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the unrecoverable error state can be cleared and the game can be restored to a state where it can continue playing by turning the power off, then turning the setting key switch 152 on, and then turning the power back on.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in Figure 71. However, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the interrupt handler (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68 is not executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is also not executed. When an unrecoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the unrecoverable error handler (C_ERROR_STOP) shown in Figure 64 or the unrecoverable error handler 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in Figure 72.
Furthermore, when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the RWM53's used area and outside the used area are maintained without initialization, but when recovering from an unrecoverable error state, the data in the RWM53's used area and outside the used area are initialized.
Furthermore, when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data such as the error detection flag stored at a predetermined address of the RWM53 may be initialized.

Figure 62 is a flowchart showing the program start process (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 in the second embodiment.
When power is turned on (power switch 11 is turned on, power supply is resumed), the program starts from the program start process shown in Figure 62.
In Figure 62, when the program is started in step S2701, in the next step S2702, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's usage area.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2703, where the main control board 50 performs the checksum calculation process for the RWM 53.
Specifically, in step S2703, the data from addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM53's used area and the data from addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added together.
In other words, the data from addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM53's usage area and the addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the usage area are added together.
If the result is "0", it is determined that the RWM53 checksum calculation is normal; if the result is not "0", it is determined that the RWM53 checksum calculation is abnormal.

Furthermore, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" of RWM53 is "55(H)". If it is "55(H)", the power-off processing flag is determined to be normal. If it is not "55(H)", the power-off processing flag is determined to be abnormal.
In this embodiment, when the power is cut off, the power cut off flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is set to the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 (step S2784 of the RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in Figure 70). Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power cut off flag set during the power cut off process has a normal value ("55(H)").

Furthermore, in step S2703, if the checksum calculation result of RWM53 is normal (the sum of the used area and the data outside the used area of RWM35 is "0") and the power-off processing flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is a normal value ("55(H)"), then "55(H)" is stored as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at the address "F2A2(H)" of RWM53.
In response to this, in step S2703, if at least one of the RWM53 checksum calculation results and the power-off processing flag is not normal (abnormal), "00(H)" is stored as power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at the RWM53 address "F2A2(H)". Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2704.

In step S2704, the main control board 50 restores the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) that were saved in step S2702. Then, it proceeds to the next step, S2705.

Here, the program for the program start process is stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the ROM 54's usage area. In other words, the program for the program start process is the first program.
In contrast, the program for the checksum calculation process of the RWM 53 in step S2703 is stored in a control area (second control area, second program area) outside the used area of the ROM 54. That is, the program for the checksum calculation process in step S2703 is the second program.

Therefore, in Figure 62, during the program start process, which is processed by the program in the used area (first program), when the process proceeds to step S2703, the checksum calculation process of RWM53, which is processed by the program outside the used area (second program), is executed. Once this checksum calculation process is completed, the process returns to the program start process, which is processed by the program in the used area (first program).
Furthermore, when transitioning from processing by the program in the used area (first program) to processing by a program outside the used area (second program), the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) are saved to the stack area of the RWM53's used area. When processing by the program outside the used area (second program) ends and the system returns to processing by the program in the used area (first program), the AF registers are restored.

In step S2705, the main control board 50 obtains the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) from the RWM 53 address "F2A2(H)" and stores it in the A register. Then, it proceeds to the next step, S2706.

In step S2706, the main control board 50 determines whether the door switch signal is ON or OFF. As described above, when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 turns ON, and the door switch signal turns ON. If it determines that the door switch signal is ON (the front door 12 is open), the process proceeds to the next step S2707. Conversely, if it determines that the door switch signal is OFF (the front door 12 is closed), the process proceeds to step S2715.

In step S2707, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch signal is ON or OFF. As described above, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key slot 151 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 turns ON, and the setting key switch signal turns ON. If it determines that the setting key switch signal is ON, the process proceeds to step S2711. Conversely, if it determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2708.

In step S2708, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power-off recovery abnormality occurred. Specifically, if the value of the A register (the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) obtained in step S2705) is "55 (H)", it is determined that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the next step, S2709. Conversely, if the value of the A register is "00 (H)", it is determined that a power-off recovery abnormality occurred, and the process proceeds to the recovery failure error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. The specific details of the recovery failure error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.

In step S2709, the main control board 50 sets the reset determination data. Specifically, it stores "7" in the D register. Then, it proceeds to the next step S2710.
When the process proceeds to step S2710, the main control board 50 determines whether the reset switch signal is ON or OFF. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are configured as an integrated switch. When the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is ON, the reset switch signal is ON, and the process proceeds to step S2713. Conversely, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is OFF, the reset switch signal is OFF, and the process proceeds to the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721. The specific details of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) will be described later.

In step S2711, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range for the RWM 53 in case of a power failure recovery abnormality. In this embodiment, when the power failure recovery is abnormal (power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "00(H)"), the entire range including the used area and the area outside the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at the RWM 53 address "F000(H)", is set as the initialization range. The initialization range is specified by the starting address and the number of bytes in the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2712.

In step S2712, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a power-off recovery abnormality. Specifically, this is the same as in step S2708. If it determines that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, it stores the data "7," which is used to determine the setting change state, in the D register and proceeds to the next step, S2713. If it determines that there is a power-off recovery abnormality, it proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific details of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.

In step S2713, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range for the RWM 53 for normal power recovery. In this embodiment, when power recovery is normal (power recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "55(H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, and addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without initialization (clearing). Therefore, in step S2713, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53, and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range. As described above, the initialization range is specified by the starting address and the number of bytes in the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2714.

In step S2714, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settings can be changed. In this embodiment, the settings are set to be unchangeable from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in Figure 67) to the game end check process (step S301 in Figure 67), including the rotation of the reels 31, and the unchangeable settings flag is turned on during this time. Then, in step S2714, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settings can be changed by checking whether or not the unchangeable settings flag is on. If it is determined that the settings cannot be changed (settings cannot be changed), the process proceeds to the next step S2715, and if it is determined that the settings can be changed, the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific details of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.
Furthermore, it is also possible to make the settings changeable at all times without setting a period during which the settings cannot be changed, and therefore without setting a flag indicating that the settings cannot be changed.

At step S2715, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a power-off recovery abnormality. Specifically, this is the same as in step S2708. If it determines that there is a power-off recovery abnormality, it proceeds to step S2801, the recovery failure error processing (C_ERROR_STOP). If it determines that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, it proceeds to step S2721, the power-up processing (M_POWER_ON). The specific details of the power-up processing (M_POWER_ON) and the recovery failure error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721 in Figure 62.
First, in step S2722, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. In this embodiment, the stack pointer is saved during the power-off process (step S2774 of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in Figure 69). Then, in step S2722, the stack pointer saved during the power-off process is restored.

In the next step, S2723, the main control board 50 performs a read operation on the input port 51. This updates each data point on the input port 51 with the latest data.
In the next step, S2724, the main control board 50 clears the power-off process flag. Then, it proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 67), ending the process according to this flowchart.
In this embodiment, after executing the process in step S2724, the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68 is started at the timing before proceeding to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 67).

Figure 64 is a flowchart showing the handling of unrecoverable errors (C_ERROR_STOP).
The program for handling unrecoverable errors (C_ERROR_STOP) is stored in the used area of ROM 54, while the program for handling unrecoverable errors 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is stored outside the used area of ROM 54. In other words, the program for handling unrecoverable errors (C_ERROR_STOP) is the first program, and the program for handling unrecoverable errors 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is the second program.

Furthermore, interrupt handling is disabled during unrecoverable error handling.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that would not normally occur. To prevent the execution of processes based on abnormal data (such as updating the RWM 53 data based on the input signal from the input port 51, sending control commands to the sub-control board 80, and control based on the signal output from the output port based on the RWM 53 data), interrupt processing is disabled during unrecoverable error handling.

Here, the unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) is handled by the first program, and when the unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) is started, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is first prohibited in the interrupt disabling process in step S1490.
In contrast, the unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is handled by the second program, and since the execution of interrupt handling (I_INTR) is prohibited while the second program is running, there is no interrupt disabling process after the start of the unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).

In Figure 64, when the process proceeds to step S1491, the main control board 50 sets the error display data for the lower digit of the unrecoverable error. This process stores the data for lighting up digit 4 (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)") in the H register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1492, where the main control board 50 sets the error display data for the higher digit of the unrecoverable error. This process stores in the D register the data for lighting up digit 3 (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)").

Furthermore, in step S1492, the main control board 50 stores segment data ("01111001B") in the E register to display "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of the unrecoverable error.
Before proceeding to the unrecoverable error handling process, segment data for displaying the lower digit of the unrecoverable error is stored in the L register. For example, if the unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the lower digit (digit 4) is "1", so segment data for displaying "1"("00000110B") is stored in the L register.
In the following example, we will assume that the unrecoverable error 1 in this case is an "E1" error.

Therefore, the register values of D, E, H, and L are as follows at this point:
D register value: Data to illuminate the higher digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: Segment data ("01111001(B)") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error.
H register value: Data to illuminate the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
L register value: Segment data ("00000110(B)") to display "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error.
This is the result.

In the next step, S1493, the main control board 50 sets the addresses and number of output ports to be cleared. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) are output ports 0 to 7, and since an address is set for each output port, the addresses and the number of output ports (8) are set.
In the next step, S1494, the main control board 50 sequentially turns off the outputs of output ports 0 to 7. Specifically, for output ports 0 to 7, the output of each output port is turned off ("00000000 (B)").

In the next step, S1495, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next output port. That is, it increments the address representing the output port by "1". For example, if the address of output port 0 is "00F1(H)", then the address of output port 1, "00F2(H)", is set as the next address.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1496, where the main control board 50 determines whether all output ports have been turned off, that is, whether the output has been turned off up to output port 7. If it determines that it has not been finished, it returns to step S1494; if it determines that it has been finished, it proceeds to step S1497. In this way, the process from steps S1494 to S1496 is repeated until all output ports have been turned off, and when it is determined that all output ports have been turned off, it proceeds to step S1497.

By turning off all output ports in this way, all active signals that were output before this process was executed are turned off. This causes all LEDs, including digits 1-9 (credit count LED 76, acquired count LED 78, set value LED 73, and management information LED 74), to turn off, thus preventing LED burn-in.

Furthermore, if an irrecoverable error occurs while the motor 32 is outputting an excitation signal, the excitation signal for the motor 32 will continue to be output until the irrecoverable error is cleared unless the output ports are turned off. However, by turning off all output ports, the excitation signal for the motor 32 is turned off, thus preventing the motor 32 from burning out.
Furthermore, if an irrecoverable error occurs while the blocker signal is being output, and the output port is not turned off, the blocker 45 will remain on (guiding the medals to the hopper 35) even though the medal detection process will not be executed, resulting in the medals being swallowed. However, by turning off all output ports, the blocker 45 is turned off, and the inserted medals are returned, thus preventing the medals from being swallowed.

In the next step, S1497, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from output ports 3 and 4 to display errors in the higher digits. Output port 3 outputs the data stored in the D register, and output port 4 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, in step S1498, the main control board 50 performs a waiting process to prevent LED flickering. The length of this waiting period depends on the LED's performance, but it can be set to approximately 0.1 ms. Here, a predetermined value (e.g., 255) is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted using the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes 0, it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, and the process proceeds to the next step, S1499.

In step S1499, the main control board 50 turns off ("0") the outputs of output ports 3 and 4. This process is performed to prevent afterimages.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1500, where the main control board 50 performs a standby (wait) process to prevent LED flickering. This process involves turning off the outputs of output ports 3 and 4 ("0") and then ensuring that the LEDs are completely extinguished.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1501, where the main control board 50 switches between the upper and lower digits.
Specifically, the DE register value and the HL register value are swapped. This results in,
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data to illuminate the higher digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: Segment data ("01111001(B)") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error.
H register value: Data to illuminate the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
L register value: Segment data ("00000110(B)") to display "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error.
<After replacement>
D register value: Data to illuminate the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
E register value: Segment data ("00000110(B)") to display "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error.
H register value: Data to illuminate the higher digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
L register value: Segment data ("01111001(B)") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error.
This is the result.

Then, proceeding to step S1502, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from output ports 3 and 4 to display errors in the lower digits. Similar to step S1497, output port 3 outputs the D register value, and output port 4 outputs the E register value. As a result, output port 3 outputs "00001000(B)" (data where only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") to illuminate digit 4, and output port 4 outputs segment data "00000110(B)" to display "1".

Next, the process proceeds to step S1503, where the main control board 50 performs a standby process to prevent flickering. This process is the same as in step S1498.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1504, where the main control board 50 turns off ("0") the outputs of output ports 3 and 4, similar to step S1499.
In the next step, S1505, the main control board 50 performs a standby process to prevent flickering. This process is the same as in step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

Through the above process, for example, if there is an "E1" error, the display of "E" using digit 3 and the display of "1" using digit 4 will be repeatedly displayed alternately at predetermined time intervals.
Note that LED display control (I_LED_OU T) is executed by interrupt handling (I_INTR), but as mentioned above, in the event of an unrecoverable error, interrupt handling (I_INTR) is not executed (it is prohibited), and as shown in Figure 64, the display of the unrecoverable error is performed by arithmetic processing using registers and hardware configuration.

Figure 65 is a flowchart of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 in Figure 62.
The main control board 50 first initializes the specified address of the RWM 53 in step S2732, sets (specifies) the next address in the initialization range of the RWM 53 in the next step S2733, and proceeds to the next step S2734 to determine whether or not initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53. If it determines that initialization has not been completed, it returns to step S2732, and if it determines that initialization has been completed, it proceeds to step S2735. In this way, the process from steps S2732 to S2734 is repeated until initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53.

As described above, in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62, the initialization range of the RWM 53 (the starting address and number of bytes of the initialization range) is set.
Then, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is performed on the used area of the RWM53 initialization range set in step S2711 or S2713.
Note that steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) are executed by the program for the used area (first program). Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is performed only for the initialization range of the used area within the initialization range of the RWM 53.

Then, when it is determined that initialization is complete in step S2734, the main control board 50 proceeds to the next step S2735, where it saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's usage area.
When the process proceeds to the next step S2736, the main control board 50 performs initialization of the RWM 53 initialization range that is outside the used area, which was set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) shown in Figure 62.

As described above, steps S2732 to S2734 perform initialization of the used area within the initialization range of the RWM 53, while step S2736 performs initialization of the area outside the used area within the initialization range of the RWM 53.
Note that the processing in step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by a program outside the used area (second program). Therefore, in step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is performed only for the initialization range of the RWM 53 that is outside the used area.
Then, after completing the initialization of the initialization range outside the used area in step S2736, the process proceeds to the next step S2737, in which the main control board 50 restores the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) that were saved in step S2735. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2738.

In step S2738, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time for a reset. Specifically, it determines whether or not the result in step S2710 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 was "Yes". In this embodiment, in step S2709 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62, "7" is stored in the D register as reset determination data. Furthermore, if the result in step S2710 in Figure 62 is "Yes", the "7" in the D register is maintained, and if the result in step S2710 in Figure 62 is "No", the D register is cleared ("0" is stored). Then, in step S2738 in Figure 65, it is determined whether or not the D register is "7", and if the D register is "7", it is determined that it is time for a reset ("Yes" in step S2710 in Figure 62), and the process proceeds to step S2739. In contrast, when the D register is "0", it is determined that it is not a reset ("No" in step S2710 of Figure 62), and step S2739 is skipped, proceeding to step S2740.

In step S2739, the main control board 50 sets the display for when the system is reset. Specifically, it stores "70 (H)" in the winnings data (_NB_PAYOUT) at address "F011 (H)" of the RWM 53. This allows the interrupt processing executed after step S2739 to display "70" on the winnings display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4), informing the administrator (hall staff) that a reset has occurred.

In the next step, S2740, the main control board 50 sets a setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2740 indicates whether it is a reset or a setting change. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after step S2740, allowing the sub-control board 80 to determine whether it is a reset or a setting change.

In this embodiment, after executing the process in step S2740 and before proceeding to the process in step S2741, the interrupt handler (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68 is started. In other words, the process of initializing the RWM 53's initialization range (steps S2732-S2734 and S2736 in Figure 65) is completed before the interrupt handler (I_INTR) starts. This configuration prevents the interrupt handler (I_INTR) from being executed while the RWM 53 is being initialized. This prevents the contents of the RWM 53 from being changed (rewritten, overwritten) by the interrupt handler (I_INTR) while the RWM 53 is being initialized.

In the next step, S2741, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time for a reset. Specifically, this is the same as in step S2738. If it determines that it is not time for a reset, it proceeds to step S2742. If it determines that it is time for a reset, it skips step S2742 and proceeds to step S2743.
When the process proceeds to step S2742, the main control board 50 executes a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). The specific details of this process will be described later. After the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S2743.

In step S2743, the main control board 50 determines whether the waiting time has elapsed. This waiting time is for waiting for the setting command to be sent. If it determines that the waiting time has elapsed, it proceeds to the next step S2744, where the main control board 50 sets the initialization waiting time. In the next step S2745, it executes a 2-byte time waiting process (wait process). The processes in steps S2744 and S2745 are for waiting for the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 to complete its initialization.

Then, once the 2-byte time-waiting process is complete, the process proceeds to the next step, S2746, where the main control board 50 sets a setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2746 indicates that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has finished and specifies the setting value. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after step S2746, allowing the sub-control board 80 to determine that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has finished and to determine the setting value.

In the next step, S2747, the main control board 50 clears the acquisition count data (_NB_PAYOUT) at address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53 (stores "0"). As a result, the interrupt processing executed after step S2747 displays "00" on the acquisition count display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4).
Then, once the clearing of the acquired data in step S2747 is complete, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 67), and the process according to this flowchart ends.

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in Figure 65.
When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is started, first, in step S2751, the main control board 50 obtains the setting value data (_NB_RANK) from the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Then, it proceeds to the next step S2752.

When the process proceeds to step S2752, the main control board 50 generates set value display data. Specifically, in step S2752, the A register value is first stored in the C register, and then "1" is added to the A register value. Then the process proceeds to the next step, S2753.
As described above, in this embodiment, there are setting values from "1" to "6", and the setting value data is managed as "0" to "5". When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. Therefore, "N", which is obtained by adding "1" to the setting value data "N-1", is used as the setting value display data.

When the process proceeds to step S2753, the main control board 50 saves the generated setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2753, the A register value is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2754.
In step S2754, the main control board 50 executes an interrupt waiting process. This process waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. This is because it waits for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once, and then waits for the rising edge data of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 signal to turn off ("0").

In other words, when the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is operated (turned on), the rising edge data of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 signal becomes ON ("1"). Subsequently, if the interrupt handler (I_INTR) is executed even once, the rising edge data of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 signal becomes OFF ("0").
However, if the process in steps S2752 to S2758 loops multiple times after the rising edge data of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 signal turns ON ("1") but before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed, the process of adding "1" to the setting value data will be executed repeatedly.
Therefore, by waiting for the interrupt handler (I_INTR) to be executed once in step S2754, the process in steps S2752 to S2758 is prevented from looping multiple times, thus preventing the process of adding "1" to the set value data from being executed repeatedly.
Then, after waiting for one interruption time to elapse in step S2754, the process proceeds to the next step S2755.

Furthermore, if the signal level data of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the signal level data of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, then the rising edge data of the reset switch 153 signal will be "1".
Furthermore, if the level data of the reset switch 153 signal was "1" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the reset switch 153 signal is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the reset switch 153 signal will be "0".

Similarly, if the level data of the reset switch 153 signal was "0" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the reset switch 153 signal is "0" during the current interrupt processing, then the rising edge data of the reset switch 153 signal will be "0".
Furthermore, if the level data of the reset switch 153 signal was "1" during the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the reset switch 153 signal is "0" during the current interrupt processing, then the falling edge data of the reset switch 153 signal will be "1".
Other switches such as the start switch 41, stop switch 42, and setting key switch 152 are the same as the reset switch (setting change switch) 153.

In step S2755, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start setting confirmation. This process determines whether it is setting confirmation time or setting change time. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets before the start of the game is "0", the D register is set to store "1". Then, in step S2755, first the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether the A register value is "1". If the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is setting confirmation time and the process proceeds to step S2760. If the A register value is not "1" (when the D register value is "0" or "7"), it is determined that it is not setting confirmation time (it is setting change time) and the process proceeds to step S2756. After determining whether the A register value is "1", the C register value is stored in the A register. As described above, in step S2752 the A register value is stored in the C register, so the setting value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the value of the C register is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes the set value data.
Note that when the power is restored (when the power is turned on and the program start process (M_PRG_START) begins), the A register to the L register are reset to their initial values ("0").

In step S2756, the main control board 50 refers to the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53. If the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal is "1," that is, if it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2759. Conversely, if the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal is "0," that is, if it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S2757.

In step S2757, the main control board 50 refers to the rising edge data of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 signal stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53. If the rising edge data of the reset switch 153 signal is "1," that is, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2758. Conversely, if the rising edge data of the reset switch 153 signal is "0," that is, if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2752.

When the process proceeds to step S2758, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the set value data. Specifically, it adds "1" to the A register value. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is the set value data. Then, if "Yes" is answered in step S2757, that is, if it is determined that the setting change (reset) switch 153 has been operated, "1" is added to the set value data. If the A register value becomes "6" after the addition, the A register value is rewritten to "0". Then, the process returns to step S2752.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S2759, the main control board 50 saves the setting value data. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is the setting value data. Then, when "Yes" is selected in step S2756 and the process proceeds to step S2759, the A register value remains the setting value data. In step S2759, the A register value is stored at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53. This allows the setting value data to be saved in the RWM 53.

In the next step, S2760, the main control board 50 refers to the falling-edge data of the setting key switch 152 signal stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53. The process in step S2760 is repeated until the falling-edge data of the setting key switch 152 signal becomes "1," that is, until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. Once the falling-edge data of the setting key switch 152 signal becomes "1," i.e., the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2761.

In step S2761, the main control board 50 clears the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) for address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53 (to "0"). Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Furthermore, when the settings are changed and the process according to this flowchart is terminated, the process proceeds to step S2743 in Figure 65.

Here, we will explain the transition to the settings confirmation state (settings confirmation mode, settings confirmation in progress).
In this embodiment, when the power is on, the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open), and the number of bets is "0", when the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register, and the system transitions to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (operating the setting change switch 153 will not change the setting value), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current setting value is also displayed on the setting value display LED 73. When the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends, and the system returns to a state where medals can be bet.

More specifically, in the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 67), the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch 152 is ON or OFF before detecting the operation of the start switch 41. If the door switch 17 is ON (the front door 12 is open) and the number of beds is "0", and the system determines that the setting key switch 152 is ON, it proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) shown in Figure 66. Steps S2751 to S2754 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in Figure 66 are as described above.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the number of bets before the start of the game is "0", the setting key switch 152 is turned ON, and the D register is set to store "1". Then, proceeding to step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in Figure 66, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start setting confirmation. Specifically, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether the A register value is "1". If the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to start setting confirmation ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2760.

Subsequently, the process in step S2760 is repeated until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. During this time, the current setting value is continuously displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Then, in step S2760, when it is determined that the setting key switch 152 is off, the process proceeds to step S2761, and the main control board 50 clears (sets to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Furthermore, when the processing according to this flowchart is completed during the setting confirmation, the process proceeds to the next step in the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 67), which determines whether the setting key switch 152 is ON or OFF (whether or not to proceed to the setting confirmation state).

Thus, in the second embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process can be executed in the same module. That is, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are created in the same module. Then, based on the information stored in the D register, it is determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
Furthermore, the decision to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be made based on information stored in a register other than the D register, or it may be made based on information stored in the RWM53.

Figure 67 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the second embodiment. The main process is the process for one game. During gameplay, the main process is repeated for each game.
First, in step S271, the stack pointer is set. The stack pointer refers to the RWM53 area where data at the time of a power outage (for example, register values, instructions processed in the main process before interrupt processing, etc.) is stored when a power outage occurs. Setting the stack pointer is the process of setting the register values to their initial values in that RWM53 area.

In the next step, S272, the game start set process is performed. This process involves generating, updating, and saving the operating status flag.
The next step, S273, involves reading the bet tokens. This process reads the current number of tokens that have been bet, and reads either bet data or automatic bet data.
In the next step, S274, it is determined whether or not there are bet tokens based on the number of bet tokens read in step S273.

If it is determined in step S274 that there are bet tokens, the process proceeds to step S276. If it is determined that there are no bet tokens, the process proceeds to step S275 to wait for token insertion, and then proceeds to step S276. The token insertion waiting process in step S275 determines whether the setting key switch is on or off, and if it is on, it performs a process such as switching to setting confirmation mode.
In step S276, the inserted medals are managed. This process involves determining whether or not the medals have been inserted, and whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step, S277, the software random number update process is performed. This process updates the processing random number used for processing (calculating) the random number (hardware random number or built-in random number) used in the role selection means 61 (for example, by adding "1" each time). The software random number is a 16-bit random number with a range of "0" to "65535 (D)". Alternatively, as an update method, the interrupt count value (a count value (variable) that is incremented when an interrupt occurs) may be added to the value before the update.

In the next step, S278, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279. If it determines that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even if the start switch 41 has been operated, if the number of bets has not reached the specified number for the game, the result in step S278 is "No".

In step S279, the process for when the start switch is received is executed. This process involves setting a flag that prevents setting changes, setting an output request for when the reel 31 starts rotating, and setting the number of outputs for sending a medal insertion signal as an external signal to the hall computer, etc.
In the next step, S280, the acquisition count data is cleared. This causes the acquisition count display LED 78 to show "00" (or turn off).

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, where the main control board 50 executes the process of updating the number of AT games played. This process subtracts the number of AT games played when AT is in progress and predetermined conditions are met. Therefore, this process is not executed when not in AT mode.
Furthermore, during AT, whether or not to add to the number of AT games is determined based on the result of the role lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare role is won, the number of additional AT games is determined. Therefore, when the number of AT games is added and the added amount is added to the AT game counter, this is done after the processing in step S282 (this is not shown in Figure 67).
In addition, the AT game count counter is updated in step S281 after the start switch is accepted (step S279), but it is not limited to this, and the AT game count counter may also be updated after the role lottery process in step S282 or after all reels 31 have stopped (step S290 or later).
Furthermore, in the specifications of the AT with a difference in token count management system, if there is an AT difference in token count counter, the AT difference in token count counter is updated after all reels 31 have stopped and after the token payout process due to winning has finished (after step S300).

In step S282, the role lottery means 61 performs a role lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random value for the role lottery is obtained in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed to determine whether the obtained random value corresponds to any of the winning roles using the role lottery table.

In the next step, S283, the main control board 50 executes the advantageous section transition lottery process. In this embodiment, the AT lottery is executed at the same time as the advantageous section transition lottery.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284, where the button press order instruction number is set. This process generates the button press order instruction number and displays the button press order instruction information when the instruction function is activated during the game (the button press order instruction number is displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78) during the AT.

In the next step, S285, the process for preparing to start reel rotation is executed. This process determines whether the minimum play time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if it has, the process proceeds to the next step, S286.
Here, the RWM53 has a memory area for storing the timer value for the minimum play time, and the initial value is "1834(D) (2.235ms × 1834 ≈ 4099ms)". In step S279, if it is determined that the minimum play time is "0", the initial value "1834(D)" is set as the minimum play time (timer value). Then, the minimum play time is deducted by "1" each time an interrupt is processed. When proceeding to step S285 for the next game, it is determined whether the minimum play time is "0", and if it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start the rotation of the reel 31. When the reel 31 reaches a constant speed, it allows the stop switch 42 to be operated and proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, the system checks whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it detects whether or not an operation signal has been received from the stop switch 42. If an operation signal is received, the system determines the stopping position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 based on the result of the prize draw and the position of the reel 31, and controls the reel 31 to stop at the determined position.

In the next step, S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all reels 31 have stopped and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it determines whether all reels 31 have stopped. If it determines that all reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S290; if it determines that all reels 31 have not stopped, it returns to step S287.

In step S290, the acquisition count data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, during AT, if the instruction function is activated, the acquisition count display LED 78 may display button press instruction information (for example, "=1"). In this case, the display on the acquisition count display LED 78 will become "00" due to the interrupt processing executed after the processing in step S290.
The acquired count display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, the LED display request flag may be set to "00010011(B)", or data for turning off the LED may be provided as segment data and that data may be output.

In step S291, the display of the symbols is determined. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether or not a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination has stopped on an active line.
In the next step, S292, it is determined whether or not a display error has occurred in the pattern. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304. If it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293.
Here, the stopping of reel 31 is performed based on the stop position determination table, so normally, reel 31 will not stop at a position other than the position determined in the stop position determination table. However, if, as a result of the symbol display determination, a symbol that should not be displayed (a kick symbol) is displayed on an active line, it is determined to be an abnormality, and recovery error processing is performed.

If it is determined that no display error occurred in step S292 and the process proceeds to step S293, the payout count update process is executed. This process stores the payout count for the game in question as payout count data and payout count data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. Next, the process proceeds to step S295, where an interrupt waiting process is performed. In the next step S296, the interrupt process is prohibited. Due to the processing in steps S295 and S296, interrupts are prohibited immediately after an interrupt occurs.

In the next step, S297, the AF register is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step S298, where the ratio setting process is executed. This "ratio setting process" involves updating various counter values and performing ratio calculations in order to display five different ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, in step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and in the next step, S300, interrupts are enabled (resumed). In this way, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved, and interrupt processing is disabled during execution.

Furthermore, interrupt handling is prohibited during the execution of the ratio setting process because the ratio setting process uses a program stored outside the used memory area. If an interrupt occurs while the main process is executing a program outside the used memory area, the programs within and outside the used memory area will become mixed, complicating the process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301, where a game completion check is performed. This process clears the condition device (winning role) flag, etc. Then, the process proceeds to step S302, where an output request for the end of the game is set, and in the next step S303, control command set 1 is performed. These processes set control command data to send a message to the sub-control board 80 indicating that a game has ended.
Then, after completing the process in step S303, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 in the second embodiment.
In the interrupt handler (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68, after step S452, the process proceeds to step S2770, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power outage has occurred. If it determines that a power outage has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2771, where the main control board 50 executes the power outage handler (I_POWER_DOWN). Conversely, if it determines that no power outage has occurred, step S2771 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S454.

Thus, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in the interrupt handler (I_INTR). Therefore, if the interrupt handler (I_INTR) is not executed due to interrupt disabling, or if the interrupt handler (I_INTR) is not executed because a program outside the used area (second program) is running, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) will also not be executed. The specific details of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) will be described later. After the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is completed, the process proceeds to step S454.

Furthermore, in the interrupt handler (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68, the process proceeds from step S455 to step S2821, where the main control board 50 executes LED display control (I_LED_OUT). Thus, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in the interrupt handler (I_INTR). The specific details of LED display control (I_LED_OUT) will be described later.
Then, after the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is completed, the process proceeds to step S2765, where the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's usage area. Then, the process proceeds to step S2221, where the main control board 50 executes the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).

Here, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is a process that controls the lighting of the credit count display LED 76, the acquired count display LED 78, and the set value display LED 73 (digits 1 to 5), and is executed by the program in the usage area (first program).
In contrast, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process that controls the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6-9), and is executed by a program outside the usage area (second program). The specific details of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) will be described later. After the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is completed, the process proceeds to step S458.

In step S458, the main control board 50 determines whether the set value is within the normal range. Specifically, it reads the set value data (_NB_RANK) stored at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Next, it performs a comparison operation between the A register value and "5" (subtracting "5" from the A register value) to determine whether the carry flag equals "1". If the carry flag ≠ "1", it determines that the set value data is within the normal range (the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"). If the carry flag equals "1", it determines that the set value data is not within the normal range. If it is determined that the value is within the normal range, it proceeds to step S459; if it is determined that the value is not within the normal range, it proceeds to step S2811, which is the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).

Furthermore, in the interrupt handler (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68, if "No" is given in step S458, or if "Yes" is given in step S460, the process proceeds to step S2811, and the main control board 50 executes the unrecoverable error handler 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). The specific details of the unrecoverable error handler 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.
Furthermore, in the interrupt handler (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68, if "No" is found in step S460, the process proceeds to step S2766, where the main control board 50 restores the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) that was saved in step S2765. Then, the process proceeds to step S457.

In the interrupt handler (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68, steps S2221, S458, S459, and S460 are executed by a program outside the used area (second program).
Then, when transitioning from processing by the program in the used area (first program) to processing by the program outside the used area (second program), in step S2765 the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the RWM53's used area. When processing by the program outside the used area (second program) ends and returns to processing by the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored in step S2766.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 in Figure 68.
When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is initiated, the main control board 50 first saves the registers in step S2772. This process saves various registers to the stack area of the RWM 53's usage area.

In the next step, S2773, the main control board 50 clears all output ports 52. This turns off the output of all output ports 52, stopping their operation, for example, when the motor 32 is running (rotating the reel 31) or when the hopper motor 36 is running (dispensing medals).
In the next step, S2774, the main control board 50 saves the stack pointer to a predetermined address in the working area of the RWM 53's usage area. The stack pointer saved in step S2774 is restored in step S2722 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) shown in Figure 63.

In the next step, S2775, the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's usage area. Then, in step S2776, the main control board 50 executes the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET). The specific details of the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) will be described later. After the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is completed, the next step, S2777, is performed, and the main control board 50 restores the AF registers saved in step S2775. Finally, the process proceeds to step S2778.

Note that the RWM checksumset process (S_SUM_SET) is executed by a program outside the used memory area (the second program).
Then, when transitioning from processing by the program in the used area (first program) to processing by the program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the RWM53's used area in step S2775. When processing by the program outside the used area (second program) ends and returns to processing by the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored in step S2777.

At step S2778, the main control board 50 disables access to the RWM 53. Then, at step S2779, the main control board 50 enters a reset waiting state (loop processing state). Finally, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Figure 70 is a flowchart of the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 in Figure 69.
When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is started, the main control board 50 first saves the stack pointer (SP register) to a specific address in the working area outside the RWM 53's usage area in step S2781, sets the stack pointer outside the usage area ("F400(H)") in the next step 2782, and proceeds to the next step S2783, where it saves multiple registers to the stack area outside the RWM 53's usage area. Then it proceeds to the next step S2784.

In step S2781, the stack pointer (SP register) is stored in the temporary stack pointer buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in Figure 56).
As mentioned above, the RWM checksum set operation (S_SUM_SET) is performed by a program outside the used memory area (the second program). Therefore, while the program outside the used memory area (the second program) is running, the stack pointer used by the program in the used memory area (the first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when the program returns to the used memory area (the first program).
In step S2782, the stack pointer (SP register) stores the stack pointer outside the used area (address "F400(H)").
Furthermore, in step S2783, various registers are saved to a stack area outside the area being used.

When the process proceeds to step S2784, the main control board 50 sets the power-off flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53. Here, if the power-off process has been executed, "55(H)" is stored as the power-off flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).
Furthermore, when power is restored, the power-off process flag is cleared (set to "0") in step S2724 of the power-off process (M_POWER_ON) shown in Figure 63. Therefore, after the execution of step S2724, the address of RWM53 "F2A1(H)" becomes "00(H)". If the power-off process is not executed, the power-off process flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is not set, and the address of RWM53 "F2A1(H)" remains "00(H)".
In the next step, S2785, the main control board 50 clears (sets to "0") the RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, it proceeds to the next step, S2786.

In step S2786, the main control board 50 sets the starting address of the RWM 53's usage area ("F000 (H)") in the addressing register (for example, register B). In the next step, S2787, it sets the number of bytes in the RWM 53's usage area (checksum calculation count) in the calculation count register (for example, register C). In the next step, S2788, it sets the initial data ("00000000 (B)") in the checksum calculation register (for example, register D).

Then, proceeding to the next step S2789, the main control board 50 performs the checksum calculation process for the used area of the RWM 53.
In this embodiment, the usable area of the RWM 53 is set to the range of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)". The processes in steps S2789 and S2790 are repeated until it is determined in the next step S2790 that the checksum calculation process has been completed up to the address "F1FF(H)" of the RWM 53. This calculates the checksum of the usable area of the RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)").

More specifically, in this embodiment, in step S2789, the data indicated by the addressing register (B register) value is subtracted from the checksum calculation register (D register). In the next step, S2790, the operation count register (C register) value is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". If it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the RWM53 usage area is complete, and the process proceeds to step S2791. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be "0", the addressing register (B register) value is updated (added by "1"), and the process returns to step S2789.

Then, once the checksum calculation process for the RWM53's usage area is complete, the process proceeds to step S2791. The main control board 50 sets the addressing register (B register) to the starting address outside the RWM53's usage area ("F210(H)"). In the next step, S2792, the number of bytes outside the RWM53's usage area (checksum calculation number) is set in the calculation count register (C register).

Then, proceeding to the next step S2793, the main control board 50 performs a checksum calculation process for areas outside the RWM 53's usage area.
In this embodiment, the area outside the RWM 53's usage range is set to addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)". Steps S2793 and S2794 are repeated until it is determined in the next step S2794 that the checksum calculation process has been completed up to the address "F3FF(H)" of the RWM 53. This calculates the checksum for the area outside the RWM 53's usage range (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)").

More specifically, in this embodiment, at step S2793, the checksum calculation result for the RWM53's usage area is stored in the checksum calculation register (D register). Then, in step S2793, the data indicated by the addressing register (B register) value is subtracted from the checksum calculation register (D register) value. In the next step, S2794, the calculation count register (C register) value is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0". If it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation process for areas outside the RWM53's usage area is complete, and the process proceeds to step S2795. Conversely, if it is determined not to be "0", the addressing register (B register) value is updated (added by "1"), and the process returns to step S2793.

In this embodiment, RWM checksum data (also referred to as complement data, error detection data, or error detection information) is calculated by performing the processes in steps S2785 to S2794.
As mentioned above, this RWM checksum data (complement data) is a value that, when added to the sum of the data from addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM53 usage area and the data from addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the usage area (excluding "F2A0(H)"), results in "0".

Then, once the checksum calculation process for areas outside the RWM 53's usage area is complete, the process proceeds to step S2795, where the main control board 50 stores (saves) the RWM checksum data (complement data) at the RWM 53's address "F2A0(H)".
In the next step, S2796, the main control board 50 restores the registers that were saved in step S2783, and in the next step, S2797, it restores the stack pointer that was saved in step S2781. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 in Figure 68.
First, in step S2822, output ports 3 and 4 (Figure 59) are turned off. Output port 3 corresponds to the digit 1 to digit 5 signals, and output port 4 corresponds to the segment 1A to segment 1P signals. By outputting "00000000 (B)" to these output ports 3 and 4, the output of digits 1 to 5 is temporarily disabled. This prevents different LEDs from appearing to light up simultaneously for even a moment when switching the LED display (preventing afterimages).

In the next step, S2823, the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the used area (Figures 54 and 61(A)) is updated. Updating the LED display counter 1 involves shifting bit "1" one digit to the right. This updated value is stored at the RWM 53 address "F051(H)" (Figure 54). Then, the process proceeds to step S2824.

In step S2824, it is determined whether the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00000000 (B)". If it is determined to be "00000000 (B)", the process proceeds to step S2825. Conversely, if it is determined not to be "00000000 (B)", step S2825 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2826.

In step S2825, the LED display counter 1 is initialized. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000 (B)" and stored in the RWM 53 address "F051 (H)" (Figure 54). Then, the process proceeds to step S2826.
In step S2826, the values of the LED display counter 1 (address "F051(H)" in Figure 54) and the LED display request flag (address "F052(H)" in Figure 54) stored in the RWM 53 are retrieved. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2827, where the segment display confirmation set for the digit to be displayed is performed. This process involves performing an AND operation between the A register value (the value of the LED display request flag) and the E register value (the value of LED display counter 1) to create the data for the LED to be lit.

for example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
This is the result.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10,000,000 B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
This is the result.
Then, the result of that calculation is stored in register A. Furthermore, the value stored in register A is stored in register D.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2828, where it is determined whether the A register value (the value obtained by AND operation between the LED display counter 1 value and the LED display request flag value) is "0". If it is "0", it is determined that there is no display request ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2844. Conversely, if it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2829.

In step S2829, error display data is acquired. When an error occurs, the error display data is stored at a predetermined address in RWM53. Then, in step S2829, the error display data is read from RWM53 and stored in the B register.
In the next step, S2830, the LED segment table 2 is set. In this embodiment, the system includes an LED segment table 1 that stores data for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display, and an LED segment table 2 that stores data for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display. These are stored in the usable area of ROM 54. The specific configurations of LED segment tables 1 and 2 will not be explained. In step S2830, the starting address of LED segment table 2 is read, and its value is stored in the HL register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2831, where the setting value display data (address "F001(H)" in Figure 54) is read from RWM53 and stored in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2832 to determine whether there is a request to display the setting value. Specifically, it is determined whether the D4 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 5) of the value obtained by the above AND operation stored in the D register is "1"("00010000(B)"). If the D4 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the setting value ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D4 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the setting value ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2833.

In step S2833, the credit count data (address "F010(H)" in Figure 54) is read from RWM53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step, S2834, the offset for the higher digit is obtained. This process involves dividing the value in the A register (the credit count data obtained in step S2833) by "10 (decimal)", storing the quotient in the A register, and storing the remainder in the C register.

In the next step, S2835, it is determined whether there is a request to display the higher digits of the credit count. Specifically, it is determined whether the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1) of the value obtained by the above AND operation stored in the D register is "1". If the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the higher digits of the credit count ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the higher digits of the credit count ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2836.

Step S2836 determines whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit count. Specifically, it checks whether the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2) of the value obtained by the above AND operation stored in the D register is "1". If the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit count ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2842. Conversely, if the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit count ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2837.

In step S2837, the acquired count data (address "F011(H)" in Figure 54) is read from RWM53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step, S2838, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0". If it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2840. On the other hand, if the B register value is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2839.

In step S2839, LED segment table 1 is set. At step S2839, the HL register stores the starting address of LED segment table 2, which is used to display numbers on the 7-segment display. However, in the event of an error, the 7-segment display will show an English character corresponding to the type of error. Therefore, in step S2839, the starting address of LED segment table 1, which is used to display English characters on the 7-segment display, is read, and this value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the HL register now contains the starting address of LED segment table 1, instead of the starting address of LED segment table 2 that was set in step S2830.

In the next step, S2840, the offset for the higher digit is obtained. At the point of step S2840, the A register stores the acquired count data obtained in step S2837, and the B register stores the error display data obtained in step S2829. If no error occurs, the acquired count data stored in the A register is divided by "10 (decimal)," the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register. Conversely, if an error occurs, the error display data stored in the B register is divided by "10 (decimal)," the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In the next step, S2841, it is determined whether there is a request to display the higher digits of the acquired number display LED 78. Specifically, it is determined whether the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3) of the value obtained by the above AND operation stored in the D register is "1". If the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the higher digits of the acquired number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D2 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the higher digits of the acquired number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2842.

In step S2842, the offset for the lower digit is obtained. This process stores the data stored in the C register into the A register. At the point of step S2842, the A register stores the quotient calculated in the division in step S2834 or S2840, and the C register stores the remainder calculated in the division in step S2834 or S2840. Then, in step S2842, the C register value (the remainder of the division) is stored in the A register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2843 to acquire segment output data. Specifically, the data stored in the HL register (the starting address of LED segment table 2 stored in step S2830, or the starting address of LED segment table 1 stored in step S2839) and the data stored in the A register (the offset value corresponding to the display data) are added together. The data corresponding to the resulting address is then retrieved from LED segment table 1 or 2 in ROM 54 and stored in the D register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2844, where it is determined whether or not there is a request to display segment P.
Specifically, first, it is determined whether the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 (E register value) is "1" (timing of digit 4 lighting) and whether the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag (obtained from the address "F062(H)" of RWM 53 in Figure 54) is "1". If the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P ("Yes") and the process proceeds to step S2845.
On the other hand, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no request to display segment P ("No"), and step S2845 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2846.

Next, if the D3 bit of LED display counter 1 is not "1", proceed to the following process.
The LED display counter 1 (E register value) and the status display LED lighting data (obtained from the address "F044(H)" of RWM53 in Figure 54) are used in an AND operation to determine whether the AND operation result is "0" or not. If the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845. On the other hand, if the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display segment P ("No"), and the process skips step S2845 and proceeds to step S2846.

Step S2845 sets the segment P output data. Specifically, the segment output data (D register value) obtained in step S2843 is ORed with "10000000 (B)", and the OR result is stored in the D register. This sets the D7 bit of the segment output data (the bit corresponding to segment P) to "1".

Next, the process proceeds to step S2846, where a digit signal is output from output port 3 and a segment signal is output from output port 4. Specifically, the data stored in the E register (LED display counter 1) is output as a digit signal from output port 3, and the data stored in the D register (segment output data) is output as a segment signal from output port 4. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Figure 72 is a flowchart showing the unrecoverable error handling process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).
As described above, the unrecoverable error handler 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is processed by the second program, and since the execution of interrupt handlers (I_INTR) is prohibited while the second program is running, there is no interrupt disabling process after the start of the unrecoverable error handler 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). Except for this point, the unrecoverable error handler 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 72 is the same as the unrecoverable error handler (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 64.
In Figure 72, the same steps are assigned to processes that are identical to those in Figure 64.

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 68.
The ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed during interrupt processing (I_INTR). Furthermore, since interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed during setting change states, setting confirmation states, between start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in Figure 67) and game end check processing (step S301 in Figure 67) (during gameplay), and even in recovery-possible error states, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed, and various ratio information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

When the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) process is started, the main control board 50 first stores the stack pointer (SP register) in the temporary stack pointer storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in Figure 56) in step S2461.
As described above, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is processed by a program outside the usage area (second program). Therefore, while the program outside the usage area (second program) is executing, the stack pointer used by the program in the usage area (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when the program returns to the usage area (first program).

In the next step, S2462, the main control board 50 sets the stack pointer to an area outside the used area. This process stores "F400(H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step, S2463, the main control board 50 saves the registers. This process saves various registers to a stack area outside of their usage area.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2464, where the main control board 50 executes the blinking request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH). This process is shown in Figure 74, which will be described later, and updates the blinking request flag (address "F291(H)").

In the next step, S2465, the main control board 50 updates the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME). This process is shown in Figure 76, which will be described later, and updates the blinking switch flag (address "F293(H)"), the display switch time (address "F294"), and the blinking switch time (address "F296(H)").
In the next step, S2466, the main control board 50 performs ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT). This processing is the process shown in Figure 77, which will be described later, and is the process of actually displaying (lighting up or turning off) the ratio from the interrupt processing.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2467, where the main control board 50 restores the registers. This process restores the various registers that were saved in step S2463.
In the next step, S2468, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. This process stores the data stored in the temporary stack pointer buffer 2, which was saved in step S2461, into the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, this process causes the stack pointer to indicate the address of the used memory area. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed during the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the period between the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in Figure 67) and the game end check process (step S301 in Figure 67) (during gameplay), and even in the recoverable error state, so ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed.
Therefore, during the setting change state, setting confirmation state, the period between the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in Figure 67) and the game end check process (step S301 in Figure 67) (during gameplay), and even in the recovery-possible error state, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) makes it possible to sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game result on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be performed regardless of whether the door switch 17 is on or off (open or closed front door 12). That is, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be performed whether the door switch 17 is on (front door 12 is open) or off (front door 12 is closed).
Therefore, whether the door switch 17 is ON (the front door 12 is open) or OFF (the front door 12 is closed), the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) makes it possible to sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game result on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

In contrast, if an unrecoverable error occurs and the system enters an unrecoverable error state (where the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 64 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 72 is executed and the game progresses to a halt), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited, and therefore the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is not executed. As a result, the various ratios related to the information type and game results are no longer displayed on digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the case of an unrecoverable error state, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) shown in Figure 64 above, or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in Figure 72 later, the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off ("00000000 (B)").

As a result, in the unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6-9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6-9) remains "00000000 (B)". Therefore, digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off until the unrecoverable error state is cleared and interrupt processing (I_INTR) resumes.
Furthermore, the fact that digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off is a characteristic behavior specific to an irrecoverable error state, and this allows the administrator (hall staff) to be notified that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the generation of the blinking request flag (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of Figure 73.
When the process of generating the blinking request flag (S_LED_FLASH) is started, the main control board 50 first sets the number of repetitions and the initial value in step S2481. This process stores "6 (H)" in the B register and "0" in the C register.
Here, the repetition count "6" is a value used to determine whether or not the six ratio segments flash.

In the next step, S2482, the main control board 50 sets the address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This process stores the starting address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
Figure 75 shows the flashing/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). The flashing/non-applicable item determination value table defines predetermined values for the ratios of six items. For example, a ratio of "70" for the indicated feature means that the display will flash when the ratio of the indicated feature is "70" or higher.
As shown in Figure 75, the starting address of the blinking/not applicable item determination value table is "2500(H)". Therefore, "2500(H)" is stored in the DE register.

Furthermore, "non-applicable items" refer to items that do not possess the corresponding function (performance). For example, a gaming machine that does not have "RB (Type 1 Special Bonus)" will not display the continuous bonus ratio, so when the continuous bonus ratio is displayed, "--" will light up on the ratio segment.
In the second embodiment, the ratios for all six items are displayed, but if there is an item that does not apply, "DE(H)" is stored in the address of ROM 54 corresponding to the item that does not apply in the blinking/not applicable item determination value table.

For example, in a gaming machine that does not have an "RB (Type 1 Special Bonus)", addresses "2502(H)" and "2504(H)" are stored with "DE(H)" instead of "60(H)" in Figure 75.
Thus, regardless of the type of gaming machine, such as one that does not have an "RB (Type 1 Special Bonus)," the control process is designed to enable control of the lighting of management information simply by modifying some of the data in the flashing/non-applicable item judgment value table. Therefore, the control program can be easily reused in other products.
Note that the value corresponding to an item that does not apply is not limited to "DE(H)".

In the next step, S2483, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the ratio data. This process stores the address (F28D(H) in Figure 56) where the ratio data for special features and other statuses is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2484, where the main control board 50 acquires the blinking or non-applicable item determination value. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Store the data at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the value of register A.

In the next step, S2485, the main control board 50 determines whether the value is an inapplicable item. This process subtracts "DD(H)" from the A register value, and if the result of the calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the value is an inapplicable item.
In other words, when an item is not applicable, as mentioned above, "DE(H)" is stored in the blinking/not applicable item determination value table. Subtracting "1" from "DE(H)" and then subtracting "DD(H)" again results in "0", making the zero flag "1".

Furthermore, if a predetermined value other than "DE(H)" is stored as the value corresponding to an inapplicable item, the calculation "predetermined value - 1 - (predetermined value - 1)" is performed, for example, and if the result of the calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the value is for an inapplicable item.
Furthermore, the "predetermined value" is sufficient if it exceeds "70 (H)" in the case of the bonus item ratio including instructions, the bonus item ratio (cumulative), and the bonus item ratio (6000 times); if it exceeds "60 (H)" in the case of the continuous bonus item ratio (cumulative) and the continuous bonus item ratio (6000 times); and if it exceeds "50 (H)" in the case of the bonus item status ratio.
If it is determined that the item value is not an invalid item value, the process proceeds to the next step S2486. If it is determined that the item value is an invalid item value, step S2486 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2487.

In step S2486, the main control board 50 acquires ratio data. This process stores the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value into the A register.
In the next step, S2487, the main control board 50 saves the ratio data or the value of an inapplicable item. This process stores the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. This process has the following meaning:

If there are non-applicable items, the storage area of the RWM53 where the ratio data is stored is empty before the above saving process.
For example, if the "RB (Type 1 Special Bonus)" is not installed, the continuous bonus ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289(H)") and the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) data (address "F28B(H)") will store "00(H)".

As will be explained in more detail later, when displaying the ratio on the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored at that address. In this case, if "00 (H)" is stored in the continuous prize ratio (6000 times) data, "00" will be displayed on the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74 when displaying the continuous prize ratio (6000 times). To prevent this, the value of the A register obtained in step S2485 (in this embodiment, "DD (H)") is stored as the ratio data, so that "--" is displayed.
Furthermore, the program is designed to be usable in common by both gaming machines that have non-applicable items and those that do not.

In the next step, S2488, the main control board 50 performs a blinking detection. This process subtracts the data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. If a carry-over occurs as a result of this calculation, the carry flag is set to "1".
As will be explained in more detail later, when the carry flag is set to "1", it means that the item will light up in a non-flashing manner when displayed, and when the carry flag is set to "0", it means that the item will light up in a flashing manner when displayed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2489, where the main control board 50 generates a blinking request flag. This process involves performing an operation to rotate and shift the carry flag and the C register value to the left.
Specifically, if the carry flag value is "CY" and the C register values are "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0",
"CY", C register values "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register values "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Perform the following operation.

For example, if the C register value is the initial value "00000000 (B)" as shown in step S2481, and the carry flag was "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000 (B)"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
Perform the following operation.
Therefore, the C register value becomes "00000001 (B)".
This C register value ultimately becomes the blinking request flag.
In other words, the process in step S2488 is to store in a register (storage area) information that determines whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item in question, based on a calculation using ratio data and a specific value stored in the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table.

In the next step, S2490, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the next ratio data. This process subtracts "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value in the first flashing determination is "F28D(H)" (bonus item status ratio data) as described above. Subtracting "1" here results in the HL register value becoming "F28C(H)" (bonus item ratio (cumulative) data), which is the target of the second flashing determination.

In the next step, S2491, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next blinking/not applicable item determination value table. This process increments the DE register value by "1". For example, if the DE register value was initially "2500 (H)", this process will result in "2501 (H)".
Here, as shown in Figure 75, the blinking/not applicable item judgment values are stored in the following order at addresses "2500(H)" to "2505(H)": bonus item status ratio, bonus item ratio (cumulative), consecutive bonus item ratio (cumulative), bonus item ratio (6000 times), consecutive bonus item ratio (6000 times), and bonus item ratio including instructions.
This simplifies the process by allowing the target address to be specified through a loop process (steps S2484 to S2492) in which the initial value of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table address (DE register value) is set to "2500 (H)" and "1" is added when determining the next blinking/non-applicable item.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2492, where the main control board 50 determines whether the repetition has ended. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the value of register B.
(2) If the value of register B is not "0", it is determined that the loop has not ended.
Here, the B register value is set to "6" in the first step S2481, so the number of repetitions becomes "6". If it is determined that the repetition has ended, proceed to step S2493; if it is determined that the repetition has not ended, return to step S2484.
In this manner, the blinking detection for the six items is performed.

After completing the blinking check for the six items and proceeding to step S2493, the main control board 50 acquires the total number of games played counter value. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Store the lower two bytes of the total number of games played counter (address "F26D(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Store the value of the upper byte of the total number of games played counter (address "F26D(H)") in the A register.
As mentioned above, the total number of games played counter consists of 3 bytes, with "F26D(H)" being the memory area that stores the first digit, and its value is stored in the L register.
Furthermore, "F26E(H)" is a memory area that stores the second digit, and its value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is a memory area that stores the third digit, and its value is stored in the A register.

In the next step, S2494, the main control board 50 determines whether the upper byte of the total number of games played counter is "0". This process determines whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0". If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2495; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2496.
In step S2495, the main control board 50 determines whether 6000 games have elapsed. This process involves subtracting "6000 (D)" from the HL register value (the lower two bytes of the total number of games played counter). If a carry-over occurs as a result of this calculation, the carry flag becomes "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 6000 games have not elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S2497.
If it is determined that 6000 games have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2496.

In step S2496, the main control board 50 updates the data for the blinking request flag. This process sets the D6 bit of the C register to "1". Here, the C register value is set to the value corresponding to the blinking request flag at address "F291(H)" in Figure 56 (however, at this point, the bit is inverted). Therefore, when 6000 games have elapsed, the process of setting the D6 bit to "1" is executed.

In the next step, S2497, the main control board 50 determines whether the upper byte of the total game count counter exceeds "2" (i.e., "3" or greater). Here, "3" is subtracted from the A register value. If there is no carry-over in this subtraction, the carry flag ≠ "1". And, if the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the upper byte of the total game count counter exceeds "2" (i.e., "3" or greater).

This is done to determine whether or not 175,000 games have been reached. First, the upper byte is compared with "3". Here, "175000 (D)" is "2AB98 (H)" in hexadecimal, so if the A register value exceeds "2" (the A register value is "3" or greater), it is inevitable that the total number of games played counter exceeds "175,000 (D)".
In step S2497, if the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the upper byte of the total number of games played is greater than "2", and the process proceeds to step S2500. If the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the upper byte of the total number of games played is not greater than "2", and the process proceeds to step S2498.

In step S2498, the main control board 50 determines whether the upper byte of the total game count counter is "2". This process subtracts "2" from the A register value. If the result is not "0", it determines that the upper byte of the total game count counter is not "2". If it is determined that the upper byte of the total game count counter is not "2", the process proceeds to step S2501. If it is determined that the upper byte of the total game count counter is "2", the process proceeds to step S2499.

In step S2499, the main control board 50 determines whether 175,000 games have been played. Specifically, it subtracts "AB98(H)" from the HL register value, and if there is a carry-over as a result of this calculation, the carry flag becomes "1". When the carry flag is "1", it determines that 175,000 games have not been played.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2500; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2500, the main control board 50 updates the data for the blinking request flag. This process sets the D7 bit of the C register to "1". The D7 bit of the C register corresponds to the D7 bit of the blinking request flag (175000 game blinking flag) at address "F291(H)" in Figure 56. Then, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2501, the main control board 50 generates a blinking request flag. Here, it performs the following processing.
(1) Store "01111111(B)" in register A.
(2) Perform an exclusive OR operation (XOR) between the value in register A and the value in register C, and store the result of the operation in register A.

Before the execution of step S2501, as described above, the blinking item (bit) among the data stored in the C register is set to "0". For example, when 175,000 games have passed, the D7 bit is set to "1" as described above, so in other words, when 175,000 games have not passed, it is set to "0".
Therefore, by inverting the bits of the C register value, a blink request flag is generated so that the blinking item (bit) becomes "1".

In the next step, S2502, the main control board 50 saves the blinking request flag generated in step S2501. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking request flag (F291(H) in Figure 56) in the HL register.
(2) Store the value of register A at the address indicated by the value of register HL (F291(H) in Figure 56).
As a result, items that blink are set to "1" and items that do not blink are set to "0". In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0", and blink request flags for eight items, including whether or not to blink, are stored at address "F291(H)" in Figure 56.

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in Figure 73.
When the ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) process is started, the main control board 50 first updates the display switching time in step S2511. Here, it performs the following processing.
(1) Store the address in the HL register that stores the display switching time (F294(H) in Figure 56).
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction operation that cycles between "0" and "2144 (D)" when expressed as a decimal number representing the display switching time.

Therefore, when the display switching time is "0", if this process is performed, "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) will be stored as the display switching time.
Furthermore, when the process is performed when the value is "0", and "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
Since an interrupt is executed every 2.235 ms, the value changes from "0" to "2144 (D)" approximately every 4792 ms, and the carry flag becomes "1".
This causes the ratio display to switch approximately every 5 seconds.

In the next step, S2512, the main control board 50 determines whether the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is based on whether the carry flag became "1" in the processing of step S2511. If the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed.
Then, if it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2513; if it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2518.

In step S2513, the main control board 50 saves the blinking switching time. This process stores "134(D)(86(H))" at the address (blinking switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (i.e., "F296(H)").
In other words, when it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching time will be saved. The blinking switching time stored will be "2.235 × 134 = 299.49 (ms)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S2514, where the main control board 50 turns off the blinking toggle flag. Here, the following processes are executed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking toggle flag (F293(H) in Figure 56) in the HL register.
(2) Store "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value.
As mentioned above, when the data stored in the blinking toggle flag is "0", it means the light is on, and when it is "1", it means the light is off.
In other words, when the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching flag becomes "0" (lit).

Next, the process proceeds to step S2515, where the main control board 50 updates the ratio display number. The following processes are performed here.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value.
In other words, the HL register stores the address of the RWM53 corresponding to the ratio display number (F292(H) in Figure 56).
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process performs a circular addition operation on the ratio display number, cycling between "0" and "5". Therefore, if this process is performed when the ratio display number is "5", "0" will be stored as the ratio display number. Also, if this process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5", the carry flag will be set to "1".

In the next step, S2516, the main control board 50 determines whether the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, it is determined that the ratio display number is not "0" when the carry flag is "1". In other words, when the ratio display number is "5", executing the process in step S2515 results in the carry flag ≠ "1" (= "0"), and in this case, it is determined that the ratio display number is "0".

Then, in step S2516, if it is determined that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process proceeds to step S2517, and if it is determined that it is not "0", the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S2517, the main control board 50 corrects the ratio display number. This process adds "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F292 (H)" in Figure 56). As a result of this process, if "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". This causes the ratio display number to cycle through "1" to "6". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

If it is determined in step S2512 that the display switching time has not elapsed and the process proceeds to step S2518, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switching time. Here, the following process is performed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking switch time (F296(H) in Figure 56) in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at that address.
This process performs a cyclic subtraction operation that cycles between "0" and "134 (D)" when expressed in decimal as the blinking switching time.
Therefore, when the blinking switching time is "0", if this process is performed, "134 (D)" (86 (H)) will be stored as the blinking switching time.
Furthermore, when the process is performed when the value is "0", and "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the blinking switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, the process proceeds to step S2519, where the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switching time has elapsed. This determination is made by checking whether the carry flag is "1". If the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed. If it is determined that the blinking switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2520. If it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2520, the main control board 50 updates the blinking toggle flag. Here, the following process is performed.
(1) Store the address of the blinking toggle flag (F293(H) in Figure 56) in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the addition at that address.
This process performs a cyclic addition operation on the blinking toggle flag, cycling between "0" and "1". Therefore, when this process is performed while the blinking toggle flag is "1", "0" is stored as the blinking toggle flag.
Then, the process described in this flowchart is terminated.

Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in Figure 73.
When the ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) is started, the main control board 50 first obtains the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in Figure 56) in step S1471. This process obtains the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and stores it in the D register.

In the next step, S1472, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request for ratio display. Here, it determines whether or not there is a request to display any of digits 6 to 9. Specifically, it performs an AND operation with the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in the D register and "00001111 (B)". If the result of the AND operation is "0", it is determined that there is no request for ratio display and the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if the result of the AND operation is not "0", it is determined that there is a request for ratio display and the process proceeds to step S1475.
In the second embodiment, the result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter 2 and "00001111(B)" will never be "0", so the result in step S1472 will never be "No".

In the next step, S1475, the ratio display number (address "F292(H)" in Figure 56) is obtained. This process involves obtaining the ratio display number, storing it in the A register, and then storing the A register value in the E register.
Here, the number of blinking bit checks, which will be described later, is determined based on the ratio display number. For example, it is as follows:
Example 1)
Ratio display number is "1": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the indicated feature ratio.
Example 2)
Ratio display number "2": Obtain the number of flashing bit checks for the continuous bonus ratio (6000 times).
Example 3)
Ratio display number is "5": Obtain the number of flashing bit checks for the bonus ratio (total cumulative).
Example 4)
Ratio display number is "6": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the ratio of the special feature status.
Furthermore, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become equivalent.

In the next step, S2531, the address of the blink bit check count table is set. This process stores in the HL register the address obtained by subtracting "1" from the starting address of the blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
Figure 78 shows the blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
As shown in Figure 78, a predetermined value is stored for each ratio (for example, the value corresponding to the ratio of the indicated feature is "8 (H)").
The starting address is "2510(H)". Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

The "number of blinking bit checks" is a value that indicates how many bits must be advanced from bit D0 in the blink request flag at address "F292(H)" before the bit to be checked is reached.
For example, in Figure 78, the values "8 (H)" are stored for the instruction-included bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), bonus ratio (cumulative), and bonus status ratio. This value is used to determine whether the value of the 8th bit, D7, counting from the D0 bit in the flashing request flag is "1". The D7 bit is a flag that is "1" when the total number of plays has not reached 175,000. When this D7 bit is "1", the identification segments for the instruction-included bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), bonus ratio (cumulative), and bonus status ratio will flash.

Furthermore, in Figure 78, the values "7 (H)" are stored for the consecutive bonus payout ratio (6000 times) and bonus payout ratio (6000 times). This value is used to determine whether the value of the 7th bit (D6 bit) from the D0 bit in the flashing request flag is "1". The D6 bit is a flag that is "1" when the total number of plays has not reached 6000. When this D6 bit is "1", the identification segments for the consecutive bonus payout ratio (6000 times) and bonus payout ratio (6000 times) will flash.

In the next step, S2532, the main control board 50 sets the number of times to check the blinking bits of the identification segment. Here, the following processes are performed.
(1) Store the data obtained by adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (the ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250F(H) + 3(H) = 2512(H) (= HL register value)
7(H) (= B register value)
This is the result.

In other words, "250F(H)" becomes the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F292(H)") is used as an offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit check table, making it possible to retrieve the data stored at that address.
In the example above, the information "7(H)" is obtained, which is used to determine whether or not to flash the identification segment when the payout ratio (6000 times) stored at address "2512(H)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S1476, where the main control board 50 sets the identification segment offset table. This process stores the starting address of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) in the HL register. The starting address is "2520 (H)," and the value obtained by subtracting "1" from this address, "251F (H)," is stored in the HL register.

In the next step, S1477, the main control board 50 acquires the identification segment offset value. This process reads the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as the offset value from the identification segment offset table.
Specifically, the following processes will be executed.
(1) Store the data obtained by adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520(H)", which is "251F(H)" plus "1(H)", is stored in the HL register, and "7A(H)", the data stored at that address, is stored in the A register. Also, when the ratio display number is "2", "2521(H)", which is "251F(H)" plus "2(H)", is stored in the HL register, and "6B(H)", the data stored at that address, is stored in the A register.

In the next step, S1478, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) (a request to display digit 6). Here, it checks whether the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1". If it is "1", it determines that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482; otherwise, it proceeds to step S1479.

In step S1479, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (a request to display digit 7). Here, it checks whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1". If it is "1", it determines that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), the process proceeds to step S1483; otherwise, it proceeds to step S2533.

In step S2533, the main control board 50 sets the number of ratio segment blinking bit checks. Here, the following processes are executed.
(1) Store the value of register E in register A.
(2) Store the value of register A in register B.
Here, the E register stores the ratio display number obtained in step S1475. Therefore, the same value is stored in the E register, A register, and B register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1480. Note that when the process proceeds to step S1480, there is no request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (100 digits), that is, there is no request to display the identification segment (when the ratio segment is to be displayed). Therefore, in step S1480, the ratio data is acquired.
In step S1480, the main control board 50 obtains a numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register. For example, when the E register value is "00000001(B)" which corresponds to the ratio display number "1", the instruction-included bonus ratio data is obtained.

The specific ratio data was obtained as follows:
(1) The HL register stores the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the address of the RWM53 where the instruction-included bonus ratio data is stored ("F288(H)" in Figure 56) ("F287(H)").
(2) The data obtained by adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register is stored in the HL register.
(3) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
In other words, using "F287(H)" as the reference address and the ratio display number as the offset value, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored can be calculated (specified), and the data stored at that RWM address can be retrieved (stored) in a register (storage area).

This process stores an offset value in the A register for displaying one of the following ratios: the ratio data for the included bonus item, the ratio data for consecutive bonus items (6000 times), the bonus item ratio data (6000 times), the cumulative ratio data for consecutive bonus items, the cumulative ratio data for bonus item status, or the bonus item status ratio. This offset value (A register value) is used when acquiring the ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1481, where the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display a ratio (single digit) (a request to display digit 9). This process determines whether the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1". If there is a request to display a ratio (single digit), the process proceeds to step S1483; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1482.
Note that if there is no request for a ratio (1 digit) display in step S1481, it means there is a request for a ratio (10 digits) display.

If a request is made to display a ratio (1000 digits) or a ratio (10 digits) based on the above processing, the process proceeds to step S1482; if a request is made to display a ratio (100 digits) or a ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483.
In step S1482, the main control board 50 sets the offset for the higher digit. When the system proceeds to step S1482, the higher digit of the identification segment or ratio segment is illuminated. At this point, the A register stores the identification segment offset value (step S1477) or ratio data (step S1480). Then, the following processing is performed.

(1) Swap the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits stored in the A register.
For example, if the data before the swap is "0011/1001(B)" (where "/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), then swapping the lower 4 bits with the upper 4 bits results in "1001/0011(B)".
(2) The value in register A is ANDed with "00001111 (B)", and the result of the operation is stored in register A. This process masks the upper four bits (set to "0") in order to use the lower four bits of register A as an offset value.
In the one-byte data for the identification segment offset value and the one-byte data for the offset value used to display the ratio, the upper four bits correspond to the offset value of the higher digit, and the lower four bits correspond to the offset value of the lower digit. Therefore, by performing the above process, an offset value is generated for obtaining the segment data of the higher digit.

In the next step, S1483, the main control board 50 sets the ratio display segment data table. This process stores the starting address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register. The starting address is "2530(H)", and "2530(H)" is stored in the HL register. The specific configuration of the ratio display segment data table is omitted from this explanation.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1484, where the main control board 50 acquires segment output data. This process involves adding the A register value (offset value) to the HL register value (the starting address of the ratio display segment data table), and then storing the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition in the E register.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; starting address value of the ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
In that case,
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) ("5" display data)
This is the result.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1485, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when displaying digits 6 to 9, segment P (dot) of digit 7 is always displayed. Therefore, when there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), it is determined that segment P is displayed. On the other hand, when there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), ratio (10 digits), or ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that there is no request to display segment P.

Here, for example, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1". If it is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P, and if it is not "1", it is determined that there is no request to display segment P. Specifically, the following processing is performed.
(1) Store "00000010(B)" in register A.
(2) The A register value and the D register value (the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in step S1471) are used in an AND operation. If the result of the operation is not "0", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P.
If it is determined that there is a request to display segment P, the process proceeds to step S1486; if it is determined that there is no request to display segment P, the process proceeds to step S2534.

In step S1486, the main control board 50 sets the output data corresponding to segment P. Since segment P corresponds to bit D7 of the 8-bit data, an OR operation is performed between the segment data (E register value) obtained in step S1484 and "10000000 (B)," and the result of the operation is stored in the E register.

In the next step, S2534, the main control board 50 acquires the blinking request flag. This process stores the data of the blinking request flag (address "F291(H)" in Figure 56) in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S2535, where the main control board 50 performs a blinking bit check. This process shifts the A register to the right by "1" and stores the result of the shift that overflows in the carry flag. In other words, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag = "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag = "1".

In the next step, S2536, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the inspection has been completed. Here, it performs the following processing.
(1) Subtract "1" from the value of the B register.
(2) When it is determined that the B register value is "0", the check is considered to have ended.
If it is determined that the inspection is complete, proceed to step S2537; if it is determined that the inspection is not complete, return to step S2535.
Through the above process, the value of the blink request flag is right-shifted the number of times it was initially stored in the B register, and the result of any overflow from the shift is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the blink request flag is "10000000 (B)" (the blink flag at bit D7 is on 175,000 times) and the value of the B register is "8 (H)",
First attempt: "10000000 (B)" → "01000000 (B)", Carry flag = "0"
B register value = 8 - 1 = 7 (H)
Second attempt: "01000000(B)" → "00100000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 7 - 1 = 6 (H)
Third attempt: "00100000(B)" → "00010000(B)", Carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6 - 1 = 5 (H)
4th attempt: "00010000(B)" → "00001000(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5 - 1 = 4 (H)
5th attempt: "00001000(B)" → "00000100(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4 - 1 = 3 (H)
6th attempt: "00000100(B)" → "00000010(B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3 - 1 = 2 (H)
7th attempt: "00000010 (B)" → "00000001 (B)", Carry flag = "0"
B register value = 2 - 1 = 1 (H)
8th attempt: "00000001 (B)" → "00000000 (B)", carry flag = "1"
B register value = 1 - 1 = 0 (H)
This is the result.

In step S2537, the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking request flag is on or off. This process checks whether the carry flag was "1" when the inspection was determined to be complete in step S2536. If it is "1", the system determines that the blinking request flag is on. If the system determines that the blinking request flag is on, it proceeds to step S2538; otherwise, it proceeds to step S1487.

In step S2538, the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switching flag is on or off. Here, it performs the following processing.
(1) Store the data of the blinking toggle flag (address "F293(H)" in Figure 56) in the A register.
(2) When the value of register A is "0" (second zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the blinking toggle flag is not on.
If it is determined that the blinking toggle flag is on, proceed to step S2539; otherwise, proceed to step S1487.
Furthermore, from steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the blinking request flag is off (No in step S2537), the process does not proceed to step S2538, so even if the blinking switch flag is on, the light will not turn off.
b) Even if the flashing request flag is ON (Yes in step S2537), if the flashing switching flag is OFF (No in step S2538), the light will remain lit.
c) If the blinking request flag is ON (Yes in step S2537) and the blinking switch flag is ON (Yes in step S2538), the process proceeds to step S2539, and the light turns off.

In step S2539, the main control board 50 clears the segment data. This process stores the B register value in the E register.
Here, the value of the B register is always "0" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection is complete. Therefore, this process sets "0" in the E register. In other words, when the blink request flag is on ("1") and the blink toggle flag is on ("1", i.e., off), the interrupt process turns off the display that is to be lit, so the process in step S2539 is executed to set the segment data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)". Then the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1487, the main control board 50 outputs a digit signal and a segment signal. It outputs a segment signal from output port 7 and a digit signal from output port 6. The following processes are executed here.
(1) Swap the DE register value and the HL register value.
Here, the D register stores the digit signal. The E register stores the segment signal. And,
Swap the data stored in the D register with the data stored in the H register.
Swap the data stored in the E register with the data stored in the L register.
As a result,
The H register stores the digit signal.
The L register stores segment signals.
(2) Output the L register value to output port 7 and the H register value to output port 6.
This concludes the process described in this flowchart.

Next, we will describe the operation of the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the second embodiment when it is operated.
When the advantageous section indicator LED 77 is lit and it is possible to bet medals, if a recoverable error state occurs (for example, a medal retention error in the medal selector ("CE" error), the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is operated and the recoverable error state is cleared.
In this case, as described above, even if the recoverable error state is cleared, the data in the RWM 53's used area and outside the used area are not initialized and are maintained. Therefore, the data related to the advantageous period is also not initialized and is maintained, and the advantageous period indicator LED 77 remains lit.
Furthermore, when recovering from a recoverable error state, the error-related data, such as the error detection flag, stored at a predetermined address in the RWM53 may be initialized.

In contrast, if a recovery error occurs while the advantageous section indicator LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated).
In this case, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 becomes "No", step S2710 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally is set.

Furthermore, since medals can be bet, the setting change disabled flag is off, so the response in step S2714 is "Yes," and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) shown in Figure 65, the initialization process is performed for the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM53's usage area, and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the usage area. As a result, the data related to the advantageous section is initialized, and the advantageous section indicator LED 77 turns off. However, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" is not initialized and is maintained, so the setting value is not changed. Furthermore, since this is a reset, step S2741 in Figure 65 is answered with "Yes," and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped, so the system does not transition to the setting change state. Afterward, the system proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 67), returning to a state where medals can be bet.

Thus, if a recovery error occurs while the advantageous section indicator LED 77 is lit and it is possible to bet medals, the recovery error can be cleared by operating the reset switch 153, thereby maintaining gameplay within the advantageous section.
In contrast, if the advantageous section indicator LED 77 is lit and it is possible to bet medals, but a recovery error occurs, turning the power off and then turning the power on with the reset switch 153 on will clear the recovery error and allow the game to resume from the normal section instead of the advantageous section.
This allows the administrator (the hall staff) to choose whether to maintain gameplay in the advantageous zone or resume gameplay from the normal zone.

Furthermore, for example, suppose a player stops playing during a game in a favorable period (partway through a game in a favorable period). In such a case, if the next player were allowed to continue playing from where the favorable period left off, that player would gain too much of an advantage.
On the other hand, changing settings during the hall's operating hours is undesirable because it could stimulate the gambling instincts of players.
Furthermore, turning off the power to the gaming machines and stopping their operation during the hall's business hours reduces the utilization rate of the gaming machines, which is undesirable from a hall management perspective.
Therefore, when the advantageous section indicator LED 77 is lit and it is possible to bet medals, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch 153 in the ON position. This allows gameplay to be resumed from the normal section without changing any settings.

Furthermore, assume that the power is turned off while medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated).
In this case, the system can transition to a settings change state (settings change mode, settings being changed). After that, the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and the settings change state ends, returning the system to a state where medals can be bet.

Specifically, when the power is turned off while medals can be bet, and then the setting key switch 152 is ON and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is OFF (not operated), and the power is turned ON, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 will respond with "Yes" at step S2707, and proceed to step S2711. Since this is not a power-off recovery abnormality, the response at step S2712 will be "No," and the process will proceed to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of a setting change under normal power recovery conditions is set. Furthermore, since medals can be bet, the setting change disabled flag is OFF, so the response at step S2714 will be "Yes," and the process will proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) at step S2731.

Furthermore, since it is not a reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 65 will be "No," and the process proceeds to step S2742, the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). Then, since it is not the start of the setting confirmation, step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in Figure 66 will be "No," and the process repeats steps S2752 to S2758 until it becomes "Yes" in step S2756. That is, the setting change state is established. After that, when the start switch 41 is operated, step S2756 will be "Yes," and then when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, step S2760 will be "Yes," ending the setting change state. Finally, after going through steps S2743 to S2747 in Figure 65, the process proceeds to step S248, the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 67), returning to a state where medals can be bet.

Furthermore, as described above, in the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 67), the setting change is disabled during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in Figure 67) to the game end check process (step S301 in Figure 67), including the rotation of the reel 31, and the setting change disabled flag is turned on during this period.
Furthermore, when the setting change disabled flag is on, the power is turned off, and then, under the conditions that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, even if the power is turned on, step S2714 in Figure 62 will result in "No", so the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 will not proceed, and therefore the setting change state will not be entered.

In contrast, when medals can be bet, the setting change disabled flag is off. Therefore, under these circumstances, if the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, and the power is turned on, step S2714 in Figure 62 will be "Yes," and the system will proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731, making it possible to transition to the setting change state.

Furthermore, as described above, when the power is restored normally after a power outage, performing the operation to transition to the setting change state will proceed to step S2713 in Figure 62, and the RWM53 initialization range will be set to include addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area, and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. In addition, the RWM53's used area initialization range includes the credit count data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" and the bet count data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)".

Therefore, if, under conditions where medals can be bet, the bet amount is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", the power is turned off, and then, under conditions where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned on and the system enters the setting change state, then when the setting change state ends and the system becomes capable of betting medals again, the bet amount will become "0", and the number of credits will also become "0".

Furthermore, if, under conditions where medals can be bet, the bet amount is between "1" and "3", and the credit count is "0", the power is turned off, and then, under conditions where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned on and the system transitions to the setting change state, then when the setting change state ends and the system becomes capable of betting medals again, the bet amount will become "0", and the credit count will also become "0".

Furthermore, if, under conditions where medals can be bet, the bet amount is "0", and the credit amount is between "1" and "50", the power is turned off, and then, under conditions where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned on and the system enters the setting change state, then when the setting change state ends and the system becomes capable of betting medals again, the bet amount will be "0", and the credit amount will also be "0".

Furthermore, if, under conditions where medals can be bet, the bet count is "0", and the credit count is "0", the power is turned off, and then, under conditions where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned on and the system transitions to the setting change state, then when the setting change state ends and medals become available again, the bet count will be "0", and the credit count will also be "0".

Furthermore, suppose the power is turned off while the system is in a state where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated). In this case, the initialization process for the predetermined memory area of the RWM 53 becomes possible, and after the initialization process is completed, the system returns to a state where medals can be bet without transitioning to a setting change state.

Specifically, when the power is turned off while medals can be bet, and then the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, and the power is turned on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 will be "No", step S2710 will be "Yes", and the process will proceed to step S2713, where the initialization range of RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally is set. Also, since medals can be bet, the setting change disabled flag is off, so step S2714 will be "Yes", and the process will proceed to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) shown in Figure 65, the initialization process is performed for the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM53's used area, and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.
Furthermore, since it is a reset, the result in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 65 is "Yes," and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2743. For this reason, the system does not transition to the setting change state. After that, the process proceeds through steps S2744 to S2747, and the system proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 67), returning to a state where medals can be bet.

Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the setting change disabled flag is on, and then the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, then when the power is turned on, step S2714 in Figure 62 will result in "No," and therefore the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 will not proceed, and consequently, the RWM 53 initialization process will not be executed.

In contrast, when medals can be bet, the setting change disabled flag is off. Under these conditions, if the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, then when the power is turned on, step S2714 in Figure 62 becomes "Yes," and the system proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731, where the RWM 53 initialization process is executed.

Furthermore, when the power is turned off while medals can be bet, and then the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, and the power is turned on, in step S2713 of Figure 62, the RWM 53 initialization range is set to addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the usage area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the usage area. This initialization range is the same as the initialization range set when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state after a normal power recovery.

In other words, under the condition that power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the RWM 53 initialization process is executed within the same range when the power is turned on under the conditions that the setting key switch 152 is ON and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is OFF, and when the power is turned on under the conditions that the setting key switch 152 is OFF and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is ON.

Thus, in this embodiment, even without operating the setting key switch 152, and therefore even without possessing a setting key, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed within the same scope as when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initialization process of the RWM53 can be executed within the same scope as when transitioning to the setting change state, without transitioning to the setting change state.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while medals can be bet, the bet amount is between "1" and "3", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 initialization process will be executed. Afterward, when the system becomes capable of betting medals again, the bet amount will be set to "0", and the number of credits will also be set to "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off while medals are available for betting, the bet amount is between "1" and "3", and the credit count is "0", and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 initialization process will be executed. Afterward, when the system becomes available for betting medals again, the bet amount will be "0", and the credit count will also be "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off while medals are available for betting, the bet amount is "0", and the credit amount is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 initialization process will be executed. Afterward, when the system becomes available for betting medals again, the bet amount will be "0", and the credit amount will also be "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off while medals are available for betting, the bet count is "0", and the credit count is "0", and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 initialization process will be executed. Afterward, when the system becomes available for betting medals again, the bet count will be "0", and the credit count will also be "0".

Furthermore, suppose the power is turned off while medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. That is, suppose the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. In this case, the system becomes capable of transitioning to the setting change state. Then, the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the system returns to a state where medals can be bet.

As shown in Figure 62, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), step S2707 determines whether the setting key switch signal is on or off, and then step S2710 determines whether the reset switch signal is on or off. In other words, first it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is on or off, and then it is determined whether the reset switch signal is on or off.
Therefore, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are ON, the result is "Yes" in step S2707, and the process does not proceed to step S2710. In other words, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are ON, the setting key switch 152 takes precedence. Then, when the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 65, the result is "No" in step S2741, and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, making it possible to transition to the setting change state.

Furthermore, when the system switches to the setting change state, the setting value display LED 73 initially displays the setting value "M" (for example, "2"). At this time, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) for address "F000(H)" of RWM53 is "M-1", and the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) for "F001(H)" is "M".
Suppose the setting change switch 153 is then operated and the setting value display LED 73 displays the setting value "N" (for example, "3"). At this time, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) for address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 remains "M-1", and the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) for "F001(H)" becomes "N".

Furthermore, suppose the power is turned off without operating the start switch 41 while the setting value "N" is displayed on the setting value indicator LED 73. In this case, since the start switch 41 was not operated, the changed setting value data is not saved (stored) at the RWM 53 address "F000(H)," and the value of "F000(H)" remains "M-1." Also, since the start switch 41 was not operated and the setting key switch 152 was not turned off, the power is turned off without the setting change state ending (the system remains in the setting change state).

Subsequently, suppose the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. In this case, since only the power has been turned on and off, the data in the RWM 53's used area and outside the used area are not initialized and are maintained. Therefore, the system returns to the same state as when the power was cut off, and thus returns to the setting change state. Also, since "M-1" is stored in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) for address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, and "N" is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) for "F001(H)", when the system returns to the setting change state, the setting value display LED 73 will display the setting value "N".

In contrast, suppose that when the system transitions to the setting change state, the setting value indicator LED 73 initially displays the setting value "M" (for example, "2"). Then, suppose the setting change switch 153 is operated, and the setting value indicator LED 73 displays the setting value "N" (for example, "3"). Furthermore, suppose that while the setting value indicator LED 73 displays the setting value "N," the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated. Up to this point, it is the same as the case described above. Now, suppose that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, and the power is turned on.

In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 is "No", and step S2710 is "Yes", so the process proceeds to step S2731, where the initialization range of the RWM53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally is set. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 65, the initialization process for the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM53 usage area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the usage area is executed. For this reason, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) for the RWM53 address "F000(H)" is maintained as "M-1".
Furthermore, since it is a reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 65 is "Yes," skipping the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 and proceeding to step S2743. Therefore, it does not transition to the setting change state. After that, after processing in steps S2744 to S2747, it proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 67), and becomes ready to bet medals. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM53 remains "M-1," so the setting value becomes "M."

Furthermore, assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on under the conditions that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
In this case, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, the interrupt handler (I_INTR) is not executed, and therefore the power-off handler (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed either. As a result, the power-off flag is not set when the power is cut off, and the RWM checksum data is not saved.

Furthermore, since the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 in the OFF position, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 is "No", and the process proceeds to step S2708. In addition, since the power-off process flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved, step S2708 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
In other words, if the power is turned off while in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the unrecoverable error state will reappear.

Although the power is turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is ON, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 does not proceed to step S2710, so the power off/recovery process (M_POWER_ON) is not executed, nor is the initialization process (M_INI_SET) executed.
Furthermore, while the second program is executing, the interrupt handler (I_INTR) and the power-off handler (I_POWER_DOWN) are not executed. Therefore, if the power is turned off while the second program is executing, when the power is turned on afterward, the power-off flag will not be set and the RWM checksum data will not be saved. As a result, step S2708 will be "Yes", and the process will proceed to step S2801 for the unrecoverable error handler (C_ERROR_STOP). In other words, an unrecoverable error state will occur.

Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is being executed by a program outside the used area (second program), and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, then step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 will be "No", step S2708 will be "Yes", and the process will proceed to step S2801, resulting in the execution of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) by the program in the used area (first program).

Similarly, if the power is turned off while the program in the used area (first program) is executing the unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP), and then the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 will be "No", step S2708 will be "Yes", and the process will proceed to step S2801, thus executing the unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) by the program in the used area (first program).

Furthermore, assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on under the conditions that the setting key switch 152 is ON and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is OFF.
In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2711, where the initialization range of RWM53 at the start of setting changes in the event of a power outage recovery abnormality is set. Also, since it is a power outage recovery abnormality, step S2712 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 65, the initialization process is performed for the entire range including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the RWM53's usage area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)"), and the entire range outside the usage area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"). As a result, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) for address "F000(H)" of the RWM53 becomes "0", and the setting value becomes "1".

Also, since it is not a reset, the result is "No" in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 65, and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, transitioning to the setting change state.
Furthermore, in this configuration change state, suppose the power is turned off without the configuration change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 being operated. In this case, since interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed in the configuration change state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed.
Then, assume that the power is turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is ON. In this case, since it is not a power outage recovery abnormality, step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 will be "No". Also, since the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is ON, step S2710 will be "Yes". Then, proceed to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes in the case of a normal power outage recovery is set.

Furthermore, since the setting change disabled flag is off, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 is marked "Yes" at step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Since it is a reset, the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 65 is marked "Yes" at step S2741, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped. Therefore, the system does not transition to the setting change state. Afterward, the process proceeds through steps S2744 to S2747, and the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 67) is completed, making it possible to bet medals. At this time, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM53 is "0" as described above, so the setting value becomes "1".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in step S2771 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. Then, in step S2776 of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) shown in Figure 69, RWM checksum setting processing (S_SUM_SET) is executed. Then, in the RWM checksum setting processing (S_SUM_SET) shown in Figure 70, by executing the processes from steps S2785 to S2794, the RWM checksum data (complement data) is calculated, and the calculated RWM checksum data is stored at the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53 in the process of step S2795.

As mentioned above, this RWM checksum data is a value that, when added to the sum of the data in the RWM53's used area (addresses F000(H) to F1FF(H)) and the data outside the used area (addresses F210(H) to F3FF(H)) (excluding F2A0(H)), results in a value of 0.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a recoverable error occurs and the system enters a recoverable error state (where the error detection flag is turned on and the game has stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) can still be executed as described above. Therefore, even if the power supply is interrupted (power is turned off) while in the recoverable error state, the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) can still be executed.
In contrast, if an unrecoverable error occurs and the system enters an unrecoverable error state (where the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 64 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 72 is executed and the game has stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited, as described above. Therefore, if the power supply is interrupted (the power is turned off) while the system is in an unrecoverable error state, the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed.

In this way, if the power is turned off while an unrecoverable error state is present, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed. As a result, when the power is turned on afterward, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 determines in step S2708 that there is a power-off recovery abnormality, and proceeds to the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
In other words, once an unrecoverable error state occurs, simply turning the power on and off will only cause the unrecoverable error state to reappear.
Furthermore, if an irrecoverable error occurs, the system can be made so that it cannot return to a state where medals can be bet (a state where gameplay can be continued) unless the power is turned off and an operation to switch to the settings change state (turning the power on with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed.

Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, even if the power is turned off and then turned back on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the ON position, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 will determine at step S2708 that there is a power outage recovery abnormality, and proceed to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. Therefore, it will not proceed to the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 67), and thus it will not be possible to return to a state where medals can be bet (a state where the game can be played).

Furthermore, even if a recoverable error occurs and the system enters a recoverable error state (where the error detection flag is turned on and the game has stopped), the interrupt handler (I_INTR) can still be executed. However, if an unrecoverable error occurs and the system enters an unrecoverable error state (where the unrecoverable error handler (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 64 or the unrecoverable error handler 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 72 is executed and the game has stopped), the interrupt handler (I_INTR) is prohibited.
Furthermore, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) that controls the illumination of digits 1 to 5 (credit count display LED 76, acquired count display LED 78, and set value display LED 73), and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) that controls the illumination of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) are executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR).

Therefore, in a recoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, and thus LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Consequently, even in a recoverable error state, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) can display error information on the acquired count display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4), and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) can sequentially display various ratios related to the information type and game results on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6-9).

In contrast, in an unrecoverable error state, interrupt handling (I_INTR) is disabled, and therefore LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) are not executed.
Therefore, during an unrecoverable error state, error information is displayed on the acquired count display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by either the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) shown in Figure 64 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in Figure 72.

Furthermore, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 64 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 72, the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off ("00000000 (B)").
As a result, during the unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6-9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6-9) remains "00000000 (B)". Therefore, digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off until the unrecoverable error state is cleared and interrupt processing (I_INTR) resumes.
Furthermore, the fact that digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off is a characteristic behavior specific to an irrecoverable error state, and this allows the administrator (hall staff) to be notified that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

Although a second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows.
(1) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the output of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off ("00000000(B)") so that all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, the display mode of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 in an unrecoverable error state is not limited to this.

For example, during an unrecoverable error state, the management information display LED 74 may display "8" in digits 6 to 9, respectively. In other words, the management information display LED 74 may display "8888".
Figure 79 is a flowchart showing a modified version of the unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and corresponds to Figure 72.
In Figure 79, steps that differ from those in Figure 72 are underlined, and steps that are the same as those in Figure 72 are given the same step number.
The following will primarily explain the differences from Figure 72.

In the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in Figure 79, the process proceeds from step S1505 to step S1506, where the main control board 50 outputs data from output ports 6 and 7 to display "8" in digit 6.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000001(B)" (data where only the digit 6 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111(B)" (data where the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1").

Next, in step S1507, the main control board 50 performs a waiting process to prevent LED flickering. The length of the waiting period depends on the LED's performance, but it can be set to, for example, "0.1 ms". For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, and the process proceeds to the next step, S1508.

In step S1508, the main control board 50 turns off the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 ("00000000 (B)"). This process is performed to prevent afterimages.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1509, where the main control board 50 performs a standby (wait) process to prevent LED flickering. This process involves turning off the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 and then ensuring that the LEDs are completely extinguished.

In the next step S1510, the main control board 50 outputs data from output ports 6 and 7 to display "8" in digit 7.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000010(B)" (data where only the digit 7 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111(B)" (data where the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1").
Steps S1511 to S1513 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, proceeding to step S1514, the main control board 50 outputs data from output ports 6 and 7 to display "8" in digit 8.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000100(B)" (data where only the digit 8 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111(B)" (data where the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1").
Steps S1515 to S1517 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, proceeding to step S1518, the main control board 50 outputs data from output ports 6 and 7 to display "8" in digit 9.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000(B)" (data where only the digit 9 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111(B)" (data where the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1").
Steps S1519 to S1521 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509. After executing the process in step S1521, the process returns to step S1497.

In this way, during an unrecoverable error state, the number "8" may be displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74.
Furthermore, the fact that digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 all show "8" is a characteristic behavior specific to an irrecoverable error state, and this allows the manager (hall staff) to be notified that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

Alternatively, the management information display LED 74 may be set to display "----" instead of "8888". In other words, only segments G of digits 6 to 9 may be lit.
Alternatively, the management information display LED 74 may be configured to show "...". In other words, only segments P of digits 6 to 9 may be illuminated.
Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 may be configured to show "8.8.8.8.". That is, as shown in Figure 30(a) or (c), all segments of digits 6 to 9 (segments A to G and P) may be illuminated.

(2) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the output of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off ("00000000(B)") so that all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 64 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 72, the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 may be maintained instead of being turned off ("00000000 (B)"). In this case, the display of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 will be as follows.

As described above, digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 illuminate dynamically with a cycle of 4 interrupts. Therefore, for example, when "7P.65" is displayed on digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74, digit 9 ("5"), digit 8 ("6"), digit 7 ("P."), and digit 6 ("7") illuminate sequentially. Now, suppose an unrecoverable error occurs while digits 6-8 of the management information display LED 74 are off and digit 9 is displaying "5". In this case, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) stops while signals (digit signals and segment signals) that turn off digits 6-8 and illuminate digit 9 are output from output ports 6 and 7.

Specifically, when output port 6 outputs "00001000(B)" (data where digit 9 signal is "1" and the others are "0") and output port 7 outputs "01101101(B)" (data where segment 2G, 2F, 2D, 2C, and 2A signals are "1" and the others are "0"), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) stops, and thereafter, the signals (data) output from output ports 6 and 7 are no longer rewritten.
Therefore, until the unrecoverable error state is cleared and interrupt processing (I_INTR) resumes, the output of signals (digit signals and segment signals) from output ports 6 and 7 is maintained, so digits 6 to 8 remain off, and the number "5" remains lit on digit 9.

Similarly, for example, suppose that the management information display LED 74 is in a state where digit 6 is lit up with "7" and digits 7-9 are off, and an unrecoverable error state occurs.
In this case, until the unrecoverable error state is cleared and interrupt processing (I_INTR) resumes, signals (digit signals and segment signals) that illuminate "7" on digit 6 and turn off digits 7-9 will continue to be output from output ports 6 and 7. As a result, "7" will remain illuminated on digit 6, and digits 7-9 will remain off.

Furthermore, suppose, for example, that the management information display LED 74 shows "7" lit in digit 6, and digits 7-9 are off, and then the second program executes the unrecoverable error processing 2. Suppose that the second program maintains the output of output ports 6 and 7 during the unrecoverable error processing 2. In this case, as described above, the signals (digit signal and segment signal) that cause digit 6 to show "7" and digits 7-9 to turn off continue to be output from output ports 6 and 7. Therefore, digit 6 will show "7" lit, and digits 7-9 will remain off.

If the power is turned off in this state, digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 will turn off. Then, if the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 in the OFF position, step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 will be "Yes," and the process will proceed to step S2801, where the unrecoverable error processing by the first program is executed. In this case, the initialization process in step S2731 does not proceed, and the data in RWM 53 remains uninitialized. Therefore, the data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (ratio monitor) in RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at address "F297(H)") also remains uninitialized.

Here, let's assume that the first program's unrecoverable error handling is enabled without disabling the interrupt handler (I_INTR). In this case, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt handler (I_INTR) controls the illumination of the management information display LED 74. Therefore, digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 will first display the ratio information immediately before the second program's unrecoverable error handling 2 is executed, i.e., "7P.65" (indicated feature ratio, ratio display number "1").

Furthermore, suppose that immediately before the execution of the unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program, "7P.65" was displayed on digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 for, for example, 2000 ms. In this case, when the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is resumed in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, "7P.65" will be displayed on digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 for 4791.84 ms - 2000 ms = 2791.84 ms. Subsequently, display items from ratio display number "2" onwards will be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

Thus, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed during the unrecoverable error handling by the first program, the display starts (resumes) from where it left off immediately before the unrecoverable error handling 2 by the second program was executed.
In contrast, if interrupt processing (I_INTR) is disabled in the non-recoverable error handling by the first program, the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) during interrupt processing (I_INTR) will not be executed, and digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 will remain off.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, for the indicator-included bonus ratio, cumulative bonus ratio, cumulative bonus ratio, and bonus state ratio, the identification segment will flash when the total number of plays is less than 175,000. For the continuous bonus ratio (6,000 plays) and bonus ratio (6,000 plays), the identification segment will flash when the total number of plays is less than 6,000. Also, for the indicator-included bonus ratio, cumulative bonus ratio, and bonus ratio (6,000 plays), the ratio segment will flash when the displayed value is 70 or higher. For the cumulative bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio (6,000 plays), the ratio segment will flash when the displayed value is 60 or higher. For the bonus state ratio, the ratio segment will flash when the displayed value is 50 or higher. When flashing, it will alternate between on and off approximately every 0.3 seconds.

Therefore, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may all turn off. And, for example, suppose that an unrecoverable error state occurs when digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are all off, that is, when the output from output ports 6 and 7 is "00000000 (B)" (off).
In this case, until the unrecoverable error state is cleared and interrupt processing (I_INTR) resumes, the outputs from output ports 6 and 7 remain at "00000000 (B)" (off), so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.

Furthermore, the display pattern of digits 6-9 on the management information display LED 74, as described above, is specific to the irrecoverable error state, and this allows the administrator (hall staff) to be notified that the system has entered an irrecoverable error state.

(3) In the above embodiment, under the condition that power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the RWM 53 initialization process was executed within the same range when the power was turned on (to transition to the setting change state) under the conditions that the setting key switch 152 was ON and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 was OFF, and when the power was turned on under the conditions that the setting key switch 152 was OFF and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 was ON.

However, the initialization range of the RWM 53 may be different depending on whether the setting key switch 152 is ON and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is OFF when the power is turned ON (when transitioning to the setting change state), or when the setting key switch 152 is OFF and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is ON when the power is turned ON.
For example, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 initialization process may be performed within the same range as at the end of the advantageous period.
Specifically, the initialization process can be performed on a predetermined range of the RWM53 usage area where data related to the advantageous period is stored (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 54), while other ranges (for example, the credit count data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" in Figure 54 and the bet count data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)") can be maintained without initialization.
In any case, it is preferable to set the initialization range when the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the ON position to be narrower than the initialization range when transitioning to the setting change state.

(4) In the above embodiment, step S458 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 68 determines whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that it is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S2811, which is the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). However, this is not limited to this.
For example, the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 67) may determine whether the set value is within the normal range immediately after it is determined that the start switch 41 has been turned on (operated).

(5) In the above embodiment, when the power was turned off while the device was in the setting change state, and then the power was turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the device transitioned to a state where medals could be bet without transitioning to the setting change state.
However, this is not the only option; for example, if the power is turned off while the device is in a settings change state, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the device may enter an unrecoverable error state.

Specifically, for example, a setting change status flag is provided, and when the system transitions to the setting change state, the setting change status flag is set in a predetermined memory area of the RWM53, and when the termination conditions for the setting change state are met, the setting change status flag is cleared.
Then, when the power is turned off while the settings are changed, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, in step S2714 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62, it is determined whether or not the settings change status flag is on. If it is determined that the settings change status flag is on, the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, and the system enters an unrecoverable error state.
This prevents the setting value from being set even though the operation to confirm the setting value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) has not been performed.

(6) In the above embodiment, the address "F000(H)" of the RWM53 stored one of the values from "0(D)" to "5(D)" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). That is, the setting value data was managed using "0(D)" to "5(D)".
However, this is not the only option; the RWM53 address "F000(H)" may also store one of the values from "1(D)" to "6(D)" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). In other words, the setting value data may be managed using "1(D)" to "6(D)".

When transitioning to the setting change state, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM53 is cleared (set to "0"), and when an operation to confirm the setting value is performed (for example, turning on the start switch 41), one of the values from "1(D)" to "6(D)" may be stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM53.
In this case, if the power is turned off while the settings have been changed, and then the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it may be determined in step S458 of Figure 68 that the set value is not within the normal range (a set value error has occurred), and the process may proceed to the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811, resulting in an unrecoverable error state.

(7) In the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 59, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals) were output from output port 3, segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segments 1A to 1P signals) were output from output port 4, digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals) were output from output port 6, and segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segments 2A to 2P signals) were output from output port 7.
When illuminating digits 1 to 5, a digit signal was output from output port 3 and a segment 1 signal was output from output port 4. When illuminating digits 6 to 9, a digit signal was output from output port 6 and a segment 2 signal was output from output port 7. In other words, the output ports used were separated for digits 1 to 5, whose illumination was controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose illumination was controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).

However, this is not the only option; for example, the output ports used by digits 1 to 5, whose illumination is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose illumination is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program), may be shared.
Figure 80 shows a modified example of the output port in the second embodiment.
As shown in Figure 80, the segment signals for digits 1 to 9 (segment A to P signals) may be output from output port 3. Alternatively, the digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals) can be output from output port 2, and the digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals) can be output from output port 4.
In this case, during an unrecoverable error state, the output of output port 4 (output port for digits 6-9 signals) can be turned off ("00000000 (B)"), which will keep all digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 off.

(8) In the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 61, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) for outputting digit 1 to digit 5 signals is provided in the RWM 53 usage area, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) for outputting digit 6 to digit 9 signals is provided outside the RWM 53 usage area. That is, an LED display counter for illuminating digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for illuminating digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently. However, this is not limited to this.

Figure 81 shows a modified example of the LED display counter in the second embodiment.
As shown in Figure 81, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) with a 5-interrupt cycle may be provided in the RWM 53's operating area, and based on the value of this LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1), signals digit 1 to digit 5 and signals digit 6 to digit 9 may be output. In other words, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 may be used interchangeably.

In this case, in step S1471 of the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in Figure 77, the value of the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is obtained and stored in the D register.
In the next step, S1472, it is determined whether or not there is a request for ratio display. Specifically, the value of LED display counter 1 stored in the D register is ANDed with "11110000 (B)". If the AND result is "0", it is determined that there is a request for ratio display and the process proceeds to step S1475. If the AND result is not "0", it is determined that there is no request for ratio display and the process according to this flowchart ends.

Here, if the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00001000(B)", "00000100(B)", "00000010(B)", or "00000001(B)", the AND operation result will be "0", so it is determined that there is a request for ratio display and the process proceeds to step S1475.
In contrast, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the AND operation result will not be "0", so it is determined that there is no request for ratio display and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In this case, since the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 are maintained, the display patterns of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will be the same as the display patterns during the previous interrupt processing. For example, if "7" was lit up on digit 6 during the previous interrupt processing, "7" will be lit up on digit 6 during the current interrupt processing as well.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S1472 that there is no request for ratio display, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6-9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6-9) may be turned off ("00000000 (B)"), thereby turning off all digits 6-9 on the management information display LED 74.

(9) For example, provided that the power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the initialization range of the RWM 53 may be different when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.
Specifically, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is ON and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is OFF, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set to, for example, addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) for the RWM 53 address "F000(H)" and addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without initialization (clearing).

In contrast, when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the ON position, the RWM 53 initialization range is set to include, for example, the entire range of the usage area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) for address "F000(H)", and addresses outside the usage area, "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)". In this case, addresses outside the usage area, "F210(H)" to "F291(H)", are maintained without initialization (clearing), but the setting value data (_NB_RANK) for address "F000(H)" is initialized (cleared). Note that in this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) becomes "0", so the setting value becomes "1". This allows the setting value to be changed to "1" simply by transitioning to the setting change state.

Furthermore, the system can transition to the setting change state whether the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 ON and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 OFF, or with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 ON.

(10) In the above embodiment, the initialization range of the RWM53 for normal power recovery was set to the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM53 usage area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the usage area.
However, the initialization range of the RWM53 is not limited to the range described above, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the slot machine 10.

For example, the initialization range of the RWM 53 can be varied depending on the content of the operating status flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53 in Figure 54.
Specifically, for example, if the D2 bit of the operating status flag (_FL_ACTION) for "F030(H)" is "1" and 1BB is operating, the operating status flag (_FL_ACTION) for address "F030(H)" can be excluded from the initialization range of RWM53.
In contrast, if the D2 bit of the operating status flag (_FL_ACTION) for "F030(H)" is "0" and 1BB is not operating, the operating status flag (_FL_ACTION) for address "F030(H)" can be included in the initialization range of RWM53.

(11) In the above embodiment, interrupt processing was prohibited in step S1490 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 64. However, this is not the only option, and for example, interrupt processing does not need to be prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
Specifically, when the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 62 is answered with "Yes" in step S2708 or S2715, and the program proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, it is not necessary to disable interrupt processing.

Furthermore, even while the unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed, the interrupt handling (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68 may be made executable, allowing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 and the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 to be executed.
This allows for the control of the lighting of digits 1-5 (credit count display LED 76, acquired count display LED 78, set value display LED 73) and digits 6-9 (management information display LED 74) even while the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed.

(12) In the above embodiment, when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on), and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. Therefore, for example, if the power is turned off while the cumulative bonus item ratio data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (bonus item ratio monitor), and then an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 will start displaying the bonus item ratio data including instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

However, this is not the only option. For example, when an operation is performed to switch to a setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 turned on), and it is determined that the power has recovered normally, the management information display LED 74 may first display specific information different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then begin displaying the instruction-included feature ratio data (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of the various ratio information.
This makes it possible to check whether all segments from digits 6 to 9 are lit, allowing for the detection of segment malfunctions and breaks in the signal lines of the segments.
Similarly, when an operation is performed to switch to the settings change state and a power outage recovery abnormality is determined, the management information display LED 74 may first display specific information different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then begin displaying the first display item of the various ratio information, which is the instruction-included feature ratio data (ratio display number "1").

(13) For example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also off; when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 off; when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch 153 on; or when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 on, specific information different from ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", can be displayed first on digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 (ratio monitor).

Subsequently, digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 (percentage ratio monitor) display information corresponding to the on/off status of various switches when the power is turned on, and whether the power recovery was judged to be normal or abnormal. This allows confirmation of whether all segments digits 6-9 light up when the power is turned on, making it possible to check for segment malfunctions or broken signal lines in the segments.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 ON and the reset switch 153 OFF, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 OFF and the reset switch 153 ON, or when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 ON and the reset switch 153 ON, specific information different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", will be displayed on digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 (ratio monitor). However, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 OFF and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 OFF, the above specific information does not need to be displayed on the management information display LED 74.

(14) In the above embodiment, an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed (the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on), and when it is determined that the power outage recovery is normal, the data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at addresses "F292(H)" to "F297(H)") is initialized.
However, this is not the only option. When an operation is performed to transition to a setting change state and it is determined that the power has been restored normally, the data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (ratio monitor) in RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at "F297(H)") may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, suppose the power is turned off while the cumulative bonus ratio data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (bonus ratio monitor), and then an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state, and the power recovery is determined to be normal. In this case, when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 will first display the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off, i.e., the cumulative bonus ratio data.

Furthermore, suppose that just before the power is turned off, the cumulative bonus ratio data (ratio display number "5") was displayed on the management information display LED 74 (bonus ratio monitor) for, for example, "1000 ms". In this case, when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the cumulative bonus ratio data will be displayed on the management information display LED 74 for "4791.84 ms" - "1000 ms" = "3791.84 ms". After that, the display items from ratio display number "6" onwards will be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).
In this manner, when an operation is performed to transition to the settings change state, and the power recovery is deemed normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the display will start (resume) from where it left off immediately before the power was turned off.

(15) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power has recovered normally, the data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) from address "F292(H)" to "F297(H)") is initialized.
However, this is not limited to this case. When the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and the power is turned on, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at address "F297(H)") may be maintained without initialization.

For example, suppose the power is turned off while the management information display LED 74 (payout ratio monitor) is displaying the continuous payout ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2"). Then, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and the power is turned on again. The system is then judged to have recovered from the power outage normally. In this case, when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) resumes, the management information display LED 74 will first display the ratio information from immediately before the power was turned off, i.e., the continuous payout ratio (6000 games) data.

Furthermore, suppose that immediately before the power is turned off, the management information display LED 74 (payout ratio monitor) was displaying the continuous payout ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number "2") for, for example, "3000 ms". In this case, when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 will display the continuous payout ratio (6000 games) data for "4791.84 ms" - "3000 ms" = "1791.84 ms". After that, the display items from ratio display number "3" onwards will be sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).
In this manner, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and the power is turned on, and the power recovery is determined to be normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the display will start (resume) from where it left off immediately before the power was turned off.

(16) In the above embodiment, during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in Figure 67) to the game end check process (step S301 in Figure 67), including the rotation of the reel 31 (during gameplay), the setting change is disabled, and the setting change disabled flag is turned ON during this period.
However, this is not the only option; it is also possible to make settings changeable at all times without setting a period during which settings cannot be changed, and therefore without setting a flag that prevents settings from being changed.

(17) In the above embodiment, it is determined in step S2770 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 68 whether or not a power outage has occurred. If it is determined that a power outage has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2771, which is the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN). If it is determined that no power outage has occurred, the process skips step S2771, which is the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN), and proceeds to step S454.
However, this is not the only option. For example, if a power outage is detected during the interrupt handler (I_INTR) in Figure 68, a different interrupt handler may be executed, and the power outage handler (I_POWER_DOWN) may be executed within this different interrupt handler.
In this case, if a power outage is detected while the interrupt handler (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68 is being executed, no other interrupt handler is started while the interrupt handler (I_INTR) is being executed. Instead, another interrupt handler is started after the completion of the interrupt handler (I_INTR), and a power outage handler (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in this other interrupt handler.

(18) In the above embodiment, a slot machine 10 was given as an example of a gaming machine, but it is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to parrots that use game balls as a gaming medium, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines.
(19) The second embodiment is not limited to being implemented on its own, but can be implemented in appropriate combination with the first embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
The third embodiment relates to timer interrupt processing and vector addresses (also referred to as "interrupt vector addresses").
In the third embodiment, the following terms are used:
(1) The "timer interrupt processing" in the third embodiment is the same as the "interrupt processing (I_INTR)" in the second embodiment (Figure 68). In the following description of the third embodiment, the "timer interrupt processing" may be abbreviated as simply "interrupt processing" as needed.
(2) "Address value" refers to the numerical value of a memory address in the internal memory. For example, in Figure 83 described later, the "vector address value" is "0004H". In this specification, the terms "address" and "memory address" may be used as needed, but they are synonymous.

(3) "Data value of an address" refers to the value of the data stored at that address. For example, the "vector address" mentioned above is actually composed of two bytes of addresses, "0004H" and "0005H," but when we say "data value of a vector address," we mean the data value (a 2-byte (16-bit) value) stored at addresses "0004H" and "0005H."
(4) Address values are prefixed with "H". "H" represents the hexadecimal "hexa". Also, bit values stored in an address are prefixed with "B". "B" represents the binary "bit".
Furthermore, when representing a two-byte bit value (16-bit value), a "/" is placed between the upper byte (8 bits) and the lower byte (8 bits). For example, "00000000/00000100B".

(5) On the other hand, a register does not have an address, and the “value of a register” refers to the value of the data stored in that register.
(6) In this embodiment, the storage areas within the built-in memory are referred to as the "program area,""dataarea,""registerarea,""program management area,""workarea," and "stack area." However, these are not limited to these, and they may be referred to as the "program area,""dataarea,""registerarea,""program management area,""workarea," and "stack area," respectively.
Furthermore, the "program area" is also referred to as the "program code area" or "program code region."

Figure 82 shows a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") in the third embodiment. This one-chip microprocessor is mounted on the main control board 50 in Figure 1 and integrates the RWM 53, ROM 54, and main CPU 55 into a single chip.
In Figure 82, the chip contains a main CPU 55 (the same as in Figure 1) and built-in memory. Note that the chip also contains various other hardware components, but their descriptions and illustrations are omitted.
The internal memory includes an internal ROM 54 having addresses in the range of "0000H" to "3FFFH" (16384 bytes) and an internal RWM 53 having addresses in the range of "F000H" to "F3FFH" (1024 bytes).
The built-in ROM 54 is the same as "ROM 54" in Figure 1, and the built-in RWM 53 is the same as "RWM 53" in Figure 1.

Furthermore, the internal memory includes an internal memory register area comprising a function setting register area and a function control register area.
The function setting register area is a storage area for registers used for setting up operations, including interrupt handling (for example, initial settings for interrupt handling, etc.).
The prescaler register 502 is a register that allows setting a value to select the clock supplied to the 8-bit counter 501.
The counter setting register 503 is an internal register that can set the count value of the 8-bit counter 501.

The function control register area is the storage area for registers that are responsible for monitoring and control, such as registers that monitor interrupt processing or store random values.
The interrupt wait monitor register 301 is a register for storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred after the interrupt flag 504 has been set.
The 8-bit counter 501 is a storage area for an 8-bit (1-byte) counter value used to measure the timing of interrupt processing.
The interrupt flag 504 is a flag that indicates that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
Note that the internal memory register area is not limited to the function setting register area and function control register area shown in Figure 82.

On the other hand, the main CPU 55 is equipped with a CPU register area. This CPU register area is a different register area from the internal memory register area located within the internal memory.
The CPU register area includes general-purpose registers A, B, C, D, E, F, H, and L. Note that register F is a flag register.
Furthermore, the Q register stores the upper address "F0H" of the working area (see Figure 84) within the usage area of the built-in RWM53, and is used when issuing instructions. It is used in instructions that read data from the storage area of the built-in RWM53 whose upper address is "F0H".
Furthermore, the I register is a register known as the interrupt page address register, and as will be explained in more detail later, it is a register used to determine the upper byte value of the vector address.

In the interrupt disable flags (IFF1, IFF2) 302, the IFF1 register is used to determine whether to enable or disable maskable interrupts. The IFF2 register is used to restore the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt, and to restore it using the RETEX instruction after the execution of the CALLEX instruction.
In addition to the above, various other registers such as the Q register and U register are provided, but these are not shown or described in the third embodiment.

Furthermore, the registers, counters, and flags shown in Figure 82 are illustrative examples and are not limited to those shown in Figure 82. For example, the 8-bit counter 501 is located in the function control register area, but it is not limited to this location; it can also be located in the CPU register area within the main CPU 55 or implemented by a circuit. Similarly, the interrupt flag 504 only needs to have the function of storing on/off states, and can be located in the CPU register area, for example, or implemented by a circuit, rather than in the function control register area. In addition, the prescaler register 502, counter setting register 503, and interrupt wait monitor register 301 can also be located in the CPU register area or other areas within the internal memory, or implemented by a circuit.

Figure 83 is a diagram that shows the memory map within the built-in ROM 54 in Figure 82 in more detail.
The built-in ROM 54 has both a usable area and an unused area.
"Used area" refers to the memory area where information related to the progress of the game is stored.
Furthermore, the "area outside the used area" is a memory area where information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored. For example, it is a memory area where programs for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (play ratio monitor), programs used during testing, and programs for preventing fraud are stored.
The built-in ROM 54 has a program area and a data area, respectively, in both the used area and the non-used area.
The "program area," also known as the "control area," is a memory area where various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored.
Furthermore, the "data area" is a memory area where information other than the program is stored, and it is the memory area where data used when the program is executed is stored.

Here, as indicated in parentheses in Figure 83, the "used area" may also be referred to as the "first area." Furthermore, the "area outside the used area" may also be referred to as the "second area."
Furthermore, the program area of the used area may be referred to as the "first program area" or the "first control area." The data area of the used area may also be referred to as the "first data area."
Furthermore, the program stored in the program area of the used area may be referred to as the "first program."
Similarly, the program area outside the used area may be referred to as the "second program area" or "second control area." The data area outside the used area may also be referred to as the "second data area."
Furthermore, a program stored in the program area outside the used area may be referred to as a "second program."

As shown in Figure 83, in this embodiment, there is an unused area (address "11FFH") between the program area and the data area of the used area. However, this unused area may be eliminated, and the program area and data area of the used area may be arranged to be contiguous.
Furthermore, although there is an unused area (addresses "1DF7H" to "1FFFH") between the used area and the non-used area, this unused area may be eliminated and the used area and the non-used area may be arranged to be continuous.
Furthermore, regarding the area outside the used area, although the program area and data area are arranged contiguously, there may be one or more unused bytes between the program area and the data area, similar to the used area.
Furthermore, the terms "used area" and "unused area" may refer only to the program area and data area, excluding unused areas. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 83, if there is an unused area between the program area and the data area, this unused area may also be included in the term "used area" (or "unused area").

In addition to the used area, unused area, and unused area described above, the built-in ROM 54 is also provided with a storage area for storing the company name, date, model name (of the gaming machine 10), etc., and a program management area.
In this embodiment, the vector address (0004H), which will be described in detail below, is located in the program area of the usage area.
Additionally, the program code area start/end addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) are located in the program management area.
The program management area includes the program code area setting addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH), which will be described later.

Figure 84 is a diagram showing the memory map within the built-in RWM 53 in Figure 82 in more detail.
The area of the built-in RWM 53 is provided with a usable area (which may be called the "first area") and an area outside the usable area (which may be called the "second area"), similar to the area of the built-in ROM 54. The concepts of these "usable area" and "area outside the usable area" are the same as in the case of the built-in ROM 54.
Furthermore, the built-in RWM53 has a working area, an unused area, and a stack area, respectively, within its used area and non-used area.
The work area (also called the "first work area") and the stack area (also called the "first stack area") within the usage area are memory areas that are used (updated and referenced) during the execution of programs (programs related to the progress of the game) stored in the program area of the usage area of the built-in ROM 54.

Similarly, the working area (also called the "second working area") and the stack area (also called the "second stack area") in the area outside the usage area are memory areas that are used (updated, referenced) during the execution of programs (programs not related to the progress of the game; for example, programs related to the display of the payout ratio monitor) stored in the program area of the built-in ROM 54 outside the usage area.
The "stack area" is a memory area where data such as various registers and the program's return address can be temporarily saved (stored).

Next, we will explain the interrupt initialization address.
First, a "vector address" is the address that stores the starting address (beginning address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) that is executed when a timer interrupt processing event occurs. In other words, the vector address does not store the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) itself, but rather the address that stores the location (beginning address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR).
Furthermore, the "interrupt initialization address" is the address that stores data that makes it possible to identify the value of the vector address. In particular, in this embodiment, the vector address cannot be identified solely by the data stored in the interrupt initialization address; the value of the vector address can be identified based on the value of the I register and the data stored in the interrupt initialization address.

Figure 85 is a diagram illustrating the interrupt initialization address. In the figure, (A) shows the details of the data value of the interrupt initialization address, and (B) shows the relationship between the interrupt priority and the interrupt priority setting value.
As explained in Figure 83, the interrupt initialization address is located in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, and in this embodiment, its address is "3FDAH" (1 byte). However, this is an example and not limited to this.
After the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the data value stored in this interrupt initial setting address is read, and this data value is used to determine the vector address.

In Figure 85(A), the upper four bits (bits A7 to A4) of the interrupt initialization address data value take a predetermined value as the vector address setting value, which in this embodiment is "0000B". This vector address setting value constitutes a part of the vector address value, as will be described later.
In this embodiment, the vector address setting value was set to "0H (0000B)," but it is not limited to this, and various other settings are possible, such as "8H (1000H)" or "FH (1111B)."
Furthermore, in the data value of the interrupt initialization address, bits A3 and A2 are fixed values, and in this embodiment, they are set to "00B". As will be described in detail later, these fixed 2-bit values are configured to be checked (in security mode) when the gaming machine 10 is started, and an error occurs if these 2-bit values are not "00B".
Furthermore, this fixed value is not limited to "00B"; various other values such as "11B" can also be set.
Furthermore, the lower two bits, A1 and A0, of the interrupt initialization address data value are the interrupt priority setting values.
In this embodiment, four types of interrupt priority settings are provided, as shown in Figure 85(B): "00B", "01B", "10B", and "11B".

Figure 85(B) shows the relationship between the interrupt priority setting and the interrupt cause.
In this embodiment, there are five types of interrupt factors, "IR0" to "IR5," and the smaller the number at the end, the higher the interrupt priority of the interrupt factor. In other words, the interrupt factor "IR0" has the highest interrupt priority, and the interrupt factor "IR5" has the lowest interrupt priority.
Furthermore, the types of interrupts include "PTC0" to "PTC2", "RX0" to "RX1", and "XINT". Here, "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used for timer interrupt processing, and in particular, "PTC2" corresponds to the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, "01B" is used as the interrupt priority setting value. As a result, the interrupt priorities, in descending order of priority, are "PTC0", "PTC1", "PTC2", "XINT", "RX0", and "RX1".
Furthermore, when "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, the A1 bit and A0 bit of the interrupt initialization address data value will be "01B".
Based on the above, in this embodiment, the value of the interrupt initialization address is "3FDAH", and the data value of the interrupt initialization address is "00000001B".

Figure 86 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between a vector address value and the data value stored at that vector address.
Figure 86(A) shows the vector address values.
In this embodiment, the vector address is provided in the program area of the used area in the built-in ROM 54 and is 2 bytes in size.
As shown in Figure 86(A), the vector address value consists of the I register value in its upper byte and the vector address setting value and the auto-assignment value in its lower byte.

In this embodiment, the I register value is "00H". As shown in Figure 82, the I register is located in the CPU register area and is set to "00H" after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In other words, immediately after the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the register values located in the CPU register area are cleared. After that, unless a value other than "00H" is stored in the I register, the I register value remains "00H".
Furthermore, in this embodiment, no value is set in the I register after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, the I register value remains "00H".
Therefore, the upper byte value of the vector address is "00H".

Next, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A7-A4 bit values correspond to the A7-A4 bit values (vector address setting values) of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) data value. As shown in Figure 85(A), the A7-A4 bit values in the interrupt initialization address data value are "0000B," so this value becomes the A7-A4 bit values of the lower byte of the vector address.

Furthermore, in the lower byte of the vector address value, bits A3 to A0 are automatically assigned values.
Figure 86(B) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt factors and automatically assigned values. As shown in Figure 85(B), in this embodiment, "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, and the priority of the interrupt factor for PTC2, which is the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment, is "IR2".
Therefore, as shown in Figure 86(B), the automatically assigned values for the interrupt source "IR2" and the interrupt "PTC2 (I_INTR)" are "0100B" (04H). This "0100B" corresponds to the A3 to A0 bits of the vector address value.

From the above, as shown in Figure 86(A), the value of the vector address is:
"00000000/00000100B" = "0004H"
This is the result.
As a result, in Figure 83, "0004H" becomes the vector address in the storage area of the built-in ROM 54, which starts with "0000H".
As mentioned above, the vector address value is 2 bytes, so the actual vector addresses are "0004H" and "0005H".

Figure 86(C) shows an example of a vector address data value. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt handler (I_INTR) program is stored starting from "1134H" in the program area of the built-in ROM 54's usage area. In other words, the starting address of the timer interrupt handler (I_INTR) program is "1134H".
Therefore, the data value of vector address (0004H) becomes "1134H".
When storing "1134H" in a 2-byte vector address, the lower byte value "34H" is stored in the first "0004H", and "11H" is stored in the next "0005H".
As a result,
0004H:34H (00110100B)
0005H:11H (00010001B)
It is remembered.

When the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the main CPU 55 starts up, it is configured to recognize where the vector address is located based on the data value of the interrupt initial setting address and the I address value.
Specifically, since the upper four bits of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) are "0000B", the upper four bits of the lower byte of the vector address are also "0000B".
Furthermore, since the value of the interrupt priority setting, which is the lower two bits of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH), is "01B", the lower four bytes of the lower byte of the vector address corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt for timer counter ch2) are assigned to "0100B" by the interrupt controller.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the value of the I register becomes "00H", so the value of the upper byte of the vector address becomes "00000000B".
From the above, the main CPU 55 can recognize that the vector address corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt for timer counter ch2, which corresponds to the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment) (the address where the starting address of "I_INTR" is stored) is "0004H".
Therefore, the data value stored in the vector address allows us to determine which address the timer interrupt handler (I_INTR) program is stored at (the starting address of the timer interrupt handler program).

Note that the process of setting the I register to "00H" is not executed immediately after the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the CPU register area on the main CPU 55 side is initialized in Figure 82, and as a result, the I register value also becomes "00H" like the other register values.
Furthermore, after the power is turned on and the registers are initialized, "F0H" is stored in the Q register. When "F0H" is stored in the Q register, the Q register is specified when specifying the upper address "F0H" in the memory area of the built-in RWM53.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the timer interrupt handler (I_INTR) of PTC2 is received, the program at the address corresponding to the data (1134H) stored at the vector addresses ("0004H" and "0005H") (i.e., the timer interrupt handler (I_INTR)) is called. In other words, the program code of the timer interrupt handler (I_INTR) becomes executable.

Figure 87 is a diagram showing the process from when the power is turned on until the system transitions to user mode in this embodiment.
First, before power-on (when the power is off), "XSRST" is set to "L (Low)". Here, "XSRST" indicates the operating status of the main CPU 55, and if the main CPU 55 is in a situation where it should not be operating (stopped), then "XSRST = L" (indicating that the main CPU 55 is stopped).
When the power is turned on under these conditions, the system reset is canceled, and once the power supply becomes stable, the main CPU 55 changes from "L (low)" to "H (high)" in terms of its circuitry.

Next, the registers in the CPU register area are initialized, and it is determined whether or not there is a request for PROM mode. Here, "PROM mode" refers to the mode in which data is written to the ROM (burning the ROM). If it is determined that there is a request to transition to PROM mode, the system transitions to PROM mode; if it is determined that there is no request to transition to PROM mode, the system then transitions to security mode. Note that gaming machines installed in the market are configured so that, after the system reset is released, it is determined that there is no request to transition to PROM mode.
In security mode, a security check is performed. If the security check is deemed OK, the system switches to user mode; if the security check is deemed NG, execution (processing) is stopped.
In this security mode, security checks are performed by reading the program code area setting address in the program management area, the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH), etc. Then, the system checks for setting errors in the program management area and performs self-diagnosis. In addition, in this security mode, the data value of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) is read and the vector address value is recognized.

Here, the interrupt initialization address data is read, and if the fixed values (bits A3 and A2) in Figure 85(A) are not "00B", a program management area setting error is recorded.
If the security check in security mode is deemed successful, the system then transitions to user mode.
This user mode corresponds to program processing that starts from "0000H" in the program area of the built-in ROM 54's usage area.
Furthermore, "driving outside the designated area" in Figure 87 will be explained later.

Figure 88 shows an example program that starts from "0000H" in the program area of the built-in ROM 54's usage area.
In this embodiment, the call instructions issued by the main CPU 5 include special call instructions and normal call instructions.
Special call instructions are called "RST instructions," while normal call instructions are called "CALLF instructions."
The RST instruction is an instruction that can be represented as a 1-byte (4-cycle) program. On the other hand, the CALLF instruction is an instruction that can be represented as a 2-byte (4-cycle) program. Therefore, the number of bytes required to write an RST instruction is less than the number of bytes required to write a CALLF instruction, so using the RST instruction reduces program size compared to using the CALLF instruction. For this reason, programs that are called frequently are called using the RST instruction.

Here, "programs that are frequently called" refers to programs that are called multiple times during a single game.
However, "programs that are frequently called" include, for example, programs that are called at least once per game, or programs that are not necessarily called at least once per game, but are highly likely to be called during gameplay.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the addresses that can be called using the RST instruction are limited to predetermined addresses.
Specifically, the "designated address" is,
0008H
0010H
0018H
0020H
0028H
0030H
0038H
0040H
It consists of eight parts.
These eight addresses are merely examples, and the values (addresses) and number of "specified addresses" can be set in various ways depending on the chip specifications, etc.

By storing programs that can be called using the RST instruction at the eight addresses mentioned above, the program size can be reduced.
On the other hand, as mentioned above, the program area of the used area starts from "0000H", and the power-on program is stored from this "0000H". The power-on program corresponds to, for example, the "program start process (M_PRG_START)" shown in Figure 62 (second embodiment).

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the vector address is "0004H".
Therefore, as shown in Figure 88,
0000H: Power-on program (start program)
:
0004H: Vector address:
0008H: Program 1 called by the RST instruction
:
0010H: Program 2 called by the RST instruction
:
0018H: Program 3 called by the RST instruction
:
0020H: Program 4 called by the RST instruction
:
0028H: Program 5 called by the RST instruction
:
0030H: Program 6 called by the RST instruction
:
0038H: Program 7 called by the RST instruction
:
0040H: Program 8 called by the RST instruction
:
This is how the data (including instructions and programs) is arranged.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the jump instruction requires 3 bytes of capacity. Therefore, the jump instruction is stored in "0001H" to "0003H", and "0050H" is specified as the jump destination address. The program continuing from "0000H" is stored from "0050H" onwards.
Here, the program including the jump instruction may be referred to as the power-up program, or the program that does not include the jump instruction may be referred to as the power-up program.
This allows the power-on program to start at "0000H", then the next jump instruction at "0001H" jumps to "0050H", and the power-on program can continue executing from "0050H".
With this configuration, the power-on program can be started from "0000H" while the vector address can be placed at "0004H". Furthermore, while the power-on program can be started from "0000H", RST instructions can be placed at "0008H", "0010H", etc.

Furthermore, the power-on program continues by determining, for example, whether or not to switch to the settings change mode.
Here, because the voltage is unstable when the power is turned on, there is a risk that the jump instruction may not be executed correctly. If the jump instruction is not executed correctly, it may take time to transition to the setting change mode, or it may not transition to the setting change mode at all. For this reason, when the power is turned on after performing the operation to transition to the setting change mode (for example, a predetermined operation of the setting key), if the system does not transition to the setting change mode by the estimated time (T), it can be determined that the program including the jump instruction was not executed correctly. When the administrator determines that the system does not transition to the setting change mode by the estimated time (T), the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned off and on again. When the power is turned on again, the program starts again from address "0000H" after going through the security mode.
Furthermore, it is preferable to perform the jump instruction in the power-on program between "0000H" and "0007H". This is to allow the use of "0008H" as the RST instruction.

Furthermore, when storing program 1, which is called by the RST instruction, in "0008H", program 1 is a program that can be placed in a space of 8 bytes from "0008H" to "000FH", or a space of 8 bytes or less.
Similarly, when storing program 2, which is called by the RST instruction, in "0010H", program 2 is a program that can be placed in a space of 8 bytes from "0010H" to "0017H", or a space of 8 bytes or less.

Here, if program 2 consists of, for example, four bytes from "0010H" to "0013H", the addresses from "0014H" to "0017H" can be used in any way.
For example, firstly, the addresses "0014H" to "0017H" may be used as an unused area (storing "00000000B").
Secondly, other programs that fit within 4 bytes may be stored in "0014H" to "0017H".
Furthermore, thirdly, the program continuing from the power-on program starting from "0000H" may be stored in "0014H", and jump instructions (instructions to jump to the address where the program continuing from "0014H" is stored) may be stored in "0015H" to "0017H".

The same applies to "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H", and "0040H".
For example, if program 4, which is called by the RST instruction, is stored in "0020H", and program 4 has a capacity of 14 bytes from "0020H" to "002DH", then program 5, which is called by the RST instruction in "0028H", may not be provided. However, if the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, it is preferable to store it in "0040H" or later, where there is no limit on program capacity. By configuring it in this way, eight programs can be stored as programs that can be called by the RST instruction.
Furthermore, when a program called by an RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, the program can be placed not only by storing it from "0040H" onwards, but also, for example, in the above example, by storing the program from "0020H" to "0024H", storing jump instructions from "0025H" to "0027H", and using those jump instructions to jump to "0040H" onwards. In this way, a program that can be called by an RST instruction can be stored at "0028H". By using this method, even if a program called by an RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, it is possible to provide eight programs that can be called by an RST instruction.
In the example shown in Figure 88, a command to jump to "0050H" is stored at "0001H," and the program continuing from "0000H" is stored from "0050H" onwards.

In this embodiment, the vector address is set to "0004H," but it is not limited to this.
Here, the upper byte of the vector address value is the value of the I register. In this embodiment, since no process is performed to set a specific value in the I register after power-on, and it is initialized as a register of the main CPU 55 and remains in the state of "00H", the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "00H". However, this is not the only case; if a process is performed to set a specific value in the I register after initializing it after power-on, the upper byte value of the vector address can be set to that specific value.
However, as shown in Figure 83, if the vector address is located in the program area of the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register will be in the range of "00H" to "11H".
As will be discussed later, vector addresses are not limited to being located in the program area of the used area, but can also be located in the data area of the used area, the program area of the area outside the used area, or the data area of the area outside the used area.

However, if the process of setting a specific value in the I register is executed after initializing the I register after power-on, that amount of program capacity is required. For example, if the specific value is "02H", then after initializing the I register after power-on, it is necessary to include "LD I, 02H" (an instruction (program) to load "02H" into the I register). If this program requires, for example, 2 bytes of capacity, that amount of program memory will be consumed.
In contrast, as in this embodiment, when the initialized value "00H" is used as the I register value, there is no need to set a specific value in the I register, thus saving program memory space. As a result, setting the upper byte value of the vector address to "00H" reduces the program size.

Furthermore, when the I register value is set to "00H", the vector address value is not limited to "0004H". Specifically, the vector address value can be set arbitrarily as long as it is less than or equal to "00FEH" and "00FFH", and is not one of the addresses targeted by the RST instruction (such as "0008H" and "0010H" mentioned above). For example, it can be set to "00F4H". If the lower four bits of the lower byte of the vector address are set to "0100B (4H)", the automatic allocation value of this embodiment shown in Figure 86(B) can be used as is.
Furthermore, when the upper four bits of the lower byte of the vector address are set to "FH" (1111B) as described above, the upper four bits of the data value of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) in Figure 85(A) will be "1111B".

Figure 89 shows an example where the vector address value is "00F4H". In this case, "0004H" is not a vector address, so the power-on program can be stored in "0000H" to "0004H".
Furthermore, if 3 bytes are required for the program capacity of a jump instruction, the jump instruction can be placed in the 3-byte storage area from "0005H" to "0007H", and program 1, which is called by the RST instruction, can be stored in "0008H" as in Figure 88.

Next, we will explain the programs that are called by the RST instruction, that is, programs that are called multiple times during a single game.
Figure 90 is a flowchart showing examples of processes called by the RST instruction, where (A), (B), and (C) represent Example 1, Example 2, and Example 3, respectively.
Example 1 in Figure 90(A) is a flowchart of the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). This process corresponds to, for example, step S303 in Figure 67 (second embodiment), and is a process for setting command data to be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.
Furthermore, although not shown in Figure 67 (second embodiment), in the game start set process in step S272, an output request for the operating status (whether or not the BB activation symbol is displayed, whether or not the replay activation symbol is displayed, etc.) is set and control command set 1 is executed.
Similarly, although not shown in the figures, in the start switch reception process in step S279 in Figure 67 (second embodiment), an output request for the start of reel rotation is set and control command set 1 is executed.

In Figure 90(A), first, in step S151, the main control board 50 executes interrupt disable processing. In the next step S152, it executes control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET). Then, it proceeds to step S503, where it executes the release of the interrupt processing that was disabled in step S151 (i.e., interrupt enablement). As a result of the above processing, interrupt processing is disabled while control command set 2 is being executed.
Although the detailed processing of control command set 2 is omitted here, this process involves writing control commands. Furthermore, interrupt processing is prohibited while control command set 2 is executing, thus preventing malfunctions caused by interrupt processing occurring during the control command writing process.

Example 2 in Figure 90(B) is a flowchart of the interrupt waiting process (R_INTR_WAIT). This process corresponds to, for example, step S2754 in Figure 66 (second embodiment) or step S295 in Figure 67 (second embodiment).
First, in step S161, the main control board 50 acquires the interrupt counter value. This process stores the interrupt counter value in the A register. Note that a 16-bit (2-byte counter) interrupt counter value is stored at a predetermined address in the working area of the built-in RWM 53's usage area, and in step S161, the value stored at the address of the lower 8 bits is stored in the A register.
In the next step, S162, the main control board 50 determines whether the lower 8 bits of the interrupt counter value have changed. Specifically, it subtracts the lower 8 bits from the A register value, and if the result of the calculation is not "0" (when the zero flag = "0"), it determines "Yes". If it determines that a change has occurred, it terminates the process according to this flowchart; if it determines that no change has occurred, it continues the process in step S162.

Example 3 in Figure 90(C) is a flowchart showing the countdown (R_CNT_DOWN). This process is used, for example, in the process of subtracting the advantageous section clear counter in step S301 (game end check process) in Figure 67 (second embodiment), in the process of updating the timer value in step S455 (timer measurement) in Figure 68 (second embodiment), or in the process of updating the number of AT games during AT gameplay, although not shown.
In this process, in step S171, the counter value is deducted by "1", and the process of this flowchart is terminated.
Note that the three processes shown in Figure 90 are examples of processes that are called multiple times during a single game, and are not limited to these three processes; many more processes can be listed. Then, programs that have a program capacity that can be stored within the above-mentioned address and that are called many times during a single game are set as the processes to be called by the RST instruction.

Figure 91 shows the program code area designation address and its data value. Hereafter, it will be referred to as the "program code area designation address," but it may also be called the "program code area setting address."
As shown in Figure 83, in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, addresses "3FD3H" to "3FD8H" are set as program code area designation addresses.
The main CPU 55 determines that execution is normal when program code stored within the address range specified in the program code area is executed, and determines that execution is abnormal (out-of-bounds execution) when program code stored outside the address range specified in the program code area is executed. If the main CPU 55 determines that execution is abnormal (out-of-bounds execution), it generates a reset.
In other words, a reset occurs when program code (instructions) stored outside the designated area is called (instruction fetched).

This is done for the following reasons.
The first reason is that malicious program code could be stored in an area other than the original program area, and there is a risk of cheating by using a jump instruction, for example, to jump to the malicious program code from the original program area and execute that malicious program code.
A second reason is that runaway operations may occur due to voltage instability immediately after power-on, or due to overheating, potentially causing instructions to be sent to areas other than the program area. Specifically, for example, if there is an instruction to jump from address A to address B, and that instruction is not executed correctly, the instructions stored from address B onward may not be executed within the design time. In such cases, the power is turned off and then turned back on (restarted).

Figure 87 also illustrates the processing that occurs when the vehicle travels outside the designated area.
As shown in Figure 87, if an out-of-bounds execution is detected during user mode execution, a reset is triggered. In this case, the main CPU 55 initializes the registers and, via security mode, executes user mode again (executing the program from address "0000H").
Furthermore, in addition to the above, if travel outside the designated area is detected and a reset is triggered, the registers may be initialized and then executed from user mode without going through security mode.
Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 87, the presence or absence of a PROM mode request is determined after initializing the registers. However, this is not limited to this case; if an out-of-bounds operation is detected and a reset is generated, the presence or absence of a PROM mode request may not be determined.
However, when travel outside the designated area is detected and a reset is triggered, register initialization is always performed.

Figure 91(A) shows the address used to specify the end address of program code area 1. "Program code area 1" corresponds to the program area of the used area in Figure 83. "Program code area 2", which will be described later, corresponds to the program area of the area outside the used area in Figure 83.
Here, as shown in Figure 83, the address range of the program area in the used area is from "0000H" to "11FEH". For this reason, in this embodiment, the starting address "0000H" is not defined, and only the ending address "11FEH" is defined. In this way, the memory area (2 bytes) for defining the starting address "0000H" is not required.
If only the end address is defined and the start address is not defined, the main CPU 55 will inevitably recognize the range from the start address to the end address of the internal memory as program code area 1. And since program code area 1 (the program area of the used area) actually starts from "0000H", there is no problem even if the main CPU 55 recognizes it as described above.

The end address of program code area 1 is stored in the program management area addresses "3FD3H" and "3FD4H" (2-byte area). In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 91(A), the lower byte is stored in address "3FD3H" and the upper byte is stored in address "3FD4H".
Therefore, "FEH" (11111110B) is stored in address "3FD3H", and "11H" (00010001B) is stored in address "3FD4H".

Figure 91(B) shows the address used to specify the starting address of the program code area 2.
The addresses used to specify the starting address of program code area 2 are set to "3FD5H" and "3FD6H". As shown in Figure 83, the address range of the program area outside the used area is "2000H" to "245DH". Therefore, the starting address of program code area 2 is "2000H".
Therefore, address "3FD5H" will store "00H" (000000000B), and address "3FD6H" will store "20H" (00100000B).

Figure 91(C) shows the addresses used to specify the end address of the program code area 2. The addresses used to specify the end address of the program code area 2 are set to "3FD7H" and "3FD8H".
Then, "5DH" (01011101B) is stored in address "3FD7H", and "24H" (00100100B) is stored in address "3FD8H".

As described above, under the circumstances where the end address of program code area 1 and the start and end addresses of program code area 2 are stored in the program management area, the main CPU 55 determines that execution is normal when program code within these specified address ranges is being executed, but determines that execution is abnormal when program code outside these specified address ranges is being executed.

It is also possible to omit specifying a program code area. In this case, "0000H" will be stored in the end address of program code area 1, the start address of program code area 2, and the end address of program code area 2.
Furthermore, if, for example, only the address of program code area 1 is specified and the address of program code area 2 is not specified, the end address of program code area 1 should be set to "11FEH" as shown in Figure 91, and the start and end addresses of program code area 2 should be set to "0000H".

Although a third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description and can be modified in various ways, for example, as follows.
(1) Although a vector address is provided in the program area of the usage area, it is also possible to provide a vector address in the data area of the usage area, for example. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "12H", then after the power is turned on, the I register will be stored in the process of storing "12H".
Additionally, a vector address may be set in the program area outside the used area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "20H", then after the power is turned on, the I register will be stored in a process called "20H".
Furthermore, a vector address may be provided in the data area outside the used area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "24H", then after the power is turned on, the I register will be stored in the process of storing "24H".
Furthermore, regardless of whether a vector address is set in the data area of the used area, in the program area of the area outside the used area, or in the data area of the area outside the used area, simply reading the data value stored in the vector address will not result in the system running outside the specified area and trigger a reset.

(2) The data value stored in the vector address, that is, the starting address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored, can be set arbitrarily. In the example in Figure 86(c), it is set to "1134H", but it is not limited to this. Also, the starting address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored may be after the vector address or before the vector address.
(3) In the above embodiment, two address ranges were defined as the executable range (runnable area) of the program code, as shown in Figure 91, but the system is not limited to this, and only one address range may be defined.
Furthermore, in defining the executable range of the program code within the program area of the built-in ROM 54's usage area, the above embodiment defines only the end address and not the start address. However, it is not limited to this, and both the start address and the end address may be defined.

(4) In the above embodiment, "0008H", "0010H", "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H", and "0040H" were provided as addresses for storing the program called by the RST instruction, but the address is not limited to these eight addresses. However, it is preferable to set the upper byte of the address for storing the program called by the RST instruction to "00H".
By doing this, modules that are called multiple times during a single game are placed near the starting address (0000H), making it possible to design those modules first during the development phase and then design (consider) other modules later.

(5) The relationship between the address where the program called by the RST instruction is stored and the vector address is as follows:
Firstly, as shown in Figure 88, the vector address may be placed before all the addresses that store the program to be called by the RST instruction.
Secondly, as shown in Figure 89, the vector address may be placed after all the addresses that store the program called by the RST instruction.
Thirdly, a vector address may be placed between one address (for example, "0020H") which stores the program called by the RST instruction and another address (for example, "0028H") which stores the program called by the RST instruction (for example, "0026H" and "0027H").

In this case, if the vector address is placed within the program area of the used area (within the range of "0000H" to "00FFH"), it is not necessary to set the upper byte value of the vector address in the I register after power-on. In other words, setting the I register value to "00H" can reduce the program size.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 86(B), in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A3-A0 bit value is "0100B" in this example. Therefore, at this point, the vector address value becomes "00000000/####0100B" (where "#" is any value of "0" or "1").
Here, the above "####B" (vector address setting value) is "0000B" in the example of Figure 86(A). However, it is not limited to this; "####B" can also be, for example, "1000B (8H)" or "1111B (FH)".
When "####B" is set to "1000B (8H)", the vector address value becomes "00000000/10000100B", and when "####B" is set to "1111B (FH)", the vector address value becomes "00000000/11110100B".

(6) The upper byte value of the vector address value is set to the I register value, which is "00H". However, it is not limited to this, and although it overlaps with what is said above, the value of the upper byte of the vector address may be a value other than "00H", for example, "02H". In this case, after turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 and initializing the I register, the process of storing "02H" in the I register is executed.
In particular, when the vector address is located in the program area of the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register, i.e., the upper byte value of the vector address, should be in the range of "00H" to "11H".

However, since the I register is initialized (becomes "00H") each time the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a process is executed to store, for example, "02H" in the I register again after this initialization. As described above, for example, a program code such as "LD I, 02H" is provided and a process is executed to store "02H" in the I register.
On the other hand, as in this embodiment, if the value of the upper byte of the vector address is set to "00H", the I register value will also be "00H". Therefore, after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the I register is initialized, there is no need to store a specific value in the I register. In other words, there is no need to include program code such as "LD I, 00H". Thus, the program size can be reduced accordingly.

(7) The first to third embodiments, and the various modifications shown in the first to third embodiments, are not limited to being implemented individually, but can also be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Fourth Embodiment>
The fourth embodiment relates to a gaming machine that has biased roles in which the winning role (expected number of medals obtained) differs depending on the operation method (pressing order and/or timing of operation) of the stop switch 42.
A "biased role" is a role in which the winning role differs depending on how the stop switch 42 is operated, and there are unilaterally advantageous button presses and other button presses (unilaterally disadvantageous button presses). In a game in which a biased role is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the unilaterally advantageous button presses, the expected number of medals acquired in that game (expected value without considering the expected value related to AT) is higher compared to when the stop switch 42 is operated with any other button presses.
Furthermore, the stop switch 42 can be pressed in a standard order (left first stop) and in an irregular order (middle first stop or right first stop), but the "unilaterally advantageous pressing order" in the fourth embodiment corresponds to the irregular order.

A biased combination consists of multiple types of small wins, and winning a biased combination corresponds to winning multiple types of small wins simultaneously. When a biased combination is won (when multiple types of small wins are won simultaneously), if the stop switch 42 is operated in a unilaterally advantageous sequence, the small win with the highest payout (hereinafter referred to as "high-payout") becomes available for prize winning through the coin-priority control (see the first embodiment). On the other hand, when a biased combination is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a sequence other than the unilaterally advantageous sequence, the small win with a lower payout (hereinafter referred to as "low-payout") becomes available for prize winning through the coin-priority control (see the first embodiment). When coin-priority control is executed, generally, the high-payout is awarded with "PB=1".
In contrast, when quantity-priority control is performed,
a) When the lowest score is "PB=1" and a prize is awarded,
b) The low number may result in a win with "PB≠1", or no wins may occur (the wins may be missed).

Furthermore, the "biased combination" does not have an even distribution of the correct button press order among the six possible press orders. When a biased combination is won, operating the stop switch 42 with the aforementioned irregular button presses is unilaterally advantageous. Thus, when a biased combination is won, there is a unilaterally advantageous button press order (irregular press) and other button press orders (unilaterally disadvantageous button press order (normal press)). Also, "bias" indicates that the advantageous button press order is biased towards irregular presses.
Specifically, in a game where a biased combination is won, if the percentage of times a high number is won when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in the normal order is defined as "R1 (%)", and the percentage of times a high number is won when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in an irregular order is defined as "R2 (%)",
"R1 <R2"
It is structured in such a way.
In particular, in the fourth embodiment, "R1 = 0 (%)" is set.

Figure 92(a) is a diagram showing the types of roles, winning probabilities, and the number of payouts for each order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed in the fourth embodiment, and Figure 92(b) is a diagram showing the payout performance of biased roles. Similar to the first embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated, a role lottery is performed by the role lottery means 61, and the roles shown in Figure 92 are won with the winning probabilities shown in the figure. Note that special roles (bonus roles) are omitted in Figure 92.
In Figure 92, the biased roles correspond to biased bell 1 to biased bell 4, rare role A, and rare role B.
Here, as the so-called "press-order bell,"
One possible solution is to provide the following combinations of buttons: left-center-right (123) correct bell, left-right-center (132) correct bell, center-left-right (213) correct bell, center-right-left (231) correct bell, right-left-center (312) correct bell, and right-center-left (321) correct bell, with the probability of winning each button combination being set to be the same.
As a result, regardless of the order in which the player presses the buttons during gameplay, there will be no advantage or disadvantage in the expected number of medals won based on the winning sequence of each button press.
In other words, the expected number of medals obtained from the button-pressing sequence is the same whether you play the game by pressing the buttons in the normal order or by pressing them in an irregular order.

In contrast, in the fourth embodiment, with biased roles, there are no cases where the button press order is correct (i.e., when a high number is awarded) when pressing in order, and the button press order is correct only when pressing in an irregular order.
In other words, when a biased combination is won, the only correct button press order is an irregular press. Therefore, if the player plays the game using the normal order of pressing the stop switch 42, a high-paying combination will not be awarded when a biased combination is won.

The winning combinations for Biased Bell 1 to Biased Bell 4 are all 1-coin, 2-coin, and 7-coin combinations. When any Biased Bell is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct sequence of irregular button presses, the 7-coin combination, which is the higher-paying bell, is awarded with "PB=1" due to the number-priority control. Conversely, when any Biased Bell is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the incorrect sequence of normal button presses, the 1-coin or 2-coin combination, which is the lower-paying bell, is awarded with "PB=1" due to the number-priority control. Also, when any Biased Bell is won, if the irregular button press sequence is incorrect, the 1-coin combination, which is the lower-paying bell, is awarded with "PB=1" due to the number-priority control.
In other words, in this example, no loss will occur regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is operated when a biased bell is won.

To explain in more detail, for example, when a biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the correct button press order of middle left left, then "PB=1" and a 7-coin payout is awarded. Conversely, when a biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated with the incorrect button press order of middle right left, right left middle, or right middle left, then "PB=1" and a 1-coin payout is awarded.
On the other hand, when Biased Bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect order of pressing the buttons (left, middle, right, or left, right, middle), then "PB=1" will result in either a 1-coin or 2-coin payout. Whether a 1-coin or 2-coin payout is awarded depends on the timing of the stop switch 42 operation. The same applies when Biased Bell 2 to Biased Bell 4 are won.

Similarly, when a biased bell 2 is won, operating the stop switch 42 with the correct button press order of middle-right-left will result in "PB=1" and a 7-coin payout, while operating the stop switch 42 with the incorrect button press order of middle-left-right, right-left-middle, or right-middle-left will result in "PB=1" and a 1-coin payout.
Furthermore, when a biased bell 3 is won, operating the stop switch 42 with the correct button press order (right, left, middle) will result in "PB=1" and a 7-coin payout. Operating the stop switch 42 with the incorrect button press order (middle, left, right, left, or right, middle, left) will result in "PB=1" and a 1-coin payout.
Furthermore, when a biased bell 4 is won, operating the stop switch 42 with the correct button press order of right, middle, left will result in "PB=1" and a 7-coin payout, while operating the stop switch 42 with the incorrect button press order of middle, left, middle, right, left, or right, left, middle will result in "PB=1" and a 1-coin payout.

In each game, the probability of winning a biased bell combination 1-4 is "4/5". Assuming that when a biased bell combination is won and a single-coin payout occurs 50% of the time, and a double-coin payout occurs 50% of the time, then the expected number of medals won based on the biased bell combination, when playing each game in the normal order, is:
4/5 × 1/2 × 1 + 4/5 × 1/2 × 2 = 1.2 (sheets)
This is the result.
On the other hand, if each game is played using an irregular button press pattern, the expected number of medals obtained based on the biased bell pattern is:
4/5 × 1/4 × 7 + 4/5 × 3/4 × 1 = 2.0 (sheets)
This is the result.

Furthermore, rare combination A and rare combination B are types of biased combinations. Both rare combination A and rare combination B include combinations of 1-coin and 12-coin combinations.
Then, as shown in Figure 92, when rare role A or rare role B is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the normal order, the order of pressing the buttons is incorrect, and a single-coin win (low value) is awarded with "PB = 1".
On the other hand, when rare role A or rare role B is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in an irregular order, the button press order is correct, and a 12-coin payout (high payout) is awarded with "PB=1".
The combined probability of winning with rare role A and rare role B is "1/125", so in the case of pressing the buttons in order, the expected number of medals obtained based on rare role A and rare role B is:
1/125 × 1 = 0.008 (sheets)
This is the result.
On the other hand, in the case of irregular button presses, the expected number of medals obtained based on rare role A and rare role B is:
1/125 × 12 = 0.096 (sheets)
This is the result.
From the above, when a biased combination is won during gameplay, the expected number of medals obtained in that game is unilaterally advantageous if you press the buttons in an irregular order, and unilaterally disadvantageous if you press them in a normal order (Figure 92(b)).

Other winning combinations besides the biased ones include the common bell, watermelon, and replay.
The common bell does not have the concept of correct/incorrect button press order; regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is operated, a 6-coin payout will be awarded (PB=1).
Furthermore, while the watermelon is a minor win that can be achieved regardless of the order in which the buttons are pressed, it is a win that can be missed. For this reason, Figure 92 shows "5 coins (when won)" or "0 coins (when missed)". However, the ease of winning may vary depending on the arrangement of the symbols and the timing of operating the stop switch 42, but this point will not be explained here.
The common bell pays out 6 coins and has a winning probability of "1/88".
Furthermore, the watermelon payout is 5 coins (if not missed), and the probability of winning is "1/200". Assuming a 50% chance of winning with the watermelon and a 50% chance of missing, the expected total number of coins won from the common bell and watermelon combined is:
6 × 1/88 + 5 × 1/200 × 1/2 ≈ 0.081 (sheets)
That is the case.

Based on the above, the expected number of medals obtained based on all possible combinations when playing the game in the normal order is:
1.2 + 0.008 + 0.081 = 1.289 (sheets)
This is the result.
On the other hand, the expected number of medals obtained based on all possible combinations when playing the game using irregular button presses is:
2.0 + 0.096 + 0.081 = 2.177 (sheets)
This is the result.
Therefore, the expected number of medals won is greater when pressing buttons in an irregular order than when pressing them in a standard order.
Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the number of bets (also called the "specified number") is "3 (coins)". Therefore, even if the game is played using irregular button presses, the expected value of the number of coins obtained per game will not be positive.

On the other hand, the fourth embodiment, like the other embodiments described above, has a normal section (non-advantageous section) and an advantage section. Furthermore, the advantage section has a non-AT and an AT. The non-AT has a non-CZ and a CZ (a state in which the probability of winning an AT is higher than that of a non-CZ).
Furthermore, during normal periods, no AT lottery is performed (in the following description of the fourth embodiment, the AT lottery will include the CZ lottery). In contrast, during advantageous periods and when not in AT mode, an AT lottery is performed. The AT lottery can be performed when rare role A and rare role B (hereinafter, rare role A and rare role B are collectively referred to simply as "rare role") are won.
In addition, AT lottery may also be performed when a common bell or watermelon is won, but in the fourth embodiment, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, AT lottery is made possible only when a rare role is won.

Furthermore, when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in order when a rare role is won, the expected probability of winning the AT (also called "winning probability,""winningrate,""winning expected value," etc.) is defined as "P1," and when the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in an irregular order when a rare role is won, the expected probability of winning the AT is defined as "P2."
P1 > P2
This configuration means that it is impossible to know when a rare role will be won during gameplay. Therefore, in order to increase the probability of winning an AT during the advantageous period and when not in AT mode, it is advantageous for the player to always play by pressing the buttons in order (Figure 92(b)).
The expected probability of winning the AT, "P2," may be a value greater than "0," or it may be "0." In the fourth embodiment, "P2 = 0."

Since the AT lottery is performed based on the operation of the start switch 41 and the winning of a rare role (step S283 in Figure 102, which will be described later), the stop switch 42 has not yet been operated at the time the AT lottery is performed.
Therefore, for example, the AT lottery when a rare role is won is performed at the timing of the rare role win (when the start switch 41 is operated), and if an AT is won, but the current game was played using an irregular button press, the AT win is invalidated (the AT win is discarded) when the current game is completely stopped (it may also be at the end of the current game or at the start of the next game).

As mentioned above, if the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press when a biased combination is won, the expected number of medals to be won in that game will be higher than when the stop switch 42 is operated by a normal press.
However, as described above, in the advantageous period and in a non-AT state, when a biased role is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in order, the right to AT may be granted, but if the stop switch 42 is operated by pressing the buttons in an irregular order, the right to AT will not be granted.
Therefore, the overall payout performance (overall gameplay), including the payouts during AT, is higher with the standard pressing method than with the irregular pressing method (Figure 92(b)).
Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the order of pressing buttons in the normal sequence (first stop on the left) is referred to as the "recommended order of pressing buttons," and the order of pressing buttons in the irregular sequence (first stop on the middle or first stop on the right) is referred to as the "non-recommended order of pressing buttons" (Figure 92(b)).
"Recommended" means that if you play in that order during a favorable period and when not in AT mode, the expected total number of medals won (over the entire game) will be higher than with other button presses.

However, pressing the buttons in the correct order is merely a "recommendation," not a "command." In other words, pressing the buttons in an unconventional order is "not recommended," not "prohibited."
In the fourth embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended sequence during a favorable period and in a non-AT state, a recommended image (which may also be called a "predetermined image" or "specific image") is displayed.
Here, the "recommended image" is an image that informs the player that pressing the buttons in order is the recommended order, or in other words, that pressing the buttons in order is the order that is advantageous to the player. Note that the display of the recommended image is an indication that the button press order is recommended and is different from a warning display. When the stop switch 42 is operated with an irregular press, there will be no penalty in subsequent games, and the player will not suffer any disadvantage. However, as described above, the expected probability of winning the AT in a game will differ between a game in which the stop switch 42 is operated with a normal press and a game in which the stop switch 42 is operated with an irregular press.
Therefore, the purpose of displaying the recommended image is to inform the player that operating the stop switch 42 with an irregular press will decrease the expected total number of medals won (over the entire game). Here, "decreased expected total number of medals won (over the entire game)" means, for example, that the probability of winning an AT (Attack Time) becomes lower, that the expected number of medals won during an AT decreases when an AT is won, or that the number of games until an AT is won increases.
The "recommended images" include images such as "Pressing left (forward pressing) is recommended,""Pressing left (forward pressing) is advantageous," and "Pressing left (forward pressing) makes it easier to win the AT." However, various other images may also be used as recommended images.

In games where the stop switch 42 is pressed in order, the recommended image will not be displayed. In contrast, in games where the stop switch 42 is pressed in an irregular order during the advantageous section and in a non-AT state, the recommended image will be displayed at the time of the first stop. Furthermore, even if the recommended image is displayed, its display will end at least at the start of the next game (when the start switch 41 is operated). However, it is also possible to end the display of the recommended image at the time of the complete stop of the current game or at the time of the bet operation for the next game. In this case, it is preferable to perform a process to match the internal control state and the performance image at the time the recommended image display ends. By configuring it in this way, the period during which the recommended image is displayed is shortened, so that players do not feel annoyed, and other players can see the recommended image and find out that the machine was played with an unrecommended button sequence, which would reduce subsequent usage.
Additionally, along with or instead of a recommended image, a sound may be output to notify the recommended button press sequence. Below are examples of appropriate and inappropriate examples of notifying the recommended button press sequence, including the display of a recommended image.
(1) Examples of inappropriate notification of recommended button press order a) Displaying "Irregular button press prohibited" is inappropriate as notification of recommended button press order. This is because the word "prohibited" is a warning expression. In the gaming machine 10, the recommended button press order for the stop switch 42 can be notified to the player, but since the player decides how to press the stop switch 42, it is inappropriate to prohibit a specific button press order.

b) Displaying "DANGER" is inappropriate as a notification of the recommended button press sequence. This is because, like "Prohibition" mentioned above, it falls under the category of a warning expression.
c) Displaying black and yellow stripes, a prohibition symbol (a red line sloping diagonally downwards to the right within a red circle), or an "X" is inappropriate as a notification of the recommended button press order. This is because these images are generally perceived as warnings, dangers, prohibitions, etc.
d) Outputting sounds such as buzzers or alarms is inappropriate as notification of the recommended button press sequence. This is because, in common social understanding, these are recognized as warning sounds or prohibited sounds. However, it is of course permissible to output sounds such as buzzers or alarms when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10, such as a medal selector error or a hopper error.

(2) Appropriate examples of notifying the recommended button press order a) Displaying "Pressing left (pressing in order) is recommended" as described above is appropriate as notifying the recommended button press order because it informs the player of the optimal way to play (the button press order that maximizes the player's benefit).
b) Outputting a different stopping sound for reel 31 than usual is appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. Sounds that are of a level generally used as part of the effects of the gaming machine 10 do not constitute a warning sound.
c) Turning off the backlight of reel 31 after all reels have stopped is appropriate as notification of the recommended button press order. This is because, as mentioned above, it is a common feature used in the game machine 10.

d) Dimming the LCD screen is an appropriate way to notify the recommended button press sequence. This is for the same reasons as in c) above. The timing of the dimming may be at the first stop, the second stop, when all buttons are stopped, or after all buttons are stopped.
e) Not outputting the stop sound of reel 31 is appropriate as notification of the recommended button press order. This is for the same reasons as in c) above. Note that it is also acceptable to not output the stop sound only at the first stop, not output the stop sounds at the first and second stops, or not output any stop sounds at all. In addition, not outputting the sound of winning a prize is also appropriate as notification of the recommended button press order.

f) When a continuous performance sequence spanning multiple games is being output, interrupting the progress of the continuous performance sequence when the stop switch 42 is operated in an unrecommended order is appropriate as notification of the recommended order. This is for the same reasons as in c) above.
g) When the remaining number of games is displayed during the pre-announcement phase, not displaying the deduction of the remaining number of games is appropriate as notification of the recommended button sequence. Furthermore, if the stop switch 42 is operated with a non-recommended button sequence during the pre-announcement phase, the internal control system will not perform the deduction process for the remaining number of games during the pre-announcement phase. This is because even in this manner, it is merely reporting a fact and does not constitute a warning or the like.

h) Displaying an image and/or audio output of "You are pressing the buttons in an irregular order" is appropriate as notification of the recommended button press order. This is because, as with g) above, it merely reports a fact and does not constitute a warning.
i) Displaying an image that says, "Pressing the buttons in the correct order will increase AT performance and decrease the base rate. Pressing the buttons in an irregular order will decrease AT performance and increase the base rate," is appropriate as notification of the recommended button press order. This is for the same reasons as g) above.
j) When displaying the number of games played since a predetermined condition (for example, transitioning to a favorable section or the start of a new cycle related to the AT lottery) has been met (for example, the number of games played since transitioning to a favorable section or the remaining number of games until the end of the cycle related to the AT lottery), it is appropriate as notification of the recommended button press order not to add or subtract the number of games played based on the fact that a non-recommended button press order was used during a predetermined game (for example, one game in the favorable section or one game in a cycle related to the AT lottery).
Furthermore, after entering the advantageous period, if the game is not controlled to an advantageous game state such as AT even after the prescribed number of games or cycles have been played, there is a known rescue function (also called "ceiling") that forcibly controls the game to an advantageous game state such as AT.
Furthermore, if the game is played using an unrecommended button sequence, the internal control system will not perform the addition (increment counter) or subtraction (decrement counter) process for the number of games played related to the relief function, but will perform the subtraction process for the advantageous section clear counter. This is for the same reasons as g) above.

Figure 93 shows the sequence of events (Example 1) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order (sequential pressing) during a favorable period and outside of AT mode. In the figure, the time sequence is (a) → (b) → (c) → (d).
In this example, during the advantageous period and when not in AT mode, the current stage is displayed on the image display device 23. The stage has two states: normal and high probability. When in high probability mode, the probability of winning AT is higher than when in normal mode. Also, when a rare role is won while in normal mode, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to upgrade the stage from normal to high probability mode. The following example shows an example of when the stage is upgraded from normal to high probability mode.
In Figure (a), before the game starts, the pre-game animation is displayed on the image display device 23. Also, the stage at this point is normal.
Then, as shown in Figure (b), when the start switch 41 is operated and a rare role is won, a stage upgrade indication演出 (performance/presentation) is started.

Next, as shown in Figure (c), when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, it is confirmed at this point that the recommended button sequence has been followed, so the recommended image is not displayed, and the stage upgrade suggestion animation develops as the animation for operating the left (first) stop switch 42. In this example, the stage upgrade suggestion animation develops when the stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, but of course, the animation does not have to change between the start of the game (while all reels 31 are rotating) and when the left stop switch 42 is operated (when the left reel 31 stops).
Next, as shown in Figure (d), when all stop switches 42 are operated and all reels 31 stop, an animation indicating that the stage upgrade has been successful is displayed as a post-stop animation for all reels 31. The stage then switches from normal to high probability.
As described above, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order, the recommended image will not be displayed.

Figure 94 shows the sequence of events (Example 1) when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended order (irregular pressing) in the example of Figure 93. In this example, although the lottery to upgrade the stage from normal to high probability was won due to the winning of a rare role, the win was invalidated because the non-recommended order was used, and the stage did not upgrade to high probability. In the figure, the time sequence is in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (d) → (e) → (f) (the same applies to Figures 95 to 98 below).
In Figure 94, (a) and (b) are the same as in Figures 93(a) and (b). Next, as shown in Figure (c), if the first stop is an unrecommended button press sequence, the main control board 50 transmits the command to the sub-control board 80. Based on the received command, if the sub-control board 80 determines that the first stop is an unrecommended button press sequence, it displays a recommended image. This recommended image covers almost the entire area of the image display area of the image display device 23, and the previous stage promotion suggestion effects are hidden and become invisible.

After the recommended image is displayed, the sound output from speaker 22 may be the sound corresponding to the previous animation image (i.e., the same sound as in Figure 93), or it may interrupt the sound corresponding to the previous animation image and output the sound for the recommended image. Examples of the sound for the recommended image include outputting a message such as "Pressing left is recommended" once or multiple times. Alternatively, the sound corresponding to the previous animation image may be output while the sound corresponding to the recommended image, such as "Pressing left is recommended," is overlaid on top of that sound.
Next, as shown in Figure (d), even when all stop switches 42 are operated and all reels 31 stop, the display of the recommended image is maintained.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure (e), the display of the recommended image is maintained even when a bet operation is performed. In addition, as shown in Figure (f), when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the recommended image ends at that time and returns to the image before the recommended image was displayed.
Note that the example in Figure 94 is an example where the start switch 41 is operated within 3 seconds of the complete stop shown in Figure (d). As will be explained later, when the recommended image is displayed, the demo display is executed after 3 seconds have elapsed since the complete stop. The same applies to Figures 96 and 98.

Figure 95 shows the sequence of events (Example 2) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order (sequential pressing) during a favorable period and when not in AT mode.
In this example, character images are displayed on the image display device 23 (corresponding to characters A, B, and C in Figure (a)), and when a rare role is won, a lottery is held to determine whether or not a new character is acquired. When the number of characters reaches a predetermined number (for example, "5"), the game transitions to a CZ (Chance Zone) or the AT (Attack Time) lottery is given preferential treatment. The following example shows an instance where a new character D is acquired by winning a rare role.
Figure (a) shows the situation before the game starts. In this situation, the pre-game animation is displayed, and characters A, B, and C are shown as images.
Next, proceed to (b) in the diagram, and assume that the start switch 41 is activated and a rare role is won. This triggers the character acquisition animation.

Next, as shown in Figure (c), when the first stop operation is performed using the recommended button sequence, it is confirmed at this point that the recommended sequence has been followed. Therefore, the recommended image is not displayed, and the character acquisition animation develops as the first stop animation. In this example, the character acquisition animation develops when the first stop switch 42 is operated, but of course, the animation does not have to change between the start of the game and the first stop.
Next, as shown in Figure (d), when all stop switches 42 are operated and all reels 31 stop, an animation showing the acquisition of character D (acquisition success animation) is output as a post-reel stop animation. Then, in addition to the existing characters A, B, and C, the newly acquired character D is displayed.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure (e), when a bet is made, the game transitions to a pre-game sequence. Next, proceeding to Figure (f), when the start switch 41 is operated, the game start sequence for that game is displayed.
In this way, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended sequence, the recommended image will not be displayed. Also, the newly acquired character D will remain displayed in the next game.

Figure 96 shows the sequence of events (Example 2) when the stop switch 42 is operated with a non-recommended button press sequence (irregular press) in the example of Figure 95. In this example, similar to Example 1 above, although the character acquisition lottery was won due to the winning of a rare role, the win was invalidated because the non-recommended button press sequence was used, and no character was added.
In Figure 96, (a) and (b) are the same as in Figures 95(a) and (b). Next, as shown in Figure (c), if the first stop is performed in a non-recommended sequence, the recommended image is displayed and the previous effects are hidden.
Next, as shown in Figure (d), even when all stop switches 42 are operated and all reels 31 stop, the display of the recommended image is maintained.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure (e), the display of the recommended image is maintained even when a bet is made. Additionally, as shown in Figure (f), when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the recommended image ends at that moment, and the image returns to the image before the rare role was won (the image without a character acquired).

Figures 97 and 98 illustrate the state of the (image) layer when the recommended image is displayed. Figure 98 follows Figure 97.
The examples in Figures 97 and 98 correspond to Example 1 in Figure 94.
Note that in Figures 97 and 98, neither the front layer nor the rear layer is necessarily a single layer, but is actually composed of multiple layers.
In this example, the front layer outputs the recommended image, and the back layer outputs the regular effect image.

In the diagram, the front layer is transparent before the game starts (a) and when the start switch is operated (b). Therefore, the player can only see the animation images on the rear layer.
Next, as shown in Figure (c), if the stop switch 42 is operated with a non-recommended press sequence for the first stop, the recommended image is displayed using the front layer. Also, the recommended image on the front layer obscures the rear layer from the player's view. Furthermore, as shown in Figure (c), even when the recommended image is displayed by the front layer, the effects on the rear layer are not stopped or otherwise interrupted, and are output (displayed) as is. The image on the rear layer in Figure (c) corresponds to the effects image in Figure 93(c).

Next, even in Figure 98(d) when all buttons are stopped, the recommended image on the front layer remains unchanged. At this time, the rear layer continues the animation for the recommended button press sequence, displaying the stage upgrade success animation and the state where the stage has transitioned to a high probability state. This image corresponds to Figure 93(d). However, since the rear layer is not visible to the player while the recommended image is displayed, the stage upgrade success animation is not visible to the player.
Next, proceeding to (e) in the diagram, the recommended image display is maintained even when a bet operation is performed. At this point, the background layer proceeds to the animation image displayed during the bet operation. Also, at this point, the high probability state after stage promotion is displayed.

Next, proceeding to (f) in the diagram, when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), a process is executed to match the internal control state (the normal stage is maintained because the button sequence was not recommended) with the display image. As a result, the stage returns to normal. Also, when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the recommended image ends, and the front layer becomes transparent. As a result, the player can see the image content of the rear layer at this point.
By controlling the image display as described above, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in an unrecommended sequence, the recommended image can be displayed on the front layer without canceling the image display for the recommended sequence, thus simplifying the program processing. Furthermore, during periods when the internal control state and the displayed image do not match, the recommended image is displayed on the front layer, making the displayed image on the rear layer invisible to the player. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the stage has transitioned to a high probability state.
Alternatively, instead of resetting the image when the start switch 41 is operated, the image may be reset when the bet operation is performed (at the timing shown in Figure 98(e)). Specifically, when the bet operation is performed, a process is executed to match the internal control state (the normal stage is maintained because the operation was performed in a non-recommended button sequence) with the display image. This resets the stage to normal. On the other hand, once the bet operation is performed, the display of the recommended image on the front layer ends, so the player can then see the image displayed on the back layer.
In the example above, a front layer was created in advance, and the front layer was made transparent during periods when the recommended image was not displayed. However, this is not the only option; the system could also be configured so that there is no front layer during periods when the recommended image is not displayed, and the front layer is only placed during periods when the recommended image is displayed.

Next, we will explain the relationship between recommended images, game state, game interval, and number of bets.
1. Relationship between recommended images and game state In the fourth embodiment, when in a non-special game state, a lottery for special roles (bonus roles) is held. If a special role is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed, the game transitions to a special game (the special game state is entered).
In the fourth embodiment, there is a special role 1BB.
While BB is in operation, the game enters a state of continuous RB operation. While RB is in continuous operation, the all-win condition device is activated for every game. In games where the all-win condition device is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a winning combination that pays out a predetermined number of coins is won, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed (there is no advantage or disadvantage depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed).
Furthermore, while 1BB is active, the system is controlled not to execute the AT lottery.
Therefore, there is no recommended button sequence when playing while 1BB is active. Consequently, when playing while 1BB is active, the recommended image will not be displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular button sequence. When playing while 1BB is active, the player can play the game in any button sequence they choose. Note that when playing while 1BB is active (during continuous RB operation), the expected number of medals won is the same regardless of the button sequence.

Furthermore, during AT mode, the recommended image will not be displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press. During AT mode, as a general rule, when a biased combination is won, the correct press order is announced, and the player follows that correct press order, so irregular presses occur during that game. Naturally, the recommended image will not be displayed in this case.
Furthermore, during AT mode, even if the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press during a game other than the one in which a biased role was won, for example, during a game in which no role was won, the recommended image will not be displayed.

2. Relationship between recommended images and game sections In the fourth embodiment, similar to the other embodiments described above, there is a non-advantageous section (normal section) and an advantageous section.
Furthermore, AT (Automatic Trigger)抽選 (AT lottery) is possible during the advantageous period, but not during the non-advantageous period. Therefore, there is no recommended button press sequence that is advantageous in the AT lottery during the non-advantageous period. Consequently, even if the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press during the non-advantageous period, the recommended image will not be displayed.
Therefore, if the recommended image is not displayed even when an irregular button press is made in a normal state (not a special game state or an AT state), it becomes possible to suggest to the player that the current game is in a non-advantageous period and that an AT lottery will not be performed.
In the fourth embodiment, a detailed explanation will be omitted, but during the non-advantageous period (normal period), a lottery for transitioning to the advantageous period is performed, and the system is set so that, except when the result of the internal lottery is not a win, the player wins the lottery for transitioning to the advantageous period. For this reason, even if the number of tokens exceeds 2400 in the advantageous period and the player transitions from the advantageous period to the non-advantageous period, the non-advantageous period usually lasts for only one to a few games. Therefore, even if the player knows that they are in a non-advantageous period (by confirming that the advantageous period indicator LED 78 is off) and makes an irregular press, the expected value of the increase in tokens is small and negligible.
Conversely, even in a non-advantageous period, if the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press, the recommended image may be displayed. With this configuration, it is not possible to determine whether the game is in an advantageous period or not based on whether or not the recommended image is displayed when an irregular press is made. Furthermore, the effect can be made even more pronounced if the advantageous period indicator LED 77 is not lit even in an advantageous period, or if there is no lamp (period indicator) to show that it is an advantageous period.

3. Relationship between recommended image and number of bets (specified number) In the fourth embodiment, the game can be played with either a number of bets of "2" or a number of bets of "3".
Furthermore, a bet of "3" is the most advantageous bet for the player. In other words, a bet of "3" is the recommended bet.
When playing with a bet of "3", the expected probability of winning the AT (winning rate, winning probability) is "P1", and when playing with a bet of "2", the expected probability of winning the AT is "P2".
P1 > P2
That is the case.
In particular, P1 > P2 × 1.5
That is the case.
Therefore, even if you play with a bet of "2", the probability of winning the AT (Attack Time) will not be more favorable compared to playing with a bet of "3".
In particular, in the fourth embodiment, when the game is played with a bet of "2", the AT lottery is not performed regardless of the result of the internal lottery (the program processing does not go through the AT lottery process). That is, "P2 = 0".

Furthermore, the probability of winning each combination when playing with a bet of "2" is set to be 2/3 or less compared to the probability of winning each combination when playing with a bet of "3". This ensures that even when playing with a bet of "2", the expected number of medals won never exceed the number of bets.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, since the AT lottery is not executed regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed when the bet count is "2", the recommended image is not displayed even if the game is played with a bet count of "2" and the stop switch 42 is operated with an irregular press. Displaying the recommended image when the AT lottery is not being executed could confuse the player. Furthermore, if the recommended image is not displayed even when the stop switch 42 is operated with an irregular press while in a favorable period and not in AT mode, the player can be made aware that the bet count for that game was "2".

Next, we will explain the demonstration image display (hereinafter simply referred to as "demo display").
After a complete stop (or after the completion of the medal payout process, if applicable), if no operation to continue the game (betting operation) is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed, the display on the image display device 23 may switch from the game end presentation display to a demo display (examples of cases where it does not switch to a demo display will be described later). The demo display is, for example, a promotional video that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 10.
In the fourth embodiment, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended sequence of presses to when it is operated in the unrecommended sequence of presses is set to be different from the time when the reels 31 have completely stopped to when it transitions to the demo display.
Specifically, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended order, and the time from when the reels 31 are completely stopped or at a certain timing after they are completely stopped (when payouts begin, when payouts end, or after a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed since they were completely stopped) until the demo display is activated is defined as "t1", and when the stop switch 42 is operated in a recommended order, and the time from when the reels 31 are completely stopped or at a certain timing after they are completely stopped until the demo display is activated is defined as "t2",
t1 < t2
It is set to this.

In other words, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended sequence, the system switches to the demo display faster than when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended sequence.
The reason for this setting is to make it as difficult as possible for players to notice that the stop switch 42 has been operated in an unrecommended sequence, by switching from the recommended image display to the demo display as early as possible. This is because if the recommended image is displayed when a player is choosing a gaming machine to play, they will know that the stop switch 42 has been operated in an unrecommended sequence, which may lead them to mistakenly believe that some kind of penalty has been incurred and cause them to avoid playing that machine.
As mentioned above, in games where the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended order, even if a winning combination that qualifies for AT抽選 is achieved, the AT will not be won (or even if an AT is won, it will be invalidated). No penalty will be incurred in subsequent games after the stop switch 42 has been operated in a non-recommended order. However, in 5th generation machines (conventional gaming machines), if an irregular button press was performed, a penalty (such as not performing an AT抽選 for a specified number of games) may continue in subsequent games. Therefore, there is a risk of confusion as to whether a penalty is being incurred, similar to that in 5th generation machines, and it is undesirable for the recommended image to remain displayed for an unnecessarily long time.

Furthermore, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended sequence and the display switches to the demo display, the demo display is canceled by a bet operation (coin insertion operation) and the display returns to the normal display (game standby animation display).
In contrast, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended sequence and the display switches to the demo display, the demo display will not be canceled by a bet operation (coin insertion operation), and the demo display will continue. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the game starts, the display returns to the normal display (game standby display).
Furthermore, after the recommended image is displayed, if time "t2" has elapsed since the game stopped completely and the system transitions to the demo display, the demo display layer will be placed even earlier than the layer displaying the recommended image. As a result, the recommended image will not be visible to the player while the demo is being displayed.
Furthermore, even when a bet operation is performed, the display of the recommended image and the demo display are maintained. When the start switch 41 is operated, both the display of the recommended image and the demo display are cleared, and the normal display layer, which is located behind the display of the recommended image, is displayed.
Note that the examples in Figures 94, 96, and 98 show cases where the display returns to the normal display without transitioning from the recommended image display to the demo display. In other words, these are examples where the start switch 41 was operated before time "t2" had elapsed after a complete stop.

Next, we will explain the transition to the demo display using a time chart.
Figure 99 is a time chart showing the image display, the status of the push button lamp, and the menu (screen) display when a bet operation and the start switch (abbreviated as "start" in Figures 99 to 101) are performed after the demo display, and shows the case when a replay is not awarded. Figure (a) is an example when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order, and Figure (b) is an example when the stop switch 42 is operated in an unrecommended order.

Although not shown in Figure 1, a push button is connected to the sub-control board 80. The push button is also called a performance button, chance button, operation button, confirmation button, sub-button, menu button, etc.
Furthermore, a lamp (push button lamp) is installed inside the push button, which lights up when the push button is active and turns off when it is inactive, allowing the player to visually check its on/off status. This allows the player to determine whether the push button is active or not by looking at whether the push button lamp is lit or not.
One possible use for the push button is to display a visual prompt to press the button, and then to enhance the visual prompt when the button is pressed.
Secondly, the menu can be displayed by operating the device while the game is in standby mode. The menu can display, for example, the issuance of a QR code for MySlo, the game flow, and the payout table. The menu can be displayed when the push button lamp is lit, and cannot be displayed when the push button lamp is off.

In Figure 99(a), it is assumed that the normal animation is displayed at the time of the first bet operation.
Furthermore, during a predetermined period when the demo display is not running during normal gameplay (for example, from the time of betting until 5 seconds have passed after all reels have stopped), it is not possible to access the menu. For this reason, the push button lamp will be off.
The above state is maintained for 5 seconds after the game starts (the start switch 41 is operated), all stop switches 42 are operated, and all reels 31 have stopped. Note that this "5 seconds" is an example, and various other settings such as "3 seconds" or "10 seconds" can be used.

Furthermore, although the game displays only "Normal Performance" from the start to the end, the performance content naturally changes as the game progresses.
After a complete stop, the push button lamp illuminates after 5 seconds. This informs the player that the menu is available (they can access the menu). When the push button is pressed while the push button lamp is lit, the menu becomes available. In this example, the push button is not pressed (the menu is not displayed).

Furthermore, if it is determined that 60 seconds have elapsed since all reels 31 have stopped, the image display switches from the normal animation display to the demo display. Note that this "60 seconds" is just an example, and various settings such as "20 seconds" or "30 seconds" can be used. However, generally, the demo display appears after the push button lamp lights up.
Here, in Figure 99(a), the demo display is executed only if no bet has been placed. Therefore, it is assumed that no replays have been awarded in the game (no automatic bets have been placed) and no tokens have been inserted.
If a bet is placed (or a medal is inserted) while the demo display is running, the demo display will end and the game will switch to normal gameplay. Additionally, upon switching to normal gameplay, the menu display will become unavailable and the push button lights will turn off.

Figure 99(b) shows an example where the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended sequence, unlike Figure 99(a).
In Figure 99(b), if, for example, the middle stop switch 42 is operated as the first stop, resulting in an unrecommended button press sequence, the image display switches from the normal animation display to the recommended image display at that point. As described above, the recommended image display layer is placed before the normal animation display layer.
Then, after 3 seconds have elapsed since the machine came to a complete stop, the display switches from the recommended image display to the demo display. Note that "3 seconds" is just an example, and it could be "5 seconds," etc. As mentioned above, in the case of the recommended button sequence, the display switches to the demo display after 60 seconds have elapsed since the machine came to a complete stop, but in the case of the non-recommended button sequence, the display switches to the demo display after 3 seconds have elapsed since the machine came to a complete stop. This allows the display to switch to the demo display earlier after the machine comes to a complete stop when the non-recommended button sequence is used, so if a player ends their game with that game, there is a high probability that the demo display will already be on when another player looks at the machine. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to tell that the stop switch 42 was operated with the non-recommended button sequence in the previous player's final game.

Furthermore, when using the recommended button sequence, the display transitioned from the demo screen to the normal animation screen upon betting. In contrast, when using the unrecommended button sequence, the display did not transition from the demo screen to the normal animation screen (or the recommended image display, which is a later layer than the demo screen) even when a betting operation (coin insertion operation) was performed. Therefore, for example, after finishing a game using the unrecommended button sequence, even if another player inserts coins into the machine, the display will not transition to the normal animation screen (or the recommended image display, which is a later layer than the demo screen).
Then, when a bet is placed and the start switch 41 is operated (when the game starts), the demo display (and the recommended image display, which is a later layer) ends and the game transitions to the normal presentation state.

Furthermore, when a minor win occurs, the number of wins is displayed on the win count display LED 78 (Figure 1). This win count display is cleared, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the payout process, or when the demo display starts (60 seconds after all machines have stopped). However, for example, if a biased bell is won, and the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended sequence, resulting in a 7-coin win, "07" will be displayed on the win count display LED 78. Similarly, if a rare win occurs, and the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended sequence, resulting in a 12-coin win, "12" will be displayed on the win count display LED 78.

However, if a player ends their game after winning 7 or 12 tokens, the next player may notice that the machine's winnings display LED 78 shows "07" or "12". This could cause the next player to avoid playing on that machine.
Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended order, and a 7-coin or 12-coin payout is achieved, and the number of coins won is displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78, it is preferable to clear the number of coins displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78 earlier than when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order. For example, in Figure 99(b), the display on the acquisition count display LED 78 is cleared at the timing when the demo display is activated 3 seconds after the machine has stopped completely.
Furthermore, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended sequence, the display of the winnings indicator LED 78 may be cleared after a predetermined time has elapsed since the machine came to a complete stop. Alternatively, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended sequence, the display of the winnings indicator LED 78 may be maintained until the next bet operation, and the display of the winnings indicator LED 78 may be cleared by the bet operation.

Figure 100 is a time chart showing the image display, the status of the push button lamps, and the menu display when a replay is won (during automatic betting). Figure (a) shows an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the recommended order, and Figure (b) shows an example of operating the stop switch 42 in an unrecommended order.
In Figure 100(a), after a full stop, if an automatic bet is placed based on a replay win, the post-bet state will be the same as in Figure 99(a). Therefore, the image display will continue to show the normal animation, and the demo display will not be executed even if 60 seconds have passed since the full stop. As a result, the push button lamp will not light up, and the menu cannot be displayed.
On the other hand, in Figure 100(b), if the stop switch 42 is operated in an unrecommended sequence during the first stop, the recommended image will be displayed at that point, similar to Figure 99(b).
Furthermore, after a full stop, if three seconds have passed, the display will switch from the recommended image to the demo display. Therefore, in this respect, it differs from the recommended button sequence, where the demo display is not performed when a replay is won.
This demo display continues while automatic betting is in progress, and when the start switch 41 is operated (gameplay begins), it switches from the demo display to the normal display.

Figure 101 is a time chart showing the image display, the status of the push button lamps, and the menu display when a bet operation (including inserting medals) is performed within 3 seconds after a full stop, and a start operation is performed 60 seconds after a full stop. Figure (a) shows an example when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order, and Figure (b) shows an example when the stop switch 42 is operated in an unrecommended order.
In Figure 101(a), if a bet operation is performed before 3 seconds have elapsed after a full stop, the post-bet state will be the same as in Figure 99(a). As a result, the image display will continue to show the normal animation, and the demo display will not be activated even after 60 seconds have elapsed since the full stop. Consequently, the push button lamp will not light up, and the menu will not be displayed.

On the other hand, in Figure 101(b), if the first stop is performed using an unrecommended button sequence, the recommended image will be displayed at that point, similar to Figure 99(b).
Furthermore, even if a bet operation is performed within 3 seconds after a full stop, the recommended image display will be maintained. Next, after 3 seconds have passed since the full stop, the display will switch from the recommended image to the demo display. In other words, even if a bet operation is performed, the recommended image display is limited to the period until 3 seconds have passed since the full stop, after which it will switch from the recommended image display to the demo display.
As explained above, when the recommended button sequence is followed, the display will either switch to the demo display after 60 seconds have elapsed since the full stop (Figure 99(a)), or the normal display will be maintained even after 60 seconds have elapsed since the full stop (Figure 100(a) or Figure 101(a)).
In contrast, when an unrecommended button sequence is used, the recommended image is displayed at the first stop, and the display switches to a demo screen after 3 seconds have elapsed since all buttons have stopped.

As mentioned above, Figures 99(b), 100(b), and 101(b) are limited to the advantageous period and non-AT mode. During the non-advantageous period (normal period), AT mode, and special game state, the recommended image will not be displayed even if the buttons are pressed in an irregular manner. Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated by an irregular press during the non-advantageous period (normal period), AT mode, or special game state, the result will be the same as in Figures 99(a), 100(a), and 101(a), respectively.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 99(a), when the recommended button sequence is followed (when no replay is awarded), a demo display is shown 60 seconds after all reels have stopped. However, there are cases where the demo display is not shown even when the recommended button sequence is followed, such as during a continuous performance or during a chance zone. Therefore, the example in Figure 99(a) does not necessarily mean that a demo display will always be shown 60 seconds after all reels have stopped.
Furthermore, even in situations where the demo display is not shown (situations where the menu is not displayed) when the recommended button sequence is followed, such as during the continuous performance or during the CZ mentioned above, if the recommended button sequence is followed, the demo display will be shown 3 seconds after all buttons have stopped.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 99(b), 100(b), and 101(b), the demo display and recommended image display are terminated and the system returns to the normal display during the start operation because, in this embodiment, the display content changes during the start operation (a new display command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80). On the other hand, if the system is configured to switch the display content during a bet operation, the system may return to the normal display during a bet operation. In this case, a new display command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 during a bet operation.
In any of the above approaches, the demo display and recommended image display will terminate when the displayed content matches the internal control state or thereafter, so as not to cause any discrepancy between the displayed content visible to the player and the internal control state.

Next, we will explain how to send the button press order instruction number and the performance group number.
The button-pressing instruction number is the number corresponding to the correct button-pressing sequence (the sequence that results in a high-scoring role) when a role with a favorable button-pressing sequence is won (a biased role in the fourth embodiment). When a role lottery is performed by the role lottery means 61 and a biased role is won, the button-pressing instruction number selection means 63 (Figure 1) selects the button-pressing instruction number corresponding to the winning biased role.
When there are six possible button presses for a biased role, the button press instruction numbers are:
Left, center, right: Correct answer: Press order instruction number "A1"
Correct answer: Left, right, and center: Press order instruction number "A2"
Middle, left, and right are correct: Press order instruction number "A3"
Middle, Right, Left - Correct answer: Press order instruction number "A4"
Right, left, center - correct answer: Press order instruction number "A5"
Right, center, left is the correct answer: Press order instruction number "A6"
One possible solution is to...
However, in the fourth embodiment, the correct button press order when a biased bell is won is an irregular press (four choices), so for example,
Middle, left, and right are correct: Press order instruction number "A1"
Middle, Right, Left - Correct answer: Press order instruction number "A2"
Right, left, center - correct answer: Press order instruction number "A3"
Right, center, left is the correct answer: Press order instruction number "A4"
That is also acceptable.
Furthermore, when a rare role is won, you can select any number from the above-mentioned button press instruction numbers "A1" to "A4". Alternatively, a button press instruction number indicating an irregular button press when a rare role is won may be provided.

When a biased combination is won during AT (a game in which instructions are given), the main control board 50 selects a push-button instruction number and displays push-button instruction information corresponding to the push-button instruction number on the acquired amount display LED 78 (instruction monitor). For example, when the push-button instruction number is "A1", the push-button instruction information displayed is "=1".
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 displays button press order information, it sends a command corresponding to the button press order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the button press order instruction number, it becomes capable of outputting information regarding the correct button press order. In other words, the command corresponding to the button press order instruction number sent by the main control board 50 is a command that can identify the correct button press order. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it displays the correct button press order as an image on the image display device 23.
In the fourth embodiment, the main control board 50 can only transmit the button press order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous period and during AT. Therefore, even if a button press order instruction number is selected by the button press order instruction number selection means 63 outside of the advantageous period and during AT, that button press order instruction number will not be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Note that outside of the advantageous period and during AT, it is not necessary to select a button press order instruction number.

On the other hand, the performance group number, as in the first embodiment, is a number corresponding to the winning number and is information that enables the sub-control board 80 to output a performance corresponding to the winning role.
The player selects a performance group number not only in games where they have won a prize, but also in games where they have not won a prize.
Furthermore, the performance group number selected in a game where a winning combination with a favorable button-pressing sequence is won is information indicating that a winning combination with a favorable button-pressing sequence has been won, and the performance group number is configured in such a way that the favorable button-pressing sequence cannot be identified from it alone.
The performance group number selection means 64 (Figure 1) selects a performance group number corresponding to the winning role and makes it available for transmission to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the performance group number, the sub-control board 80 can output a performance related to the winning role based on that information.

Here, the following is an example of how the main control board 50 transmits a performance group number to the sub-control board 80.
a) Example 1
For games other than those in which a biased role is won, a performance group number is selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In contrast, in games where a biased combination is won, the performance group number is not selected and is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. However, in games where a biased combination is won, the performance group number may be selected but not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
b) Example 2
Regardless of the outcome of the role lottery (including games in which a biased role was won), a performance group number is selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

The main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number corresponding to the winning role to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the winning role. However, since the sub-control board 80 can receive the performance group number, it can output the performance corresponding to the winning role based on the received performance group number. Furthermore, if the sub-control board 80 is specified not to receive the performance group number when a biased role is won, it can infer that the game has resulted in a biased role win if the performance group number is not received, thus effectively allowing it to identify games that have resulted in biased roles.
Even if the main control board 50 is specified not to transmit the performance group number when a biased role is won, during AT, it transmits the button press instruction number to the sub-control board 80 when a biased role is won. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can output a performance related to the correct button press order based on the received button press instruction number.

Furthermore, when a button-press sequence bell is won, the performance group number is uniformly transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
However, there is a concern that transmitting the performance group number to the sub-control board 80 when a biased role is won constitutes an instruction. This is because, since the game when a biased role is won has a unilaterally advantageous button-pressing sequence, the transmission of the performance group number corresponding to the winning of a biased role can be interpreted as the transmission of instruction information. Furthermore, if it is interpreted that instruction information is being transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, then the instruction monitor must be displayed, and the medals acquired in that game must be added to the instruction-inclusive role ratio (see the first embodiment).
Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, Example 1 described above is adopted, and the performance group number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 when a biased role is won. However, as described above, since the performance group number is not transmitted only when a biased role is won, the sub-control board 80 can infer that a biased role has been won in games where the performance group number has not been received.
In the example shown in Figure 92, the combined probability of winning a biased combination with a bet of "3" is "101/125," which is more than "1/2" (half of all games). By making the probability of winning biased combinations high in this way, there are more games where it is not necessary to transmit the performance group number, thus reducing the number of commands to be transmitted.
On the other hand, by increasing the combined probability of winning with biased roles, it becomes possible to lower the base payout during normal play and improve the payout performance of the AT (Automatic Trigger) mode, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, depending on the probability of winning a biased role and the expected number of medals won, there was a belief that if a performance group number is transmitted when a biased role is won, the order of pressing the buttons (also called the "stopping order") must be instructed (by lighting up the instruction monitor), and this should be included in the ratio of performances including the instructions.
However, at present, it is believed that it is possible to prevent the machine from sending a performance group number when a biased role is won, without instructing the player on the button press order (without lighting up the instruction monitor), and without including it in the instruction-inclusive role ratio, only if the following three conditions are met.
1) Under the condition that the pressing position is random (no "precise pressing"), the expected value for each pressing sequence (6 possibilities in the case of 3 reels) based on all possible winning combinations (including losing combinations) must be less than or equal to a specified number (number of bets; basically "3").
2) The order or position of button presses should not be suggested by the visuals or other means. For example, visuals that use colors that are only displayed when a biased combination is won may be considered suggestions of the button press order and may therefore be prohibited.
3) Under the condition that the player always uses a playing style that aims for high payouts (a playing style that ensures a low payout, such as a single-coin payout, even if the button press order is incorrect), the expected value for each button press order when winning a group of small payouts that include biased payouts and are assigned the same performance group number must all be below the specified number.
By configuring the system to satisfy the above 1) to 3), even if the performance group number is fraudulently obtained when a biased role is won, the expected number of medals obtained when pressing the buttons irregularly will be less than or equal to the specified number, thus preventing fraudulent increases in medal count. Here, "when a group of minor roles is won" means "when any of the minor roles included in the group of minor roles is won."

The above points will be explained in more detail with reference to Figure 92(a).
First, in the following explanation,
The button press order "left, middle, right" is designated as "Press Order 1".
The order of pressing "left, right, middle" is referred to as "pressing order 2".
The button press order "middle left left" is designated as "button press order 3".
The button press sequence "middle, right, left" is designated as "button press sequence 4".
The button press sequence "Right, Left, Middle" is designated as "Pressing Sequence 5".
The button sequence "Right, Middle, Left" is designated as "Button Sequence 6".
(See Figure 92(a)).
Also,
The expected number of medals obtained for button press order 1 based on all roles is defined as "E1".
The expected number of medals obtained for the second button press based on all roles is defined as "E2".
The expected number of medals obtained with a button press sequence of 3, based on all roles, is defined as "E3".
The expected number of medals obtained with a button press sequence of 4 based on all roles is defined as "E4".
The expected number of medals obtained for a button press sequence of 5, based on all roles, is defined as "E5".
Let "E6" be the expected number of medals obtained when pressing button 6 based on all possible roles.
At this time,
E1 = Σ{(Number of coins obtained when pressing button 1 for each winning combination) × (Probability of winning each winning combination)}
E2 = Σ{(Number of coins obtained when operating with button press order 2 for each winning combination) × (Winning probability for each winning combination)}
E3 = Σ{(Number of coins obtained when operating with button press order 3 for each winning combination) × (Probability of winning each winning combination)}
E4 = Σ{(Number of coins obtained when operating with the button sequence 4 for each winning combination) × (Probability of winning each winning combination)}
E5 = Σ{(Number of coins obtained when operating with the button sequence 5 for each winning combination) × (Probability of winning each winning combination)}
E6 = Σ{(Number of coins obtained when operating with the button sequence 6 for each winning combination) × (Probability of winning each winning combination)}
That is the case.
and,
The conditions in 1) above are that E1 ≤ specified number, E2 ≤ specified number, E3 ≤ specified number, E4 ≤ specified number, E5 ≤ specified number, and E6 ≤ specified number.

There is a view that if the expected number of medals obtained based on all winning combinations when the stop switch 42 is operated in a predetermined sequence is 0.1 or more medals greater than the expected number of medals obtained based on all winning combinations when the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific sequence different from the predetermined sequence, then the predetermined sequence is considered unilaterally advantageous, and the specific sequence is considered unilaterally disadvantageous.
Furthermore, if the expected number of medals obtained based on all possible combinations differs for each button press sequence, each sequence is classified as either unilaterally advantageous or unilaterally disadvantageous.
In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the expected number of medals obtained based on all winning combinations when playing the game using the standard pressing order ("Pressing Order 1" and "Pressing Order 2") is "1.289" medals, and the expected number of medals obtained based on all winning combinations when playing the game using the irregular pressing order ("Pressing Order 3" to "Pressing Order 6") is "2.177" medals.
2.177 - 1.289 = 0.888 > 0.1
Therefore, "Push Order 1" and "Push Order 2" are unilaterally disadvantageous push orders, while "Push Order 3" through "Push Order 6" are unilaterally advantageous push orders.

In actual gaming machines, for example, there are specifications that result in a strictly different expected number of medals won based on all possible combinations when comparing "button order 3" with "button order 4" through "button order 6" (which are unilaterally advantageous button orders).
Specifically, for example, if the machine is designed so that pressing "button 3" can result in drawing symbols related to special roles (bonus roles), but pressing "button 4" through "button 6" does not, then when pressing "button 3," a special role may be won and the payout may be "0" coins. On the other hand, when pressing "button 4" through "button 6," a special role may not be won, and a minor role that has been won multiple times (for example, a 1-coin role) may be won, resulting in a payout of "1" coin.
In such cases, the expected number of medals earned based on all possible combinations will differ between "Push Order 3" and "Push Order 4" through "Push Order 6". Therefore, if the difference in this expected value is 0.01 or less, they are considered to be the same "unilaterally advantageous push order".
In other words, in this example, if the difference between "E3" and "E4" to "E6" is 0.01 or less, there is no advantageous or disadvantageous relationship between "Push Order 3" and "Push Order 4" to "Push Order 6".

Here,
E1 = E2 = A
E3 = B
E4=E5=E6=C
as,
B - A ≥ 0.1
C - A ≥ 0.1
0 < C - B ≤ 0.01
In this case, "Push Order 3" and "Push Order 4" through "Push Order 6" are uniformly considered to be "unilaterally advantageous push orders" compared to "Push Order 1" and "Push Order 2". Here, we have explained using the example of when the expected number of medals obtained based on all winning combinations differs among unilaterally advantageous push orders, but the same applies when the expected number of medals obtained based on all winning combinations differs among unilaterally disadvantageous push orders. In this case, if the difference in the expected number of medals obtained based on all winning combinations among unilaterally disadvantageous push orders is 0.01 or less, they are uniformly considered to be "unilaterally disadvantageous push orders".
As described above, even if two button-pressing sequences are unilaterally advantageous (or disadvantageous), the expected number of medals obtained based on all possible winning combinations may differ. Therefore, whether or not the condition in 1) above is met is determined not by "expected value of pressing in order and expected value of pressing in an irregular order ≤ specified number," but by "expected number of medals obtained for each button-pressing sequence based on all possible winning combinations ≤ specified number."
For similar reasons, when determining whether the conditions in 3) above are met, the expected number of medals obtained for each button press sequence when a group of small wins assigned the same performance group number is calculated.

To determine whether the conditions in 3) above are met, when calculating the expected number of medals obtained for each button press sequence, always aim for a higher value. For example, when winning a biased bell combination (1 to 4), if you play using "Press Sequence 1" or "Press Sequence 2," you will always obtain a 2-coin payout.

<Examples where instructions on the order of pressing buttons are required and included in the payout ratio including the instructions>
Let's assume there are two groups of small wins that are assigned the same performance group number, including biased wins: Group A, consisting of biased bells 1 to 4, and Group B, consisting of rare wins A and rare wins B.
Here, the ratio of the number of small wins in group A is:
Biased Bell 1: Biased Bell 2: Biased Bell 3: Biased Bell 4
= 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/5
= 1:1:1:1
Therefore,
The probability of winning a biased bell 1 when winning a small win group A = The probability of winning a biased bell 2 when winning a small win group A = The probability of winning a biased bell 3 when winning a small win group A = The probability of winning a biased bell 4 when winning a small win group A = 1/4
This is the result.

Therefore, if we denote the expected number of medals obtained for button press sequences 1 through 6 when winning the minor role group A as E1(A) through E6(A),
E1(A)=2×1/4×4=2
E2(A)=2×1/4×4=2
E3(A)=7×1/4+1×1/4×3=2.5
E4(A)=7×1/4+1×1/4×3=2.5
E5(A)=7×1/4+1×1/4×3=2.5
E6(A)=7×1/4+1×1/4×3=2.5
Therefore, since all of E1(A) to E6(A) are less than or equal to the specified number (in this case, "3"), the condition in 3) above is satisfied.
On the other hand, the ratio of the number of small wins in small win group B is,
Rare role A: Rare role B
= 1/250 : 1/250
= 1:1
Therefore,
The probability of winning rare role A when winning minor role group B = The probability of winning rare role B when winning minor role group B = 1/2
This is the result.

Here, if we denote the expected number of medals obtained for button press order 1 to 6 when winning the minor role group B as E1(B) to E6(B),
E1(B)=1×1/2×2=1
E2(B)=1×1/2×2=1
E3(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E4(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E5(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E6(B)=12×1/2×2=12
As a result, E3(B) to E6(B) become larger than the specified number (in this case, "3").
Therefore, in this example, when transmitting the performance group numbers for minor role group A and minor role group B, if minor role group A is won, no button press order instructions are given and it is not included in the instruction-inclusive prize ratio, but if minor role group B is won, button press order instructions are given and it is necessary to include it in the instruction-inclusive prize ratio.

<Example where the order of button presses is not specified and the result is not included in the ratio of bonus items with instructions>
Let me give you another example to illustrate this point.
In Figure 92(a), let's assume there is a group of small wins C (biased win group) that includes biased wins and is assigned the same performance group number, consisting of biased bells 1 to 4, rare win A, and rare win B. The ratio of the number of small wins in this group C is:
Biased Bell 1: Biased Bell 2: Biased Bell 3: Biased Bell 4: Rare Role A: Rare Role B
= 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/250: 1/250
= 50:50:50:50:1:1
This is the result.
As a result,
The probability of winning a biased bell 1 when winning a small win group C = The probability of winning a biased bell 2 when winning a small win group C = The probability of winning a biased bell 3 when winning a small win group C = The probability of winning a biased bell 4 when winning a small win group C = 50/202
And so,
The probability of winning rare role A when winning minor role group C = The probability of winning rare role B when winning minor role group C = 1/202
This is the result.

Therefore, if we denote the expected number of medals obtained for button press order 1 to 6 when winning the minor role group C as E1(C) to E6(C),
E1(C)=2×50/202×4+1×1/202×2≒1.990
E2(C)=2×50/202×4+1×1/202×2≒1.990
E3(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
E4(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
E5(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
E6(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≒2.594
Therefore, when the small role group C is won, the expected number of medals obtained is less than or equal to the specified number (in this case, "3") for all button presses, and the condition of 3) above is met, in addition to this, if the conditions of 1) and 2) above are also met, even when transmitting the performance group number of the small role group C, instructions for the button presses may not be given and it may not be included in the ratio of instructed prizes.
Thus, the condition in 3) above is that the expected number of medals won when a group of small wins, including biased roles, are assigned the same performance group number, is less than or equal to a specified number for all button press sequences.

Figure 102 is a flowchart showing the main process in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 67 in the second embodiment. In Figure 102, the step numbers of different processes are underlined compared to Figure 67.
In the main process shown in Figure 102, after the role lottery process is executed in step S282, the push order instruction number is set in step S181 based on the result of this role lottery, and the performance group number is set in the next step S182. The rest of the process is the same as in Figure 67.
Furthermore, in step S283, a lottery for transitioning to a favorable section is performed during a non-favorable section, and an AT lottery is performed when the game is in a favorable section but not in AT mode. In addition, during AT mode, lotteries for AT bonuses and AT continuation are performed. However, if the number of bets for this game is "2", the above lotteries are not performed.

Figure 103 is a flowchart showing the button press sequence instruction number setting process in step S181 in Figure 102.
In Figure 103, in step S191, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is in a favorable period. Here, for example, in Figure 54 (second embodiment), this is done by determining the value of the favorable period type flag at address "F061(H)". If it is determined that it is in a favorable period, the process proceeds to step S192; if it is determined that it is not in a favorable period, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In the next step, S192, the condition device number for the current game (the small role and replay condition device number) is obtained. When the role lottery process is executed in step S282 in Figure 102, a condition device number corresponding to the winning number is generated and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, so this information is obtained.

Next, in step S193, it is determined whether or not a biased combination was won in this game. This is done by determining whether or not the condition device number obtained in step S192 corresponds to the condition device number for a biased combination. If it is determined that a biased combination was won, the process proceeds to step S194; if it is determined that a biased combination was not won, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S194, the main control board 50 determines whether the game being played is one in which button press order instructions are displayed on the instruction monitor. If it determines that the game is one in which button press order instructions are displayed, the process proceeds to step S195. If it determines that the game is not one in which button press order instructions are displayed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S195, the button press sequence instruction number is obtained. This process identifies the button press sequence instruction number corresponding to the condition device number obtained in step S192. Next, the process proceeds to step S196, where the obtained button press sequence instruction number is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53.
In the next step, S197, the button press order instruction number is stored in the acquired count data of the RWM 53. This storage area corresponds, for example, to address "F011(H)" in Figure 54 (second embodiment). Once the button press order instruction number is stored in the acquired count data, in the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 68) LED display control (step S2821, Figure 71), the button press order instruction information corresponding to the button press order instruction number stored in the acquired count data is displayed.
Then, the process proceeds to step S198, where a request for output of the button press sequence number is set, and in the next step S199, control command set 1 is performed. These processes are for setting control command data to send the button press sequence number to the sub-control board 80. Then the process according to this flowchart is completed.
As described above, in a game where a biased role is won and the button-pressing instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor, the button-pressing instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Figure 104 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the performance group number in step S182 in Figure 102. Note that in this example, when a biased role is won in a game, the performance group number is not selected and is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
In Figure 104, step S201 retrieves the condition device number for the current game. This process is the same as step S192 in Figure 103 described above. In the next step, S202, it is determined whether or not a biased combination was won in the current game. This process is the same as step S193 in Figure 103 described above. If it is determined that a biased combination was won, the process according to this flowchart ends; if it is determined that a biased combination was not won, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, the main control board 50 obtains the performance group number corresponding to the condition device number for the current game, based on the condition device number obtained in step S201. Next, the process proceeds to step S204, where the obtained performance group number is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53.
Then, the process proceeds to step S205, where a request to output the performance group number is set, and in the next step S206, control command set 1 is performed. These processes are for setting control command data to send the performance group number to the sub-control board 80. Then the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Based on the above, in this example, when a biased role is won, the performance group number is not saved and is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. On the other hand, in cases other than when a biased role is won (i.e., including when no role is won), the performance group number is saved and transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, the flow in Figure 104 is executed regardless of whether it is a non-advantageous or advantageous period.
In this example, the process of saving the performance group number is not executed when a biased role is won, so it is not necessary to set up a performance group number corresponding to the win of a biased role. Alternatively, a performance group number corresponding to the win of a biased role may be prepared, and when a biased role is won, the performance group number corresponding to the win of the biased role is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, but the performance group number may not be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
However, as mentioned above, if we adopt the interpretation that transmitting the performance group number to the sub-control board 80 does not constitute an instruction when the expected number of medals to be acquired per game is 3 or less, then it is also possible to select the performance group number corresponding to the winning of a biased role when a biased role is won and transmit it to the sub-control board 80. In this case, the processing in step S202 is unnecessary.

Figure 105 is a diagram showing the relationship between the winning role (biased role), the instruction monitor, and the image display in the fourth embodiment.
When a biased role is won during a non-advantageous period, the instruction monitor will not be displayed. In particular, the instruction monitor will not be displayed when a rare role is won. This is because the AT lottery is not performed even if a rare role is won during a non-advantageous period. Also, since the instruction monitor is not displayed, no images related to the button press order will be displayed.
On the other hand, during the advantageous period, the display on the instruction monitor and other elements differ depending on whether it is a non-AT or AT machine.
Even if you win a biased bell during a favorable period or when not in AT mode, the instruction monitor will remain off. Furthermore, no images related to the button press order will be displayed.
In contrast, during a game in the advantageous period and while in AT mode, if a biased bell is won, the instruction monitor is turned on and push-button instruction information corresponding to the won biased bell is displayed. Furthermore, the correct push-button sequence is displayed on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, when a rare role is won during a favorable period and outside of AT, the instruction monitor is turned on and push order instruction information corresponding to a normal push is displayed. In addition, the image display device 23 displays "1--" as the correct push order, indicating that the left button is stopped first. Here, when a rare role is won, operating the stop switch 42 with an irregular push will result in a higher expected number of medals to be won in that game than with a normal push. However, the total payout is more advantageous with a normal push (Figure 92(b)), so even when outside of AT, the system notifies the player of a normal push that corresponds to the advantageous push order.
Furthermore, when a rare role is won during the advantageous period and AT, the instruction monitor is turned on and push order instruction information corresponding to an irregular push is displayed. Since AT lottery is not performed during AT, an irregular push that has a high expected value of medal acquisition in that game is displayed. In addition, the image display device 23 displays the irregular push as the correct push order. Therefore, when a rare role is won during the advantageous period, the instruction monitor is displayed and the correct push order is displayed on the image display device 23, regardless of whether it is a non-AT or AT state, but the displayed push order will differ.

Therefore, in step S194 of Figure 103, if a biased bell is won during non-AT mode, the result is judged as "No," but if a rare role is won during non-AT mode, the result is judged as "Yes." Furthermore, if a biased bell or rare role is won during AT mode, the result is judged as "Yes."
Furthermore, if a rare role is won and "Yes" is determined in step S194, and the player proceeds to step S195, a button press instruction number corresponding to a normal press is obtained if the player is not in AT mode, and a button press instruction number corresponding to an irregular press is obtained if the player is in AT mode.

Next, the temporary saving process in the fourth embodiment will be described. Below, two methods (temporary saving process 1 and temporary saving process 2) will be described. Note that both the non-CZ and CZ (a game state with a higher probability of winning the AT than the non-CZ) described below are advantageous periods.
1. Method 1 (Temporary Preservation Process 1)
In the fourth embodiment, as shown in Figure 102, when the start switch 41 is operated, a role lottery process (step S282) is performed, and further, as shown in step S283, a lottery related to AT is performed. The lottery related to AT includes a lottery related to CZ. Furthermore, the lottery related to AT is not limited to one, and usually multiple types of lotteries are performed.
The lottery related to AT may be referred to as "lottery related to instructions,""lottery related to payout performance," etc.

In the fourth embodiment, the lottery for AT during non-CZ is as follows:
The following will be performed: 1) AT lottery, 2) CZ lottery, and 3) Stage lottery. The probability of winning the CZ or AT will differ depending on the stage (e.g., low probability or high probability of winning).
Furthermore, as a lottery related to AT during CZ,
4) AT lottery 5) CZ counter 1 lottery 6) CZ counter 2 lottery will be performed.
In the fourth embodiment, points are awarded to the player during the CZ, and the AT lottery is given preferential treatment or the AT is decided according to the accumulated points. The lottery of CZ counter 1 is a lottery for the number of points to be awarded during the CZ.
Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the initial number of games played in the CZ is set to a predetermined value, and a lottery is held for the CZ counter 2 to determine whether or not to add to the number of games played in the CZ during the CZ.

In the fourth embodiment, after performing the lottery related to the AT as described above, the lottery result is temporarily stored, and when the conditions for permanent storage are met, the temporarily stored information is permanently stored.
Furthermore, as a temporary storage means, temporary storage area 1, temporary storage area 2, and temporary storage area 3 are provided in the storage area of the RWM 53.
Then, when the above-mentioned lotteries 1) to 3) are performed during a non-CZ (Chance Zone), the results of each of these lotteries are stored in temporary memory area 1, temporary memory area 2, and temporary memory area 3, respectively.
On the other hand, when the aforementioned lotteries 4) to 6) are performed during the CZ, the results of each of these lotteries are stored in temporary memory area 1, temporary memory area 2, and temporary memory area 3, respectively.
In other words, temporary memory area 1, temporary memory area 2, and temporary memory area 3 store different lottery results depending on whether the player is not in a CZ (Chance Zone) or is in a CZ.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits the information stored in temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving this information, the sub-control board 80 enables the output of the corresponding visual effects.
In this case, the sub-control board 80 cannot determine which information is being transmitted simply by the information stored in temporary storage areas 1 to 3.
On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 can determine whether the current game state is outside of the CZ (Chance Zone) or in the CZ, based on other commands transmitted from the main control board 50.
Therefore, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the received information is an AT lottery result, CZ lottery result, or stage lottery result when not in a CZ, or an AT lottery result, CZ counter 1 lottery result, or CZ counter 2 lottery result when in a CZ, based on whether or not it is in a CZ and the information stored in temporary storage areas 1 to 3, and outputs a performance corresponding to each lottery result.

Furthermore, the main memory area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is as follows:
1) This memory area (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 1") stores the AT lottery results.
2) This memory area (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 2") stores the results of the CZ lottery.
3) This memory area (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 3") stores the stage lottery results.
4) This memory area (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 4") stores the lottery result of CZ counter 1.
5) This memory area (hereinafter referred to as "this memory area 5") stores the lottery result of CZ counter 2.
Each of these is provided.
In the fourth embodiment, when a biased role is won, the above lottery 1) to 3) or 4) to 6) is executed, and if the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order, the lottery result is reflected, and if the stop switch 42 is operated in an unrecommended order, the lottery result is cleared (discarded) (not reflected).

Figures 106 and 107 are flowcharts of the temporary save process 1 described above. Figure 107 is a flowchart following Figure 106. Note that in the flowcharts of Figures 106 and 107, it is assumed that the game is in a favorable period and not in an AT (a state in which AT is drawn).
In Figure 106, in step S312, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S313. Note that when it is determined in step S312 that the start switch 41 has been operated, a role lottery is performed, but this process is omitted in this flowchart.
In the next step, S313, the main control board 50 determines whether the game is currently in a CZ (Chance Zone). If it is determined that the game is not in a CZ, the process proceeds to step S314; if it is determined that the game is in a CZ, the process proceeds to step S320.
In the example shown in Figure 54 (second embodiment), an AT flag is provided. In addition to this AT flag, a CZ flag is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 to determine whether the current game state is a CZ (not shown in Figure 54). Based on the value of this CZ flag, it is determined whether the current game is in a CZ state.

In step S314, the main control board 50 draws a lottery to determine whether or not to execute AT. Then, the process proceeds to step S315, where the result of the lottery in step S314 is saved to the temporary storage area 1 (temporary save).
In the next step, S316, the main control board 50 draws a lottery to determine whether or not to execute CZ. Then, it proceeds to step S317, where the result of the lottery in step S316 is saved to the temporary storage area 2 (temporary save).
In the next step S318, the main control board 50 performs a stage lottery. In this fourth embodiment, there are multiple stages with different probability of winning a CZ or AT during the advantageous period and when AT is not active, and a lottery is performed to determine which stage to stay in based on the result of the role lottery. For example, there are stages with a low probability of winning an AT, stages with a high probability of winning an AT, stages with a high probability of winning a CZ, etc.
Next, the process proceeds to step S319, where the lottery result from step S318 is saved to the temporary storage area 3 (temporary save). Then the process proceeds to step S326.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S313 that the game is in a CZ (Chance Zone) and the process proceeds to step S320, the main control board 50 performs an AT (Automatic Transmission) lottery. This lottery is the same as the lottery in step S314. The process then proceeds to step S321, where the lottery result from step S320 is saved to the temporary storage area 1 (temporary save). This process is also the same as in step S315.

In the next step, S322, the main control board 50 performs a CZ counter 1 lottery. Next, the process proceeds to step S323, where the lottery result from step S322 is saved to the temporary storage area 2 (temporary save).
In the next step, S324, the main control board 50 performs a CZ counter 2 lottery. Next, the process proceeds to step S325, where the lottery result from step S324 is saved to the temporary storage area 3 (temporary save). Then the process proceeds to step S326.

In step S326, the main control board 50 transmits the information from the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub-control board 80. This process executes the control command set 1 and other commands described above.
As described above, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery related to the AT is performed and stored in the temporary memory areas 1 to 3, and the lottery result is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Based on this information, the sub-control board 80 can output the effects at the start of the game (before the stop switch 42 is operated).
Next, the process proceeds to step S327, where the main control board 50 determines whether the first stop switch 42 has been operated. If it determines that the first stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S328. In step S328, the button press sequence information is updated.

In this fourth embodiment, the button press sequence information is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53. The button press sequence information is a 1-byte data consisting of "aabbcc00(B)",
"aa": The value of the first (first operated) stop switch 42. "bb": The value of the second (second operated) stop switch 42. "cc": The value of the third (third operated) stop switch 42.
moreover,
Value corresponding to left stop switch 42: 01 (B)
Value corresponding to the middle stop switch 42: 10 (B)
Value corresponding to the right stop switch 42: 11 (B)
Let's assume that.
Therefore, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of left, middle, and right, the button press sequence information is:
01000000 (B): When stopping first on the left ↓
01100000 (B): When the second middle stop ↓
The following information is updated in order: 01101100 (B): Right third stop.
Therefore, in step S228, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the button press sequence information is updated to "01000000 (B)". Alternatively, for example, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated first, the button press sequence information is updated to "10000000 (B)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S329, where the main control board 50 determines whether the stop switch 42 was operated in the recommended sequence (forward pressing). This determination is made based on the above-mentioned sequence information. Here, the definition data for determining whether the stop switch 42 was operated in the recommended sequence (forward pressing) is "01000000(B)". This definition data is the same value as the sequence information when the left stop switch 42 was first operated.
Then, the value of the definition data is subtracted from the value of the button press order information updated in step S328 to determine whether the result is "0". If the subtraction result is "0", it is determined that the left stop switch 42 was operated first.
Furthermore, it is not limited to subtraction; it is sufficient to determine whether the button press order information updated in step S328 and the value of the definition data are the same. Therefore, an exclusive OR (XOR) operation is performed on the button press order information and the definition data, and if the result of the operation is "0", it can be determined that the two are the same value.

for example,
Button press sequence information: 01000000 (B) (The left stop switch 42 is operated first)
Definition data: 01000000 (B)
In this case, performing an "XOR" operation on both results in "00000000(B)". Since the result of the operation is "0", it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 is the left stop switch 42.
on the other hand,
Button press sequence information: 10000000 (B) (The middle stop switch 42 is operated first)
Definition data: 01000000 (B)
In that case, performing an "XOR" operation on both results in "11000000 (B)". Since the result of the operation is not "0", it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 is not the left stop switch 42.

If it is determined in step S329 that the button press sequence is the recommended sequence, proceed to step S331 in Figure 107; otherwise, proceed to step S330.
In step S330, the main control board 50 transmits first stop information to the sub-control board 80 and proceeds to the next step S331. The information transmitted here corresponds to the fact that the operation was performed using a non-recommended button sequence. On the other hand, the main control board 50 does not transmit first stop information to the sub-control board 80 when the operation is performed using a recommended button sequence. When the sub-control board 80 receives first stop information, it can determine that the operation was performed using a non-recommended button sequence and controls the system to display the recommended image.

In step S331, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the second stop switch 42 has been operated. If it determines that the second stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S332.
In step S332, the main control board 50 updates the button press sequence information. For example, when the first stop switch 42 is pressed to the left, the button press sequence information is "01000000 (B)". Therefore, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated next, the button press sequence information is updated to "01100000 (B)".
On the other hand, for example, when the first stop switch 42 is in the middle position, the button press sequence information is "10000000 (B)". Therefore, when the right stop switch 42 is operated next, the button press sequence information is updated to "10110000 (B)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S333, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not the third stop switch 42 has been operated. If it determines that the third stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S334.
In step S334, the main control board 50 updates the button press sequence information. For example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of left, middle, and right, the button press sequence information is updated from "01100000(B)" to "01101100(B)".
On the other hand, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of middle, right, left, for example, the button press order information is updated from "10110000 (B)" to "10110100 (B)".

Next, the process proceeds to step S335, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not a biased combination was won in the current game. As explained in the first embodiment, when a combination is drawn, the result is stored in the "minor combination and replay condition device number" provided in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, so this data is read to determine whether or not any biased combination was won.
If it is determined in step S335 that a biased combination has been won, proceed to step S336; otherwise, proceed to step S345.

In step S336, the main control board 50 generates a first stop reel identification flag. Here, the "first stop reel identification flag" is a flag used to determine which reel 31 is the first stop reel 31 (synonymous with the first stop switch 42), and also a flag used to determine whether the stop switch 42 was operated in the recommended sequence. The sequence information updated at step S328 only stores information for the first stop switch 42, so it is immediately possible to determine which stop switch 42 is the first stop switch 42 (i.e., the first reel 31). In contrast, the sequence information updated at step S334 includes information for all three stop switches 42, so it is not possible to determine which stop switch 42 is the first stop switch 42 without calculation. Therefore, a first stop reel identification flag is generated to determine which reel 31 is the first stop reel 31.

In order to generate the flag for the first stop reel, the values of the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 should be masked from the push order information updated at step S334.
For example, if the masking data is set to "11000000 (B)", the first stop reel specific flag "aa000000 (B)" is generated by performing a logical AND operation on the button press order information "aabbcc00 (B)" and the masking data "11000000 (B)".
In the next step, S337, the main control board 50 determines whether the current gameplay sequence is the recommended sequence. This determination is the same as in step S329. The first stop reel specific flag "aa000000(B)" generated in step S336 and the definition data "01000000(B)" are subjected to an "XOR" operation. If the result of the operation is "0", it is determined to be the recommended sequence; otherwise, it is determined not to be the recommended sequence.

If it is determined in step S337 that the button press sequence is the recommended sequence, proceed to step S338; otherwise, proceed to step S345.
In step S338, the main control board 50 determines whether the current game is in a CZ (Chance Zone). If it determines that the game is not in a CZ, it proceeds to step S339. If it determines that the game is in a CZ, it proceeds to step S342.
In step S339, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the main storage area 1 (main storage).
In the next step S340, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 2 in the main storage area 2 (main storage).
In the next step S341, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 3 in the main storage area 3 (main storage).
Then proceed to step S345.

In contrast, if it is determined in step S338 that the CZ is in progress and the process proceeds to step S342, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the main storage area 1 (main storage).
In the next step S343, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 2 in the main storage area 4 (main storage).
In the next step S344, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 3 in the main storage area 5 (main storage).
Then proceed to step S345.

In step S345, the main control board 50 transmits the information stored in memory areas 1-3, or memory areas 1, 4, and 5, to the sub-control board 80. As a result, in games where a biased win occurs and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended sequence, the updated information in the memory areas is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game. Conversely, if a biased win occurs but the stop switch 42 is not operated in the recommended sequence, the information in the memory areas is not updated, and the same information transmitted in the previous game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 determines what the transmitted information is by looking at the information in the main memory areas 1 to 3 or main memory areas 1, 4, and 5 and determining whether or not it is during a CZ (Chance Zone), and controls the output of the performance based on the result.
Next, the process proceeds to step S346, where the main control board 50 clears the temporary memory areas 1 to 3 (setting them to "0"). In the next step S347, the main control board 50 clears the button press order information (setting it to "0"). In the following step S348, the main control board 50 clears the first stop reel identification flag (setting it to "0"). This completes the process according to this flowchart.

Figure 108 is a flowchart showing another example of the temporary save process 1 in Figure 107. In Figure 108, step numbers that differ from the process in Figure 107 are underlined.
Although not shown in Figures 107 and 108, the determination of whether or not the button press sequence is the recommended sequence is performed multiple times (for example, about 5 times) after the processing in step S337. If the "XOR" operation between the first stop reel specific flag and the definition data is performed each time, as shown in step S337, the program capacity will increase. Therefore, after the determination process in step S337, if the button press sequence is the recommended sequence, the program proceeds to step S351 to store "0" as the irregular game determination data, and if it is not the recommended sequence, the program proceeds to step S352 to store "1" as the irregular game determination data. Then, the determination of whether or not the button press sequence is the recommended sequence after step S337 is made by checking whether or not the irregular game determination data is "0". For example, if "1" is subtracted from the irregular game determination data and the zero flag becomes "1", it is possible to determine that the irregular game determination data (before subtraction) was "1" (not the recommended button press sequence).
This simplifies and speeds up the process of determining whether or not the recommended button sequence is being followed.
Furthermore, at the end of this process, step S353 executes a process to clear the irregular game judgment data (set it to "0").

2. Second method (Provisional preservation process 2)
In this example, during the advantageous period and when not in AT mode, three types of count values A, B, and C are drawn as part of the AT-related lottery. The result of each count value lottery is then added to the count value up to the previous game for each game played.
For example, the count values A, B, and C up to the last game are,
Count value A = X
Count value B = Y
Count value C = Z
And,
The results of the draws for count values A, B, and C in this game were as follows:
Count value A = a
Count value B = b
Count value C = c
In this case, when the count values A, B, and C in the game are updated,
Count value A = X + a
Count value B = Y + b
Count value C = Z + c
This is the result.

For example, when count value A reaches a first value, an AT lottery is performed; when count value B reaches a second value, it is decided to perform an AT; and when count value C reaches a third value, the game transitions to a CZ (Chance Zone).
Furthermore, the results of the count value lottery during this game will only be reflected (addition of each count value) when a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order. In all other cases, the results of the count value lottery during this game will not be reflected.
Furthermore, unlike the first method described above, in the second method, the temporary memory area and the main memory area correspond one-to-one. Therefore,
Temporary memory area 1 and main memory area 1 for storing count value A
Temporary memory area 2 and main memory area 2 for storing the count value B
Temporary storage area 3 and main storage area 3 for storing the count value C
It is equipped with.
Here, we illustrate the three types of temporary and permanent memory areas described above, but in reality, many more count values are randomly selected, and temporary and permanent memory areas are provided to store those count values. Therefore, in reality,
Temporary storage area 4 and main storage area 4 for storing the count value D
Temporary storage area 5 and main storage area 5 for storing the count value E
:
It is equipped with.

Figures 109 and 110 are flowcharts of the temporary save process 2 described above. Figure 110 is a flowchart following Figure 109.
In Figure 109, in step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S363. When the start switch 41 is operated, the role lottery process is executed.
In step S363, the main control board 50 copies the value (count value A) from the main memory area 1 to the temporary memory area 1. In the next step S364, the main control board 50 copies the value (count value B) from the main memory area 2 to the temporary memory area 2. In the next step S365, the main control board 50 copies the value (count value C) from the main memory area 3 to the temporary memory area 3.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the value of the temporary storage area "N" (N=1, 2, 3) and the value of the main storage area "N" become the same.

In the next step, S366, the main control board 50 performs a lottery for count value A. This lottery for count value A, as well as the lotteries for count value B and count value C described later, are performed based on the result of the role lottery.
In the next step S367, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result of count value A to the temporary storage area 1. For example, if the lottery result of count value A is "a" and the value in temporary storage area 1 up to that point is "X", the value in temporary storage area 1 is updated to "X + a".
In the next step S368, the main control board 50 performs a lottery for count value B. Next, proceeding to step S369, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result for count value B to the temporary storage area 2.
In the next step S370, the main control board 50 performs a lottery for the count value C. Next, proceeding to step S371, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result for the count value C to the temporary storage area 3.

Next, the process proceeds to step S372, in which the main control board 50 transmits the information from the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub-control board 80. This process executes the control command set 1 and other commands described above.
As described above, when the start switch 41 is operated, the lottery results for count values A to C are transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Based on this information, the sub-control board 80 can output the effects for when the game starts (before the stop switch 42 is operated).
Next, the process proceeds to step S373, where the main control board 50 determines whether the first stop switch 42 has been operated. If it determines that the first stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S374. In step S374, similar to the temporary storage process 1 described above, the push order information ("aa000000(B)") corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is stored.

Next, the process proceeds to step S375 in Figure 110, where the main control board 50 determines whether the stop switch 42 was operated in the recommended order (whether the left stop switch 42 was operated first). This determination is made based on the above-mentioned order information. Similar to the temporary save process 1, this process subtracts the value of the definition data from the value of the order information and determines whether the result is "0".
If it is determined in step S375 that the button press sequence is the recommended sequence, proceed to step S377; otherwise, proceed to step S376.
In step S376, the main control board 50 transmits first stop information to the sub-control board 80 and proceeds to step S377. The information transmitted here corresponds to the fact that the operation was performed using a non-recommended button sequence. When the sub-control board 80 receives the first stop information, it can determine that the operation was performed using a non-recommended button sequence, and controls the system to display the recommended image.

In step S377, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the second stop switch 42 has been operated. If it determines that the second stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S378.
In step S378, the main control board 50 updates the button press sequence information corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42.
Next, the process proceeds to step S379, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not the third stop switch 42 has been operated. If it determines that the third stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S380.
In step S380, the main control board 50 updates the button press sequence information corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch 42.
Next, the process proceeds to step S381, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not a biased combination was won in the current game. As described above, it determines whether or not any biased combination was won based on the "small combination and replay condition device number" stored in the RWM 53.
If it is determined in step S381 that a biased combination has been won, proceed to step S382; otherwise, proceed to step S387.

In step S382, the main control board 50 generates a first stop reel identification flag. The first stop reel identification flag is generated by performing a logical AND operation on the button press order information updated in step S380 and the masking data, similar to the temporary storage process 1, thereby generating the first stop reel identification flag "aa000000(B)".
In the next step S383, the main control board 50 determines whether the current button press sequence is the recommended sequence. It performs an XOR operation on the first stop reel specific flag "aa000000 (B)" and the definition data "01000000 (B)". If the result of the operation is "0", it is determined to be the recommended sequence; otherwise, it is determined not to be the recommended sequence.
If it is determined that the button press sequence is the recommended sequence, proceed to step S384; if it is determined that the button press sequence is not the recommended sequence, proceed to step S387.
In step S384, the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the values stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the main storage area 1.
In the next step, S385, the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the values stored in the temporary storage area 2 into the main storage area 2.
In the next step, S386, the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the values stored in the temporary storage area 3 in the main storage area 3.
Then, proceed to step S387.

In step S387, the main control board 50 transmits the values stored in the main memory areas 1 to 3 to the sub-control board 80. As a result, in games where a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order, the updated values stored in the main memory areas are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game. On the other hand, in games where a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is not operated in the recommended order, the information stored in the main memory areas is not updated, so the same information as the information transmitted in the main memory areas during the previous game is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Next, the process proceeds to step S388, where the main control board 50 clears the temporary memory areas 1 to 3 (set them to "0"). In the next step S389, the main control board 50 clears the button press order information (set it to "0"). In the following step S390, the main control board 50 clears the first stop reel identification flag (set it to "0"). The process according to this flowchart then ends.

According to the above provisional save processing 1 and provisional save processing 2, the lottery results when the start switch 41 is operated can be sent to the sub-control board 80 before it is determined whether or not the recommended button press order is followed. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can execute the game start animation based on these lottery results.
However, it is necessary to provide a temporary storage area.
Furthermore, after all reels have stopped, it is necessary to determine whether or not a biased combination was won and whether or not the recommended button sequence was followed.
Furthermore, in the temporary storage method 1, the storage area for temporary storage is shared, so the storage area for temporary storage can be minimized. However, the sub-control board 80 cannot determine what the information is just by transmitting the information stored in the temporary storage area, so processing is required to determine what the information is.
Furthermore, with temporary storage method 1, once a result is saved to the temporary storage area, it becomes impossible to save other lottery results to that temporary storage area during that game.
In contrast, method 2 of the temporary storage process allows for a one-to-one correspondence between the information to be saved in the temporary storage and the permanent storage. However, it is necessary to provide a temporary storage area and a permanent storage area equal to the number of items to be saved.

In addition, in the example of Figure 110, as in Figure 108, if it is determined in step S383 that the button press sequence is the recommended sequence (similar to step S351 in Figure 108), "0" may be set in the irregular game judgment data, and if it is determined that the button press sequence is not the recommended sequence (similar to step S352 in Figure 108), "1" may be set in the irregular game judgment data.
In this case, after step S390, the irregular game judgment data is cleared (similar to step S353 in Figure 108).

Although the fourth embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows.
(1) In the above embodiment, the non-recommended button press order (a button press order that is unilaterally advantageous) was the irregular middle first stop or the right first stop. However, it is not limited to this, and it may be the middle first stop only, or the right first stop only. Furthermore, it is also possible to have the left first stop only, or a button press order that includes the left first stop, as the non-recommended button press order (a button press order that is unilaterally advantageous). For example, the middle first stop may be the recommended button press order, and the left first stop and right first stop may be the non-recommended button press orders.
Furthermore, the recommended button press sequence is not limited to specifying only the first stop; for example, the sequence "left, middle, right" can also be the recommended sequence. In this case, if the operation is "left, right, middle," it is preferable to display the recommended image at the time of the second stop (right).

(2) In the above embodiment, a recommended image was made available to inform the player that the button press sequence was not the recommended sequence (i.e., not recommended). However, the method of informing the player that the button press sequence is not the recommended sequence is not limited to displaying a recommended image. For example, instead of displaying a new image called a recommended image, the existing image could be changed. For example, the screen could be darkened (reducing the visibility of the image) to inform the player that the button press sequence for the current game is not the recommended sequence.
Furthermore, when the screen is dimmed to inform the player that the recommended button sequence is not being followed, if there is a discrepancy between the displayed content and the internal state, it is acceptable to significantly reduce the visibility of the displayed content, but it is preferable to make the displayed content completely invisible.
Alternatively, the lighting and flashing patterns of the indicator lamps 21 on the gaming machine (slot machine 10) can be set to a specific pattern to indicate that the button press order is not the recommended one.
Furthermore, the system may also use a sound output from speaker 22 to indicate that the button press order is not as recommended.

(3) The display area of the recommended image can be set in various ways. For example, firstly, the recommended image can be displayed so as to cover the entire area of the image display area of the image display device 23.
Secondly, a recommended image may be displayed in a portion of the image display area of the image display device 23.
However, when displaying a recommended image, if there is a discrepancy between the displayed content and the internal state, it is preferable to display the recommended image in such a way that the displayed content (including the part showing the discrepancy) is hidden.

(4) In the fourth embodiment, the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed is determined at the time of the first stop, and it is determined that the recommended order is when the buttons are pressed in order. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine whether or not the recommended order is used based on the stop result. In this case, the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed is not determined.
Furthermore, when determining whether or not the recommended button press order is followed based on the stopping pattern, the reels 31 are controlled to stop in such a way that the stopping pattern differs between the recommended and non-recommended button press orders, even if the winning combination is the same (same winning flag).
However, when determining the recommended button press order based on the stopped reels, it is difficult to do so unless all reels 31 stop. Therefore, when all reels stop, the stopped reels are examined, and if it is determined that the stopped reels are based on a non-recommended button press order, the recommended image is displayed.
Therefore, when displaying a recommended image at the first stop, it is preferable to determine whether the order of pressing the stop switch 42 is the recommended order based on the order in which the switches are pressed.

(5) The biased bell shown in Figure 92 is a minor role where the order of pressing the buttons is essentially a choice of four. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to further increase the number of choices by changing the order of pressing the buttons and the colors.
For example, one could set the button press order to four options as described above, and further, set the color of the symbols on the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 to two options each (requiring the player to press the button to select the correct symbol color), thereby creating four options for the correct symbol color. As a result, the biased bell has "four button press order options × four color options = a total of 16 options" (hereinafter referred to as the "16-option biased bell").
In this case, when a 16-choice biased bell is won, if the buttons are pressed in order, a single-coin payout is awarded with "PB=1". On the other hand, when a 16-choice biased bell is won, if the button press order is correct and the color is correct, a 15-coin payout is awarded with "PB=1".

Furthermore, when a 16-choice biased bell is won, if the button press is irregular and the order of pressing and the color are not correct, the machine is configured so that either one coin is awarded or it is missed (0 coins).
Furthermore, when a biased bell with 16 choices is won, if the player arbitrarily presses the buttons in an irregular manner, there is a 1/16 chance of winning a 15-coin payout, a 7.5/16 chance of winning a 1-coin payout, and a 7.5/16 chance of missing (0 coins). In this configuration, the base rate can be lowered even further than when the biased bell shown in Figure 92 is used, and the number of medals paid out during AT can be increased.

(6) In the fourth embodiment, a rare role is provided that has a unilaterally advantageous button press order, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended button press order when a rare role is won, the AT lottery is performed. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the rare role may be a role that does not depend on the button press order, similar to watermelon, etc.
Furthermore, when a biased bell is won, the system may be configured to execute an AT lottery (or give preferential treatment to the AT lottery) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of button presses, and not execute an AT lottery (or give unfavorable treatment to the AT lottery) when the stop switch 42 is operated in a non-recommended order of button presses.
(7) In the case of a favorable period and not an AT, when the recommended button sequence is used, the ceiling game count and cycle game count (described later) will be updated with each game, but when the non-recommended button sequence is used, the ceiling game count and cycle game count will not be updated regardless of the winning combination.
Here, "cycle game count" refers to a system where, for example, an AT (Automatic Trigger) lottery is held after a predetermined number of games have been played (for example, "100").
In addition, for games where a win is achieved regardless of the order of button presses, the ceiling game count and cycle game count may or may not be updated.

(8) In the case of a favorable period and not an AT, if a non-recommended button sequence is used in a game in which a win of a non-recommended button sequence is achieved, the recommended image is displayed. Hereinafter, in the case of a game in which a win of a non-recommended button sequence is achieved and an AT lottery is performed, if a non-recommended button sequence is used, the AT lottery may be performed or not performed (the lottery result of the AT lottery may be invalidated).
Since the "No-Order Button Press" role is a role whose expected value does not change depending on the order in which the buttons are pressed, in a game where the "No-Order Button Press" role is won, it is possible to perform AT (Attack Time) lottery etc. even if the buttons are pressed in an unrecommended order. As a result, even if the buttons are pressed incorrectly in a game where the "No-Order Button Press" role is won, it will not result in an unfavorable outcome for the player, and since the results of the AT lottery etc. are reflected in the performance image after the recommended image has finished displaying, the player will not be disappointed. At the same time, the display of the recommended image makes it possible to inform the player of the recommended button press order when it is in an advantageous period and not in AT mode.
On the other hand, if a player wins a prize regardless of button press order and the game is played using an unrecommended button press order, and the AT lottery, etc., is not performed (the lottery results are invalidated), then the results of the AT lottery, etc., will not be reflected after the recommended image display has finished. This makes it possible to clearly communicate to the player the disadvantages of playing with an unrecommended button press order and to warn the player.

(9) In the fourth embodiment (including modified examples), a slot machine 10 was given as an example of a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to casino machines or sealed gaming machines (coinless gaming machines), for example.
(10) The first to fourth embodiments (including modified examples) are not limited to being implemented on their own, but can be implemented in appropriate combination with other embodiments.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The fifth embodiment relates to a slot machine 10 having a medal selector 110 for sorting medals M inserted from a medal slot 47, a chute member 120 for guiding medals M permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to a hopper 35, and a return member 130 for guiding medals M not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to a medal tray 19.

The fifth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and other documents.
Figure 111 is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, and Figure 112 is a block diagram illustrating the control of the slot machine 10 in the fifth embodiment.
Figure 112 is the same as Figure 1, but with the addition of a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, a setting change (reset) switch 153, a push button 86, and a directional pad 87.

As shown in Figure 111, the slot machine 10 comprises a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front and a front door 12 that is fitted to cover the opening of the cabinet 13.
Furthermore, the cabinet 13 is constructed in a box shape with an open front by assembling the bottom plate 13a, back plate 13b, top plate 13c, right side plate and left side plate (not shown), etc.
Furthermore, the front door 12 is attached to the cabinet 13 so as to cover the opening on the front of the cabinet 13.

The front door 12 is normally closed, but it is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are checked, when an error occurs, when medals are replenished, etc.
Specifically, the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 are attached to each other via hinges (not shown).
Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the side facing the player).

Furthermore, a door key insertion slot (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the locking device. The door key insertion slot is the part into which a door key for operating the locking device is inserted.
With the front door 12 closed and locked, inserting the door key into the door key slot and turning the door key clockwise will release the lock. Then, with the lock released, pulling the front door 12 will cause it to rotate around the hinge, opening the front door 12.

Furthermore, the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 is provided with a door switch 17 (Figure 112) for detecting when the front door 12 is open. The door switch 17 is configured to be off when the front door 12 is closed and on when the front door 12 is open.
Furthermore, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (Figure 112).
The main control board 50 is configured to determine that the front door 12 is closed when the door switch 17 is off, and to determine that the front door 12 is open when the door switch 17 is on.

Furthermore, a display window 18 is provided in the center of the front door 12. The display window 18 is configured to be located in front of the pattern display device 14 when the front door 12 is closed. The three reels 31 of the pattern display device 14 can be viewed through the display window 18.
Furthermore, below the display window 18 on the front of the front door 12 (the side facing the player), there are a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a payout switch 43, and a medal slot 47, etc. The medal slot 47 is where the player inserts medals M when betting or crediting.

Furthermore, the front lower part of the front door 12 is provided with a medal dispensing opening 16 and a medal receiving tray 19 for receiving the medals M discharged from the medal dispensing opening 16. The medal dispensing opening 16 is an opening through which medals M dispensed from the medal dispensing device 15 and medals M that have been denied insertion by the medal selector 110 pass.
Furthermore, on the back of the front door 12 (the side opposite to the side facing the player), a medal selector 110 is provided at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 for sorting the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47.

Specifically, a selector base 113 (Figure 113) is fixed to the back of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the coin slot 47, and a coin selector 110 is detachably attached to this selector base 113.
The selector base 113 is for detachably holding the medal selector 110, and is formed by bending sheet metal. It is fixed with screws to the back of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47. The medal selector 110 is then detachably attached to the selector base 113.

Furthermore, a chute member 120 is provided on the back surface of the front door 12, adjacent to the medal selector 110, for guiding the medals M authorized by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35.
Furthermore, on the back surface of the front door 12, at a position corresponding to the space between the medal selector 110 and the medal dispensing slot 16, a return member 130 is provided to guide medals M that have been denied insertion by the medal selector 110, and medals M dispensed from the medal dispensing device 15, to the medal receiving tray 19.

Furthermore, a medal dispensing device 15 is located inside the lower part of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The medal dispensing device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals M, a hopper motor 36 (Figure 112) that drives when dispensing medals M stored in the hopper 35, and a dispensing sensor 37 (Figure 112) for detecting medals M dispensed from the hopper 35.

The hopper 35 is for storing medals M. The hopper 35 also has a storage receiving port 35a at its top, which is an opening for receiving medals M guided by the chute member 120. The storage receiving port 35a opens below the hopper 35 side end of the chute member 120 (the downstream end of the medal guidance passage 121).
As described in the first embodiment, the dispensing sensor 37 consists of a pair of dispensing sensors 37a and 37b (Figure 112) arranged at a predetermined interval.
When a medal M is dispensed, a predetermined moving member (not shown) moves due to the medal M, and the movement of the predetermined moving member turns the dispensing sensor 37a and the dispensing sensor 37b on/off.

Furthermore, in Figure 112, the hopper motor 36 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the output port 52, and the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51.
Then, when dispensing medals M from the medal dispensing device 15, the main control board 50 drives the hopper motor 36.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 determines whether the medal M was dispensed normally based on whether the dispensing sensor 37a and the dispensing sensor 37b were turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

In Figure 111, a power supply unit (not shown) is located inside the lower part of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The power supply unit comprises a power supply board (not shown) that supplies power to the main control board 50, sub-control board 80, etc., a power switch 11 (Figure 112) operated to turn the power on/off, a setting key switch 152 (Figure 112) operated to switch to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 (Figure 112) operated to change the setting value and clear errors.

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated when turning the power on or off.
Turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning on the power,""switching the power on," or "resuming the power supply."
Furthermore, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the power supply."

The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is operated to switch to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed, or to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed.
The system is configured such that when a setting key is inserted into the setting key slot 151 (Figure 112) and rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 turns on, and when the setting key is returned to its original position, the setting key switch 152 turns off.

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch 153 and a reset switch 153.
Furthermore, the setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing the setting value in the setting change state.
Furthermore, the reset switch 153 is operated when the error notification is canceled after the cause of the error has been removed.
Thus, the setting change (reset) switch 153 functions as a setting change switch 153 when the setting is changed, and functions as a reset switch 153 when an error is reported.

Hereinafter, the term "setting change (reset) switch 153" may refer to it as "setting change switch 153" or "reset switch 153".
Furthermore, with respect to various switches such as the setting change (reset) switch 153, turning them to the ON state may be referred to as "operating," being in the ON state may be referred to as "being operated," and being in the OFF state may be referred to as "not being operated."
In the fifth embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are combined into one, but the invention is not limited to this, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

In Figure 112, the setting key switch 152 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51.
Furthermore, when the setting key switch 152 is ON and the power is turned ON, the system transitions to the setting change state, and when the setting key switch 152 is ON while the power is ON, the system transitions to the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, when the system enters the setting change state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value indicator LED 73 mounted on the main control board 50. In addition, each time the setting change switch 153 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is changed (incremented by "1"). Then, when the start switch 41 is operated, and the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state ends, and the setting value indicator LED 73 turns off. Note that after operating the start switch 41, the setting value cannot be changed even by operating the setting change switch 153.

Furthermore, the setting value is stored at a predetermined address on the RWM53.
Furthermore, in the setting change state, each time the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value is changed, and the changed setting value is stored (overwritten) at a predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, in the setting change state, simply operating the setting change switch 153 does not store (overwrite) the changed setting value in the predetermined address of the RWM 53. The setting value is confirmed when the start switch 41 is operated, and at this time, the confirmed setting value is stored (overwritten) in the predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, once the system switches to the settings confirmation state, the settings cannot be changed, but the current settings are displayed on the settings value display LED 73. When the settings key switch 152 is turned off, the settings confirmation state ends, and the settings value display LED 73 turns off.

Next, the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130 will be described in more detail with reference to Figures 113 to 121.
Figure 113 shows the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130, and illustrates the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.
Figure 114 is a modified version of Figure 113 with the addition of a hopper 35, illustrating the relationship between the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the hopper 35.

Figure 115 illustrates the relationship between the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the thickness of the medal M.
Figure 116 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the dimensions of each part of the chute member 120 and the diameter and radius of the medal M.
Figure 117 illustrates the relationship between one medal M that has entered the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, and other medals M that are moving from the medal selector 110 towards the chute member 120.

Figure 118 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the width of the medal guide passage 121 of the chute member 120 and the dimensions of each part of the screw 127 that fixes the chute member 120.
Figure 119 illustrates an example in which neither the return receiving opening 131 nor the upper edge portion 135 is located vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

Figure 120 illustrates an example in which a blocking member 140 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, and a portion of the return acceptance opening 131 is blocked by this blocking member 140.
Figure 121 illustrates an example in which a portion of the return receiving opening 131 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

As shown in Figure 113, the medal selector 110 has a medal passage 111 through which medals inserted from the medal slot 47 pass. The medal passage 111 is formed in a roughly L-shape, and in Figure 113, it has a vertical section 111a extending approximately vertically downward from the upper left side of the medal selector 110, and an inclined section 111b that slopes gently downward to the right from the lower end of the vertical section 111a to the lower right side of the medal selector 110. Furthermore, an entrance 111c for the medal passage 111 is provided on the upper left side of the medal selector 110, and an exit 111d for the medal passage 111 is provided on the lower right side of the medal selector 110.

When the medal selector 110 is installed in a predetermined position on the back of the front door 12, the entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is positioned vertically below the medal slot 47. The medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 are then sent to the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 113, a blocker 45 is provided at an intermediate position in the inclined portion 111b of the medal passage 111 to allow/deny the insertion of medals M, and an insertion sensor 44 capable of detecting medals M passing through the medal passage 111 is provided downstream of the blocker 45 in the inclined portion 111b of the medal passage 111.

The blocker 45 is used to allow/deny the insertion of medals M, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the output port 52 (Figure 112).
The main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to prevent the insertion of medals M during gameplay (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all reels 31 stop and, in the case of a winning combination, until the end of the payout of medals M corresponding to the winning combination).

Furthermore, if a specified number of medals M have already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, it is not possible to bet or credit any more medals M, so the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to prevent the insertion of medals M.
Conversely, when no game is being played (after the payout of medals M has finished and before the reels 31 start spinning), if the number of medals M bet has not reached the specified number, or if the number of credits has not reached the upper limit, the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to allow the insertion of medals M.

When the insertion of medals M is prohibited, the blocker 45 is configured to detach the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 from the medal passage 111 at the blocker 45's position and cause them to fall downward. Furthermore, the medals M that have detached from the medal passage 111 at the blocker 45's position and fallen downward are guided by the return member 130, discharged from the medal dispensing opening 16, and stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

In contrast, when medal insertion M is permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to guide the medals M inserted from the medal insertion opening 47 to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111. Furthermore, the medals M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b (hereinafter collectively referred to as "insertion sensors 44"), are discharged from the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111, are guided by the chute member 120, and are stored in the hopper 35.

The input sensor 44 is for detecting medals M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111. As shown in Figure 113, it consists of a pair of input sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined interval. Input sensor 44a is located upstream, and input sensor 44b is located downstream. Furthermore, input sensors 44a and 44b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (Figure 112).

The medals M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 are first detected by the upstream input sensor 44a, and then detected by the downstream input sensor 44b.
Specifically, when a medal M is guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, the upstream insertion sensor 44a first detects the medal M (turns from off to on).
As the medal M flows further down the medal passage 111, the downstream input sensor 44b then detects the medal M (turns from off to on).

Furthermore, as the medal M flows down the medal passage 111, the upstream input sensor 44a stops detecting the medal M (it switches from on to off).
Furthermore, as the medal M flows down the medal passage 111, the downstream input sensor 44b stops detecting the medal M (it switches from on to off).
The main control board 50 then determines whether the medal M has passed through the medal passage 111 normally, based on whether the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

The chute member 120 is for guiding the medals M, which have been permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and discharged from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, to the hopper 35 located in the lower part of the cabinet 13. It is provided on the back surface of the front door 12, adjacent to the medal selector 110.

Furthermore, the chute member 120 has a medal guide passage 121 for guiding medals M from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.
The medal guide passage 121 is gently sloped such that its height gradually decreases as it moves from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side towards the hopper 35 (downstream) side.

Furthermore, in Figure 113, when a medal M is admitted by the medal selector 110 and passes through the medal passage 111, it is discharged from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111. Here, as shown in Figure 111, the medal selector 110 is mounted on the back of the front door 12. Therefore, the exit 111d is located closer to the back of the front door 12. In contrast, as shown in Figure 111, the hopper 35 is located closer to the center inside the cabinet 13. In other words, perpendicular to the plane of Figure 113, the hopper 35 is located closer to the front of the exit 111d. Therefore, there is a certain distance between the exit 111d and the hopper 35. Thus, the medal guide passage 121 has an arc-shaped curve toward the hopper 35 in order to guide the medal M discharged from the exit 111d toward the hopper 35.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 113, the chute member 120 has a bottom surface portion 122 that constitutes the bottom surface of the medal guide passage 121, an inner wall portion 123 that constitutes the inner side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121, and an outer wall portion 124 that constitutes the outer side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121. The upper part of the medal guide passage 121 is open.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 116, the chute member 120 has a stepped portion 125 on its bottom surface 122, located in the middle of the medal guide passage 121, where the height is lower on the hopper 35 (downstream) side than on the medal selector 110 (upstream) side.

As described above, the medal guide path 121 is formed in an arc-shaped curve. Therefore, the medal M moves along the bottom surface 122 of the medal guide path 121 from upstream to downstream, and its speed decreases as it comes into contact with the inner wall 123 and outer wall 124 along the way.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 116, a stepped section 125 is provided at a position corresponding to the middle of the medal guidance passage 121 on the bottom surface 122, where the height is lower on the downstream side than on the upstream side. The medals M moving from the upstream side to the downstream side of the medal guidance passage 121 are then dropped at the stepped section 125. This allows the medals M, which have been decelerated by contact with the inner wall section 123 and the outer wall section 124, to be accelerated.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 113, a fixing portion 126 is provided near the end of the outer wall portion 124 of the chute member 120 on the side facing the medal selector 110. The fixing portion 126 is for fixing the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12 and protrudes upward from the upper end of the outer wall portion 124. The fixing portion 126 is also provided with a screw hole (not shown) that penetrates from its front side to its back side. Moreover, the screw hole penetrating the fixing portion 126 is located above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124.

The chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through the screw hole in the fixing part 126. Furthermore, when the chute member 120 is fixed to the predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127, the screw 127 is located above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124.

Here, as shown in Figure 115, let "T" be the thickness of medal M.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 116, the diameter of medal M is denoted as "D" and the radius of medal M is denoted as "R". In addition, the height of the stepped portion 125 is denoted as "H1", the height of the inner wall portion 123 is denoted as "H2", and the height of the outer wall portion 124 is denoted as "H3".
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 118, the width of the medal guide passage 121 (the distance between the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124) is defined as "L1", the total length of the screw 127 is defined as "L2", and the diameter of the screw head is defined as "L3".

Furthermore, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the thickness "T" of the medal M, and the diameter "D" of the medal M are configured to satisfy the conditions "L1 >T" and "L1 <D". In other words, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121 is wider (larger) than the thickness "T" of the medal M, and narrower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M.
This ensures that medal M moves on the bottom surface 122 of the medal guidance passage 121 while in an upright position.

Furthermore, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the diameter "D" of the medal M are configured to satisfy the conditions "H2 <D" and "H3 <D". In other words, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 is lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M, and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 is also lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M.
This ensures that the top of the medal M protrudes above the upper ends of the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124, and that the medal M moves along the bottom surface portion 122 of the medal guide passage 121.

Furthermore, the height "H1" of the stepped portion 125, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the radius "R" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "H1 <H2","H1<H3", and "H1 <R". In other words, the height "H1" of the stepped portion 125 is lower (smaller) than the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and lower (smaller) than the radius "R" of the medal M.
This prevents the medal M from flying over the inner wall 123 or outer wall 124 and flying out of the medal guidance passage 121 when it falls over the step 125.

Furthermore, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 may be configured to satisfy "H2 = H3", "H2 <H3", or "H2 >H3".
In other words, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 may be equal to the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, may be higher (larger) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, or may be lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124.

Furthermore, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the total length "L2" of the screw 127, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head are configured to satisfy the conditions "L1 <L2" and "L1 <L3". In other words, the total length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head is wider (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121.
This prevents the screw 127 from falling into the medal guide passage 121 even if it comes loose from the back of the front door 12, thus preventing it from obstructing the passage of the medals M.
Furthermore, the configuration satisfies the condition "L2 >L3". That is, the total length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the diameter "L3" of the screw head. This allows the chute member 120 to be securely fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127.

Furthermore, a locking portion (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position on the chute member 120. This locking portion is for locking the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12. With the seat member 120 locked to the back surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through the screw hole of the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes loose, the chute member 120 will not detach from the back surface of the front door 12 and fall.

Furthermore, the medal slot 47 has a medal placement section (not shown) that can hold multiple medals M in an aligned state. In the fifth embodiment, the medal placement section is capable of holding 10 medals M in an aligned state. Multiple medals M placed in the medal placement section can then be continuously inserted through the medal slot 47.

Furthermore, when the thickness of the medal M is "T", the width of the medal guidance passage 121 is "L1", and the number of medals M that can be placed in the medal placement area is "M", the system is configured to satisfy "L1 < (M ÷ 2) × T". That is, the width "L1" of the medal guidance passage 121 is narrower (smaller) than the thickness of half the number of medals M that can be placed in the medal placement area of the medal insertion slot 47, which is "(M ÷ 2) × T".

The return member 130 is for guiding medals M that have been denied insertion by the medal selector 110, and medals M dispensed from the medal dispensing device 15, to the medal tray 19, and is located on the back surface of the front door 12, at a position corresponding to the space between the medal selector 110 and the medal dispensing opening 16.
When the return member 130 is fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, a medal return passage 132 and a medal dispensing passage 134 are formed between the back surface of the front door 12 and the return member 130, as shown in Figure 113.

Furthermore, the medal return passage 132 is a passage that guides medals M that have been denied insertion by the medal selector 110 to the medal dispensing opening 16.
Furthermore, the medal dispensing passage 134 is a passage that guides the medals M dispensed from the medal dispensing device 15 to the medal dispensing opening 16.
Furthermore, the medal return passage 132 and the medal dispensing passage 134 merge midway to form a single passage.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 113, a return receiving opening 131 is provided at the top of the return member 130. The return receiving opening 131 is an opening for receiving medals M that have been denied insertion by the medal selector 110 and have fallen downward after being removed from the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45. It is an opening that serves as the entrance to the medal return passage 132 and is configured to be located vertically below the blocker 45 of the medal selector 110.
Then, the medals M that are denied insertion by the medal selector 110 and fall downward after being deviated from the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 pass through the return acceptance opening 131, are guided by the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal dispensing opening 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

Furthermore, a dispensing and receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the return member 130, and in Figure 113, it is located towards the right. The dispensing and receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving medals M dispensed from the medal dispensing device 15, and is the entrance to the medal dispensing passage 134. It is configured to be located in front of the medal dispensing device 15 when the front door 12 is closed.
The medals M dispensed from the medal dispensing device 15 then pass through the dispensing receiving opening 133, are guided by the medal dispensing passage 134, pass through the medal dispensing opening 16, and are stored in the medal receiving tray 19.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 113, the peripheral edge of the return receiving opening 131 at the top of the return member 130 is referred to as the "upper edge portion 135". In other words, the upper edge portion 135 is the part corresponding to the edge around the return receiving opening 131. When the return member 130 is fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, the upper edge portion 135 is configured to be approximately horizontal.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 113, a gap 112 is provided between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. The upper edge portion 135 is positioned vertically below the gap 112. As a result, the return receiving opening 131 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 115, the thickness of the medal M is denoted as "T", the spacing of the gaps 112 as "W", and the width of the upper edge portion 135 as "B".
Furthermore, the thickness "T" of the medal M and the spacing "W" of the gap 112 are configured such that "W >T". In other words, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, as shown in Figure 117, the medal M can be placed in the gap 112.
More specifically, it is configured to satisfy "W ≈ 2 × T". That is, the gap "W" of the slit 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, two medals M can be placed in the slit 112.

In the fifth embodiment, a selector base 113 (Figure 113) is fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47, and a medal selector 110 is detachably attached to this selector base 113.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 113, the right side of the selector base 113 is positioned between the right side of the medal selector 110 (the side on which the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided) and the upstream end of the chute member 120. The gap 112 is provided between the right side of the selector base 113 and the upstream end of the chute member 120.

Furthermore, the selector base 113 is formed by bending sheet metal, and the thickness of the sheet metal constituting the selector base 113 is set to 0.8 mm to 1.0 mm.
Furthermore, the thickness "T" of medal M is set to "1.6" mm, and the spacing "W" of the gaps 12 is set to "3.2" mm.
Therefore, the distance from the right side of the medal selector 110 (the side on which the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided) to the upstream end of the chute member 120 is set to 4.0 mm to 4.2 mm.

Furthermore, an upper edge portion 135 is positioned vertically below the gap 112. The thickness "T" of the medal M, the spacing "W" of the gap 112, and the width "B" of the upper edge portion 135 are configured such that "B > T" and "B > W". That is, the width "B" of the upper edge portion 135 is greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M and greater than the spacing "W" of the gap 112. In addition, the upper edge portion 135 is configured to be approximately horizontal. Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 can be placed on top of the upper edge portion 135.

For example, when a hall employee is performing maintenance on the medal selector 110, they may place a medal M into the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. In this case, since the medal M rests on the upper edge 135, the medal M can be kept in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.
However, there are cases where a hall employee forgets that a medal M is still in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, and closes the front door 12. In this case, the impact of closing the front door 12 causes the medal M to fall out of the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

At this time, the upper edge 135 is positioned vertically below the gap 112, and the return receiving opening 131 is not positioned there. Therefore, medals M that fall through the gap 112 will not fall into the return receiving opening 131. Thus, medals M that fall through the gap 112 will not pass through the medal return passage 132, through the medal dispensing opening 16, and reach the medal receiving tray 19. This prevents hall staff from giving players medals M that they have placed in the gap 112 for maintenance of the medal selector 110.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 114, the gap 112 is positioned above the storage receiving opening 35a of the hopper 35. That is, the storage receiving opening 35a of the hopper 35 opens at a lower position than the gap 112. This allows the medals M that fall through the gap 112 when the front door 12 is closed to fall into the storage receiving opening 35a, thus allowing them to be stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, when "1" medal M is placed in the gap 112, there is a gap between the gap 112 and the medal M, so it is not the case that "1" medal M cannot be removed from the gap 112.
Then, when the front door 12 is closed with this "1" medal M still in the gap 112, the impact causes the "1" medal M to fall out of the gap 112 and into the storage receiving port 35a, where it is stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, if the gap "W" of the slit 112 is slightly wider (larger) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, then when "2" medals M are placed in the slit 112, these "2" medals M will not become stuck and cannot be removed from the slit 112.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed with these "two" medals M still in the gap 112, just as when the front door 12 is closed with "one" medal M still in the gap 112, the impact of closing the front door 12 causes the medals to fall out of the gap 112, drop into the storage receiving port 35a, and be stored in the hopper 35.

Conversely, if the gap "W" of the slit 112 is slightly narrower (smaller) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, then two medals M will be pushed into the slit 112. In this case, it will not be impossible to remove the two pushed-in medals M from the slit 112.
However, if the front door 12 is closed while the two medals M are pushed into the gap 112, there is a possibility that the two medals M will remain in the gap 112.

Here, as shown in Figure 117, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and resting on the upper edge 135 remains inside the gap 112, blocking the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110. Therefore, while one medal M remains inside the gap 112, other medals M inserted from the medal input opening 47 will hit the one medal M inside the gap 112 and stop as they pass through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 towards the chute member 120.

Furthermore, when another medal M passing through the medal passage 111 strikes one medal M in the gap 112, the upper end of the one medal M in the gap 112 is positioned above the center of the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111. Therefore, the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111 will not go over the one medal M in the gap 112.
Therefore, when one medal M is in the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

Furthermore, while it is not possible to directly detect whether a medal M remains within the gap 112, as described above, when one medal M remains within the gap 112, other medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 will hit the first medal M in the gap 112 and stop. At this time, the other medals M will accumulate near the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, causing the insertion sensors 44a and 44b to remain activated.

Furthermore, if the input sensors 44a and 44b remain ON, the main control board 50 determines that an error has been detected in the medal selector 110, indicating that medals M are jammed (stagnating), and notifies the system accordingly. This allows for indirect detection of medals M remaining in the gap 112. Error detection and notification will be described later.

Furthermore, when the chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12 with screws 127, the return receiving opening 131 is not located vertically below the screws 127.
Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes loose from the back of the front door 12, the loosened screw 127 will not fall into the return acceptance slot 131. Thus, the loosened screw 127 will not pass through the medal return passage 132, through the medal dispensing slot 16, and reach the medal receiving tray 19.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 112, the medal selector 110 is equipped with a passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine errors such as medal jamming (accumulation) or the presence of fraudulent activity. Although not shown in Figure 113, the passage sensor 46 is located in the vertical portion 111a of the medal passage 111. That is, the passage sensor 46 is located upstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111.

Therefore, the medals M inserted through the medal slot 47 are first detected by the passage sensor 46. Furthermore, the passage sensor 46 can detect the medals M inserted through the medal slot 47 regardless of whether the blocker 45 is in an on state (allowing the insertion of medals M) or an off state (not allowing it).

Furthermore, although not shown in Figures 111 to 121, the chute member 120 is equipped with a chute sensor in the middle of the medal guidance passage 121. Similar to the passage sensor 46, the chute sensor is provided to determine errors such as medal jamming (accumulation) or the presence of fraudulent activity. Since the chute member 120 guides the medals M authorized for insertion by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, the chute sensor is located downstream of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

Furthermore, the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51.
Furthermore, both the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor may be provided, only one of them may be provided, or neither may be provided.

Next, the detection of errors, error notification, and cancellation of error notification in the fifth embodiment will be described.
For example, when the input sensors 44a and 44b remain ON, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected an error in the medal selector 110 where medals M are jammed (stagnant) (hereinafter referred to as "selector stagnation error"), and executes a notification indicating the selector stagnation error (hereinafter referred to as "selector stagnation notification"). Specifically, as a selector stagnation notification, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating the selector stagnation error (for example, "CE") on the acquired count display LED 78.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnation error, it transmits a command indicating the selector stagnation error (hereinafter referred to as the "selector stagnation command") to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a selector hoarding command, it performs selector hoarding notification using the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as selector hoarding notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message from the speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" and displays the words "Selector Error" on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, for example, if the input sensors 44a and 44b do not turn on in that order (i.e., the medal M does not pass through normally), the main control board 50 determines that it has detected an error in the normal passage of the medal M (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passage error") and executes a notification indicating the selector passage error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passage error notification").

As described above, when a medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, first the insertion sensor 44a turns from off to on, then the insertion sensor 44b turns from off to on, then the insertion sensor 44a turns from on to off, and finally the insertion sensor 44b turns from on to off.
The main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed through normally when the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b turn on/off in the above order, and determines that a selector pass error has been detected when the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b do not turn on/off in the above order.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b in a normal manner, it performs a process of adding "1" to the number of bets or credits for the medal M.
In response, when the main control board 50 detects a selector pass error, it displays a code indicating the selector pass error (for example, "CP") on the acquired count display LED 78 as a selector pass error notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector pass error, it transmits a command indicating the selector pass error (hereinafter referred to as the "selector pass error command") to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a selector pass error command, it performs selector pass error notification using the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as selector pass error notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message from the speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" and displays the words "Selector Error" on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, if the input sensor 44a is off, it may be determined that a selector passage error (or selector reverse flow error) has been detected when the input sensor 44b changes from off to on.
Alternatively, a selector pass error (or selector reverse flow error) may be detected when the input sensor 44b changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44b changes from on to off, and finally the input sensor 44a changes from on to off.

Furthermore, the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined period of time from the moment it detects the medal M, and when it stops detecting the medal M after the predetermined period has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed through normally.
In contrast, if the aisle sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since it first detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected a medal retention error.
Furthermore, if the passage sensor 46 stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed since it detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected a medal passage error.

Furthermore, the chute sensor continues to detect medal M for a predetermined period of time from the moment it detects medal M, and when it stops detecting medal M after the predetermined period has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that medal M has passed through normally.
In contrast, if the chute sensor continues to detect medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since detecting medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Furthermore, if the chute sensor stops detecting medal M before a predetermined time has elapsed since it detected medal M, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected a medal passage error.

The main control board 50 also includes an input monitoring counter (not shown).
The input monitoring counter is a counter that, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state (allowing the passage of medals M), increments by "1" when medals M pass through the passage sensor 46 normally, and decrements by "1" when medals M pass through the input sensors 44a and 44b normally. Therefore, the input monitoring counter alternates between "1" and "0" under normal circumstances.
Furthermore, when the blocker 45 is in the off state (a state in which the passage of medal M is not permitted), the input monitoring counter will not increment by "1" even if medal M passes through the passage sensor 46.
Furthermore, the input monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state (a state in which the passage of medals M is not permitted) to the on state (a state in which the passage of medals M is permitted).

When the blocker 45 is ON, the main control board 50 increments the input monitoring counter by "1" when a medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally, and decrements the input monitoring counter by "1" when a medal M passes through the input sensors 44a and 44b normally.
Furthermore, when the blocker 45 is ON, if the passage sensor 46 does not detect the passage of the medal M, and only the input sensors 44a and 44b detect the passage of the medal M, the input monitoring counter becomes "-1", and the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has been detected.

Furthermore, when the blocker 45 is ON, if the passage sensor 46 detects the passage of medal M, but the input sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of medal M, and then the passage sensor 46 subsequently detects the passage of medal M, the input monitoring counter becomes "2," and the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has been detected.

Furthermore, the input monitoring counter may be a counter that, when the blocker 45 is ON, adds "1" when the medal M passes through the input sensors 44a and 44b normally, and subtracts "1" when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally.
In other words, when the blocker 45 is ON, the main control board 50 may increment the input monitoring counter by "1" when the medal M passes through the input sensors 44a and 44b normally, and decrement the input monitoring counter by "1" when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally.

Furthermore, when the blocker 45 is ON, if the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b detect the passage of the medal M, but the chute sensor does not detect the passage of the medal M, and then the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b detect the passage of the medal M again, the input monitoring counter will become "2", and the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected.
Furthermore, when the blocker 45 is ON, if the input sensors 44a and 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M, and only the chute sensor detects the passage of the medal M, the input monitoring counter will become "-1", and the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected.

Furthermore, the normal range for the input monitoring counter is not limited to "0" to "1". In other words, the main control board 50 does not only determine an input monitoring error when the input monitoring counter reaches "2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "3" or higher, or a predetermined value of "-2" or lower.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 adds/subtracts the input monitoring counter using the input signal from the passage sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b, it clears the input monitoring counter when switching the blocker 45 from the off state to the on state.
However, when the main control board 50 adds/subtracts the input monitoring counter using the input signals from input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor, it may or may not clear the input monitoring counter when switching the blocker 45 from the off state to the on state.
In other words, when the input monitoring counter is calculated by adding/subtracting the input signals from input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor, it may be set to be cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state to the on state, or it may not be set to be cleared.

Alternatively, separate input monitoring counters may be provided for the passage sensor 46 and for the chute sensor.
In other words, the input monitoring counter can include a first input monitoring counter and a second input monitoring counter.
Furthermore, the first input monitoring counter is a counter that adds/subtracts from the input signal from the passage sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b.
Furthermore, the second input monitoring counter is a counter that adds/subtracts from the input signals from input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor.

In other words, when the blocker 45 is ON, the main control board 50 increments the first insertion monitoring counter by "1" when the medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally, and decrements the first insertion monitoring counter by "1" when the medal M passes through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b normally.
The main control board 50 then determines that an input monitoring error has been detected when the first input monitoring counter no longer has a normal value (for example, when it becomes a predetermined value of -1 or less, or a predetermined value of 2 or more).

Furthermore, when the blocker 45 is ON, the main control board 50 increments the second input monitoring counter by "1" when the medal M passes through the input sensors 44a and 44b in a normal manner, and decrements the second input monitoring counter by "1" when the medal M passes through the chute sensor in a normal manner.
The main control board 50 then determines that an input monitoring error has been detected when the second input monitoring counter no longer reaches a normal value (for example, when it becomes a predetermined value of -1 or less, or a predetermined value of 2 or more).

Furthermore, for example, if the hopper motor 36 is being driven but the payout sensors 37a and 37b are not being turned on or off, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected an error indicating that no medals M are stored in the hopper 35 (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper empty error"), and executes a notification indicating the hopper empty error (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper empty notification"). Specifically, as a hopper empty notification, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating the hopper empty error (for example, "HE") on the acquired amount display LED 78 (Figure 112).

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper empty error, it transmits a command indicating that the hopper is empty (hereinafter referred to as the "empty command") to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives an empty command, it performs a hopper empty notification using the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as a hopper empty notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message from the speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" and displays the words "Hopper Empty" on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, for example, if the payout sensors 37a and 37b remain ON, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected a hopper jam error (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam error") in the hopper 35 and executes a notification indicating the hopper jam error (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam notification"). Specifically, as a hopper jam notification, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating the hopper jam error (for example, "HP") on the acquired count display LED 78.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it transmits a command indicating a hopper jam (hereinafter referred to as the "hopper jam command") to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a hopper jam command, it performs a hopper jam notification using the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as a hopper jam notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message from the speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" and displays the words "Hopper Jam" on the image display device 23.

When the main control board 50 detects any of the above-mentioned errors, it stops the game from progressing until the error notification is cleared.
Furthermore, once the causes of the various errors described above are removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the various errors. However, once the various error notifications are issued, they are not canceled simply by removing the corresponding cause of the error (by no longer detecting the error), and continue until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 cancel the various error notifications.

For example, in the event of a selector jamming error, the cause of the error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the jammed (stuck) medals M in the medal selector 110. After that, the selector jamming notification can be canceled by operating the reset switch 153.
In the event of a selector passage error, similar to a selector retention error, the cause of the error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the medal M from the medal selector 110. Subsequently, the selector passage error notification can be canceled by operating the reset switch 153.

Furthermore, in the event of a hopper empty error, the cause of the error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and replenishing the hopper 35 with medals M. After that, the hopper empty notification can be deactivated by operating the reset switch 153.
Additionally, after refilling Hopper 35 with medals M, you can also deactivate the hopper empty notification by turning the door key counterclockwise about 45 degrees to switch the release switch from off to on.

Furthermore, in the event of a hopper jam error, the cause of the error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the jammed medals M from the hopper 35. Afterward, the hopper jam warning can be deactivated by operating the reset switch 153.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened (hereinafter referred to as "door open") by turning on the door switch 17, it executes a notification indicating that the front door 12 has been opened (hereinafter referred to as "door open notification"). Specifically, as a door open notification, the main control board 50 displays a code (for example, "dE") indicating that the front door 12 has been opened on the acquired count display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened due to the door switch 17 being turned on, it sends a command indicating that the front door 12 has been opened (hereinafter referred to as the "door open command") to the sub-control board 80.

Then, upon receiving a door open command, the sub-control board 80 executes a door open notification using the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as a door open notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice message "The door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the text "Door Open" on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, a release switch (not shown) for disabling the door open notification is provided near the locking device on the back side of the front door 12 (the side opposite to the side the player faces). When the door key is inserted into the door key slot and the door key is turned counterclockwise by about 45 degrees, the release switch switches from off to on. In other words, turning the door key by about 45 degrees in the opposite direction to how the front door 12 is locked switches the release switch from off to on.
As mentioned above, inserting the door key into the door key slot and then turning the door key 90 degrees clockwise will unlock the door. With the door unlocked, pulling the front door 12 will cause it to rotate around the hinge, opening the door.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 turns off. However, once the door open notification is activated, it is not canceled simply by closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17, and continues until the cancellation switch is turned from off to on.
Then, while the door open notification is running, close the front door 12 and turn off the door switch 17. With the door key in this state, turn the door key counterclockwise (opposite direction to when the front door 12 is locked or unlocked) by about 45 degrees to turn the release switch from off to on, and the door open notification will be canceled.

Thus, turning the door key in the opposite direction to how the front door 12 is locked is the operation to deactivate the door open notification.
Furthermore, when the door open notification is deactivated, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquired points before "dE" was displayed on the acquired points display LED 78.
Furthermore, when the release switch is turned from off to on, the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80 indicating the cancellation of the door open notification (hereinafter referred to as the "notification cancellation command").
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a notification cancellation command, it terminates the door open notification that was being performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.

Next, with reference to Figures 122 to 132, the operation modes during error detection, error notification, and error clearance in the fifth embodiment will be described.
Figures 122 to 129 are time charts showing the operation patterns during error detection and error resolution in the fifth embodiment.
Figure 122 is a time chart showing the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated after the cause of the selector stagnation error has been removed, and when the release switch is operated after the front door 12 has been closed.

In Figure 122, if a selector stagnation error occurs at the timing "X11", the main control board 50 detects the selector stagnation error. In addition, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 execute selector stagnation notification.
Specifically, in Figure 122, at the timing of "X11", if a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensors 44a and 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected a selector jamming error. The main control board 50 then displays "CE" on the acquired medal count display LED 78 as a selector jamming notification, indicating a selector jamming error.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector hoarding error, it sends a selector hoarding command to the sub-control board 80.
When the sub-control board 80 receives a selector hoarding command, it outputs a voice message from the speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" as a selector hoarding notification, and displays the words "Selector hoarding error" on the image display device 23.

Subsequently, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing indicated by "X12" in Figure 122, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12 (door opening).
Specifically, in Figure 122, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing "X12", the door switch 17 turns on, and the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12 (door open). However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, even if the front door 12 is detected to be open, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification and continues the selector dwell notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has opened, it transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the front door 12 has opened.
However, while the sub-control board 80 is performing selector occupancy notification, even if it receives a door open command, it will not perform door open notification and will continue the selector occupancy notification.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X13" in Figure 122, when the medals M stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 are removed—that is, when the cause of the selector congestion error is removed—the main control board 50 will no longer detect the selector congestion error. However, once the selector congestion notification is triggered, it is not canceled simply by removing the cause of the selector congestion error (the selector congestion error is no longer detected), but continues until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on).

Subsequently, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing indicated by "X14" in Figure 122, the main control board 50 cancels the selector drowsiness notification.
Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clearing command, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification that was being performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.

However, at the timing of "X14" in Figure 122, even if the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector hoarding notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. Then, when the main control board 50 cancels the selector hoarding notification, it then performs a door open notification using the acquired count display LED 78. Specifically, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquired count display LED 78 from "CE", which indicates a selector hoarding error, to "dE", which indicates the opening of the front door 12 (door open).
Furthermore, once the selector occupancy notification is released, the sub-control board 80 then performs a door open notification using the speaker 22 and the image display device 23. Specifically, as a door open notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice message "The door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door Open" on the image display device 23.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X15" in Figure 122, when the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 turns off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects the opening of the front door 12. However, once the door open notification is triggered, it is not canceled simply by closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17; it continues until the release switch is operated (turned on).

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X16" in Figure 122, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquired items on the acquired item display LED 78 before the error code is displayed, and also sends a notification cancellation command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the door open notification has been canceled.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a notification cancellation command, it cancels the door open notification that was being performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.

Figure 123 is a time chart showing the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without eliminating the cause of the selector stagnation error.
In Figure 123, at the timing of "X21", if a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensors 44a and 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector jamming error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector hoarding error, it displays "CE" on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector hoarding notification, and also transmits a selector hoarding command to the sub-control board 80.
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector congestion command, it outputs the message "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector congestion notification, and displays the words "Selector congestion error" on the image display device 23.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X22" in Figure 123, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened.
However, while the main control board 50 is performing selector occupancy notification, even if it detects the opening of the front door 12, it will not perform door open notification and will continue the selector occupancy notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the front door 12 has opened.
However, while the sub-control board 80 is performing selector occupancy notification, even if it receives a door open command, it will not perform door open notification and will continue the selector occupancy notification.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X23" in Figure 123, if a medal M becomes jammed in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, and the input sensors 44a and 44b remain on, meaning the cause of the selector jamming error has not been removed, and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector jamming notification.

Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clearing command, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification that was being performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.
However, in Figure 123, the selector drowsiness notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23," but then the selector drowsiness notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24."

Specifically, in Figure 123, at the timing indicated by "X23," if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector drowsiness error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 cancels the selector drowsiness notification and then controls the system to execute the door open notification. Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X24" in Figure 123, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and controls the system to execute the selector drowsiness notification again.

Specifically, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 to switch from "CE," indicating a selector stagnation error, to "dE," indicating the opening of the front door 12, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123. Then, at the timing of "X24," it controls the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 to switch from "dE" back to "CE." Furthermore, at the timing of "X24" in Figure 123, the main control board 50 transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clearing command at the timing indicated by "X23" in Figure 123, it cancels the selector dwell notification and controls the system to execute the door open notification. Subsequently, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector dwell command at the timing indicated by "X24" in Figure 123, it cancels the door open notification and controls the system to execute the selector dwell notification again.

Specifically, at the timing indicated by "X23" in Figure 123, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from speaker 22 from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and simultaneously switches the display on image display device 23 from "Selector congestion error" to "Door open." Then, at the timing indicated by "X24," it switches the audio output from speaker 22 again from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and simultaneously switches the display on image display device 23 from "Door open" to "Selector congestion error."

Here, various errors such as selector stagnation errors, selector passage errors, hopper empty errors, and hopper jam errors are managed (detected, notified, and released) by the main control board 50. However, door opening can be managed (detected, notified, and released) by the main control board 50 or by the sub-control board 80.
Furthermore, the door open notification can be terminated (ended) in three ways: when a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the detection of the door opening; when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off; and when the release switch is operated (from off to on, or from off to on and then back to off) while the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off.

Furthermore, the door opening notification can be performed in three ways: displaying a code such as "dE" on the acquisition count display LED 78, outputting an audio message such as "The door is open" from the speaker 22, and displaying text such as "Door Open" on the image display device 23; performing two actions such as outputting an audio message such as "The door is open" from the speaker 22 and displaying text such as "Door Open" on the image display device 23; performing only an audio message such as "The door is open" from the speaker 22; or performing only a text message such as "Door Open" on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, in Figure 123, depending on the content of the processing performed between the time the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23" and the time the selector dwell notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24", the time required from "X23" to "X24" can be either extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) to the point where it is imperceptible to human perception, or relatively long (for example, 3 seconds to 5 seconds) to the point where it is perceptible to human perception.
Therefore, due to the various combinations of the above cases, various operational modes are possible between the time the selector drowsiness notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123 and the time the selector drowsiness notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24".

In other words, in Figure 123, there are cases in which a door open notification is executed and cases in which a door open notification is not executed between the time the selector occupancy notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23" and the time the selector occupancy notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, in Figure 123, when the door open notification is executed between the timing of "X23" when the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and the timing of "X24" when the selector dwell notification is executed again, there are cases where the execution of the door open notification can be recognized by human sight and hearing, and cases where the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized by human sight and hearing, or even if it can be recognized, it is only for a moment.

Furthermore, in Figure 123, if the door open notification is not executed between the time the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time the selector dwell notification is re-executed at timing "X24", there are cases where it is visually and aurally perceptible to humans that the selector dwell notification was canceled and then re-executed, and cases where it is not visually or aurally perceptible to humans that the selector dwell notification was canceled and then re-executed, or if it is perceptible, it is only for a moment.

For example, the door opening is managed by the main control board 50, and the release switch is operated when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, which is the condition for canceling (terminating) the door opening notification. The door opening notification may then perform three actions: displaying a code such as "dE" on the acquisition count display LED 78, outputting an audio message such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22, and displaying text such as "Door Open" on the image display device 23.

In this case, in Figure 123, the door open notification can be executed between the time the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24".
Furthermore, in Figure 123, if the time required from the moment the selector dwell notification is temporarily deactivated at timing "X23" until the moment the selector dwell notification is re-executed at timing "X24" is relatively long enough to be perceptible to human perception (for example, 3 to 5 seconds), then when the door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X24", this door open notification can be perceived by human sight and hearing.

In contrast, in Figure 123, if the time required from the moment the selector dwell notification is temporarily deactivated at timing "X23" to the moment the selector dwell notification is re-executed at timing "X24" is extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) to the point that it cannot be perceived by human senses, then even if a door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X23", it will be difficult for humans to perceive this door open notification visually or aurally.
However, even if the time required from "X23" to "X24" is extremely short and imperceptible to human perception, it may still be perceptible to human hearing that the selector dwell notification was temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23" and then re-executed at the timing of "X24".

In other words, when the selector occupancy notification is temporarily deactivated at the timing of "X23," the voice message "Please call an attendant" output from speaker 22 is interrupted midway, and when the selector occupancy notification is reactivated at the timing of "X24," the voice message "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning. Therefore, it sounds like, for example, "Please call an attendant... Please call an attendant," so it is possible for human hearing to recognize that the selector occupancy notification was deactivated and then reactivated.
Furthermore, if the speaker 22 outputs an alarm sound such as "buzz" or "beep" as a selector dwell notification, it is either impossible for the human ear to perceive that the selector dwell notification has been deactivated and then reactivated, or if it can be perceived, only for a brief moment.

Furthermore, for example, the door opening is managed by the sub-control board 80, and the door opening notification is canceled (terminated) when a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the detection of the door opening. In this case, the door opening notification performs two actions: an audio output such as "The door is open" from the speaker 22, and a text display such as "Door open" on the image display device 23.
In this case, if the selector dwell time notification is to be temporarily canceled and then re-executed before a predetermined time has elapsed since the detection of door opening, the door opening notification can be executed between the time the selector dwell time notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 123 and the time the selector dwell time notification is re-executed at timing "X24".

In contrast, since the door open notification is not executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the detection of door opening, if the selector dwell time notification is temporarily deactivated and then reactivated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the detection of door opening, the door open notification will not be executed between the time the selector dwell time notification is temporarily deactivated at timing "X23" in Figure 123 and the time the selector dwell time notification is reactivated at timing "X24".

Furthermore, in Figure 123, if the door open notification is not executed between the time the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", the time required from "X23" to "X24" may be relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) to a degree that is perceptible to human perception.
In this case, between "X23" and "X24", the acquisition count display LED 78 displays the acquisition count before "CE" is displayed, the speaker 22 outputs the voice before the "Please call an attendant" message is output, and the image display device 23 displays the screen before the "Selector Error" message is displayed (for example, the game screen or the game standby screen). These displays between "X23" and "X24" are recognizable by human sight and hearing. Therefore, it is also recognizable by human sight and hearing that the selector drowsiness notification has been canceled and then executed again.

Furthermore, in Figure 123, if the door open notification is not executed between the time the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", the time required from "X23" to "X24" may be extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) to the point where it cannot be perceived by human senses.
In this case, the display on the acquisition count indicator LED 78 and the image display device 23, as well as the sound from the speaker 22, between "X23" and "X24" are difficult for humans to perceive with their sight or hearing.

However, if the selector occupancy notification is temporarily deactivated at the timing of "X23," and the voice message "Please call an attendant" output from speaker 22 is interrupted midway, and then the selector occupancy notification is reactivated at the timing of "X24," and the voice message "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like, for example, "Please call an attendant... Please call an attendant," so it is possible for human hearing to recognize that the selector occupancy notification was deactivated and then reactivated.

Furthermore, the following patterns (1) to (6) are possible as processing patterns executed between "X23" and "X24" in Figure 123.
(1) A pattern in which, in the same interrupt process (Figure 47), the selector lag notification is temporarily canceled and then re-executed. (2) A pattern in which, in one interrupt process, the selector lag notification is temporarily canceled, and then in the next interrupt process, the selector lag notification is re-executed.

(3) A pattern in which, in one interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled, and in a subsequent interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is executed again, and multiple interrupt processes are required between the time the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. (4) A pattern in which, in one interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled, and in a subsequent interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is executed again, and multiple interrupt processes are required between the time the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

(5) A pattern in which, in one interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled, and in a subsequent interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is executed again, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to elapse between the time the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. (6) A pattern in which, in one interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled, and in a subsequent interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is executed again, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to elapse between the time the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

First, we will explain the pattern described in (1) above, where the same interrupt processing temporarily cancels the selector lag notification and then re-executes the selector lag notification.
In this case, when the interrupt processing (Figure 68) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches (such as the reset switch 153) and various sensors (such as the on-off sensor 44a and on-off sensor 44b). Based on the read input signals, it generates various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data mentioned above, and if it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain ON, it determines that a selector stagnation error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating a selector stagnation error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and performs selector lag notification.
Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits a selector delay command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector occupancy notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector occupancy notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, the cancellation of the selector lag notification and the subsequent re-issuance of the selector lag notification are performed by the same interrupt handler. Moreover, the interrupt handler is executed every 2.235 ms. Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector lag notification to the execution of the re-issuance of the selector lag notification is less than the time of one interrupt (2.235 ms).

Therefore, in Figure 123, the selector dwell time notification is temporarily deactivated at the timing of "X23," and then re-activated at the timing of "X24." However, the display on the acquisition count indicator LED 78, the image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22 during the period between "X23" and "X24" are difficult for humans to perceive visually or aurally.

However, if the selector occupancy notification is temporarily deactivated at the timing of "X23," and the voice message "Please call an attendant" output from speaker 22 is interrupted midway, and then the selector occupancy notification is reactivated at the timing of "X24," and the voice message "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like, for example, "Please call an attendant... Please call an attendant," so it is possible for human hearing to recognize that the selector occupancy notification was deactivated and then reactivated.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which, in the interrupt processing described in (2)-1 above, the selector lag notification is temporarily canceled, and then in the next interrupt processing, the selector lag notification is executed again.
In this case, similar to pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (Figure 68) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on the read input signals, it generates various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification.

Subsequently, similar to pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (Figure 68) proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensors 44a and 44b remain ON, it determines that a selector stagnation error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating the selector stagnation error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Subsequently, unlike pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 performs error processing (not shown) in the main processing (Figure 67) either before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stalled error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the selector has entered a stuck error state during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquired count display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 transmits a selector delay command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case as well, the selector occupancy notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector occupancy notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
However, unlike pattern (1) above, in the first interrupt process, the selector lag notification is canceled, and in the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed that stops the game from progressing due to a selector lag error state. Then, in the interrupt process executed thereafter, the selector lag notification is executed again. For this reason, the time required from the cancellation of the selector lag notification to the execution of the selector lag notification again is approximately the time of the first interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time of the second interrupt (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).

In this case as well, in Figure 123, the selector dwell notification is temporarily deactivated at the timing of "X23," and then re-executed at the timing of "X24." However, the display on the acquisition count indicator LED 78, the image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22 during the period between "X23" and "X24" are difficult for humans to perceive visually or aurally.

However, if the selector occupancy notification is temporarily deactivated at the timing of "X23," and the voice message "Please call an attendant" output from speaker 22 is interrupted midway, and then the selector occupancy notification is reactivated at the timing of "X24," and the voice message "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like, for example, "Please call an attendant... Please call an attendant," so it is possible for human hearing to recognize that the selector occupancy notification was deactivated and then reactivated.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which, in the interrupt processing described in (3) 1 above, the selector lag notification is temporarily canceled, and then the selector lag notification is re-executed in a subsequent interrupt processing, and multiple interrupt processing is required between the time the selector lag notification is canceled and the time it is re-executed, during which time the door open notification is not executed.

In this case, similar to pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on the read input signals, it generates various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53. At this point, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification.

Subsequently, unlike pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 performs error processing (not shown) in the main processing (Figure 67) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily clears the selector stagnant error state.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the selector stagnation error state is cleared during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the number of acquired items before "CE" is displayed on the acquired item display LED 78.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80.

Subsequently, in the next interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the system proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data mentioned above. If it determines that the input sensors 44a and 44b remain ON, it determines that a selector stagnation error has been detected. It then stores an error flag indicating the selector stagnation error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Subsequently, the main control board 50, in the main processing (Figure 67), executes error processing (not shown) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stalled error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the selector has entered a stuck error state during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquired count display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 transmits a selector delay command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case as well, the selector occupancy notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector occupancy notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, in the Zth interrupt (where Z is an integer), the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled, and in the main process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation error state is temporarily canceled. Then, in the Z+1th interrupt, the number of acquired players before displaying "CE" on the acquired player LED 78 is displayed, and in the Z+2nd interrupt, the selector stagnation error is detected. Furthermore, in the main process executed thereafter, error processing is performed to stop the game from progressing due to the selector stagnation error state. Then, in the Z+3rd interrupt, the selector stagnation notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector drowsiness notification to the execution of the selector drowsiness notification again is approximately the time of 3 interruptions (2.235 ms × 3 = 6.705 ms) to 4 interruptions (2.235 ms × 4 = 8.94 ms).
Therefore, in Figure 123, the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23," and then the selector dwell notification is executed again at the timing of "X24." However, the display on the acquisition count display LED 78 and the image display device 23, as well as the sound from the speaker 22, between "X23" and "X24" are difficult for humans to perceive with their sight or hearing.

However, if the selector occupancy notification is temporarily deactivated at the timing of "X23," and the voice message "Please call an attendant" output from speaker 22 is interrupted midway, and then the selector occupancy notification is reactivated at the timing of "X24," and the voice message "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like, for example, "Please call an attendant... Please call an attendant," so it is possible for human hearing to recognize that the selector occupancy notification was deactivated and then reactivated.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which, in the interrupt processing described in (4) 1 above, the selector lag notification is temporarily canceled, and then the selector lag notification is re-executed in a subsequent interrupt processing, and multiple interrupt processing is required between the time the selector lag notification is canceled and the time it is re-executed, during which the door open notification is executed.

In this case, similar to pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (Figure 68) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on the read input signals, it generates various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53. At this point, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification.

Subsequently, unlike the pattern in (1) above, when the interrupt processing (Figure 68) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data mentioned above, and when it determines that the door switch 17 is ON, it determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected and stores an error flag indicating door opening in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Subsequently, the main control board 50 performs error processing (not shown) in the main processing (Figure 67) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is on or not (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or not (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the door to the open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the door is set to open during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE" indicating door open on the acquired count display LED 78 as a door open notification.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

Subsequently, in the next interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the system proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data mentioned above. If it determines that the input sensors 44a and 44b remain ON, it determines that a selector hoarding error has been detected. It then cancels the door open notification and stores an error flag indicating the selector hoarding error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Subsequently, the main control board 50, in the main processing (Figure 67), executes error processing (not shown) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stalled error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the selector has entered a stuck error state during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquired count display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 transmits a selector delay command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123, the selector occupancy notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector occupancy notification is executed again.
Furthermore, in the Zth interrupt (where Z is an integer), the selector lag notification is canceled and the door opening is detected. In the main process executed thereafter, error processing is performed to stop the game as the door is open. Subsequently, in the Z+1th interrupt, the door opening notification is executed, and in the Z+2nd interrupt, the door opening notification is canceled and the selector lag error is detected. Furthermore, in the main process executed thereafter, error processing is performed to stop the game as the selector lag error is detected. Subsequently, in the Z+3rd interrupt, the selector lag notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector drowsiness notification to the execution of the selector drowsiness notification again is approximately the time of 3 interruptions (2.235 ms × 3 = 6.705 ms) to the time of 4 interruptions (2.235 ms × 4 = 8.94 ms).
Therefore, in Figure 123, at the timing of "X23", the selector occupancy notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. However, the execution of the door open notification is either not perceptible to human sight or hearing, or is only perceptible for a brief moment. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector occupancy notification is executed again.

Next, we will describe a pattern in which, in the interrupt processing described in (5)-1 above, the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled, and then the selector dwell notification is re-executed in the subsequent interrupt processing, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required between the cancellation of the selector dwell notification and its re-execution, during which the door open notification is not executed.

In this case, similar to pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (Figure 68) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on the read input signals, it generates various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification.
Subsequently, unlike pattern (1) above, if the interrupt processing (Figure 68) proceeds to timer setting processing (not shown), the main control board 50 sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the selector drowsiness notification was released.

Subsequently, the main control board 50, in the main processing (Figure 67), executes error processing (not shown) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily clears the selector stagnant error state.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the selector stagnation error state is cleared during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the number of acquired items before "CE" is displayed on the acquired item display LED 78.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the elapsed time check process (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector drowsiness notification was released.
Then, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector hoarding notification was canceled, and the input error check process (step S463) determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain ON, the main control board 50 determines that a selector hoarding error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating the selector hoarding error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Subsequently, the main control board 50, in the main processing (Figure 67), executes error processing (not shown) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stalled error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the selector has entered a stuck error state during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquired count display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 transmits a selector delay command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector occupancy notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector occupancy notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, in the first interrupt process, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time since the selector stagnation notification was canceled. In the main process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation error state is temporarily canceled. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the number of acquired points before displaying "CE" on the acquired points display LED 78 is displayed, and an error cancellation command is sent to the sub-control board 80. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stagnation notification was canceled, a selector stagnation error is detected. In the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the game from progressing due to the selector stagnation error state. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation notification is executed, and a selector stagnation command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to cancel the selector drowsiness notification and then re-enable the selector drowsiness notification.
Furthermore, in Figure 123, between the timing of "X23" when the selector hoarding notification is temporarily canceled and the timing of "X24" when the selector hoarding notification is executed again, the sub-control board 80 does not display the words "selector error" on the image display device 23, but instead displays the screen that was there before the words "selector error" were displayed (for example, the game screen or the game standby screen).

Therefore, in Figure 123, between the timing of "X23" when the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and the timing of "X24" when the selector dwell notification is executed again, it is possible for humans to recognize that the selector dwell notification has been canceled through sight and hearing.
Furthermore, instead of requiring a predetermined amount of time to elapse between the cancellation of the selector dwell time notification and its re-execution, the condition may be, for example, that the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned from on to off.
In this case as well, in Figure 123, the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23," and then re-executed at the timing of "X24." During this time, it is possible to recognize that the selector dwell notification has been canceled by human sight and hearing.

Furthermore, in the interrupt processing described in (5) 1 above, if the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and then re-executed in the subsequent interrupt processing, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required between the cancellation and re-execution of the selector dwell notification, and the door open notification is not executed during that time, the following example is also conceivable.

First, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on the read input signals, it generates various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53. At this point, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification.

Subsequently, the main control board 50, in the main processing (Figure 67), executes error processing (not shown) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and temporarily clears the selector stagnant error state.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the selector stagnation error state is cleared during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the number of acquired items before "CE" is displayed on the acquired item display LED 78.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 68), if the input error check process (step S463) determines that the input sensors 44a and 44b remain ON, the main control board 50 determines that a selector stagnation error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating the selector stagnation error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Subsequently, the main control board 50, in the main processing (Figure 67), executes error processing (not shown) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stalled error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the selector has entered a stagnant error state during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to timer setting processing (not shown), the main control board 50 sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the selector stagnant error state was established.
In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the elapsed time check process (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector drowsiness error state was entered.

Then, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stagnant error state was entered, the main control board 50 proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), and displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stagnant error on the acquired count display LED 78 as a selector stagnant notification.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 transmits a selector delay command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector occupancy notification is canceled at the timing "X23" in Figure 123, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector occupancy notification is executed again at the timing "X24".

Furthermore, in the first interrupt process, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled, and in the main process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation error state is temporarily canceled. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the number of acquired balls before displaying "CE" on the acquired ball count display LED 78 is displayed, and an error cancellation command is sent to the sub-control board 80. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, if a selector stagnation error is detected, the main process executed thereafter executes an error process to stop the game's progress due to the selector stagnation error state, and in the interrupt process executed thereafter, a timer is set to measure the elapsed time since the selector stagnation error state was established. Then, in the interrupt process executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stagnation error state was established, a selector stagnation notification is executed, and a selector stagnation command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to cancel the selector drowsiness notification and then re-enable the selector drowsiness notification.
Furthermore, in Figure 123, between the time the selector hoarding notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23" and the time the selector hoarding notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not display the words "selector error" on the image display device 23, but instead displays the screen that was on the screen before the words "selector error" were displayed (for example, the game screen or the game standby screen).

Furthermore, in Figure 123, between the time the selector occupancy notification is temporarily deactivated at timing "X23" and the time the selector occupancy notification is re-executed at timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not output the voice message "Please call an attendant" from speaker 22, but instead outputs the voice message that was output before the "Please call an attendant" message was output.
Therefore, in Figure 123, between the time the selector dwell notification is temporarily deactivated at timing "X23" and the time the selector dwell notification is reactivated at timing "X24", it is possible for humans to recognize that the selector dwell notification has been deactivated through sight and hearing.

Finally, we will describe a pattern in which, in the interrupt processing described in (6) 1 above, the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled, and then the selector dwell notification is re-executed in the subsequent interrupt processing, and a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required between the cancellation of the selector dwell notification and its re-execution, during which the door open notification is executed.

In this case, similar to pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (Figure 68) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on the read input signals, it generates various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53. At this point, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification.

Subsequently, unlike the pattern in (1) above, when the interrupt processing (Figure 68) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data mentioned above, and when it determines that the door switch 17 is ON, it determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected and stores an error flag indicating door opening in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the timer setting process (not shown), the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 and sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the error flag indicating door opening was stored.

Subsequently, the main control board 50, in the main processing (Figure 67), executes error processing (not shown) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the door to the open state, and stops the game from progressing.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the door is set to open during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE" indicating door open on the acquired count display LED 78 as a door open notification.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the elapsed time check process (not shown), the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 and stores an error flag indicating the door is open. It then determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed.
Then, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected and a predetermined time has elapsed since the error flag indicating door opening was stored, if the input error check process (step S463) determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain ON, the main control board 50 determines that a selector stagnant error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating a selector stagnant error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Subsequently, the main control board 50, in the main processing (Figure 67), executes error processing (not shown) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stalled error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the selector has entered a stuck error state during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquired count display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 transmits a selector delay command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123, the selector occupancy notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector occupancy notification is executed again.
Furthermore, in the first interrupt processing, the selector drowsiness notification is temporarily canceled, the door opening is detected, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time since the door opening was detected. In the main processing executed thereafter, an error processing is performed to stop the game as the door is open. In the interrupt processing executed thereafter, the door opening notification is performed and the door opening command is sent to the sub-control board 80. In the interrupt processing executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the door opening was detected, the door opening notification is canceled and a selector drowsiness error is detected. In the main processing executed thereafter, an error processing is performed to stop the game as the selector drowsiness error state is reached. In the interrupt processing executed thereafter, the selector drowsiness notification is performed and the selector drowsiness command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

Therefore, a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) is required to cancel the selector drowsiness notification and then re-enable the selector drowsiness notification.
Furthermore, in Figure 123, between the time the selector occupancy notification is temporarily deactivated at timing "X23" and the time the selector occupancy notification is re-executed at timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 displays the text "Door Open" on the image display device 23 instead of the text "Selector Error".

Therefore, in Figure 123, between the timing of "X23" when the selector occupancy notification is temporarily canceled and the timing of "X24" when the selector occupancy notification is executed again, it is possible for humans to recognize, visually and aurally, that the selector occupancy notification has been canceled and that the door open notification has been executed.
Furthermore, instead of requiring a predetermined amount of time to elapse between the cancellation of the selector dwell time notification and its re-execution, the condition may be, for example, that the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned from on to off.
In this case as well, in Figure 123, between the timing of "X23" in which the selector occupancy notification is temporarily canceled and the timing of "X24" in which the selector occupancy notification is re-executed, it is possible for humans to recognize, visually and aurally, that the selector occupancy notification has been canceled and that the door open notification has been executed.

Furthermore, the system detects the opening of the front door 12, measures the elapsed time since storing the error flag indicating door opening, and continues to issue a door opening notification until a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed. During this time, even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated, the door opening notification will not be canceled. This ensures reliable notification that the front door 12 has been opened.

The same applies when errors such as selector lag errors are detected. Specifically, after detecting an error such as a selector lag error and storing the error flag indicating it, the elapsed time is measured. Until a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed, the error notification, such as the selector lag notification, is executed. During this time, even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated, the error notification, such as the selector lag notification, is not canceled. This ensures reliable notification that an error such as a selector lag error has been detected.

In Figure 123, we explained the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the selector stagnation error, using this as an example. However, in the case of selector pass-through errors, hopper empty errors, and hopper jam errors, operating the reset switch 153 (turning it on) without removing the cause of the error will result in the same operation as in the selector stagnation error.

For example, in Figure 123, if the hopper motor 36 is driven at the timing "X21" but the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are not turned on or off, the main control board 50 determines that a hopper empty error has been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects a hopper empty error, it displays "HE" on the acquired count display LED 78 as a hopper empty notification, and also transmits an empty command indicating the hopper empty error to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives an empty command, it outputs a voice message from the speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" as a hopper empty notification, and displays the words "Hopper Empty" on the image display device 23.
Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X22" in Figure 123, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened.

However, while the main control board 50 is performing a hopper empty notification, even if it detects that the door has opened, it will not perform a door open notification and will continue to perform the hopper empty notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80.
However, while the sub-control board 80 is performing a hopper empty notification, even if it receives a door open command, it will not perform the door open notification and will continue the hopper empty notification.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X23" in Figure 123, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while no medals M are stored in the hopper 35, that is, while the cause of the hopper empty error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty notification.
Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clearing command, it cancels the hopper empty notification that was being performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.

However, in Figure 123, the hopper empty notification is temporarily deactivated at the timing of "X23," but then the hopper empty notification is reactivated at the timing of "X24."
Specifically, in Figure 123, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing "X23" while the cause of the hopper empty error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will cancel the hopper empty notification and then control the system to execute the door open notification. Subsequently, in Figure 123, at the timing "X24", the main control board 50 will cancel the door open notification and then control the system to execute the hopper empty notification again.

Specifically, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired amount indicator LED 78 to switch from "HE" (indicating a hopper empty error) to "dE" (indicating the opening of the front door 12) at the timing "X23" in Figure 123. Then, at the timing "X24," it controls the display of the acquired amount indicator LED 78 to switch from "dE" to "HE." Furthermore, at the timing "X24" in Figure 123, the main control board 50 transmits an empty command to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clear command at the timing indicated by "X23" in Figure 123, it cancels the hopper empty notification and controls the system to execute the door open notification. Subsequently, when the sub-control board 80 receives an empty command at the timing indicated by "X24" in Figure 123, it cancels the door open notification and controls the system to execute the hopper empty notification again.

Specifically, at the timing indicated by "X23" in Figure 123, the sub-control board 80 controls the audio output from speaker 22 to switch from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and simultaneously switches the display on image display device 23 from "Hopper empty" to "Door open." Then, at the timing indicated by "X24," it controls the audio output from speaker 22 to switch again from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and simultaneously switches the display on image display device 23 from "Door open" to "Hopper empty."

Furthermore, if the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b do not turn on or off even after a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed while the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the main control board 50 determines that a hopper empty error has been detected and displays "HE" on the acquired amount display LED 78 as a hopper empty notification. Subsequently, even if the hopper 35 has not been replenished with medals M (the cause of the hopper empty error has not been removed), if the reset switch 153 is operated, the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty notification and drives the hopper motor 36 again. However, since the hopper 35 has not been replenished with medals M, the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b do not turn on or off even after a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hopper motor 36 was driven again, so the main control board 50 executes the hopper empty notification again. Therefore, the time required to deactivate and then reactivate the hopper empty notification is approximately 3 to 5 seconds.

Furthermore, when the input sensors 44a and 44b remain ON, the main control board 50 determines that a selector jamming error has been detected and displays "CE" on the acquired count display LED 78 as a selector jamming notification. Subsequently, even if medals M remain jammed in the medal selector 110 (the cause of the selector jamming error has not been removed), if the reset switch 153 is operated, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector jamming notification. However, since medals M remain jammed in the medal selector 110, the input sensors 44a and 44b remain ON, and the main control board 50 executes the selector jamming notification again. At this time, the time required from canceling the selector jamming notification to executing it again is approximately the time of the first interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time of the second interrupt (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).

Thus, the time required to cancel and then re-execute the hopper empty notification is approximately 3 to 5 seconds, while the time required to cancel and then re-execute the selector stagnation notification is approximately the time of one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time of two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).
Therefore, the time required to deactivate and then reactivate the hopper empty notification is longer than the time required to deactivate and then reactivate the selector stagnation notification.

Furthermore, for example, in Figure 123, when the input sensor 44b turns from off to on at the timing of "X21", and then the input sensor 44a turns from off to on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector pass error has been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects a selector pass error, it displays "CP" on the acquired count display LED 78 as a selector pass error notification and transmits a selector pass error command to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector pass error command, it outputs the message "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector pass error notification, and displays the words "Selector Error" on the image display device 23.
Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X22" in Figure 123, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened.
However, while the main control board 50 is performing selector pass error notification, even if it detects door opening, it will not perform door opening notification and will continue to perform selector pass error notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80.
However, while the sub-control board 80 is performing selector pass error notification, even if it receives a door open command, it will not perform door open notification and will continue to perform selector pass error notification.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X23" in Figure 123, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector pass error has not been eliminated (the input sensor 44b turns from off to on, and then the input sensor 44a turns from off to on, resulting in both input sensors 44a and 44b remaining on), the main control board 50 cancels the selector pass error notification.

Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clearing command, it cancels the selector pass error notification that was being performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.
At this point, the selector pass error notification is canceled, but since the input sensors 44a and 44b remain on, the main control board 50 now determines that a selector dwell error has been detected and executes the selector dwell notification at the timing of "X24".

Specifically, in Figure 123, at the timing indicated by "X23", if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector passage error has not been eliminated (the input sensor 44b turns from off to on, and then the input sensor 44a turns from off to on, resulting in both input sensors 44a and 44b remaining on), the main control board 50 controls itself to cancel the selector passage error notification and execute the door open notification.
Since the input sensors 44a and 44b remain ON, the main control board 50 then determines that a selector hoarding error has been detected and controls the system to cancel the door open notification and execute the selector hoarding notification at the timing indicated by "X24" in Figure 123.

In other words, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 to switch from "CP", which indicates a selector passing error, to "dE", which indicates the opening of the front door 12, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123.
Subsequently, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 to switch from "dE", which indicates the opening of the front door 12, to "CE", which indicates a selector drowsiness error, at the timing of "X24" in Figure 123.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a selector dwell command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing indicated by "X24" in Figure 123.

Furthermore, in Figure 123, when the error clearing command is received at the timing indicated by "X23", the sub-control board 80 clears the selector pass error notification and then controls the system to execute the door open notification.
Subsequently, when the selector dwell command is received at the timing indicated by "X24" in Figure 123, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and then controls the system to execute the selector dwell notification.

In other words, at the timing indicated by "X23" in Figure 123, the sub-control board 80 controls the audio output from the speaker 22 to switch from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and also controls the display on the image display device 23 to switch from "Selector error" to "Door open."
Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X24" in Figure 123, the sub-control board 80 controls the audio output from speaker 22 to switch from "Door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and also controls the display on image display device 23 to switch from "Door open" to "Selector error."

Thus, when a selector passage error is detected, a selector passage error notification is executed. Subsequently, if the reset switch 153 is operated while the cause of the selector passage error has not been removed, the selector passage error is cleared. Then, a selector delay error is detected, and a selector delay notification is executed.
Furthermore, as described above, when a selector stagnation error is detected, a selector stagnation notification is executed. Subsequently, if the reset switch 153 is operated while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been removed, the selector stagnation notification may be temporarily canceled and then executed again.
In other words, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, there are cases where the same error notification is executed before and after the operation of the reset switch 153, and cases where different error notifications are executed before and after the operation of the reset switch 153.

In Figure 123, the selector passage error notification is canceled at the timing of "X23," but there are cases where the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, there are cases where the selector dwell time notification is executed at the timing of "X24."
For example, in the same interrupt processing (Figure 68), if input port 51 is read (step S457 in Figure 68), input error check (step S463 in Figure 68), and error processing (not shown) is performed, the door open notification is not performed.

Specifically, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches (such as the reset switch 153) and various sensors (such as the on-off sensor 44a and on-off sensor 44b). Based on the read input signals, it generates various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53. At this point, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector pass error notification.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the various data mentioned above, and if it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain ON, it then determines that a selector stagnation error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating a selector stagnation error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and performs selector lag notification.
Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits a selector delay command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector passage error notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector dwell time notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, the cancellation of the selector pass error notification and the selector dwell notification are executed in the same interrupt handler. Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector pass error notification to the execution of the selector dwell notification is less than the time of one interrupt (2.235 ms).

Furthermore, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), if the input port 51 is read (step S457 in Figure 68) and an input error check (step S463 in Figure 68) is performed, and then error processing (not shown) is performed in the main processing (Figure 67) that follows, the door open notification is not executed.

Specifically, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on the read input signals, it generates various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53. At this point, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector pass error notification.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the input error check (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data mentioned above. If it determines that the input sensors 44a and 44b remain ON, it then determines that a selector delay error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating the selector delay error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Subsequently, the main control board 50, in the main processing (Figure 67), executes error processing (not shown) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stalled error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the selector has entered a stuck error state during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquired count display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 transmits a selector delay command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case as well, the selector occupancy notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector occupancy notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
Furthermore, in the first interrupt process, the selector passing error notification is canceled, and in the main process executed afterward, the game progress is stopped due to a selector stagnation error state, and in the interrupt process executed afterward, the selector stagnation notification is executed. Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector passing error notification to the execution of the selector stagnation notification is approximately the time of the first interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time of the second interrupt (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).

Furthermore, in Figure 123, at the timing of "X23", the selector passage error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification may not be perceptible to human sight or hearing, or even if it is perceptible, it may be only for a moment. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector dwell notification is executed.
In some cases, multiple interrupt processes may be required between reading input port 51 and performing input error checks in the interrupt handler, and executing error handling in the main process. In such cases, a door open notification is executed, but the execution of the door open notification may not be perceptible to human sight or hearing, or if it is, it may only be perceptible for a brief moment.

Specifically, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the process proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on the read input signals, it generates various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53. At this point, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector pass error notification.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the system proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data mentioned above. If it determines that the door switch 17 is ON, it determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected and stores an error flag indicating door opening in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.
Subsequently, the main control board 50 performs error processing (not shown) in the main processing (Figure 67) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is on or not (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or not (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the door to the open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the door is set to open during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE" indicating door open on the acquired count display LED 78 as a door open notification.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

Subsequently, in the next interrupt processing (Figure 68), when the system proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data mentioned above. If it determines that the input sensors 44a and 44b remain ON, it then determines that a selector hoarding error has been detected. It then cancels the door open notification and stores the error flag indicating the selector hoarding error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Subsequently, the main control board 50, in the main processing (Figure 67), executes error processing (not shown) at a timing before the determination process of whether the start switch 41 is ON or OFF (step S278), or at a timing after the determination process of whether all reels 31 have stopped or OFF (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stalled error state, and stops the game from progressing.

Subsequently, in the interrupt processing (Figure 68) after the selector has entered a stuck error state during error handling in the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stuck error on the acquired count display LED 78 as a selector stuck notification.
Subsequently, when the process proceeds to the control command transmission process (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 68), the main control board 50 transmits a selector delay command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 123, the selector passage error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector dwell time notification is executed.
Furthermore, in the Zth interrupt (where Z is an integer), the selector pass error notification is canceled and the door opening is detected. In the main process executed thereafter, an error handling is performed to stop the game as the door is open. Subsequently, in the Z+1th interrupt, the door opening notification is issued, and in the Z+2nd interrupt, the door opening notification is canceled and the selector dwell error is detected. Furthermore, in the main process executed thereafter, an error handling is performed to stop the game as the selector dwell error is detected. Subsequently, in the Z+3rd interrupt, the selector dwell notification is issued.

Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector dwell time notification is approximately the time of 3 interruptions (2.235 ms x 3 = 6.705 ms) to 4 interruptions (2.235 ms x 4 = 8.94 ms). During this time, the door open notification is executed.
Therefore, in Figure 123, at the timing of "X23", the selector passage error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. However, the execution of the door open notification is either not perceptible to human sight or hearing, or if it is perceptible, it is only for a moment. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector dwell notification is executed.

Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 stores the error history in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 83, and is capable of displaying the stored error history when a request for display of the error history is made.
In the fifth embodiment, the error history can be displayed in the settings confirmation state.
Specifically, when the power is on, the game is in standby mode (before the game starts), and the number of bets is "0", turning on the setting key switch 152 will switch the machine to the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, when the system switches to the settings confirmation state, the current settings are displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and the administrator's menu screen is displayed on the image display device 23.
Furthermore, the administrator's menu screen includes an "Error History" section.
Then, while the administrator menu screen is displayed, the user operates the directional keys (Figure 112) to select the "Error History" item, and in this state, operates the push button 86 (turns it on), which displays the error history screen on the image display device 23.

The error history screen also displays an error code indicating the type of error (e.g., "CE", "CP", "dE", etc.) and the time the error was reported (e.g., "September 17, 2021, 15:35:25").
Here, for example, in Figure 123, suppose that at timing "X21", the selector occupancy notification is executed, at timing "X23", the selector occupancy notification is temporarily canceled and the door open notification is executed, and at timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector occupancy notification is executed again.
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as follows: "CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45

Furthermore, for example, in Figure 123, suppose that at timing "X21", a selector occupancy notification is executed, and at timing "X23", the selector occupancy notification is temporarily canceled, but the door open notification is not executed, and then, without the door open notification being executed, the selector occupancy notification is executed again at timing "X24".
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as follows: "CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45

Furthermore, for example, in Figure 123, suppose that at timing "X21", a selector jamming notification is executed, and at timing "X23", while the medal M remains jammed in the medal selector 110 (the cause of the selector jamming error has not been removed), the reset switch 153 is operated multiple times (for example, "3" times) in succession. In this case, the cancellation and re-execution of the selector jamming notification may be repeated multiple times (for example, "3" times).
Also in this case, for example,
It can be displayed as follows: "CE" occurred September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" deactivated September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" occurred September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" deactivated September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" occurred September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" deactivated September 17, 2021 15:35:25

Furthermore, even if the reset switch 153 is operated multiple times consecutively while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, and the selector stagnation notification is repeatedly canceled and re-executed, this history may not be stored or displayed. Instead, the history may only be stored and displayed when the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector stagnation notification is canceled after the cause of the selector stagnation error has been eliminated.

For example, in Figure 123, suppose that at timing "X21", a selector passage error notification is executed, at timing "X23", the selector passage error notification is temporarily canceled and a door open notification is executed, and at timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and a selector dwell time notification is executed.
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as follows: "CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 "CP" September 17, 2021 15:36:45

Furthermore, for example, in Figure 123, a selector passage error notification is executed at timing "X21", and at timing "X23", the selector passage error notification is temporarily canceled, but the door open notification is not executed. Subsequently, without the door open notification being executed, at timing "X24", the selector dwell time notification is executed.
In this case, for example,
It will be displayed as follows: "CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CP" September 17, 2021 15:36:45

The push button 86 is also referred to as the sub-button 86, effect button 86, or effect switch 86, and is operated when advancing (developing) the effects.
Furthermore, the directional pad 87 is also called the selection switch 87, and is used to move the cursor position on menu screens, etc.
The push button 86 and the directional pad 87 are electrically connected to the sub-control means 80 via the input port 81.
Furthermore, the error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning the power on/off or by changing settings. Unless a serious error (an unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, the error history will not be erased.

In this manner, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification is made available. If an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification, i.e., the reset switch 153, is performed while the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, the predetermined error notification is canceled once, and then the predetermined error notification is made available again.
This allows us to confirm that the reset switch 153 is functioning correctly, and also serves as a reminder that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

Figure 124 is a time chart showing the operation patterns when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stagnation error, when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the selector stagnation error, and when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 open.
In Figure 124, at the timing of "X31", if a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensors 44a and 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector jamming error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector hoarding error, it displays "CE" on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector hoarding notification, and also transmits a selector hoarding command to the sub-control board 80.
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector congestion command, it outputs the message "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector congestion notification, and displays the words "Selector congestion error" on the image display device 23.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X32" in Figure 124, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened.
However, while the main control board 50 is performing selector occupancy notification, even if it detects door opening, it will not perform door opening notification and will continue the selector occupancy notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80.
However, while the sub-control board 80 is performing selector occupancy notification, even if it receives a door open command, it will not perform door open notification and will continue the selector occupancy notification.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X33" in Figure 124, if a medal M becomes jammed in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, and the input sensors 44a and 44b remain on, meaning the cause of the selector jamming error has not been removed, and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector jamming notification.

Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clearing command, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification that was being performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.
However, in Figure 124, the selector drowsiness notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X33," but then the selector drowsiness notification is executed again at the timing of "X34."

Specifically, in Figure 124, at the timing "X33," if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector drowsiness error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 cancels the selector drowsiness notification and controls the system to execute the door open notification. Then, at the timing "X34" in Figure 124, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and controls the system to execute the selector drowsiness notification again.

Specifically, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 to switch from "CE," indicating a selector stagnation error, to "dE," indicating the opening of the front door 12, at the timing of "X33" in Figure 124. Then, at the timing of "X34," it controls the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 to switch from "dE" back to "CE." Furthermore, at the timing of "X34" in Figure 124, the main control board 50 transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clearing command at the timing indicated by "X33" in Figure 124, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification and controls the system to execute the door open notification. Subsequently, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector drowsiness command at the timing indicated by "X34" in Figure 124, it cancels the door open notification and controls the system to execute the selector drowsiness notification again.

Specifically, at the timing "X33" in Figure 124, the sub-control board 80 controls the audio output from speaker 22 to switch from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and simultaneously switches the display on image display device 23 from "Selector congestion error" to "Door open." Then, at the timing "X34," it controls the audio output from speaker 22 to switch again from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and simultaneously switches the display on image display device 23 from "Door open" to "Selector congestion error."

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X35" in Figure 124, when the medals M jammed in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 are removed—that is, when the cause of the selector congestion error is eliminated—the main control board 50 will no longer detect the selector congestion error. However, simply eliminating the cause of the selector congestion error (stopping detection of the selector congestion error) does not cancel the selector congestion notification.

Subsequently, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing indicated by "X36" in Figure 124, the main control board 50 cancels the selector drowsiness notification.
Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clearing command, it cancels the selector drowsiness notification that was being performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.

However, at the timing of "X36" in Figure 124, even though the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector hoarding notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. Therefore, the main control board 50 then executes a door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 to switch from "CE," indicating a selector hoarding error, to "dE," indicating the opening of the front door 12.

Furthermore, at the timing indicated by "X36" in Figure 124, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector congestion notification and then executes a door open notification. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from speaker 22 from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and simultaneously controls the display on image display device 23 to switch from "Selector congestion error" to "Door open."

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X37" in Figure 124, even if the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (i.e., the door switch 17 remains on), the main control board 50 continues to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

Furthermore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is on), the main control board 50 does not send a notification cancellation command to the sub-control board 80 to indicate the cancellation of the door open notification.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is on), the sub-control board 80 continues to perform the door open notification without canceling it.

Here, Figure 124 illustrates the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error, using a selector congestion error as an example. However, in the case of selector pass-through errors, hopper empty errors, and hopper jam errors, the operation is the same as in the selector congestion error case when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error.

For example, in Figure 124, if at the timing "X31", the dispensing sensor 37a remains off and the dispensing sensor 37b remains on, the main control board 50 determines that a hopper jam error has been detected.
When the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it displays "HP" on the acquired count display LED 78 as a hopper jam notification, and also transmits a hopper jam command to the sub-control board 80.
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives a hopper jam command, it outputs a voice message from the speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" as a hopper jam notification, and displays the words "Hopper Jam Error" on the image display device 23.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X32" in Figure 124, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened.
However, while the main control board 50 is performing hopper jam notification, even if it detects door opening, it will not perform door opening notification and will continue to perform hopper jam notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80.
However, while the sub-control board 80 is performing hopper jam notification, even if it receives a door open command, it will not perform door open notification and will continue to perform hopper jam notification.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X33" in Figure 124, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the medal M remains jammed in the hopper 35, that is, while the cause of the hopper jam error has not been removed, the main control board 50 controls the system to cancel the hopper jam notification.
Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clearing command, it controls the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc., to cancel the hopper jam notification that was being performed.

However, in Figure 124, the hopper jam notification is temporarily deactivated at timing "X33," but then reactivated at timing "X34."
Specifically, in Figure 124, at the timing "X33", if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the hopper jam error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will cancel the hopper jam notification and then control the system to execute the door open notification. Subsequently, in Figure 124, at the timing "X34", the main control board 50 will cancel the door open notification and then control the system to execute the hopper jam notification again.

Specifically, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 to switch from "HP" (indicating a hopper jam error) to "dE" (indicating the opening of the front door 12) at the timing "X33" in Figure 124. Then, at the timing "X34," it controls the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 to switch from "dE" back to "HP." Furthermore, at the timing "X34" in Figure 124, the main control board 50 transmits a hopper jam command to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clearing command at the timing indicated by "X33" in Figure 124, it cancels the hopper jam notification and controls the system to execute the door open notification. Subsequently, when the sub-control board 80 receives a hopper jam command at the timing indicated by "X34" in Figure 124, it cancels the door open notification and controls the system to execute the hopper jam notification again.

Specifically, at the timing "X33" in Figure 124, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from speaker 22 from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and simultaneously switches the display on image display device 23 from "Hopper jam error" to "Door open." Then, at the timing "X34," it switches the audio output from speaker 22 again from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and simultaneously switches the display on image display device 23 from "Door open" to "Hopper jam error."

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X35" in Figure 124, when the jammed medal M in the hopper 35 is removed—that is, when the cause of the hopper jam error is eliminated—the main control board 50 will no longer detect the hopper jam error. However, simply eliminating the cause of the hopper jam error (stopping detection of the hopper jam error) does not cancel the hopper jam notification.

Subsequently, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing indicated by "X36" in Figure 124, the main control board 50 controls the system to cancel the hopper jam notification.
Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives an error clearing command, it controls the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc., to cancel the hopper jam notification that was being performed.

However, at the timing of "X36" in Figure 124, even though the reset switch 153 is operated and the hopper jam notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. Therefore, the main control board 50 controls the system to now execute the door open notification. Specifically, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 to switch from "HP," indicating a hopper jam error, to "dE," indicating the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, at the timing indicated by "X36" in Figure 124, the sub-control board 80, after deactivating the hopper jam notification, controls the system to then execute the door open notification. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from speaker 22 from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and simultaneously switches the display on image display device 23 from "Hopper jam error" to "Door open."

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X37" in Figure 124, even if the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (i.e., the door switch 17 remains on), the main control board 50 continues to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

Furthermore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is on), the main control board 50 does not send a notification cancellation command to the sub-control board 80 to indicate the cancellation of the door open notification.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 is on), the sub-control board 80 continues to perform the door open notification without canceling it.

In this manner, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification is made available. If an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification, i.e., the reset switch 153, is performed while the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, the predetermined error notification is canceled once, and then the predetermined error notification is made available again.
This allows us to confirm that the reset switch 153 is functioning correctly, and also serves as a reminder that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

Furthermore, when the opening of the front door 12 (door open) is detected, the door open notification can be executed. Even if the release switch for canceling the door open notification is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 is open, the door open notification will continue to be executed without being canceled.
This prevents fraud from occurring without any notification being issued, even though the front door 12 remains open.

In this configuration, the door switch 17 is turned on and a door open notification is executed when the front door 12 is opened. However, it may also be configured to execute a door open notification when it detects that the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state, the lock is released and the front door 12 becomes openable. At this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released and the front door 12 is openable.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 may be configured to execute a door open notification even if the front door 12 is closed, when it detects that the lock on the front door 12 has been released and the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened due to the door switch 17 being turned on.
In this case, after closing and locking the front door 12, turning the door key counterclockwise to operate the release switch (turn it on) can configure the main control board 50 to cancel the door open notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the lock on the front door 12 has been released and the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened, it may send a door open command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the front door 12 should be opened, even if the front door 12 is closed.
Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 may be configured to perform door opening notification via the speaker 22 and image display device 23, etc., when it receives a door opening command, even if the front door 12 is closed.

In other words, when it is detected that the front door 12 has been opened or is ready to be opened, the system may be configured to enable door open notification, and even if an operation to cancel the door open notification (operation of the cancellation switch) is performed while the front door 12 is open or ready to be opened, the system may be configured to continue to enable door open notification without canceling it.
This prevents unauthorized actions from being committed without any notification being issued, even though the front door 12 is open or in a state where it can be opened.

Figure 125 is a time chart showing the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stagnation error. It shows the relationship between "T1," the time from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled until it can be re-enabled, and "T2," the time from when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

In Figure 125, the on/off settings for selector occupancy detection, door open detection, selector occupancy notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 123.
Furthermore, the timings of "X41,""X42,""X43," and "X44" in Figure 125 correspond to the timings of "X21,""X22,""X23," and "X24" in Figure 123, respectively.

In Figure 125, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X43" while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stagnation notification, and then, at the timing of "X44", the main control board 50 will control the system to execute the selector stagnation notification again.
The time between "X43" and "X44" is "T1," which is the time from when the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled until the selector dwell notification can be executed again.

Furthermore, assuming that in Figure 125, a medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 at the timing immediately preceding "X43", and that the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a at the timing of "X43", then at the timing of "X45", the medal M will no longer be detected by the insertion sensor 44b.
The time from "X43" to "X45" is the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

Furthermore, "when a medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a" means the moment when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is permitted to pass through the blocker 45, approaches the insertion sensor 44a, and the insertion sensor 44a switches from off to on.
Furthermore, "when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b" means the moment when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is permitted to pass through the blocker 45, passes through the insertion sensor 44a, passes through the insertion sensor 44b, and the insertion sensor 44b changes from on to off.

Here, it is assumed that medal M starts with an initial velocity of "0", falls from the medal slot 47, passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, and is detected by the insertion sensor 44a and then the insertion sensor 44b in that order. It is also assumed that the blocker 45 permits the passage of medal M.
In other words, the medal M is released from the hand at the position of the medal slot 47 without gaining momentum, passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is permitted to pass through the blocker 45, passes through the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b in order, and is detected by the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b at this time.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the system is configured to satisfy "T1 < T2". That is, the time "T1" from the time the selector dwell notification is temporarily deactivated until the selector dwell notification can be activated again is shorter than the time "T2" from the time the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

For example, suppose the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), and a medal M is inserted into the medal slot 47 to confirm whether the selector retention error has been cleared. Then, in Figure 125, at the timing "X43," the selector retention notification is cleared, and at the same time, the medal M inserted into the medal slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. If the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, at the timing "X44" in Figure 125, the selector retention notification will be executed again, and then at the timing "X45," the medal M inserted into the medal slot 47 will no longer be detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

Therefore, since the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 will not pass through the insertion sensors 44a and 44b normally, the medal M will be swallowed, but the process of adding "1" to the bet count or credit count for that medal M will not be executed.
In Figure 125, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error was explained using a selector stagnation error as an example. However, in the case of a selector pass error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is the same as in the case of a selector stagnation error.

Figure 126 is a time chart showing the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without eliminating the cause of the selector stagnation error. It shows the relationship between "T1," the time from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled until it can be re-enabled, and "T3," the time from when digit 5 is lit until digit 1 is lit.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the second embodiment and the like, digits 1 to digit 5 are included.
Digit 1 corresponds to the higher digit of the credit count (storage) display LED 76, and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit count display LED 76. Furthermore, digit 3 corresponds to the higher digit of the acquired amount display LED 78, and digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired amount display LED 78. In addition, digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73.

Furthermore, the address "F051(H)" shown in Figure 54 of the second embodiment is a 1-byte storage area where the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
LED display counter 1 is a counter used to determine which of digits 1 to 5 should be lit, and it is continuously updated with each interrupt.
Furthermore, each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned as follows: bit D0 corresponds to digit 1 signal, bit D1 to digit 2 signal, bit D2 to digit 3 signal, bit D3 to digit 4 signal, and bit D4 to digit 5 signal. Then, in the first interrupt handler, dynamic lighting control of digits 1 to digit 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit that is "1" in the LED display counter 1 is lit.

The LED display counter 1 initially takes the value "00010000 (B)". Then, with each interrupt, the LED display counter 1 updates by shifting bit "1" one digit to the right. Furthermore, in the next interrupt after the LED display counter 1's value becomes "00000001 (B)", the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000000 (B)" due to the one-digit right shift. However, during this interrupt, the LED display counter 1 is initialized, and its value is set back to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 completes one cycle every five interrupts.

Based on the above, the value of LED display counter 1 is:
"N" interrupt number: 00010000 (B)
Interrupt number "N+1": 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
Interrupt number "N+3": 00000010 (B)
Interrupt number "N+4": 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000(B) → 00010000(B) (Initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
Interrupt number "N+6": 00001000 (B)
:
This is the result.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the 5 interrupt constitutes one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically illuminated.
Specifically, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. Then, the output of the digit 5 signal makes digit 5 (set value display LED 73) lit (digits 1 to 4 are turned off).
During the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00001000 (B)", at which point the digit 4 signal is output, and digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired count display LED 78) becomes lit (digits 1 to 3 and digit 5 remain off).

During the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100(B)", at which point the digit 3 signal is output, and digit 3 (the higher digit of the acquired count display LED 78) becomes lit (digits 1, digit 2, digit 4, and digit 5 remain off).
During the next interrupt process, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010 (B)", at which point the digit 2 signal is output, and digit 2 (the lower digit of the credit count display LED 76) becomes lit (digits 1 and digits 3 to 5 remain off).
During the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)", at which point the digit 1 signal is output, and digit 1 (the higher digit of the credit count display LED 76) becomes lit (digits 2 to 5 remain off).

In Figure 126, the on/off settings for selector occupancy detection, door open detection, selector occupancy notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 123.
Furthermore, the timings of "X51,""X52,""X53," and "X54" in Figure 126 correspond to the timings of "X21,""X22,""X23," and "X24" in Figure 123, respectively.

In Figure 126, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X53" while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stagnation notification, and then, at the timing of "X54", the main control board 50 will re-execute the selector stagnation notification.
The time between "X53" and "X54" is "T1," which is the time from when the selector drowsiness notification is temporarily canceled until the selector drowsiness notification can be executed again.

Furthermore, assuming that digit 5 (set value display LED 73) lights up at the timing of "X53" in Figure 126, then digit 1 (the higher digit of the credit count display LED 76) lights up at the timing of "X55".
The time between "X53" and "X55" is "T3," which is the time from when digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) lights up until digit 1 (the higher digit of the credit count display LED 76) lights up.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, dynamic lighting control is performed to sequentially light up digits 5 to 1 with each interrupt. Also, there are 4 interrupts from the time digit 5 is lit until digit 1 is lit. Therefore, time "T3" is the time of the 4 interrupts (2.235 ms × 4 = 8.94 ms).
In the fifth embodiment, the system is configured to satisfy "T1 <T3". That is, the time "T1" from when the selector drowsiness notification is temporarily canceled until the selector drowsiness notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the time "T3" from when digit 5 (set value display LED 73) is lit until digit 1 (the higher digit of the credit count display LED 76) is lit.

Here, in Figure 126, at the timing of "X53", if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 controls the system to temporarily cancel the selector stagnation notification and then execute the door open notification. At this time, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to switch from "CE", which indicates a selector stagnation error, to "dE", which indicates the opening of the front door 12 (door open). Subsequently, at the timing of "X54", the main control board 50 controls the system to execute the selector stagnation notification again. At this time, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to switch from "dE" to "CE". Then, assuming that digit 5 (set value display LED 73) lights up at the timing of "X53", digit 1 (the higher digit of the credit number display LED 76) lights up at the timing of "X55". In other words, between "X53" and "X55," digits 5 through 1 will light up once each.

Therefore, the system controls the display of the acquired count LED 78 to switch from "CE" to "dE" at the timing of "X53," and then to switch the display of the acquired count LED 78 from "dE" to "CE" at the timing of "X54." However, between "X53" and "X54," the acquired count LED 78 will either light up "dE" only once, or it will not light up at all. As a result, it is difficult for a human to visually confirm that "dE" has lit up on the acquired count LED 78, thus preventing the user from mistakenly believing that the cause of the selector stagnation error has been removed.
In Figure 126, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error was explained using a selector stagnation error as an example. However, in the case of a selector pass error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, the operation will be the same as in the case of a selector stagnation error when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error.

Figure 127 is a time chart showing the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without eliminating the cause of the selector stagnation error. It shows the relationship between "T1," the time from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled until it can be re-enabled, and "T4," the design value of the period from when a power supply interruption event (power outage) occurs until the event is detected.

In Figure 127, the on/off settings for selector occupancy detection, door open detection, selector occupancy notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 123.
Furthermore, the timings of "X61,""X62,""X63," and "X64" in Figure 127 correspond to the timings of "X21,""X22,""X23," and "X24" in Figure 123, respectively.

In Figure 127, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X63" while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector stagnation notification, and then, at the timing of "X64", the main control board 50 controls the system to re-enable the selector stagnation notification.
The time from "X63" to "X64" is "T1," which is the time from when the selector drowsiness notification is temporarily canceled until the selector drowsiness notification can be executed again.

Furthermore, assuming that a power supply interruption (power outage) occurs at timing "X63" in Figure 127, the power supply interruption event is detected at timing "X65," and the power outage process is executed at timing "X66."
The time from "X63" to "X65" is the design value "T4" for the period from when an event that causes the power supply to be interrupted (power outage) occurs until the event that causes the power supply to be interrupted is detected.
Furthermore, the time between "X65" and "X66" is "T5," which is the time from the detection of an event that interrupts the power supply (power outage) to the execution of the power outage process.

Furthermore, Figure 127 shows the voltage level when an event occurs in which the power supply to the slot machine 10 is interrupted (power outage) (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when the circuit breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.).
In Figure 127, the voltage level when the power is on is defined as "V0". The voltage level at which it becomes possible to detect an event in which the power supply is interrupted (power outage detection level) is defined as "V1". When the power supply voltage is at voltage level "V0", the slot machine 10 operates normally. When the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1", it becomes possible to detect an event in which the power supply is interrupted.

Figure 127 shows an example where a power supply interruption (power outage) occurs at timing "X63". When a power outage occurs at timing "X63", the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at timing "X65". The time between "X63" and "X65" is "T4". In other words, after a power outage, the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" over a time period of "T4".

Furthermore, the period from the time an event that causes the power supply to be interrupted (power outage) occurs until the time that event causing the power supply to be interrupted is designed to be at least the 20 interrupt time (2.235 ms × 20 = 44.7 ms).
Furthermore, the period from the time an event that causes the power supply to be interrupted (power outage) occurs until the time that event causing the power supply to be interrupted is detected is not limited to the 20-second interruption time, but can be set appropriately according to the performance of the voltage monitoring device (power outage detection circuit) and the main CPU 55.

A voltage monitoring device (power failure detection circuit) is provided on the main control board 50. When the power supply voltage falls below the power failure detection level "V1", a power failure detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51. The power failure is detected by checking whether or not this signal was received.

Furthermore, if the power supply voltage drops further below the power failure detection level "V1" and falls below the operating limit voltage level for the main CPU 55, it will become impossible to drive the main CPU 55 (and the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
The main control board 50 cannot perform a power-off process if the power supply voltage falls below the drive limit voltage level. Therefore, if a power-off occurs at timing "X63", it is configured to complete the power-off process by timing "X66".

Power failure detection is performed within an interrupt handler that runs every 2.235 ms. However, if the power supply voltage is detected to be below the power failure detection level "V1" for two consecutive interrupts, the power failure handler will execute the power failure process in the next interrupt handler. Therefore, in Figure 127, the timing "X65" represents the timing when the power supply voltage is detected to be below the power failure detection level "V1" for two consecutive interrupt handlers. The main control board 50 then executes the power failure process in the next interrupt handler (the timing "X66" in Figure 127).

The main control board 50 backs up data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 during power outage processing. Then, when power is restored (power is turned on, power is supplied, or power is restored from a power outage), the main control means 50 executes power restoration processing and restores the backed-up data to the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. This allows the system to return to the state it was in when power was detected after power restoration.

Furthermore, Figure 127 illustrates the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated (the timing of "X63"), and the timing when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled and then re-executed (the timing of "X64").
Furthermore, in Figure 127, the timing of the event in which the power supply is interrupted (power outage) coincides with the timing of the reset switch 153 being operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector stagnation error had not been eliminated.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the system is configured to satisfy "T1 < T4". That is, the time "T1" from the time the selector drowsiness notification is temporarily canceled until it can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the design value "T4" of the period from the time a power supply interruption event (power outage) occurs until the time the event is detected.

In Figure 127, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X63" while the cause of the selector hoarding error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 controls the system to temporarily cancel the selector hoarding notification and then execute the door open notification. Furthermore, suppose that a power supply interruption (power outage) occurs approximately simultaneously with the operation (turning on) of the reset switch 153. In this case, at timing "X64" in Figure 127, the system controls the system to execute the selector hoarding notification again. Subsequently, at timing "X65," the power supply interruption is detected, and then at timing "X66," the power outage process is executed.

Therefore, if the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, and a power supply interruption (power outage) occurs almost simultaneously with the operation (on) of the reset switch 153, the system is controlled to execute the selector stagnation notification again before detecting the power outage and executing the power outage processing. Thus, during the power outage processing, data indicating that the selector stagnation notification is being executed can be backed up, so the selector stagnation notification can be executed when the power supply is restored (recovered from power outage).
In Figure 127, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error was explained using a selector stagnation error as an example. However, in the case of a selector pass error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error is the same as in the case of a selector stagnation error.

Figure 130 is a time chart showing the operation when the power supply is interrupted during a door open notification, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted, and then the power supply is restored.
In Figure 130, "when the power supply is interrupted" means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when the circuit breaker trips, or when a power outage occurs.

In Figure 130, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X91", the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the door opening.
Specifically, in Figure 130, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing "X91", the door switch 17 turns on, and the main control board 50 determines that the door has been opened. Upon detecting the door opening, the main control board 50 also executes a door opening notification. Specifically, as a door opening notification, the acquired count display LED 78 displays "dE" to indicate that the front door 12 has been opened.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the door open command, the sub-control board 80 executes a door open notification. Specifically, as a door open notification, it outputs the message "The door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the text "Door Open" on the image display device 23.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X92" in Figure 130, if the power supply is interrupted (for example, the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, the circuit breaker trips, or a power outage occurs), both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 will cease to operate, and the door open notification will also stop. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each perform a power-off process. This backs up the data in predetermined storage areas on the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.
Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X93" in Figure 130, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X94" in Figure 130, when the power supply is restored, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power-off recovery process. This restores the data backed up during the power-off process to predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. This restores the system to the state it was in when the power-off was detected. At this point, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is off, but the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a door-open notification.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X95" in Figure 130, when the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to when the front door 12 is locked and unlocked) and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquired points before "dE" is displayed on the acquired points display LED 78 and sends a notification cancellation command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the door open notification has been canceled.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a notification cancellation command, it cancels the door open notification that was being performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.

Furthermore, although the system is configured to turn on the door switch 17 and perform a door open notification when the front door 12 is opened, it may also be configured to perform a door open notification when it detects that the front door 12 has become ready to be opened.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to release the lock, the front door 12 becomes openable. At this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released and the front door 12 is openable. Furthermore, when the front door 12 is detected to be openable, the system may be configured to execute a door open notification even if the front door 12 is closed.

Thus, when power is supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or in a state where it can be opened, the door open notification can be executed. Furthermore, if the power supply is interrupted while the door open notification is being executed, and the front door 12 is subsequently closed while the power supply is interrupted, the door open notification can be executed again when the power supply is restored.

Here, it is conceivable that someone might attempt to conceal their fraudulent activity by opening the front door 12 through illegal means, then, while the door open notification is being executed, illegally cutting off the power supply, and then closing the front door 12 while the power supply is still cut off. Even in such a case, the above configuration allows the door open notification to be executed even if the front door 12 is closed when the power supply is restored, thus preventing the aforementioned fraudulent activity.

Figure 131 is a time chart showing the operation when the power supply is cut off during a door open notification, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off, and then the power supply is restored when the door key is turned to the left (the release switch is operated).
In Figure 131, as in Figure 130, the interruption of the power supply means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when the circuit breaker trips, or when a power outage occurs.

In Figure 131, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X101" and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that the door has been opened. Then, as a door opening notification, the acquired count display LED 78 displays "dE" to indicate that the front door 12 has been opened.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the door open command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice message "The door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the words "Door Open" on the image display device 23.

Subsequently, when the power supply is cut off at the timing indicated by "X102" in Figure 131, both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 cease to operate, and the door open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each perform a power cut-off process and back up the data in a predetermined storage area.
Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X103" in Figure 131, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X104" in Figure 131, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is locked or unlocked). This state continues until the timing indicated by "X105" in Figure 131.
Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X105" in Figure 131, power is restored with the door key turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to when the front door 12 is locked/unlocked). At this time, since the door key is turned counterclockwise, the release switch turns on when power is restored. Therefore, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification. The main control board 50 also sends a notification cancellation command to the sub-control board 80, indicating that the door open notification has been canceled. The sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancellation command and does not execute the door open notification.

Alternatively, instead of configuring the system so that the door switch 17 turns on and the door open notification is executed when the front door 12 is opened, the system may be configured so that the door open notification is executed when it detects that the front door 12 has become ready to be opened.
In other words, when the door key is inserted into the door key slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to unlock the door, the front door 12 becomes ready to be opened. The door switch 17 may be configured to detect when this state is reached. Furthermore, when the system detects that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, it may be configured to issue a door open notification even if the front door 12 is closed.

Thus, when power is supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, the door open notification can be executed. Furthermore, if the power supply is interrupted while the door open notification is being executed, and the front door 12 is subsequently closed while the power supply is interrupted, and then the power supply is restored with the door key turned counterclockwise (the release switch is operated), the door open notification can be prevented from being executed.

Furthermore, while the door open notification is running, closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17, and then turning the door key counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12), will activate the release switch and cancel the door open notification. However, the system may also be configured as shown below.

The system may be configured such that, while the door open notification is running, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and in this state the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to when the front door 12 is locked or unlocked) to turn the release switch from off to on, and then the door key is returned to its original position to turn the release switch from on to off, thereby canceling the door open notification.
In this case, the operation to deactivate the door open notification is to turn the door key in the opposite direction to how you would unlock the front door 12, and then return the door key to its original position.

Figure 132 is a time chart showing the operation when the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to when the front door 12 is locked/unlocked) to switch the release switch from off to on, and then the door key is returned to its original position to switch the release switch from on to off, thereby canceling the door open notification.

In Figure 132, as in Figure 131, the power supply is cut off during the door open notification, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off, and then the power supply is restored when the door key is turned to the left (the release switch is operated).
Furthermore, in Figure 132, as in Figures 130 and 131, the interruption of the power supply means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when the circuit breaker trips, or when a power outage occurs.

In Figure 132, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X111" and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12 (door open). Then, as a door open notification, it displays "dE" on the acquired count display LED 78, indicating that the front door 12 is open.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the door open command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice message "The door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the words "Door Open" on the image display device 23.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X112" in Figure 132, when the power supply is interrupted, both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 cease to operate, and the door open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each perform a power-off process and back up the data in their respective storage areas.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X113" in Figure 132, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off.
Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X114" in Figure 132, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is locked or unlocked). This state continues until the timing indicated by "X116" in Figure 132.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X115" in Figure 132, power is restored with the door key turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to when the front door 12 is locked/unlocked). At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power-off recovery process. This restores the data backed up during the power-off process to predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. This restores the system to the state it was in when the power-off was detected. At this point, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is off, but the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a door-open notification.

Furthermore, since the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is locked or unlocked), when power is restored, the release switch turns on. However, simply turning on the release switch does not cancel the door open notification, so the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 continue to activate the door open notification.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X116" in Figure 132, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch changes from on to off, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquired points before "dE" was displayed on the acquired points display LED 78, and also sends a notification cancellation command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the door open notification has been canceled.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives a notification cancellation command, it cancels the door open notification that was being performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.

Alternatively, instead of configuring the system so that the door switch 17 turns on and the door open notification is executed when the front door 12 is opened, the system may be configured so that the door open notification is executed when it detects that the front door 12 has become ready to be opened.
In other words, when the door key is inserted into the door key slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to unlock the door, the front door 12 becomes ready to be opened. The door switch 17 may be configured to detect when this state is reached. Furthermore, when the system detects that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, it may be configured to issue a door open notification even if the front door 12 is closed.

Thus, when power is supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, the door open notification can be activated. Furthermore, if the power supply is interrupted while the door open notification is running, and the front door 12 is subsequently closed while the power supply is interrupted, the system can be configured to activate the door open notification again when the power supply is restored with the door key turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked). Then, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch changes from on to off, the door open notification is deactivated.

This prevents the aforementioned fraudulent activity, even if the front door 12 is opened through fraudulent means, the power supply is cut off through fraudulent means while the door open notification is running, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off, because when the power supply is restored, the door open notification can be executed even if the front door is closed.

Although a fifth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows.
(1) In the fifth embodiment, the door switch 17 is turned off when the front door 12 is closed and turned on when the front door 12 is open, but the invention is not limited to this.
For example, the system may be configured so that the door switch 17 turns on when the front door 12 is closed, and turns off when the front door 12 is open, thereby detecting whether the front door 12 is closed or open.

(2) In the fifth embodiment, when the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected, an alert indicating the opening of the front door 12 (door open alert) is performed, but the invention is not limited to this.
For example, if a door key is inserted into the door key slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state, the lock will be released. At this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the lock on the front door 12 has been released due to the door switch 17 being turned on, it may perform a door open notification even if the front door 12 is closed.
Furthermore, the main control board 50 can display "dE" on the acquired count display LED 78 as a door opening notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the lock on the front door 12 has been released due to the door switch 17 being turned on, it may send a command to the sub-control board 80 indicating the opening of the front door 12 (door open command), even if the front door 12 is closed.
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives a door open command, it may perform a door open notification using the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc., even if the front door 12 is closed.
Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 can, for example, output an audio message from the speaker 22 saying "The door is open" or display the words "Door Open" on the image display device 23 as a door open notification.

(3) In the fifth embodiment, when the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected, both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 execute a notification (door open notification) indicating that the front door 12 has been opened. However, the embodiment is not limited to this.
When the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected, the main control board 50 will execute a door open notification, but the sub-control board 80 does not need to execute a door open notification.

Furthermore, when the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected, the main control board 50 may not execute a door open notification, and only the sub-control board 80 may execute a door open notification.
In this case, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened by the door switch 17 being turned on, it does not execute a door open notification, but it may send a command (door open command) indicating that the front door 12 has been opened to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it can execute a door open notification using the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.

(4) In the fifth embodiment, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, but it is not limited to this and may be electrically connected to the sub control board 80.
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 detects that the front door 12 has been opened by the door switch 17 being turned on, it can perform a door opening notification using the speaker 22 and the image display device 23, etc.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, commands are transmitted unidirectionally from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, if the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 so that the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 cannot detect the opening of the front door 12, nor can it receive a door-open command from the sub-control board 80. Consequently, even when the front door 12 is open, the main control board 50 does not execute a door-open notification, nor does it stop the game in an open state. In other words, even when the front door 12 is open, the main control board 50 can continue the game.

(5) In the fifth embodiment, the door open notification is canceled when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off while the door open notification is being executed, and the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to when the front door 12 is locked and unlocked) to turn the release switch from off to on. However, the embodiment is not limited to this.
For example, while the door open notification is running, the front door 12 may be closed and the door switch 17 turned off. In this state, the door key may be turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to when the front door 12 is locked or unlocked) to turn the release switch from off to on. Then, the door key may be returned to its original position to turn the release switch from on to off, thereby canceling the door open notification.

In this case, simply turning the door key counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12) and switching the release switch from off to on will not cancel the door open notification and it will continue.
Then, turning the door key in the opposite direction to how you would unlock the front door 12, and then returning the door key to its original position, is the operation to deactivate the door open notification.

(6) In the fifth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, thereby eliminating the need for a return receiving opening 131, but the embodiment is not limited to this.
For example, as shown in Figure 119, the return receiving opening 131 and upper edge 135 of the return member 130 may be positioned to the left of the vertically below the gap 112, so that the return receiving opening 131 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112. In this case, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is also not positioned vertically below the gap 112.

Furthermore, even if the upper edge portion 135 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112, if, for example, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, then one medal M can be pushed into the gap 112 to keep it in place. In this case, the pushed-in medal M will not become stuck in the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with one medal M pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause the one medal M to fly out of the gap 112. In this case, since the return receiving opening 131 is not located vertically below the gap 112, the one medal M that flies out of the gap 112 will not fall into the return receiving opening 131, but will instead fall into the storage receiving opening 35a and be stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, even if the upper edge 135 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112, if, for example, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, then two medals M can be pushed into the gap 112 to keep them inside. In this case, the two pushed-in medals M will not become stuck in the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with two medals M pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause the two medals M to fly out of the gap 112. Similar to the case where one medal M is pushed into the gap 112 and the front door 12 is closed, the two medals M that fly out of the gap 112 will not fall into the return receiving opening 131, but will instead fall into the storage receiving opening 35a and be stored in the hopper 35.

(7) In the fifth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but the embodiment is not limited to this.
For example, as shown in Figure 120, a blocking member 140 may be provided vertically below the gap 112, and this blocking member 140 may block the portion of the return receiving opening 131 that corresponds to the vertically below the gap 112. In other words, the portion of the return receiving opening 131 that corresponds to the vertically below the gap 112 may be blocked by the blocking member 140. Furthermore, the blocking member 140 can be configured to be approximately horizontal.

In this case, the medal M placed in the gap 112 can be positioned to rest on the sealing member 140. When the front door 12 is closed with the medal M still in the gap 112, the impact causes the medal M to fall out of the gap 112. At this time, since the portion of the return receiving opening 131 corresponding to the vertically below the gap 112 is blocked by the sealing member 140, the medal M that falls out of the gap 112 does not fall into the return receiving opening 131, but instead falls into the storage receiving opening 35a and is stored in the hopper 35.

(8) In the fifth embodiment, the return receiving opening 131 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. However, the embodiment is not limited to this, and for example, as shown in Figure 121, a part of the return receiving opening 131 may be positioned vertically below the gap 112.
Furthermore, even if a portion of the return receiving opening 131 is positioned vertically below the gap 112, if, for example, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, then one medal M can be pushed into the gap 112 to keep it inside. In this case, the pushed-in medal M will not become stuck and cannot be removed from the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with one medal M pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause the one medal M to fly out of the gap 112. In this case, since a portion of the return receiving opening 131 is positioned vertically below the gap 112, the one medal M that flew out of the gap 112 can fall into the return receiving opening 131, pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal dispensing opening 16, and be guided to the medal receiving tray 19.

Furthermore, even if a portion of the return receiving opening 131 is positioned vertically below the gap 112, if, for example, the gap "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, then two medals M can be pushed into the gap 112, allowing them to remain within the gap 112. In this case, the two pushed-in medals M will not become stuck in the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with two medals M pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause the two medals M to fly out of the gap 112. Similar to the case where one medal M is pushed into the gap 112 and the front door 12 is closed, the two medals M that fly out of the gap 112 can then fall into the return receiving slot 131, pass through the medal return passage 132, and through the medal dispensing slot 16, and be guided to the medal receiving tray 19.

(9) In the fifth embodiment, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the length "L2" of the screw 127, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 were configured to satisfy "L1 < L2" and "L1 < L3". That is, the length "L2" of the screw 127 was made longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 was also made wider (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, but this is not limited to this configuration.

For example, the configuration may satisfy "L1 <L2" and "L1 >L3". That is, the length "L2" of the screw 127 may be longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, but the width "L3" of the screw 127 may be narrower (smaller) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121.
This allows the screw 127 to fall into the medal guide passage 121 when it comes loose from the back of the front door 12, thus preventing the screw 127 from being lost.

As described above, a locking portion is provided at a predetermined position on the chute member 120 for securing the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12. With the seat member 120 secured to the back surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through the screw hole of the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes loose, the chute member 120 will not detach from the back surface of the front door 12 and fall.

(10) In the fifth embodiment, when one medal M enters the gap 112, the other medals M are prevented from passing from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120. However, the embodiment is not limited to this, and even when one medal M enters the gap 112, the other medals M may be prevented from passing from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.
As a result, when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M still in the gap 112, even if one medal M remains in the gap 112, it does not prevent other medals M from passing from the medal selector 110 towards the chute member 120, thus preventing the game from progressing.

(11) In the fifth embodiment, five digits (indicators) from digit 1 to digit 5 were provided, and dynamic lighting control was performed in which digits 5 to digit 1 were lit sequentially with a 5-interrupt interval as one cycle.
However, this is not the only option; for example, it may be configured to have four digits, digits 1 to digit 4, with a 4-interrupt cycle, and to sequentially light up digits 4 to digit 1 using dynamic lighting control.
In other words, the number of digits (indicators) is not limited to five, but can be set as needed. Similarly, the dynamic lighting control cycle is not limited to a 50/50 interrupt, but can be set as appropriate according to the number of digits, etc.

(12) In the fifth embodiment, the time "T1" from the time the selector drowsiness notification is temporarily canceled until the selector drowsiness notification can be executed again, and the design value "T4" of the period from the time the power supply interruption event (power outage) occurs until the time the power supply interruption event is detected, are configured to satisfy "T1 < T4". However, conversely, they may be configured to satisfy "T1 > T4".

Figure 128 is a time chart showing the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without eliminating the cause of the selector stagnation error. It shows the relationship between "T1," the time from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled until it can be re-enabled, and "T4," the design value of the period from when a power supply interruption event (power outage) occurs until the event is detected.

In Figure 128, the on/off settings for selector occupancy detection, door open detection, selector occupancy notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 123.
Furthermore, the timings "X71,""X72," and "X73" in Figure 128 correspond to the timings "X21,""X22," and "X23" in Figure 123, respectively.

In Figure 128, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X73" while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stagnation notification. Subsequently, if no event occurs that interrupts the power supply (power outage), the main control board 50 will be able to execute the selector stagnation notification again at the timing of "X76".
The time from "X73" to "X76" is "T1," which is the time from when the selector drowsiness notification is temporarily canceled until the selector drowsiness notification can be executed again.

Furthermore, assuming that a power supply interruption (power outage) occurs at timing "X73" in Figure 128, the power supply interruption is detected at timing "X74," and the power outage process is executed at timing "X75."
The time from "X73" to "X74" is the design value "T4" for the period from when the event of interruption of the power supply (power outage) occurs until the time when the event of interruption of the power supply is detected.
Furthermore, the time between "X74" and "X75" is "T5," which is the time from the detection of an event that interrupts the power supply (power outage) to the execution of the power outage process.

Furthermore, Figure 128, like Figure 127, shows the voltage level when the power supply to the slot machine 10 is interrupted (power outage).
In Figure 128, the voltage level when the power is on is defined as "V0". The voltage level at which it becomes possible to detect an event in which the power supply is interrupted (power outage detection level) is defined as "V1".

Figure 128 also shows an example where the power supply is interrupted (power outage) at timing "X73". When a power outage occurs at timing "X73", the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at timing "X74". The time from "X73" to "X74" is "T4".
Furthermore, since the power-off process cannot be executed when the power supply voltage falls below the drive limit voltage level, in Figure 128, if a power-off occurs at timing "X73", the system is set to complete the power-off process by timing "X75".

Furthermore, Figure 128 illustrates the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated (the timing of "X73"), and the timing when the selector stagnation notification can be executed again (the timing of "X76") if, after the selector stagnation notification has been temporarily canceled, no event occurs that causes the power supply to be cut off (power outage).
Furthermore, in Figure 128, the timing of the event in which the power supply is interrupted (power outage) is coincided with the timing of the reset switch 153 being operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector stagnation error had not been eliminated.

Furthermore, the system is configured to satisfy "T1 > T4". That is, the design value "T4," the period from the time a power supply interruption event (power outage) occurs until the event is detected, is shorter than "T1," the time it takes to reactivate the selector drowsiness notification after the selector drowsiness notification has been temporarily deactivated, provided that no further power supply interruption event (power outage) occurs.

In Figure 128, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X73" while the cause of the selector hoarding error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector hoarding notification and then execute the door open notification. Furthermore, suppose that a power supply interruption (power outage) occurs approximately simultaneously with the operation (turning on) of the reset switch 153. In this case, at timing "X74" in Figure 128, the power supply interruption is detected, and then at timing "X75," the power outage process is executed. If no further power supply interruptions (power outages) occur, the selector hoarding notification becomes available again at timing "X76" in Figure 128.

Therefore, if the cause of the selector lag error has not been eliminated, and a power supply interruption (power outage) occurs approximately simultaneously with the operation (on) of the reset switch 153, the selector lag notification is temporarily canceled. Then, before re-executing the selector lag notification, the power outage is detected and the power outage processing is executed. Therefore, since the data indicating the execution of the selector lag notification is not backed up during the power outage processing, the selector lag notification can be prevented from being executed when the power supply is restored (recovery from power outage).

Note that in Figure 128, at the timing of "X75", a door open notification is executed instead of a selector dwell notification. Therefore, during the power outage process, data indicating that the door open notification is being executed is backed up, so when the power supply is restored (power is restored from the outage), the door open notification is executed.
Furthermore, while Figure 128 illustrates the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, using a selector stagnation error as an example, the operation in the case of a selector pass error, hopper empty error, and hopper jam error will be the same as in the case of a selector stagnation error when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error.

(13) In the fifth embodiment, if the reset switch 153 is operated while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled, and then the selector stagnation notification is executed again without requiring any further operation, but is not limited to this.
For example, when the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector hoarding error has not been removed, and the reset switch 153 is operated, the selector hoarding notification may be canceled and the door open notification may be executed. Subsequently, when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector hoarding error has not been removed, and the release switch is operated, the door open notification may be canceled and the selector hoarding notification may be executed again.

Figure 129 is a time chart showing the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated while the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, and when the release switch is operated while the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated.
In Figure 129, at the timing of "X81", if a medal M gets stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the input sensors 44a and 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector jamming error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector hoarding error, it displays "CE" on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector hoarding notification, and also transmits a selector hoarding command to the sub-control board 80.
Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector congestion command, it outputs the message "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector congestion notification, and displays the words "Selector congestion error" on the image display device 23.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X82" in Figure 129, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened. However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, it continues the selector dwell notification without executing the door open notification.
Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the front door 12 has opened. However, while the selector occupancy notification is being performed, even if the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it does not perform the door open notification and continues the selector occupancy notification.

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X83" in Figure 129, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 cancels the selector stagnation notification and executes the door open notification. Specifically, the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 is switched from "CE," indicating a selector stagnation error, to "dE," indicating the opening of the front door 12.

Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the error clearing command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector congestion notification and executes the door open notification. Specifically, it switches the audio output from speaker 22 from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and switches the display on image display device 23 from "Selector congestion error" to "Door open."

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X84" in Figure 129, if the front door 12 is closed while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, the door switch 17 turns off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects the opening of the front door 12. However, the door open notification is not canceled even after closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17, and continues until the release switch is operated (turned on).

Subsequently, at the timing indicated by "X85" in Figure 129, if the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector dwell error has not been removed, and the door key is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise) to operate the release switch (turn it on), the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and executes the selector dwell notification. Specifically, the display of the acquired count indicator LED 78 is switched from "dE," indicating a selector dwell error, to "CE," indicating the opening of the front door 12.

Furthermore, when the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends a notification release command to the sub-control board 80 indicating the release of the door open notification. Upon receiving the notification release command, the sub-control board 80 releases the door open notification and executes the selector occupancy notification. Specifically, it switches the audio output from speaker 22 from "Door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and switches the display on image display device 23 from "Door open" to "Selector occupancy error."

Here, Figure 129 illustrates the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated while the front door 12 is open and the cause of the error has not been removed, and when the release switch is operated while the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the error has not been removed, using a selector stagnation error as an example.
However, not limited to these cases, in the case of a selector pass error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated while the front door 12 is open and the cause of the error has not been removed, and if the release switch is operated while the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the error has not been removed, the system will operate in the same manner as in the case of a selector stagnation error.

Furthermore, in Figure 129, the door switch 17 is configured to turn on and a door open notification is executed when the front door 12 is opened. However, for example, the system may be configured to execute a door open notification when it detects that the front door 12 has become ready to be opened.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key slot of the front door 12 and the door key is turned clockwise in this state, the lock is released and the front door 12 becomes openable. At this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released and the front door 12 is openable.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 may be configured to execute a door open notification even if the front door 12 is closed, when it detects that the lock on the front door 12 has been released and the front door 12 is in a state where it can be opened due to the door switch 17 being turned on.
In this case, after closing and locking the front door 12, turning the door key counterclockwise to operate the release switch (turn it on) can configure the main control board 50 to cancel the door open notification.

In this manner, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification is made available. Subsequently, when it is detected that the front door 12 has been opened or is ready to be opened, and the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, if an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification (operation of the reset switch 153) is performed, the predetermined error notification is temporarily canceled, and then the door open notification is made available. Subsequently, when the front door 12 is closed or locked, and the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, if an operation to cancel the door open notification (operation of the release switch) is performed, the door open notification is canceled, and then the predetermined error notification is made available again.

This allows us to confirm that the reset switch 153 is functioning correctly, and also serves as a reminder that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.
In addition, when the front door 12 is open and the cause of a predetermined error has not been removed, if the reset switch 153 is operated, the predetermined error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed, thereby informing the user again that the front door 12 is open, and thus preventing fraudulent activity.

(14) In the fifth embodiment, the processes for detecting an error, executing an error notification, and canceling the error notification are performed in the interrupt handler.
Furthermore, within the same interrupt processing, there are cases where the error notification is temporarily canceled and then re-executed.
In the example shown in Figure 123, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" while the cause of the selector drowsiness error has not been eliminated, the selector drowsiness notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Subsequently, at timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector drowsiness notification is executed again.

However, in the same interrupt processing, there are cases where the selector drowsiness notification is canceled and then executed again. In this case, the door open notification is not executed.
Thus, depending on the order in which errors are detected, error notifications are issued, and error notifications are canceled within the interrupt processing, there are cases where the selector drowsiness notification is canceled, and then the selector drowsiness notification is re-executed without subsequently executing the door open notification.

Furthermore, in a single interrupt process, there may be cases where only one of the following processes is executed: error detection, error notification, or error notification cancellation. In such cases, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector lag error has not been removed, the selector lag notification may be canceled, the door open notification may be executed, and then the door open notification may be canceled and the selector lag notification may be executed again.

(15) In the fifth embodiment, when the return member 130 is fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, the upper edge portion 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal.
However, the upper edge portion 135 is not limited to this, and may be inclined such that its height gradually decreases from the front to the back in the direction perpendicular to the plane of Figure 113. In other words, the upper edge portion 135 may be inclined such that its height is higher at the front and lower at the back in the direction perpendicular to the plane of Figure 113.

In this case, when a medal M is placed in the gap 112 and rested on the upper edge 135, a force acts on the medal M to slide toward the back in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 113. That is, a force acts on the medal M to slide toward the back of the front door 12. Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and resting on the upper edge 135 is more likely to remain within the gap 112. Thus, when the front door 12 is closed with the medal M still in the gap 112, the medal M is less likely to fall out of the gap 112 even with the impact of closing the front door 12.

When one medal M remains within the gap 112, other medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 will hit and stop upon the first medal M in the gap 112. At this time, the accumulation of other medals M in the medal passage 111 causes the insertion sensors 44a and 44b to remain on, triggering a selector accumulation notification. This allows for indirect detection of the presence of a medal M within the gap 112.

Conversely, the upper edge 135 may be inclined such that its height gradually decreases from the back to the front in the direction perpendicular to the plane of Figure 113. That is, the upper edge 135 may be inclined such that its height is higher at the back and lower at the front in the direction perpendicular to the plane of Figure 113.

In this case, when a medal M is placed in the gap 112 and then rested on the upper edge 135, a force acts on the medal M to slide toward the front, perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 113. That is, a force acts on the medal M to slide toward the opposite direction from the back of the front door 12 (towards the inside of the cabinet 13). Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and resting on the upper edge 135 is likely to slide out of the gap 112 toward the inside of the cabinet 13. Consequently, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and resting on the upper edge 135 is less likely to remain inside the gap 112.

(16) In the fifth embodiment, the opening at the top of the hopper 35 was made into a storage receiving port 35a. The storage receiving port 35a was provided below the hopper 35 side end of the chute member 120 (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121).
However, this is not the only option. For example, the upper edge of the side wall of the hopper 35 may be positioned above the hopper 35 side end of the chute member 120 (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). In other words, the upper opening of the hopper 35 may be positioned above the hopper 35 side end of the chute member 120 (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121).

In this case, for example, a recess is provided at a predetermined position on the side wall of the hopper 35, cut out downward from the upper end of the side wall of the hopper 35. Furthermore, the lower end of this recess is positioned below the hopper 35 side end of the chute member 120 (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). This recess can then serve as a storage and receiving opening 35a for receiving the medals M guided by the chute member 120.

In this case, with the front door 12 closed, the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) faces the recess that will serve as the storage receiving port 35a.
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) may be inserted into the inside of the recess that serves as the storage receiving port 35a.

(17) The first to fifth embodiments, and the various modifications shown in the first to fifth embodiments, are not limited to being implemented individually, but can also be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Sixth Embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to error detection. In the sixth embodiment, after an error is detected, the error cannot be cleared until predetermined conditions are met.
In the following explanation, "error" refers to a "recoverable error" and does not include "unrecoverable errors."
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be resolved by eliminating the cause of the error without turning the power on or off.
Below, we will illustrate the following as examples of errors: hopper errors, selector errors, and door open errors.
Hopper errors include, for example,
"HP" error: hopper 35 medal jam (stagnation) error "HE" error: hopper 35 is empty of medals error "H0" error: hopper 35 dispensing sensor 37 malfunction.
Note that the above error does not represent all hopper errors.

The "HP" error occurs, for example, when the dispensing sensors 37a and/or 37b detect a medal (dispensing sensors 37a and/or 37b turn on), but the dispensing sensors 37a and/or 37b do not turn off even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (they remain in a constantly on state).
The "HE" error occurs when the hopper motor 36 is driven and the dispensing process is executed, but the dispensing sensors 37a and/or 37b do not detect any medals (dispensing sensors 37a and/or 37b are off). Specifically, it is an error that occurs when there are no more medals left in the hopper 35.
The "H0" error occurs when the on/off timing of the dispensing sensors 37a and 37b is not within the range of the reference values, for example, when the time from when dispensing sensor 37a turns on to when dispensing sensor 37b turns on does not fall within the reference time.

Also, selector errors include, for example,
"CE" error: Medal retention error in the medal selector "CP" error: Improper passage error of medals in the medal selector "CH" error: Abnormality of the passage sensor 46 located in the medal selector "C0" error: Abnormality of the input sensor 44 located in the medal selector "C1" error: Abnormal medal insertion error
Note that the above error does not mean that all selector errors occur.
The "CE" error occurs when, of the two input sensors 44a and 44b, the downstream input sensor 44b is turned on (after detecting a medal), but does not turn off even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.
The "CP" error occurs, for example, when the input sensor 44a is turned on, but the input sensor 44b is not turned on and the input sensor 44a is turned off.

The "CH" error indicates that an abnormality in the aisle sensor 46 has been detected. For example, this error occurs when the aisle sensor 46 detects a medal (the aisle sensor 46 turns on) but does not turn off even after a predetermined time has elapsed.
The "C1" error occurs when an abnormality in the passage time is detected by the passage sensor 46 or the input sensor 44a or 44b.

Furthermore, the door open error is referred to as the "dE" error and is detected when the front door 12 is opened. This error can be cleared by closing the front door 12 and performing the error clearing operation (described later) by turning the door key in a predetermined direction.
In the following, when we refer to a hopper error, we mean any error relating to any of the hoppers described above, or any other error relating to a hopper not described above.
Similarly, when we refer to a selector error below, it means an error relating to any of the selectors described above, or any error relating to a selector other than those described above.

The above errors such as "HP" and "CE" are displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78 (error display on the main side). For example, if the acquisition count display LED 78 displays "*0"("*" indicates off) before an error occurs, when an "HP" error occurs, the acquisition count display LED 78 switches from "*0" to "HP". Then, when the "HP" error is cleared, the acquisition count display LED 78 returns from "HP" to "*0".
Furthermore, if an error occurs, a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the error command, the sub-control board 80 displays an image corresponding to the received error command on the image display device 23, outputs a sound corresponding to the error from the speaker 22, and illuminates the indicator lamp 21 in a color corresponding to the error.
When the error is cleared, a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the error clearing command, the sub-control board 80 restores the state of the image display device 23, speaker 22, and indicator lamp 21 to the state they were in before the error occurred.

The following examples illustrate the case where a second error, a selector error, occurs while a first error, a hopper error, is occurring (Figure 133), and the case where a second error, a hopper error, occurs while a first error, a selector error, is occurring (Figure 134).
Here, it is extremely unlikely that a selector error and a hopper error would occur simultaneously during gameplay. Specifically, this is because it is practically impossible for the medal payout process to be executed when a selector error occurs.
Furthermore, when a hopper error occurs, the blocker 45 is turned off, so even if a medal is inserted, it will not reach the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. For this reason, it is practically impossible for a selector error to occur simultaneously with a hopper error.

However, for example, firstly, if a medal is inserted while a hopper error (for example, an "HE" error) occurs, it may pass through the blocker 45 for some reason (for example, if there is a malfunction in the drive of the blocker 45) and reach the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Also, if a medal insertion scam occurs while a hopper error is occurring, the system may detect an abnormal medal insertion.
Secondly, if a hopper fraud occurs while a selector error is occurring, an abnormality in the payout sensor 37 may be detected.
Thus, a selector error may occur while a hopper error is occurring, or a hopper error may occur while a selector error is occurring.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the error notification is controlled to include the above-mentioned events.

Next, we will explain the process from error detection to notification using the flowchart shown in the second embodiment.
In the main processing (M_MAIN) shown in Figure 67, the main control board 50 proceeds to step S276 when it determines in step S274 that a medal has been inserted, and then executes medal management. This process determines whether or not there is a selector error based on detections from the passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Specifically, in step S463 (input error check) of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in Figure 68, it is determined whether or not a selector error has been detected for each interrupt processing.
When the main control board 50 detects a selector error, it sends a command to the sub-control board 80 to that effect. Upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 enables the notification of the selector error.

Furthermore, in the main processing (M_MAIN) shown in Figure 67, the main control board 50 determines that a minor win has occurred and executes a medal payout process in step S294. Alternatively, in the medal management in step S276, the main control board 50 determines that the settlement switch 43 has been operated and proceeds to the settlement process, executing a medal payout process for the stored medals.
During medal dispensing, dispensing sensors 37a and 37b determine whether or not there is a hopper error. Specifically, in step S463 (input error check) of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 687, it is determined whether or not a medal hopper error has been detected for each interrupt processing.

When the main control board 50 detects a hopper error, it sends a command to the sub-control board 80 to that effect. Upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 enables the notification of the hopper error.
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs during error detection or error notification, and it is necessary to back up the data related to the error, the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in Figure 69 will, for example, execute the error data backup process before the processing in step S2772.
Then, when the power is turned on, at some point during the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) shown in Figure 63, the backed-up error data is read, and the system is restored to the state it was in before the power was cut off.

Figure 133 is a time chart showing an example of error notification in the sixth embodiment, illustrating the detection status of the first error, the notification status of the first error, the detection status of the second error, and the notification status of the second error, respectively.
In Example 1 of Figure 133, the first error is a hopper error, and the second error is a selector error. However, it is not limited to these errors.
Error notification is performed by both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.
The main control board 50 provides error notification via the acquired count display LED 78. For example, when it detects the aforementioned medal retention error, it displays "CE" on the acquired count display LED 78. The sub-control board 80 also provides error notification via the effect lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23. In the following example, the "BGM" in the error notification corresponds to the output of the error notification sound from the sub-control board 80.

First, we assume that no other errors have occurred when the cause of the first error occurs. When the cause of the first error occurs, the main control board 50 detects the first error. In this example, we assume that the timing of the occurrence of the cause of the first error and the timing of the detection of the first error are simultaneous (no time lag). In reality, when the cause of the error occurs, the error is detected (determined to have occurred) by the interrupt processing executed afterward, resulting in a time lag of up to one interrupt duration (for example, 2.235 ms). However, this time lag will be ignored here.

As described above, when the main control board 50 detects a first error, it transmits an error command related to the first error to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command related to the first error, it notifies the sub-control board 80 of the first error.
On the other hand, the main control board 50 controls the system so that the operation to clear the first error is not enabled for a predetermined period after the first error is detected. It is possible to remove the cause of the first error even within the predetermined period. However, even if the cause of the first error is removed within the predetermined period, the operation to clear the first error remains disabled until the predetermined period has elapsed. Of course, it is also possible to remove the cause of the first error even after the predetermined period has elapsed.
Therefore, the notification of the first error is performed for at least a predetermined period. Within this predetermined period, the BGM related to the error is configured to loop once. In other words, the notification of the first error will result in at least one loop of BGM. The sub-control board 80 stores sound source data for outputting BGM, and playback from the beginning to the end of this sound source data corresponds to "one loop" of the BGM.
If the operation to clear the first error is not performed after a specified period of time has elapsed, the notification of the first error will continue, and the background music will move to the second loop.

Here, the start of the "predetermined period" is "a predetermined timing after the detection of the first error." The "predetermined timing after the detection of the first error" could be when the main control board 50 detects the first error, when the main control board 50 sets an error state, when the main control board 50 sends an error command to the sub-control board 80, when the sub-control board 80 starts an error notification, etc. In this embodiment, the "predetermined timing after the detection of the first error" is assumed to be "when the first error is detected."
Based on the above, in the sixth embodiment, "when the first error is detected" means "when the cause of the first error occurs" and "a predetermined timing after the first error is detected".
When the operation to clear the first error after a predetermined period has elapsed is performed, as will be described in detail in the seventh embodiment below, the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a of the front door 12, rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise, and the reset sensor 175 (Figure 147) located inside is turned on.
Note that error clearing is not limited to turning the door key DK counterclockwise; various methods are possible. For example, pressing the reset switch 153 shown in Figure 112 can be used as the error clearing operation.

When the reset sensor 175 detects that it is ON, the system determines whether the cause of the detected first error has been removed. If a predetermined period has elapsed and the system determines that the cause of the first error has been removed, the main control board 50 terminates its notification of the first error. It also sends a command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the first error has been cleared. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 terminates its notification of the first error. Conversely, if the reset sensor 175 is detected as ON, but the system determines that the cause of the first error has not been removed, the main control board 50 continues to notify the first error. Furthermore, it does not send an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 also continues to notify the first error.

Furthermore, even if the reset sensor 175 is detected as ON and it is determined that the cause of the first error has been eliminated, if a predetermined period has not elapsed, the main control board 50 will continue to notify the first error. In addition, it will not send an error clearing command to the sub-control board 80. As a result, the sub-control board 80 will also continue to notify the first error.
The determination of whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed is made, for example, as follows: First, at the start of the predetermined period, a timer value corresponding to the predetermined period is set in RWM53, and "1" is deducted for each interrupt process. Then, for each interrupt process, it is determined whether or not the timer value has become "0". If it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed, and if it is determined that the timer value is "0", it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the example shown in Figure 133, the cause of the first error is removed, but the operation to clear the first error (turning the door key DK) is performed before a predetermined period has elapsed. In this case, the operation to clear the first error is invalid, and the notification of the first error cannot be terminated.
If the operation to clear the first error is performed again after a predetermined period has elapsed, the operation becomes effective, and the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the first error has been cleared. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 terminates the notification of the first error.

Furthermore, Example 1 in Figure 133 shows an example where the cause of the second error occurs during a predetermined period. In this Example 1, no other errors are detected during the predetermined period. Therefore, although the cause of the second error occurs before the predetermined period has elapsed, the second error is not detected during the predetermined period.
One way to control this is to prevent the main process from proceeding to the detection of the second error during a predetermined period.
In this example 1, the second error (selector error) is not detected during the specified period, but other errors may be detectable.
Once a predetermined period for the first error has elapsed, the main control board 50 detects the second error and sends a command to the sub-control board 80 to that effect. As a result, the sub-control board 80 performs notification of the second error. Therefore, notification of the second error occurs approximately simultaneously with the end of the predetermined period corresponding to the first error (the predetermined period corresponding to the second error begins).
In this embodiment, the notification of the first error and the notification of the second error are not performed redundantly. Therefore, the notification of the second error starts after the notification of the first error has finished. It goes without saying that the second error has been detected before the notification of the second error begins.
Furthermore, once the notification of the second error begins, the period from the start of the notification of the second error to a predetermined period during which the operation to clear the second error is invalid becomes invalid. Therefore, this is the same as in the case of the first error. For this reason, it is not possible to clear the second error (terminate the notification of the second error) during the predetermined period.

The notification for the second error, like the notification for the first error, is configured to loop the background music (BGM) once over a predetermined period. Therefore, the notification for the second error is configured to cause at least one loop of BGM.
After a specified period has elapsed, it becomes possible to clear the second error. Clearing the second error is the same as clearing the first error: rotate the door key DK 45 degrees counterclockwise.
When the cause of the second error is eliminated and the second error is cleared after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the clearing operation becomes effective, and the main control board 50 terminates the notification of the second error on its side and sends a command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the second error has been cleared. Upon receiving this command, the sub-control board 80 terminates the notification of the second error.

As described above, when a first error occurs, notification of the first error is given for at least a predetermined period. Similarly, when a second error occurs, notification of the second error is given for at least a predetermined period. Therefore, even if a second error occurs after the first error but before the notification of the first error is completed, the notification period for the first error (the predetermined period) will not be shortened.
Regarding the first error, since the first error is detected almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the cause of the first error, the time of detection of the first error is stored in the error log (history) in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 as the date and time of the first error's occurrence.
In contrast, for the second error, the time of detection of the second error is stored as the date and time of the second error's occurrence. Therefore, strictly speaking, there may be a discrepancy between the actual date and time the second error occurred and the date and time of occurrence (actually the detection date and time) stored in the RWM53.

Figure 134 is a time chart showing Example 2 of error notification. The difference between Example 2 and Example 1 (Figure 133) is that Example 2 detects the second error even during the predetermined period of the first error. Furthermore, in Example 2, the first error is a selector error, and the second error is a hopper error. However, the errors are not limited to these.
In Figure 134, if a factor for a second error occurs within a predetermined period after the first error has been detected, the second error will be detected even if it is within that predetermined period. However, the notification of the second error will not overlap with the notification of the first error. Once the factor for the first error is removed, the predetermined period for the first error has elapsed, and the operation to clear the first error is performed, the notification of the first error will end. Once the notification of the first error has ended, the notification of the second error, which had already been detected, will begin. Once the notification of the second error has begun, a new predetermined period will start as the notification period for the second error, and the operation to clear the second error will be invalid until that predetermined period has elapsed. Once the factor for the second error is removed, the predetermined period has ended, and the operation to clear the second error is performed, the notification of the second error will end.
As described above, when a first error occurs, notification of the first error is given for at least a predetermined period. Similarly, when a second error occurs, notification of the second error is given for at least a predetermined period. Therefore, even if a second error occurs after the first error, the notification period for the first error (the predetermined period) is not shortened.

Figure 135 is a time chart showing Example 3 of error notification. In Example 3, the first error is either a hopper error or a selector error. Alternatively, it may be a recoverable error other than these two.
Example 3 in Figure 135 shows an example in which, after the first error is detected, the front door 12 is opened within a predetermined period, and a door opening error (hereinafter simply referred to as "door error") is detected.
In the sixth embodiment, the door error can be detected and reported even during a predetermined period. Furthermore, the door error can be cleared at any time (even during the predetermined period), and the notification of the door error ends at the moment the front door 12 is closed and the clearing operation is performed. In other words, unlike the first error, the door error is not an error that is reported for a predetermined period once it occurs.
When the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 turns on, and the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened. When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened, it issues an error notification on the main side (displaying "dE") and sends a command to the sub-control board 80 to that effect. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it issues a door error notification.
When the selector error or hopper error described above occurs, the hall staff open the front door 12 to eliminate the cause of the error. However, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected, a door error occurs.

In Example 3 of Figure 135, if the front door 12 is opened within a predetermined period after the first error is detected, a door error is immediately detected regardless of whether the predetermined period has passed or not. Furthermore, as soon as a door error is detected, a door error notification is made. Therefore, the notification for the first error and the notification for the door error overlap. For example, background music corresponding to the notification for the first error and a door error sound (for example, an alarm sound or a voice repeatedly saying "The door is open") are output simultaneously.
Here, while a door error is being reported, the volume of the first error notification may be lower than normal. Alternatively, while a door error is being reported, the first error notification may be image-only, with no audio output. Furthermore, while a door error is being reported, the first error notification may be interrupted.

When the front door 12 is closed and the door error clearing operation is performed, it is determined whether the front door 12 is closed or not, regardless of whether it is within the predetermined period. If it is determined that the front door 12 is closed (the door error has been cleared), the door error notification ends. Therefore, only the notification of the first error continues.
The first error, as in the example above, cannot be cleared until a predetermined period has elapsed, and can only be cleared by performing the first error clearing operation after the predetermined period has elapsed.
Although not shown in Figure 135, if the front door 12 is closed and the door error release operation is performed after a predetermined period has elapsed for the first error and after the cause of the first error has been removed, both the notification of the door error and the notification of the first error may be terminated. In this case, the door error release operation will also serve as the release operation for the first error.

Figure 136 is a time chart showing Example 4, in which a power outage (an event that interrupts the power supply) occurred during the occurrence of the first error.
In this example, we assume that "the predetermined period = time t1 + time t2", and that after the first error is detected and the predetermined period begins, a power outage occurs at time t1.
When the first error is detected, an error notification is issued. However, if a power outage occurs, the power supply will eventually cease, and the error notification will also be interrupted.
In this embodiment, data indicating that time t1 of a predetermined period has elapsed is stored in the RWM53 as backup data during the power-off process.
After a power outage, when power is restored, the system returns to its state before the power outage (regardless of whether an error was detected before the power outage). If an error was detected before the power outage, after the power restoration process shown in Figure 42 is completed, the data related to time t1, which was backed up at the time of the power outage, is read, and the notification of the first error is resumed at a predetermined timing.

Furthermore, after the power is restored from the outage, the operation to clear the first error is disabled until time t2 has elapsed. This ensures that the notification period for the first error (a predetermined period), in other words, the period during which the operation to clear the first error is disabled, is maintained, including both the period before and after the power outage. In this way, even if the power is cut off after the first error is detected, for example due to fraudulent activity, the first error can be notified after the power is restored from the outage, and the predetermined period is maintained, including both the period before and after the power outage.
If the notification of the first error resumes after power is restored from a power outage, the first error cannot be cleared until time t2 has elapsed since the notification resumed. After time t2 has elapsed, the first error can be cleared if the cause of the first error has been removed.

Example 5 in Figure 137 is a time chart showing an example where a power outage occurs while the first error is occurring, and is a modified version of Figure 136.
In this example, if a power outage occurs after a predetermined time t1 has elapsed, the data related to time t1 is not backed up.
Furthermore, after power is restored, provided that the cause of the first error has been eliminated, the notification of the first error can be canceled even if the notification time for the first error after power restoration is less than time t2. In this way, the notification of the first error is resumed after power restoration, but a predetermined time is not required in total before and after the power failure.
When controlling in this manner, for example, when power is restored from an outage, "0" is stored in the RWM53 as a timer value corresponding to the remaining time of a predetermined period. Therefore, if the cause of the first error is removed after power is restored from an outage, the notification of the first error can be terminated immediately when the operation to clear the first error is performed.

Next, we will explain the various occurrence conditions of selector errors and hopper errors, and specific examples of notification methods in those cases. In the following explanation, selector error 1 is an error caused by the backflow of medals. For example, when the input sensor 44b (downstream) first detects a medal, and then the input sensor 44a (upstream) detects a medal, it is determined that a backflow of medals has occurred, resulting in selector error 1.
Furthermore, selector error 2 is an error caused by a stagnation of medals. For example, the input sensors 44a and/or 44b switch from off to on to off as medals pass through, but this error corresponds to a case where the on state persists for a predetermined time.
The following example shows a case where selector error 1 occurs first, followed immediately by selector error 2.

Here, when a reverse flow of medals occurs (including fraudulent insertion of medals due to cheating), the input sensor 44 detects an abnormality, resulting in selector error 1 (reverse flow). However, when a reverse flow of medals occurs, a medal jam usually occurs within the medal selector. Therefore, by removing the resulting medal jam, the cause of selector error 1 is eliminated.
Similarly, when Selector Error 2 (Stagnation) occurs, a medal jam occurs within the medal selector, and removing the jammed medal eliminates the cause of Selector Error 2.
Furthermore, if the hopper error is, for example, a hopper empty error, the cause of the hopper error can be eliminated by replenishing the hopper with medals. Also, if the hopper error is, for example, a medal jam at the hopper exit, the cause of the hopper error can be eliminated by removing the jammed medals.
Furthermore, if the hopper error is, for example, due to a malfunction of the dispensing sensor 37a (including fraudulent dispensing due to cheating), there is no operation to eliminate the cause of the hopper error, and after the error clearing operation is performed, it is determined again whether or not there is a malfunction in the dispensing sensor 37.

In the following example, regardless of whether the error cannot be cleared during the specified period (corresponding to the "specified time" mentioned above), it is assumed that the cause of the error has been removed (the error has not occurred) at the time the error clearing operation is performed.
Furthermore, the "error clearing operation" corresponds to turning the door key DK 45 degrees counterclockwise (however, as mentioned above, it may also be an operation such as turning on the reset switch 153).

Figure 138(a) is a time chart showing example 6 of error notification.
In this example, the cause of selector error 1 occurs first, followed immediately by selector error 2. In this case, the notification of selector error 1 is performed based on the first selector error 1 that occurred. Once the notification of selector error 1 begins, the notification of selector error 1 will not end even if a selector error release operation is performed during the "(error) unreleaseable period 1" (5 seconds in this example).
Furthermore, the diagram shows an example where a cause for a hopper error occurs while selector error 1 is being notified and during the unrecoverable period 1. As mentioned above, since the game is interrupted after a selector error occurs, medal payouts are not performed, so it is unlikely that a hopper error will occur. However, there is a risk that medal payouts may be forcibly performed due to cheating, for example, and in such cases a hopper error will occur.

Based on the above, during the notification of Selector Error 1 (during the period when it cannot be deactivated 1), Selector Error 1, Selector Cellar 2, and Hopper Error all occurred simultaneously.
Furthermore, if the cause of the selector error is removed and a selector error release operation is performed during the initial unreleaseable period 1, the release operation is invalid, and therefore the notification of selector error 1 does not terminate.
Next, if a selector error clearing operation is performed 5 seconds after the start of the selector error 1 notification, the operation is considered valid, and the selector error 1 notification ends.
Note that the error clearing operation, which is performed 5 seconds after the unrecoverable period, can be performed at any time after 5 seconds have elapsed (the same applies to other periods of unrecoverable nature).
Once the selector error cancellation operation (enable) is performed and the notification of selector error 1 ends, the notification switches to selector error 2. This cancellation period 2 for notifying selector error 2 also continues for another 5 seconds. Therefore, even if more than 5 seconds have passed since the cause of selector error 2 occurred and the cause of selector error 2 has been removed, the notification of selector error 2 cannot be terminated until the cancellation period 2 has ended.

If a selector error release operation is performed 5 seconds after the start of the selector error 2 notification, the operation is considered valid, and the selector error 2 notification ends. Once the selector error 2 notification ends, the system switches to the hopper error notification. The unreleaseable period 3 for this hopper error notification also continues for another 5 seconds. Therefore, even if more than 5 seconds have passed since the cause of the hopper error occurred and the cause of the hopper error has been removed, the hopper error notification cannot be terminated until the unreleaseable period 3 ends.
If the hopper error is cleared five seconds after the hopper error notification begins, the operation is considered valid, and the hopper error notification will end.
As described above, even if three errors occur simultaneously, a 5-second error notification is issued for each error, and each 5-second period is a non-recoverable period.

Figure 138(b) is a time chart showing a modified version of (a).
The example in Figure 138(b) shows the case where the selector error clearing operation is performed 20 seconds after the initial selector error 1 notification in Figure 138(a).
In this case, the selector error clearing operation occurs 20 seconds after the notification of selector error 1, so the initial unrecoverable period 1 (5 seconds) has passed. Therefore, the notification of selector error 1 ends upon the error clearing operation, just as in Figure 138(a).
However, no matter how many seconds have passed since the expiration of Unrecoverable Period 1 before the error clearing operation is performed, the other Unrecoverable Periods (Unrecoverable Period 2 and Unrecoverable Period 3) will not be canceled or shortened.
Therefore, even if the selector error is cleared 20 seconds after the notification of selector error 1, the notification of selector error 1 will end, but the notification of selector error 2 will start. The notification of selector error 2 has a 5-second period during which it cannot be cleared, so any operation to clear the selector error during this period will be ineffective. If the selector error is cleared after the 5-second period has elapsed, the operation will be effective, and the notification of selector error 2 will end. However, a hopper error notification will then be issued.

Figure 139 is a time chart showing example 7 of error notification.
In this example 7, if multiple errors occur within the initial unrecoverable period of "5 seconds," the unrecoverable period will continue beyond 5 seconds.
In the example shown in Figure 139, the cause of the hopper error occurs first, and a hopper error notification is issued. Next, before "5 seconds" have elapsed since the hopper error notification, selector error 1 (backflow) and selector error 2 (stagnation) occur.
In this case, even if the hopper error clearing operation is performed five seconds after the start of the hopper error notification, the hopper error notification cannot be terminated. Furthermore, in this example 7, the hopper error clearing operation becomes effective after ten seconds have elapsed since the hopper error notification.
In this example 7, the period until the hopper error release operation becomes effective is set to "10 seconds," but it is not limited to this; it could also be "15 seconds." If it is "15 seconds," it will be equal to "the period during which the hopper error notification cannot be released (5 seconds) + the period during which the selector error 1 notification cannot be released (5 seconds) + the period during which the selector error 2 notification cannot be released (5 seconds)."

Furthermore, after 10 seconds have elapsed since the hopper error was reported, if all causes of the hopper error, selector error 1, and selector error 2 have been eliminated and the error clearing operation has been performed, the hopper error report will be terminated. Moreover, after the hopper error report has been terminated, the reports for selector error 1 and selector error 2 will not be issued.
As in this example 7, if other errors accumulate during the notification period for the initial error, and a sufficient notification period for the errors has been ensured, the system may return to a normal state without notifying of other errors once the initial error clearing operation is performed. Of course, when the error clearing operation is performed and the error notification ends, all causes of the errors must be eliminated.

Figure 140 is a time chart showing example 8 of error notification.
This example 8 is a case in which the cause of the hopper error first occurs, and after the hopper error is reported, selector error 1 (backflow) and selector error 2 (stagnation) occur within the first unreleasable period 1 (5 seconds). In other words, the circumstances of the error occurrence are the same as in example 7 in Figure 139.
In this example, the initial unreleaseable period 1 (5 seconds) corresponds to the hopper error, and even if a hopper error release operation is performed during this unreleaseable period 1, the hopper error notification will not end.
After the unrecoverable period 1 has elapsed, if a hopper error recovery operation is performed, the recovery operation becomes effective and the hopper error notification ends. Once the hopper error notification ends, the system proceeds to the next selector error 1 notification (unrecoverable period 2 (5 seconds)).

The unremovable period 2 (5 seconds) corresponds to the period for selector error 1, and even if a selector error removal operation is performed during this unremovable period 2, the notification of selector error 1 will not end.
After the period of non-removal period 2 has elapsed, if a selector error release operation is performed, that release operation becomes effective and the notification of selector error 1 ends. Once the notification of selector error 1 ends, the system proceeds to the notification of selector error 2 (non-removal period 3 (5 seconds)).
The unreleaseable period 3 (5 seconds) corresponds to the period of selector error 2, and even if a selector error release operation is performed during this unreleaseable period 3, the notification of selector error 2 will not end.
After the period of non-removal period 3 has elapsed, if a selector error release operation is performed, that release operation becomes effective, and the notification of selector error 2 ends.

Next, once the notification for selector error 2 has finished, the notification for hopper error is executed again (second time). Note that no hopper error has occurred at this point. The purpose of notifying the first hopper error again is to draw attention to the issue.
The second hopper error notification will continue for a period of 4 seconds (5 seconds) during which it cannot be cleared. Even if an error clearing operation is performed during this period, the notification for the second hopper error will not end. After the period of 4 has elapsed, if an error clearing operation is performed, the operation will become effective and the notification for the second hopper error will end. Once the notification for the second hopper error ends, the system will return to normal operation.
As described above, although no error has occurred at that point (the cause of the error has been removed), it is acceptable to report the initial error again for the purpose of raising awareness.

Example 9 in Figure 141 is a time chart showing a situation in which errors occurred in the order of hopper error, selector error 1, and selector error 2, similar to Figure 140.
In Example 9 of Figure 141, a cause for a hopper error occurs first, a hopper error notification is issued, and during this notification, the cause for the hopper error is eliminated, as well as the cause for a selector error.
If all error factors are removed within the unrecoverable period 1, and a hopper error clearing operation is performed after the unrecoverable period 1 has elapsed, the hopper error notification will end and the notification of the next selector error 1 will begin. In other words, although the factors for the selector error have been removed at this point, the selector error 1 will be notified based on the occurrence of selector error 1, regardless of whether the factors for the selector error have been removed at that point, and this notification will continue until the unrecoverable period 2 has elapsed. Until the unrecoverable period 2 has elapsed, any error clearing operation performed will be ineffective.

After the period of non-removal period 2 has elapsed, if an error clearing operation is performed, the notification of selector error 1 will end and the notification of the next selector error 2 will begin. Similarly, although the cause of the selector error has been removed at this point, based on the occurrence of selector error 2, selector error 2 will be notified regardless of whether the cause of the selector error has been removed at that point, and this notification will continue until the period of non-removal period 3 has elapsed. Until the period of non-removal period 3 has elapsed, any error clearing operation performed will be ineffective.
After the period of inability to clear the error (period 3) has elapsed, performing the error clearing operation will terminate the notification of selector error 2 and return the system to its normal state.
In this way, regardless of whether the cause of the error has been removed at that point, error notifications with an unrecoverable period may be issued in the order in which the errors occurred.

Although a sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows.
(1) In the example shown in Figure 136, it is also possible to continue notifying the first error for a predetermined period after the power is restored from an outage. That is, the operation to clear the first error is disabled during the predetermined period after the power is restored from an outage.
One method of such control is to back up data equivalent to the entire duration of a predetermined period when a power outage is detected and the system transitions to power outage processing.
Furthermore, in this case, after the power is restored from the power outage, notification will be made again for a predetermined period. However, if the operation to clear the first error is performed during this predetermined period, the notification of the first error may be terminated even before the predetermined period has elapsed.

(2) In the example shown in Figure 136, if a power outage occurs after a predetermined time has elapsed since the detection of the first error but before the operation to clear the first error is performed, the system can be controlled as follows.
One possible approach is to not notify the first error after the power has been restored from a power outage. This is because the first error notification has already been performed for a predetermined period of time before the power outage.
As a second method, after power is restored from an outage, the notification of the first error will be resumed. However, if a certain amount of time has elapsed (from the time the notification of the first error was resumed) without the operation to clear the first error being performed, the notification of the first error may be terminated even if the operation to clear the first error is not performed.
Furthermore, as a third method, similar to the example in Figure 137, the first error notification may be restarted after power is restored from a power outage, but the first error notification may be terminated when the operation to clear the first error is performed.

(3) In Example 1 of Figure 133, the second error is not detected until a predetermined time has elapsed after the first error has been detected. In Example 2 of Figure 134, the second error is detected even before the predetermined time has elapsed after the first error has been detected.
Alternatively, for example, after detecting the first error, the system may refrain from detecting the first error again until a predetermined period has elapsed. After the predetermined period has elapsed, it may be determined whether or not the cause of the first error has been eliminated.
In this case, if the cause of the first error has not been removed, the notification of the first error will continue. Also, even if the cause of the first error has been removed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if the operation to clear the first error has not been performed, the notification of the first error will continue.
Conversely, if the cause of the first error has been removed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed and the operation to clear the first error has been performed, the notification of the first error will be terminated.

For example, suppose a fraudulent act is committed against the hopper, resulting in an unauthorized payout. If a hopper error is detected based on the first unauthorized payout, the hopper error is reported. Next, suppose a second unauthorized payout occurs while the first hopper error is being reported. In this case, the second unauthorized payout may or may not be detected.
Furthermore, before the predetermined period has elapsed, any error clearing operation performed will be ineffective, and the hopper error notification will not terminate. Next, after the predetermined period has elapsed, when the error clearing operation is performed, the hopper error notification will terminate and the system will return to a normal state. In other words, after the error clearing operation is performed, the hopper error notification corresponding to the second unauthorized dispensing will not be performed again.
It is also possible to control it in the manner described above.

(4) If the cause of the first error has been removed, the notification of the first error has ended, and no other errors have been detected, the game can be played immediately.
Furthermore, if the cause of the first error has been eliminated, the notification of the first error has ended, and no other errors have been detected, the system can proceed to the setting confirmation state. When the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 while the game is in standby mode, and the setting key CK is rotated 90 degrees clockwise (as shown in Figure 150, described later), the system can proceed to the setting confirmation process shown in Figure 66.
(5) In the above embodiment, the specific "predetermined period" can be set in various ways. If the "predetermined period" is set to a shorter period, for example it can be set to about "5 seconds". On the other hand, if the period is set to a longer period, for example it can be set to about "60 seconds".

<Seventh Embodiment>
The seventh embodiment relates to a door key (including a setting key that corresponds to the door key).
In the seventh embodiment (and the same applies to the other embodiments), the clockwise (also referred to as "right-hand rotation") and counterclockwise (also referred to as "left-hand rotation") of the door key DK and setting key CK refer to the direction of rotation as viewed from the key side.
Figure 142 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10. When the slot machine 10 is viewed from the player's side, a door key insertion slot 160a is provided near the right edge of the front door 12 (on the right side panel 13d side) and below the coin slot 47. When the door key DK, which will be described later, is inserted into this door key insertion slot 160a and rotated 45 degrees clockwise, the front door 12 can be opened. When the front door 12 is opened, it opens relative to the cabinet 13 with the left side of the front door 12 as the pivot point in Figure 142.

Figure 143 shows the door key DK and the door key cylinder 160.
In Figure 143, (a) is a front view showing the door cylinder 160, and (b) is a side view showing the door key DK inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a of the door cylinder 160. In Figure (b), the door key DK is shown with a solid line, and the door key cylinder 160 is shown with a dashed-dot line.
As shown in Figure 143(a), the door key cylinder 160 comprises an outer cylinder 161 and an inner cylinder 162 housed inside it. The outer cylinder 161 of the door key cylinder 160 is fixed to the front door 12, and the inner cylinder 162 is rotatably formed relative to the outer cylinder 161.

The inner cylinder 162 has a door key insertion opening 160a in its center for inserting the door key DK. The outer cylinder 161 has grooves 161a in two places on the side facing the inner cylinder 162.
On the other hand, the door key DK has two protrusions DK1, and when the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, the two protrusions DK1 each fit into the two grooves 161a. The total length L11 of the door key cylinder 160 is longer than the length of the keyway DK2 (the part in which the key groove is formed) of the door key DK. When the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, the groove shape of the keyway DK2 of the door key DK and the internal shape of the door key cylinder 160 fit together (when a door key DK that matches the internal shape of the door key cylinder 160 is inserted), the door key DK becomes rotatable, and the inner cylinder 162 can be rotated.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 143(b), a cam 171 is connected to the tip of the door key cylinder 160. When the door key DK is inserted and the inner cylinder 162 is rotated, the cam 171 is configured to rotate simultaneously in conjunction with the inner cylinder 162. Details of the cam 171 will be described later (Figure 146, etc.).

Figure 144 is a front view showing the positional relationship between the door key insertion slot 160a and the inserted door key DK. In Figure 144, the door key DK is indicated by a dashed line.
The state shown in Figure 144(b) is the so-called initial state (the state shown in Figure 143(a)), and it shows the position of the inner cylinder 162 when the door key DK is not inserted. In this state, the door key insertion opening 160a (the space in the inner cylinder 162 into which the door key DK is inserted) extends vertically in the figure. Note that when the front door 12 is closed and in the state shown in Figure 144(b), the front door 12 is locked to the cabinet 13 regardless of whether the door key DK is inserted or not, and the front door 12 is in a blocked state (cannot be opened).

In contrast, in Figure 144, state (a) shows the state in which the door key DK has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise compared to state (b). This state indicates the direction in which the door key DK is operated when clearing an error that has occurred in the slot machine 10.
As described above, when a hopper error or selector error occurs and a hall employee removes the cause of the error, the error notification continues even after the cause of the error has been removed, and the system does not return to the state before the error occurred. After removing the cause of the error, the front door 12 is closed, the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, and the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise to the state shown in Figure 144(a). In other words, in the sixth embodiment, the "error release operation" corresponds to rotating the door key DK to the position shown in Figure 144(a).
As a result, the reset sensor 175, described later, detects the error clearing operation. When the error clearing operation is detected, it is determined whether or not the cause of the error has been removed. If it is determined that the cause of the error has not been removed, the error is not cleared and the error notification continues. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cause of the error has been removed, the error notification ends and the system returns to the state before the error was detected.

In the state shown in Figure 144(b), when the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, and the keyway DK2 of the door key DK enters the inner cylinder 162 as shown in Figure 143(b), the two projections DK1 of the door key DK enter the groove 161a of the outer cylinder 161. In this state, when the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise as shown in Figure 144(a), the projections DK1 of the door key DK move to a position inside the outer cylinder 161 where the groove 161a is not formed. Therefore, even if one tries to pull out the door key DK in the state shown in Figure 144(a), the projections DK1 and the outer cylinder 161 come into contact, and the door key DK cannot be pulled out. The door key DK inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a can only be pulled out when the position shown in Figure 144(b), that is, when the position of the projections DK1 of the door key DK and the groove 161a are aligned.
Furthermore, the range of motion when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise is 45 degrees. Therefore, the structure prevents the door key DK from being rotated counterclockwise beyond the position shown in Figure 144(a). Even if one attempts to rotate the door key DK counterclockwise beyond the position shown in Figure 144(a), it will be restricted by a stopper (not shown).

Furthermore, when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in Figure 144(b), rotational torque is generated in the door key DK. Then, after rotating the door key DK to the position shown in Figure 144(a), releasing the hand from the door key DK (removing the force acting on the door key DK) causes a force to act on the inner cylinder 162, returning it to its initial position. Therefore, rotating the door key DK counterclockwise from the state shown in Figure 144(b) to the state shown in Figure 144(a), and then releasing the hand from the door key DK, returns it to the state shown in Figure 144(b). From the state shown in Figure 144(a), rotating the door key DK clockwise while holding it also returns it to the state shown in Figure 144(b).

Furthermore, if you release your hand from the door key DK after it has been in the state shown in Figure 144(a), it will return to the state shown in Figure 144(b), but the inner cylinder 162 will not rotate further clockwise. This is because rotational torque is required to rotate the inner cylinder 162 clockwise. For this reason, even if the force acting on the door key DK is removed in the state shown in Figure 144(a), the door key DK will hardly overrun in the direction shown in Figure 144(c) from the state shown in Figure 144(b).
This prevents the front door from opening unintentionally, for example, if a hopper empty error occurs, the hall staff can open the front door 12, replenish the hopper 35 with tokens (removing the cause of the hopper empty error), close the front door 12, and perform the release operation by turning the door key DK counterclockwise. Even if the staff release their hand from the door key DK at that position, the door key DK will not turn to the open position of the front door 12, thus preventing the front door 12 from opening unintentionally.

The state shown in Figure 144(c) is the state after rotating the door key DK 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in Figure 144(b). When the door key DK is rotated to the state shown in Figure 144(b), the front door 12 can be opened.
The clockwise range of motion of the door key DK is also limited to 45 degrees, with the state shown in Figure 144(c) being the limit. In other words, the door key DK is prevented from rotating further clockwise from the state shown in Figure 144(c). Any attempt to rotate the door key DK clockwise beyond the position shown in Figure 144(c) will be restricted by a stopper (not shown).
In the state shown in Figure 144(c), just as in the state shown in Figure 144(a), the projection DK1 of the door key DK moves to a position inside the outer cylinder 161 where the groove 161a is not formed. Therefore, even if one tries to pull out the door key DK in the state shown in Figure 144(c), the projection DK1 and the outer cylinder 161 come into contact, making it impossible to pull out the door key DK. The door key DK inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a can only be pulled out when it has been returned to the position shown in Figure 144(b).

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, if you move from the state shown in Figure 144(b) to the state shown in Figure 144(c), and then release your hand from the door key DK, it will return to the state shown in Figure 144(b), but the inner cylinder 162 will not rotate counterclockwise any further. This is because rotational torque is required to rotate the inner cylinder 162 counterclockwise. For this reason, even if the force acting on the door key DK is removed in the state shown in Figure 144(c), the door key DK will hardly overrun from the state shown in Figure 144(b) in the direction shown in Figure 144(a).
This prevents the error from being unintentionally cleared (making it impossible to check the error details) because even if the hall staff open the front door 12 and release their hand from the door key DK before checking the error details, the door key DK will not rotate to the position where the error is cleared.
Furthermore, after turning the door key DK from the state shown in Figure 144(b) to the state shown in Figure 144(c) to open the front door 12, and then releasing the hand from the door key DK, the door key DK may be configured to return to the state shown in Figure 144(b), or it may be configured to maintain the state shown in Figure 144(c). If a locking mechanism is not provided to lock the door key DK at the position shown in Figure 144(c), releasing the hand from the door key DK will return it from the state shown in Figure 144(c) to the state shown in Figure 144(b). By making the door key DK return automatically in this way, the work efficiency of the hall staff can be improved.
In contrast, as shown in Figure 149, which will be described later, it is also possible to provide a locking mechanism that maintains the state shown in Figure 144(c) after the front door 12 has been opened by rotating the door key DK 45 degrees clockwise. This locking mechanism (Figure 149) will be described later.

Figure 145(a) is a front view illustrating the various dimensions of the door key cylinder 160, and (b) is a top view and side view showing the dimensions of the power plug.
As shown in Figure 145(a), the length of the door key insertion opening 160a in the longitudinal direction (excluding the groove portion 161a) is L14, and the length (width) of the door key insertion opening 160a in the short direction is L13.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 145(a), the distance from the center of the door key insertion opening 160a to the side plate 13d is defined as L12.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 145(b), in the power plug PP, the length of the plug blade PP3 is L15 and its thickness is L16. The distance between the two plug blades PP3 (center-to-center distance) is L17. Furthermore, the width of the plug blade PP3 is L18.
In this case, if the power plug PP is of type A as defined in "JIS C 8303",
L15: 17 ± 1.3 (millimeters)
L16: 1.5 ± 0.13 (millimeters)
L17: 12.7 ± 0.13 (millimeters)
L18: 6.35 ± 0.25 (millimeters)
That is the case.
In the following explanation, the power plug PP is assumed to be Type A according to "JIS C 8303".

Now, let's focus on one plug blade PP3.
Width L18 of the plug blade PP3 < Length L14 of the door key insertion opening 160a
Thickness L16 of plug blade PP3 < Length L13 in the short direction of door key insertion opening 160a
Therefore, the plug blade PP3 can enter the door key insertion opening 160a.
If the plug blade PP3 can enter the door key insertion slot 160a, there is a risk that fraudulent activities could be carried out using the plug blade PP3 of the power plug PP.
Therefore, the distance L17 between the plug blades of the power plug PP and the distance L12 between the door key insertion opening 160a and the side plate 13d are set as follows:
L17 < L12
That is what they say.
As a result, even if one plug blade PP3 of the power plug PP is attempted to be inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, the other plug blade PP3 comes into contact with the front door 12, making it impossible to insert that one plug blade PP3 into the door key insertion slot 160a.

Secondly, if the depth of the door key insertion opening 160a (L11 in Figure 143(b)) is sufficiently longer than the length L15 of the plug blade PP3, it is considered that the inner cylinder 161 cannot be rotated even if the plug blade PP3 is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, so it is preferable to configure it in this manner.
Furthermore, thirdly, the relationship between the width L13 of the door key insertion opening 160a and the thickness L16 of the plug blade PP3 is,
L13 < L16
If that is the case,
and/or,
The relationship between the longitudinal length L14 of the door key insertion opening 160a and the width L18 of the plug blade PP3 is,
L14 < L18
In that case, the plug blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, so it is preferable to configure it in that manner.
moreover,
If "L13 <L16" and/or "L14 <L18", then it becomes possible to prevent fraudulent activity without having to set "L17 <L12" as mentioned above (even if "L17 >L12").
If the plug blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key slot 160a, then, for example, when purchasing the actual machine and playing at home, it is possible to prevent accidents such as the plug blade PP3 accidentally getting stuck in the door key slot 160a and breaking off while still inside the slot 160a.

Next, a locking device operated by the door key cylinder 160 will be described.
Figure 146 is a schematic diagram illustrating the locking device 170 in the seventh embodiment, and is a front view seen from the inside of the front door 12 toward the outside (player side).
As shown in Figure 143(b), the cam 171 is connected to the tip of the inner cylinder 162 of the door key cylinder 160 and rotates simultaneously with the rotation of the door key DK and the inner cylinder 162. Since Figure 146 is a view from the back of the front door 12, as shown in Figure 144(a), when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the outside, the cam 171 in Figure 146 rotates clockwise. Similarly, as shown in Figure 144(c), when the door key DK is rotated clockwise as viewed from the outside, the cam 171 in Figure 146 rotates counterclockwise.

Figure 146 shows the front door 12 in the closed position, and the position of the cam 171 in Figure 146 is the position shown in Figure 144(b). In this position, the cam 171 engages with an engaging member (not shown) provided on the cabinet 13 side, and the front door 12 is closed (locked) against the cabinet 13.
The cam 171 is provided with two protrusions 171a and 171b. In this example, the protrusions 171a and 171b are provided at 90-degree intervals.
The locking device 170 includes movable members 172 and 173 configured to move vertically in the figure. A coil spring 176 is connected to the movable member 172 via a hook 172c.
Similarly, a coil spring 177 is connected to the movable member 173 via a hook 173b, and a coil spring 178 is connected via a hook 173c.

Furthermore, the movable member 172 is supported by a predetermined member (not shown). When the movable member 172 moves upward in the figure, the coil spring 176 is stretched, and an elastic force acts on the coil spring 176.
Similarly, the movable member 173 is supported by a predetermined member (not shown). When the movable member 173 moves downward in the figure, the coil springs 177 and 178 are stretched, and an elastic force acts on the coil springs 177 and 178.
The movable member 172 is provided with a driven portion 172a that extends toward the cam 171, and the tip of the driven portion 172a is in contact with the projection 171b of the cam 171. The contact between the driven portion 172a and the projection 171b restricts the downward movement of the movable member 172 in the figure.

Furthermore, the movable member 173 is provided with a driven portion 173a that extends toward the cam 171, and the tip of the driven portion 173a is in contact with the projection 171a of the cam 171. The contact between the driven portion 173a and the projection 171a restricts the movement of the movable member 173 in the upward direction in the figure.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 146, the vertical length of the movable member 173 is longer than the vertical length of the movable member 172. In other words, the movable member 173 is larger than the movable member 172. Therefore, the weight of the movable member 173 is heavier than the weight of the movable member 172.

Here, we assume that coil springs 176, 177, and 178 are all the same shape (same performance). Therefore, when the elastic force of coil spring 176 when the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure is F1, and the elastic forces of coil springs 177 and 178 when the moving member 173 moves downward in the figure is F2,
2 × F1 ≈ F2
It is structured in such a way.
With this configuration, even including the effect of gravity, the force required to move the movable member 173 downwards in the figure is greater than the force required to move the movable member 172 upwards in the figure.
With this configuration, when the front door 12 is closed, turning the door key DK clockwise requires more force (rotational torque) than turning it counterclockwise. This prevents the front door 12 from being easily opened, even if an unauthorized device is inserted into the door key slot 160a. On the other hand, turning the door key DK counterclockwise does not require much force, allowing hall staff to easily perform the error clearing operation.

Furthermore, at the position shown in Figure 146, almost no tensile force is acting on the coil spring 176. Therefore, even if the contact between the driven part 172a and the projection 171b is released, the movable member 172 is configured not to move further downward in the figure from the position shown in Figure 146.
Furthermore, at the position shown in Figure 146, almost no tensile force is acting on the coil springs 177 and 178. Therefore, even if the contact between the driven part 173a and the projection 171a is released, the movable member 173 is configured not to move further upward in the figure from the position shown in Figure 146.
Furthermore, the projection 171a of the cam 171 is in contact with the driven part 174.
Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the driven part 174 is configured to be movable in the vertical direction in the figure. When the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise and the tip of the projection 171a moves downward, the driven part 174 is configured to move downward while in contact with the projection 171a.

A detection piece 172b is provided on the movable member 172. Meanwhile, a reset sensor 175 is attached to the locking device 170. At the position shown in Figure 146, the reset sensor 155 is detecting the detection piece 172b. The state in which the reset sensor 175 is detecting the detection piece 172b is defined as "off".
In contrast, when the movable member 172 moves upward in the figure, the detection piece 172b is no longer detected by the reset sensor 175. As a result, the reset sensor 175 detects that the device is "on".

Figure 147 shows the state after the cam 171 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in Figure 146.
In the state shown in Figure 144(b), insert the door key DK and rotate it 45 degrees clockwise to reach the state shown in Figure 144(c). In Figure 146, the cam 171 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise, resulting in the state shown in Figure 147. Therefore, the state shown in Figure 147 is the state in which the front door 12 can be opened.
When the cam 171 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise, the driven part 174, which is in contact with the projection 171a, moves downward while maintaining contact with the projection 171a. Similarly, the driven part 173a also moves downward while maintaining contact with the projection 171a. As a result, the moving member 173 moves downward in the figure, stretching the coil springs 177 and 178, and a rotational torque acts on the cam 171, causing it to rotate clockwise (to return to its original position). This rotational torque is the elastic force of the coil springs 177 and 178.
On the other hand, the contact between the projection 171b of the cam 171 and the driven part 172a is released. The moving member 172 maintains the position shown in Figure 146 even after the contact with the projection 171b is released. Therefore, the detection piece 172b remains detected by the reset sensor 175 (off state). Also, since the moving member 172 does not move, no elastic force acts on the coil spring 176.

Figure 148 shows the state after the cam 171 has been rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in Figure 146.
In the state shown in Figure 144(b), if the door key DK inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise to the state shown in Figure 144(a), the cam 171 in Figure 146 rotates 45 degrees clockwise, resulting in the state shown in Figure 148. Therefore, the state shown in Figure 148 is the state during the error clearing operation.
When the cam 171 rotates clockwise from the state shown in Figure 146, the contact between the projection 171a and the driven part 174 is released, but the driven part 174 is configured to remain in its uppermost position. Therefore, even when the contact between the projection 171a and the driven part 174 is released, the driven part 174 does not move downward.

Furthermore, when the cam 171 rotates clockwise, the driven portion 172a is moved upward in the figure by the projection 171b. As a result, the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure. When the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure, the coil spring 176 is stretched, so a rotational torque acts on the cam 171 that tries to rotate it counterclockwise (try to return to its original position). This rotational torque is the elastic force of the coil spring 176.
Furthermore, since the driven part 173a and the cam 171 are not in contact, even if the cam 171 rotates clockwise from the state in Figure 146 to the state in Figure 148, the position of the driven part 173a does not change. Therefore, the position of the movable member 173 does not fluctuate.
Furthermore, when the state changes from that shown in Figure 146 to that shown in Figure 148, the detection piece 172a is no longer detected by the reset sensor 175. As a result, the reset sensor 175 turns on, and it is determined that an error clearing operation has been performed.

Figure 149 is a front view showing the structure in which the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise (as shown in Figure 144(c)), the front door 12 is opened, and then the door key DK is locked in that position (rotated 45 degrees clockwise).
In Figure 149, (a) shows the state as shown in Figures 144(b) and 146 (before the door key DK is rotated, i.e., before the movable member 173 moves downward), and (b) shows the state as shown in Figures 144(c) and 147 (after the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise and the movable member 173 moves downward).
In Figure 149, the fixing member 179 is a member fixed to the front door 12 side. Therefore, the movable member 173 moves vertically relative to the fixing member 179.
As shown in Figure 149, the movable member 173 has an opening 173d. A substantially cylindrical stopper 173e protrudes from this opening 173d toward the front in the figure. The stopper 173e is movably mounted within the opening 173d.

In the state shown in Figure 149(a), the fixing member 179 and the opening 173d are positioned at a height where they partially overlap in the vertical direction. Therefore, the stopper 173e is in contact with the right outer edge of the fixing member 179 in the figure.
Then, from the state shown in Figure 149(a), the movable member 173 moves downward, and when it reaches the state shown in Figure 149(b), the opening 173d is positioned below the fixed member 179. When the front door 12 is opened, the stopper 173e moves to the left in the figure and comes into contact with the lower outer edge of the fixed member 179. This restricts the force that would cause the movable member 173 to return upward. Therefore, even if you release your hand from the door key DK after it has been rotated 45 degrees clockwise, the movable member 173 cannot move upward, and the door key DK will not automatically return. In other words, after rotating the door key 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in Figure 144(b) (to the state shown in Figure 144(c)) and opening the front door 12, even if you release your hand from the door key DK, it will maintain the state shown in Figure 144(c).
When the front door 12 is closed, the stopper 173e returns to its rightward position, allowing the movable member 173 to move upward. As a result, the movable member 173 returns to the state shown in Figure 149(a), and the door key DK automatically returns from the state shown in Figure 144(c) to the state shown in Figure 144(b).

Furthermore, even if the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in Figure 144(b), the front door 12 will not open, and therefore the lock shown in Figure 149 will not engage. Consequently, if you release your hand from the door key DK in the state shown in Figure 144(a), it will automatically return to the state shown in Figure 144(b).
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the lock shown in Figure 149 engages when the front door 12 is opened. Therefore, if you turn the door key DK from the state in Figure 144(b) to the state in Figure 144(c) without opening the front door 12, and then release your hand, it will return to the state in Figure 144(b).

Next, in order to explain the difference from the door key DK mentioned above, we will explain the setting key CK.
Figure 150 shows the setting key CK and the setting key cylinder 154. Figure (a) is a side view showing the setting key CK inserted through the setting key insertion port 151, and Figure (b) is a side view showing the setting key CK rotated 90 degrees clockwise. In Figure 150, the setting key cylinder 154 is shown by a dashed line.
The setting key insertion slot 151 is mounted on the main control board 50, as shown in Figure 112. When the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151, as shown in Figure 150(a), and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, as shown in Figure 150(b), the setting key switch 152 located inside is turned on, making it possible to change the setting or to check the setting value.
The range of motion of the setting key CK is from the state shown in Figure 150(a) (rotation angle 0 degrees) to the state shown in Figure 150(b) (rotation angle 90 degrees clockwise).
Furthermore, unlike the locking device 170, even if you release your hand from the setting key CK while it is rotated 90 degrees as shown in Figure (b), the setting key CK will not return to the state shown in Figure (a).
Furthermore, within the rotational range of the setting key CK, the rotational torque is approximately constant, and the rotational torque hardly changes depending on the rotation angle of the setting key CK.

Figure 151 shows the relationship between the rotation angle of the door key DK and the setting key CK, and the rotational torque corresponding to that rotation angle. In the example in Figure 151, the front door 12 is not opened after the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise (the lock shown in Figure 149 is not engaged).
As mentioned above, the door key DK has a range of motion from -45 degrees to +45 degrees. Also, as mentioned above, the rotational torque when rotated clockwise is greater than the rotational torque when rotated counterclockwise.

In contrast, the setting key CK has a range of motion from "0 degrees" to "+90 degrees". Furthermore, unlike the door key DK, the rotation angle and the rotational torque acting on the setting key CK are approximately constant. Note that in this example, the rotational torque of the setting key CK is given as being smaller than the rotational torque (T1) of the door key DK when its rotation angle is "0 degrees," but this is not the only example. The rotational torque of the setting key CK may be greater than the rotational torque "T1" of the door key DK when its rotation angle is "0 degrees." Furthermore, the rotational torque of the setting key CK may be greater than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "-45 degrees," and less than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "+45 degrees." Alternatively, the rotational torque of the setting key CK may be greater than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "+45 degrees."

Although a seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows.
(1) In the above embodiment, when the front door 12 is open, the door key DK maintains the position shown in Figure 144(c) and does not return to the position shown in Figure 144(b), but the embodiment is not limited to this.
For example, the structure shown in Figure 149 may be eliminated, and after opening the front door 12 with the door key DK rotated 45 degrees clockwise, the cam 171 may return to its initial position due to the elastic force of the coil springs 177 and 178 when the hand is released from the door key DK, thereby returning the door key DK to the position shown in Figure 144(b). Once the door key DK returns to the position shown in Figure 144(b), the door key DK can be pulled out even while the front door 12 is open.

(2) The shape of the door key DK shown in the seventh embodiment is illustrative and not limited thereto. For example, the door key DK may not have the projection DK1. In this case, the door key DK can be pulled out even when it is rotated.
(3) The configuration of the locking device 170 shown in the seventh embodiment is not limited to that shown. For example, the door key DK may be designed so that the rotational torque is the same when it is rotated clockwise and when it is rotated counterclockwise. Also, the rotational range of the door key DK is not limited to "-45 degrees" to "+45 degrees". For example, when opening the front door 12, it is possible to have a structure that allows it to be rotated up to "+90 degrees" (the same as the setting key CK).

(4) The maximum clockwise rotation and counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK can both be set arbitrarily. In the above embodiment, the door key DK is rotatable up to 45 degrees clockwise and up to 45 degrees counterclockwise.
However, this is not the only example; it is acceptable for there to be a slight difference between the maximum clockwise rotation of the door key DK and the maximum counterclockwise rotation.
On the other hand, it is also possible to create a sufficient difference between the maximum clockwise rotation and the maximum counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK. For example, the maximum clockwise rotation could be set to "+60 degrees" and the maximum counterclockwise rotation to "-30 degrees".
Alternatively, the opposite could be done: the maximum rotation in a clockwise direction could be set to "+30 degrees," and the maximum rotation in a counterclockwise direction could be set to "-60 degrees," etc.

(5) The rotational torque (force required to rotate) when rotating the door key DK may be set to be the same for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation, or it may be set to be different.
For example, firstly, if we define "T1" as the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise by "+45 degrees", and "T2" as the rotational torque when rotating it counterclockwise by "-45 degrees", then "T1 ≈ T2", "T1 >T2", or "T1 <T2" may all be applicable.

Furthermore, the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise (towards the opening side of the front door 12) may be the same or different depending on whether the front door 12 is in the closed or open state. For example, the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise in the closed state of the front door 12 may be greater than the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise in the open state of the front door 12.
In particular, when the door key DK is rotated clockwise with the front door 12 in the closed position, a force is required to unlock it, so the rotational torque is large. In contrast, when the door key DK is rotated clockwise with the front door 12 in the open position, no force is applied to unlock it, so the rotational torque is smaller compared to the above.

Furthermore, it is possible to set various parameters, such as whether the front door 12 is open or not, and the clockwise/counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK.
in particular,
a) With the front door 12 closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is approximately equal to the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK. b) With the front door 12 closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is greater than the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK. c) With the front door 12 closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is less than the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK. d) With the front door 12 open, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is approximately equal to the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK. e) With the front door 12 open, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is greater than the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK. f) With the front door 12 open, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK is less than the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK. Any of these conditions may be met.

<Eighth Embodiment>
The eighth embodiment is an invention relating to the cutting and branching of the performance.
The meanings of the terms used in the eighth embodiment are as follows:
"Performance stage" refers to the background images displayed over multiple gameplay sessions. In this embodiment, both "moving images (videos)" and "still images" are collectively referred to as "images."
The performance stage is determined by lottery or other means based on the game state, winning combination, number of games played, etc. During gameplay, for example, whether or not to change the performance stage is determined by lottery or other means after each game, or when certain conditions are met. If it is decided to change the performance stage, the performance stage will be changed during the current game or between the end of the current game and the start of the next game.
Similar to the events described later, the performance stage is triggered by player actions (such as placing a bet or operating the start switch 41). The performance stage remains displayed until the trigger for switching to the next performance stage occurs.
The game features various stages, such as a normal stage, a pre-announcement stage, a chance zone (CZ) stage, and an AT (Attack Time) stage.
Here, the "pre-announcement stage" refers to the stage where the game builds anticipation about whether or not it will transition to AT (Automatic Trigger). Note that there are two types of pre-announcements: the "real pre-announcement" when the game will transition to AT, and the "false pre-announcement" when the game will not transition to AT.
Furthermore, the "CZ (Chance Zone) stage" is a stage where the probability of transitioning to (winning) the AT (Attack Time) is higher than in non-CZ stages. In other words, the CZ stage is a stage that is more advantageous to the player than the normal stage (a stage where it is easier to transition to a state that is advantageous to the player).
Furthermore, when referring to the "normal stage," it should not include the pre-stage or the CZ stage.
Furthermore, when referring to the "AT stage," it means the normal stage during AT, and does not include the AT special zone stage or the AT sub-bonus stage. The normal stage during AT is the stage where players spend the most time during AT.

An "event" is a performance that occurs as a result of an action by the player, specifically a betting action (inserting tokens or operating the bet switch 40), an operation of the start switch 41, or an operation of the stop switch 42. It refers to a newly outputted performance or a performance that is different from previous ones. An event is the smallest unit of a performance, and by combining events, various performances such as single performances and continuous performances, which will be described later, are constructed.
As mentioned above, during gameplay, one of the performance stages is selected, and a background performance is displayed. When a performance is selected during gameplay, the event specified for that performance is output at a predetermined trigger. In this case, the event is displayed as an image superimposed on the background performance (performance stage).
For example, as shown in Figure 154 later, when performance number 01 is selected, either no event occurs, or one or more events are defined to be output in response to a predetermined operation. For example, when event "0101" is selected, event "0101" is output when the start switch 41 is operated.

A "cut" is the smallest unit of continuous (uninterrupted) motion images, and is also called a "shot." For example, if there is motion images of character A speaking, then the screen switches to character B, and there are motion images of character B speaking, if there are no interruptions in the motion images of character A speaking, that is one cut. When the screen switches to character B, that becomes a separate cut. After that, as long as there are motion images of character B speaking without interruption, it is considered one cut.
Therefore, if there is one continuous moving image of character A and then another continuous moving image of character B, the total number of images will be two.
On the other hand, if the camera angle of character A changes midway through a video of character A speaking, and the video of character A speaking continues, then there will be a total of two shots: one before the angle change and one after the angle change.
In contrast, a video that pans up from below, for example, a vertically oriented video, is a continuous (uninterrupted) video and therefore constitutes a single shot.
Note that an event may consist of one shot or multiple shots.
Furthermore, in video footage, a series of shots (one shot, or a collection of two or more shots) taken at a particular location is sometimes referred to as a "scene." Therefore, one event can also be referred to as one scene.

In this embodiment, "branching" refers to switching from a previous event to a new event. This results in a cut or scene change.
Furthermore, "number of branches" refers to the total number of possible outcomes when the story branches off.
For example, if, under a certain operation trigger, only event A can be output and no other events are output (for example, in Figure 155 described later, when the performance 15 starts (when the start switch 41 is operated), only event "1501" is output), the number of branches is set to "1".
Furthermore, if event A has been output up to that point, and a certain operation trigger causes it to switch to either event B or event C (for example, in Figure 155 described later, if either event "1502" or "1504" is output during the first stop of performance 15), the number of branches at that operation trigger is set to "2".
Furthermore, if a certain operation trigger has two possible outcomes: one in which no event is output, and another in which event A is output (for example, in Figure 154 described later, when performance 01 starts, there is either no event or event "0101" is output), then the number of branches at that operation trigger is set to "2".
Furthermore, if event A has already been output, and there are no new events to output at a given operation trigger (for example, in Figure 154 described later, if no event is selected at stop 1 of the performance 14), the branch count will be displayed as "-".

Furthermore, from the perspective of how long the performance continues during gameplay, it includes both single and continuous performance sequences.
A "single-shot effect" refers to an effect that is completed within a single game. For example, an effect that is displayed from the time the start switch 41 is operated until all reels stop (or even from after all reels stop until the bet operation, or from after all reels stop until the start switch 41 is operated for the next game), and does not carry over to the next game.
Furthermore, a "chance-up pattern" refers to an effect that is displayed during single or consecutive effects, and is displayed as the game progresses or triggered by a predetermined operation, resulting in a higher probability of success than before. Here, "probability of success" includes the probability of winning a special role (bonus), transitioning to a CZ (chance zone), winning an AT, transitioning to an AT-specialized zone, winning a sub-bonus during AT, etc.
Furthermore, a "confirmation animation" refers to an animation that is displayed during a single animation and signifies the confirmation of the result at the time it is displayed (such as confirmation of winning a special role, AT, or sub-bonus during AT, confirmation of transition to a CZ, or confirmation of transition to an AT-specialized zone). As will be described later, during a continuous animation, there may be cases where a "success animation" is displayed, which signifies the confirmation of a result favorable to the player. However, "confirmation animations" are displayed during single animations, while "success animations" are displayed during continuous animations.

On the other hand, "consecutive effects," unlike the "single effects" described above, refer to a series of effects that are displayed over multiple (at least two) gameplay sessions. Consecutive effects include an "introductory effect" (an effect indicating that the consecutive effects are about to begin) as the first effect displayed. However, the introductory effect may be omitted, and the game may start directly from the first game of the consecutive effects.
Furthermore, the final game in a series of sequences (the game that announces the result) can be described as a "failure sequence," a "success sequence," or a "reversal sequence."
A continuous sequence of events is a sequence of events that announces the result of winning a special role (bonus), transitioning to a chance zone (CZ), winning an AT (Attack Time), transitioning to an AT-specialized zone, winning a sub-bonus during AT, etc. However, a "failure sequence" is a sequence of events that announces that a special role has not been won, that the player has not transitioned to a CZ, that the player has not won an AT, that the player has not transitioned to an AT-specialized zone, or that a sub-bonus during AT has not been won, etc.
In contrast, a "successful presentation" is a presentation that notifies the player that they have won a special role, will transition to a chance zone, will win an AT, will transition to an AT special zone, or will win a sub-bonus during AT.
In addition, even in the single-event sequences described above, failure or success animations may be displayed to indicate the outcome of the sequence.

Furthermore, a "reversal effect" is an effect that switches from a "failure effect" to a "success effect" after a "failure effect" is displayed in the final game of a continuous sequence, when a bet operation is made for the next game, or when the start switch 41 for the next game is operated.
In a continuous sequence of events, if a failure sequence is displayed and no reversal sequence is displayed in the next game, the game in which the failure sequence was displayed will be considered the final game in the continuous sequence.
In contrast, if a failure animation is displayed, and then a reversal animation is displayed in the next game, the game in which the reversal animation is displayed will be the final game in the continuous animation sequence.

The "ending sequence" is a sequence displayed when the completion of the AT (Automatic Trigger) is confirmed, and it continues until the end of the AT. "Completion of the AT" means that the AT continues until the parameters (number of games played, payouts, net winnings) exceed their upper limits (or reach their upper limits). Specifically, this refers to cases where the AT continues until the net winnings counter exceeds its upper limit (for example, "2400").

Figure 152 shows the production stages in the eighth embodiment. The production stages in Figure 152 are illustrative and are not limited to these 12. Figure 152 also shows the number of cuts in each production stage.
Normally, Stage 0 is a special performance stage that is selected only during non-advantageous periods. While it is possible to have special performance stages specific to non-advantageous periods, it is also possible to use them interchangeably with performance stages in advantageous periods (for example, Normal Stage 1).
During the normal period of the advantageous section, there are five performance stages to choose from. The "advantageous section (normal)" is a non-AT state and does not include the pre-announcement period or the CZ (Chance Zone). During the CZ, CZ stage 1 is selected, and during the pre-announcement period, pre-announcement stage 1 is selected.

Furthermore, AT Stage 1 is provided as a performance stage during the advantageous section AT. Multiple types of performance stages may be provided during the advantageous section AT. Also, "advantageous section AT" does not include the (additional) special zones or the sub-bonus state during the advantageous section AT. AT Special Stages 1 and 2 are provided as performance stages in the special zones during the advantageous section AT, and AT SB Stage is provided as a performance stage for the sub-bonus during the advantageous section AT.
As shown in Figure 152, the number of performance stages selected during the normal (non-AT) advantageous period (5 stages) is greater than the number of performance stages selected during the AT advantageous period (1 stage). This is to prevent players from getting bored by providing a wide variety of performances during the normal advantageous period.

Figure 152 also illustrates the image capacity of the performance stages. When the image capacity of the performance stage used in the non-advantageous section (normal stage 0) is C1 (MB), the total image capacity of the performance stages used in the advantageous section (normal stages 1-5) is C2 (MB), and the image capacity of the performance stage used in the advantageous section (AT) (AT stage 1) is C3 (MB),
C1 < C3 < C2
That is the case.
The proportion of time spent in non-advantageous periods is extremely low, and since, for example, no AT (Automatic Trigger) lottery takes place during these periods, the image size for the visual effects is the smallest.
Furthermore, since the number of performance stages in the normal (non-AT) advantageous period is greater than the number of performance stages in the AT advantageous period, the image file size is proportionally larger.
However, this is not the only option; the number of performance stages during the advantageous AT period may also be increased. Furthermore, the number of performance stages during the advantageous AT period may be greater than the number of performance stages during the normal (non-AT) advantageous period.
And the respective image capacities,
C1 < C2 < C3
That is also acceptable.

Figure 153 is a diagram showing the types of effects in the eighth embodiment. Figure 153 illustrates only some of the effects, and does not mean that the effects shown in Figure 153 are all of the possible effects.
Depending on whether it is a favorable period, the winning combination in the current game, whether it is in a CZ (Chance Zone), whether it is in a pre-announcement period, whether it is in an AT (Attack Time), etc., one of the performance numbers will be selected in each game through a lottery or other means.
Effects 01 to 18 are effects that are selected during normal gameplay in the advantageous section.
Furthermore, effects 14 to 18 are selected as part of a continuous performance sequence. When a continuous performance sequence is selected, effect 14 is selected first, and the player is notified that the continuous performance sequence will begin in the next game. Then, for the first, second, and third games of the continuous performance sequence in the next game, effects 15, 16, and 17 are selected, respectively. In addition, if a failure sequence (described later) is selected in the third game of the continuous performance sequence, and the player is in a favorable position, then effect 18 (reversal sequence) is selected as the fourth game of the continuous performance sequence.
Additionally, when the AT (Automatic Trigger) begins, animation 21 is selected to announce the start of the AT, and when the AT ends, animation 25 is selected to announce the end of the AT.

Figures 154 to 157 show several extracted sequences from Figure 153, illustrating the event name, number of cuts, and number of branches for each.
Figures 154 to 157 show,
Production 01 (Prediction-building production during normal gameplay) (Figure 154)
Production 03 (Prediction-building production during normal gameplay) (Figure 154)
Direction 14 (Continuous Direction (Introduction)) (Figure 154)
Performance 15 (Continuous Performance (Game 1)) (Figure 155)
Direction 16 (Continuous Direction (Game 2)) (Figure 155)
Direction 17 (Continuous Direction (3rd Game)) (Figure 155)
Direction 18 (Continuous Direction (Reversal)) (Figure 156)
Production 20 (Confirmation Production) (Figure 156)
Production 21 (AT Start Production) (Figure 156)
Production 22 (AT normal production) (Figure 156)
Production 23 (AT bonus production) (Figure 157)
Production 24 (AT anticipation production) (Figure 157)
Production 25 (AT ending production) (Figure 157)
This illustrates the point.

First, using the 01 (normal anticipation effect) in Figure 154 as an example, we will explain the events, number of cuts, and number of branches corresponding to the effect.
In the eighth embodiment, the event name is indicated by a four-digit number, where the first two digits represent the performance number, and the last two digits are assigned the event number during the performance, starting from "01".
In the case of a performance during the normal advantageous period that is not a continuous performance (performances 01 to 13 in Figure 153), there is a possibility that "no event" will be selected. Performance 01 has seven types of events, from "0101" to "0107".

"No event" can be selected for any operation trigger. For example, at start (when the start switch 41 is operated, or when the reel 31 starts rotating), "No event" may be selected, or event "0101" may be selected. Similarly, at stop (when the first stop switch 42 is operated, or when the first reel 31 stops), one of the following may be selected: "No event", event "0102", "0103", "0104", or "0106".
Furthermore, for example, event "0102" may be selected at any of the following operational triggers: 1st stop, 2nd stop (when the 2nd stop switch 42 is operated, or when the 2nd reel 31 stops), or 3rd stop (when the 3rd stop switch 42 is operated, or when the 3rd reel 31 stops). In the case of an event that can be selected at multiple operational triggers, if it is selected at any of the operational triggers, the same event will not be selected again in that game. For example, if event "0102" is selected at the 1st stop, event "0102" will not be selected at the 2nd or 3rd stop. Also, performance 01 does not have any events that are selected after all reels have stopped.
Therefore, if the 01 effect is selected in this game, for example,
Start: Event "0101"
1st stop: Event "0104"
2nd stop: No event 3rd stop: Event "0102"
Events are output in a sequence like this: After all stops: No events.

Furthermore, if performance 01 is selected during gameplay, there is a possibility that an event will be selected for every possible trigger.
for example,
Start: Event "0101"
1st stop: Event "0104"
During the second stop: Event "0102"
3rd stop: Event "0105"
This is an example of such a case.
Furthermore, in contrast to this, if performance 01 is selected during gameplay, there is a possibility that no event will be selected at any given trigger.
for example,
This is a case where: Start: No events Stop 1: No events Stop 2: No events Stop 3: No events
In this case, since one of the performance stages has been selected, the game will be played with only the background image displayed.

Furthermore, if an event can be output based on multiple operational triggers, the same event may be output based on multiple triggers. For example, event "0102" could be output at the first stop, and then again at the third stop.

Furthermore, the number of cuts for each event "0101" through "0107" is "1". Therefore, regardless of which event is selected in production 01, a continuous video will be output without interruption, at least until the next trigger for operation.
However, cuts are finite and have a predetermined length (time). For example, let's assume that the playback time of event "0101" is "T1". And let's assume that event "0101" was selected at the start.
In this case, if the first stop switch 42 is not operated after the start switch 41 has been operated and time "T1" has elapsed, one cut of event "0101" will be output to the end, and then the system will stop at the final image of that cut.
Furthermore, let's assume that the first stop switch 42 was operated after the start switch 41 was operated but before time "T1" had elapsed, but no event was selected during the first stop. Then, assuming that time "T1" had elapsed before the second stop, one cut of event "0101" was output to the end between the time after the first stop and before the second stop, and then the system stopped at the final image of that cut.
Furthermore, let's assume that after the start switch 41 is operated, the first stop switch 42 is operated before time "T1" has elapsed, and event "0102" is selected at the first stop. In this case, the event switches from "0101" to "0102" at the first stop. That is, even if one cut of event "0101" has not been output to the end, the output of one cut of event "0101" is stopped at the first stop, and the output of one cut of event "0102" is started.

Furthermore, the branching points for production 01 are as follows:
First, at the start, there are two possibilities: either no events occur or event "0101" is selected. Therefore, the number of branching points at the start is "2".
Similarly, when there is one stop, there is a possibility of no event or the selection of event "0102", "0103", "0104", or "0106", so the number of branches when there is one stop is "5". In other words, when there is one stop, the route will branch to one of the five possibilities: no event, event "0102", "0103", "0104", or "0106".
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 154, the number of branches is "2" when there are two stops, and "6" when there are three stops.

Performance 03, like Performance 01, is a performance that can be selected during normal advantageous periods (non-AT). As mentioned above, if it is a performance during normal advantageous periods and is not a continuous performance, there is a possibility that "No Event" will be selected.
Furthermore, as shown in event "0307," the number of cuts in one event is not limited to "1," but can be "2" or more.
Furthermore, there are operational triggers that do not result in an event being selected, such as during the second stop in production 03.

As shown in production 03, the average number of cuts for events triggered by 3 stops (referring to the average across all productions; the same applies hereinafter) is set to be greater than the average number of cuts for events triggered by 1 or 2 stops. Taking production 03 as an example,
Average number of event cuts during one stop: 1
Average number of event cuts during 3 stops: 1.2
That is the case.
The average number of cuts for each trigger event is as follows:
a) The average number of event cuts during the 3-stop period was the highest.
b) The average number of event cuts at the start is equal to or less than the average number of event cuts at 3 stops.
c) The average number of event cuts during one-stop and two-stop events is less than the average number of event cuts during three-stop events.
Furthermore, even when combining single and consecutive events, the average number of cuts for events during a 3-stop sequence is greater than the average number of cuts for events during a 1-stop or 2-stop sequence.

This is because, during the three-stop period, the player has completed all the necessary actions for one game, allowing them to focus on the presentation (and fully appreciate the event).
Furthermore, increasing the number of event cuts at the end of a game does not disrupt the game's tempo, and it prevents players from accidentally skipping events they want to see during their gameplay.
While a higher number of cuts doesn't necessarily mean a longer event duration, on average, events with more cuts tend to be longer.

Furthermore, the average number of branching sequences in the trigger for operation (excluding after a complete stop; the same applies hereinafter) is:
a) The average number of branching sequences during the 3-stop sequence is the highest.
b) The average number of branching sequences at the start is equal to or less than the average number of branching sequences at 3 stops.
c) The average number of branching sequences during one or two stops is less than the average number of branching sequences during three stops.
d) The average number of branching sequences during the two-stop sequence is set to be the smallest.
In production 01, the number of branching sequences is highest when the train stops three times (number of branches: "6"), while in production 03, the number of branching sequences is highest at the start and when the train stops three times (number of branches: "6").
Furthermore, both performance 01 and performance 03 have the fewest number of branching sequences when the train stops twice (for example, in the case of performance 03, the number of branching sequences when the train stops twice is "1").
Furthermore, when combining single and consecutive effects, the average number of branching effects during a 3-stop sequence is greater than the average number of branching effects during a 1-stop or 2-stop sequence.
However, as for the sequences performed in a single game within a series of sequences, the average number of branching sequences during one or two stops is greater than the average number of branching sequences during three stops.

In the continuous sequences of sequences 14 through 18, unlike the normal sequences, if there is an event set up by an action trigger, that event will always be output at that trigger. Also, if there are multiple events set up by an action trigger, one of them will be output at that trigger. Therefore, if at least one event is set up for a given action trigger, it will not result in "no event".
For example, in production 14, event "1401" is always selected at the start. Then, at the first and second stops, no events are selected because there are no predetermined events, and at the third stop, either event "1402" or "1403" is selected.
In production 15, the number of branches at the start is "1", the number of branches at the first stop is "2", and the number of branches at the third stop is "1". In production 15, event "1501" is always selected at the start. Also, at the first stop, either event "1502" or "1504" is selected. Here, event "1504" is a chance-up pattern. Therefore, at the first stop, there is a possibility that the chance-up pattern will be output or not. Furthermore, at the third stop, event "1503" will always be output.

Furthermore, the chance-up pattern for event "1504" is an event that can be selected when the train stops once. In this embodiment, all chance-up patterns are events that can be selected when the train stops once and cannot be selected by other operational triggers. However, the system is not limited to this, and chance-up patterns may also be selectable by other operational triggers.
However, it is preferable that the chance-up pattern be displayed early in the game while it is in progress. Therefore, it is preferable to set it so that the chance-up pattern is more likely to be selected at the 1st stop (or at the start) than at the 3rd stop. This is to give the player a sense of anticipation earlier in the game. In addition, for both single and continuous effects, the chance-up pattern is more likely to appear at the 1st stop than at the 2nd or 3rd stops.
Therefore, in continuous sequences, the number of branching points triggered by a single stop is set to be greater than the number of branching points triggered by two or three stops. This makes it easier to surprise the player and increases their expectation of a successful sequence.
In the second and third games of the following sequence of events, there is a chance that a chance-up pattern may be selected, but in all cases, it is designed to be selected after the first stop.

Performance 16 is a performance that is displayed in the second game of a continuous performance (the next game after the game in which performance 15 is displayed), and the number of cuts for all events is "1". Event "1604" is a chance-up pattern, similar to event "1504" mentioned above.
For the second and subsequent games of the continuous performance, similar to performance 15, if there is an event determined by the operation trigger, one of the events will be selected and output. Therefore, in performance 16, the event at the start is always "1601", the event at the first stop is either "1602" or "1604", there is no event at the second stop, and the event at the third stop is "1603".

Performance 17 is a performance that is displayed in the third game of a continuous performance. The number of cuts for each event in Performance 17 is relatively larger than the number of cuts for events selected in the first and second games of a continuous performance. The average number of cuts for events selected in the first game of a continuous performance (Performance 15) is "1.25", and the average number of cuts for events selected in the second game of a continuous performance (Performance 16) is "1.0", while the average number of cuts for events selected in the third game of a continuous performance (Performance 17) is "1.83".
In this embodiment, the continuous performance sequence generally continues for three games, so performance 17 is the final performance sequence. However, if the ending of the continuous performance sequence is favorable to the player (for example, if the player wins a lottery or transitions to a favorable game state), and event "1704" (failure) is selected in the third game of the continuous performance sequence (performance 17), then as an exception, the sequence proceeds to the fourth game, and event "1801" of performance 18 is output. Therefore, only in this case will the continuous performance sequence continue for four games.

The third game in a continuous sequence is, in principle, the final game in the sequence. Therefore, after all the reels stop, either event "1704," which means "failure," or event "1705," which means "success," will be selected and output. For example, in a continuous sequence, a mission sequence may be output, and if the mission is completed, it will be a "success," and if the mission is not completed, it will be a "failure."
For example, if you have won the CZ, won the AT, or won a special role, the event "1705", which is a "success", will be selected as a general rule. On the other hand, if you have not won the CZ, have not won the AT, or have not won a special role, the event "1704", which is a "failure", will be selected.

However, even if you have won a CZ, an AT, or a special role, there is a predetermined probability (for example, 20%) that event "1705" will be selected as a "failure", and in the next game, event "1801" of performance 18 will be selected.
Here, the event "1704," which corresponds to failure, has "2" cuts, while the event "1705," which corresponds to success, has "4" cuts. This is because increasing the number of movements in the animation for success creates a sense of anticipation for the reward being granted.

Furthermore, when event "1704 (failure)" is selected after all stops, and the probability of the chance-up pattern for event "1706" being selected at one stop is "X1", and when event "1705 (success)" is selected after all stops, and the probability of the chance-up pattern for event "1706" being selected at one stop is "X2",
"X1 <X2"
That is the case.
In other words, when a chance-up pattern is selected, the expected value of "success" increases.

Production 18 is a production that displays event "1801" at the start. This event has "4" cuts, which is a relatively large number for a single event. In the example above, this corresponds to a production where the mission is "failed" once, but then "succeeds" after trying again (for example, the character revives).
The above describes a continuous sequence of events, but for example, the events from the start to the end of the CZ (Chance Zone) will display similar events. In the final game of the CZ, an event indicating success or failure will be displayed.

Performance 20 is selected when a guaranteed win animation is displayed during normal gameplay. In Performance 20, the single-cut event "2001" is selected at the start and continues until all stops are reached. However, the event may also be selected at the first, second, or third stop to trigger the guaranteed win animation.
This guaranteed win animation is a so-called premium animation, and it is selected when, during normal animations, the game announces a win of a special role, a chance zone, or an AT (Attack Time) in the current game (single game), without going through any premonitions or consecutive animations.
The reason the "2001" event, which guarantees a win, consists of only one shot is to intentionally reduce the number of shots in the guaranteed win sequence, thereby drawing attention to that sequence.

Effects 21 to 25 are effects that are selected during AT (Attack Time).
Performance 21 corresponds to the AT start performance. The number of cuts for event "2101" selected here is "3", and it is selected at the start. However, it is not limited to this; the event may also be selected at the 1st stop, 2nd stop, or 3rd stop, and the AT start performance may be output.
In contrast, the number of cuts in the AT ending sequence (sequence 25), which will be described later, is "1". The reason for increasing the number of cuts (making the sequence more dynamic) at the start of the AT is to build excitement for the start of the AT and create a sense of anticipation. Conversely, the reason for deliberately reducing the number of cuts at the end of the AT is to create the effect of fading out the AT.

Presentation 22 is a standard AT presentation. During AT, a different event is selected and always displayed at the start, 1st stop, 2nd stop, and 3rd stop for each game played. However, this is not the only option; even during AT, if a winning combination is not achieved or a replay is achieved, the specific event may not be displayed for any of the triggers.
In contrast, when a button-press sequence bell is won during AT, the correct button-press sequence is announced at the start, and specific events are selected and output at the 1st stop, 2nd stop, and 3rd stop.
Performance 23 is a bonus performance during AT (Attack Time). A variety of events are available as bonus performances during AT, allowing for greater variety in the performances.
Furthermore, in the 24th effect, during the AT (Attack Time) anticipation effect (for example, the effect displayed when a winning combination is selected for the bonus lottery), an event is displayed for each trigger of the operation.
As shown in sequences 22 to 24, similar to the normal sequences, the average number of cuts for events triggered at the start or 3 stops is greater than the average number of cuts for events triggered at 1 stop or 2 stops.
Performance 25 is the AT ending performance. At the start, an event with cut count "1" is selected. However, it is not limited to this; the event may also be selected at the 1st stop, 2nd stop, 3rd stop, or after all stops, and the AT ending performance may be output. In performance 25, one of the events is determined by lottery or other means depending on the results of the game during AT.

Furthermore, while the above describes how the event selection is determined by lottery or other means when a performance is chosen, it is also possible to select a combination of events. For example, it is possible to store the possible event combinations for each performance, determine the performance to be output during the current game (e.g., performance 01) and the event combination pattern for that performance at the start, and then output the performance according to the determined pattern.

Although eighth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows.
(1) In the above embodiment, the focus has been on the number of cuts and branches for each effect, but the volume of the effects can be configured as follows, for example.
First, when one of the performance stages shown in Figure 152 is selected, background music (hereinafter simply referred to as "BGM") specific to that performance stage is selected and output.
For example, when performance 20 (a guaranteed win performance) is selected and event "2001" is output, the volume of the background music corresponding to event "2001" is louder than the normal background music volume for that performance stage. By configuring it in this way, the guaranteed win performance can be emphasized and attract the player's attention.
However, the volume of the background music played when an error is detected is louder than the volume of the background music for all other effects. This configuration allows for alerting those nearby when an error is detected, and also makes it easier for hall staff to notice when an error occurs.

Furthermore, for example, in the third game of a continuous sequence (a game in which sequence 17 is selected), when event "1705 (Success)" is output after all stops, the background music (BGM) is changed. Here, if the change in BGM is one of the sequences that signifies "success," the BGM may be changed at the same time as the output of event "1705" begins, or the BGM may be changed before the output of event "1705" begins to indicate the output of event "1705."
Furthermore, the tempo (speed of the music) of the background music for event "1705 (Success)" is faster than the tempo of the background music for event "1704 (Failure)". In addition, the volume of the background music for event "1705 (Success)" is louder than the volume of the background music for event "1704 (Failure)".

Furthermore, in AT mode, the tempo of the background music for event "2101" in performance 21 (AT start performance) is faster than the tempo of the background music for event "2501" or "2502" in performance 25 (AT end performance).
Furthermore, the volume of the background music for event "2101" in performance 21 (AT start performance) is louder than the volume of the background music for event "2501" or "2502" in performance 25 (AT end performance).
As described above, at the start of the AT (Automatic Trigger) mode, the tempo of the background music is increased and the volume is raised to create excitement and anticipation for the start of the AT.

(2) In addition, the colors of the visual effects can be composed as follows, for example.
First, in production 17, the average brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed in event "1705 (Success)" is higher than the average brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed in event "1704 (Failure)". This is to create a sense of anticipation for the reward by making the success animation brighter.
On the other hand, for example, the normal stages include low-probability stages, normal stages, and high-probability stages, each with different expected values for winning AT or CZ. However, the average brightness and saturation of images that can be displayed in the high-probability stage is lower than the average brightness and saturation of images that can be displayed in the normal and low-probability stages. For example, the high-probability stage could use images themed around night, the normal stage could use images themed around evening, and the low-probability stage could use images themed around daytime.

Furthermore, the system may be configured such that when a continuous performance sequence develops from a high-probability stage, the brightness and saturation of the images displayed during the sequence are relatively lower than when it develops from a low-probability stage. By doing so, it becomes possible to match the brightness and saturation during the continuous performance sequence to the brightness and saturation of the stage before the continuous performance sequence.
Furthermore, even in the animations displayed during normal gameplay, the average brightness and saturation of images that may be displayed during animations with a high probability of winning a CZ, AT, or special role (so-called "hot" animations) is lower than the average brightness and saturation of images that may be displayed during other animations. By establishing this relationship between brightness and saturation and the probability of winning, it becomes possible for players to infer the probability of winning from the brightness and saturation of the animations in this game, or in other words, to be given an indication of the probability of winning.
However, the brightness and saturation of UI images such as the stage you are in, characters, and game information (number of credits) remain constant throughout gameplay (regardless of the expected probability of winning a CZ, AT, special role, etc.).

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described.
The ninth embodiment of the gaming machine relates to a medalless gaming machine (also known as a "smart slot").
In the ninth embodiment, the meanings of the terms are as follows:
In coinless gaming machines, the "gaming medium (gaming value)" is "electronic information (electronic medals, electronic gaming medium)." In the following explanation, it will simply be referred to as "gaming medium."
"Lending" refers to transferring game media from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine and crediting it to the gaming machine.
"Credit" refers to the storage of game currency in a gaming machine. In typical medal-based gaming machines, the maximum number of game currency units that can be stored is "50," but in medal-less gaming machines, the maximum number that can be stored is, for example, "16,384."
In particular, "credit" in a medalless gaming machine specifically refers to the storage (of electronic medals, electronic gaming media) in the gaming media count control board 100 (more specifically, the gaming media count storage means 103a), which will be described later. The "gaming media count control board 100" is also referred to as the "gaming medal count control board 100".
Therefore, in a medalless gaming machine, "credited gaming media" refers to gaming media stored in the gaming media count control board 100, or gaming medals stored in the gaming medal count control board 100.
"Bet" refers to placing a bet using game tokens to play the game. When the bet switch 40 is operated, a predetermined number (for example, "3") of the credited game tokens are bet. In this respect, it is the same as a medal game machine.

Unlike settlement in medal games, "settlement" in this context refers to returning the bet amount to credits. In other words, it means setting the bet amount to "0" (setting the number of bets to "0").
"Counting" refers to returning the gaming media credited to the gaming machine back to the lending unit 200.
"Return" means storing the game media stored in the lending unit 200 onto a card or the like (a storage medium such as a magnetic card or IC card), and then ejecting that card or the like from the lending unit 200.

Figure 158 is a block diagram of the gaming machine 10 (slot machine) in the ninth embodiment. As described above, the gaming machine 10 in the ninth embodiment is a coinless gaming machine.
In Figure 158, the gaming machine 10 in the ninth embodiment differs from the gaming machine 10 in the first embodiment (Figure 1) in that it does not have a coin slot 47 and a coin selector (passage sensor 46, blocker 45, insertion sensor 44).
Furthermore, there is no medal dispensing device (hopper 35, hopper motor 36, dispensing sensor 37).
The main control board 50 corresponds to the main control board 50 in the first embodiment (Figure 1).
Furthermore, the bet count display unit 77 is a two-digit LED that displays the current number of bets.
The number of awarded display unit 78 corresponds to the number of acquired display LED 78 in the first embodiment.

The game token count control board 100 is a board that manages the number of game tokens credited to the game machine 10.
The game medium count control board 100 is also referred to as the second main control board (means), payout control board (means), medal count control board (means), medal count display control board (means), or game medium count display control board (means), etc. Similar to the main control board 50, the game medium count control board 100 requires security to prevent fraud, so it is housed in a board case and sealed with a crimp (sealing member), making it difficult to open the board case (access to the game medium count control board 100).
The game token count control board 100 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, counting switch 47, game token count display board 120, dispensing unit 200, etc., via input port 101 or output port 102.

The game medium count control board 100, like the main control board 50, includes an independent RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105. These RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105 may be integrated into a single chip.
The RWM 103 is a storage means that temporarily stores data such as data taken in when the CPU 105 manages the number of game media (number of credits). The RWM 103 is equipped with a game media count storage means 103a that stores the number of game media. When game media is lent out from the lending unit 200, the number of game media stored in the game media count storage means 103a is updated (added). Furthermore, when game media are granted due to winning a small prize, the number of game media stored in the game media count storage means 103a is updated (added).

Furthermore, when the bet switch 40 is operated to start a game, the number of game media (data) in the game media number storage means 103a is updated (deducted) by the number of game media corresponding to the number of bets (for example, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the number of bets is "3").
Furthermore, ROM104 stores programs and various data used to manage the number of credits.
Furthermore, the CPU 105 is a CPU (an IC with arithmetic functions) provided on the game medium count control board 100, and performs the execution of programs and calculations necessary for managing the number of game mediums.

When the main control board 50 is considered as one of the main control boards, the game medium count control board 100 is the other main control board. For this reason, the RWM 53, ROM 54, and CPU 55 of the main control board 50 are labeled as (first main control) RWM 53, (first main control) ROM 54, and (first main control) CPU 55, respectively.
Furthermore, the RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105 of the game media count control board 100 are labeled as (second main control) RWM 103, (second main control) ROM 14, and (second main control) CPU 105, respectively.
In the ninth embodiment, the main control board 50 and the game medium count control board 100 are configured as separate components, but it is also possible to configure them from a single main control board. However, even in this case, the first main control RWM 53, first main control ROM 54, first main control CPU 55, second main control RWM 103, second main control ROM 104, and second main control CPU 105 will be provided on a single control board.
Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 corresponds to the sub-control board 80 of the first embodiment (Figure 1). The RWM 83, ROM 84, and CPU 85 of the sub-control board 80 are indicated as (sub-control) RWM 83, (sub-control) ROM 84, and (sub-control) CPU 85, respectively.

A game medium count display board 120 is electrically connected to the game medium count control board 100. A game medium count display unit 121 is mounted on this game medium count display board 120. The game medium count display unit 121 displays the number of game mediums stored in the game medium count storage means 103a and is composed of, for example, five-digit LEDs.
For example, let's assume that the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is "100". In this case, the game media number display unit 121 will display "100".

When, for example, the 3-bet switch 40b is operated to start a game, the bet operation signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game medium count control board 100. The game medium count control board 100 determines whether the bet is possible based on the number of game media stored in the game medium count storage means 103a. If it determines that the bet is possible, it transmits a bet signal to the main control board 50. Upon receiving the bet signal, the main control board 50 executes the bet process and stores the bet number in the bet count storage means 53a. When the bet number stored in the bet count storage means 53a is updated from "0" to "3", the display (last digit) on the bet count display unit 77 is also updated from "0" to "3".

Meanwhile, the game medium count control board 100 receives a bet operation signal from the main control board 50, and when it determines that betting is possible, it updates the number of game mediums stored in the game medium count storage means 103a. In this example, for example, if the number of game mediums stored in the game medium count storage means 103a before betting is "100", it will be updated to "97" when "3" is bet. The display on the game medium count display unit 121 will also be updated from "100" to "97".

Furthermore, when the settlement switch 46 is operated, the bet amount is returned to the credits (in other words, the number of bets becomes "0").
When the number of bets is stored in the bet storage means 53a and the number of bets is displayed in the bet display unit 77, if the settlement switch 46 is operated before the start switch 41 is operated (before the game starts), the number of bets is returned to credits.
For example, if "3" is stored in the bet count storage means 53a and "97" is stored in the game medium count storage means 103a, when the settlement switch 46 is operated, the bet count stored in the bet count storage means 53a is updated from "3" to "0". As a result, the display on the bet count display unit 77 is updated from "3" to "0".

Furthermore, based on the operation of the settlement switch 46, a settlement signal (a signal equivalent to returning the bet number "3") is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game medium count control board 100. Upon receiving this settlement signal, the game medium count control board 100 updates the number of game mediums stored in the game medium count storage means 103a from "97" to "100". As a result, the display on the game medium count display unit 121 is updated from "97" to "100".

Thus, the settlement switch 46 is used to return the betted game tokens to credit (to set the number of bets to "0"). Therefore, even if the settlement switch 46 is operated, the number of game tokens stored in the game token count storage means 103a will not be reduced.
Furthermore, even if the settlement switch 46 is operated when no bets are stored in the bet count storage means 53a, the number of bets stored in the bet count storage means 53a remains "0", and the number of game media stored in the game media storage means 103a also remains unchanged.

The game starts when the start switch 41 is operated while the game token is placed. Next, the reels 31 stop when the stop switch 42 is operated. When a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination is displayed, the game token is dispensed. This part is the same as in the first embodiment.
When a game medium is provided, the main control board 50 stores the number of provided game mediums in the provided number storage means 53b. Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits a provided number (payout number) signal to the game medium number control board 100. When the game medium number control board 100 receives the provided number signal, it adds the number of game mediums corresponding to the provided number signal to the number of game mediums stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. For example, if the number of game mediums stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "97" before the end of the game, and the number of provided is "14", the number of game mediums stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated to "111". Furthermore, the display on the game medium number display unit 121 is also updated from "97" to "111".

Furthermore, after the number of awarded points is stored in the number of awarded points storage means 53b, the number of awarded points stored in the number of awarded points storage means 53b is cleared when the start switch 41 is operated for the next game (at the start of the game) or when all reels 31 are stopped for the next game. When the number of awarded points stored in the number of awarded points storage means 53b is cleared, the display on the number of awarded points display unit 78 is also updated to "0".

Furthermore, the game medium count control board 100 is provided with a total game medium count clear switch 112. When the total game medium count clear switch 112 is operated, the (total) number of game mediums stored in the game medium count storage means 103a of the game medium count control board 100 can be cleared (stored as "0"). When the number of game mediums stored in the game medium count storage means 103a is cleared, the number of game mediums displayed on the game medium count display unit 121 is also updated to "0".
Here, the total number of game media clear switch 112 is activated by turning off the power to the gaming machine 10, and then turning on the power to the gaming machine 10 with the total number of game media clear switch 112 turned on (the number of game media stored in the game media control board 100 is cleared). For this reason, even if the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated after the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on, for example, while the machine is in standby mode, the number of game media will not be cleared.
Note that the only information cleared by operating the total number of game media stores in the game media storage means 103a is the total number of game media stores; other information is not cleared.

For example, if the number of bets stored in the bet count storage means 53a is "3" and the number of game media stored in the game media count storage means 103a is "1000", when the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated, the number of bets stored in the bet count storage means 53a remains "3", but the number of game media stored in the game media count storage means 103a becomes "0". In other words, when the total number of game media clear switch 112 is operated, the number of bets stored in the bet count storage means 53a is not cleared.
Furthermore, in the example of the ninth embodiment, a payout ratio monitor 113 (management information display LED 74 in the first embodiment (Figure 1)) is mounted on the game medium number control board 100. However, this is not limited to this, and the payout ratio monitor 113 may also be mounted on the main control board 50, similar to the first embodiment.

The lending unit (also called the "management device" or "CR unit") 200 is a device for lending and refunding gaming media, and is installed for each gaming machine, positioned adjacent to the gaming machine. In a hall, the lending unit 200 is sometimes called a "sand" because it is positioned between gaming machines. Furthermore, a "gaming system" is composed of a gaming machine and the corresponding lending unit 200 for that gaming machine.
Communication between the lending unit 200 and the game media count control board 100 allows for the transfer (lending) of game media from the lending unit 200 to the game media count control board 100, and the leased game media can be credited to the game media count control board 100.
Furthermore, it is possible to return the game media credited to the game machine 10 (game media stored in the game media count storage means 103a) to the lending unit 200.
The lending unit 200 includes a lending switch 202, a return switch 203, a display unit 204 for the number of lendable gaming media, and a storage means 206 for the number of lendable gaming media.

The lendable game media count storage means 206 stores the number of game media that can be lent from the lending unit 200 to the game machine 10, and is composed of, for example, an RWM (Release Written Module) installed inside the lending unit 200. The number of lendable game media stored in the lendable game media count storage means 206 is displayed on the lendable game media count display unit 204. The lendable game media count display unit 204 is composed of, for example, a 3-digit 7-segment display.
When a banknote is inserted into the lending unit 200, the number of units corresponding to the inserted banknote (for example, 50 units for inserting 1,000 yen) is stored in the lendable game media number storage means 206 and displayed in the lendable game media number display unit 204.
The lending switch 202 is a switch that is operated when lending a game medium to the game machine 10. When the number of lendable game mediums is stored in the lendable game mediums storage means 206, for example, each time the lending switch 202 is pressed, a game medium equivalent to the number of "50" (or the total number of lendable times if the number of lendable times is less than "50") is lent out.

When a game medium is lent out from the lending unit 200, this information is transmitted to the game medium count control board 100, and the number of game mediums stored in the game medium count storage means 103a is updated. Furthermore, the display of the number of game mediums on the game medium count display unit 121 is also updated. For example, if the number of credits is "10" and "50" game mediums are lent out from the lending unit 200, both the number of game mediums stored in the game medium count storage means 103a and the number of game mediums displayed on the game medium count display unit 121 will be updated from "10" to "60".

On the other hand, when a player stops playing, or when the number of game media displayed on the game media count display unit 121 (the number of game media stored in the game media count storage means 103a) becomes excessive, the player operates the counting switch 47 to transfer all or part of the game media from the game machine 10 to the lending unit 200.
As will be explained in more detail later, when the number of game media stored in the game media storage means 103a reaches "15,000" or more, the system is configured to output a display that promotes counting. In particular, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of game media that can be stored in the game media storage means 103a is set to "16,384". Therefore, when the number of game media stored in the game media storage means 103a approaches the upper limit of "16,384", it is recommended to return at least some of the game media to the lending unit 200.
Furthermore, when the number of game media stored in the game media storage means 103a becomes "15,000" or more, the game can proceed and counting is possible, but the lending unit 200 will not be able to lend out game media.

When the counting switch 47 is operated, the number of game media stored in the game media count storage means 103a is transmitted to the lending unit 200 via the connection terminal board 130. For example, if the game media count storage means 103a has "1000" game media stored in it, and the counting switch 47 is operated once, and the information "50" is transmitted to the connection terminal board 130 as the counted value, the information "50" is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as the counted value. Then, "950" is stored in the game media count storage means 103a after the counted value has been transmitted. Also, when the game media is returned in the manner described above, the number of game media stored in the lending unit 200's available game media count storage means 206 increases by "50".
Furthermore, the number of game tokens sent to the dispensing unit 200 differs depending on the duration for which the counting switch 47 is pressed. For example, when the counting switch 47 is pressed briefly (for example, less than 0.5 seconds), 1 game token is sent to the dispensing unit 200. When the counting switch 47 is pressed for a long time (for example, 0.5 seconds or longer), 50 game tokens are sent to the dispensing unit 200 for each long press. By repeatedly pressing and holding the counting switch 47, 50 game tokens are sent to the dispensing unit 200 each time.
Specifically, the gaming machine 10 sends a gaming machine information notification and a counting notification to the lending unit 200, and then the lending unit 200 sends a lending notification to the gaming machine 10. When the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notification, it sends a lending receipt result response to the lending unit 200. The gaming machine 10 sends the notifications so that the time between sending the gaming machine information notification and sending the next gaming machine information notification is 300 ms.
The counting notification mentioned above includes the number of medals counted. When the counting switch 47 is operated, the number of medals counted ("1" or "50") is transmitted at the time of the counting notification.

Furthermore, when the game media count display unit 121 shows "1000" before the counting switch 47 is operated, if the information "50" is transmitted to the dispensing unit 200 as the count value, the display on the game media count display unit 121 is updated to "950".
Furthermore, when a player stops playing, the total number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is transmitted to the lending unit 200, and the return switch 203 of the lending unit 200 is operated. When the return switch 203 is operated, the total number of game media stored in the lending unit 200's lendable game media number storage means 206 is stored on a card or the like, and the card or the like is ejected from the lending unit 200. Here, the number of game media may also be converted into units and stored on the card or the like.
Even if the game media count storage means 103a of the game media count control board 100 stores "1" or more game media, if the number of game media (number of game media that can be lent) stored in the lending-available game media count storage means 206 of the lending unit 200 is "0", the card or the like will not be ejected even if the return switch 203 is operated.
On the other hand, if the game media count storage means 103a of the game media count control board 100 has "1" or more game media stored in it, and the number of game media stored in the lendable game media count storage means 206 of the lending unit 200 is "1" or more, then when the return switch 203 is operated, the total number of game media stored in the lendable game media count storage means 206 is stored on a card or the like, and the card or the like is ejected.

Therefore, in the above case, by operating the counting switch 47, the game media stored in the game media count storage means 103a are transmitted to the lending unit 200, and the game media are stored in the lendable game media count storage means 206. Then, by operating the return switch 203, the game media stored in the lendable game media count storage means 206 are stored on a card or the like and ejected from the lending unit 200. Once the game media stored in the lendable game media count storage means 206 are stored on a card or the like, the number of lendable game media stored in the lendable game media count storage means 206 is updated to "0".

The hall computer 300 is a computer used to collect data for hall operations. For example, it compiles data such as the number of games played, the number of coins inserted, the number of coins given out, the difference, MY (My Money), the number of times the special features were activated, and the number of coins borrowed.
Furthermore, since the lending unit 200 is electrically connected to the hall computer 300, information regarding the lending and refund of gaming media is transmitted unidirectionally from the lending unit 200 to the hall computer 300.
The management computer 400 is a computer for transmitting information to an external location (for example, an external center outside the hall). Like the hall computer 300, the management computer 400 is also installed inside the hall.
In the ninth embodiment, the hall computer 300 and the management computer 400 are provided separately, but they may be combined into a single computer.

In a medalless gaming machine with the above configuration, as described above, when the number of gaming media stored in the gaming media storage means 103a becomes "15,000" or more, a display that promotes counting is output.
Furthermore, if the difference between the total score and the number of items borrowed by a single player is 15,000 or more, a celebratory animation will be displayed.
However, in order to display the celebratory animation when the player finishes playing, the celebratory animation will not be displayed simply by counting a portion of the number of game media stored in the game media storage means 103a. Instead, the celebratory animation will be displayed only when the number of game media stored in the game media storage means 103a has been counted to "0".
Furthermore, the celebratory animation is designed to be displayed when the player finishes playing. For example, it will not be displayed during a sub-bonus (AT) or special game state, even if counting is performed.

Figure 159 is a flowchart showing the counting-related effects in the ninth embodiment.
First, in step S601, the game media count control board 100 determines whether or not the counting switch 47 has been operated.
When it is determined that the counting switch 47 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S602, where the game medium count control board 100 executes the counting process. Then, in the next step S603, the game medium count control board 100 stores (updates) the counted value.
Next, the process proceeds to step S604, where the game medium count control board 100 determines whether the number of game mediums stored in the game medium count storage means 103a has become "0", that is, whether all game mediums have been counted. If it is determined that the number of game mediums is "0", the process proceeds to step S605; if it is determined that the number of game mediums is not "0", the process proceeds to step S610.
In step S605, the game medium count control board 100 determines whether the number of bets is "0". For example, if the bet switch 40 is operated and the number of bets is subtracted from the number of game mediums stored in the game medium count storage means 103a, and it is determined that the game has not started and the settlement switch 46 has not been operated, then it is determined that the number of bets is not "0". If it is determined that the number of bets is "0", the process proceeds to step S606, and if it is determined that the number of bets is not "0", the process proceeds to step S613.

In step S613, the game medium count control board 100 requests the sub-control board 80 to output a settlement promotion animation. This is because, although all game media have been counted, the number of bets remains, making it highly likely that the player has forgotten to count their bets. Then, proceeding to step S614, the game medium count control board 100 determines whether or not the settlement switch 46 has been operated (whether or not the settlement process has been executed). As described above, when the settlement switch 46 is operated, a settlement signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game medium count control board 100, so when this settlement signal is received, it is determined that a settlement has been made. If it is determined that no settlement has been made, the process returns to step S613, and if it is determined that a settlement has been made, the process returns to step S601. Once the settlement process is executed, the bet game media are returned to the game medium count storage means 103a, so the system waits for the count switch 47 to be operated again.
If it is determined in step S605 that the number of bets is "0" and the process proceeds to step S606, the game media control board 100 calculates the difference between the count value and the number of games played.

Next, the process proceeds to step S607, where the game medium count control board 100 determines whether the difference is "15000" or greater. If it determines that the difference is "15000" or greater, the process proceeds to step S608; if it determines that the difference is not "15000" or greater, the process proceeds to step S610.
In step S608, the game media control board 100 determines whether the game is in a normal state. Here, "normal state" means not being in a sub-bonus (AT). Also, if the game is designed to execute a special game by hitting a special role, it means not being in a special game state. The reason for this is to proceed to step S609 only if the game is in a normal state. In other words, if the game is in a sub-bonus, it can be inferred that the player will not stop playing yet. And the reason for outputting a celebratory animation when the player ends the game is to determine whether the game is in a normal state.
The game media control board 100 receives and stores information from the main control board 50 indicating that a sub-bonus (AT) or special game state is in progress, and uses this information for the decision in step S608.

If it is determined in step S608 that the state is normal, proceed to step S609; otherwise, proceed to step S610.
In step S609, the game media count control board 100 requests the sub-control board 80 to output a celebratory animation. Then the process proceeds to step S610. This celebratory animation is one of the premium animations for large wins, as the difference in the number of players was "15,000" or more.
In step S610, the game media count control board 100 requests the sub-control board 80 to output a warning message. This warning message is output after counting and reminds the player to be careful not to forget to take the card or other item containing the counted game media from the dispensing unit 200. Then the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S601 that the counting switch 47 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S611, where the game medium count control board 100 determines whether the number of game mediums stored in the game medium count storage means 103a is 15,000 or more. If it is determined that the number of game mediums is 15,000 or more, the process proceeds to step S612. If it is determined that the number of game mediums is not 15,000 or more, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S612, the game medium count control board 100 requests the sub-control board 80 to output a counting acceleration animation. As mentioned above, the upper limit of the number of game mediums that can be stored in the game medium count storage means 103a is "16384", so when it reaches "15000" or more, the player is notified that they should count as soon as possible.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, after the sub-bonus ends, the game transitions to a return zone (also called a "return section" or "return CZ") where it is possible to trigger the sub-bonus again. In the tenth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, "AT" is a "sub-bonus".
The gameplay section, like in other embodiments, includes a normal section and a favorable section.
Furthermore, the game state includes both a notification game state and a non-notification game state.
"Notification game state" refers to a game state in which the correct button press sequence can be announced when a button press sequence bell is won. The "notification game state" includes a game state in which the correct button press sequence is announced in all games in which a button press sequence bell is won, and a game state in which the correct button press sequence is announced in some games in which a button press sequence bell is won.
Furthermore, the sub-bonus (AT) is in a notification game state.
On the other hand, "non-notification game state" refers to a game state in which the correct button sequence is not announced when a button-press sequence bell is won. The advantageous period has both notification game states and non-notification game states, but the normal period is always a non-notification game state.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, a main game state is provided as a concept distinct from the game state.
The "main game state" includes the normal section, the first game of the advantageous section (transition preparation state), non-AT and non-CZ (so-called normal state), non-AT and CZ, normal sub-bonus, sub-bonus special zone, sub-bonus ED (ending), and pull-back zone. Each main game state is assigned a number, and the current main game state number is stored in RWM53. For example, the main game state number for the normal section is set to "0".
The "pullback zone" in the tenth embodiment is the main game state that is entered after the end of the sub-bonus, but this pullback zone may be either a notification game state or a non-notification game state.
"CZ (Chance Zone)" refers to a state in which the probability of winning a sub-bonus is higher than in the normal state. In this embodiment, the pull-back zone is a game state in which the probability of winning a sub-bonus is higher than in a non-CZ state, and therefore can be said to be one of the CZs.
Furthermore, the CZ (Chance Zone) may be in either a notification game state or a non-notification game state.

In the tenth embodiment, the reel 31 symbol arrangement, winning combinations, winning numbers, winning probabilities (number table), and condition device are the same as in the first embodiment (Figures 1 to 26).
Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous period is set to "4000", and the upper limit of the difference in the advantageous period is set to "+2400" when the start of the advantageous period is set to "0", as in the first embodiment. When the number of games played in the advantageous period reaches "4000", or when the difference in the advantageous period exceeds "2400", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when transitioning to Heaven B mode, Heaven B mode was looped 90% of the time, and transitioned to Heaven B return mode 10% of the time. Then, in Heaven B mode, there was a 20% chance of transitioning back to Heaven B mode.
In contrast, in the tenth embodiment, after the sub-bonus ends, the game always transitions to the return zone, where a draw for a return of the sub-bonus is conducted.

Before transitioning to the sub-bonus, a lottery is held to determine the acquisition of a predetermined icon (for example, one resembling the shape of an object such as a treasure chest, shield, or spear). The icon acquisition lottery is held for each game, with a winning probability corresponding to the winning number (result of the role lottery).
Furthermore, players are not notified before the sub-bonus transition whether or not an icon acquisition lottery has been conducted. However, it is possible to display visuals that suggest an icon acquisition lottery has been conducted or that the player has won an icon acquisition lottery (meaning there is a high probability that an icon acquisition lottery has been conducted or that the player has won an icon acquisition lottery).
Before the transition to the sub-bonus, the number of icons may increase through a random draw for acquiring icons, but the number of icons will never decrease.

When the sub-bonus begins, the number of icons acquired up to that point is displayed as an image to inform the player. If the number of icons acquired before the sub-bonus transition is 4 or less, the initial number of icons at the start of the sub-bonus is set to 5. In other words, the minimum number of icons at the start of the sub-bonus is 5. Also, if the number of icons acquired before the sub-bonus transition is 6 or more, the initial number of icons at the start of the sub-bonus is set to that number (6 or more).
Additionally, during the sub-bonus, a lottery is held to determine the acquisition of icons according to the winning number. Note that the number of icons will not decrease during the sub-bonus. When an icon is acquired during the sub-bonus, the number of icons displayed in the image may be increased each time, or, even if the player wins the icon acquisition lottery during the sub-bonus, the player may not be notified of this fact, and the number of icons acquired during the sub-bonus may be notified at the end of the sub-bonus.

When the sub-bonus ends, the game transitions to the comeback zone, except when the ending occurs (when the advantageous period is completed). However, after the sub-bonus ends, the game may also transition to the comeback zone after going through a predetermined main game state.
If the return zone ends without winning the return lottery for the sub-bonus, the player will return to the normal state (non-AT and non-CZ). On the other hand, if the player wins the return lottery for the sub-bonus in the return zone, the player will return to the sub-bonus. Here, if the player wins the return lottery for the sub-bonus in the return zone, the return zone may end at that point. Alternatively, even if the player wins the return lottery for the sub-bonus in the return zone, the return zone may continue (internally the return lottery is not performed, but it is made to appear as if the return lottery is being performed), and the player may be notified whether or not the return lottery was won at the end of the return zone's visual conclusion.

Additionally, icons are displayed as images in the pull-back zone. As mentioned above, the minimum number of icons at the start of the pull-back zone is five, and the number of icons will exceed five if icons are acquired before or during the transition to a sub-bonus.
Figure 160 shows the changes in the number of icons in the pull-back zone. In the example in Figure 160, the number of icons before the first game in the pull-back zone is set to "8".
The draw for a comeback in the comeback zone is performed when the number of icons before the game is "1" or more. If the number of icons before playing in the comeback zone is "1", the comeback zone ends with that game.
In the pull-back zone, an effect is performed that reduces the number of icons by "1" from the start of the game (when the start switch 41 is operated) until all reels stop (when all reels 31 stop).
As shown in Figure 160, for example, if the number of icons was "8" before the game started, a draw for a return to the game was performed, and the number of icons at the end of the game became "7".
In this embodiment, a draw for re-entry is performed after every game in the re-entry zone. In other words, a draw for re-entry is performed regardless of which winning number is selected. The probability of winning the draw for re-entry is predetermined for each winning number. For example, when the winning number is "1" (Replay A), the probability of winning the draw for re-entry is set to "1/50", and when the winning number is "72" (Winning F), the probability of winning the draw for re-entry is set to "1/2".

Furthermore, in games where the number of icons changes from "5" to "4," the advantageous period continuation determination is performed simultaneously with the draw for a return to the game.
In the tenth embodiment, the following a) to d) are performed to determine whether the advantageous period continues.
a) It is determined whether the current game is not in RT mode (not in internal mode). If the current game is not in RT mode, it is determined that the advantageous period will continue.
b) It is determined whether the progress counter value is less than "2500".
Here, the "progress counter" is a counter that counts the number of games played during the advantageous period, excluding games played with irregular button presses (games played with the SP flag set to "0," as described later) (in other words, games played during the advantageous period with the SP flag set to "1," as described later).

The progress counter is an increment counter that is set to an initial value of "1" at the start of the advantageous period, and adds "1" when the SP flag is set to "1" during gameplay.
Then, if the progress counter is less than "2500 (D)", it is determined that the advantageous period will continue. In this embodiment, the maximum number of games in the advantageous period is "4000". Therefore, if the progress counter is "2500" or more, even if the advantageous period is continued from that point, there will be less than "1500" games remaining, and it will not be possible to secure a sufficient number of games in the subsequent advantageous period. For this reason, the advantageous period is not continued when the progress counter is "2500" or more.
Furthermore, in the case of a medalless gaming machine (also known as "Smart Slot,""SmartPachislo," or "SmaSlo") as described in the ninth embodiment, for example, there is a specification that does not have an upper limit on the number of games played in the advantageous period. In such cases, a progress counter is unnecessary, and the determination of the continuation of the advantageous period based on the value of the progress counter is not performed.

c) If the difference counter is "2915 (D)" or higher, it is determined that the advantageous period will continue.
The difference counter in the tenth embodiment is the same as the difference counter in the first embodiment. To explain again, the difference counter in the tenth embodiment counts the difference in the number of tokens when the start of the advantageous period is set to "0" (in other words, it is not a "MY counter"). Therefore, if the difference becomes a negative value during the advantageous period, the negative value is counted. Note that the difference counter does not count the difference during the normal period.
Furthermore, the difference counter is initially set to "2415 (D)" at the start of the advantageous period. If the difference in the current game is negative, that difference is added to the difference counter; if the difference in the current game is positive, that difference is subtracted from the difference counter.

For example, if "2415" is set at the start of the advantageous period, and the difference in the first game of the advantageous period is "-3" (bet "3", payout "0"), then "3" is added to the difference counter and the difference counter is updated to "2418". On the other hand, if the difference in the first game of the advantageous period is "+11" (bet "3", payout "14"), then "11" is subtracted from the difference counter and the difference counter is updated to "2404".
Then, when the difference counter falls below "15", it is determined that the difference during the advantageous period has exceeded "2400" coins, and the advantageous period ends.
Furthermore, the reason for deciding to continue the advantageous period when the difference counter is "2915" or higher is that from this point until the difference counter reaches "0", the player can acquire "2900" coins as a difference, thus acquiring a sufficient number of medals. In other words, when the difference that can be acquired in the advantageous period is small (when approaching the conditions for ending the advantageous period), the advantageous period is ended, which gives the player the expectation of winning the draw in the draw zone (the expectation of acquiring a sufficient difference with the sub-bonus).
However, the value "2915" above is just an example; the value may be greater or less than "2915".
Furthermore, while the difference in the advantageous period is not supposed to exceed "2400," if the difference were to be limited to not exceeding "4000," the above value of "2915" would become "4515."

d) When the advantageous period continuation lottery is won, it is determined that the advantageous period will continue. The advantageous period continuation lottery is conducted with a predetermined probability, for example, a 25% probability of winning, and when this lottery is won, it is determined that the advantageous period will continue.

In games where the number of icons changes from "5" to "4", the above-described determination of whether the advantageous period will continue is performed. If it is determined that the advantageous period will continue, the next game will also be played in the advantageous period. However, if it is not determined that the advantageous period will continue, the advantageous period will end in the current game, and the next game will be played in the normal period (non-advantageous period).
Figure 160 shows the remaining number of games in the return zone, illustrating both the continuation and end of the advantageous period after a game in which the number of icons changes from "5" to "4".
When the advantageous period continues, the number of remaining games in the return zone before the start of the next game for which the advantageous period continuation judgment was made is "4", and when the game comes to a complete stop, the number of remaining games in the return zone becomes "3". In this way, when the game progresses to the final game of the return zone, the number of remaining games in the return zone before the start of that game becomes "1", and when the game comes to a complete stop, the number of remaining games in the return zone becomes "0". When the number of remaining games in the return zone becomes "0", the return zone ends with that game, and the game returns to the normal state (non-AT and non-CZ) from the next game onwards.

Furthermore, if a player wins the draw during any game in the draw zone, the player will be notified that they have won the draw during that game or in subsequent games, and then the sub-bonus will begin.
Furthermore, in the return zone, if the number of remaining plays in the return zone is "1" or more and the return lottery is won, the player may be notified that they have won the return lottery, the return zone may end and the game may proceed to the sub-bonus.
Alternatively, if the number of remaining games in the return zone is "1" or more and the return lottery is won, the system may internally not conduct further return lotteries, but may not notify the player that they have won the return lottery at that point. Instead, the system may continue the (fake) return zone for show until the number of icons becomes "0," and then notify the player that they have won the return lottery in the game where the number of icons becomes "0" or in the next game thereafter.
Furthermore, if you win the draw for a comeback when the number of icons (remaining number of plays in the comeback zone) is "6" or more, the remaining number of plays in the comeback zone (a value of "6" or more) will be carried over when the sub-bonus starts.
On the other hand, if the number of icons (remaining number of plays in the comeback zone) is "5" or less when the comeback lottery is won, the remaining number of plays in the comeback zone will be set to "5" at the start of the sub-bonus.

On the other hand, if the number of icons decreases from "5" to "4" during gameplay and the advantageous period continuation check is performed, and it is determined that the advantageous period will not continue (indicated as "*1" in Figure 160), the next game will be in the normal period (non-advantageous period). However, the visual presentation will remain the same as the previous comeback zone.
However, when transitioning from the advantageous section to the normal section, as described later, all data in the RWM53 that affects the performance related to the instruction function is cleared, and this clearing process also clears the remaining number of plays in the return zone. Therefore, before the start of the next game (normal section), the remaining number of plays in the return zone becomes "0" (in Figure 160, "*2"). In this case, the game section becomes the normal section, so the main game state is not the return zone. However, the presentation maintains the same state as the previous return zone so that the player does not know that they have transitioned to the normal section. The number of icons displayed on the image before the start of the first game in the normal section is "4".
Furthermore, in the first game of this normal section, a draw for a return to the game is performed if certain conditions are met (indicated as "*5" in Figure 160).
Here, "when certain conditions are met" means:
a) The transition to the advantageous period has been decided during the normal period (the next game will be in the advantageous period).
b) The player has won a winning number other than the winning number "1" (Replay A). If both of these conditions are met, a draw will be performed.

Here, the only times when "the transition to the advantageous section is not decided in the normal section" are when the winning number is "2" (Replay B) or when the winning numbers are "60" to "71" (Winning E1 to E12), as shown in Figures 15 and 16. In all other cases, the transition to the advantageous section is decided.
Then, when a transition to the advantageous period is decided during the normal period, the main game state becomes the "transition preparation state," and the next game will be the first game of the advantageous period.
On the other hand, if a transition to the advantageous period is not decided during the normal period, the next game will also be played in the normal period.
Furthermore, when a replay A is won during the normal section, a transition to the advantageous section is decided, but the draw for a return is not performed. In this case, as described above, the main game state becomes the "transition preparation state," and the next game becomes the first game of the advantageous section.

As described above, if a transition to the advantageous section is decided during the normal section, and a winning number other than "1" (Replay A) is selected, a draw to return to the bonus section is performed. Also, the number of icons displayed on the image changes from "4" before the game to "3" when all symbols stop. Furthermore, although the remaining number of plays in the return zone before the start of the game is "0", when all symbols stop, the remaining number of plays in the return zone is set to "3" (in Figure 160, "*3").
Furthermore, even if a transition to the advantageous section is decided during the normal section, if the winning number is "1" (Replay A), the draw-back lottery will not be performed. However, the image display will show an effect as if the draw-back lottery had been performed (the same effect as when the winning number other than "1" is won), and the number of icons on the image display will change from "4" before the game to "3" when all symbols stop.
Furthermore, if the winning number in the normal section is "2" or "60" to "71" and a transition to the advantageous section is not determined (i.e., the next game is in the normal section), the image display will show an effect indicating that the draw-back lottery was not performed, and the number of icons will not decrease. Therefore, in this case, even in the next game (normal section), the number of icons before the game will be "4", and the processing in the normal section described above will be performed again.

When a transition to the advantageous period is decided during the normal period, the next game will be played in the advantageous period (main game state will be "transition preparation state").
In the example shown in Figure 160, the transition to the advantageous section is determined during the first game of the normal section. When the transition to the advantageous section is determined during the normal section, as described above, "3" is set as the remaining number of games in the comeback zone when the game is completely stopped. Therefore, the remaining number of games in the comeback zone before the start of the first game of the advantageous section is "3" (indicated as "*4" in Figure 160).
However, not limited to the above, when a transition to the advantageous section is decided in the normal section, the remaining number of games in the comeback zone at the time of the complete stop of the game may remain at "0", and "3" may be set as the remaining number of games in the comeback zone before the start of the next game (the first game of the advantageous section). Alternatively, "2" may be set as the remaining number of games in the comeback zone at the start of the first game of the advantageous section, and the remaining number of games in the comeback zone may not be reduced when the game is completely stopped.
If a transition to the advantageous zone is decided during the normal zone, and the player enters the advantageous zone, the number of icons in the advantageous zone will change from "3" to "2" in the current game (the first game of the advantageous zone) in the same way as if the advantageous zone had continued (the remaining number of games in the comeback zone will change from "3" to "2"). Furthermore, in the next game, the number of icons will change from "2" to "1" (the remaining number of games in the comeback zone will change from "2" to "1"), and in the game after that, the number of icons will change from "1" to "0" (the remaining number of games in the comeback zone will change from "1" to "0"), and the comeback zone will end. Once the comeback zone ends, the player will return to the normal state (not AT and not CZ).
As described above, in the return zone, excluding the normal section, the number of icons and the remaining number of plays in the return zone will be the same.
Furthermore, even if the advantageous period ends and the game transitions to the normal period during the return zone, the effects of the return zone will continue to run (in other words, internally the return zone ends, but the effects of the return zone continue), so that there is no sense of incongruity when transitioning from one advantageous period to the next (it is possible to make it impossible to tell that the advantageous period has ended, that the game has transitioned to the normal period, and that the game has transitioned from the normal period to the advantageous period).
Furthermore, when the advantageous period ends and the game transitions to the normal period, the data related to the advantageous period in RWM53 is initialized (no data related to the advantageous period remains). However, in the normal period and the advantageous period transitioning from the normal period, a draw for a comeback can be performed as many times as the number of icons displayed in the image.

Furthermore, if the difference in the advantageous period exceeds "+2400" during the sub-bonus (i.e., the advantageous period is completed), the sub-bonus lottery will proceed as follows.
First, if it is confirmed that the difference in the advantageous section exceeds "+2400" during the sub-bonus, the main game state will change to sub-bonus (ED), and the ending sequence will be displayed at a predetermined timing. The ending sequence will continue until the end of the sub-bonus. Also, no icons will be displayed in this ending sequence. Then, when the difference exceeds "+2400" (the condition for ending the advantageous section is met) and the sub-bonus ends, the next game will be in the normal section. At the end of the sub-bonus, the RWM53 initialization process will also clear the data of the remaining number of plays in the comeback zone. Therefore, after the end of the sub-bonus, in the next game, which is the normal section, the remaining number of plays in the comeback zone will be "0".

After completing the sub-bonus (after the ending sequence), a different sequence of events is displayed (for example, an event that suggests a high probability of winning the sub-bonus; hereinafter referred to as "predetermined event"). By displaying a different predetermined event of events after completing the sub-bonus, the variety of events can be increased, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.
However, even when playing through the predetermined sequence of events after completing the sub-bonus and transitioning to the normal section, the same sub-bonus re-entry lottery is conducted as when playing after ending the advantageous section in the re-entry zone and transitioning to the normal section. Therefore, the probability of winning the re-entry lottery during the predetermined sequence of events is the same as the probability of winning the re-entry lottery after ending the advantageous section in the re-entry zone and transitioning to the normal section.
Specifically, during the normal gameplay after completing the sub-bonus (the first game of the predetermined sequence), the transition to the advantageous section is determined in the same way as during the normal gameplay in the aforementioned comeback zone sequence. Furthermore, if a winning number other than "1" (Replay A) is won, a draw for the sub-bonus comeback is performed. In this case, the remaining number of games in the predetermined sequence (equivalent to the number of games in the comeback zone) changes from "4" to "3". The next game will be the first game of the advantageous section (the transition preparation state).
Furthermore, although the transition to the advantageous period has been decided, if the winning number is "1" (Replay A), the draw for a comeback will not be performed. However, the remaining number of plays for the game with the predetermined animation will change from "4" to "3". The next play will be the first play of the advantageous period (transition preparation state).
On the other hand, if a transition to the advantageous section is not determined during the normal section, the remaining number of plays for the predetermined game remains at "4," the next play will also be in the normal section, and the lottery for the normal section described above will be repeated.
When the game enters a favorable period during a game with a predetermined sequence of events, a draw to re-enter the game is performed until the remaining number of plays for that game with the predetermined sequence reaches "0".

Furthermore, after completing the sub-bonus (after the ending sequence), instead of transitioning to the game with the predetermined sequence, the game may transition to the sequence that outputs the aforementioned re-entry zone sequence, and the re-entry lottery may be performed for "4" game sessions. In this case, the re-entry zone sequence will be output during the normal section after completing the sub-bonus, and "4" icons will be displayed as images. Therefore, in Figure 160, the determination of the continuation of the advantageous section will be the same as when the advantageous section ends.

Furthermore, there is a possibility that a draw for a return to the game may be executed even when playing after a setting change (first game of the day).
The game period after the settings change (first thing in the morning) is the normal period and is not in internal mode.
Therefore, the first game in the normal section after the settings have been changed (first game of the day) will be processed in the same way as the normal section described above. That is, if the transition to the advantageous section is decided in that game and a winning number other than "1" is won, a draw to return to the advantageous section will be performed. The next game will then be the first game of the advantageous section (transition preparation state).
Furthermore, if the transition to the advantageous period is determined during the game, but the winning number is "1", the draw for a return to the advantageous period will not be performed. The next game will be the first game of the advantageous period (transition preparation state).

Furthermore, if a transition to the advantageous period is not determined during the game, the next game will also be in the normal period, and the processing described above for the normal period will be repeated.
Furthermore, if a transition to the advantageous zone is decided during the normal zone, and the player enters the advantageous zone, it is determined whether or not the first game in that advantageous zone is in the internal zone. If the first game in the advantageous zone is in the internal zone, the remaining number of games in the comeback zone is set to "3", and, as in the example in Figure 160, the comeback lottery is executed until the remaining number of games in the comeback zone becomes "0" (or until the game in which the comeback lottery is won if the player wins the comeback lottery along the way).
In contrast, if the first game in the advantageous period is not in the internal state, the game returns to the normal state. That is, the number of remaining games in the comeback zone is not set, and the comeback lottery is not performed.
Therefore, after a setting change (first thing in the morning), if you win a Big Bonus (BB) during gameplay before entering the advantageous period, a draw for a comeback will be executed in the subsequent advantageous period. However, if you enter the advantageous period without winning a Big Bonus (BB), the draw for a comeback will not be executed. Furthermore, the draw for a comeback will not be executed not only after a setting change (first thing in the morning), but also if you enter the advantageous period while not in the internal state.

In the above-mentioned draw-back lottery, the draw-back lottery during the advantageous period is performed for all winning numbers, as described above. Specifically, even in games where the winning number is "1" (winning Replay A), it is stipulated that the draw-back lottery will be won with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, the draw for a return in the normal section is performed when the winning number is anything other than "1" as described above, and when a transition to the advantageous section is decided.
Therefore, assuming that the probability of winning the draw-back lottery assigned to each winning number is the same, the probability of winning the draw-back lottery in the normal section will be lower than the probability of winning the draw-back lottery in the advantageous section by the amount of the probability of winning assigned to the winning number "1" in the advantageous section. However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the draw-back lottery for each winning number may be different in the normal section and the advantageous section.

On the other hand, in the draw-back lottery during the normal section, the draw-back lottery may also be performed when the winning number is "1". However, if the probability of winning the draw-back lottery is the same in the advantageous section and the normal section, the payout rate will be high, so in this embodiment, the probability of winning the draw-back lottery in the normal section is lower than the probability of winning the draw-back lottery in the advantageous section. Specifically, in order to lower the probability of winning the draw-back lottery in the normal section, the draw-back lottery is not performed when the winning number is "1". However, the probability of winning the draw-back lottery when it is performed in the normal section is the same as the probability of winning the draw-back lottery in the advantageous section.
The probability of the winning number being "1" is approximately "1/7.3", as shown in Figures 13 and 15, given the number of possible outcomes being "8943".
As described above, even if the winning number "1" is selected in the draw for a return in the normal section, the draw for a return will not be performed if it is not decided to transition to the advantageous section during that game. Therefore, strictly speaking, the probability of winning the draw for a return in the normal section is lower than the probability of winning the draw for a return in the advantageous section.
However, if the winning number "1" is also selected in the draw during the normal section, the probability of winning the draw during the draw when the transition to the advantageous section is decided in the normal section will be the same as the probability of winning the draw during the advantageous section. This makes it possible to make the probability of winning the draw during the draw during the normal section approximately the same. As a result, even if the transition to the normal section occurs during the draw zone, the player will suffer almost no disadvantage.

Furthermore, after the sub-bonus ends, an output will be generated at a predetermined time to prevent excessive gambling.
Here, "output to prevent addiction" means, for example, displaying an image on the image display device 23 that reads, "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to become addicted." Furthermore, it is not limited to image display; the same message, such as "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to become addicted," may also be output as audio. While image display only, audio only, or both image display and audio are acceptable, it is understood that at least image display is preferable.
Furthermore, the anti-geek function is generally activated when a certain number of tokens or more have been dispensed.

In this embodiment, after the sub-bonus ends, the player moves to the pull-back zone, and if the player wins the pull-back lottery in the pull-back zone, the sub-bonus is restarted. Therefore, for example, if the anti-addiction output is executed after the sub-bonus ends, and then the player wins the pull-back lottery in the pull-back zone and the sub-bonus is restarted, the sub-bonus may start immediately after the anti-addiction output is executed.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the anti-addiction message is not output after the sub-bonus ends, and the anti-addiction message is output along with the exit screen of the exit zone when the comeback zone ends (when the number of icons becomes "0" and the number of remaining comeback games becomes "0").
However, this is not the only option; it is also perfectly acceptable to display a warning against excessive gambling along with the sub-bonus completion screen when a sub-bonus ends.

Next, we will explain the process of the draw-back lottery based on a flowchart.
Figure 161 is a flowchart showing the draw process for the draw-back zone. This process is executed when the number of icons before playing in Figure 160 is between "8" and "5", "3" (if the advantageous period continues), or "2" and "1".
The process shown in Figure 161 is performed in the return zone, therefore the remaining number of plays in the return zone before the game starts must be "1" or more. Also, the return lottery process is performed based on the result of the role lottery, so it takes place at the start of the game and after the role lottery.
In step S701, the main control board 50 performs a draw to determine the return to the game based on the result of the draw. Next, the process proceeds to step S702, where the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the remaining number of plays in the return zone. The remaining number of plays in the return zone is stored in a predetermined area (address) of the RWM 53.

Next, the process proceeds to step S703, where the main control board 50 determines whether it has won the draw-back lottery in step S701. If it determines that it has not won, it proceeds to step S704; if it determines that it has won, it proceeds to step S708.
If it is determined that the return lottery has not been won and the process proceeds to step S704, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the remaining number of plays in the return zone is "4". If it is determined that the remaining number of plays in the return zone is "4", the process proceeds to step S705; if it is determined that the number is not "4", the process proceeds to step S706.
In step S705, the main control board 50 determines whether or not to continue the advantageous period. This process is shown in Figure 162, which will be described later. Then the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S704 that the remaining number of plays in the return zone is not "4" and the process proceeds to step S706, the main control board 50 determines whether the remaining number of plays in the return zone is "0". If it is determined that the remaining number of plays in the return zone is not "0", the process according to this flowchart ends. Conversely, if it is determined that the remaining number of plays in the return zone is "0", the process proceeds to step S707, where the main control board 50 changes the main game state from the return zone to non-AT (and non-CZ), and the process according to this flowchart ends. The data related to the main game state is stored in a predetermined area (address) of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, if it is determined in step S703 that the return lottery has been won and the process proceeds to step S708, the main control board 50 turns on the sub-bonus transition flag. Then the process according to this flowchart ends.
Furthermore, if the sub-bonus transition flag is turned on in step S708, the game will proceed to a simulated game after going through the process shown in Figure 169, which will be described later.

Figure 162 is a flowchart showing the determination of the continuation of the advantageous period in step S705 of Figure 161.
First, in step S721, the main control board 50 determines whether the current game is non-RT (not in internal mode). If it determines that it is not non-RT, the process according to this flowchart ends; if it determines that it is not non-RT, the process proceeds to step S722.
In step S722, the main control board 50 determines whether the progress counter is less than 2500. If the progress counter is less than 2500, the process according to this flowchart ends; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S723.
In step S723, the main control board 50 determines whether the difference counter is less than "2915". If the difference counter is less than "2915", the process proceeds to step S724; otherwise, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S724, the main control board 50 performs a lottery for the continuation of the advantageous period. As mentioned above, it is set to have a probability of winning, for example, 25%. If it is determined that the lottery for the continuation of the advantageous period has been won, the process according to this flowchart ends, and if it is determined that it has not been won, the process proceeds to step S726.
In step S726, the main control board 50 controls the system to end the advantageous period. Specifically, it stores "1" in the advantageous period clear counter. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
The advantageous section clear counter stores a predetermined value (in this embodiment, "4000 (D)") at the start of the advantageous section, and deducts "1" at the end of each game. When it is determined that the value after deducting "1" is "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section have been met, and the advantageous section termination process (initialization process of the predetermined range of RWM 53) is executed.

As described above, the determination of whether the advantageous period will continue is as follows:
The advantageous period is determined to not continue (end) when all of the following conditions are met: a) It is not a non-RT (Replay Time) b) The progress counter is not less than 2500 c) The difference counter is less than 2915 d) The advantageous period continuation lottery was not won.
Note that the threshold values of "2500" for the progress counter and "2915" for the difference counter are just examples and are not limited to these values; various settings are possible depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.
Furthermore, the lottery for continuation of the advantageous period in step S724 may be performed as in this embodiment, but it is also possible not to perform it.

Figure 163 is a flowchart showing the draw-back lottery process in the normal section.
As shown in Figure 160, when the number of remaining games in the return zone decreases from "5" to "4", the advantageous section continuation determination is made as described above. If it is decided to end the advantageous section, the next game will be in the normal section, and this process will be executed.
Furthermore, if the difference in the advantageous period exceeds "+2400" during a sub-bonus, resulting in the completion of the advantageous period and the return to the normal period from the next game, this process will be executed during that normal period.
Furthermore, this process will be executed during the normal section after the settings have been changed (first thing in the morning).

First, in step S741, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it has been decided to transition to the advantageous period in this game.
As shown in Figures 15 and 16, if the game is in the internal state, it is decided to transition to the advantageous section unless the winning number is "2" (Replay B) or "60" to "71" (Winning E1 to Winning E12).
Here, after the sub-bonus ends, if the advantageous period continuation judgment determines that the advantageous period has ended and the game transitions to the normal period, or if the advantageous period is completed (the conditions for ending the advantageous period are met) and the game transitions to the normal period, it can be said that the game is almost always in the internal state at that point. This is because, as shown in Figures 13 and 14, the number of winning positions for 1BB is "7564" (the winning probability is approximately "1/8.7"), so it is rare for the sub-bonus to end or the advantageous period to be completed without winning 1BB (while remaining in the non-internal state).
In the first embodiment, it is not determined that the game will enter the advantageous period when the winning numbers "60" to "71" are selected during the internal process. However, it may be determined that the game will enter the advantageous period, similar to the case outside the internal process.
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 13 and 14, if it is a normal section during non-internal play after a setting change (first thing in the morning), it is decided to transition to the advantageous section unless the winning number is "2" (Replay B).

If it is decided in step S741 to transition to the advantageous period, the process proceeds to step S742. If it is not decided to transition to the advantageous period, the process according to this flowchart ends. If it is not decided to transition to the advantageous period, i.e., if the next game is also in the normal period, this process will be executed again in the next game.
In step S742, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a replay A (winning number "1") has been won. If it determines that a replay A has been won, the process proceeds to step S745; if it determines that a replay A has not been won, the process proceeds to step S743.
In step S743, the main control board 50 performs a draw to determine whether or not it has won the draw. In the next step S744, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it has won the draw. If it determines that it has not won the draw, it proceeds to step S745; if it determines that it has won the draw, it proceeds to step S746.

In step S745, the main control board 50 sets the main game state to a transition preparation state. Then the processing according to this flowchart ends. That is, when a transition to the advantageous section is decided in the normal section, the main game state is set to a transition preparation state from the normal section to the advantageous section, regardless of the result of the role lottery or the return lottery.
In response to this, if it is determined in step S744 that the draw-back lottery has been won and the process proceeds to step S746, the main control board 50 turns on the sub-bonus transition flag and terminates the processing according to this flowchart.

Figure 164 is a flowchart showing the draw-back lottery process in the transition preparation state. When the process proceeds to step S745 in Figure 163, this process is executed in the next game.
In step S761, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the machine is in an internal state. Note that in the first game of the advantageous period after a setting change (morning), the machine may not be in an internal state, in which case it is determined in step S761 that it is not in an internal state. On the other hand, when the machine enters a transition preparation state after the sub-bonus ends, it can be said that it is almost certainly in an internal state. Therefore, in this case it is determined that the machine is in an internal state.
If it is determined in step S761 that the system is in an internal state, the process proceeds to step S763; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S762.

In step S762, the main control board 50 changes the main game state from the transition preparation state to the normal state (non-AT and non-CZ). Then the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S761 that the game is in the internal state and the game proceeds to step S763, the main control board 50 sets the remaining number of games in the return zone to "3". As a result, as shown in Figure 160, the remaining number of games in the return zone before the game after the end of the advantageous section becomes "3", which matches the number of icons "3" (in Figure 160, "*4").
Then, in the next step S764, the main control board 50 performs a draw for a return to the game. In the next step S765, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the remaining number of plays in the return zone. Therefore, at this point, the remaining number of plays in the return zone becomes "2".
In the next step, S766, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it has won the draw-back lottery in step S764. If it determines that it has not won the draw-back lottery, it proceeds to step S767; if it determines that it has won the draw-back lottery, it proceeds to step S768.

In step S767, the main control board 50 changes the main game state from the transition preparation state to the pull-back zone. Then the process according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the return lottery has been won and the process proceeds to step S768, the main control board 50 turns on the sub-bonus transition flag. Then the process according to this flowchart ends.
In the above-described process for determining the return to the transition preparation state, if the remaining number of games in the return zone becomes "2" after the completion of this process, and the main game state becomes the return zone in step S767, the process shown in Figure 161 will be executed for the next game.

Figure 165 is a flowchart showing the management process for the advantageous interval clear counter.
As shown in Figure 67 (Second Embodiment), in the main processing that is executed for each game, a game completion check process is performed in step S301. As one of these game completion check processes, the advantageous section clear counter management process shown in Figure 165 is executed.
In Figure 165, in step S781, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the advantageous section clear counter. Next, the process proceeds to step S782, where the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction (before the processing in step S781) is "0". If it determines that the value before subtraction is "0", the process proceeds to step S783; if it determines that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S786. Note that a value of "0" for the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction corresponds to the time when it is not an advantageous section (when it is a normal section).

In step S783, the main control board 50 determines whether the main game state number is "0". In this embodiment, the main game state is set to "0" when in the normal section, and to "1" or higher when in the advantageous section. For example, if a prize draw is performed in the normal section and a winning number is selected that determines the transition to the advantageous section, the main game state number is rewritten from "0" to a predetermined number of "1" or higher before processing in step S783. Therefore, a "Yes" determination in step S782 and a "No" determination in step S783 occurs when a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is determined in the current game.

If it is determined in step S783 that the main game state number is not "0", the process proceeds to step S784. If it is determined that the main game state number is "0" (i.e., when a transition to the advantageous section has not been decided in the normal section), the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S784, the main control board 50 stores "4000" in the advantageous section clear counter. The advantageous section clear counter is decremented by "1" in step S781 after each game, and when it becomes "0" after the decrement, it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section have been met.
Next, the process proceeds to step S785, where the main control board 50 stores "2415" in the difference counter and terminates the processing according to this flowchart.
As described above, when the difference in the game is "+x" coins, "x" is subtracted from the difference counter, and when the difference in the game is "-y" coins, "y" is added to the difference counter. When the difference counter becomes less than "15", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met (step S790 described later).

If it is determined in step S782 that the advantageous section clear counter is not "0" before subtraction, and the process proceeds to step S786, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is "1". If it is determined that the value is "1" before subtraction, the process proceeds to step S791; if it is determined that the value is not "1", the process proceeds to step S787.
In step S787, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a replay symbol was displayed during the current game. This is because the difference counter is not updated when a replay symbol is displayed. If it is determined that a replay symbol was displayed, the process proceeds to step S790; if it is determined that a replay symbol was not displayed, the process proceeds to step S788.
In step S788, the main control board 50 subtracts the payout amount from the difference counter. In the next step S789, the main control board 50 adds a predetermined number (number of bets) to the difference counter.
In the next step, S790, the main control board 50 determines whether the difference counter is less than "15". If it determines that the difference counter is less than "15", it proceeds to step S791; if it determines that it is not less than "15", it terminates the process according to this flowchart.
In step S791, the main control board 50 saves "0" to all RWM 53 (storage areas) that affect the performance related to instruction generation (clearing process). Then the process according to this flowchart is completed.

Specifically, the memory areas of the RWM53 that affect the performance related to instruction generation include the advantageous section type flag (in Figure 54, "_NB_ADV_KND"), the advantageous section clear counter, the difference counter, the progress counter, the main game state number, the remaining number of games in the comeback zone, and the sub-bonus transition flag.
Other examples include memory areas related to sub-bonuses (AT), such as the AT flag ("_FL_AT_KND" in Figure 54) and the AT game count counter ("_CT_ART" in Figure 54).
Furthermore, if there is a section indicator (a favorable section indicator LED 77 in Figure 58, which is composed of segment P of digit 4), a favorable section LED display flag (in Figure 54, "_FL_ADV_LED") is provided to store the lighting data of the section indicator.

As described above, when the advantageous period continuation determination in Figure 162 determines that the advantageous period will not be continued, "1" is saved to the advantageous period clear counter in step S726. In this case, in step S786 of Figure 165, it is determined that the advantageous period clear counter is "1" before the subtraction, so the process proceeds to step S791 and the RWM 53 clearing process is executed. Therefore, the next game will be in the normal period.

Next, the display of the recommended image in the tenth embodiment will be described.
In the tenth embodiment, similar to the fourth embodiment (Figure 94, etc.), a recommended image (an image informing the player that pressing the buttons in order is advantageous to the player (recommended pressing order)) is displayed under predetermined conditions.
The display conditions for recommended images are as follows:
(1) The recommended image is displayed when an irregular press occurs (when the first stop switch 42 operated is the middle or right stop switch 42).
(2) The recommended image will be displayed during gameplay in the advantageous section, but will not be displayed during gameplay in the normal section (even if the buttons are pressed in an irregular manner).
(3) The recommended image will be displayed during gameplay other than sub-bonus rounds, but will not be displayed during gameplay in the sub-bonus rounds.
For example, if the correct button press sequence, where the first stop is left, is announced during a sub-bonus, but the player makes a mistake and the first stop is middle or right (an irregular press), the recommended image will not be displayed.
Furthermore, in games where the correct button press sequence is not announced during a sub-bonus (for example, when a replay is won), the recommended image will not be displayed even if an irregular button press is made.
Furthermore, for example, during a CZ (including the pull-back zone), if the correct button press sequence is displayed when a button press sequence bell is won, the recommended image will not be displayed even if the player makes an irregular button press during that game. Here, for example, when the winning numbers are "40" to "47" (winning C, correct button press sequence is left), the correct button press sequence is announced as stopping the left reel first, but even if the player makes an operational error and the first stop is the middle or right reel, the recommended image will not be displayed.
On the other hand, in games where the correct button sequence is not displayed during the CZ (including the pull-back zone), if an irregular button sequence is played, the recommended image may or may not be displayed.

(4) The recommended image can be displayed when a bell is won in the correct order, specifically when the winning numbers are "8" to "71" (winning numbers A to E). However, it is not limited to this, and the recommended image may be displayed only when the winning numbers are "8" to "39" (winning numbers A and B) when a high-scoring bell can be won when the buttons are pressed in an irregular order. Alternatively, the recommended image may be displayed for any winning number. Furthermore, although not provided in this embodiment, the recommended image may also be displayed when no winning combination is achieved.
(5) In the case of a designated game in the advantageous period (excluding games played during a sub-bonus or games played outside of a sub-bonus where the correct button press order has been announced), a recommended image may be displayed when an irregular button press is made, regardless of the result of the role lottery.
(6) The specified number in the tenth embodiment is limited to "3," as in the first embodiment. However, if, for example, the game can be played with either the specified number "2" or "3," and the game is more advantageous to the player when played with the specified number "3," then the recommended image will be displayed when the game is played with the specified number "3," but will not be displayed when the game is played with the specified number "2."

(7) The recommended image display starts when the first stop switch 42 (middle or right stop switch 42) is operated. The recommended image is displayed across the entire surface of the image display device 23. Therefore, the game's animation images are not visible while the recommended image is displayed. However, this is not the only option; the recommended image may be displayed in only a portion of the image display area of the image display device 23, allowing a portion of the animation images to be visible.
Furthermore, the recommended image display ends when the start switch 41 for the next game is operated, and the recommended image display does not end when betting in the next game (when the bet switch 40 is operated, or when a medal is inserted). In this way, even if a discrepancy occurs between the display in the animation and the data managed internally due to an irregular press, this discrepancy can be hidden by the recommended image. Specifically, for example, if the number of games until the ceiling is displayed as an image, and the number of games until the ceiling is not updated when an irregular press is made, a discrepancy will occur between the number of games displayed as an image and the number of games played internally due to the irregular press. However, by displaying the recommended image from the time of the first stop until the start switch 41 for the next game is operated, the fact that the number of games until the ceiling is not updated can be made less noticeable. In addition, as shown in Figures 97 and 98, for example, inconsistencies in the animation can be hidden by the recommended image.
However, if a predetermined command related to the presentation is sent to the sub-control board 80 when a bet is placed, the display of the recommended image may be terminated when a bet is placed. In particular, if a bet command is sent to the sub-control board 80 and the game image is switched as a result of the bet, the display of the recommended image may be terminated when a bet is placed (however, this does not include cases where the demonstration image displayed on the front layer of the game image is simply erased).

Furthermore, if a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the machine has stopped (or, if there is medal payout, when the payout process has finished), without any betting (effective operation of the bet switch 40 or insertion of medals) or button operation to display the menu screen, a demonstration image will be displayed.
Furthermore, if the recommended image is not displayed, the demonstration image will be displayed 30 seconds after the system comes to a complete stop.
In contrast, when a recommended image is displayed, the demonstration image will be shown 4 seconds after the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
Thus, when a recommended image is displayed, the demonstration image is displayed early for the following reasons:
For example, even if a player makes an irregular press during their last game and ends the game while the recommended image is still displayed, the demonstration image will be displayed after "4" seconds (the recommended image will no longer be displayed). Therefore, when another player looks at the machine, the demonstration image will be displayed and the recommended image will not be displayed, thus preventing that other player from being deterred from playing on that machine.

Furthermore, the demonstration image will be displayed at the end of the settlement process, regardless of the time elapsed since the full stop. This will be done regardless of whether the recommended image was displayed at the time of the full stop. However, in situations where the recommended image is not displayed, and the player is in a favorable state (including a state where it is easy to transition to a favorable state), such as during a continuous performance, sub-bonus, or CZ, the demonstration image may not be displayed even after the settlement process is complete.
In this case, if the number of credits is small, the settlement process will be completed within 4 seconds from the time the settlement switch 43 is operated. Therefore, if the settlement switch 43 is operated immediately after a complete stop, the settlement process will be completed before 4 seconds have elapsed since the complete stop. In this case, even if 4 seconds have elapsed since the complete stop, the demonstration image will be displayed at the end of the settlement process. Note that even if 4 seconds have elapsed since the complete stop, no process will be performed to start displaying the demonstration image again.
On the other hand, there are cases where settlement processing is underway when "4" seconds have elapsed since the train came to a complete stop. In this case, even if settlement processing is underway, the demonstration image will be displayed when "4" seconds have elapsed since the train came to a complete stop. Furthermore, even if the settlement processing is completed afterward, no further processing will be performed to start displaying the demonstration image again.

Furthermore, when a recommended image is displayed, if a demonstration image is displayed 4 seconds after a complete stop, the display of the demonstration image will remain even if 30 seconds have passed since the complete stop. In other words, no process is performed to start displaying a new demonstration image.
Furthermore, in situations where the recommended image is not displayed, the post-stop settlement process is executed, and after the demonstration image is displayed less than 30 seconds after the stop, no further processing is performed to start displaying the demonstration image again, even if 30 seconds have passed since the stop.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the timing of 30 seconds after a complete stop occurs while the settlement process is underway, when the recommended image is not displayed, the demonstration image will not be displayed during the settlement process, but will be displayed after the settlement process is completed.

Furthermore, if the demonstration image is displayed after the recommended image has been displayed and four seconds have passed since the machine stopped, the display of the demonstration image will be maintained even if a betting operation (effective operation of the betting switch 40 or insertion of a medal) is performed. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the demonstration image will end and the game start image will be displayed.
In contrast, if a demonstration image is displayed after 30 seconds have passed since the system has stopped without a recommended image being displayed, a game standby image will be displayed when a bet operation (effective operation of the bet switch 40 or insertion of a medal) is performed. Subsequently, when the start switch 41 is operated, the game standby image will transition to a game start image (performance image).
Here, "game waiting image" refers to the image displayed at the end of the previous game session.
Furthermore, the "game start image" refers to an image corresponding to the game's presentation (for example, a presentation corresponding to the result of the prize draw in this game).

Furthermore, after a complete shutdown, if the menu screen can be displayed (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed), and the recommended image is not displayed, and the menu button is operated before the demonstration image is displayed, the menu screen (see Figure 39) can be displayed.
On the other hand, when a recommended image is displayed, the menu screen will not appear even if the menu button is pressed before the demonstration image is displayed.
Furthermore, if, after a complete stop, the menu screen can be displayed (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed), and the recommended image is not displayed, and 30 seconds have passed since the complete stop, and the demonstration image has been displayed, and then the menu button is operated, the menu screen can be displayed.
In contrast, a recommended image is displayed, and after 4 seconds have passed since the system came to a complete stop and a demonstration image has been displayed, the menu screen will not be displayed even if the menu button is pressed.

Next, we will explain the processing flow between displaying recommended images and displaying demonstration images based on a flowchart.
Figures 166 and 167 are flowcharts illustrating the flow of the demonstration image processing. Figure 167 is a flowchart following Figure 166.
In Figure 166, in step S801, the main control board 50 determines whether the current game is in a favorable section and not an AT (not a sub-bonus). In other words, if the current game is in a normal section or during an AT (sub-bonus), the recommended image is not displayed. If it is determined that the game is in a favorable section and not an AT, the process proceeds to step S802; if it is determined that the game is in a favorable section and not an AT, the process proceeds to step S822 (Figure 167).

In the next step, S802, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a push-order bell was won in the current game. In this process, a recommended image is displayed on the condition that a push-order bell was won. However, as mentioned above, it is also possible to display a recommended image regardless of the result of the role lottery (winning number). In this case, the process in step S802 is unnecessary.
If it is determined in step S802 that a sequence of button presses for a bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S803. If it is determined that a sequence of button presses for a bell has not been won, the process proceeds to step S822.
In step S803, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a button press order notification (navigation) has been performed. For example, if a button press order notification is performed during a CZ (Chance Zone) or other time, even if it is not during AT (Automatic Transmission), the recommended image will not be displayed. If it is determined that a button press order notification has been performed, the process proceeds to step S822; if it is determined that a button press order notification has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S804.
In the next step S804, the main control board 50 determines whether the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed is irregular (the first stop being the middle or right). If it is determined that it is an irregular press, the process proceeds to step S805; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S822.

In step S805, the sub-control board 80 displays a recommended image. In the next step S806, the main control board 50 determines whether all reels 31 have stopped. If it determines that all reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S807. In step S807, the main control board 50 determines whether the settlement switch 43 has been operated. If it determines that the settlement switch 43 has not been operated, it proceeds to step S808. If it determines that the settlement switch 43 has been operated, it proceeds to step S816.
In step S808, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 was operated while a bet was placed. Therefore, cases where only a bet was placed or where the start switch 41 was operated without a bet being placed are not included. If it is determined that the start switch 41 was operated while a bet was placed, the process proceeds to step S813; if it is determined that the start switch 41 was not operated while a bet was placed, the process proceeds to step S809. When the main control board 50 determines that the start switch 41 was operated while a bet was placed, it sends a command to the sub-control board 80 to that effect.

In step S809, it is determined whether or not "4" seconds have elapsed since the complete stop. This determination can be made by either the main control board 50 or the sub-control board 80 (the same applies to the determination of whether or not "4" seconds have elapsed, as described below). For example, if the sub-control board 80 makes the determination, it receives the command from the main control board 50 at the time of the complete stop and starts timer measurement after receiving the command. If it determines that "4" seconds have not elapsed, it returns to step S807; if it determines that "4" seconds have elapsed, it proceeds to step S810. If the main control board 50 determines whether or not "4" seconds have elapsed, it sends the command to the sub-control board 80 when it determines that "4" seconds have elapsed.

In step S810, the sub-control board 80 displays a demonstration image. Then, proceeding to step S811, the main control board 50 determines whether the settlement switch 43 has been operated. If it determines that the settlement switch 43 has not been operated, proceed to step S812, where the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated while a bet has been placed. If, in step S812, it determines that the start switch 41 has not been operated while a bet has been placed, return to step S811. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated while a bet has been placed, proceed to step S813. In step S813, the sub-control board 80 ends the display of the demonstration image and displays the game start image. Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S811 that the settlement switch 43 has been operated and the process proceeds to step S814, the main control board 50 starts the settlement process. Then, in the next step S815, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement process has been completed, and if it determines that the settlement process has been completed, it terminates the process according to this flowchart. Note that even if the settlement process is completed in step S815 after the demonstration image has been displayed in step S810, the display of the demonstration image will be maintained.
Furthermore, as described above, if a demonstration image is displayed after a recommended image has been displayed (step S805) (step S810 or S821), the menu screen will not be displayed even if the menu button is operated. If a demonstration image is displayed after a recommended image, the operation of the menu button will be ineffective.

Furthermore, if the system determines in step S807 that the settlement switch 43 has been operated and proceeds to step S816, the main control board 50 starts the settlement process. Next, it proceeds to step S817 to determine whether or not 4 seconds have elapsed. If it determines that 4 seconds have elapsed, it proceeds to step S818; if it determines that 4 seconds have not elapsed, it proceeds to step S819. In step S818, the sub-control board 80 displays a demonstration image. Then it proceeds to step S819. In step S819, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement process has finished. If it determines that the settlement process has finished, it proceeds to step S820; if it determines that the settlement process has not finished, it returns to step S817.

In step S820, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not a demonstration image is currently being displayed. If it determines that a demonstration image is currently being displayed, the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it determines that a demonstration image is not currently being displayed, the process proceeds to step S821, where the sub-control board 80 displays a demonstration image and then ends the process according to this flowchart.
In the above case, if the demonstration image is not displayed at the end of the settlement process, the demonstration image will be displayed upon completion of the settlement process.
On the other hand, if four seconds have passed since the start of the settlement process but before it has finished, the demonstration image will be displayed at the four-second mark (during the settlement process). Furthermore, no process will be executed to redisplay the demonstration image at the end of the settlement process.

Furthermore, when proceeding from steps S801 to S804 to step S822 in Figure 167, the recommended image is not displayed. In step S822, the main control board 50 determines whether all reels 31 have stopped, and if it determines that all reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S823. In step S823, the main control board 50 determines whether the settlement switch 43 has been operated. If it determines that the settlement switch 43 has not been operated, it proceeds to step S824, and if it determines that the settlement switch 43 has been operated, it proceeds to step S832.
In step S832, the main control board 50 starts the settlement process. In the next step S833, the main control board 50 determines whether the settlement process is complete or not, and if it determines that the settlement process is complete, it proceeds to step S834.
In step S834, the sub-control board 80 displays a demonstration image. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. The start and end commands for the settlement process are sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.

On the other hand, when proceeding from step S823 to step S824, the main control board 50 determines whether a bet has been made (whether the bet switch 40 was operated while credits were available, or whether the inserted medal was successfully accepted). If it determines that a bet has been made, it proceeds to step S829; if it determines that no bet has been made, it proceeds to step S825. Furthermore, when the main control board 50 determines that a bet has been made, it transmits a command to the sub-control board 80.

In step S825, it is determined whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the complete shutdown. This determination can be made by either the main control board 50 or the sub-control board 80. For example, if the sub-control board 80 makes the determination, it receives the command from the main control board 50 when the complete shutdown occurs, and starts timer measurement after receiving the command. If it determines that 30 seconds have not elapsed, it returns to step S823; if it determines that 30 seconds have elapsed, it proceeds to step S826. If the main control board 50 makes the determination, it sends the command to the sub-control board 80 when it determines that 30 seconds have elapsed.
In step S826, the sub-control board 80 displays a demonstration image. Then, proceeding to step S827, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated. If it determines that the settlement switch 43 has not been operated, proceed to step S828. If it determines that the settlement switch 43 has been operated, proceed to step S835 to start the settlement process. In the next step, S836, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement process has been completed. If it determines that the settlement process has been completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Furthermore, when proceeding from step S827 to step S828, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a bet has been made. If it is determined in step S828 that a bet has been made, the process proceeds to step S829; if it is determined that no bet has been made, the process returns to step S827.
In step S829, the sub-control board 80 finishes displaying the demonstration image and displays a game standby image.
Next, the process proceeds to step S830, where the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S831, where the sub-control board 80 displays the game start image. The process according to this flowchart then ends.
Although not shown in this flowchart, in games where the recommended image was not displayed, if the menu button is operated after the demonstration image is displayed in step S826 or S834, the menu screen will be displayed.

Furthermore, in the example in Figure 167, if the settlement process is started before 30 seconds have elapsed since the complete stop, the determination of whether 30 seconds have elapsed during the settlement process is not performed. However, the determination of whether 30 seconds have elapsed during the settlement process may be performed, and this is not limited to this case. If it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed during the settlement process, the demonstration image may be displayed even while the settlement process is in progress. In this case, when the settlement process is completed, it is determined whether the demonstration image is being displayed, and if it is determined that the demonstration image is not being displayed, the demonstration image is displayed.
Furthermore, in games where the recommended image is displayed, even if a combination of symbols for a minor win or replay stops and is displayed, the winning sound will not be output, and the backlight effect upon winning will not be performed. This emphasizes that the game was not played using the recommended button sequence.
Furthermore, as will be described later, if the game is not played in the recommended order, a penalty may be imposed in the next game. In this game as well, for example, when a combination of symbols for a small win or a replay stops and is displayed, the winning sound may not be output, and the backlight effect etc. at the time of winning may not be performed.

Next, the SP flag in the tenth embodiment will be described. The tenth embodiment is equipped with an SP flag, similar to the first embodiment. The SP flag in the tenth embodiment will be described below, although there will be some overlap with the description of the first embodiment.
As described in the first embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated, if an animation indicating a high probability of winning a sub-bonus is displayed, the player should press the buttons in order, and in other cases, they should press them in an irregular order. This prevents penalties in games where the probability of winning a sub-bonus is high, and prevents strategies that increase the expected payout in games where the probability of winning a sub-bonus is not high.
Therefore, in games other than sub-bonuses where the button-pressing order is not announced, if an irregular button press is made, the SP flag will be set to "0" (off) in order to make the lottery for payouts in the next game less favorable than under normal circumstances.

Furthermore, if the SP flag is "0" at the start of the game, the lottery related to payouts will be made less favorable. Here, "making the lottery related to payouts less favorable" means that the lottery for sub-bonuses and CZs will not be held, or the probability of winning them will be made lower (than when the SP flag is "1"). However, the probability of winning a role (the value in the placement table) does not change regardless of whether the SP flag is "0" or "1".
Note that in games where the SP flag is "0", the lottery for payouts is unfavorable. However, if no irregular button presses are used during the game, the SP flag will become "1" at the end of the game. As a result, in the next game after the one in question, the lottery for payouts will be a normal lottery.
Furthermore, in games where the SP flag is "0", the special effects corresponding to the winning combination lottery results are not output. For example, the effects do not develop from the time the start switch 41 is operated until all the machines are stopped. Specifically, at the start of the game, a lottery for the effects in that game is performed based on the winning combination lottery results, etc., but in this case, the lottery for the effects is not performed.

Alternatively, a game-specific animation (for example, an animation indicating a low probability of winning a prize) may be provided for games where the SP flag is "0," and this specific animation may be output. If this specific animation is output, the player will recognize that the game being played is one where the SP flag is "0." Alternatively, when the SP flag is "0," an animation from a certain stage in the normal state (non-AT, non-CZ) may be executed.
Furthermore, when a freeze lottery is performed at the start of gameplay, the freeze lottery will not be performed if the SP flag is "0".
On the other hand, even if the SP flag is "0" during gameplay, in certain situations (for example, during a CZ), the game may not display the effects that occur when the SP flag is "0" and may continue with the effects up to that point.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the SP flag is set to "0" if an irregular press occurs during a game other than a sub-bonus where the order of presses is not announced, when a push-order bell is won. However, the SP flag may also be set to "0" if an irregular press occurs during a game where the order of presses is not announced, regardless of the result of the role lottery.
Furthermore, even in games other than those with sub-bonuses, the button press order may be announced during the CZ (Chance Zone), and even if you press the buttons in an irregular order during a game where the button press order is announced during the CZ, the SP flag will still be "1".
Furthermore, although the specified number is "3" in this embodiment, in a gaming machine that allows gameplay with either a specified number of "2" or "3", if playing with a specified number of "2" is less advantageous than playing with a specified number of "3", then even if the game is played with a specified number of "2" and an irregular button press is made, the SP flag update process will not be executed (the SP flag update program will not be performed).

Furthermore, it is optional whether or not to set the SP flag to "0" when an irregular button press occurs during a normal section. As mentioned above, the recommended image will not be displayed even if an irregular button press occurs during a normal section. Correspondingly, the SP flag may be not updated even if an irregular button press occurs during a normal section. Alternatively, the recommended image may not be displayed even if an irregular button press occurs during a normal section, but the SP flag may be set to "0".
Note that in games where the SP flag is "0", the aforementioned progress counter will not be updated.

Next, the processing flow of the SP flag will be explained based on a flowchart. Figure 168 is a flowchart of the SP flag control process.
In step S851, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, it proceeds to step S852. In the next step, S852, the main control board 50 determines whether the SP flag is "1". If it determines that the SP flag is "1", it proceeds to step S853. If it determines that the SP flag is not "1", it proceeds to step S855.
In step S853, the main control board 50 performs normal processing. Here, "normal processing" means that no unfavorable processing is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step S854, where the sub-control board 80 performs normal effects. Here, "normal effects" means that no effects specific to when the SP flag is "0" are performed. Then the process proceeds to step S857.
The sub-control board 80 may store the value of the SP flag independently of the main control board 50. Alternatively, the main control board 50 may, after determining in step S852 whether the SP flag is "1", send a command indicating the value of the SP flag to the sub-control board 80.

On the other hand, in step S855, the main control board 50 executes a predetermined process. Here, the "predetermined process" corresponds to a process that is less favorable to the player than the normal process in step S853 (a process that is unfair to the player). For example,
a) Not performing any processing related to the instruction function (specifically, the lottery for sub-bonuses and CZs, updating the ceiling counter, etc.) b) Performing only some of the processing related to the instruction function c) Treating all of the processing related to the instruction function poorly d) Treating some of the processing related to the instruction function poorly, etc.
As mentioned above, the draw for the winning numbers is the same in step S853 and step S855.
Next, the process proceeds to step S856, where the sub-control board 80 outputs a predetermined animation. Here, "predetermined animation" refers to, for example,
a) Do not perform any special effects specific to this game that correspond to the result of the role lottery (for example, effects that suggest the winning of a rare role with a high probability of winning the AT).
b) Do not display any effects that suggest the probability of a sub-bonus, CZ, or freeze.
c) Outputting an effect corresponding to the SP flag being "0".
Then proceed to step S857.

In step S857, the main control board 50 determines whether the current game is in a favorable period and not an AT (non-sub-bonus) period. If it determines that it is in a favorable period and not an AT period, it proceeds to step S858; if it determines that it is not in a favorable period and not an AT period, it proceeds to step S862.
In the next step, S858, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a push-order bell was won in this game. If it determines that a push-order bell was won, it proceeds to step S859; if it determines that a push-order bell was not won, it proceeds to step S862.
In step S859, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a button press order notification has been performed. This is because, for example, even in non-AT mode, a button press order notification may be performed during a CZ (Chance Zone). If it is determined that a button press order notification has been performed, the process proceeds to step S862; if it is determined that a button press order notification has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S860.

In step S860, the main control board 50 determines whether the order in which the stop switches 42 were pressed during the current game was irregular (the first stop being either the middle or the right). If it is determined that it was an irregular press, the process proceeds to step S861; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S862.
In step S861, the main control board 50 sets the irregular flag to "1". Therefore, the irregular flag is a flag that is set to "1" when an irregular press occurs in a game that is in a favorable section and not in AT mode, and when a push-order bell is won, and the push-order notification is not performed. Next, the process proceeds to step S862, where the sub-control board 80 displays a recommended image, similar to step S805 in Figure 166. Then the process proceeds to step S864.
In response, in step S863, the main control board 50 sets the irregular flag to "0". Then the process proceeds to step S864.

In step S864, the main control board 50 determines whether all reels 31 have stopped. If it determines that all reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S865. In step S865, the main control board 50 sets the SP flag to "0". Note that before the processing in step S865, regardless of whether the SP flag is "0" or "1", the main control board 50 uniformly sets the SP flag to "0". Next, it proceeds to step S866, where the main control board 50 determines whether the irregular flag is "1". If it determines that the irregular flag is "1", it terminates the processing according to this flowchart. On the other hand, if it determines that the irregular flag is not "1", it proceeds to step S867. In step S867, the main control board 50 sets the SP flag to "1". Then it terminates the processing according to this flowchart.
Based on the above, if a push-order bell is won during a game in the advantageous period and not in AT mode, and an irregular press is made during a game where the push-order notification is not executed, the SP flag will be "0", and in all other cases, the SP flag will be "1".
Then, when the game moves on to the next round, if the SP flag is "1", the processes in steps S853 and S854 (normal processing and normal effects) are executed, and if the SP flag is "0", the processes in steps S855 and S856 (predetermined processing and predetermined effects) are executed.

Next, the processing at the start of the sub-bonus in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, a simulated game was performed when transitioning to the sub-bonus and the "Red 7" combination was displayed as a stop. Similarly, in the tenth embodiment, the "Red 7" combination is displayed as a stop by a simulated game when transitioning to the sub-bonus.
However, when transitioning to a sub-bonus while the morning flag is ON, the transition to the sub-bonus is triggered by stopping and displaying a 7-replay.
Here, "7 Replay" refers to a replay (corresponding to Replay 4 of role number "008" in Figure 4) in which the "Red 7" can be stopped on the middle line when the stop switch 42 is pressed in reverse order (right, middle, left).

As shown in Figure 29, in the normal section lever processing, if the performance group number becomes "0" or "10", the initial normal mode lottery will result in "Normal Mode 0 (Morning Start Confirmed)". In this case, the Morning Start flag is turned ON ("1").
Furthermore, if the initial normal mode lottery is uncertain at the start of the day, and the first game of the advantageous period is not in internal mode, the start-of-day flag will be turned on.
Then, when transitioning to the sub-bonus, the system checks the "morning flag," and if the morning flag is on, it stops displaying a 7-replay and transitions to a simulated game.
In contrast, when the morning flag is off, the game transitions to a simulated game (without stopping the 7-replay display).
The simulated game in the tenth embodiment is the same as in Figure 32 (first embodiment).

The 7th replay can be stopped and displayed when the stop switch 42 is pressed in reverse while the condition device, including replay 04, is activated.
As shown in Figure 19, the condition devices including replay 04 are the minor role and replay condition device numbers "1" and "2". In the tenth embodiment, when these condition devices are activated, that is, when the winning number is "1" (replay A) or the winning number is "2" (replay B), 7 replays can be stopped and displayed.
When a transition to a sub-bonus is decided and the morning flag is on, the player will be notified that they should aim for the "Red 7" by pressing the buttons in reverse order when the winning number is "1" or "2" (hereinafter referred to as "7 Replay Navi").
When the 7 Replay symbol stops during this game, it becomes possible to transition to a sub-bonus. Also, when the 7 Replay symbol stops during this game, the morning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, if you are unable to stop and display a 7-replay in a game where you have won with the winning number "1" or "2", you will not be able to proceed to the sub-bonus in the next game, even if other replays are displayed.

Furthermore, if it is decided to proceed to the sub-bonus, and the morning flag is on, and the 7-Replay Navi is displayed, but the player is unable to stop and display the 7-Replay, then even if the player subsequently wins a Replay "1" or "2", the 7-Replay Navi will not be displayed. Additionally, if the player is unable to stop and display the 7-Replay in a game where the 7-Replay Navi is displayed, and the player subsequently wins a game with a winning number "1" or "2" (where the 7-Replay Navi is not displayed), even if the player stops and displays the 7-Replay, the player will not proceed to the sub-bonus.
If it is decided to proceed to a sub-bonus, and the morning flag is on, and the 7-replay navigation is displayed, but the player is unable to stop and display the 7-replay, then in subsequent games, when the winning number is "8" to "39" (either from group A or group B), an image for selecting the button press order (hereinafter referred to as the "button press order selection image") will be displayed.
Furthermore, winning is not limited to winning numbers "8" through "39," but may also include winning numbers "40" through "47" (any of the prize group C) or winning numbers "48" through "59" (any of the prize group D).

Here, "button press order selection" refers to a system where the player is asked to choose a button press order, with the predetermined order being considered correct and any other order being considered incorrect. "Button press order selection" is also called "button press order guessing" or "choice guessing."
In this embodiment, when a push-order bell is won, the player is asked to select a first push-order sequence. If the first push-order sequence (initial push-order) selected by the player matches the first stop of the correct push-order sequence for the winning push-order bell, the player is deemed to have selected the correct push-order sequence. Specifically, for example, in a game where a prize A1 (correct push-order sequence 213) is won, if the first stop is in the middle, the push-order sequence selection is considered correct, and the second stop is irrelevant.

Specifically, for example, firstly, when displaying the button press selection image when either group A or group B (a button press sequence bell where an irregular press is the correct sequence) is won, the image displayed would be "×??".
Here, "×" indicates that it is not the first stop. Therefore, when the image displays "×??", the first stop must be either the middle or the right, resulting in a 2-choice question (50% correct answer rate).
Alternatively, an image displaying "???" could be shown when either group A or group B is selected. In this case, the first stop would be either left, middle, or right, resulting in three choices (33.3% correct answer rate).

Secondly, when displaying the button press selection image when winning either group C or group D (a button press sequence bell where either left, middle, or right is the correct button press order), the image may be displayed as "×??", "?×?", or "??×". Although the button press sequence bells for group C or group D are originally a three-choice selection, if one of the first stops is set to "×", it becomes a two-choice selection (50% correct answer rate).
Alternatively, as described above, when a winner is selected from either group C or group D, the image "???" may be displayed, and the winner may be given three choices (with a 33.3% chance of getting the correct answer).
Then, when a push-order bell is won, a push-order selection image is displayed, and if the push-order selection for the first stop is correct (i.e., the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, or any of the first to third stops are correct), the game transitions to a simulated game (Figure 32). Furthermore, it becomes possible to transition to a sub-bonus after this simulated game. Note that when transitioning to the simulated game, the morning flag is turned off.
Thus, in games where you select the order of button presses, you only need to correctly select the order of button presses for the first stop, and when you win either group A or group B of prizes, it is not limited to winning a high-value bell.

However, the correct button sequence for hitting a high-scoring bell when winning either group A or group B may be set as the correct button sequence. For example, if "×??" is displayed when winning group A1 (correct button sequence 213), the original 6 choices become 4 choices (25% correct answer rate).
Alternatively, displaying "???" when a winner is selected from either group A or group B would result in the original six choices.
The above button press sequence selection image is displayed on the image display device 23, but a dedicated number is displayed on the so-called instruction monitor.
Furthermore, in games where a button press sequence selection image is displayed, the recommended image will not be displayed even if the buttons are pressed in an irregular order.

Furthermore, when displaying images corresponding to the winning combination, the image to be displayed is selected by lottery from a pre-stored set of images.
For example, if there are two button press selection images corresponding to prize A1, "×??" and "??×", one of them will be determined by lottery. However, in such cases, the button press order bell (prize group C and prize group D) where the first stop on the left is the correct answer will be included.
Similarly, if there are two button press selection images corresponding to winning C1, "?×?" and "??×", one of them will be determined by lottery.

Next, we will explain the processing flow before transitioning to the sub-bonus, based on a flowchart. Figure 169 is a flowchart showing the processing flow when it is decided to transition to the sub-bonus.
In step S881, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the sub-bonus transition flag is on.
The sub-bonus transition flag is,
a) When a sub-bonus is won in non-AT mode,
b) When the draw for a return wins in the return zone after the sub-bonus ends (step S708 in Figure 161, Figure 768 in Figure 164),
c) When the draw-back lottery is won in the normal section (Step S746 in Figure 163)
It turns on.

If it is determined that the sub-bonus transition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S882. If it is determined that the sub-bonus transition flag is not on, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S882, the main control board 50 determines whether the morning flag is on or off. If it determines that the morning flag is on, it proceeds to step S883; if it determines that the morning flag is not on, it proceeds to step S897. In step S897, the game transitions to a simulated game. This simulated game corresponds to the red 7 alignment simulated game performance shown in Figure 32 (first embodiment).
In other words, if the morning flag is not set, the game will proceed to simulated gameplay without executing the 7 Replay Navi described later.

In step S883, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a 7-Replay (Replay A or Replay B) has been won. If it determines that a 7-Replay has been won, the process proceeds to step S884; if it determines that a 7-Replay has not been won, the process proceeds to step S891.
In step S884, the main control board 50 determines whether the 7 Replay Navi flag is on. Here, the "7 Replay Navi flag" is a flag that is turned on when the 7 Replay Navi is executed. In this embodiment, the 7 Replay Navi is executed only once, so when the 7 Replay Navi is executed for the first time, the 7 Replay Navi is turned on, and even if a 7 Replay is won in subsequent instances, the 7 Replay Navi will not be executed.
If it is determined that the 7 Replay Navigation flag is not on, proceed to step S885. If it is determined that the 7 Replay Navigation flag is on, terminate the process according to this flowchart.
In step S885, the sub-control board 80 executes the 7 Replay Navi. When the conditions for the 7 Replay Navi are met, the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80 to that effect. Then, proceeding to step S886, the main control board 50 turns on the 7 Replay Navi flag.

In the next step, S887, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the 7 Replay is displayed as stopped. If it determines that the 7 Replay is displayed as stopped, the process proceeds to step S888. If it determines that the 7 Replay is not displayed as stopped, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S888, the main control board 50 turns off the morning flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S889, where the main control board 50 turns off the sub-bonus transition flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S890, where the game transitions to the sub-bonus.

If it is determined in step S883 that a 7-Replay has not been won and the process proceeds to step S891, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a push-order bell has been won. If it is determined that a push-order bell has not been won, the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a push-order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S892. In step S892, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the 7-Replay Navigation Flag is on. If it is determined that the 7-Replay Navigation Flag is on, the process proceeds to step S893; if it is determined that it is not on, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S893, the sub-control board 80 displays a button-press selection image corresponding to the winning button-press bell. Next, the process proceeds to step S894, where the main control board 50 determines whether the first button-press sequence was correct or not. For example, if the player wins prize A1 in this game and the first stop is the middle button, the first button-press sequence is determined to be correct. If the first stop is the left or right button, the first button-press sequence is determined to be incorrect. If the first button-press sequence is determined to be correct, the process proceeds to step S895. If the first button-press sequence is determined to be incorrect, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S895, the main control board 50 turns off the morning flag. Next, the process proceeds to step S896, where the main control board 50 turns off the sub-bonus transition flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S897, where the game transitions to a simulated game (Figure 32).
In the above scenario, if the morning flag is turned off in step S888 or S895, the next time the sub-bonus transition flag is turned on, it will be judged as "No" in step S882, so the 7-replay navigation will not be executed and the game will proceed to simulated gameplay.

Furthermore, as shown in steps S891 and S892, even if a push-order bell is won, the push-order selection image will not be displayed if the 7-replay navigation flag is not on. Therefore, the push-order selection image will never be displayed before the 7-replay navigation. The push-order selection image is only displayed when the 7-replay navigation is displayed and it is not possible to stop and display the 7-replay. However, if a push-order bell is won before the display of the 7-replay navigation (in some or all games when a push-order bell is won), the correct push order may be displayed and the number of medals may increase.
Although not shown in the flowchart, after turning on the 7 Replay Navigation flag, the 7 Replay Navigation flag may be turned off when transitioning to a sub-bonus or simulated game. However, even if the 7 Replay Navigation flag remains on, when the sub-bonus transition flag is turned on next, the morning flag will be off, so the process will not proceed to step S883 or later. Therefore, it is acceptable for the 7 Replay Navigation flag to remain on.

Although a tenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above and can be modified in various ways as follows.
(1) The return zone after the sub-bonus ends may be in a notified game state. However, if it is decided to end the advantageous section in the return zone and the game transitions to the normal section, the normal section will be in a non-notified game state. Furthermore, if it is decided to transition to the advantageous section in the normal section, the return zone in the subsequent advantageous section will be in a notified game state.
Furthermore, when the return zone is set to a notification game state, the recommended image will not be displayed even if the buttons are pressed in an irregular manner within the return zone.
(2) In the example in Figure 162, the determination of the continuation of the advantageous period in the pullback zone is made when the four conditions in steps S721, S722, S723, and S725 are met, the advantageous period ends. However, the conditions set for determining the continuation of the advantageous period are arbitrary. For example, only the two conditions in steps S722 and S723 may be used.
(3) In Figure 166, a recommended image is displayed when a bell is won in the correct order of presses, but this is not the only option. When an irregular press is made, a recommended image may be displayed according to the game state (excluding sub-bonuses and CZs), regardless of the winning combination.

(4) In the above embodiment, the demonstration image was displayed 4 seconds after a full stop (when pressing irregularly) or 30 seconds after a full stop (when pressing in order). However, if the recommended image is not displayed (when pressing in order), the demonstration image does not need to be displayed if there is a predetermined situation such as during a continuous performance or a sub-bonus. Alternatively, if the continuous performance is successful (sub-bonus is won), the demonstration image may not be displayed during the continuous performance, and if the continuous performance is unsuccessful (sub-bonus is not won), the demonstration image may be displayed during the continuous performance.
On the other hand, if a recommended image is displayed (during an irregular press), a demonstration image may be displayed at a predetermined timing after all reels have stopped, regardless of whether a predetermined situation such as a continuous performance or a sub-bonus is occurring.
Furthermore, if the game is being played normally, the demonstration image may not be displayed after the replay symbol combination stops. On the other hand, if a recommended image is displayed when an irregular press is made regardless of the outcome of the prize draw, the demonstration image may be displayed even after the replay symbol combination stops.
(5) As shown in Figure 169, if the 7 Replay could not be stopped and the first button press sequence was correct as indicated by the display of the button press sequence selection image, the game proceeded to a simulated game. However, the game is not limited to this, and a sub-bonus may be started without going through the simulated game.

(6) If the 7 Replay Navi is displayed and it is not possible to stop the 7 Replay, the correct button press order may be announced when a button press bell is won to the extent that the difference in medals remains at the current level until the sub-bonus is started (hereinafter, this period will be referred to as the "status quo maintenance period"). An example of announcing the correct button press order to maintain the difference at the current level during the status quo maintenance period is to announce the correct button press order at a rate of once every three times when a button press bell is won.
Furthermore, if the correct button sequence for maintaining the current difference is announced during the status quo maintenance period, operating the stop switch 42 according to the announcement will not trigger a sub-bonus (in Figure 169, step S894 will not be judged as "Yes"). Also, no recommended images are displayed during this game.
Furthermore, even during the period between the activation of the sub-bonus transition flag and the start of the sub-bonus, predetermined lotteries related to the sub-bonus (such as lotteries for increasing the number of games played or the number of medals that can be obtained, lotteries for adding medals, lotteries for transitioning to a special zone, etc.) may be performed. In this case, during the status quo maintenance period, the probability (expected value) of winning the predetermined lotteries related to the sub-bonus may be lowered, or the predetermined lotteries related to the sub-bonus may not be performed at all. By doing so, it is possible to prevent players from deliberately avoiding the display of 7 replays to transition to the status quo maintenance period and taking advantage of the predetermined lotteries related to the sub-bonus.

(7) In the tenth embodiment, when it is decided to proceed to a sub-bonus, the 7 Replay is stopped and displayed only when the morning flag is ON. However, it is not limited to this, and may be done as follows.
a) Whenever it is decided to proceed to a sub-bonus, the 7-replay navigation may be displayed and the 7-replay may be stopped and displayed.
b) When it is decided to proceed to a sub-bonus, if the 7-Replay Navigation is displayed and the 7-Replay is stopped, the 7-Replay Navigation will be displayed and the 7-Replay will be stopped again when it is decided to proceed to the next sub-bonus. If it is not possible to display the 7-Replay Navigation and stop the 7-Replay, then in subsequent cases, when it is decided to proceed to a sub-bonus, the game may proceed to a simulated game without displaying the 7-Replay Navigation.

c) If it is decided to proceed to a sub-bonus, it may be decided by lottery or other means whether to display the 7 Replay Navi and stop the 7 Replay each time, or to proceed to a simulated game without displaying the 7 Replay Navi.
d) In a game where the aim is to stop and display a combination of 7 Replay symbols, if the winning number is "1" or "2", the 7 Replay Navi will be displayed and the 7 Replay will be stopped and displayed. If the winning number is not "1" or "2", a simulated game may be performed in the game and the combination of 7 Replay symbols may be stopped and displayed.
Furthermore, in any of the above a) to d), if the 7 Replay Navi is not displayed and the 7 Replay cannot be stopped, the button press selection image will be displayed when a button press order bell is won in the subsequent game.
Furthermore, if the 7 Replay Navi is displayed but the 7 Replay is not stopped and displayed, and the 7 Replay is won again before the push-order bell is won (before the push-order selection image is displayed), the 7 Replay Navi may be displayed again. And when the 7 Replay is stopped and displayed, the sub-bonus may be started.
Similarly, if the 7 Replay Navi is displayed but the 7 Replay is not stopped and displayed, and then a push-order bell is won and a push-order selection image is displayed but the push-order selection is not correct, and then a 7 Replay is won again before the next push-order bell is won, the 7 Replay Navi may be displayed again. And when the 7 Replay is stopped and displayed, a sub-bonus may be started.
As described above, after displaying the 7 Replay Navi and failing to stop the 7 Replay, if a push-order bell is won, a push-order selection image is displayed, and if a 7 Replay is won, the 7 Replay Navi is displayed. Then, if the push-order selection image is displayed and the push-order selection is correct, the game transitions to a simulated game (or directly to a sub-bonus), and if the 7 Replay Navi is displayed and the 7 Replay is stopped, the game transitions to a sub-bonus.

(8) When the settings are changed, the morning flag is turned on, so the 7 Replay Navi will always be displayed during the first sub-bonus. In other words, if the 7 Replay Navi is displayed during the first sub-bonus, it means that the settings have been changed. Therefore, in order to make it impossible to know whether the settings have been changed, the 7 Replay Navi should always be displayed when transitioning to the first sub-bonus after power-on, regardless of whether the settings have been changed, or a random decision should be made on whether or not to display the 7 Replay Navi, so that it is impossible to know whether the settings have been changed.
(9) In the example shown in Figure 169, if the player does not correctly select the first button press sequence in a game where the button press sequence selection image is displayed, the game will never proceed to the sub-bonus. However, the game is not limited to this example; if the player does not correctly select the first button press sequence in a game where the button press sequence selection image is displayed, the game may proceed to the sub-bonus if predetermined conditions are met thereafter.
For example, when the number of times the button press selection image has been displayed reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 5 times), or when a predetermined number of games have passed since the first game in which the 7 Replay navigation was displayed (e.g., 50 games), the 7 Replay may not be displayed as a stop, and even if the first stop is not correct when the button press selection image is displayed, the game may proceed to a sub-bonus.

(10) The demonstration image is displayed 4 seconds after a complete stop (when the recommended image is displayed) or 30 seconds after a complete stop (when the recommended image is not displayed). However, if there is a payout, it may be 4 seconds or 30 seconds after the end of the payout process. In other words, it may be 4 seconds or 30 seconds after a predetermined timing after a complete stop.
Please note that "4" seconds and "30" seconds are examples only and are not limited to these times.
However, it is preferable that the relationship between the time "T1" from full stop to display of the demonstration image when the recommended image is displayed and the time "T2" from full stop to display of the demonstration image when the recommended image is not displayed is "T1 <T2". By doing so, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order, the time until the demonstration image is displayed can be shortened, making it possible to end the display of the recommended image earlier.
Furthermore, the term "total stop" can refer to any of the following timings: when the stop switch 42 is activated, when the reel 31 stops (when the motor 32's rotation speed becomes "0"), when the 4-phase excitation of the motor 32 ends, etc. Any of these timings is included in "total stop".

(11) In the example of Figure 166, when the recommended image is displayed, if the settlement process is started before "4" seconds have elapsed since the machine stopped, the demonstration image is displayed when the settlement process is completed, even if "4" seconds have elapsed since the machine stopped. However, the system is not limited to this, and when the recommended image is displayed, if "4" seconds have not elapsed since the machine stopped when the settlement process is completed, the demonstration image may be displayed after "4" seconds have elapsed since the machine stopped. This allows the recommended image to be displayed until "4" seconds have elapsed since the machine stopped, even if the settlement switch 43 is operated immediately after the machine stopped, thus preventing the recommended image from being immediately deleted after the game ends.
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 167, if the settlement switch 43 is operated before 30 seconds have elapsed while the recommended image is not displayed, the demonstration image is displayed at the end of the settlement process. Therefore, during the settlement process, it is not determined whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the complete stop. However, it is also possible to determine whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the complete stop during the settlement process, and if it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed since the complete stop, the demonstration image may be displayed even during the settlement process.
(12) The tenth embodiment is not limited to being implemented on its own, but can also be implemented in combination with other embodiments.

<Embodiment 11>
The eleventh embodiment relates to a management information display LED 74. In the description of the eleventh embodiment, the management information display LED 74 will be referred to as the "playing ratio monitor 74". The playing ratio monitor 74 is also referred to as a ratio indicator 74. Furthermore, the ratio indicator of a slot machine and the performance indicator of a pachinko game machine may be collectively referred to simply as an "indicator (or a predetermined indicator)".
The structure of the ratio monitor 74 is the same as that shown in Figure 57(B) (second embodiment), and consists of four digit LEDs, digits 6 to 9. Each digit (LED) consists of segments A to G and P, as shown in Figure 58. Here, as shown in Figures 58, 60, and 61, segment P of digit 7 is used as a digit separator display LED, and segments P of digits 6, 8, and 9 are unused ("-"). When displaying ratios, segments P of these three digits 6, 8, and 9 are not lit, but as will be described later, there are cases where all segments (including segment P) of digits 6 to 9 are lit as a test pattern when the power is turned on.
When the identification segment is displayed as "AB", it indicates that digit 6 is displayed as "A" and digit 7 is displayed as "B". Also, when the ratio segment is displayed as "12", it indicates that digit 8 is displayed as "1" and digit 9 is displayed as "2".
Furthermore, when "A." is displayed for one digit, it indicates that segments A through G display "A," and segment P is off.
Similarly, when "A." is displayed for one digit, it indicates that segments A through G display "A" and segment P is lit.

Furthermore, although not adopted in the 11th embodiment, during, for example, the setting change state (mode) or the setting confirmation state (mode), the ratio may not be displayed on the role ratio monitor 74, and a predetermined pattern indicating that it is in setting change mode or setting confirmation mode may be displayed. However, during setting confirmation, the ratio may be displayed in the same way as during gameplay. An example of a predetermined pattern is the display of "1. 2. 3. 4." (segments P of digits 7 and 9 are lit or blinking. Segments P of digits 6 and 8 are off.)

Figure 170 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration overview of a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "the chip") in the 11th embodiment. Figure 170 illustrates only the configurations necessary for explanation in the 11th embodiment. In other words, Figure 170 does not illustrate all the configurations within the chip.
Figure 170 shows the chip configuration, including the main CPU 55, built-in memory, and arithmetic unit (APU) 57. The chip's built-in memory includes a ROM 54, RWM 53, and built-in memory registers 56, similar to those in Figures 82 to 84 (third embodiment).
Although this overlaps with the explanation in Figure 83 (Third Embodiment), to reiterate, the ROM 54 and RWM 53 are each provided with a usable area and an area outside the usable area.
The "used area" is the memory area where information related to the progress of the game is stored. Hereafter, it will also be referred to as the "first area."
Furthermore, "outside the usage area" refers to a memory area where information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored. This includes, for example, a program for controlling the illumination of the payout ratio monitor 74, a program used during testing, and a program for preventing fraud. Hereinafter, this will also be referred to as the "second area."

The first and second regions of the built-in ROM 54 are provided with a program region (first program region and second program region) and a data region (first data region and second data region), respectively. The "program region" is also called the "control region" and is a storage region where various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored.
Note that "program" can sometimes refer to instructions. Furthermore, "program" can sometimes refer to a set of instructions (a so-called module).
Furthermore, the "data area" is a memory area where information other than the program is stored, and it is the memory area where data used during program execution is stored.
Furthermore, the memory area of RWM53, like the memory area of ROM54, has a first area and a second area, and the first area and the second area each have a work area (first work area and second work area) and a stack area (first stack area and second stack area).

In the 11th embodiment, the built-in memory register 56 includes a function setting register 56a and a function control register 56b (same as in Figure 82 (third embodiment)). As shown in Figure 170, the storage area of the function setting register 56a is from address "FE00h" to "FEFFh", and the storage area of the function control register 56b is from address "FF00h" to "FFCh".
Furthermore, the arithmetic unit (APU) 57 is used for calculations such as ratio calculations.
In the eleventh embodiment, the built-in registers 55a of the main CPU 55 (synonymous with the CPU register area in Figure 82) include register bank 0 and register bank 1. Within each register bank, there are main registers (front registers) and sub-registers (back registers). The main registers include general-purpose registers.
In the following explanation, sub-registers will be omitted, and when the term "register" is used, it will refer to the main register.

Each register in register bank 0 is used when the first program is being executed (for example, during the main processing shown in Figure 180, as described later, such as the game start set processing in step S272). Similarly, each register in register bank 1 is used when the second program is being executed (for example, during the main processing shown in Figure 180, such as the ratio set processing in step S910).
Therefore, when the first program is running, the registers in register bank 0 are used, and the registers in register bank 1 are not used.
Similarly, when the second program is running, the registers in register bank 1 are used, and the registers in register bank 0 are not used.

Registers A, F, etc., are available in both Register Bank 0 and Register Bank 1, respectively. In other words, Register A in Register Bank 0 and Register A in Register Bank 1 are different registers.
Register A is the accumulator. Register F is the flag register. Registers B, C, D, E, H, and L are general-purpose registers.
The IX and IY registers are index registers, used, for example, when specifying an address.
The SP register is the stack pointer register. The SP register specifies the address to which data should be saved when saving data to the stack area, and also specifies the address of the data to be restored when restoring data from the stack area.
Specifically, the SP register in register bank 0 specifies an address in the first stack area (ranging from "F1D0h" to "F1FFh"). Similarly, the SP register in register bank 1 specifies an address in the second stack area (ranging from "F3E8h" to "F3FFh").

In addition to register banks 0 and 1, the system includes I, R, PC, and IFF registers.
The I register is the interrupt register and is used when executing interrupt handling.
The R register is the refresh register and is used to refresh the RWM53.
The PC register is the program counter, a register that holds the address of the currently executing program in memory.

The IFF register is an interrupt enable register. The IFF register consists of the IFF1 register, which determines whether to enable or disable a maskable interrupt (INT), and the IFF2 register, which restores IFF1 after processing a non-maskable interrupt (NMI). In addition to restoring from non-maskable interrupt processing, the IFF2 register is also used for restoring via the RETEX instruction (described later) after executing the CALLEX instruction (described later).
Furthermore, when a non-markable interrupt is received or when the CALLEX instruction is executed, the IFF1 register is cleared (set to a value that disables interrupt processing ("0")), maskable interrupts are disabled, and the IFF2 register holds its state at this time (whether the interrupt was disabled or enabled when the non-markable interrupt was received or when the CALLEX instruction was executed). Additionally, when the RET instruction or RETEX instruction is executed, the value of the IFF2 register is moved to the IFF1 register, and the maskable interrupt reception state is restored to its previous state.

The SP register in register bank 0 is initially stored with the value "F200h" by the instruction "LD SP, F200h", which is one of the instructions in the first program area after power-up (step S901 in Figure 178, which will be described later).
Next, if some program is executed and data is loaded into "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" in the first stack area, the SP register value in register bank 0 will be updated to "F1FEh".
Next, when retrieving data stored in "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" in the first stack area, some program (such as a return instruction) is executed. Then, the data stored in "F1FEh" and "F1FFh" is retrieved by that instruction. For example, a CALL instruction stored in the first program area stores the return address in "F1FEh" and "F1FFh", and the instruction called by the CALL instruction (the program in the first program area) is executed. After that, the RET instruction returns to the instruction after the CALL (returning to the program in the program counter stored in the first stack area (the program at the return address)), and the SP register value in register bank 0 is updated from "F1FEh" to "F200h". Alternatively, for example, a CALLEX instruction stored in the first program area stores the return address in "F1FEh" and "F1FFh", and the instruction called by the CALLEX instruction (the program in the second program area) is executed. Subsequently, the RETEX instruction switches the register bank to register bank 0, and then the CALLEX instruction returns to the instruction after it (returning to the program in the program counter stored in the first stack area (the program at the return address)). At the same time, the SP register value in register bank 0 is updated from "F1FEh" to "F200h".

The same applies to the second stack area.
The SP register in register bank 1 is initially stored with the value "F400h" by the instruction "LD SP, F400h", which is one of the program instructions in the second program area after power-up (step S903 in Figure 179, which will be described later).
Next, if any program is executed and data is loaded into "F3FFh" and "F3FEh" in the second stack area, the SP register value in register bank 1 will be updated to "F3FEh".
Furthermore, when retrieving data stored in "F3FFh" and "F3FEh" in the second stack area, some program is executed. The data stored in "F3FFh" and "F3FEh" is then retrieved by the instruction. For example, a CALL instruction stored in the second program area stores the return address in "F3FFh" and "F3FEh," and the instruction called by the CALL instruction (the program in the second program area) is executed. After that, the RET instruction returns to the instruction after the CALL instruction (returning to the program in the program counter stored in the second stack area (the program at the return address)), and the SP register value in register bank 1 is updated from "F3FEh" to "F400h."

The CALLEX instruction mentioned above is an instruction present in the first program (when register bank 0) but not in the second program (when register bank 1).
Furthermore, the RETEX instruction is not present in the first program (when register bank 0) but is present in the second program (when register bank 1).
The CALLEX instruction is one of the call instructions.
First, when the command "CALLEX mn" is executed,
(1) Save the return address stored in the program counter to the first stack area, update the stack pointer in register bank 0,
(2) Regardless of whether the interrupt is enabled or disabled at that time, non-maskable interrupts (NMI) and maskable interrupts (INT) are disabled.
(3) Switch the register bank to "1",
(4) Make a call to the address specified by "mn" (store "mn" in the program counter)
To carry out the task.
In the eleventh embodiment, the second program is made executable by executing the CALLEX instruction when executing the second program from the first program.

Furthermore, the RETEX instruction is an instruction that corresponds to the conventional return instruction.
The RETEX instruction is,
(1) Set the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) and the maskable interrupt (INT) to the state before the CALLEX instruction.
(2) Switch the register bank to "0",
(3) The return address stored in the first stack area indicated by the stack pointer of register bank 0 is returned to the program counter, and the stack pointer of register bank 0 is updated.
In other words, it returns to the state before CALLEX (or, to put it another way, to the next instruction after CALLEX (the program at the return address)).
To carry out the task.
This makes the first program executable.
Furthermore, if the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is interrupt-enabled, the RETEX instruction will enable the interrupt. On the other hand, if the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is interrupt-disabled, the RETEX instruction will disable the interrupt.

In conventional call/return instructions, a call instruction invokes a program, the program is executed, and then a return instruction returns to the point after the call instruction.
In contrast, in the 11th embodiment, a program is called using the CALLEX instruction, the program is executed, and then the system returns to the point after the CALLEX instruction using the RETEX instruction.
By using the CALLEX and RETEX instructions as described above, separate interrupt disable instructions (DI instructions) and interrupt enable instructions (EI instructions) are not required when executing a program in the second program area or when executing a program in the first program area from a program in the second program area.
Furthermore, by providing register banks 0 and 1, and switching between register banks using CALLEX and RETEX instructions, independent register save and register restore instructions become unnecessary when executing programs from the first program area to the second program area, or vice versa, as is done conventionally with a single register bank. Therefore, the pressure on ROM capacity and the complexity of instructions stored in the ROM area can be reduced.

Figure 171 is a block diagram showing the arithmetic unit (APU) 57 in Figure 170.
The arithmetic circuit 57 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit capable of performing arithmetic operations, and a multiplicand setting register, a multiplier setting register, a dividend setting register, and a divisor setting register for storing data used in the calculations.
It also includes a multiplication result register, a division result register, and a remainder result register for storing the results of calculations.
In the following explanation, these multiplicand setting register, multiplier setting register, multiplication result register, dividend setting register, divisor setting register, division result register, and remainder result register will be collectively referred to as "multiplication and division registers." As shown in Figure 170, the multiplication and division registers are provided as part of the function control register 56b.
When a value (data) is stored (input) into the multiplicand setting register, multiplier setting register, dividend setting register, or divisor setting register via the internal bus, the calculation result is stored (output) in the multiplication result register, division result register, and remainder result register via the multiplication and division circuits. The main CPU 55 can retrieve the values (data) stored in the multiplication result register, division result register, and remainder result register via the internal bus.

For example, the multiplication circuit may be configured to perform an operation (multiplication) when values are stored in both the multiplicand setting register and the multiplier setting register. However, in the 11th embodiment, when a value is input to either register, the multiplication circuit performs multiplication using the values of the multiplicand setting register and the multiplier setting register at that time, and the result of the multiplication is stored in the multiplication result register.
For example, when performing a "2 x 3" multiplication, if "2" is stored in the multiplicand setting register and "3" is stored in the multiplier setting register, the values "2" and "3" are input to the multiplication circuit, and "6" is output to the multiplication result register.
Similarly, when performing a division of "7/3", if "7" is stored in the divideee setting register and "3" is stored in the divisor setting register, the values "7" and "3" are input to the division circuit, "2" (quotient) is output to the division result register, and "1" (remainder) is output to the remainder result register.

Furthermore, the division circuit of the 11th embodiment is configured such that when "0" is stored in the divisor setting register, "FFFFFFFFh" is stored in the division result register (4 bytes). In computer programs, division by zero is known to result in an error, or to result in a division by zero value of positive infinity if the dividend is positive, and negative infinity if the dividend is negative. However, in the 11th embodiment, it is processed as described above.
In particular, in the 11th embodiment, when calculating the ratio, if the ratio is normal, the division result register is configured to store a value from "0" to "100 (D)". Here, "100 (D)" is "64h". Therefore, when the value of the least significant byte is "FFh", it can be determined that the calculated ratio is an abnormal value.

In the 11th embodiment, only the quotient of the division result is used, and the remainder is not used. Therefore, in such cases, a remainder result register is not necessarily required. However, a remainder result register is provided in advance to prepare for the possibility of future specification changes that require the use of the remainder of the division result (for example, when the remainder is rounded to the nearest whole number and used as the quotient). Therefore, at least in the 11th embodiment, even if a value is output to the remainder result register, the value of the remainder result register is not read (the remainder result register value is not used), and only the value of the division result register (i.e., the "quotient") is used.

Figure 172 shows the structure of a multiplication/division register.
First, the multiplicand setting register and the multiplier setting register each consist of two bytes (16 bits). For example, the addresses of the multiplicand setting register are "FF0Bh" and "FF0Ch," with the lower bits (0-7) stored in one byte of "FF0Bh" and the upper bits (8-15) stored in one byte of "FF0Ch." The multiplier setting register also consists of two bytes in a similar manner.
Furthermore, the addresses of the multiplication result registers are "FF0Fh" to "FF12h," with the least significant bits (0-7) stored in the byte "FF0Fh," and bits 8-15 stored in the byte "FF10h." Similarly, bits 23-16 are stored in the byte "FF11h," and bits 24-31 (most significant) are stored in the byte "FF12h."
Therefore, "2 bytes (multiplicand) × 2 bytes (multiplier) = 4 bytes (multiplication result)".
The dividend setting register, divisor setting register, division result register, and remainder result register all have a 4-byte memory area, similar to the multiplication result register described above, and the values of the lower bits are stored starting from the smallest address value.
Therefore, the equation is "4 bytes (dividend) / 4 bytes (divisor) = 4 bytes (quotient of the division result) + 4 bytes (remainder of the division result)".

Furthermore, each multiplication and division register stores an initial value when the power is turned on. As shown in Figure 172, the division result register stores the initial value "FFh". That is, "FFh" is stored in addresses "FF1Bh" to "FF1Eh" respectively.
Additionally, the multiplication and division registers other than the division result register are initialized to "00h". Therefore, "00h" is stored at each of these addresses.

Figure 173 is a diagram showing the process from when the power is turned on until the system transitions to user mode in the 11th embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 87 in the third embodiment.
As described above, after power-on, the internal registers in the main CPU 55 are initialized, and after going through security mode, if the security check is successful, the system switches to user mode, and in this user mode, the program start process (Figure 178) described later is executed.
In this case, in the 11th embodiment, after a security check is performed in security mode, but before transitioning to user mode, the multiplication and division registers are initialized.
However, the initialization of the multiplication and division registers only needs to be done before transitioning to user mode, and can even be done before security mode is executed, for example.
The user-mode address "0000h" stores the first instruction (program) after the power is turned on. The first instruction after power is turned on is an instruction from the first program area.

Next, the ratios displayed on the ratio monitor 74 in the 11th embodiment will be described. Although some of the description will overlap with that of the second embodiment described above, it will be explained again. In addition, in the 11th embodiment, points that are not specifically described are the same as in the second embodiment.
Figure 174 shows the display specifications of the role ratio monitor 74. The role ratio monitor 74 displays six ratios in a cyclical manner according to the display order. In the 11th embodiment, the ratio of the indicated role is displayed, and the ratio of the advantageous section is not displayed.
In the diagram, "abbreviation" corresponds to the symbols displayed in the identification segments (digits 6 and 7).
Furthermore, if the total number of games played is less than the standard number of games played, the identification segment display will blink; if the total number of games played is equal to or greater than the standard number of games played, the identification segment display will be lit.
Furthermore, if the ratio is above the threshold, the ratio segments (digits 8 and 9) will blink, and if the ratio is below the threshold, the ratio segments will be lit.
Furthermore, of the six ratios, the ratio for the status of special features, etc., is updated with each game played. As mentioned above, the advantageous section ratio is not calculated in this embodiment, but if the advantageous section ratio were to be calculated and displayed, it would be updated with each game played.
On the other hand, ratios other than the ratio of special features and other conditions will be updated every 400 games.
Thus, the ratio of special features and the ratio of advantageous periods are updated by one each time a game is played, as this updates the total number of games played, which is the denominator of the ratio. In other words, since the ratio of special features and the ratio of advantageous periods change with each game played, they are updated after every game.
On the other hand, the ratio of bonus items with instructions, the ratio of consecutive bonus items (6000 times), the bonus item ratio (6000 times), the cumulative ratio of consecutive bonus items, and the cumulative bonus item ratio may not be updated by playing the game once. In other words, there may be cases where the game ends when a combination of symbols for which no game tokens are awarded stops. For this reason, these ratios are not updated with every game, but are updated at predetermined intervals of a set number of games. This is done to avoid unnecessary processing.

Figure 175 shows two data tables provided in the second area of ROM 54. The data tables in the second area are data tables that store data for displaying the ratio monitor 74, and include an identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) and a ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA). However, it is not limited to these two data tables.
In the 11th embodiment, although not shown in the figures, various data tables are provided in the first area of the ROM 54. When the first program is being executed, the data tables in the first area are used to display symbols and numbers on the credit count display LED 76 and the winnings display LED 78. Examples include symbols and numbers for displaying the type of error when an error occurs, numbers for displaying the number of credits, bets, or payouts, and symbols and numbers for displaying the button press order when the instruction function is activated.
On the other hand, when using the second program to display ratios etc. on the role ratio monitor 74, the data table stored in the second area of the ROM 54 is used.

In Figure 175, the starting address of the identification segment offset table is "2520h", and the starting address of the ratio display segment data table is "2530h". In the figure, "DEFB" refers to storing 1 byte (8 bits) of data in assembly language.
In the identification segment offset table, the display offset data for "7P," which indicates the identification segment of the indicated feature ratio, is "7Ah" as shown in Figure 175. Here, "7" indicates the offset value of the upper digit (digit 6), and "A" indicates the offset value of the lower digit (digit 7). Furthermore, the offset value here refers to the offset value from the starting address (2530h) of the ratio display segment data table.
Therefore, the offset value "7" specifies the segment data stored at address "2537h", i.e., the data displayed as "7". Similarly, the offset value "A" specifies the segment data stored at address "253Ah", i.e., the data displayed as "P.".
Here, in the ratio display segment data table, for example, the data for displaying "H." is "11110110B". That is, in Figure 58, segments B, C, E, F, G, and P become "1 (on; lit)" and segments A and D become "0 (off, unlit)" to display "H.".

Figures 176 and 177 show the area outside the usage region (second region) of the RWM 53 in the 11th embodiment.
In the eleventh embodiment, the storage areas shown in Figures 54 and 55 (second embodiment) are applied as they are.
On the other hand, in the 11th embodiment, the storage area shown in Figure 56 is replaced with the storage areas shown in Figures 176 and 177 (including some identical storage areas).
First, in the second embodiment shown in Figure 56, a 1-byte storage area is provided at address "F291h" as a blinking request flag.
In contrast, in the 11th embodiment, as shown in Figure 177, the blinking request flag is divided into an identification segment blinking request flag ("F298h") and a ratio segment blinking request flag ("F299h"), and a 1-byte storage area is provided for each.
The reasons are as follows:
The ratio segment displays six different ratios, as shown in Figure 174. Each ratio flashes when it exceeds a certain threshold. Therefore, six bits are required as flags to determine whether or not to flash each ratio.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, if the total number of games played is less than "6000", the bonus payout ratio (6000 times) and the consecutive bonus payout ratio (6000 times) are displayed with flashing lights, and the other four ratios are displayed with flashing lights if the total number of games played is less than "175000". For this reason, two bits are required as flags to determine whether the total number of games played is less than "6000" and whether it is less than "175000".
Therefore, 6 bits are required as a flag to determine whether or not to blink the ratio display, and 2 bits are required as a flag to determine whether or not to blink the identification segment display, resulting in a total of 8 bits, which fit into 1 byte of data.
In contrast, in the 11th embodiment, if the total number of games played is less than "17,500", the cumulative bonus payout ratio and the cumulative consecutive bonus payout ratio are displayed by flashing. Therefore, 3 bits are required to determine whether the total number of games played is less than "6,000", less than "17,500", and less than "175,000". Consequently, 6 bits are required as a flag to determine whether or not to flash the ratio, resulting in a total of 9 bits, which cannot fit into 1 byte of data. Therefore, the flashing request flag is stored separately as an identification segment flashing request flag ("F298h") and a ratio segment flashing request flag ("F299h").

The ratio display number at address "F292h" is a memory area that stores the number corresponding to the ratio to be displayed on the ratio monitor 74.
In Figure 56 of the second embodiment, when the ratio displayed in the interrupt processing is the ratio of the special feature with instructions, "1" is stored in the ratio display number; when it is the ratio of the continuous special feature (6000 times), "2" is stored in the ratio display number; ..., when it is the ratio of the special feature status, "6" is stored in the ratio display number.
In contrast, in the 11th embodiment, the initial value of the ratio display number when the power is turned on is set to "00h", and "00h" corresponds to the ratio of the special feature with instructions. Therefore, "05h" corresponds to the ratio of the special feature status.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment shown in Figure 56, a 2-byte storage area is provided to count the number of interrupts "2144" during the display switching time for addresses "F294h" and "F295h".
In contrast, in the 11th embodiment, the display switching counter at address "F294h" is a ring counter that cycles from "0" to "15 (D)" and is a 1-byte memory area.
The display switching counter is updated by "1" when the blinking switching time at address "F296h" counts to "134" interrupts. Therefore, the display switching counter completes one cycle, which corresponds to "134 x 16 = 2144" interrupts.
With this configuration, the display switching counter (corresponding to the display switching time in the second embodiment) can be configured from 1 byte, thus saving 1 byte of memory space. This 1 byte can then be used for other memory areas.

The test display flag at address "F29Ah" is initially set to "FFh" when the power is turned on. When the value of the test display flag is "FFh", a test pattern is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74. When the value of the test display flag is "00h", role ratio information is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74.
Here, the values "FFh" and "00h" mentioned above are just examples, and the initial value may be a value other than "FFh". Similarly, the value used to display the ratio information on the role ratio monitor 74 may be a value other than "00h". In other words, it is sufficient that it is possible to determine whether to display the test pattern or the ratio information depending on the value of the test display flag.
As will be explained in more detail later, the test pattern is one in which all segments A-G and P of all digits 6-9 of the role ratio monitor 74 flash (when lit, "8.8.8.8." is displayed).
Therefore, in the second embodiment, in Figures 58, 60, and 61(B), segments P (segment 2P) of digits 6, 8, and 9 are displayed as "-", and although they do not light up while the ratio is being displayed, they blink while the test pattern is being displayed. As mentioned above, when displaying a pattern on the ratio monitor 74 that indicates that a setting change or setting confirmation is in progress, at least one segment P of digits 6 to 9 may be lit up or blink.

Figure 178 is a flowchart showing the program start process (M_PRG_START) in the 11th embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 62 of the second embodiment. In Figure 178, the same steps as in Figure 62 are given the same step numbers. The following will mainly describe the differences from Figure 62 of the second embodiment.
When the program starts, first, in step S901, an initial value is set in the SP register of register bank 0. When the power is turned on, the value of the SP register of register bank 0 is "0". Here, the instruction "LD SP, F200h" stores "F200h" in the SP register of register bank 0.

The value stored here, "F200h", is the value obtained by adding "1" to the last address of the first stack area, as shown in Figure 170. When the SP register value of register bank 0 is "F200h", it indicates that data will be stored (pushed) into "F1FFh".
Furthermore, in step S901, secondly, "CALLEX 2100h" is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the starting address for setting the test pattern display in the next step S902 is "2100h". Then proceed to step S902.
Here, the test pattern display setting and RWM checksum calculation in step S902 are performed by the second program. When the second program is executed, it is called by the CALLEX instruction as described above, and the first program is returned by the RETEX instruction. When the second program is executed, the register bank is switched. For this reason, in the 11th embodiment, the AF register save processing in step S2702 and the AF register restore processing in step S2704 in Figure 62 are unnecessary.

In step S902, the test pattern display setting is performed first. This process is shown in Figure 179, which will be described later, and is a process that initializes predetermined parameters related to the display of the test pattern. Here, the test pattern display setting can be initialized to either "0" or to a predetermined value other than "0" (FFh in the 11th embodiment). For this reason, the calculation range in the RWM checksum calculation in the subsequent process excludes the initial value setting range in the test pattern display setting.
In the test pattern display settings, the test display flag is set to "FFh" as described later, so the test pattern is set to be displayed immediately after power-on.
Furthermore, in the initialization range setting at the start of setting changes in steps S2711 and S2713, the initial value setting range in the test pattern display setting process is excluded.
Once the test pattern display settings are complete, the JP instruction is executed, which jumps to address "2000h". In this example, the starting address of the RWM checksum calculation instruction is assumed to be "2000h". Then, the RWM checksum calculation is performed.
Furthermore, once the RWM checksum calculation is complete, RETEX is executed, and the program returns to the state after the CALLEX instruction (step S2705).

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721, as shown in Figure 63, an interrupt process (Figure 184, described later) is started at a timing after step S2724. When the interrupt process starts, in step S960 in Figure 184, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed, and during this process, the lighting process of the ratio monitor 74 (the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in Figure 188, described later) is executed.
As described above, in step S902 of the program startup process, the test pattern display setting is set to display the test pattern, so immediately after power-on, the ratio monitor 74 displays the test pattern. As will be explained in more detail later, the test pattern is displayed for about 5 seconds. In the interrupt processing, it is determined whether about 5 seconds have passed since the test pattern was displayed, and if it is determined that about 5 seconds have passed, the display of the test pattern is terminated and the display of the ratio is switched to display.

Figure 179 is a flowchart showing the test pattern display settings (S_TEST_SET) in step S902 of Figure 178.
First, in step S903, since the second program will be started first after power-up, an initial value is set in the SP register of register bank 1. When power-up is performed, the value of the SP register in register bank 1 is "0". Here, the instruction "LD SP, F400h" stores "F400h" in the SP register of register bank 1.
The value stored here, "F400h," is the last address of the second stack area, "F3FFh," plus "1," as shown in Figure 170. When the SP register value of register bank 1 is "F400h," it indicates that data will be stored (pushed) at "F3FFh."

In the next step S904, the RWM for displaying the test pattern is initialized. In the 11th embodiment, the data (parameters) to be initialized are, as shown in Figure 179, the ratio display number, display switching counter, blinking switching time, LED display counter 2, and test display flag. The test display flag is set to "FFh" as its initial value. The initial value of the other four data is "00h". After setting these initial values, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
The ratio display number is set to the initial value "00h". As a result, after power-on, the ratio display will start from the cumulative ratio of the indicated feature, as shown in Figure 176.
Additionally, the display switching counter is set to its initial value of "00h". This ensures that the same display continues for approximately 5 seconds.
Furthermore, the blinking switching time is set to the initial value "00h".

Furthermore, the LED display counter 2 is set to its initial value "00h". As will be explained in more detail later, when the LED display counter 2 is "00h", the initialization process for the LED display counter 2 is executed, and it becomes "00001000B". As a result, digit 6 is designated as the target digit for dynamic lighting (see address "F297h" in Figure 177).
Furthermore, the test display flag is set to its initial value "FFh". Here, the test display flag can be either "FFh" or "00h". When the test display flag is "FFh", it means that the test pattern will be displayed on the role ratio monitor 74, and when the test display flag is "00h", it means that the role ratio monitor 74 will be displayed.
As described above, after power-on, when the program start process is executed, the predetermined data for the RWM used for displaying the test pattern is initialized.

Figure 180 is a flowchart showing the main process (M_MAIN) in the 11th embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 67 of the second embodiment. Processes similar to those in Figure 67 are given the same step numbers.
In the 11th embodiment, the stack pointer is set during the program startup process, so the process in step S271 in Figure 67 is unnecessary.
Furthermore, as mentioned above, when executing the second program, the system switches to register bank 1, so the saving of the AF register in step S297, which precedes the ratio setting process in step S298 in Figure 67 (corresponding to step S910 in Figure 180), and the restoration of the AF register in step S299, which follows the ratio setting process, are unnecessary.
Furthermore, in the 11th embodiment, interrupts are prohibited by the CALLEX instruction when executing the ratio setting process in step S910, so a unique interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction) like that in step S296 of Figure 67 is unnecessary. Similarly, after the ratio setting process, interrupts that were prohibited are enabled by the RETEX instruction to return to the first program, so a unique interrupt enable instruction (EI instruction) like that in step S300 of Figure 67 is unnecessary.

Furthermore, the reason for waiting for an interrupt in step S295 before executing the ratio setting process in step S910 is as follows:
In step S295, the system waits for an interrupt, and immediately after the interrupt processing begins, the CALLEX instruction is executed to perform the ratio set processing. Executing the CALLEX instruction disables interrupt processing, as described above. Then, after the ratio set processing is complete, the RETEX instruction is executed to enable interrupt processing.
In the 11th embodiment, the ratio setting process (calculation of six ratio items) is configured to be completed in a time shorter than the interrupt period of "2.235 ms", specifically in a time of about "0.5" ms.

If, for example, the ratio setting process is executed at an interrupt timing 2 ms after the interrupt processing has started, the next interrupt timing will arrive while the ratio setting process is in progress. However, since interrupt processing is prohibited during the ratio setting process, the interrupt processing cannot be executed at that next interrupt timing. Instead, the interrupt processing for the interrupt timing that arrived while interrupt processing was prohibited will be executed only after the RETEX instruction is issued (after interrupt processing is permitted).
Thus, if the interrupt processing cannot be executed when the interrupt cycle arrives, for example, the LED display control in step S2821 in Figure 184 cannot be executed, and the dynamic lighting of each digit will not be executed at a constant interval (every 2.235 ms). As a result, for example, if the next interrupt processing is executed after a certain interval (2.235 ms) has passed since the previous interrupt processing was executed, the player may be given the impression that digits 1 to 4 briefly dim.
Furthermore, while interrupts are disabled, the power-off process in step S2771 in Figure 184 cannot be executed; therefore, even if a power-off occurs, the power-off process cannot be executed.
In contrast, if the system waits for an interrupt before proceeding to the ratio setting process, the next interrupt cycle will arrive approximately 2.235 ms after the start of the ratio setting process. Since the ratio setting process will have finished by the time the next interrupt cycle arrives, the interrupt will be permitted, and the interrupt processing can be executed.

In Figure 180, within the area enclosed by the dashed line, errors are detected, but no error notification or gameplay stoppage is performed.
Even during the period from the start switch acceptance process in step S279 until all reels 31 stop (step S289), the interrupt process is executed. During this time, the error check in the interrupt process (step S463 in Figure 184, described later) is performed, and if an error occurs, the error is detected, and the type of detected error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. This configuration allows for smooth gameplay while preventing cheating by intentionally causing errors to illegally obtain game media.
However, from the start switch acceptance process until all reels 31 stop, the game will not stop even if an error occurs, and the game will stop only after all reels 31 have stopped. Alternatively, instead of this configuration, if an error occurs between the start switch acceptance process and all reels 31 stop, the system may be configured to notify the error and stop the game even during that period.

Figure 181 is a flowchart showing the ratio set process (S_RATE_SET) in step S910 of Figure 180.
First, in step S911, the upper address of the RWM53 is set in the Q register of register bank 1. This process stores "F2h" in the Q register. This process is performed because all the RWM53 addresses used in the ratio setting process start with "F2h" (see Figures 55 and 176), which simplifies the instructions for updating and reading the RWM53 addresses.

In the next step, S912, a counter upper limit check is performed. This process stores "F28Fh," the address of the RWM53 that stores the count upper limit flag, in a designated register (for example, the HL register).
Next, the process proceeds to step S913 to determine whether the game count limit flag is on or off. This determination is made by checking whether the D0 bit of the data (count limit flag) stored at the address (F28Fh) indicated by the HL register value is "1". If it is "1", the game count limit flag is determined to be on. If the game count limit flag is determined to be on, the process proceeds to step S916. If the game count limit flag is determined to be off, the process proceeds to step S914. In other words, if the game count limit flag is determined to be on, the total game count in step S914 and the count of special feature gameplay in step S915 are not performed.
In step S914, the total number of games played is counted. This process adds "1" to the total number of games played counter at address "F26Dh".
In step S915, it is determined whether the current game is one in which a continuous bonus feature is activated or one in which a bonus feature is activated. If it is determined that the game is one in which a continuous bonus feature is activated or one in which a bonus feature is activated, "1" is added to the bonus feature status counter at address "F285h".

In the next step, S916, the total number of payouts is counted. This process adds the number of payouts to the total payout (6000 times) counter at address "F273h" and the total payout (cumulative) counter at address "F27Ch".
In the next step, S917, the payout count for the special feature is performed. This process adds the payout to the special feature payout (6000 times) counter at address "F279h" and the special feature payout (cumulative) counter at address "F282h" if the payout in the current game is a payout from a game where a special feature is activated.
In the next step, S918, the number of consecutive bonus payouts is counted. This process adds the number of payouts to the consecutive bonus payout (6000 times) counter at address "F276h" and the consecutive bonus payout (cumulative) counter at address "F27Fh" if the payout in the current game was from a game in which a consecutive bonus was activated.
In the next step, S919, the number of coins dispensed by the instructed bonus feature is counted. This process adds the number of coins dispensed to the instructed bonus feature counter at address "F270h" if the current payout is from a game where the instruction function was activated or a bonus feature was activated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S920, where the 400-game counter is updated. This process adds "1" to the 400-game counter at address "F210h" (Figure 55).
The 400-game counter cycles through "0" to "399 (D)". Therefore, when "399 (D)" is stored in the 400-game counter, adding "1" will make it "0". The 400-game counter can also be a subtractive counter.
Next, the process proceeds to step S921, where the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) (Figure 182) is executed. This process calculates the six ratios mentioned above and stores the calculation results in predetermined addresses of the RWM53 (specifically, addresses "F288h" to "F28Dh" in Figure 176).
Next, the process proceeds to step S922, where the ring buffer update is performed. This process determines whether 400 games have passed since the last update of the ring buffer number, and if it is determined that 400 games have passed, it updates the ring buffer number.
Then, the process described in this flowchart is terminated.

Figure 182 is a flowchart showing the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in step S921 of Figure 181.
First, in step S931, the ratio calculation table is set. While a detailed explanation of the ratio calculation table is omitted, it is a table used to identify the payout counter and game count counter (values that will be the dividend and divisor) used in the ratio calculation, as well as the RWM53 address of the ratio data that stores the calculation results. This step involves setting up this table. The next step, S932, is the process of moving to the starting address of the ratio calculation table to be used for the next ratio calculation. Each ratio calculation has a 6-byte RWM53 storage area, and this update process moves the address of the ratio calculation table by 6 bytes.
In the next step, S933, it is determined whether the calculation of the six ratios has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation of the ratios has been completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated; if it is determined that the calculation of the ratios has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S934.

In step S934, it is determined whether the ratio to be calculated is calculated for each game. As shown in Figure 174, in the 11th embodiment, the ratio of the status of the special features is calculated for each game, while the calculations for the other five items are calculated every 400 games. Therefore, if the ratio to be calculated next is the ratio of the status of the special features, it is determined to be "Yes," and if it is any other ratio, it is determined to be "No." If it is a ratio that is calculated for each game (the ratio of the status of the special features), the process proceeds to step S936; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S935.
In step S935, it is determined whether or not 400 games have elapsed. Here, if the 400-game counter value stored at address "F210h" in Figure 55 is the value indicating that 400 games have elapsed, it is determined to be "Yes". If it is determined in step S935 that 400 games have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S936; if it is determined that 400 games have not elapsed, the process returns to step S932.
Note that the 400-game counter is not reset when the power is turned on/off under normal circumstances, or when the system switches to settings change mode under normal circumstances. However, if an unrecoverable error occurs, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on again, and the system switches to settings change mode and the RWM initialization process is executed, the 400-game counter will be cleared.
The above also applies to counters and flags on the role ratio monitor, such as the count limit flag.

In step S936, it is determined whether the total number of games played or the total number of payouts exceeds the upper limit. If it exceeds the upper limit, the ratio calculation is not performed, and it is determined that it is not time to perform the calculation. Specifically, in Figure 176, if the D0 or D1 bit of the count upper limit flag at address "F28Fh" is "1", it is determined that the upper limit has been exceeded. If the upper limit has been exceeded, it is determined that it is not time to perform the calculation, and the process returns to step S932. On the other hand, if the upper limit has not been exceeded, it is determined that it is time to perform the calculation, and the process proceeds to step S937.

Step S937 involves setting the address of the RWM53, which will be the dividend, into a register. In the next step, S938, the value 100 times the dividend is set. This process sets "100(D)(64h)" into a designated register.
In the next step, S939, the process of writing "100(D)", which was set in step S937, to the multiplicand setting register is executed. In other words, by storing "100(D)" in the multiplicand setting register and setting the dividend in the multiplier setting register, the process of multiplying the dividend by 100 is executed. This is because when the dividend multiplied by 100 is divided by the divisor, the ratio is calculated as a percentage.
Furthermore, the process of multiplying the dividend by 100 is divided into two steps: multiplying the lower two bytes of the dividend by 100, and multiplying the upper one byte of the dividend by 100.
Therefore, in the next step S940, the lower two bytes of the dividend are obtained. This process sets the value of the lower two bytes of the dividend RWM address obtained in step S937 into a register. Then, in the next step S941, the value obtained in step S940 (the value of the lower two bytes of the dividend) is written to the multiplier setting register. As a result, the value of the lower two bytes of the dividend is written to the multiplier setting register, and "100 (D)" is written to the multiplicand setting register, so at this point, the value obtained by multiplying the value of the lower two bytes of the dividend by 100 is written to the multiplication result register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S942, where the value of the upper byte of the dividend is obtained. This process sets the value of the upper byte of the dividend RWM address obtained in step S937 into a register.
In the next step, S943, the value of the upper byte of the dividend is multiplied by 100. In other words, the process of multiplying the upper byte of the dividend by 100 is calculated in the program without putting values into the multiplier setting register, the multiplicand setting register, or the multiplication result register (without using a multiplication circuit). Alternatively, the value can be calculated using a multiplication circuit.
Then, the process proceeds to step S944, where the value to be the dividend is written to the dividend setting register. The following processes are performed here.
1) As mentioned above, the multiplication result register (4 bytes) stores the value obtained by multiplying the lower two bytes of the dividend by 100. Therefore, retrieve the value of the lower two bytes of the multiplication result register and write it to the lower two bytes of the dividend setting register.
2) Obtain the value of the upper two bytes of the multiplication result register. This value corresponds to the carry-over portion of the value obtained by multiplying the lower two bytes of the dividend by 100. Therefore, this carry-over portion is added to the "value obtained by multiplying the upper one byte of the dividend by 100" calculated in step S943.
3) The value calculated in step 2) above, which is "the value obtained by multiplying the upper byte of the dividend by 100 (after carry addition)", is written to the dividend setting register.
As a result, the dividend setting register will be written with a value that is 100 times the dividend.
Next, the process proceeds to step S945, where the address of the RWM53, which will be the divisor, is set in the register. Then, in the next step S946, the data (divisor) stored at the address set in step S945 is written to the divisor setting register. As a result, the dividend is written to the dividend setting register, the divisor is written to the divisor setting register, and the division result is written to the division result register.

Here, the processes in steps S938 to S946 will be explained using specific numerical values. In the following examples, decimal numbers will be shown in parentheses.
In this example,
Dividend: 249F0h (150000)
Divisor: 493E0h (300000)
Let it be so.
In step S939, "64h (100)" is written to the multiplicand setting register.
Next, in step S941, the lower two-byte value of the dividend, "49F0h (18928)", is written to the multiplier setting register.
Therefore,
Multiplicand setting register value: 64h (100)
Multiplier setting register value: 49F0h (18928)
Multiplication result register value: 001CE1C0h (1892800)
This is the result.
In the next step, S942, the upper byte of the dividend, "2h", is set in the register.
Next, in step S943, the upper byte of the dividend, "2h", is multiplied by "64h (100)". The result of the multiplication is "C8h (200)".

In Step S944, the following process is executed.
1) Write the lower two bytes of the multiplication result register, "E1C0h (57792)", to the lower two bytes of the dividend setting register.
2) The multiplication result "C8h (200)" obtained in step S943 is added to the upper two byte value "001Ch (28)" of the multiplication result register.
001Ch (28) + C8h (200) = 00E4h (228)
3) Write "00E4h (228)" to the upper two bytes of the dividend setting register.
As a result,
Dividend setting register value: 00E4E1C0h (15000000)
Therefore, the dividend setting register value becomes the dividend (150000) multiplied by 100.

In step S946, a 3-byte value (0493E0h (300000)) is written to the divisor setting register.
Divisor setting register byte 1: E0h
Divisor setting register byte 2: 93h
Third byte of the divisor setting register: 04h
As a result,
Dividend setting register value: 00E4E1C0h (15000000)
Divisor setting register value: 0493E0h (300000)
Division result register value: 32h (50)
Remainder result register value: 00h
This is the result.

Returning to the explanation of Figure 182.
In step S947, the address of the RWM53 containing the ratio data is obtained. This process obtains the address of the RWM53 that stores the ratio (division result) calculated this time. Next, the process proceeds to step S948, where the value stored in the division result register is read. Here, although the division result register consists of 4 bytes, only the least significant byte is actually read. This is because, if the ratio, which is the result of the division, is a normal value, it is in the range of "0" to "64h (100 (D))", so it is sufficient to read only the least significant byte.
In the next step, S949, the least significant byte of the value (4-byte value) stored in the division result register (the value of "FF1Bh" in Figure 172) is obtained, and it is determined whether or not that value is "FFh".
As mentioned above, the division circuit is configured such that when the value stored in the divisor setting register is "0", the value of the division result register becomes "FFFFFFFFh", regardless of the value stored in the dividend setting register (even if the value of the dividend setting register is "0"). Therefore, when the least significant byte of the division result register value is "FFh", it can be inferred that the value stored in the divisor register is "0".
Another example of a division result register value being "FFFFFFFFh" is:
(1) After power-on, even though instructions to set values in the dividend setting register and divisor setting register have been executed, the correct calculation is not performed and the division result register remains at its initial value,
(2) If, due to noise or the like, "FFFFFFFFh" is stored in the dividend setting register and "1h" is stored in the value of the divisor setting register,
These are some examples.

In step S949, if it is determined that the least significant byte in the division result register is "FFh", the process returns to step S932 and proceeds to the next ratio calculation. In other words, if the least significant byte in the division result register is "FFh" (i.e., the divisor is "0"), the ratio is not updated (step S953 is not executed). On the other hand, if it is determined that the least significant byte in the division result register is not "FFh", the process proceeds to step S950. In step S950, "99(D)(63h)" is set as the division result. In the next step, S951, it is determined whether the division result register value is "100(D)(64h)". Here again, the determination is made based only on the least significant byte in the division result register. If it is determined to be "100(D)", the process proceeds to step S953, where "99(D)" set in step S950 is saved as ratio data in RWM53. Then the process returns to step S933. In other words, when the division result is "100 (D)", "99 (D) (63h)" is stored as ratio data in RWM53.
In contrast, if step S951 determines that the division result is not "100 (D)", the process proceeds to step S952, where the value stored in the division result register (the lowest byte value in the division result register) is set. Then, in the next step S953, that value is saved (stored) in the RWM53 as ratio data. Specifically, if the ratio data is instruction-included bonus ratio data, it is stored at address "F288h", if the ratio data is continuous bonus ratio (6000 times) data, it is stored at address "F289h", if the ratio data is bonus ratio (6000 times) data, it is stored at address "F28Ah", if the ratio data is continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) data, it is stored at address "F28Bh", if the ratio data is bonus ratio (cumulative) data, it is stored at address "F28Ch", and if the ratio data is bonus status ratio data, it is stored at address "F28Dh".
Then, the process returns to step S933. Therefore, if it is determined that the division result is not "100 (D)", the initially set value "99 (D)" is not used.

In the above method of saving ratio data, if the least significant byte of the division result register is not "FFh" and is not "100(D)(64h)", then the least significant byte of the division result register is saved as ratio data in RWM53.
Therefore, when the least significant byte of the division result register is between "101 (D) (65h)" and "254 (D) (FEh)", that value is stored in the RWM 53 as ratio data. Even if a value exceeding "100 (D)" is stored in the RWM 53 as ratio data, the identification segment will display the ratio normally when displaying the ratio on the role ratio monitor 74 based on that ratio data.
For example, if the ratio data "101(D)(65h)" is stored in RWM53, dividing "101(D)(65h)" by "10(D)(Ah)" results in a quotient of "10(D)(Ah)" and a remainder of "1". The remainder of "1" is the offset value for the lower digit of the ratio. In the ratio display segment data table in Figure 175, when the offset value from the starting address "2530h" is "1", the data displaying "1" is selected.
Furthermore, for the quotient "10(D)(Ah)", the value obtained by logically ANDing the quotient "10(D)(Ah)" = "00001010(B)" and "00001111(B)" is "00001010B", which is "10", and this becomes the offset value for the higher digit. Therefore, in the ratio display segment data table in Figure 175, when the offset value is "10" from the starting address "2530h", the "P." display data is selected.
Therefore, when the ratio data "101 (D) (65h)" is stored in RWM53, the ratio will be displayed as "P.0".
As a result, if the ratio to be displayed is, for example, the ratio of the bonus item including the instruction, the bonus ratio monitor 74 will display "7 P.P. 0".
Similarly, the ratio of the advantageous period will be displayed as "7U.P.0", the ratio of consecutive bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "6y.P.0", the ratio of bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "7y.P.0", the ratio of bonus rounds (cumulative) will be displayed as "6A.P.0", the ratio of bonus rounds (cumulative) will be displayed as "7A.P.0", and the ratio of bonus round status will be displayed as "5H.P.0".

Similarly, when "110 (D)" is stored as ratio data in RWM53, the ratio will be displayed as "y.0".
As a result, if the ratio to be displayed is, for example, the ratio of the bonus item including the instruction, then "7P.y.0" will be displayed on the bonus ratio monitor 74.
Similarly, the ratio of the advantageous period will be displayed as "7U.y.0", the ratio of consecutive bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "6y.y.0", the ratio of bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "7y.y.0", the cumulative ratio of bonus rounds will be displayed as "6A.y.0", the cumulative ratio of bonus rounds will be displayed as "7A.y.0", and the ratio of bonus round status will be displayed as "5H.y.0".
Furthermore, when "120 (D)" is stored as ratio data in RWM53, the ratio will be displayed as "A.0".
As a result, if the ratio to be displayed is, for example, the ratio of the bonus item including the instruction, then "7 P.A. 0" will be displayed on the bonus ratio monitor 74.
Similarly, the ratio of the advantageous period will be displayed as "7U.A.0", the ratio of consecutive bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "6y.A.0", the ratio of bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "7y.A.0", the cumulative ratio of bonus rounds will be displayed as "6A.A.0", the cumulative ratio of bonus rounds will be displayed as "7A.A.0", and the ratio of bonus round status will be displayed as "5H.A.0".
Furthermore, when "130 (D)" is stored as ratio data in RWM53, the ratio will be displayed as "H.0".
As a result, if the ratio to be displayed is, for example, the ratio of the bonus item including the instruction, then "7 P.H. 0" will be displayed on the bonus ratio monitor 74.
Similarly, the ratio of the advantageous period will be displayed as "7U.H.0", the ratio of consecutive bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "6y.H.0", the ratio of bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "7y.H.0", the ratio of bonus rounds (cumulative) will be displayed as "6A.H.0", the ratio of bonus rounds (cumulative) will be displayed as "7A.H.0", and the ratio of bonus round status will be displayed as "5H.H.0".
Next, when "140 (D)" is stored as ratio data in RWM53, the offset value for the higher digit will be "14". However, in the ratio display segment data table in Figure 175, the address "253Eh", which corresponds to the offset value "14" from the starting address "2530h", does not exist in the ratio display segment data table. In this case, some other data stored at address "253Eh" will be displayed as the higher digit of the ratio.
For example, if the display of some data mentioned above is set to "??", then if it is the ratio of the bonus item including the instruction, the bonus item ratio monitor 74 will display "7P.??".
Similarly, the ratio of the advantageous period will be displayed as "7U.??", the ratio of consecutive bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "6y.??", the ratio of bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "7y.??", the cumulative ratio of bonus rounds will be displayed as "6A.??", the cumulative ratio of bonus rounds will be displayed as "7A.??", and the ratio of bonus round status will be displayed as "5H.??".
Similarly, when "150 (D)" is stored as ratio data in RWM53, the address "253Fh," which corresponds to an offset value of "15" from the starting address "2530h," does not exist in the ratio display segment data table. In this case, some other data stored at address "253Fh" is displayed as the higher digit of the ratio. In this case, the display method shown on the ratio monitor 74 is the same as described above.

Next, when "160(D)" is stored as ratio data in RWM53, dividing "160(D)" by "10" results in a quotient of "16" and a remainder of "0". Then, the logical AND of "00010000(B)", which has a quotient of "16(D)", and "00001111(B)" gives the value "00000000(B)", which becomes the offset value for the higher digits. Therefore, the display of the higher digits becomes "0", so when the ratio data is "160(D)", the ratio is displayed as "00".
As a result, if the ratio to be displayed is, for example, the ratio of the bonus item including the instruction, then "7P.00" will be displayed on the bonus item ratio monitor 74.
Similarly, the ratio of the advantageous period will be displayed as "7U.00", the ratio of consecutive bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "6y.00", the ratio of bonus rounds (6000 times) will be displayed as "7y.00", the cumulative ratio of bonus rounds will be displayed as "6A.00", the cumulative ratio of bonus rounds will be displayed as "7A.00", and the ratio of bonus round status will be displayed as "5H.00".
Similarly,
Ratio data "170 (D)": Ratio "10" is displayed Ratio data "180 (D)": Ratio "20" is displayed Ratio data "190 (D)": Ratio "30" Ratio data "200 (D)": Ratio "40" Ratio data "210 (D)": Ratio "50" Ratio data "220 (D)": Ratio "60" Ratio data "230 (D)": Ratio "70" Ratio data "240 (D)": Ratio "80" Ratio data "250 (D)": Ratio "90" Ratio data "254 (D)": Ratio "94" is displayed.
In this case, the display format shown on the role ratio monitor 74 is the same as described above.
If the ratio data exceeds "100 (D)", the ratio of special features including instructions, the ratio of advantageous periods, the ratio of consecutive special features (6000 times), the ratio of special features (6000 times), the cumulative ratio of special features, the cumulative ratio of special features, and the ratio of special features status will all exceed the threshold, and the ratio display will blink.
Therefore, for example, when the ratio data is "200 (D)", the ratio will be displayed as "40", but since "40" will blink, it can be determined that an abnormal value is being displayed.
As a result, if the ratio to be displayed is, for example, the ratio of the bonus item including the instruction, the bonus ratio monitor 74 will display "7P.40" and the "40" will flash.
Similarly, for the advantageous section ratio, it will display "7U.40" and the "40" will flash. Also, for the continuous bonus ratio (6000 times), it will display "6y.40" and the "40" will flash. Furthermore, for the bonus ratio (6000 times), it will display "7y.40" and the "40" will flash. Furthermore, for the bonus ratio (cumulative), it will display "6A.40" and the "40" will flash. Also, for the bonus ratio (cumulative), it will display "7A.40" and the "40" will flash. Furthermore, for the bonus status ratio, it will display "5H.40" and the "40" will flash.
In the above case, if the flashing conditions for the standard number of games are met for the identification segment, not only the ratio segment but also the identification segment will flash.

The result of a division operation is usually within the range of "0" to "100 (D)". Therefore, if the division result is normal, all three bytes of the division result register, excluding the least significant byte, should be "0". Consequently, reading only the least significant byte of the division result register should suffice.
However, even if the three bytes of the division result register, excluding the least significant byte, contain values other than "0", the ratio may still be displayed correctly. An example illustrates this.
(Example 1)
Assume the divisor is "1" and the dividend is "5592405 (D)".
In this case, the quotient (division result) is "5592405 (D)" = "555555h". Therefore, obtaining the least significant byte of the division result register gives "55h" = "85 (D)".
Therefore, the ratio in this case will be displayed as "85". However, if the ratio is "85", it will exceed the threshold for any of the six ratios, so it will blink.
(Example 2)
Assume the divisor is "1" and the dividend is "5592335 (D)".
In this case, the quotient (division result) is "5592335 (D)" = "55550Fh". Therefore, the value of the least significant byte in the division result register is "0Fh" = "15 (D)".
Thus, the division result itself exceeds the ratio threshold in all six ratios and is therefore subject to flashing; however, when judged based only on the least significant byte, it falls below the threshold and is therefore displayed as a steady light.
As described above, when the least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, a ratio within the design range may be displayed.

Since the above-mentioned situation is a rare occurrence, it is usually sufficient to obtain only the least significant byte of the division result register.
However, it is also possible to obtain the value of the three bytes other than the least significant byte in the division result register and determine whether it is "0" or not.
For example, if the three bytes other than the least significant value in the division result register are "000000", then the least significant byte in the division result register is considered a normal value.
In contrast, if the values of the three bytes other than the least significant byte in the division result register are not "000000", then the least significant byte in the division result register is determined to be an abnormal value.
And when it is determined that it is an abnormal value,
Examples of methods include: 1) not saving ratio data to RWM53; 2) saving values that can be identified as abnormal values as ratio data to RWM53; 3) using a display method that can be identified as abnormal values (e.g., flashing display) when displaying ratios; and 4) saving a correction value (e.g., "99 (D)") as ratio data to RWM53.

Since the above ratio calculation process is part of the second program, no interrupt handling is performed during the ratio calculation process.
In other words, interrupt handling is not performed during the process of setting the values of the multiplicand setting register and the multiplier setting register, and during the process of storing the multiplier result in the multiplication result register.
Similarly, interrupt handling is not performed during the process of setting the values of the dividend setting register and the divisor setting register, the process of storing the quotient and remainder in the division result register and the remainder result register, and until the values of the division result register and the remainder result register are read and saved to the RWM53.
On the other hand, if the interrupt handler is not executed, the power-off handler (step S2771 in Figure 184) will not be executed. Therefore, the power-off handler will not be executed until the values in the multiplication and division registers are stored, or until the values in the division result register and the remainder result register are saved to the RWM53.
For example, if a power-off process is performed between setting a value in the dividend setting register (let's call this value "A") and setting a value in the divisor setting register (let's call this value "B"), and retrieving the value stored in the division result register, it may not be possible to retrieve the value of the division result register after the value corresponding to the quotient of "A/B" has been stored in the division result register. Instead, it may retrieve the initial value of the division result register, "FFh". In other words, even if the update conditions for RWM53 (for example, execution of "400" game plays) are met, if a power-off process is performed, there is a risk that RWM53 will not be updated.
However, since the power cut-off process is not executed while values are being stored in the multiplication/division registers, or while the values in the division result register and the remainder result register are being saved to the RWM53, such a situation can be prevented.

Furthermore, the time from when the divisor is stored in the divisor setting register in step S946 until the division result is stored in the division result register is "4" SLCK (system clock) in the 11th embodiment. Since the system clock in the 11th embodiment is "16" MHz, "4" SLCK corresponds to approximately "0.25" microseconds.
On the other hand, step S947, "Ratio data RWM address acquisition," consists of multiple instructions, and the processing of step S947 is configured to take approximately 6 SCLK cycles.
Therefore, after the divisor is stored in the divisor setting register in step S946, when the value of the division result register is read in step S948, the division result is already stored in the division result register. For this reason, there is no need to include a waiting process (for example, a loop process to allow "4" SCLK to pass) between the processing of step S946 and the execution of step S948.

Figure 183 is a flowchart showing a modified version of Figure 182. In the example of Figure 182, when the ratio exceeds "100%", for example, when it is "101%", it is displayed as "P.0".
In contrast, in the example shown in Figure 183, when the ratio data is greater than or equal to "100 (D) (64h)" and less than or equal to "254 (D) (FEh)", "99% (63h)" is always stored in RWM53.
In Figure 183, step S949 determines whether the least significant byte value in the division result register is "FFh", and if it is "FFh", the process returns to step S933. This is the same as in the example in Figure 182.
Furthermore, in step S950, after setting "99(D)(63h)" as the ratio data, the next step S954 determines whether the least significant byte of the division result register exceeds "63h(99(D))". If it is determined that it exceeds "63h(99(D))", the process proceeds to step S953, where "99(D)" is set as the ratio data. On the other hand, if it is determined that the least significant byte of the division result register does not exceed "63h(99(D))", the least significant byte of the division result register value is saved as the ratio data.
Thus, by first determining in step S949 whether the value of the least significant byte in the division result register is "FFh", and if it is not "FFh", then determining in step S954 whether it exceeds "63h", it is possible to effectively determine whether the value of the least significant byte in the division result register is within the range of "64h" to "FEh", thereby simplifying the process.

As a result,
1) When the least significant byte in the division result register is "FFh", the ratio data is not updated (RWM53 is not updated).
2) If the least significant byte of the division result register is less than or equal to "99 (D)", the least significant byte of the division result register is stored in RWM53 as ratio data.
3) If the value of the least significant byte in the division result register is within the range of "100 (D)" to "254 (D)", then "99 (D)" is stored in RWM53 as ratio data.
Furthermore, when "99 (D)" is saved as ratio data, it will flash because it exceeds the threshold regardless of which of the six ratios it represents.

As described above, when the least significant byte of the division result register is "FFh", the ratio data stored in RWM53 is not updated, and when the least significant byte of the division result register is a value other than "FFh", the ratio data stored in RWM53 is updated.
For example, let's assume that "40 (D)" is newly stored as the instruction-included bonus ratio data. As a result, when displaying the instruction-included bonus ratio on the bonus ratio monitor 74, "40" will be displayed on the ratio segment. Until 400 games have elapsed, "40" will be displayed on the ratio segment when displaying the instruction-included bonus ratio. After 400 games have elapsed, let's assume that the ratio calculation process (Figure 182 or Figure 183) is answered "Yes" in step S935 and the calculation is performed, and the value of the least significant byte in the division result register is "FFh". In this case, the instruction-included bonus ratio data is not updated, so "40" will be displayed on the ratio segment when displaying the instruction-included bonus ratio until another 400 games have elapsed from that point (the same value as the previously displayed ratio will be displayed on the ratio segment). On the other hand, if the value of the least significant byte in the division result register is not "FFh", the ratio data in RWM 53 is updated, and the ratio segment of that ratio is displayed based on the latest ratio data. Note that the ratio data may be updated to the same value as the previous data. In this case, the display of the ratio segment itself will be the same as the previous time.
The above is an example of instruction-included bonus item ratio data, but the same applies to continuous bonus item ratio (6000 times) data, bonus item ratio (6000 times) data, continuous bonus item ratio (cumulative) data, bonus item ratio (cumulative) data, and bonus item status ratio data.

Figure 184 is a flowchart showing the interrupt handling (I_INTR) in the 11th embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 68 of the second embodiment.
In interrupt handling, the processing in steps S960 to S460 is executed by the second program. All other processing is handled by the first program.
In the 11th embodiment, since the CALLEX instruction and RETEX instruction are used in the same manner as described above, saving the AF register when moving from the first program to the second program, and restoring the AF register when moving from the second program to the first program, are not required.
Furthermore, since duplicate interrupts are prohibited in step S452 when transitioning to interrupt handling, interrupts will not be prohibited again when transitioning to the second program.
In the 11th embodiment, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S960 is the process shown in Figure 185, which will be described later.

Figure 185 is a flowchart showing the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) that is executed in interrupt processing.
The preparation for displaying the ratio is one process during interrupt processing. Therefore, interrupt processing can be executed even in setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, during gameplay (from the time the start switch 41 is operated until all reels 31 stop and the payout process is completed), and in a recoverable error state, and thus ratio information can be displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 even in these states. As mentioned above, in setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, special displays other than ratio information may be shown.
On the other hand, during an unrecoverable error, interrupt processing is not executed, so the ratio information is not displayed on the role ratio monitor 74.

If an unrecoverable error occurs, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 64, or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 72, the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off ("00000000(B)").
As a result, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6-9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6-9) becomes "00000000 (B)", so digits 6-9 on the ratio monitor 74 will all remain off until the unrecoverable error state is cleared and interrupt processing resumes.
The fact that digits 6-9 of the payout ratio monitor 74 remain completely off is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state. As a result, the manager (a hall employee) can tell that an irrecoverable error state is occurring simply by seeing that the payout ratio monitor 74 is completely off.

In Figure 185, step S961 executes the creation of a blinking request flag (S_LED_FLASH). This process is the same as the process shown in Figure 186, which will be described later, and updates the identification segment blinking request flag at address "F298h" and the ratio segment blinking request flag at address "F299h" in Figure 177.
In the next step, S962, the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME) is updated. This process is shown in Figure 187, which will be described later, and updates the blinking switch flag at address "F293h", the display switch counter at address "F294h", and the blinking switch time at address "F296h".
In the next step, S963, the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) is performed. This process is shown in Figure 188, which will be described later, and it is the process of actually displaying (on or off) the ratio information during the interrupt process.
And with that, the process described in this flowchart is finished.

Figure 186 is a flowchart showing the generation of the blinking request flag (S_LED_FLASH) in step S961 of Figure 185.
First, in step S971, the number of repetitions and the data for the blinking request flag are set. This process stores "6h" in the B register as the number of repetitions. The number of repetitions "6" means that the blinking or non-blinking determination is repeatedly made for the six ratio segments.
Additionally, "00000000B" is stored in the C register as the initial value for the blinking request flag data.

In the next step, S972, the address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table is set. This process stores the starting address "2500h" of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) shown in Figure 75 in the DE register.
Furthermore, "non-applicable items" refer to items that do not possess the corresponding function (performance). However, in the 11th embodiment, since the ratios of all six items are displayed, there are no non-applicable items.
In the next step, S973, the address of the ratio data RWM53 is set. This process stores the address (F28Dh in Figure 176) where the ratio data for special features and other statuses is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S974, where a blinking or non-applicable item determination value is obtained. Here, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value (50h) stored at the address value "2500h" indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.

In the next step, S975, it is determined whether or not the item value is not applicable. This process subtracts "DDh" from the A register value, and if the result of the calculation is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
If an item is not applicable, "DEh" is stored in the blinking/not applicable item determination value table. Subtracting "1" from "DEh" and then subtracting "DDh" results in "0", and the zero flag becomes "1".
As shown in Figure 75, in the 11th embodiment as well, the ratios of all six items are calculated and displayed, so "DEh" is not stored in any address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table.
If it is determined that the item value is not an invalid item value, the process proceeds to the next step S976. If it is determined that the item value is an invalid item value, step S976 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S977.
Therefore, in the case of the 11th embodiment, steps S974 and S975 are unnecessary.

In step S976, ratio data is acquired. This process stores the value (in this case, the ratio of special features, etc.) stored at the address (F28Dh) indicated by the HL register value into the A register.
In the next step, S977, the ratio data or the value of the non-applicable item is saved. This process stores the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Furthermore, this process has the following implications:
If there are non-applicable items, the storage area of the RWM53 where the ratio data is stored is empty before the above saving process.
For example, if the machine does not have "RB (Type 1 Special Bonus)", the continuous bonus ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289h") and the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) data (address "F28Bh") will store "0".
In this case, if "0" is stored in the continuous bonus ratio (6000 times) data, "00" will be displayed when displaying the continuous bonus ratio (6000 times). To prevent this, the value of the A register obtained in step S975 (or "DDh" if it is not an applicable item) is stored as the ratio data.

Note that if an item is not applicable, "--" is displayed as the ratio. However, in the 11th embodiment, since all six ratios are displayed, there are no non-applicable items. For this reason, the ratio display segment data table shown in Figure 175 does not contain "-" display data. If there is a non-applicable item, for example, segment data "01000000B" for displaying "-" can be stored at address "253Eh".
If the program is configured as shown in Figure 186, it becomes possible to use the same program for gaming machines that have non-applicable items and gaming machines that do not have non-applicable items.

In the next step, S978, a blinking check is performed. This process subtracts the value at the address indicated by the DE register value (the ratio threshold) from the A register value (the ratio). If a carry-over occurs as a result of this calculation, the carry flag is set to "1".
For example, if the value of the bonus item status ratio is "40", the value stored at address "2500h" (the threshold value of the bonus item status ratio) is "50". Subtracting "50" from "40" results in a carry flag of "1". On the other hand, if the value of the bonus item status ratio is "60", subtracting "50" from "60" results in a carry flag of "0". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1", it means that the item will be lit up when displayed (below the threshold), and when the carry flag is "0", it means that the item will be blinking when displayed (above the threshold).

Next, the process proceeds to step S979, where the data for the blinking request flag is updated. Specifically, the carry flag and the C register value are rotated and shifted to the left.
For example, if the value of the carry flag is "CY" and the values of the C registers are "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0",
"CY", C register values "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register values "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Perform the following operation.
Here, if the C register value is the initial value "00000000B" as shown in step S971, and the carry flag was "1" in step S978,
"1", C register value "00000000B"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001B"
Perform the following operation.
In the next step, S980, the RWM address of the next ratio data is set. This process involves subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value for the first flashing determination is "F28Dh" (bonus item status ratio data) as described above. Subtracting "1" here results in the HL register value becoming "F28Ch" (bonus item ratio (cumulative) data), which is the target of the second flashing determination.
In the next step, S981, the address of the next blinking/non-applicable item determination value table is set. This process increments the DE register value by "1". The DE register initially stores "2500h", so this process makes it "2501h". Therefore, as shown in Figure 75, the next address is the address where the threshold value for the bonus item ratio (cumulative) is stored.

Next, the process proceeds to step S982 to determine whether the loop has ended. Here, the following process is executed: The value of the B register is subtracted by "1", and if the value of the B register is "0", it is determined that the loop has ended. If it is determined that the loop has ended, the process proceeds to step S983; otherwise, the process returns to step S974.
In this manner, the blinking detection for the six items is performed.
If the C register values after performing the blinking check for the 6 items are "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0", then
D7:0
D6:0
D5: Flashing judgment data for the ratio of special features, etc. (0 or 1)
D4: Flashing judgment data (0 or 1) for the cumulative ratio of special features.
D3: Flashing judgment data (0 or 1) for the cumulative ratio of consecutive special effects
D2: Flashing judgment data (0 or 1) for the ratio of special features (6000 times)
D1: Flashing judgment data (0 or 1) for the ratio of consecutive special effects (6000 times)
D0: Flashing judgment data for the ratio of indicated features (0 or 1)
This is the result.

After completing the blinking check for the six items and proceeding to step S983, a ratio segment blinking request flag is generated. The following processing is performed here.
1) Store "00111111B" in register A.
(2) Perform an exclusive OR operation (XOR) between the value in register A and the value in register C, and store the result of the operation in register A.
Before the execution of step S983, as described above, the blinking item (bit) among the data stored in the C register is set to "0". For example, when the ratio of indicated bonus items is less than "70%", the D0 bit is "1", and when the ratio of indicated bonus items is "70%" or more, the D0 bit is "0".
Therefore, by inverting the bit values of the C register, a ratio segment blinking request flag is generated so that the blinking item (bit) becomes "1".
Then, in the next step S984, the ratio segment blinking request flag generated in step S983 is saved. This process stores the C register value at address "F299h".

This results in "1" for items that blink and "0" for items that do not blink. In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0," and the ratio segment blinking request flags for the six items, including whether or not to blink, are stored at address "F299h."

In the next step, S985, the total number of games played counter value is obtained. The following process is performed here.
1) Store the lower two bytes of the total number of games played counter (address "F26Dh") in the HL register.
2) Store the upper byte of the total number of games played counter (address "F26Dh") in the A register.
As mentioned above, the total number of games played counter consists of 3 bytes, and "F26Dh" is the memory area that stores the first digit, and its value is stored in the L register.
Furthermore, "F26Eh" is a memory area that stores the second digit, and its value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26Fh" is a memory area that stores the third digit, and its value is stored in the A register.

In the next step, S986, it is determined whether the upper byte of the total number of games played counter is "0". This process determines whether the A register value is "0". If it is determined that the A register value is "0", the process proceeds to step S987; otherwise, it proceeds to step S989.
In step S987, it is determined whether or not 6000 games have been played. This process compares the HL register value (the lower two bytes of the total number of games played counter) with "6000 (D)". If it is determined that 6000 games or more have been played, the process proceeds to step S988; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S991.
Step S988 determines whether the number of games played is 17,500 or more. This process compares the HL register value (the lower two bytes of the total number of games played counter) with "17500 (D)". If it is determined that the number of games played is 17,500 or more, the process proceeds to step S989; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S990.

In step S989, the data for the blinking request flag (17500 times) is updated. This process sets the D1 bit of the C register to "1". At this point, the value of the C register should correspond to the identification segment blinking request flag at address "F298h" in Figure 177 (however, at this point, the bit is inverted). Therefore, when 17500 games have elapsed, the process of setting the D1 bit to "1" is executed.
Next, in step S990, the data for the blinking request flag (6000 times) is updated. This process sets the D0 bit of the C register to "1".
Therefore, the C register value is not updated when 6000 games have not yet been played. Also, when 6000 games have been played but 17500 games have not yet been played, only the D0 bit of the C register is updated. Furthermore, when 6000 games have been played and 17500 games have been played, both the D0 and D1 bits of the C register are updated.
Furthermore, if "Yes" is determined in step S986, the value of the lower two bytes of the total number of games played exceeds "FFFFh" (65535 (D)), so it can be determined that 6000 games have passed and 17500 games have passed.

In the next step S991, it is determined whether the upper byte value of the total number of games played is greater than "2"("3" or more). In step S985, since the upper byte value of the total number of games played is stored in the A register, it is determined whether the A register value is greater than "2". Here, "175000 (D)" is "2AB98h", so if the A register value is greater than "2", it means that the total number of games played counter value is greater than "175000 (D)".
If it is determined in step S991 that the upper byte value of the total number of games played exceeds "2", the process proceeds to step S994; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S992.
In step S992, it is determined whether the upper byte value of the total number of games played is "2". Here, the total number of games played value "20000h" corresponds to "131072 (D)", so if the upper byte value of the total number of games played is not "2", then it has not exceeded "175000" games.

If the higher byte value of the total number of games played is determined to be "2", the process proceeds to step S993; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S995.
In step S993, it is determined whether the total number of games played has exceeded "175,000" games. Here, "175,000 (D)" is "2AB98h", so it is determined whether "175,000" games have exceeded by checking whether the HL register (the lower two bytes of the total number of games played stored in step S985) is greater than or equal to "AB98h".
If it is determined that 175,000 games have been played, proceed to step S994; if it is determined that 175,000 games have not been played, proceed to step S995.
Step S994 executes the process of setting the D2 bit of the C register to "1".
Therefore, when the total number of games played has exceeded 175,000, the D2 bit of the C register is updated to "1", and when the total number of games played has not exceeded 175,000, the D2 bit of the C register is not updated.

In the next step, S995, an identification segment blinking request flag is generated.
Here, the following process will be performed.
1) Store "00000111B" in register A.
(2) Perform an exclusive OR operation (XOR) between the value in register A and the value in register C, and store the result of the operation in register A.

Before the execution of step S995, the blinking item (bit) in the data stored in the C register is set to "0". For example, after 175000 games have been played, the D2 bit is set to "1".
Therefore, by inverting the bits of the C register value, an identification segment blinking request flag is generated so that the blinking item (bit) becomes "1".
In the next step, S996, the identification segment blinking request flag generated in step S995 is saved. This process stores the C register value at address "F298h".
As a result, an identification segment blinking request flag, where "1" indicates items that blink and "0" indicates items that do not blink, is stored at address "F298h".
And with that, the process described in this flowchart is finished.

Figure 187 is a flowchart showing the ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S962 of Figure 185.
In Figure 187, step S1001 updates the blinking switching time. This process subtracts "1" from the value stored at address "F296h" in Figure 176. This blinking switching time performs a cyclic subtraction process that cycles through "0" to "134(D)". Therefore, if this process is performed when the blinking switching time is "0", "134(D)" (86h) will be stored as the blinking switching time. Also, if this process is performed when the value is "0" and "134(D)" is stored as the blinking switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
In the next step, S1002, it is determined whether the blinking switching time has elapsed. This process determines whether the blinking switching time has elapsed by checking whether the carry flag became "1" in the process of step S1001. If it is determined that the blinking switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1003; if it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Here, the ratio display timer update is performed with each interrupt, and the interrupt is performed every 2.235 ms. Therefore, the time it takes for the blinking switching time to complete one cycle is 2.235 ms × 134 = approximately 300 ms.

In the next step, S1003, the blinking toggle flag is updated. This process updates the blinking toggle flag at address "F293h" to "1" if it is "0", and to "0" if it is "1".
In the next step, S1004, the display switching counter value is updated. This process increments the value at address "F294h" by "1". The display switching counter cycles through "0" → "1" → ... → "15" → "0" → "1" → .... When the display switching counter is "15", incrementing it by "1" makes it "0".
In the next step, S1005, it is determined whether or not to perform a display switch. Here, it is determined that a display switch should be performed when the display switch counter changes from "15" to "0". If it is determined in step S1005 to perform a display switch, the process proceeds to step S1006; if it is determined not to perform a display switch, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
Thus, the system selects "Yes" in step S1002 approximately every 300 ms, and when the display switching counter changes from 15 to 0, it is determined in step S1005 to execute the display switching. Therefore, the display switches approximately every 300 ms x 16 = approximately 4800 ms.

In the next step, S1006, it is determined whether the test display flag is on or off. This process determines that the test display flag is on when the value of address "F29Ah" is "FFh". If it is determined that the test display flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1008; if it is determined that the test display flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1007.
In step S1007, the ratio display number is updated. This process adds "1" to the value at address "F292h". Note that the ratio display number is updated using a cyclic addition process that cycles between "0" and "5". Therefore, if this process is performed when the ratio display number is "5", "0" will be stored as the ratio display number.
If it is determined in step S1006 that the test display flag is on, step S1007 is skipped, and the ratio display number is not updated.
In the next step, S1008, the test display flag is turned off. This process sets the value stored at address "F29Ah" to "00h". Then, the process according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, the ratio display number is updated approximately every 4800 ms, so the ratios of the six items are displayed in a cycle approximately every 4.8 seconds.
Furthermore, as mentioned above, after power-on, "FFh" is stored as the initial value of the test display flag (Figure 179).
On the other hand, when the number of interrupt processing operations after power-on reaches "2144" (approximately "4.8" seconds after the first interrupt processing operation), step S1005 determines "Yes" and the test display flag is turned off. Therefore, the test display flag remains on until approximately "4.8" seconds have elapsed after power-on, and the test pattern is displayed.
Then, after approximately 4.8 seconds have passed since power-on, the test display flag will be turned off, and the ratio will be displayed from the next interrupt processing. In this case, the initial value of the ratio display number is "0", so the ratio of the included feature will be displayed.

As is clear from the above, the same RWM53 data is used for the blinking switch flag, display switch counter, and blinking switch time when displaying the test pattern and when displaying the ratio information. In this way, the RWM53 data is shared between displaying the test pattern and displaying the ratio information, so the area of the RWM53 can be reduced.
Furthermore, the flashing cycle when displaying the test pattern and the flashing cycle when displaying the ratio are the same. This allows the administrator of the role ratio monitor 74 (for example, the hall manager) to see both the test pattern display and the ratio information display without any sense of incongruity.
Furthermore, from steps S1002 and S1003, the blinking toggle flag is stored alternately at the RWM53 address "F293h" approximately every "0.3" seconds, with "00h (on)" and "01h (off)".

Figure 188 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S963 of Figure 185.
In Figure 188, step S1021 turns off the output ports. This process turns off output port 6 (digits 6-9 signals) and output port 7 (segment signals for digits 6-9) in Figure 59. By outputting "00000000B" to these output ports 6 and 7, the output of digits 6-9 is temporarily suppressed. This prevents different LEDs from appearing to light up simultaneously for even a moment when switching the LED display (preventing afterimages).
In the next step, S1022, the LED display counter 2 is updated. This process involves right-shifting the value of the LED display counter 2 at address "F297h" by one bit. For example, if the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00000010B", after the update it will be "00000001B".

Next, the process proceeds to step S1023, where it is determined whether the value of the LED display counter 2 has become "0". For example, if the value of the LED display counter 2 was "00000001B" before the update, it will become "00000000B", and therefore it is determined that the value has become "0".
If it is determined that the value of the LED display counter 2 has become "0", the process proceeds to step S1024; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1025.
In step S1024, the value of the LED display counter 2 is initialized. This process stores "1" in the D3 bit of the LED display counter 2. As a result, the value of the LED display counter 2 becomes "00001000B". Then the process proceeds to step S1025. This is because, as mentioned above, the LED display counter 2 uses only the lower 4 bits.
In step S1025, all lighting data is set. This process sets the data output from output port 6 (digit data) to "00001111B" and the data output from output port 7 (segment data) to "11111111B" in Figure 59. Note that at this point, the lighting data for the output ports has not yet been output.
In other words, if this data were output, the ratio monitor 74 would display "8.8.8.8.". To put it another way, this would be data that displays a test pattern.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1026, where it is determined whether the test display flag for address "F29Ah" is on (FFh). If it is determined that the test display flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1050; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1027.
In the next step, S1027, the ratio display number for address "F292h" is obtained. Based on the ratio display number obtained here, the number of blinking bit checks is then determined. Specifically, it is as follows:
Ratio display number is "0": Obtain the number of blinking bit checks for the indicated feature ratio.
Ratio display number "1": Obtain the number of flashing bit checks for the continuous bonus ratio (6000 times).
:
Ratio display number is "5": Obtain the number of flashing bit checks for the ratio of special features status (total cumulative).

In the next step, S1028, the address of the blinking bit check count table is set. Figure 189 shows the blinking bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the 11th embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 78 of the second embodiment. The starting address of the blinking bit check count table is "2510h". Then, in step S1028, this starting address "2510h" is set as the address of the blinking bit check count table.
Here, "number of blinking bit checks" is a value that, as in the second embodiment, indicates how many bits must be advanced from the D0 bit in the identification segment blinking request flag at address "F298h" before the bit to be checked is reached.
For example, in Figure 189, the address corresponding to the ratio of special features including instructions and the ratio of special feature states is stored as "2h". This value is used to determine whether the value of the second bit D2, counting from the D0 bit, is "1" in the identification segment blinking request flag at address "F298h". The D2 bit is a flag that is "1" when the total number of games played has not reached "175000" times. When this D2 bit is "1", the identification segments for the ratio of special features including instructions and the ratio of special feature states become the target of blinking (Figure 174).

Similarly, the values "0h" are stored for the continuous bonus ratio (6000 times) and bonus ratio (6000 times). This value is used to determine whether the value of the 0th D0 bit (counting from the D0 bit) in the identification segment flashing request flag is "1". The D0 bit is a flag that is "1" when the total number of plays has not reached "6000". When this D0 bit is "1", the identification segments for the continuous bonus ratio (6000 times) and bonus ratio (6000 times) will flash (Figure 174).
Furthermore, the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and cumulative bonus ratio are stored as "1h". This value is used to determine whether the value of the first D1 bit (counting from the D0 bit) in the identification segment flashing request flag is "1". The D1 bit is a flag that is "1" when the total number of plays has not reached "17500". When this D1 bit is "1", the identification segments for the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and cumulative bonus ratio will flash (Figure 174).

In the next step, S1029, the number of times the identification segment blinking bit is checked is set. This involves adding the ratio display number obtained in step S1027 to the starting address "2510h" of the blinking bit check count table set in step S1028.
For example, when the ratio display number is "0" (ratio of special features including instructions),
2510h+0h=2510h
This retrieves the value "2h" stored at address "2510h".
Also, for example, when the ratio display number is "4" (cumulative ratio of special features),
2510h+4h=2514h
This retrieves the value "1h" stored at address "2514h".
In other words, "2510h" becomes the reference address, and the value stored in the ratio display number (address "F292h") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit check table, and the value stored at that address is retrieved.

In the next step, S1030, the identification segment blinking request flag is obtained. This process stores the data of the identification segment blinking request flag at address "F298h" in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1031, where the identification segment offset table is set. This process stores the starting address "2520h" of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) shown in Figure 175.
In the next step, S1032, the identification segment offset value is obtained. This process involves reading the corresponding value from the identification segment offset table, using the ratio display number obtained in step S1027 as the offset value.
Specifically, for example, if the ratio display number is "1" (consecutive bonus ratio (6000 times)), the value "6Bh" stored at the address "2521h", which is obtained by adding "1h" to "2520h", is retrieved.

In the next step, S1033, it is determined whether there is a request to display one identification digit (i.e., digit 7, which is the lower digit of the identification segment). When the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00000100B", it is determined that there is a request to display one identification digit. If it is determined that there is a request to display one identification digit, the process proceeds to step S1044; if it is determined that there is no request to display one identification digit, the process proceeds to step S1034.
In step S1034, the identification segment offset is updated. This process involves swapping the upper and lower data values of the identification segment offset value obtained in step S1032 (for example, "6Bh" in the above example) using a swap instruction. Therefore, if the value before the swap was "6Bh", it becomes "B6h" after the swap. This processing is done because only the lower four bits of the identification segment offset value are used.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1035 to determine whether there is a request to display the two-digit identification indicator (i.e., digit 6, the higher digit of the identification segment). If the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00001000B", it is determined that there is a request to display the two-digit identification indicator. If a request for displaying the two-digit identification indicator is found, the process proceeds to step S1044; if no such request is found, the process proceeds to step S1036. Note that if the result in step S1033 is "No" and step S1035 is also "No", this corresponds to a request to display the ratio segment (excluding the display of test display patterns, etc.).

In step S1036, the number of checks for the blinking bit of the ratio segment is set. Since the ratio has a total of 6 items, "6" is stored in the B register as the number of checks.
In the next step, S1037, the ratio segment blinking request flag is obtained. This process stores the data of the ratio segment blinking request flag at address "F299h" in the A register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1038 to obtain ratio data. This process obtains a numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number obtained in step S1027. For example, if the ratio display number is "0" and it is an indicator-included bonus ratio, the indicator-included bonus ratio data for address "F288h" is obtained.
In the next step, S1039, data is obtained that is displayed as "-". As mentioned above, the ratio of a feature not installed in the gaming machine is displayed as "-". However, in this embodiment, all features corresponding to the ratios of the six items are installed, so there is no case where the ratio is displayed as "-". Therefore, in the 11th embodiment, step S1039 is unnecessary. However, if the program is configured in this way, it can be used even for gaming machines that do not support all of the ratios of the six items.

In the next step, S1040, it is determined whether the ratio to be displayed is an irrelevant item. If it is determined that it is not an irrelevant item, the process proceeds to step S1041; if it is determined that it is an irrelevant item, the process proceeds to step S1052. As described above, in the 11th embodiment, the ratios of all six items are displayed, so there are no irrelevant items.
In the next step, S1041, the ratio display data is calculated. This process involves dividing the ratio data obtained in step S1038 by "10(D)(Ah)". The quotient and remainder obtained from this process are stored in predetermined registers. For example, if the ratio data is "59(D)(3Bh)", dividing it by "10(D)(Ah)" results in a quotient of "5h" and a remainder of "9h". If, for example, the register for storing the quotient is register D and the register for storing the remainder is register E, then "5h" is stored in register D and "9h" is stored in register E.

In the next step, S1042, it is determined whether there is a request to display a single digit ratio. This process checks whether the D0 bit of the LED display counter 2 at address "F297h" is "1". If the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display a single digit ratio. If it is determined that there is a request to display a single digit ratio, the process proceeds to step S1043. If it is determined that there is no request to display a single digit ratio, the process proceeds to step S1044.
In the next step, S1043, the single-digit display data for the ratio display is set. This process sets the E register value mentioned above as the single-digit display data.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1044 to set the ratio display offset. Step S1044 is performed when it is determined in step S1033 that a single-digit identification display request is required, when it is determined in step S1035 that a two-digit identification display request is required, and when it is determined in step S1042 that the request is not for a single-digit ratio display (but for a two-digit ratio display). When proceeding from step S1033 to step S1044, the lower four bits of the identification segment offset obtained in step S1032 are set as the ratio display offset. When proceeding from step S1035 to step S1044, the lower four bits of the identification segment offset updated in step S1034 are set as the ratio display offset. Furthermore, when proceeding from step S1042 to step S1044, the D register value (the quotient when the ratio data is divided by "10 (D)") is set as the ratio display offset.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1045, where the ratio display segment data table is set. This process sets the starting address "2530h" of the ratio display segment data table in Figure 175.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1046 to acquire segment data. This process adds the offset value set in step S1044 to the starting address "2530h" of the ratio display segment data table set in step S1045.
For example, if the offset value set in step S1044 is "9",
2530h+9h=2539h
This then retrieves the data displaying "9" (01101111B).

Next, the process proceeds to step S1047, where the blinking bits are checked. This process determines whether or not to blink the identification segment or ratio segment that is the target of the display this time.
At this point, register A stores the value of either the identification segment blinking request flag or the ratio segment blinking request flag. Furthermore, register B stores the value of the number of checks.
Then, in step S1047, the A register is shifted "1" to the right, and the result of the shift that overflows is stored in the carry flag. In other words, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag is "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag is "1".
In the next step, S1048, it is determined whether the inspection has been completed. Here, the following process is performed: This process subtracts "1" from the B register value, and if it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the inspection has been completed.
If it is determined that the inspection is complete, proceed to step S1049; if it is determined that the inspection is not complete, return to step S1047.
Through the above process, the value of the identification segment blink request flag or the ratio segment blink request flag is right-shifted the number of times stored in the B register, and the result of the overflow during the shift is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the identification segment request flag is "00000100B" (the D2 bit is on) and the B register value is "3h",
First attempt: "00000100B" → "00000010B", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3h - 1h = 2h
Second attempt: "00000010B" → "00000001B", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 2h - 1h = 1h
Third attempt: "00000001B" → "00000000B", Carry flag = "1"
B register value = 1h - 1h = 0h
This is the result.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1049 to determine whether the blinking request flag is on or off. This process determines whether the carry flag was "1" when it was determined in step S1047 that the inspection was finished. If it is "1", it is determined that the blinking request flag is on. If it is determined that the blinking request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1050; if it is determined that the blinking request flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1052.

In step S1050, it is determined whether the blinking toggle flag for address "F293h" is on or off. If it is determined that the blinking toggle flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1051; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1052.
In step S1051, the segment data is cleared. That is, when the blink request flag is on ("1") and the blink switch flag is on ("1", i.e., off), the interrupt process turns off the display to be lit, so the segment data is set to "00000000B". Then the process proceeds to step S1052.
In step S1052, to output the digit signal and segment signal, the digit signal is output from output port 6 (Figure 59) and the segment signal is output from output port 7 (Figure 59). Then the process according to this flowchart is completed.

In the ratio display process described above, for the first approximately 5 seconds after power-on, step S1026 will be "Yes," so all the lighting data set in step S1025 will be output. Also, in step S1050, if the blinking switch flag is off, the segment data will be cleared. Therefore, the test pattern will be a display that repeatedly lights up and turns off every approximately 0.3 seconds for approximately 5 seconds (until "Yes" is determined in step S1005 in Figure 187).
Furthermore, the ratio information is sequentially switched and displayed approximately every "5" seconds (each time "Yes" is determined in step S1005 of Figure 187) (step S1007 of Figure 187).
Furthermore, the identification segment display will flash when the total number of games played is less than the standard number of games played (see Figure 174) (when "Yes" is determined in step S1049 in Figure 188). The flashing display will alternate between lighting up and turning off approximately every 0.3 seconds, as described above.
Furthermore, the ratio segment display will blink when the ratio is above a threshold (see Figure 174) (when "Yes" is determined in step S1049 in Figure 188). The blinking display will blink on and off approximately every 0.3 seconds, as described above.

Next, we will explain the relationship between powering on after a recoverable or unrecoverable error occurs and the display of the test pattern.
As mentioned above, recoverable errors are errors that can be corrected without turning the power on or off, and examples include hopper errors, medal selector errors, and door (front door 12) open errors.
In the interrupt handler (I_INTR) shown in Figure 184, step S457 executes a read operation of the input port 51, and then step S463 executes an input error check. If any recoverable error is detected during the input error check based on the data of the input port, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53.

Furthermore, in the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 180), if any bit of the error detection flag is "1" before the operation of the start switch 41 is detected (before step S278) and after all reels 31 have stopped (after step S289), the game is stopped and the error details are displayed, for example, on the winnings display LED 78.
In other words, if a recoverable error occurs between the time the start switch 41 is operated while a specified number of medals have been bet, and the time when all the reels 31 stop (between steps S279 and S289; the area enclosed by the dashed line in Figure 180), the game will continue until all the reels 31 stop, and then the game will stop and the recoverable error will be displayed.
When a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the error is removed by the administrator (hall staff), and the reset switch is operated, clearing the recoverable error state and allowing gameplay to resume.

Furthermore, interrupt processing is executed even while a recoverable error is occurring. Therefore, the performance ratio monitor 74 displays the results even while a recoverable error is occurring.
Here, if a recoverable error occurs, and the power is turned off without removing the cause of the recoverable error, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings (without entering setting change mode), the program startup process in Figure 178 proceeds to the power recovery process in step S2721, and then the interrupt process is executed. As a result, as described above, the ratio monitor 74 displays a test pattern for about 5 seconds, and then the ratio is displayed.
On the other hand, when interrupt processing is initiated, the input error check (step S463 in Figure 184) is performed as described above, and any recoverable errors that have not been removed are detected again. Therefore, after power-on, the system enters a recoverable error state (at this time, the ratio monitor 74 displays the ratio after the test pattern).

On the other hand, if an unrecoverable error occurs immediately after power-on (step S2801 in Figure 178), the unrecoverable error processing shown in Figure 64 is executed. Here, as shown in step S1490 in Figure 64, interrupt processing is prohibited.
On the other hand, if an unrecoverable error occurs during interrupt processing (step S2811 in Figure 184), the unrecoverable error processing 2 shown in Figure 72 is executed. Here, in interrupt processing, steps S960 and S458 to S460 are processed by the second program. Interrupt processing is prohibited while the second program is running. In other words, interrupt processing is not executed while the unrecoverable error processing 2 is running.
Incidentally, when the power is turned off normally, the power outage is detected in the interrupt processing (step S2771 in Figure 184). Then, when the process moves to the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) shown in Figure 69, the RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) is executed in step S2776. This process is shown in Figure 70. In the RWM checksum set shown in Figure 70, the power outage processing completed flag is set in step S2784. This process stores "55h" at address "F2A2h" in Figure 177. Also, in Figure 70, the RWM checksum data is saved in step S2795. This process stores the RWM checksum data at address "F2A0h" in Figure 177.

Subsequently, when the power is turned on, in step S2705 of Figure 178, power-off recovery data (the value of the power-off processed flag set in step S2784 above) is acquired. Then, in step S2708, it is determined whether the power-off processed flag is "55h". Also in step S2708, it is determined whether the RWM checksum data stored in RWM 53 during the power-off process matches the RWM checksum data calculated in step S902. If the power-off processed flag is "55h" and the RWM checksum data matches, it is determined that the power-off recovery was normal. On the other hand, if the power-off processed flag is a value other than "55h", or if the RWM checksum data does not match, it is determined that the power-off recovery was abnormal. If it is determined in step S2708 that the power outage recovery is normal and the process proceeds to step S2721 for power recovery, the power outage completed flag is cleared in step S2724 of Figure 63 ("00h" is stored).
Thus, when a normal power outage occurs during interrupt processing, the power outage processed flag is set to "55h". When power is turned on, if the power outage recovery data (the value of the power outage processed flag) is "55h", it is determined that the power outage was normal. If the power outage recovery data is not "55h", it is determined that the power outage was abnormal.

Furthermore, if the power is turned off while an unrecoverable error (step S2801 in Figure 178) or unrecoverable error 2 (step S2811 in Figure 184) occurs, the interrupt processing is not executed while these unrecoverable errors occur, and therefore the power-off process in Figure 184 is not executed. Consequently, the power-off process completed flag shown in step S2784 in Figure 70 is not set. Also, since the power-off process is not executed, the RWM checksum data is not saved in step S2795 in Figure 70.
Therefore, when the power is turned on again, in step S2708 in Figure 178, it is determined that there is a power outage recovery abnormality, so the process proceeds to step S2801, and recovery failure error processing is executed. Since interrupt processing is not executed when recovery failure error processing is executed, the test pattern and ratio are not displayed on the ratio monitor 74.

Next, we will explain the relationship between the settings change mode or settings confirmation mode and the display of test patterns.
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 (Figure 112) in the ON position, and "Yes" is selected at step S2707 and step S2714 in Figure 178, the initialization process in Figure 65 proceeds. Then, when the process proceeds to step S2742 in Figure 65, the system transitions to the setting change confirmation process (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode) in Figure 66.
Here, in Figure 65, the interrupt processing starts at a timing after step S2740, so the display of the test pattern starts almost simultaneously with the transition to the setting change confirmation process. Then, after 5 seconds have elapsed since the transition to the setting change confirmation process, the display of the test pattern ends and the system transitions to the ratio display.

Furthermore, the setting confirmation mode can also be entered during the game standby period after power-on. In Figure 180, when the ON signal of the setting key switch is detected during the waiting period for medal insertion in step S275, the system proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (in this case, the setting confirmation process) shown in Figure 66.
Here, the ratio display pattern before transitioning to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the ratio display pattern during the setting confirmation mode. In other words, the display of the role ratio monitor 74 before and after transitioning to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the display of the role ratio monitor 74 when not transitioning to the setting confirmation mode.
I will explain this point in detail.
As an example, at present,
Ratio of accessories including instructions: 50%
Consecutive bonus round rate (6000 times): 30%
Bonus payout rate (6000 spins): 40%
:
Ratio of special features/conditions: 20%
Let's assume that this is the case.
Then, if "5H.20" is displayed on the payout ratio monitor 74, and approximately "3" seconds have passed since the start of this display, the game transitions from the standby state to the setting confirmation mode, then approximately "2" seconds after transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, the display on the payout ratio monitor 74 switches from "5H.20" to "7P.50". After approximately "5" seconds have passed since the display on the payout ratio monitor 74 became "7P.50", the display on the payout ratio monitor 74 switches from "7P.50" to "6y.30".
Next, after the payout ratio monitor 74 displays "6y.30", if the setting confirmation mode is terminated after approximately "1" second and the game standby state is entered, "6y.30" will be displayed on the payout ratio monitor 74 for approximately "4" seconds in the game standby state, and then it will switch to displaying "7y.40".

Furthermore, when the machine is in a state of waiting for a medal to be inserted, the display of the test pattern after power-on is usually finished, and the ratio display is performed. However, when the machine switches to the setting confirmation mode, the test pattern may be displayed again. In this case, for example, in Figure 66, when "Yes" is determined in step S2755, "FFh" is stored in the test display flag. As a result, in the subsequent interrupt processing, "Yes" is determined in step S1026 of the ratio display processing in Figure 188, so the test pattern is displayed, and after the display of the test pattern finishes, it switches to the ratio display.
Furthermore, when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, in Figure 66, when "Yes" is determined in step S2755, the initial value "00h" is stored in the display switching counter (or "00h" may also be stored in the blinking switching time). As a result, when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, the test pattern can be displayed for approximately "5" seconds.
Furthermore, when transitioning to the setting confirmation mode, in Figure 66, when "Yes" is determined in step S2755, the value of the ratio display number may be maintained, or "00h" may be stored in the ratio display number.
If the ratio display number value is maintained, the system will switch to settings confirmation mode, and after displaying the test pattern, the first ratio displayed will be the ratio from just before switching to settings confirmation mode.
In contrast, if "00h" is stored as the ratio display number when transitioning to the settings confirmation mode, the system will transition to the settings confirmation mode, display a test pattern, and then start displaying the ratio of the instructed feature, which is "1" in the display order.

Although the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows.
(1) The ratio monitor 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, but it is not limited to this and can also be mounted on other control boards other than the main control board 50.
(2) The value stored as ratio data and the value displayed on the ratio monitor 74 do not necessarily have to match. For example, if the least significant byte of the division result register is "100 (D)", then "100 (D)" is stored in the RWM 53, but "99" may be displayed on the ratio monitor 74.
When controlled in this manner, steps S950 and S951 in Figure 182 become unnecessary.
Then, in step S1041 of Figure 188, if the ratio data stored in RWM 53 is "64h (100 (D))", then in step S1046, the ratio display segment data for address "2539h" in Figure 175 is acquired.
Furthermore, in this case, if the gaming machine 10 is a medalless gaming machine as shown in the ninth embodiment (Figure 158), the ratio data "64h (100 (D))" stored in the RWM 53 is transmitted to the lending unit 200.

(3) When the value of the least significant byte in the division result register is 101 (D) or greater (including when it is 255 (D) (FFh)), it is also possible to save "0" in RWM 53 (update the ratio data). As a result, "00" is displayed in the ratio monitor 74.
Furthermore, in this case, for a coinless gaming machine, the ratio data stored in the RWM 53, "0", is transmitted to the dispensing unit 200.
(4) In the 11th embodiment, it is not determined whether the divisor is "0". However, the embodiment is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine whether the divisor is "0" before performing the division, and if the divisor is "0", then "0" is not stored in the divisor setting register.
(5) In the 11th embodiment, when obtaining the value of the division result register, the value of the least significant byte was obtained regardless of the values of the three bytes other than the least significant byte of the division result register (hereinafter referred to as the "upper three bytes"). However, the system is not limited to this, and if the value of the upper three bytes of the division result register is not "0", the division result (the value of the least significant byte) may not be saved to the RWM53. This is because the division result is in the range of "0" to "100 (D)", and if the value of the upper three bytes is not "0", it can be determined that the division result is an abnormal value.

(6) The setting order (storage order of values) of the multiplier setting register and the multiplicand setting register may be such that the multiplier setting register is set first, followed by the multiplicand setting register, or conversely, the multiplicand setting register is set first, followed by the multiplier setting register.
Similarly, the divisor setting register and the dividend setting register may be set after the divisor setting register, or conversely, after the dividend setting register, the divisor setting register may be set.
(7) If the power is turned off while an unrecoverable error has occurred, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch in the ON position, the initialization process in step S2731 (Figure 65) in Figure 178 will proceed, and an interrupt will occur between steps S2740 and S2741 in Figure 65. Therefore, if the unrecoverable error has been resolved, the ratio monitor 74 will first display a test pattern, and then the ratio will be displayed.

(8) In the 11th embodiment, the test pattern was set to blink "8.8.8.8.", but it is not limited to this and various patterns can be used. However, a test pattern that can determine whether all segments of each digit 6 to 9 can be lit and turned off is preferred.
For example, one pattern would be to display "*.8.8.8." (where "*" indicates that segments A to G are off) for 1.25 seconds → display "8.*.8.8." for 1.25 seconds → display "8.8.*.8." for 1.25 seconds → display "8.8.8.*." for 1.25 seconds (displayed for a total of 5 seconds).
Alternatively, the opposite pattern could be to light up "8. *. *. *." for 1.25 seconds → light up "*.8. *. *." for 1.25 seconds → light up "*. *.8. *." for 1.25 seconds → light up "*. *. *.8." for 1.25 seconds.

(9) In the 11th embodiment, the display switching counter and flashing switching time of the RWM53 are shared between the display of the test pattern and the ratio display. As a result, the flashing mode, which repeatedly turns on and off every approximately 0.3 seconds, and the mode, which switches the display every approximately 5 seconds (ends the display of the test pattern), are the same.
However, this is not the only option; a display switching counter specific to the test pattern display may also be provided. For example, a display switching counter 2 for the test pattern could be provided, which would be a ring counter that cycles from "0" to "30 (D)". When the display switching counter 2 reaches "0" (when "Yes" is displayed in step S1005 of Figure 187), the display of the test pattern could be terminated and the ratio display could be started. In this way, the test pattern can be displayed for approximately "10" seconds after power-on.

(10) In the 11th embodiment, the ratio display number of the RWM 53 is configured to be initialized after the power is turned on (Figure 179). However, the system is not limited to this, and the ratio display number of the RWM 53 may be configured not to be initialized after the power is turned on. With this configuration, after the power is turned on, the ratio display of the role ratio monitor 74 can be restarted from the ratio display number that was displayed when the power was last turned off. For example, if the power is turned off while the ratio display number is stored as "3h", and then the power is turned on normally without any setting changes, the test pattern will be displayed for about "5" seconds, and then the continuous role ratio (cumulative) corresponding to the ratio display number "3h" will be displayed.
However, even with the above specifications, when the power is turned on with the setting change switch in the ON position, the ratio display number of the RWM53 is initialized by the initialization process (Figure 65). As a result, after the test pattern is displayed, the ratio display starts from the ratio of the indicated feature.

(11) In the 11th embodiment, the test pattern was displayed by blinking, but the system is not limited to this, and the test pattern may be displayed by illuminating it. When the test pattern is displayed by illuminating it, in Figure 188, when it is determined that "Yes" is true in step S1026, the system proceeds to step S1052 (and does not proceed to steps S1050 and S1051).
(12) After turning on the power and displaying the test pattern for about "3" seconds, if the power is turned off and then turned on again, the test pattern may be displayed for the remaining "2" seconds, or the test pattern may be displayed again for about "5" seconds.
If you only want to display the test pattern for the remaining approximately "2" seconds, you can simply avoid initializing the display switching counter when the power is turned on. On the other hand, if you want to display the test pattern again for approximately "5" seconds, you can initialize the display switching counter when the power is turned on (you can also initialize the blinking switching time).
(13) The values of the various flags and counters shown in the 11th embodiment are just examples and are not limited to the values described above; they can be determined as appropriate.

(14) The 11th embodiment is not limited to conventional slot machines, but can also be applied to, for example, parrots (also called new slot machines) that use game balls as a game medium, medalless game machines (smart pachislo) that use electronic medals instead of physical medals, and casino machines.
Furthermore, the features of the eleventh embodiment's performance indicator for the payout ratio monitor 74 can be applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko gaming machines.
(15) The 11th embodiment is not limited to being implemented on its own, but can be implemented in appropriate combination with at least a part of the first to tenth embodiments.

<Note>
Examples of the inventions described in the original specification of this application (original inventions) include the following original inventions 1 to 10. The corresponding reference numerals in parentheses indicate the corresponding embodiments.
1. Original Invention 1
Initially, Invention 1 (Eleventh Embodiment) is,
Depending on the values stored in the predetermined storage means (RWM53, in particular the ratio data for addresses "F288h" to "F28Dh"), information regarding predetermined game history (ratios for six items, including the ratio of instructed prizes) can be displayed.
It comprises a dividend setting register, a divisor setting register, and a division result register (Figure 171),
The system is configured such that the division result is stored in the division result register by setting the dividend in the dividend setting register or the divisor in the divisor setting register.
When setting a divisor in the divisor setting register, the divisor is set in the divisor setting register without determining whether the divisor is "0" or not (steps S945 and S946 in Figure 182).
The division result register consists of 4 bytes (Figure 172).
When the divisor setting register is set to "0", the division result register is configured to store "FFFFFFFFh".
If the least significant byte of the division result register is a specific value other than "FFh", the least significant byte of the division result register can be stored in the predetermined storage means (in steps S949 to S952 in Figure 182),
If the least significant byte of the division result register is "FFh", the least significant byte of the division result register is not stored in the predetermined storage means (step S949 in Figure 182).
It is characterized by the following:
According to the original invention 1, division is performed without determining whether the divisor is "0" or not, thus simplifying and speeding up the program. Furthermore, even if the divisor is "0", the division result will not result in an error, so it is possible to obtain the division result even if the divisor becomes an abnormal value due to noise or the like.
Furthermore, since the values of the three bytes other than the least significant byte in the division result register are not considered, the processing can be simplified and sped up.

2. Original Invention 2
The initial invention 2 (eleventh embodiment) is,
Depending on the values stored in the predetermined storage means (RWM53, in particular the ratio data for addresses "F288h" to "F28Dh"), information regarding predetermined game history (ratios for six items, including the ratio of instructed prizes) can be displayed.
It comprises a dividend setting register, a divisor setting register, and a division result register (Figure 171),
The system is configured such that the division result is stored in the division result register by setting the dividend in the dividend setting register or setting the divisor in the divisor setting register.
The division result register consists of 4 bytes (Figure 172),
When the divisor setting register is set to "0", the division result register is configured to store "FFFFFFFFh".
Regardless of whether the three bytes of the division result register, excluding the least significant byte, are non-zero, the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is obtained (step S948 in Figure 182).
If the least significant byte of the division result register is a specific value other than "FFh", the least significant byte of the division result register can be stored in the predetermined storage means (in steps S949 to S952 in Figure 182),
If the least significant byte of the division result register is "FFh", the least significant byte of the division result register is not stored in the predetermined storage means (step S949 in Figure 182).
It is characterized by the following:
According to the original invention 2, even if the divisor is "0", the division result will not result in an error. Therefore, even if the divisor becomes an abnormal value due to noise or the like, it is possible to obtain the division result.
Furthermore, since the values of the three bytes other than the least significant byte in the division result register are not considered, the processing can be simplified and sped up.

3. Original Invention 3
Initially, Invention 3 (Eleventh Embodiment) is,
Depending on the values stored in the predetermined storage means (RWM53, in particular the ratio data for addresses "F288h" to "F28Dh"), information regarding predetermined game history (ratios for six items, including the ratio of instructed prizes) can be displayed.
It comprises a dividend setting register, a divisor setting register, and a division result register (Figure 171),
The system is configured such that the division result is stored in the division result register by setting the dividend in the dividend setting register or the divisor in the divisor setting register.
The division result register consists of 4 bytes (Figure 172).
When the divisor setting register is set to "0", the division result register is configured to store "FFFFFFFFh".
The value stored in the predetermined storage means can be updated (step S953 in Figure 182),
If the least significant byte of the division result register is a specific value other than "FFh", the least significant byte of the division result register can be stored in the predetermined storage means (in steps S949 to S952 in Figure 182),
If the least significant byte of the division result register is "FFh", the value stored in the predetermined storage means is not updated (step S949 in Figure 182).
It is characterized by the following:
According to the original invention 3, even if the divisor is "0", the division result will not result in an error. Therefore, even if the divisor becomes an abnormal value due to noise or the like, it is possible to obtain the division result.
Furthermore, since the values of the three bytes other than the least significant byte in the division result register are not considered, the processing can be simplified and sped up.

4. Original Invention 4
Initially, Invention 4 (Eleventh Embodiment) is,
Depending on the values stored in the predetermined storage means (RWM53, in particular the ratio data for addresses "F288h" to "F28Dh"), information regarding predetermined game history (ratios for six items, including the ratio of instructed prizes) can be displayed.
It comprises a dividend setting register, a divisor setting register, a division result register, and a remainder result register (Figure 171),
The system is configured such that the division result is stored in the division result register and the remainder result register by setting the dividend in the dividend setting register or the divisor in the divisor setting register.
The division result register consists of 4 bytes (Figure 172),
The remainder result register consists of 4 bytes (Figure 172).
Regardless of the value stored in the remainder result register, the value stored in the predetermined storage means can be updated according to the value of the least significant byte in the division result register (Figure 182).
The system can display information related to a predetermined game history corresponding to a value stored in the predetermined storage means (step S960 in Figure 184, step S963 in Figure 185, and Figure 188).
It is characterized by the following:
According to the original invention 4, the value of the three bytes other than the least significant byte of the division result register is not judged, thus simplifying and speeding up the processing.

5. Original Invention 5
Initially, Invention 5 (Eleventh Embodiment) is,
Depending on the values stored in the predetermined storage means (RWM53, in particular the ratio data for addresses "F288h" to "F28Dh"), information regarding predetermined game history (ratios for six items, including the ratio of instructed prizes) can be displayed.
It comprises a dividend setting register, a divisor setting register, and a division result register (Figure 171),
The system is configured such that the division result is stored in the division result register by setting the dividend in the dividend setting register or the divisor in the divisor setting register.
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value is "100 (decimal)", the obtained value is corrected to "99 (decimal)" and made available for storage in the predetermined storage means (steps S950 to S953 in Figure 182).
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value exceeds "100 (decimal)" and is not "255 (decimal)", the obtained value can be stored in the predetermined storage means without correction (steps S950 to S953 in Figure 182).
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value is "255 (decimal)", the obtained value is not stored in the predetermined storage means (in step S949 in Figure 182).
The system can display information related to a predetermined game history corresponding to a value stored in the predetermined storage means (step S960 in Figure 184, step S963 in Figure 185, and Figure 188).
It is characterized by the following:
According to the original invention 5, the value of the three bytes other than the least significant byte of the division result register is not judged, thus simplifying and speeding up the processing.
Furthermore, if the value of the least significant byte in the division result register exceeds "100 (decimal)" and is not "255 (decimal)", the value is displayed as information related to the predetermined game history without correction, making it possible to determine whether or not the information related to the predetermined game history is an abnormal value.

6. Original Invention 6
Initially, Invention 6 (Eleventh Embodiment) is,
Depending on the values stored in the predetermined storage means (RWM53, in particular the ratio data for addresses "F288h" to "F28Dh"), information regarding predetermined game history (ratios for six items, including the ratio of instructed prizes) can be displayed.
It comprises a dividend setting register, a divisor setting register, and a division result register (Figure 171),
The system is configured such that the division result is stored in the division result register by setting the dividend in the dividend setting register or setting the divisor in the divisor setting register.
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value is "100 (decimal)", the obtained value is corrected to "99 (decimal)" and made available for storage in the predetermined storage means (steps S950 to S953 in Figure 183).
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value exceeds "100 (decimal)" and is not "255 (decimal)", the obtained value is corrected to "99 (decimal)" and made available for storage in the predetermined storage means (steps S950 to S953 in Figure 183).
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value is "255 (decimal)", the obtained value is not stored in the predetermined storage means (in step S949 in Figure 183).
The system can display information related to a predetermined game history corresponding to a value stored in the predetermined storage means (step S960 in Figure 184, step S963 in Figure 185, and Figure 188).
It is characterized by the following:
According to the initial invention 6, the value of the three bytes other than the least significant byte of the division result register is not judged, thus simplifying and speeding up the processing.
Furthermore, even if the value of the least significant byte in the division result register is an abnormal value, information regarding the predetermined game history can be displayed within the range of "00" to "99".

7. Original Invention 7
Initially, Invention 7 (Eleventh Embodiment) is,
Depending on the values stored in the predetermined storage means (RWM53, in particular the ratio data for addresses "F288h" to "F28Dh"), information regarding predetermined game history (ratios for six items, including the ratio of instructed prizes) can be displayed.
It comprises a dividend setting register, a divisor setting register, and a division result register (Figure 171),
The system is configured such that the division result is stored in the division result register by setting the dividend in the dividend setting register or the divisor in the divisor setting register.
If a power outage occurs, the dividend setting register and divisor setting register are reset to their initial values (initialization of the multiplication and division registers in Figure 173).
Even if the power supply voltage meets the conditions for executing a power-off process during the period between the process of setting the dividend in the dividend setting register and the process of setting the divisor in the divisor setting register (hereinafter referred to as "the said period"), the power-off process will not be executed during the said period (Figure 182).
It is characterized by the following:
According to the original invention 7, since no power-off process is performed between the process of setting the dividend in the dividend setting register and the process of setting the divisor in the divisor setting register, even if a power-off event occurs between the process of setting the dividend in the dividend setting register and the process of setting the divisor in the divisor setting register, the division result can be stored in the division result register.

8. Original Invention 8
Initially, Invention 8 (Eleventh Embodiment) was,
Depending on the values stored in the predetermined storage means (RWM53, in particular the ratio data for addresses "F288h" to "F28Dh"), information regarding predetermined game history (ratios for six items, including the ratio of instructed prizes) can be displayed.
It comprises a dividend setting register, a divisor setting register, and a division result register (Figure 171),
The system is configured such that the division result is stored in the division result register by setting the dividend in the dividend setting register or the divisor in the divisor setting register.
If a power outage occurs, the dividend setting register and the divisor setting register are initialized (initialization of the multiplication and division registers in Figure 173).
After the process of setting the dividend in the dividend setting register and the process of setting the divisor in the divisor setting register are executed, and before the value stored in the division result register is retrieved (hereinafter referred to as "the said period"), even if the power supply voltage meets the conditions for executing a power-off process, the power-off process will not be executed during the said period (Figure 182).
It is characterized by the following:
According to the initial invention 8, after the process of setting the dividend in the dividend setting register and the process of setting the divisor in the divisor setting register are executed, and before the value stored in the division result register is retrieved, the power cut-off process is not executed. Therefore, even if an event occurs in which the power is cut off after the process of setting the dividend in the dividend setting register and the process of setting the divisor in the divisor setting register are executed, and before the value stored in the division result register is retrieved, the division result can still be stored in the division result register.

9. Original Invention 9
Initially, Invention 9 (Eleventh Embodiment) is,
It is equipped with a predetermined display device (payout ratio monitor 74) capable of displaying information related to predetermined game history (ratios of six items including instruction payout ratios),
After power is turned on, during a predetermined period (approximately 5 seconds) until the predetermined display unit displays information related to the predetermined game history, a test pattern is made available on the predetermined display unit (in steps S1025, S1026, and S1052 in Figure 188).
If a recovery error occurs and the power is cut off, and then the power is turned on and the system does not enter the settings change mode, a test pattern will be displayed, and then information regarding a predetermined game history will be made available (in step S2721 in Figure 178).
If the power is cut off while an unrecoverable error has occurred, and the system does not enter configuration change mode after the power is restored, the test pattern will not be displayed (step S2801 in Figure 178).
It is characterized by the following:
According to the initial invention 9, it is possible to determine whether or not an irrecoverable error occurred before the power was cut off by checking whether or not a test pattern is present after power is turned on.

10. Original Invention 10
The initial invention 10 (11th embodiment) is,
It is equipped with a predetermined display device (payout ratio monitor 74) capable of displaying information related to predetermined game history (ratios of six items including instruction payout ratios),
After power is turned on, during a predetermined period (approximately 5 seconds) until the predetermined display unit displays information related to the predetermined game history, a test pattern is made available on the predetermined display unit (in steps S1025, S1026, and S1052 in Figure 188).
In the test pattern, all segments of the predetermined display are made to blink (in step S1025 in Figure 188),
When a predetermined condition is met in the display device that shows information related to a predetermined game history, at least a portion of the information related to the predetermined game history is made to flash (in Figure 188, steps S1050 to S1052).
The flashing cycle of the test pattern is the same as the flashing cycle when at least a portion of the information related to a predetermined game history is displayed (step S1050 in Figure 188).
It is characterized by the following:
According to the initial invention 10, the program for flashing a test pattern and the program for flashing information related to a predetermined game history can be used together, thus reducing the program capacity.

10. Slot machines (amusement machines)
10a Lower panel 11 Power switch 12 Front door 12c Control panel 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c Top plate 13d Side plate 14 Pattern display device 15 Coin dispensing device 16 Coin dispensing slot 17 Door switch 18 Display window 19 Coin tray 21 Performance lamp (decorative lamp section)
22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Operation button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 35a Storage receiving port 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Dispensing sensor 40a 1-bet switch 40b 3-bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Aisle sensor 47 Coin insertion port 50 Main control board (main control means)
51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU (Main Chip)
61 Role selection means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Performance group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED
74. Management Information Display LED (Ratio Monitor)
75 Display board 76 Credit count display LED
77 Advantageous period display LED
78 Obtained number display LED
79 Status Indicator LED
79a 1-bed indicator LED
79b 2-bed indicator LED
79c 3-bed LED display
79d Game start display LED
79e Loading display LED
79f Replay Display LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 Sub-CPU
86 Push button 87 Cross key 91 Performance output control means 110 Medal selector 111 Medal passage 111a Vertical part 111b Inclined part 111c Entrance 111d Exit 112 Gap 113 Selector base 120 Chute member 121 Medal guidance passage 122 Bottom part 123 Inner wall part 124 Outer wall part 125 Stepped part 126 Fixing part 127 Screw 130 Return member 131 Return receiving opening 132 Medal return passage 133 Dispensing receiving opening 134 Medal dispensing passage 135 Upper edge part 140 Blocking member 151 Setting key insertion opening 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 154 Setting key cylinder 160 Door key cylinder 160a Door key insertion slot 161 Outer cylinder 161a Notch 162 Inner cylinder 170 Locking device 171 Cam 171a Projection 171b Projection 172 Moving member 172a Driven member 172b Detection piece 172c Hook 173 Moving member 173a Driven member 173b Hook 173c Hook 173d Opening 173e Stopper 174 Driven part 175 Door sensor 176 Coil spring 177 Coil spring 178 Coil spring 179 Fixing member 200 Hall computer CK Setting key DK Door key DK1 Projection DK2 Keyway PP Power plug PP1 Cord PP2 Plug PP3 Plug blade

Claims (1)

The system can display information related to a predetermined game history according to a value stored in a predetermined storage means.
It comprises a dividend setting register, a divisor setting register, and a division result register.
The system is configured such that the division result is stored in the division result register by setting the dividend in the dividend setting register or the divisor in the divisor setting register.
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value is "100 (decimal)", the obtained value is corrected to "99 (decimal)" and made available for storage in the predetermined storage means.
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value exceeds "100 (decimal)" and is not "255 (decimal)", the obtained value is corrected to "99 (decimal)" and made available for storage in the predetermined storage means.
The least significant byte of the division result register is obtained, and if the obtained value is "255 (decimal)", the obtained value is not stored in the predetermined storage means.
A gaming machine characterized by being able to display information relating to a predetermined game history corresponding to a value stored in the predetermined storage means.